3 com com ref

http://www.3com.com/

3Com Router Command Reference Guide

3Com Router 3000 DSL Family3Com Router 5000 Family3Com Router 6000 Family

Part No. 10014369Published June 2004

3Com Corporation350 Campus DriveMarlborough, MA01752-3064

Copyright © 2004, 3Com Corporation. All rights reserved. No part of this documentation may be reproduced in any form or by any means or used to make any derivative work (such as translation, transformation, or adaptation) without written permission from 3Com Corporation.

3Com Corporation reserves the right to revise this documentation and to make changes in content from time to time without obligation on the part of 3Com Corporation to provide notification of such revision or change.

3Com Corporation provides this documentation without warranty, term, or condition of any kind, either implied or expressed, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties, terms or conditions of merchantability, satisfactory quality, and fitness for a particular purpose. 3Com may make improvements or changes in the product(s) and/or the program(s) described in this documentation at any time.

If there is any software on removable media described in this documentation, it is furnished under a license agreement included with the product as a separate document, in the hard copy documentation, or on the removable media in a directory file named LICENSE.TXT or!LICENSE.TXT. If you are unable to locate a copy, please contact 3Com and a copy will be provided to you.

UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT LEGEND

If you are a United States government agency, then this documentation and the software described herein are provided to you subject to the following:

All technical data and computer software are commercial in nature and developed solely at private expense. Software is delivered as “Commercial Computer Software” as defined in DFARS 252.227-7014 (June 1995) or as a “commercial item” as defined in FAR 2.101(a) and as such is provided with only such rights as are provided in 3Com’s standard commercial license for the Software. Technical data is provided with limited rights only as provided in DFAR 252.227-7015 (Nov 1995) or FAR 52.227-14 (June 1987), whichever is applicable. You agree not to remove or deface any portion of any legend provided on any licensed program or documentation contained in, or delivered to you in conjunction with, this User Guide.

Unless otherwise indicated, 3Com registered trademarks are registered in the United States and may or may not be registered in other countries.

3Com and the 3Com logo are registered trademarks of 3Com Corporation.

Intel and Pentium are registered trademarks of Intel Corporation. Microsoft, MS-DOS, Windows, and Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Novell and NetWare are registered trademarks of Novell, Inc.

All other company and product names may be trademarks of the respective companies with which they are associated.

CONTENTS

ABOUT THIS GUIDE

Conventions 7Related Documentation 8

1 CONFIGURATION COMMANDS

Basic Configuration Commands 9

2 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE & MANAGEMENT COMMANDS

debugging 23Information Processing Commands 31System Operating Management Commands - AR46 Series 48File Management Commands 55FTP Server Configuration Commands 65FTP client module commands 69TFTP Configuration Commands 79Configuration Files Management Commands 81User Interface Configuration Commands 86debugging ntp-service 102SNMP Configuration Commands 115Terminal Service Commands 134SSH Configuration Commands 136

3 INTERFACE MANAGEMENT COMMANDS

Interface Management Commands 149Fundamental Ethernet Interface Configuration Commands 154Fundamental WAN Interface Configuration Commands 158Fundamental CE1/PRI Interface Configuration Commands 165Fundamental CT1/PRI Interface Configuration Commands 172E1-F Interface Configuration Commands 178T1-F Interface Configuration Commands 183Fundamental CE3 Interface Configuration Commands 188Fundamental CT3 Interface Configuration Commands 196ATM E3/T3 Interface Configuration Commands 205ATM 25M Interface Configuration Commands 209ATM OC-3c/STM-1 Interface Configuration Commands 210G.SHDSL Interface Configuration Commands 213ADSL Interface Configuration Commands 219

Fundamental Logical Interface Configuration Commands 227Logic-Channel Interface 229Configuration Command of Virtual Template and Virtual Access Interface 230MP-group Interface Configuration Command 232Virtual Ethernet Interface Configuration Command 234Configuration Command of Loopback Interface and Null Interface 236

4 LINK LAYER PROTOCOL

PPP and MP Configuration Commands 239PPPoE Server Configuration Commands 253PPPoE Client Configuration Commands 256VLAN Configuration Commands 260ISDN Configuration Commands 264SLIP Configuration Commands 288HDLC Configuration Commands 289Frame Relay Configuration Commands 291ATM Configuration Commands 324LAPB and X.25 Configuration Commands 350

5 NETWORK PROTOCOL

IP Address Configuration Commands 397ARP Configuration Commands 401Static Domain Name Resolution 404DHCP Public Configuration Commands 405DHCP Server Configuration Commands 408DHCP Client Configuration Commands 433DHCP Relay Configuration Commands 436IP Performance Configuration Commands 440NAT Configuration Commands 460IP Unicast Policy Routing Configuration Commands 467IP Multicast Policy Routing Configuration Commands 474IPX Configuration Commands 479DLSw Configuration Commands 506

6 ROUTING PROTOCOL

Display Commands of the Routing Table 533Static Route Configuration Commands 543RIP Configuration Commands 545OSPF Configuration Commands 560Integrated IS-IS Configuration Commands 599BGP Configuration Commands 626MBGP Configuration Commands 664IP Routing Policy Configuration Commands 667Route Capacity Configuration Commands 681

7 MULTICAST COMMON CONFIGURATION COMMANDS

Multicast Common Configuration Commands 687IGMP Configuration Commands 697PIM Configuration Commands 708MSDP Configuration Commands 725MBGP Multicast Extension Configuration Commands 740Multicast Static Route Configuration Commands 753

8 MPLS BASIC CONFIGURATION COMMANDS

Basic Configuration Commands 759LDP Configuration Commands 769BGP/MPLS VPN Configuration Commands 780MPLS L2VPN CCC Configuration Commands 802SVC MPLS L2VPN Configuration Commands 807Martini MPLS L2VPN Configuration Commands 808Kompella MPLS L2VPN Configuration Commands 809MPLS TE Configuration Commands 815

Conventions 7

ABOUT THIS GUIDE

This guide describes the 3Com® Router Commands as implemeted through the Command Line Interface (CLI) of the router.

This guide is intended for the system or network administrator who is responsible for configuring, using, and managing the routers. It assumes a working knowledge of wide area network (WAN) operations and familiarity with communication protocols that are used to interconnect WANs.

Always download the Release Notes for your product from the 3Com World Wide Web site for the latest updates to product documentation:

http://www.3com.com

Conventions Table 1 and Table 2 list conventions that are used throughout this guide.

Table 1 Notice Icons

Table 2 Text Conventions

Icon Notice Type Description

Information note Information that describes important features or instructions.

Caution Information that alerts you to potential loss of data or potential damage to an application, system, or device.

Warning Information that alerts you to potential personal injury.

Convention Description

Screen displays

This typeface represents information as it appears on the screen.

Keyboard key names

If you must press two or more keys simultaneously, the key names are linked with a plus sign (+), for example:

Press Ctrl+Alt+Del

The words “enter” and type”

When you see the word “enter” in this guide, you must type something, and then press Return or Enter. Do not press Return or Enter when an instruction simply says “type.”

8 CHAPTER : ABOUT THIS GUIDE

Related Documentation

The following manuals offer additional information necessary for managing your 3Com Router:

■ 3Com Router 3000 DSL, 3Com Router 5000, and 3Com Router 6000 Family Installation Guides — Provides detailed descriptions of each of the individual router families and specific information on installing the routers.

■ 3Com Router Configuration Guide— Describes how to configure your Router 6000 using the supported protocols and CLI commands.

■ Release Notes — Contains the latest information about your product. If information in this guide differs from information in the release notes, use the information in the Release Notes.

These documents are available in Adobe Acrobat Reader Portable Document Format (PDF) on the CD-ROM that accompanies your router or on the 3Com World Wide Web site:

http://www.3com.com/

Words in italics Italics are used to:

Emphasize a point.

Denote a new term at the place where it is defined in the text.

Identify menu names, menu commands, and software button names. Examples:

From the Help menu, select Contents.

Click OK.

Words in bold Boldface type is used to highlight command names in text. For example, “Use the display user-interface command to...”

1 CONFIGURATION COMMANDS

This chapter describes how to use the following commands:

Basic Configuration Commands

■ Clock Summer Times

■ clock datetime

■ clock timezone

■ command-privilege

■ display clipboard

■ display clock

■ display history-command

■ display version

■ header3Com

■ hotkey

■ language-mode

■ lock

■ quit

■ Reboot

■ return

■ super

■ super password

■ sysname

■ system-view


Clock Summer Times Syntax

clock summer-time zone_name { absolute | recurring } HH:MM:SS YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SSundo clock summer-time

View

User view

10 CHAPTER 1: CONFIGURATION COMMANDS

Parameter

zone_name: Name of the summer time, which is a character string of 1 to 32 characters.absolute: Only sets the summer time of some year.recurring: Sets the summer time of every year starting from some year.HH:MM:SS: Time (hour/minute/second).YYYY/MM/DD: Date (year/month/day).

Description

■ Using the clock summer-time command, you can set the name, starting and ending time of the summer time. Using the undo clock summer-time command, you can remove the configuration of the summer time.

■ After the configuration takes effect, you can use the display clock command to make the verification. Besides, the time of the log or debug information will be the local time on which the adjustment of the time zone and summer time has been made.

For related command, see clock timezone.

Example

Add one hour to the clock for the summer time z2 that starts at 06:00:00 on 2002/06/08 and ends at 06:00:00 on 2002/09/01.

<3Com> clock summer-time z2 absolute 06:00:00 2002/06/08 06:00:00 2002/09/01 01:00:00# Add one hour to the clock each year starting from 2002 for the summer time z2 that starts at 06:00:00 on 08/06 and ends at 06:00:00 on 01/09.<3Com> clock summer-time z2 recurring 06:00:00 2002/06/08 06:00:00 2002/09/01 01:00:00

clock datetime Syntax

clock datetime HH:MM:SS YYYY/MM/DD

View

User view

ParameterHH:MM:SS: Time (hour/minute/second).YYYY/MM/DD: Date (year/month/day) in the range of 1993 to 2035.

Description

Using the clock datetime command, you can set the time and date.

After the configuration takes effect, you can verify it by executing the display clock command. The time applied to the log and debug information has been adjusted.


Example

Set the current system time to 10:20:55 2003/04/05.<3Com> clock datetime 10:20:55 2003/04/05

clock timezone Syntaxclock timezone zone_name { add | minus } HH:MM:SSundo clock timezone

View

User view

Parameterzone_name: Timezone name, which is a string of 1 to 32 characters.add: Adds the time on the basis of Universal Time Coordinated (UTC) timezone.minus: Reduces the time on the basis of UTC timezone.HH:MM:SS: Time (hour/minute/second).

Description

Using the clock timezone command, you can set information of the local timezone. Using the undo clock timezone command, you can restore the local timezone to the default UTC timezone.

After the configuration takes effect, you can view it by executing the display clock command. The time applied to the log and debug information has been adjusted according to the involved timezone and summer time.

For related command, see clock summer-time.

Example

Set the local timezone name to Z5 and set Z5 to be five hours faster than UTC time.

<3Com> clock timezone z5 add 05:00:00

command-privilege Syntaxcommand-privilege level level view view command-key undo command-privilege view view command-key

View

System view

Parameterlevel level: Command priority ranging from 0 to 3. view view: View. The command line provides the following views:

1 shell: View of current user level.

2 system: System view

3 Routing protocol view: Include ospf (OSPF view), rip (RIP view), bgp (BGP view), isis (IS-IS view), etc.


4 Interface view: Include ethernet (FE), gigabitethernet (GE), serial (serial interface), ce1 (cE1 interface), ce3 (E3 interface), ct1 (cT1 interface), atm (ATM interface), pos (POS interface), virtual-template (virtual interface template), virtual-ethernet (virtual Ethernet interface), loopback (Loopback interface), null (Null interface), tunnel (Tunnel interface).

5 user-interface: User view

6 l2tp-group: System view of L2TP group.

7 route-policy: Route map view

Refer to "Command Line Views" section in the Operation Manual for more details.

commandkey: Command to be set.

Description

Using the command-privilege command, you can set the command level in the specified view. Using the undo command-privilege view command, you can remove current settings.

Command priority fall into such 4 levels as access, monitor, configure and manage that are identified with 0 to 3. The administrator can grant certain rights to a user on its demand so that the user can operate in the related view. When the user logging in, the system can set the command operation rights for it either according to the rights corresponding to the user name, or based on the rights of the user-interface. If the two sets of rights conflict, the minimum rights will be adopted.

By default, the command level of the ping, tracert and telnet commands is access (level 0), the command level of the display and debugging commands is monitor (level 1), that of configuration commands is configure (level 2), and the commands for user key setting, FTP, XMODEM, TFTP and file system operation fit into commands of manage-level (level 3).

Example

Set the priority of the “interface” command to 0. [3Com] command-privilege level 0 view system interface

display clipboard Syntaxdisplay clipboard

View

Any view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the display clipboard command, you can display the contents of clipboard.


Example

Display the contents of clipboard.

<3Com> display clipboard-----------------clipboard ----------------- ip route 10.1.0.0 255.0.0.0 eth 0

display clock Syntaxdisplay clock

View

Any view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the display clock command, you can display the clock status and the configuration information.

Example

Display the current time.

<3Com> display clock19:22:03 UTC Sat 2054/03/07

displayhistory-command

Syntaxdisplay history-command

View

Any view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the display history-command command, you can browse the history commands.

The terminal will automatically save the history commands typed by the user, that is, completely record the user's input (via keyboard) separated by "Enter".

For the related command, see history-command size.

Example

Display history commands.

<3Com> display history-commandshow interface


show interface e 1/0/0cin e 1/0/0

display version Syntaxdisplay version

View

Any view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the display version command, you can browse system version information.

Through viewing system version information, you will learn about the software version in use, rack type and the information related to the main processing board and interface cards.

Example

Display system version information of a 3Com R1760 router.

<3Com> display version3Com Versatile Routing Platform SoftwareVRP(tm) software, Version 3.30Copyright (c) 2000-2002 3Com Corporation.3Com Serial Router R1760System has kept running 0weeks, 0days, 0hours, 15minutes CPU type Powerpc8241 166Mhz 64M bytes SDRAM 8M bytes Flash Memory Pcb Version:001 Logic Version:001 BootROM Version:0.0Slot0: WAN (pcb)001 (software)000 (logic)001

header3Com Syntaxheader [ shell | incoming | login ] textundo header [ shell | incoming | login ]

View

System view

Parameter

login: Greeting information when login.

shell: Greeting information of the creation of a user session.

incoming: Greeting information when login to the user view.


text: Content of greeting information.

Description

Using the header command, you can set the greeting information to be displayed. Using the undo header command, you can remove the preset greeting information.

When a user is logging on to a router via a terminal line, the router prompts related information through setting title attribute. After activating the terminal connection, the router sends the login title to the terminal. If the user log on to the router successfully, the shell greeting information will be displayed.

text takes the first English character as the start and end characters. After the end character is input, the system will quit the interactive process automatically.

If you do not want to start the interactive process, make sure that the first and last characters of the text are the same English character and press <Enter> directly.

Example

Configure a session creation title.

[3Com] header shell %Enter TEXT message. End with the character '%'.SHELL : Hello! Welcome use 3Com R1760.%# Test the configuration. [3Com] quit<3Com> quitPress RETURN to get started

SHELL : Hello! Welcome use 3Com R1760.<3Com>

hotkey Syntaxhotkey [ CTRL_G | CTRL_L | CTRL_O | CTRL_T | CTRL_U ] command_textundo hotkey [ CTRL_G | CTRL_L | CTRL_O | CTRL_T | CTRL_U ]

View

System view

Parameter

CTRL_G: Specify a command for the hotkey <CTRL+G>.

CTRL_L: Specify a command for the hotkey <CTRL+L>.

CTRL_O: Specify a command for the hotkey <CTRL+O>.

CTRL_T: Specify a command for the hotkey <CTRL+T>.

CTRL_U: Specify a command for the hotkey <CTRL+U>.

command_text: The command line correlated with the hotkey.


DescriptionUsing the hotkey command, you can correlate a command line with a hotkey. Using the undo hotkey command, you can recover the default value of the system.

By default, CTRL_G, CTRL_L and CTRL_O correspond to the following commands respectively:

display current-configuration (display current configuration);display ip routing-table (display routing table information);undo debugging all (disable the overall debugging function, that is, disable the output of all debugging information).

You can change the definitions on your demand. The default values for the other hotkeys are null.

ExampleCorrelate the display tcp status command with the hotkey CTRL_T.[3Com] hotkey ctrl_t display tcp status[3Com] display hotkey----------------- HOTKEY -----------------

=Defined hotkeys=Hotkeys CommandCTRL_G display current-configurationCTRL_L display ip routing-tableCTRL_O undo debug allCTRL_T display tcp status

=Undefined hotkeys=Hotkeys CommandCTRL_U NULL

=System hotkeys=Hotkeys FunctionCTRL_A Move the cursor to the beginning of the current line.CTRL_B Move the cursor one character left.CTRL_C Stop current command function.CTRL_D Erase current character.CTRL_E Move the cursor to the end of the current line.CTRL_F Move the cursor one character right.CTRL_H Erase the character left of the cursor.CTRL_K Kill outgoing connection.CTRL_N Display the next command from the history buffer.CTRL_P Display the previous command from the history buffer.CTRL_R Redisplay the current line.CTRL_V Paste text from the clipboard.CTRL_W Delete the word left of the cursor.CTRL_X Delete all characters up to the cursor.CTRL_Y Delete all characters after the cursor.CTRL_Z Return to the user view.CTRL_] Kill incoming connection or redirect connection.ESC_B Move the cursor one word back.ESC_D Delete remainder of word.ESC_F Move the cursor forward one word.ESC_N Move the cursor down a line.ESC_P Move the cursor up a line.


ESC_< Specify the beginning of clipboard.ESC_> Specify the end of clipboard.

language-mode Syntaxlanguage-mode { chinese | english }

View

User view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the language-mode command, you can switch between different language modes of command line interface.

By default, the language mode is English.

The command line interface of the system also supports Chinese mode to fit into domestic users in China.

Example

Switch from English mode to Chinese mode. <3Com> language-mode chineseChange language mode, confirm? [Y/N]y% Switch to Chinese mode.

lock Syntaxlock

View

User view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the lock command, you can lock the active user interface to prevent unauthorized user from operating the interface.

A user interface includes CON port, AUX port and VTY, etc.

After inputting the lock command, the user is prompted to enter the screensaver's password and confirm the password. If the two passwords are the same, the interface will be successfully locked. To enter the system once again, you must press <Enter> first, and enter the preset password following the prompt.

Example

Log in from the CON port and lock the active user interface.


<3Com> lockPassword: Again:

quit Syntaxquit

View

Any view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the quit command, you can quit from the active view to a lower-level view (if the active view is user view, you will exit the system).

Views fall into three levels that are, in ascending order:

■ User view (with user level as 0)

■ System view (with user level as 3)

■ Configuration view (routing protocol view, interface view, VPDN group view, etc)

For the related command, see return.

Example

Switch from Ethernet1/0/0 interface view to system view, and then to user view.

[3Com-Ethernet1/0/0] quit[3Com] quit<3Com>

Reboot Syntaxreboot

View

User view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the reboot command, you can reboot the device.

This command produces the same effect as the power is turned on and then on, but provides the user with a convenient method of rebooting the device from a remote site.


The operation of this command will render the network unusable for a short period of time. So it should be used with caution. Before rebooting the Router, remember to save the configuration file if necessary,

Example

Reboot the device.

<3Com> rebootSystem will reboot! Continue?[Y/N]

return Syntaxreturn

View

Any view, except user view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the return command, you can return to user view from any other views. The combination key <Ctrl+Z> performs the same function as the return command.

For the related command, see quit.

Example

Return to user view from system view.

[3Com] return<3Com>

super Syntaxsuper [ level ]

View

User view

Parameter

Level: User level ranging from 0 to 3.

Description

Using the super command, you can switch from current user level to a specified level.

User level refers to the class of a login user. There are 4 user levels corresponding to 4 command levels. After a user of certain level logs in, it can only use the commands of the same or lower level.

There are 4 command levels, namely access, monitor, configure and manage, as follows:


■ Access: Include the network diagnosis tool commands (ping, tracert), commands for accessing an external device from local device (including Telnet client, SSH client, RLOGIN), etc. Commands of this level cannot perform configuration file saving operation.

■ Monitor: Commands used for system maintenance, service fault diagnosis and so on, including the display and debugging commands. Commands of this level cannot perform configuration file saving operation.

■ Configure: Service configuration commands, including routing commands and commands of various network layers. Commands of this level provide direct network services for users.

■ Manage: Commands related to basic system running and system support modules. These commands provide support for various services. Commands of this level include file system, FTP, TFTP, Xmodem download and configuration file switchover commands, power control commands, standby board control commands, user management commands, level setting commands, system internal parameter setting commands (not being provided in protocols or RFC documentation), etc.

To prevent unauthorized users from intruding the system, you must pass the authentication when you are trying to switch from current user to a higher-level user. This means that you must enter the password of the higher-level user (if the super password [ level user-level ] { simple | cipher } line command is configured). For the sake of security, your entered password is not directly displayed on the screen. If you enter the correct password within three times, you will be able to switch to the higher-level user, or you will stay at current level.

For the related command, see super password.

Example<3Com> super 3Password:User privilege changes to 3 level, just equal or less this level'scommands can be used.Privilege note: 0-VISIT, 1-MONITOR, 2-SYSTEM, 3-MANAGE

super password Syntaxsuper password [ level user-level ] { simple | cipher } passwordundo super password [ level user-level ]

View

System view

Parameter

user-level: User level ranging from 0 to 3.

simple: Configure simple text password.

cipher: Configure cipher text password.


password: Content of password. A simple text password is a consecutive character string with the length no more than 16, such as 1234567. A cipher text password has 24 characters in length, and is in the format of "_(TT8F]Y\5SQ=^Q`MAF4<1!!".

Description

Using the super password command, you can set the password need to switch from a lower-level user to a higher-level user. Using the undo super password command, you can remove the current setting.

By default, simple text password is adopted.

Example

Execute the following command in system view: [3Com] super password level 3 simple zbr

sysname Syntaxsysname sysname

View

System view

Parameter

sysname: Name of the router. It is a character string containing 1 to 30 characters.

Description

Using the sysname command, you can set the name of a router.

By default, a router is named "3Com".

Modification to a router's name will affect the prompt of the command line interface. For example, if the router's name is "3Com", the prompt of user view will be "<3Com>".

Example

Set the name of the router to R1760.

[3Com] sysname R1760[R1760]

system-view Syntaxsystem-view

View

User view

Parameter

None


Description

Using the system-view command, you can enter system view from current user view.

For the related command, see quit, return.

Example<3Com> system-viewEnter system view , return user view with Ctrl+Z.[3Com]

2 System Maintenance & Management Commands

Add Chapter introduction here. This information should ONLY be about what the chapter contains.

Network Test Tool Commands

debugging Syntax

debugging { all | module-name [ debug-option1 ] [ debug-option2 ] …}

undo debugging { all | module-name [ debug-option1 ] [ debug-option2 ] … }

View

User view

Parameter

all: Enables or disables all the debugging switches.

module-name: Module name.

debug-option: Debugging option.

Description

Using the debug command, you can enable system debugging. Using the undo debug command, you can disable system debugging.

By default, the system disables all the debugging switches.

The router system provides a variety of debugging functions mainly for the support technicians and senior maintenance engineers to perform network fault diagnosis.

Enabling debugging will generate a large amount of debugging information that can result in decrease in system efficiency. This is especially the case when the command debugging all is executed to enable all the debugging switches. An extreme aftermath of doing so is the system paralysis. For these reasons, you are recommended not to use the command debugging all. On the contrary, using undo debugging all will bring you great convenience because you can disable all the debugging switches at a time rather than disabling them one by one.

For related command, see display debugging.

24 CHAPTER 2: SYSTEM MAINTENANCE & MANAGEMENT COMMANDS

Example

Enable IP packet debugging.

display debugging Syntax

display debugging [ interface interface-type interface-number] [ module-name ]

View

Any view

Parameter


interface-type: Interface type.

interface-number: Interface number.

Description

Using the display debugging command, you can display the enabled debugging switches.

By default, no parameters have been defined and all the enabled debugging switches are displayed.

For related command, see debugging.

Example

Display all the enabled debugging switches.

<3Com> display debuggingIP packet debugging switch is on.

displaydiagnostic-information

Syntaxdisplay diagnostic-information

View

Any view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the display diagnostic-information command, you can display the operating information of all the active modules of the system and collect all the information at a time so as to isolate the problem when failure occurs to the system.

debugging 25

In case failures occur to the system, lots of information needs to be collected for the convenience of isolating the problems. However, it is rather difficult for you to collect all the information at a time as there are many display commands involved. In this case, you can use the display diagnostic-information command to collect the operating information of all the active modules in the system.

Example

Display the technical support information.

<3Com> display diagnostic-information------------------ display version ------------------

3Com3Com Versatile Routing Platform SoftwareVRP 3600E Software Version VRPV3R001M06B03D003, DEBUG SOFTWARECopyright (c) 2000-2003 by VRP Team Beijing Institute 3Com Tech, IncCompiled Mar 24 2003 20:28:31 by zhaomin

------------------ display running-config ------------------# sysname 3Com#------------------ display history commands ------------------

display diagnostic-information

------------------ display tasks ------------------

ID Name Priority Status CPU Time 1 WEIL 10 Ready 10/20 2 SYST 180 Ready 0/7 3 XMON 140 Event Sem 0/0 4 VMON 140 Event Sem 41/41 5 INFO 100 Event Sem 1/6 6 co0 100 Ready 0/3178 7 LDP 100 Event Sem 1/299 8 LAGT 100 Queue Sem 0/1 9 Clon 100 Event Sem 0/0 10 ROUT 100 Event Sem 0/172 11 FIB 100 Event Sem 0/178 12 SOCK 100 Event Sem 0/47961 13 VTYD 100 Event Sem 0/25 14 IPSP 100 Event Sem 0/537 15 IKE 100 Event Sem 1/20 16 RSA 100 Event Sem 1/94 17 RDUS 100 Delay 1/1574 18 L2TP 100 Event Sem 0/14 19 TNLM 100 Event Sem 0/0 20 AGNT 100 Event Sem 0/4904 21 TRAP 100 Queue Sem 0/0 22 MDMT 100 Queue Sem 0/3 23 NTPT 100 Delay 0/7 24 PIMT 100 Delay 0/7 25 CFM 100 Queue Sem 363/1355 26 LSPM 100 Delay 0/414 27 L2V 100 Delay 0/6 28 VRRP 100 Event Sem 0/0


------------------ display memory ------------------

Slice Memory Usage:

Block Size 32 Free 960 Used 60134 Total 61094Block Size 64 Free 275 Used 29356 Total 29631Block Size 128 Free 9 Used 5882 Total 5891Block Size 256 Free 8 Used 1664 Total 1672Block Size 512 Free 1 Used 120 Total 121Block Size 1024 Free 58 Used 157 Total 215Block Size 2048 Free 5 Used 1547 Total 1552Block Size 4096 Free 1 Used 67 Total 68-----------------------------Summary--------------------------------Used(Byte) 8646848 Free 1317 Used 98927 Total 100244

Total Slice Memory(Include Control Data and Free Slice): 10742144 bytesRaw Slice Memory Usage: Total Size: 10501832 bytes Num: 77Total Raw Slice Memory(Include Control Data and Free Slice): 12606400 bytes

System Total Memory(bytes): 33541536

------------------ display interfaces ------------------

Atm1/0/0 is down , line protocol is downDescription : 3Com, 3Com Series, Atm1/0/0 InterfaceThe Maximum Transmit Unit is 1500Internet protocol processing : disabledAAL enabled: AAL5, Maximum VCs: 32Current VCs: 0 (0 on main interface) 5 minutes input rate 0.00 bytes/sec, 0.00 packets/sec 5 minutes output rate 0.00 bytes/sec, 0.00 packets/sec 0 packets input, 0 bytes 0 packets output, 0 bytes 0 input errors, 0 CRCs, 0 giants, 0 pads, 0 aborts,0 overflows 0 output errors, 0 underflows, 0 overflows

NULL0 is up , line protocol is up (spoofing)Description : 3Com, 3Com Series, NULL0 InterfaceThe Maximum Transmit Unit is 1500Internet protocol processing : disabled

Serial0/0/0 is down , line protocol is downDescription : 3Com, 3Com Series, Serial0/0/0 InterfaceThe Maximum Transmit Unit is 1500, The keepalive is 10(sec)Internet protocol processing : disabledEncapsulation is PPPLCP initialFIFO queuing: (Outbound queue:Size/Length/Discards)FIFO: 0/75/0Physical layer is synchronous,Baudrate is 64000 bps, Interface is no cable 5 minutes input rate 0.00 bytes/sec, 0.00 packets/sec 5 minutes output rate 0.00 bytes/sec, 0.00 packets/sec

debugging 27

0 packets input, 0 bytes, 0 no buffers 0 packets output, 0 bytes, 0 no buffers 0 input errors, 0 CRC, 0 frame errors 0 overrunners, 0 aborted sequences, 0 input no buffersDCD=DOWN DTR=DOWN DSR=DOWN RTS=DOWN CTS=DOWN

ping Syntax

ping [ -a X.X.X.X | -c count | -d | -h ttl_value | -i { interface-type interface-number } | ip | -n | - p pattern | -q | -r | -s packetsize | -t timeout | -v | vpn-instance vpn-instance-name ] * host

View

Any view

Parameter

-a X.X.X.X: Sets the source IP address where ICMP ECHO-REQUEST packets can be sent.

-c count: Times that ICMP ECHO-REQUEST packets are sent. It is ranging from 1 to 4294967295.

-d: Sets socket to DEBUG mode.

-h ttl_value: Sets the value of TTL_value, which is ranging from 1 to 255.

-i: Sets the interface for sending ICMP ECHO-REQUEST packets.

interface-type: Interface type

interface-number: Interface number

-n: Directly uses the host parameter as IP address without domain name resolution.

-p pattern: The filling byte of ICMP ECHO-REQUEST packet in hexadecimal format, with the value ranging from 0 to FFFFFFFF. For example, if the parameter is set to -p ff, the entire packet will be filled with ff.

-q: Displays statistic figures rather than details.

-r: Records routes.

-s packetsize: The length of ECHO-REQUEST packet (excluding IP and ICMP headers), which is in the range of 20 to 8100 bytes.

-t timeout: Timeout in milliseconds waiting for ECHO-RESPONSE upon completion of sending ECHO-REQUEST, in the range from 0 to 65535.

-v: Displays the received ICMP packets other than ECHO-RESPONSE packets.


vpn-instance vpn-instance-name: Sets the vpn-instance name of MPLS VPN to specify the VPN attribute configured in this ping command, that is, name of the associated vpn-instance created at the local.

host: Domain name or IP address of destination host.

ip: IP protocol is used.

Description

Using the ping command, you can check the IP network connection and whether the host is reachable.

If the above parameters have not been specified, the following default settings will be used:

An ECHO-REQUEST packet is sent for 5 times at most.

Socket is non-DEBUG mode.

Host is first regarded as an IP address. If it is not an IP address, domain name resolution will be performed.

The filling begins at 0x01 and increases gradually until 0x09 and then repeats.

All information including statistics is displayed.

Router is not recorded.

The length of ECHO-REQUEST packet is 56 bytes.

The timeout time waiting for an ECHO-RESPONSE packet is 2000ms.

The ICMP packets other than ECHO-RESPONSE packets are not displayed.

The parameter vpn-instance is not defined.

Following is the process of executing the ping command:

A host sends an ICMP ECHO-REQUEST to a destination. If the connection to the destination network is working normally, the destination host will be able to receive the ICMP ECHO-REQUEST packet and send an ICMP ECHO-REPLY packet back to the source host.

The ping command can be used to test the network for connection failure or network line quality problem. The output information includes:

The state of the reply that a destination has made to each ECHO-REQUEST. It will be “Request time out." if no reply has been received upon the expiration of the timeout time. Otherwise, the state information will include the bytes of the reply packet, packet sequence number, TTL, reply time etc.

The last statistic information includes the count of packets sent, the count of reply packets received, the percentage of the packets that have no reply, and the minimum, maximum, and average reply time settings.

debugging 29

If the network transmission is slow, you can appropriately prolong the timeout time waiting for reply.

For related command, see tracert.

Example

Check the reachability of the host at 202.38.160.244.

<3Com> ping 202.38.160.244ping 202.38.160.244 : 56 data bytes , press CTRL-C to breakReply from 202.38.160.244 : bytes=56 sequence=1 ttl=255 time = 1msReply from 202.38.160.244 : bytes=56 sequence=2 ttl=255 time = 2msReply from 202.38.160.244 : bytes=56 sequence=3 ttl=255 time = 1msReply from 202.38.160.244 : bytes=56 sequence=4 ttl=255 time = 3msReply from 202.38.160.244 : bytes=56 sequence=5 ttl=255 time = 2ms--202.38.160.244 ping statistics--5 packets transmitted5 packets received0% packet lossround-trip min/avg/max = 1/2/3 ms

reboot Syntax

reboot

View

User view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the reboot command, you can reboot the device.

This command produces the same effect as the power is turned off and then on, but provides the user with a convience method of rebooting the device from a remote site.

The operation of this command will render the network unusable for a short period of time. So it should be used with caution. Before rebooting the Router, remember to save the configuration file if necessary,.

Example

Reboot the device.

<3Com> rebootSystem will reboot! Continue?[Y/N]


tracert Syntax

tracert [ -a X.X.X.X | -f first_TTL | -m max_TTL | -p port | -q nqueries | vpn-instance vpn-instance-name | -w timeout ] * host

View

Any view

Parameter

-a: Specifies source IP address of the tracert packets, which is in the format of X.X.X.X and must be the address of a local interface.

-f: Tests the correctness of the –f switch with first_TTL specifying an initial TTL in the range of 0 to the maximum TTL.

-m: Tests the correctness of the –m switch with max_TTL specifying a maximum TTL which can be any TTL larger than the initial TTL.

-p: Tests the correctness of the –p switch with port being an integer specifying the port of the destination host. There is no need to change this option in normal circumstances.

-q: Tests the correctness of the –q switch with nqueries specifying the number of the query packets sent each time. It can be any integer larger than 0.

vpn-instance vpn-instance-name: Sets the vpn-instance name of MPLS VPN to specify the VPN attribute configured in this tracert command, that is, name of the associated vpn-instance created at the local.

-w timeout: Tests the correctness of the –w switch with timeout specifying the timeout time of IP packets. It is in seconds and can be any integer larger than 0.

host: IP address of the destination host.

Description

Using the tracert command, you can test the gateways that a packet sent by the host will pass by in order to reach the destination for the purpose of testing the reachability of a network connection and locating the position where faults occur on the network.

Given no parameters have been specified, by default,

The parameters –a and vpn-instance are omitted;

first_TTL is 1;

max_TTL is 30;

port is 33434;

nqueries is 3;

timeout is 5s.

Information Processing Commands 31

The tracert command is executed following this procedure: The system first sends a packet with TTL as 1 and the first hop returns an ICMP error message indicating that the packet cannot be transmitted due to TTL timeout. and then the system transmits the packet again with TTL being set to 2 and the second hop returns TTL timeout message similarly. This process continues until the packet reaches its destination. The purpose of such a process is to record the source addresses where these ICMP TTL timeout messages are sent so as to outline the path along which the IP packet can reach the destination.

When a network fault is detected by using the ping command, tracert can be used to locate the failure on the network.

The output information of the command tracert includes IP addresses of all the GWs along the path to the destination. If some GW times out, “***” will be output.

Example<3Com> tracert 18.26.0.115tracert to allspice.lcs.mit.edu (18.26.0.115), 30 hops max1 helios.ee.lbl.gov (128.3.112.1) 0 ms 0 ms 0 ms2 lilac-dmc.Berkeley.EDU (128.32.216.1) 19 ms 19 ms 19 ms3 lilac-dmc.Berkeley.EDU (128.32.216.1) 39 ms 19 ms 19 ms4 ccngw-ner-cc.Berkeley.EDU (128.32.136.23) 19 ms 39 ms 39 ms5 ccn-nerif22.Berkeley.EDU (128.32.168.22) 20 ms 39 ms 39 ms6 128.32.197.4 (128.32.197.4) 59 ms 119 ms 39 ms7 131.119.2.5 (131.119.2.5) 59 ms 59 ms 39 ms8 129.140.70.13 (129.140.70.13) 80 ms 79 ms 99 ms9 129.140.71.6 (129.140.71.6) 139 ms 139 ms 159 ms10 129.140.81.7 (129.140.81.7) 199 ms 180 ms 300 ms11 129.140.72.17 (129.140.72.17) 300 ms 239 ms 239 ms12 * * *13 128.121.54.72 (128.121.54.72) 259 ms 499 ms 279 ms14 * * *15 * * *16 * * *17 * * *18 ALLSPICE.LCS.MIT.EDU (18.26.0.115) 339 ms 279 ms 279 ms

Information Processing Commands

display channel Syntax

display channel [ channel-number | channel-name ]

View

Any view.

Parameterchannel-number: Channel number, ranging 0 to 9. That is, the system has 10 channels. channel-name: Channel name.


Table 1 Channel names and their associated channel numbers

Description

Using the display channel command, you can display the contents of an information channel.

This command displays the setting states of all channels when executed without any parameter.

Example

Display the contents of information channel 0.

<3Com> display channel 0channel number:0, channel name:consoleMODU_ID NAME ENABLE LOG LEVEL ENABLE TRAP LEVEL ENABLE DEBUG LEVELffff0000 all Y warning Y debugging Y debugging

display info-center Syntax

display info-center

View

Any view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the display info-center command, you can display all the information recorded in the info-center.

For related commands, see info-center enable, info-center loghost, info-center logbuffer, info-center trapbuffer, info-center console channel, and info-center monitor channel.

Example

Display the information recorded in the info-center.

<3Com> display info-center

Channel name Information channel numberchannel6 6channel7 7channel8 8channel9 9console 0logbuffer 4loghost 2monitor 1snmpagent 5trapbuffer 3


Information Center: enabledLog host:Console: channel number : 0, channel name : consoleMonitor: channel number : 1, channel name : monitorSNMP Agent: channel number : 5, channel name : snmpagentLog buffer: enabled,max buffer size 1024, current buffer size 256,current messages 89, channel number : 4, channel name : logbufferdropped messages 0, overwrote messages 0Trap buffer: enabled,max buffer size 1024, current buffer size 256,current messages 0, channel number:3, channel name:trapbufferdropped messages 0, overwrote messages 0Information timestamp setting: log - date, trap - date, debug - boot

Sent messages = 89, Received messages = 89

display logbuffer Syntax

display logbuffer [ size size-value | summary ] [ level level-number ] [ | [ begin | include | exclude ] string ]

View

Any view

Parameter

size: Displays the number of information entries in the logbuffer.

size-value: The number of displayed information entries.

summary: A summary of the logbuffer.

level: Displays only the count of information entries at a specified level.

level-number: The specified level in the ranging 1 to 8.

|: Uses regular expression to filter the information for display.

begin: Displays the information beginning with the specified characters (string).

include: Displays the information including the specified characters (string).

exclude: Displays the information excluding the specified characters (string).

string: Characters of the regular expression.

Description

Using the display logbuffer command, you can display the information recorded in the logbuffer.


By default, executing display logbuffer without any parameter displays all the information in the logbuffer.

If the number of information entries in the current logging buffer is smaller than the specified size-value, logging information of the actual entries will be displayed.

For related commands, see info-center enable, info-center logbuffer, and display info-center.

Example

Display the information in the logging buffer.

<3Com> display logbufferLogging Buffer Confiuration and contents:enabledallowed max buffer size : 1024actual buffer size : 256channel number : 4 , channel name : logbufdropped messages : 0overwritten messages : 0current messages : 96%8/28/2101 5:34:48-IC-7-SYS_RESTART:System restarted --3Com Versatile Routing Platform SoftwareCopyright (c) 2000-2002 by VRP Team Beijing Institute 3Com Tech, Inc%9/9/2002 15:50:36-SHELL-5-CMD:task:CFM ip:** user:** command:interface Ethernet%11/6/2002 22:18:52-SHELL-5-CMD:task:CFM ip:** user:** command:interface Aux0

%3/15/2003 15:50:36-SHELL-5-CMD:task:CFM ip:** user:** command:controller E1 3/0%4/1/2003 21:29:47-PHY-2-PHY: Console0: change status to up

display trapbuffer Syntax

display trapbuffer [ size sizeval ]

View

Any view

Parameter

size: Specifies the number of information entries in the logbuffer.

sizeval: The number of displayed information entries.

Description

Using the display trapbuffer command, you can display the information recorded in the trapbuffer.

By default, executing the command without any parameter displays all the information in the trapbuffer.


If the number of information entries in the current trapbuffer is smaller than the specified sizeval, the actual number of traps will be displayed.

For related commands, see info-center enable, info-center trapbuffer, and display info-center.

Example

Display trapbuffer information.

<3Com> display trapbufferTrapping Buffer Confiuration and contents:enabledallowed max buffer size : 1024actual buffer size : 256channel number : 3 , channel name : trapbufdropped messages : 0overwrote messages : 0current messages : 0# Display 23 entries of information in the trapbuffer.<3Com> display trapbuffer size 23Trapping Buffer Confiuration and contents:enabledallowed max buffer size : 1024actual buffer size : 256channel number : 3 , channel name : trapbufdropped messages : 0overwrote messages : 0current messages : 0

info-center channel Syntax

info-center channel channel-number name channel-name

undo info-center channel channel-number

View

System view

Parameter

channel-number: The channel number, with the value ranging from 0 to 9. That is, the system has 10 channels.

channel-name is a channel name, with maximum length of 30 characters, excluding ”-“, ”/” and ”\”..

Description

Using the rename channel command, you can rename the information channel numbered channel-number as channel-name.

When naming the information channels, please note that no duplicated channel name is allowed.


Example

Name Channel 0 as "execconsole".

[3Com] info-center channel 0 name execconsole

info-center consolechannel

Syntax

info-center console channel { channel-number | channel-name }

undo info-center console channel

View

System view

Parameter

channel-number: Channel number, ranging 0 to 9, that is, the system has 10 channels.

channel-name: Channel name.

Description

Using the info-center console channel command, you can enable outputting information to the console and set the information output channel. Using the undo info-center console channel command, you can disable the current settings.

By default, no logging information is output to the console.

This command will not become valid unless the syslog function has been enabled.

For related commands, see info-center enable and display info-center.

Example

Enable outputting information to the console and set the output channel.

[3Com] info-center console channel console

info-center enable Syntax

info-center enable

undo info-center enable

View

System view

Parameter

None


Description

Using the info-center enable command, you can enable the info-center. Using the undo info-center enable command, you can disable the info-center.

By default, the info-center has been enabled.

Only when the info-center has been enabled will the system output information to the loghost and the console.

For related commands, see info-center loghost, info-center logbuffer, info-center trapbuffer, info-center console channel, info-center monitor channel, display info-center.

Example

Enable the info-center.

[3Com] info-center enable% information center is enabled

info-center logbuffer Syntax

info-center logbuffer [ channel { channel-number | channel-name } | size buffersize ] *

undo info-center logbuffer [ channel | size ]

View

System view

Parameter

channel: Sets the channel for information output to the logbuffer.

channel-number: Channel number ranging 0 to 9. That is, the system has 10 channels.


size: Sets logbuffer size.

buffersize: Size of the logbuffer (the accommodated message entries).

Description

Using the info-center logbuffer command, you can enable the logbuffer and set the channel number for logging information output as well as the size of the logging buffer. Using the undo info-center logbuffer command, you can cancel the current settings.

By default, information outputted to the logbuffer is allowed and the logbuffer size is 256.

Only when the info-center has been enabled can this command become effective.


By setting channel number after enabling logbuffer, you can specify information outbound direction..

For related commands, see info-center enable, display info-center, and display info-center logbuffer.

Example

Enable the router to send information to the logbuffer and set the logbuffer size to 50.

[3Com] info-center logbuffer size 50

info-center loghost Syntax

info-center loghost X.X.X.X [ channel { channel-number | channel-name } | facility local-number | language { chinese | english } ] *

undo info-center loghost X.X.X.X

View

System view

Parameter

X.X.X.X: IP address of the loghost.

channel: Information channel for the loghost.



facility: Sets the recording tool of the loghost.

local-number: Recording tool of the loghost, which is ranging local0 to local7.

language: Sets the logging language.

chinese and english: Logging language which can be Chinese or English.

Description

Using the info-center loghost command, you can enable the router to output information to the loghost. Using the undo info-center loghost command, you can cancel the current configuration.

By default, no information is output to the loghost.

If not specified, the information channel for the loghost defaults to channel2 that is named loghost, the loghost recording tool local-number to local7, and the language to english.


Only when the information center has been enabled can this command become effective.

By setting the IP address of loghost, you can specify the information outbound direction. You can set up to 4 loghosts.

For related command, see info-center enable, and display info-center.

Example

Enable the router to send information to the UNIX workstation at 202.38.160.1.

[3Com] info-center loghost 202.38.160.1

info-center loghostsource

Syntax

info-center loghost source interface-type interface-number [ subinterface-type ]

undo info-center loghost source

View

System view

Parameter

interface-type: Interface types.

interface-number: Number of the interface.

subinterface-name: Subinterface types.

Description

The info-center loghost source command is used to specify the source address for sending packets to the logging host while the undo inforcenter loghost source command is used to cancel the current configuration.undo info-center loghost source is for the canceling of the current configuration.

When a logging message is sent out from a router, the default source address is the IP address of the interface which has sent the logging message. If the user wants to change the source address, he can use this command to achieve it. You can judge which router has sent out the message by setting different source addresses for different routers, accordingly you can also search among the received messages.

Example

Set the IP address of Loopback0 as the source address of the logging message packets.

[3Com] interface loopback 0[3Com-LoopBack0] ip address 1.1.1.1 255.255.255.0[3Com-LoopBack0] quit[3Com] info-center loghost source loopback 0


info-center monitorchannel

Syntax

info-center monitor channel { channel-number | channel-name }

undo info-center monitor channel

View

System view

Parameter



Description

Using the info-center monitor channel command, you can enable the router to output information to the user terminal and set the output channel. Using the undo info-center monitor channel command, you can cancel the current configuration.

By default, no information is output to the user terminal.

Only when the info-center has been enabled, can this command become effective.

For related commands, see info-center enable, and display info-center.

Example

Enable the router to output information to the user terminal and set the output channel.

[3Com] info-center monitor channel monitor

info-center snmpchannel

Syntax

info-center snmp channel { channel-number | channel-name }

undo info-center snmp channel

View

System view

Parameter




Description

Using the info-center snmp channel command, you can set the information channel for snmp. Using the undo info-center snmp channel command, you can cancel the current configuration.

By default, channel 5 is used.

For the related command, see display snmp-agent statistics.

Example

Set snmp information channel to channel 6.

[3Com] info-center snmp channel 6

info-center source Syntax

info-center source { module-name | default } { channel { channel-number | channel-name} } [ log { state { on | off } | level severity }* | trap { state { on | off } | level severity } * | debug { state { on | off } | level severity }* ]*

undo info-center source { module-name | default } { channel { channel-number | channel-name }

View

System view

Parameter


default: Sets the default information record.

channel-number: Information channel number to be set.

channel-name: Information channel name to be set.

log: Log information.

trap: Alarm information.

debug: Debugging information.

on: Enables outputting information.

off: Disables outputting information.

level: Sets information level to disable the output of the information at a level higher than the specified severity.

severity: Information level. As shown in the following table, the info-center divides information into eight levels by severity or emergency, with a lower level indicating a more emergent event. emergencies indicates level 0 and debugging indicates level 7.


Table 2 Definition of information level

*: Indicate multiple choices can be selected. At least one choice must be selected and all the choices can be selected at most.

Description

Using the info-center source command, you can add records to an information channel. Using the undo info-center source command, you can remove the records from the information channel.

For a specified module, by default,

The state of logging information output is on and the allowed information level is informational.

The state of trapping information output is on and the allowed information level is informational.

The state of debugging information ouput is off.

So far, the system allocates one information channel for each output direction. They are:

Output directionInformation channel number Default information channel name

Console 0 console

Monitor terminal1 monitor

Loghost 2 loghost

Trapbuffer 3 trapbuffer

Logbuffer 4 logbuffer

snmp 5snmpagent

In addition, each information channel has a default record for which the module name and number are default and 0xffff0000. But for different channels, the record may have different default settings for logging information, trapping information, and debugging information. If a module has no explicit configuration record in the channel, the default configuration record will be used.

Severity level Descriptionemergencies Extremely emergent errorsalerts Errors requiring immediate correctioncritical Critical errorserrors Errors that is not critical but require your concernwarnings Warning indicating that there may be some errorsnotifications Information needs your concern informational Common prompt informationdebugging Debugging information


Example

Enable the output of log information of the IP module in the snmp channel and the allowed highest level of the output information is emergence.

[3Com] info-center source ip channel snmpagent log level emergence # Remove the setting of the cmd module in the snmp channel. [3Com] undo info-center source cmd channel snmp

info-centertimestamp

Syntax

info-center timestamp { trap | debugging | log } { boot | date | none }

undo info-center timestamp { trap | debugging | log }

View

System view

Parameter

trap: Trap information

debugging: Debugging information.

log: log information.

boot: Post booting time that the system experiences. It is in the format of xxxxxx.yyyyyy, with xxxxxx being the 32 high bits and yyyyyy the 32 low bits of the passed milliseconds.

date: Current system date and time, in the form of “yyyy/mm/dd-hh:mm:ss” in Chinese and “mm/dd/yyyy-hh:mm:ss” in English.

none: No time stamp.

Description

Using the info-center timestamp command, you can set the time stamp format for the output debugging/trapping/logging information. Using the undo info-center timestamp command, you can cancel the current configuration.

By default, the date time stamp is used in information of all types.

Example

Set the time stamp format for traps to boot.

[3Com] info-center timestamp trap boot

info-center trapbuffer Syntax

info-center trapbuffer [ channel { channel-number | channel-name } | size buffersize ] *

undo info-center trapbuffer [ channel | size ]


View

System view

Parameter

channel: Sets the channel for outputting information to the trapbuffer.

channel-number: Channel number ranging 0 to 9. That is, system has 10 channels.


size: Sets trapbuffer size.

buffersize: Size of the trapbuffer (the information entries that can be accommodated).

Description

Using the info-center trapbuffer command, you can enable the trapbuffer and set the output channel number and trapbuffer size. Using the undo info-center trapbuffer command, you can cancel the current configuration.

By default, information output to trapbuffer is allowed and the trapbuffer size is 256.

Only when the info-center has been enabled can this command become effective.

By setting a trapbuffer size, you can make the router output information to the trapbuffer.

For related commands, see info-center enable, display info-center, and display info-center trapbuffer.

Example

Enable the router to send information to the trapbuffer, given the trapbuffer size is 30.

[3Com] info-center trapbuffer size 30

reset logbuffer Syntax

reset logbuffer

View

User view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the reset logbuffer command, you can clear information in the logbuffer.


Example<3Com> reset logbuffer

reset trapbuffer Syntax

reset trapbuffer

View

System view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the reset trapbuffer command, you can clear information in the trapbuffer.

Example<3Com> reset trapbuffer

servicemodem-callback

Syntax

service modem-callback

undo service modem-callback

View

System view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the service modem-callback command, you can enable user callback. Using the undo service modem-callback command, you can disable user callback.

By default, the callback function is disabled.

Example

Enable the callback function.

[3Com] service modem-callback

terminal debugging Syntax

terminal debugging

undo terminal debugging


View

User view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the terminal debugging command, you can enable the terminal debugging display function. Using the undo terminal debugging command, you can disable the function.

By default, terminal display is disabled.

For related command, see debugging.

Example

Enable terminals to display the debugging information.

<3Com> terminal debugging

terminal logging Syntax

terminal logging

undo terminal logging

View

User view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the terminal logging command, you can enable the log display function of terminals. Using the undo terminal logging command, you can disable log display function of terminals.

By default, the log display function of terminals is enabled.

Example

Disable the log display function of terminals.

<3Com> undo terminal logging

terminal monitor Syntax

terminal monitor


undo terminal monitor

View

User view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the terminal monitor command, you can enable terminals to display the debugging /logging/trapping information sent by the info-center. Using the undo terminal monitor command, you can disable terminals to display the debugging/logging/trapping information.

By default, the display function of console users is enabled but the display function of terminal users is disabled.

The command only affects the current terminal that inputs it. The undo terminal monitor command is equivalent to the execution of undo terminal debugging, undo terminal logging, and undo terminal trapping commands, that is, all the debugging/logging/trapping information will not be displayed at the current terminal. In the event that terminal monitor has been enabled, the terminal debugging/undo terminal debugging, terminal logging/undo terminal logging, and terminal trapping/undo terminal trapping commands can be used to enable/disable the debugging/logging/trapping information.

Example

Disable terminal monitor.

<3Com> undo terminal monitor

terminal trapping Syntax

terminal trapping

undo terminal trapping

View

User view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the terminal trapping command, you can enable the function of trap information display at terminals. Using the undo terminal trapping command, you can disable the function of trap information display at terminals.

By default, the system configuration is to enable the display function.


Example

Disable the trapping information display function.

<3Com> terminal trapping

System Operating Management Commands - AR46 Series

boot bootldr Syntax

boot bootldr filename

View

System view

Parameter

filename: File name of the booting software package.

Description

Using the boot bootldr command, you can specify the system booting file.

Example

Specify the file ibox.bin stored in the flash as the default system booting file.

[3Com] boot bootldr flash:/ibox.bin

display alarm urgent Syntax

display alarm urgent [ time | slot | id ]

View

Any view

Parameter

time: Displays the alarms in a latest time range.

id: Displays the alarms of an ID.

slot: Displays the alarms involved a slot.

Description

Using the display alarm urgent command, you can display the stored alarms in a specified way.

Executing the command defined without any parameter will display all the alarms.

System Operating Management Commands - AR46 Series 49

Example

Display the stored alarms.

<3Com> display alarm urgent Alarm ID Slot Date Time Para1 Para2 2 11 00/04/01 23:55:18 2 24 2 10 00/04/01 23:55:18 1 24 0 12 00/04/04 10:00:14 0 1

display bootvar Syntax

display bootvar

View

Any view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the display bootvar command, you can display file name of the boot software package stored in the flash on RPU.

Example

Display the program configuration information of RPU.

<3Com> display bootvarBoot file on flash is flash:/ibox.bin.

display environment Syntax

display environment

View

Any view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the display environment command, you can display the current values and the threshold values of the hardware system environment.

Example

Display the system environment.

<3Com> display environment


GET 3 TEMPERATUREPOINT VALUE SUCCESSFULLY

environment information:Temperature information:local CurrentTemperature LowLimit HighLimit (deg c ) (deg c) (deg c ) RPU 34 0 80 VENT 31 0 80

display device Syntax

display device slot-number

View

Any view

Parameterslot-number: Slot number.

Description

Using the display device command, you can display the system hardware configuration information, including the in-position states of MPU, NPU, interface card, power module, and fan module, the operating state of interface card, power module, and fan module, as well as the offline information of MPU and NPU.

Executing the command defined without parameters will display the essential information of all the devices in position. Executing the command defined with the parameter slot-number will display only the details on the defined slot, including reset times and history records of the reset causes.

Example

Display the essential information of the router.

<3Com> display device Slot # Type Online Status0 RPU Present Normal6 PWR Present Normal7 FAN Present Normal

display schedulereboot

Syntax

display schedule reboot

View

Any view

Parameter

None


Description

Using the display schedule reboot command, you can check the configuration of related parameters of the router schedule reboot terminal service.

For the related command, see reboot, schedule reboot at, schedule reboot delay, undo schedule reboot.

Example

Display the configuration of the schedule reboot terminal service parameters of the current router.

<3Com> display schedule rebootReboot system at 16:00:00 2002/11/1 (in 2 hours and 5 minutes).

remove slot Syntax

remove slot slotnum

undo remove slot slotnum

View

User view

Parameter

slotnum: Slot number for the interface card

Description

Using the remove slot command, you can run pre-processing before removing an interface card. You can also cancel a misoperation with the undo remove slot command if you change your mind to remove the card after executing the remove slot command. The undo remove slot command is unnecessary when you remove a card, but insert it immediately.

For the related command, see reboot, schedule reboot at, schedule reboot delay, undo schedule reboot.

Example

Remove the interface card at slot 3.

<3Com>remove slot 3

reset alarm urgent Syntax

reset alarm urgent

View

User view


Parameter

None

Description

Using the reset alarm urgent command, you can clear all the stored alarms.

Example

Clear the all the stored alarms.

<3Com> reset alarm urgent

reset slot Syntax

reset slot slot-number

View

User view

Parameter

slot-number: The number of the slot to be reset.

Description

Using the reset slot command, you can reset the device in a specified slot.

Example

Reset the device in slot 3.

<3Com> reset slot 3

schedule reboot at Syntax

schedule reboot at hh:mm [ yyyy/mm/dd ]

View

User view

Parameter

hh:mm: Reboot time of the router, in the format of "hour: minute" The hh ranges from 0 to 23, and the mm ranges from 0 to 59.

yyyy/mm/dd: Reboot date of the router, in the format of "year/month/day. The yyyy ranges from 2000 to 2099, the mm ranges from 1 to 12, and the value of dd is related to the specific month.


Description

Using the schedule reboot at command, you can enable the timing reboot function of the router and set the specific reboot time and date.

By default, the timing reboot router function is disabled.

If the schedule reboot at command sets specified date parameters, which represents a data in the future, the router will be restarted in specified time, with error not more than 1 minute.

If no specified date parameters are configured, two cases are involved: If the configured time is after the current time, the router will be restarted at the time point of that day; if the configured time is before the current time, the router will be restarted at the time point of the next day.

It should be noted that the configured date should not exceed the current date more than 30 days. In addition, after the command is configured, the system will prompt you to input confirmation information. Only after the "Y" or the "y" is entered can the configuration be valid. If there is related configuration before, it will be covered directly.

Moreover, after the schedule reboot at command is configured and the system time is adjusted by the clock command, the former configured schedule reboot at parameter will go invalid.

For the related command, see reboot, schedule reboot delay, undo schedule reboot, display schedule reboot.

Example

Set the router to be restarted at 22:00 that night (the current time is 15:50).

<3Com> schedule reboot at 22:00Reboot scheduled for 22:00:00 UTC 2002/11/18 (in 6 hours and 10 minutes)Proceed with reboot? [Y/N]:y

schedule rebootdelay

Syntax

schedule reboot delay { hhh:mm | mmm }

View

User view

Parameter

hhh:mm: Waiting time for rebooting a router, in the format of "hour: minute" The hhh ranges from 0 to 720, and the mm ranges from 0 to 59.

mmm: Waiting delay for rebooting a router, in the format of "absolute minutes" . Ranging from 0 to 43200,


Description

Using the schedule reboot delay command, you can enable the timing reboot router function and set the waiting time.

By default, the timing reboot router function is disabled.

Two formats can be used to set the waiting delay of timing reboot router, namely the format of "hour: minute" and the format of "absolute minutes". But the total minutes should be no more than 30×24×60 minutes, or 30 days.

After this command is configured, the system will prompt you to input confirmation information. Only after the "Y" or the "y" is entered can the configuration be valid. If there is related configuration before, it will be covered directly.

Moreover, after the schedule reboot at command is configured, and the system time is adjusted by the clock command, the original schedule reboot at parameter will become invalid.

For the related command, see reboot, schedule reboot at, undo schedule reboot, display schedule reboot.

Example

Configure the router to be restarted after 88 minutes (the current time is 21:32).

<3Com> schedule reboot delay 88Reboot scheduled for 23:00:00 UTC 2002/11/1 (in 1 hours and 28 minutes)Proceed with reboot? [Y/N]:y

upgrade Syntax

upgrade [ bootrom | pico-code] filename

View

System view

Parameter

bootrom: Upgrades the BootROM on line .

pico-code: Upgrades the pico-code on line.

filename: The file name of the upgrade software package to be used.

Description

Using the upgrade command, you can upgrade the BootRom program, pico-code or the logic.

File Management Commands 55

Example

Upgrade the pico-code on line, given the file name of the upgrade software package is filename.

[3Com] upgrade pico-code filename

undo schedulereboot

Syntax

undo schedule reboot

View

User view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the undo schedule reboot command, you can cancel the parameter configuration of the schedule reboot terminal service.

For the related command, see reboot, schedule reboot at, schedule reboot delay, display schedule reboot.

Example

Cancel the timing reboot router function.

<3Com> undo schedule reboot

File Management Commands

File System Commands Syntax

cd directory

View

User view

Parameter

directory: Name of destination directory.

Description

Using the cd command, you can modify the current operating path of the router to the specified directory.

By default, the flash memory is the operating path set when the router starts.


Example

Modify the current operating path of the router to test.

<3Com> cd test<3Com> pwdflash:/test

clear Syntax

clear filename

View

User view

Parameter

filename: Name of file to be deleted.

Description

Using the clear command, you can delete all files from the recycle bin.

The wildcard “*” is available here. Using the delete command, you can only move the target files into the recycle bin. If you want to remove them from the recycle bin, you must use the clear command.

Example

Clear the recycle bin.

<3Com> clear flash:/p1h_logic.outclear flash:/plh_logic.out?[Y/N]

copy Syntax

copy filename_source filename_dest

View

User view

Parameterfilename_source: Name of the source file.filename_dest: Name of the destination file or directory.

Description

Using the copy command, you can copy a file.

If the name of the destination file is the same with an existing directory name, the target file will be copied to the directory. If the name of the destination file is the same with an existing file name, the user will be prompted whether the existing file should be overwritten.


Example<3Com>pwdSlave#flash:<3Com> dirDirectory of flash:/-rwxrwxrwx 1 noone nogroup 4316742 Oct 10 2002 10:10:10 systemdrwxrwxrwx 1 noone nogroup - Jan 01 2001 10:47:14 buckup-rwxrwxrwx 1 noone nogroup 16 Jan 02 2001 08:53:52 private-data.t-rwxrwxrwx 1 noone nogroup 625 Jan 02 2001 08:54:01 vrpcfg.txt-rwxrwxrwx 1 noone nogroup 375 Jan 02 2001 08:53:13 config-rwxrwxrwx 1 noone nogroup 524288 Jan 02 2001 11:47:39 bootromfull

7672832 bytes total (2295808 bytes free)

Copy the file from Flash to buckup..

<3Com> copy vrpcfg.txt buckupCopy flash:/vrpcfg.txt to flash:/backup/vrpcfg.txt ?[Y/N]:y% Copied file flash:/vrpcfg.txt to flash:/backup/vrpcfg.txt<3Com> dirDirectory of flash:/backup/

-rwxrwxrwx 1 noone nogroup 625 Jan 02 2001 13:28:32 vrpcfg.txt


delete Syntax

delete /unreserved filename

View

User view

Parameter

/unreserved: Deletes the specified file unreservedly, and the deleted file can never be restored.

filename: Name of the file to be deleted.

Description

Using the delete command, you can move the specified file, which can be restored with the undelete command, to the recycle bin. If you want to delete it from the recycle bin, you can use the reset recycle-bin filename command.

If you delete two files in different directories but with the same filename, only the last one will be stored in the recycle bin.


If the unreserved parameter is seleted in using the delete command, the target file cannot be restored.

The dir command does not display the information of deleted files. However, by using the dir /all command, the information of all files under the directory, including deleted files, will be displayed.

Example

Delete the file flash:/test/test.txt.

<3Com> delete flash:/test/test.txtDelete flash:/test/test.txt?[Y/N]<3Com>

dir Syntax

dir [ /all | /h ] [ filename ]

View

User view

Parameter

/all: Displays all files (including the deleted files).

/h: Displays the information about the private files. This parameter is unavailable if there is no storage device on the router.

filename: Name of the file or directory displayed.

Description

Using the dir command, you can display the information about the specified file or directory in the router storage device.

By default, this command displays the file information under the current directory.

This command supports "*" wildcard.

The dir /all command can be used to display the information about all the files, including the deleted files. The names of the deleted files are denoted with "[]", for instance, [temp.cfg]. Such deleted files can be restored via the undelete command. The reset recycle-bin command can be used to delete the file from the recycle bin permanently.

The dir /h command can be used to display the information about the private file under the current path. The attribute of the private file is represented by “---h”.

Example

Display the information about the file flash:/test/test.txt.

<3Com> dir flash:Directory of flash:


-rwxrwxrwx 1 noone nogroup 4316742 Oct 10 2002 10:10:10 system-rwxrwxrwx 1 noone nogroup 16 Jan 01 1970 00:00:57 private-data.txt-rwxrwxrwx 1 noone nogroup 351 Jan 01 1970 00:01:03 vrpcfg.txt


execute Syntax

execute filename

View

System view

Parameter

filename: Name of the batch file, ranging from 1 to 256, with a suffix of “.bat”.

Description

Using the execute command, you can execute the specified batch file.

The batch command executes the command lines in the batch file one by one. There should be no invisible character in the batch file. If invisible characters are found, the batch command will quit the current execution without back off operation. The batch command does not guarantee the execution of each command, nor does it perform hot backup itself. The forms and contents of the commands are not restricted in the batch file.

Example

Execute the batch file “test.bat” in the directory of “flash:/”.

[3Com] execute test.bat

file prompt Syntax

file prompt {alert | quiet }

View

System view

Parameter

alert: Enables interactive acknowledgement on the condition that data loss or destruction may happen due to user operation (e.g., deleting a file.).

quiet: No prompt on the condition that data loss or destruction may happen due to user operation (e.g., deleting a file.).


Description

Using the file prompt command, you can modify the prompt mode of file operation of the router.

By default, the prompt mode is alert.

When the prompting mode of file operation is set to quiet, for the possible data loss due to user operation (e.g., deleting a file), the system will have no prompt.

Example

Set the prompt mode of file operation to quiet.

[3Com] file prompt quiet# Set the prompt mode of file operation to alert. [3Com] file prompt alert

format Syntax

format device-name

View

User view

Parameter

device-name: Device name.

Description

Using the format command, you can format the storage device.

Formatting will result in loss of all files on a specified storage device and these files cannot be restored.

Example

Format flash.

<3Com> format flash: All sectors will be erased, proceed? [Y/N]y Format flash: completed

mkdir Syntax

mkdir directory

View

User view

Parameter

directory: Name of directory.


Description

Using the mkdir command, you can create a directory under the specified directory in the specified storage device.

The name of the directory to be created cannot be the same with the names of other directories or files under the specified directory.

Example

Create a directory dd.

<3Com> mkdir ddCreated dir flash:/dd.

more Syntax

more filename

View

User view

Parameter

filename: File name.

Description

Using the more command, you can display content of a specified file.

By default, the file system displays the file in the form of text, that is, the contents of the file.

Example

Display the content of the file test.txt.

<3Com> more test.txtAppWizard has created this test application for you. This file contains a summary of what you will find in each of the files that make up your test application.Test.dspThis file (the project file) contains information at the project level and is used to build a single project or subproject. Other users can share the project (.dsp) file, but they should export the makefiles locally.

move Syntax

move filename_source filename_dest

View

User view


Parameter

filename_source: Name of the source file.

filename_dest: Name of the destination file.

Description

Using the move command, you can move a file.

If the name of the target file is the same with the name of an existing directory, the target file will be moved into the directory, with the same file name. If the name of the destination file is the same with an existing file name, the user will be prompted whether the existing file should be overwritten.

Example<3Com> dirDirectory of * 0 -rw- 2145123 Jul 12 2001 12:28:08 ne80.bin 1 -rw- 595 Jul 12 2001 10:47:50 vrpcfg.txt 2 drw- 0 Jul 12 2001 19:41:20 test6477 KBytes total (2144 KBytes free)<3Com> dir flash:/test/Directory of flash:/test/ 0 drw- - Jul 12 2001 20:23:37 subdir 1 -rw- 595 Jul 12 2001 20:13:19 vrpcfg.txt 2 -rw- 50 Jul 12 2001 20:08:32 sample.txt6477 KBytes total (2144 KBytes free)# Move the file flash:/test/sample.txt to flash:/sample.txt.<3Com> move flash:/test/sample.txt flash:/sample.txtMove flash:/test/sample.txt to flash:/sample.txt ?[Y/N]:y% Moveded file flash:/test/sample.txt flash:/sample.txt<3Com> dirDirectory of * 0 -rw- 2145123 Jul 12 2001 12:28:08 ne80.bin 1 -rw- 595 Jul 12 2001 10:47:50 vrpcfg.txt 2 drw- 0 Jul 12 2001 19:41:20 test 3 -rw- 50 Jul 12 2001 20:26:48 sample.txt6477 KBytes total (2144 KBytes free)<3Com> dir flash:/test/Directory of flash:/test/ 0 drw- - Jul 12 2001 20:23:37 subdir 1 -rw- 595 Jul 12 2001 20:13:19 vrpcfg.txt6477 KBytes total (2144 KBytes free)

pwd Syntax

pwd

View

User view

Parameter

None


Description

Using the pwd command, you can display the current path.

If the current path has not been set, the operation will fail.

Example

Display the current path.

<3Com> pwdflash:/test

rename Syntax

rename filename_source filename_dest

View

User view

Parameter

filename_source: Name of the source file.

filename_dest: Name of the destination file.

Description

Using the rename command, you can rename a file.

If the name of the destination file is the same with the name of an existing directory, the execution will fail. If the name of the destination file is the same with an existing file, the operation will fail.

Example<3Com> dirDirectory of * 0 -rw- 2145123 Jul 12 2001 12:28:08 ne.bin 1 -rw- 595 Jul 12 2001 10:47:50 vrpcfg.txt 2 drw- - Jul 12 2001 19:41:20 test 3 -rw- 50 Jul 12 2001 20:26:48 sample.txt6477 KBytes total (2144 KBytes free)

Rename the file sample.txt to sample.bak.

<3Com> rename sample.txt sample.bakRename flash:/sample.txt to flash:/sample.bak ?[Y/N]:y% Renamed file flash:/sample.txt flash:/sample.bak<3Com> dirDirectory of * 0 -rw- 2145123 Jul 12 2001 12:28:08 ne.bin 1 -rw- 595 Jul 12 2001 10:47:50 vrpcfg.txt 2 drw- - Jul 12 2001 19:41:20 test 3 -rw- 50 Jul 12 2001 20:29:55 sample.bak6477 KBytes total (2144 KBytes free)


reset recycle-bin Syntax

reset recycle-bin filename

View

User view

Parameter

filename: Name of the file to be deleted.

Description

Using the reset recycle-bin command, you can delete a file from the recycle bin permanently.

This command supports "*" wildcard. The delete command only deletes a file to the recycle bin directory. To delete a file permanently, use the reset recycle-bin command.

Example

Delete a file from the recycle bin.

<3Com> reset recycle-bin flash:/p1h_logic.outreset flash:/plh_logic.out?[Y/N]

rmdir Syntax

rmdir directory

View

User view

Parameter

directory: Name of the directory.

Description

Using the rmdir command, you can delete a directory.

The directory to be deleted must be an empty one.

Example<3Com>dirDirectory of * 0 drw- - Jul 12 2001 20:23:37 subdir 1 -rw- 595 Jul 12 2001 20:13:19 vrpcfg.txt6477 KBytes total (2144 KBytes free)# Display how to delete the directory subdir.<3Com> rmdir subdirRmdir subdir?[Y/N]:y% Removed directory subdir

FTP Server Configuration Commands 65

<3Com> dirDirectory of * 0 -rw- 595 Jul 12 2001 20:13:19 vrpcfg.txt6477 KBytes total (5944 KBytes free)

undelete Syntax

undelete filename

View

User view

Parameter

filename: Name of the file to be restored.

Description

Using the undelete command, you can restore a deleted file.

If the name of the file to be restored is the same with the name of an existing directory, the execution will fail. If the name of this file is the same with that of an existing file, the user will be prompted whether the existing file should be overwritten.

Example<3Com> dir /allDirectory of * 0 -rw- 595 Jul 12 2001 20:13:19 vrpcfg.txt 1 -rw- 50 Jul 12 2001 20:09:23 [sample.bak]6477 KBytes total (2144 KBytes free)# Restore the deleted file sample.bak.<3Com> undelete sample.bakUndelete flash:/test/sample.bak ?[Y/N]:y% Undeleted file flash:/test/sample.bak<3Com> dir /allDirectory of * 0 -rw- 50 Jul 12 2001 20:34:19 sample.bak 1 -rw- 595 Jul 12 2001 20:13:19 vrpcfg.txt6477 KBytes total (2144 KBytes free)

FTP Server Configuration Commands

display ftp-server Syntax

display ftp-server

View

Any view


ParameterNone

Description

Using the display ftp-server command, you can display the parameters of the current FTP server.

After the FTP parameters are configured, this command can be used to display the configuration results.

Example

Display the FTP parameters configured.

<3Com> display ftp-serverFtp server is running Max user number5 User count2 Timeout(minute)30

The information shown above indicates that the FTP server has started and can support up to 5 log-on users simultaneously and now there are two log-on users and the timeout of an FTP user is 30 minutes.

display ftp-user Syntax

display ftp-user

View

Any view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the display ftp-user command, you can display the parameters of the current FTP user.

Example

Display the FTP user parameter configuration.

<3Com> display ftp-userusernamehost porttopdiridle3Com 10.110.3.51074c:/3Com2

The information shown above indicates that a connection between an FTP user named 3Com and the FTP server has been established. the IP address of the remote host is 10.110.3.5 and the remote port number is 1074. the authorization directory is flash:/3Com and so far the user has not sent any service request to the FTP server for 2 minutes.

FTP Server Configuration Commands 67

ftp server enable Syntax

ftp server enable

undo ftp server

View

System view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the ftp server enable command, you can enable the FTP server and allow the login of FTP users. Using the undo ftp server command, you can disable the FTP server and the login of FTP users.

By default, the FTP server is off.

Example

Disable the FTP server.

[3Com] undo ftp server

ftp timeout Syntax

ftp timeout minute

undo ftp timeout

View

System view

Parameter

minute: Connection timeout in minutes, in the range of 1 to 35791. By default, the connection timeout is 30 minutes.

Description

Using the ftp timeout command, you can set the connection timeout. Using the undo ftp timeout command, you can restore the default connection timeout.

Once the user logs on the FTP server, he establishes a connection with the FTP server. If an abnormal disconnection occurs or the user abnormally disrupts the connection, FTP server is not notified and thus the connection is still on. To avoid such a problem, the connection timeout should be set. If no command interaction is conducted during this period, FTP will regard the connection failed and disrupt the connection.


Example

Set the connection timeout to 36 minutes.

[3Com] ftp timeout 36

ftp update Syntax

ftp update { fast | normal }

undo ftp update{ fast | normal }

View

System view

Parameter

fast: Fast upgrading mode.

normal: Normal upgrading mode.

Description

Using the ftp update command, you can set the upgrading mode. Using the undo ftp update command, you can restore the default upgrading mode.

By default, the FTP update is in fast mode.

The FTP server updates the data of files in its flash memory in two modes: normal and fast, when receiving files transfered by the user using the FTP command PUT. Each of two modes is demonstrated respectively as follows:

Fast mode: The FTP server writes the data to the flash memory after the completion of the file transfer. This can safeguard that the files in the flash memory of the Router will not be damaged even on abnormal occasions such as power failure.

Normal mode: The FTP server writes the data to the flash memory during the file transfer. This means that the occurence of some abnormal conditions such as power failure might cause the damage of the files in the flash memory of the Router. But the normal updating mode consumes fewer memmory.

Example

Set the FTP update mode to normal.

[Router] ftp update normal

FTP client module commands 69

FTP client module commands

ascii Syntax

ascii

View

FTP client view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the ascii command, you can set the transmission data type to ASCII.

By default, the data type is set to ASCII.

Example

Set the transmission data type to ASCII.

[ftp] ascii200 Type set to A.

binary Syntax

binary

View

FTP client view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the binary command, you can set file type to support binary files transmission.

Example

Set file type to support binary files transmission.

[ftp] binary200 Type set to B.

bye Syntax

bye


View

FTP client view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the bye command, you can disconnect with remote FTP server and exit to user view.

Example

Terminate the connection with remote FTP server and exit to user view.

[ftp] bye<3Com>

cd Syntax

cd pathname

View

FTP client view

Parameter

pathname: Path name.

Description

Using the cd command, you can change the operating path on remote FTP server.

This command can be used to access another directory on FTP server.

Example

Change the operating path to d:/temp.

[ftp] cd d:/temp

cdup Syntax

cdup

View

FTP client view

Parameter

None


Description

Using the cdup command, you can change the operating path to the upper directory.

This command is used to exit current directory and return to an upper directory.

Example

Change the operating path to an upper directory.

[ftp] cdup

close Syntax

close

View

FTP client view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the close command, you can terminate the connection with remote FTP server, but remain in FTP client view.

This command will terminate both control connection and data connection with the remote FTP server simultaneously.

Example

Terminate the connection with the remote FTP server and still keep in FTP client view.

[ftp] close[ftp]

debugging Syntax

debugging

undo debugging

View

FTP client view

Parameter

None


Description

Using the debugging command, you can enable the debugging. Using the undo debugging command, you can disable the debugging.

By default, the debugging of FTP client commands is disabled.

Example

Enable the debugging.

[ftp] debugging

delete Syntax

delete remotefile

View

FTP client view

Parameter

remotefile: File name.

Description

Using the delete command, you can delete a specified file.

Example

Delete temp.c.

[ftp] delete temp.c

dir Syntax

dir [ filename ] [ localfile ]

View

FTP client view

Parameter

filename: File name queried.

localfile: Local file name saved.

Description

Using the dir command, you can query a specified file.

This command displays all the files under the directory or the file queried.


Example

Query temp.c and save the query result in temp1.

[ftp] dir temp.c temp1

disconnect Syntax

disconnect

View

FTP client view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the disconnect command, you can terminate the connection with the remote FTP server and still keep in FTP client view.

This command will terminate both control connection and data connection with the remote FTP server.

Example

Terminate the connection with the remote FTP server and still keep in FTP client view.

[ftp] disconnect[ftp]

ftp Syntax

ftp [host [ port ] ]

View

User view

Parameter

host: IP address or hostname of the remote FTP server.

port: Port number of the remote FTP server.

Description

Using the ftp command, you can establish control connection with the remote FTP server and enter FTP client view.

Example

Connect to the remote FTP server with the IP address of 1.1.1.1.


<3Com> ftp 1.1.1.1

get Syntax

get remotefile [ localfile ]

View

FTP client view

Parameter

localfile: Local file name.

remotefile: File name on the remote FTP server.

Description

Using the get command, you can download remote files and save them locally.

By default, if the local file name is not specified, this command will consider that it is the same with that of the file on the remote FTP server.

Example

Download temp1.c and save it as temp.c.

[ftp] get temp1.c temp.c

lcd Syntax

lcd

View

FTP client view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the lcd command, you can get the local operating path of FTP client.

Example

Display local operating path.

[ftp] lcd% Local directory now flash:

ls Syntax

ls [ remotefile ] [ localfile ]


View

FTP client view

Parameter

remotefile: Remote file queried.

localfile: Local file name saved.

Description

Using the ls command, you can query a specified file.

By default, all the files will be displayed when there is no parameter.

Example

Query temp.c.

[ftp] ls temp.c

mkdir Syntax

mkdir pathname

View

FTP client view

Parameter

pathname: Directory name.

Description

Using the mkdir command, you can establish a directory at the remote FTP server.

Example

Establish test directory at the remote FTP server.

[ftp] mkdir test

open Syntax

open ipaddr [ port ]

View

FTP client view

Parameter

ipaddr: IP address of the remote FTP server.


port: Port number of the remote FTP server.

Description

Using the open command, you can establish control connection with the remote FTP server.

Example

Establish FTP connection with the FTP server of the host 10.110.3.1.

[ftp] open 10.110.3.1

passive Syntax

passive

undo passive

View

FTP client view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the passive command, you can set data transmission mode to passive mode. Using the undo passive command, you can set data transmission mode to active mode.

By default, the transmission mode is passive.

Example

Set data transmission mode to passive mode.

[ftp] passive

put Syntax

put localfile [ remotefile ]

View

FTP client view

Parameter

localfile: Local file name.

remotefile: File name on the remote FTP server.


Description

Using the put command, you can upload a local file to the remote FTP server.

If no file name on the remote server is specified, this command will consider that it is the same with that of the local file.

Example

Upload local file temp.c to the remote FTP server and save it as temp1.c.

[ftp] put temp.c temp1.c

pwd Syntax

pwd

View

FTP client view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the pwd command, you can display the working directory on the remote FTP server.

Example

Display the working directory on the remote FTP server.

[ftp] pwd"d:/temp" is current directory.

quit Syntax

quit

View

FTP client view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the quit command, you can terminate the connection with the remote FTP server and exit to user view.


Example

Terminate the connection with the remote FTP server and exit to user view.

[ftp] quit<3Com>

remotehelp Syntax

remotehelp [ protocol-command ]

View

FTP client view

Parameter

protocol-command: FTP command.

Description

Using the remotehelp command, you can display the help of FTP command.

Example

Display the syntax of the command user.

[ftp] remotehelp user214 Syntax: USER <sp> <username>

rmdir Syntax

rmdir pathname

View

FTP client view

Parameter

pathname: Directory name on the remote FTP server.

Description

Using the rmdir command, you can delete a specified directory on FTP server.

Example

Delete d:/temp1 directory on FTP server.

[ftp] rmdir d:/temp1

user Syntax

user username [ password ]

TFTP Configuration Commands 79

View

FTP client view

Parameter

username: Logon user name.

password: Logon password.

Description

Using the user command, you can register FTP user.

Example

Log on FTP server with the user name tom and the password bjhw.

[ftp] user tom bjhw

verbose Syntax

verbose

undo verbose

View

FTP client view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the verbose command, you can enable the verbose function to view information from FTP server. Using the undo verbose command, you can disable the verbose function.

By default, it is disabled.

Example

Enable the verbose function.

[ftp] verbose

TFTP Configuration Commands

tftp Syntax

tftp ip_address { get | put } source-filename [ destination-filename ]


View

User view

Parameter

p_address: IP address of TFTP server.

source-filename: Source file name.

destination-filename: Destination file name.

get: Downloads files.

put: Uploads files.

Description

Using the tftp command, you can upload files to a TFTP server or downloads files to the local.

For related command, see tftp-server acl.

Example

Download the file vrpcfg.txt in the root directory of the TFTP server at 1.1.254.2 to the local hardware and save it as vrpcfg.bak.

<3Com> tftp 1.1.254.2 get vrpcfg.txt flash:/vrpcfg.bak

Upload the file vrpcfg.txt stored in the root directory of the flash onto the default directory on the TFTP server at 1.1.254.2 and save the file on the server as vrpcfg.bak.

<3Com> tftp 1.1.254.2 put flash:/vrpcfg.txt vrpcfg.bak

tftp-server acl Syntax

tftp-server acl acl-number

View

System view

Parameter

acl-number: IP ACL number in the range of 1 to 99.

Description

Using the tftp-server acl command, you can set the number of ACL permitting the access to a TFTP server.

For related command, see tftp.

Configuration Files Management Commands 81

Example

Set the number of ACL permitting the access to the TFTP Server to 1.

[3Com] tftp-server acl 1

Configuration Files Management Commands

displaycurrent-configuration

Syntax

display current-configuration [ controller | interface interface-type [ interface-number ] | configuration [ rip | ospf | bgp | post-config | system | user-interface ] ] [ | [begin | include | exclude ] string ]

View

Any view

Parameter

controller: Displays the configuration of controller.

interface: Displays the configuration of the interface.



configuration: Displays the specified configurations.

rip: Displays the RIP configuration.

ospf: Displays the OSPF configuration.

bgp: Displays the BGP configuration.

post-system: Displays the greeting message configuration.

system: Displays the system configuration.

user-interface: Displays the user interface configuration.

|: Uses regular expression to filter the router configurations.

begin: Displays the configurations beginning with the specified characters (string).

include: Displays the configurations including the specified characters (string).

exclude: Displays the configurations excluding the specified characters (string).

string: Characters of the regular expression.


Description

Using the display current-configuration command, you can display the current configurations of router.

The current configuration parameters that take the default values will not be displayed.

After finishing a set of configurations, the user can execute the display current-configuration command to view the currently effective parameters for the purpose of verifying the correctness of the configurations. Some parameters that the user has configured will not be displayed if their functions have not become valid yet. For example, the user can configure PPP parameters on an interface encapsulated with X.25 at the link layer, but he will not be able to see the PPP configuration information on the interface after executing the display current-configuration command.

For related commands, see save, reset saved-configuration, and display saved-configuration.

Example

Display the currently effective configuration parameters of the router.

<3Com> display current-configuration

sysname R1760

super password level 3 simple 123456

tcp window 8# undo multicast igmp-all-enable#interface Aux0 link-protocol ppp#interface Ethernet0/0/0#interface Serial0/0/0 link-protocol ppp#interface NULL0#bgp 15535 undo synchronization ##ospf 2 router-id 1.1.1.1#rip#user-interface con 0 set authentication password simple 123456 history-command max-size 30user-interface aux 0user-interface vty 0 4


#return

displaysaved-configuration

Syntax

display saved-configuration

View

Any view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the display saved-configuration command, you can display the saved router configurations, that is, the configurations that the router will apply the next time it is booted.

For related commands, see save, reset saved-configuration, and display current-configuration.

Example

Display the router configuration file in the storage device.

<3Com> display saved-configuration# sysname 3Com# tcp window 8# undo multicast igmp-all-enable#controller E1 3/0/0#interface Aux0 link-protocol ppp#interface Ethernet0/0/0#interface Serial0/0 link-protocol ppp#interface NULL0#user-interface con 0user-interface aux 0user-interface vty 0 4#return


display this Syntax

display this

View

Any view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the display this command, you can display the current configurations under this view.

Example

Display the current configuration of the view in question.

<3Com> display this# sysname 3Com# tcp window 8#

resetsaved-configuration

Syntax

reset saved-configuration

View

User view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the reset saved-configuration command, you can erase the saved router configuration.

You are recommended to use this command only when necessary and under the guidance of the support technician.

This command is likely to be used when:

A used router is applied to a new application environment and the existing configuration file cannot meet the requirements of the new environment. In this case, you need to erase the existing configuration file and reconfigure the router.

For related commands, see save, display current-configuration, display saved-configuration.


Example

Erase the saved router configuration.

<3Com> reset saved-configurationThis will erase the configuration in the device.The Router configurations will be erased to reconfigure!Are you sure?[Y/N]y

save Syntax

save[file-name ]

View

User view

Parameter

file-name: Filename, whose extension must be cfg

Description

Using the save command, you can save the current configuration information into the storage device.

After you finish a set of configurations and make their functions valid, you should save the current configuration file into the storage device.

For related commands, see reset saved-configuration, display current-configuration, and display saved-configuration.

Example

Save the current configuration information in the default storage device.

<3Com> save

upgrade Syntax

upgrade bootrom [ full ]

View

User view

Parameter

bootrom: Upgrades the BootRom program.

full: Upgrades the entire BootRom.

Description

Using the upgrade command, you can upgrade the bootrom program.


3Com Routers support online BootROM upgrade. You can upgrade the BootROM online by extracting the BootROM program from the upgrade software package and writing it into the BootROM.

When executing this command, you should make sure that the upgrade software package (named bootromfull) has existed in the root directory of the flash.

Example

Upgrade the BootROM program of R1760 Router, given that the upgrade software package has been stored in the root directory of the flash and the file name is “bootromfull”.

<3Com> upgrade bootrom full

User Interface Configuration Commands

acl Syntax

acl acl-number { inbound | outbound }

undo acl { inbound | outbound }

View

User interface view

Parameter

acl-number: Address access control list number.

inbound: Restricts incoming calls of a user interface.

outbound: Restricts outgoing calls of a user interface.

Description

Using the acl command, you can reference an ACL to restrict the rights of VTY (Telnet or SSH) and other types of user interfaces in placing incoming and outgoing calls. Using the undo acl command, you can remove the current settings.

By default, there is no incoming or outgoing call barring.

acl-number can only be the basic ACL.

Example

Remove the restriction on Telnet outgoing calls.

[3Com-ui-vty0] undo acl outbound

User Interface Configuration Commands 87

authentication-mode Syntax

authentication-mode { local | password | scheme { list | default } }

authentication-mode none

View

User interface view

Parameter

local: Performs local database authentication.

password: Performs local password authentication.

scheme: Performs AAA authorization authentication.

default: Uses the default authentication parameter.

list: Uses the authentication list.

none: Performs no authentication.

Description

Using the authentication-mode command, you can set the mode that a user interface uses to authenticate the login users. Using the authentication-mode none command, you can set the authentication mode to none, that is, the login users need not undergo authentication before they access the user interface.

By default, the authentication mode is set to password for the VTY user interface and none for other user interfaces.

For related command, see set authentication password.

Example

Enable local password authentication.

[3Com-ui0] authentication-mode password

auto-executecommand

Syntax

auto-execute command command

undo auto-execute command

View

User interface view

Parameter

command: Command to be automatically executed.


Description

Using the auto-execute command command, you can set a command to be automatically executed. Using the undo auto-execute command command, you can disable the automatic execution of the command.

By default, command auto-execution is disabled.

You should be aware of the following constraints before using the auto-execute command command:

■ CON does not support auto-execute command.

■ If there is only AUX but no CON on a router (AUX and CON shares the same port), the AUX will not support auto-execute command as well.

■ These constraints do not apply to other types of user interfaces.

When a user logs on, some command configured using auto-execute command on the terminal will automatically be executed. The user connection will be disconnected automatically once the execution of the command is finished.

A common approach is to configure the Telnet command using the auto-execute command command on the terminal so that the user may automatically connect to the specified host.

You should use this command with cautions because it will probably make you unable to make the regular system configurations via this user interface.

CAUTION: Before configuring the auto-execute co mmand command and saving the configuration (by executing the save command), you should make sure that you can access the system to remove the configuration by other means.

Example

Execute the telnet 10.110.100.1 command automatically after the user logs on from the AUX interface.

[3Com-ui-aux0] auto-execute command telnet 10.110.100.1

databits Syntax

databits { 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 }

undo databits

View

User interface view

Parameter

5: Five data bits.


6: Six data bits.

7: Seven data bits.

8: Eight data bits.

Description

Using the databits command, you can set user interface data bit. Using the undo databits command, you can restore the default data bit setting.

By default, data bit is set to 8.

The configuration can take effect only when the serial interface works in the asynchronous flow mode.

Example

Set data bit to 5.

[3Com-ui-aux0] databits 5

debugging vty Syntax

debugging vty { fsm | negotiate }

undo debugging vty { fsm | negotiate }

View

User view

Parameter

fsm: Debugging of the Telnet state machine.

negotiate: Debugging of the VTY negotiation.

Description

Using the debugging vty command, you can enable the debugging of the VTY. Using the undo debugging vty command you can disable the debugging of the VTY protocol.

Example

Enable the debugging of the VTY negotiation.

<3Com> debugging vty negotiate

displayuser-interface

Syntax

display user-interface [ type-name ] [ number ]


View

Any view

Parameter

type-name: Name of user interface type.

number: Number of user interface.

Description

Using the display user-interface command, you can display the details of user interface.

Example

Display information of user interface 0.

<3Com> display user-interface 0 Idx Type Tx/Rx Modem Privi Auth* 0 CON 0 9600 3 N

* : Current user-interface is active. I : Current user-interface is active and work in async mode. Idx : Absolute index of user-interface. Type : Type and relative index of user-interface. Privi: The privilege of user-interface. Auth : The authentication mode of user-interface. A: Authenticate use AAA. L: Authenticate use local database. N: Current user-interface need not authentication. P: Authenticate use current UI's password.

display users Syntax

display users [ all ]

View

Any view

Parameter

all: Displays the information of all the user interface users.

Description

Using the display users command, you can display the login information of the users on each user interface.

Example

Execute display users on the console.

<3Com> display usersUI Delay IPaddressUsername


* 0 CON 000:00:00* 1 VTY 000:00:0910.110.101.39dd

Where,

*: Terminal line in use.

UI: The first number and the second number are respectively the absolute number and relative number of user interface.

Username: Display the name of the user using this user-interface, namely the username that the user uses for accessing. As AAA authentication is unavailable yet, this item is null so far.

Delay: In minutes, it is the interval since the last input made by the user.

IP address: Displays the starting connection location, namely, IP address of the call-in host.

flow-control Syntax

flow-control { hardware | software | none }

undo flow-control

View

User interface view

Parameter

none: No flow control.

software: Software flow control.

hardware: Hardware flow control , only be effective to AUX port.

Description

Using the flow-control command, you can configure flow control mode. Using the undo flow-control command, you can restore the default flow control mode.

By default, none mode is used, that is, there is no flow control.

The configuration can become effective only when the involved serial interface works in the asynchronous flow mode.

When system is outputting, pressing <Ctrl+s> will stop the screen output, and <Ctrl+q> will resume the screen output.

Example

Configure software flow control in user interface view.

[3Com-ui-console0] flow-control software


free user-interface Syntax

free user-interface [type-name] number

View

User view

Parameter

type-name: User interface type.

number: Absolute/Relative user interface number.

Description

Using the free user-interface number command, you can clear the user interface with the number defined by the parameter number. Using the free user-interface type-name number command, you can clear the user interface with the number defined by number in the user interfaces of the type defined by type-name.

Example

Clear user-interface 0.

<3Com> free user-interface 0

history-commandmax-size

Syntax

history-command max-size size-value

undo history-command max-size

View

User interface view

Parameter

size-value: History buffer size, which is in the range of 0 to 256 and defaults to 10, that is, up to ten history commands can be stored.

Description

Using the history-command max-size command, you can set the history command buffer size. Using the undo history-command max-size command, you can restore the default history command buffer size.

Example

Set size of the history command buffer to 20.

[3Com-ui-console0] history-command max-size 20


idle-timeout Syntax

idle-timeout minutes [ seconds ]

undo idle-timeout

View

User interface view

Parameter

minutes: Number of minutes, in the range of 0 to 35791.

seconds: Number of seconds, in the range of 0 to 59.

Description

Using the idle-timeout command, you can set time interval for timed disconnection. Using the undo idle-timeout command, you can restore the default time value of timed disconnection.

The time interval for timed disconnection defaults to ten minutes.

Setting the time value to 0 will disable the timed disconnection, in which case a connection will not be cut off upon the expiration of preset time interval..

Example

Set the time interval for timed disconnection to one minute and 30 seconds.

[3Com-ui-console0] idle-timeout 1 30

modem Syntax

modem [ call-in | both ]

undo modem [ call-in | both ]

View

User interface view

Parameter

call-in: Allows incoming calls.

both: Allows both incoming and outgoing calls.

Description

Using the modem command, you can set the incoming/outgoing call attributes with Modem. Using the undo modem command, you can disable incoming and outgoing calls.

By default, both incoming and outgoing calls are allowed.


When executed without any parameters, the modem command enables both incoming and outgoing calls.

When executed without any parameters, the undo modem command disables both incoming and outgoing calls.

This command is only available for the AUX interface and other asynchronous interface, but not for Console port.

Example

Set Modem dialup at asynchronous serial ports.

[3Com-ui-tty] modem

modem auto-answer Syntax

modem auto-answer

undo modem auto-answer

View

User interface view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the modem auto-answer command, you can set the answering mode to auto-answer. Using the undo modem auto-answer command, you can set the answering mode to manual answer.

By default, the answering mode is manual answer.

This command is valid for the AUX interface and other asynchronous interfaces but not for the console interface.

When taking the modem dial-up connection approach, the user should first set the modem parameters on the involved user interface.

Example

Set the answering mode to auto-answer.

[3Com-ui-aux0] modem auto-answer

modem timer answer Syntax

modem timer answer seconds

undo modem timer answer


View

User interface view

Parameter

seconds: Timeout time in the range of 1 to 60 seconds.

Description

Using the modem timer answer command, you can set the timeout time waiting for the carrier signal after the off-hook action for setting up an inbound connection. Using the undo modem timer answer command, you can restore the default waiting timeout time.

The waiting timeout time defaults to 30 seconds.

This command is valid for the AUX interface and other asynchronous interfaces but not for the console interface.

Example

None

parity Syntax

parity { none | even | odd | mark | space }

undo parity

View

User interface view

Parameter

none: Implements no check.

even: Implements even parity check.

odd: Implements odd parity check.

mark: Implements mark check.

space: Implements space check.

Description

Using the parity command, you can set the check bit of a user interface. Using the undo parity command, you can restore the check mode of user interface to none.

By default, no check is performed.

The configuration can become effective only when the involved serial interface works in the asynchronous flow mode.


Example

Set the transmission check bit on AUX interface to odd parity.

[3Com-ui-aux0] parity odd

redirect Syntax

redirect

undo redirect

View

User interface view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the redirect command, you can set the redirection function, which is only valid for the AUX and TTY user interfaces, on an asynchronous port. Using the undo redirect command, you can disable the rediction function on the involved port.

By default, the system does not support redirection.

This command is only valid for the AUX and the TTY user interfaces. For example, executing the redirect command on a TTY user interface will enable the redirection function of the user interface.

For related commands, see telnet and display tcp status.

Example

Enable the redirection function of user interface TTY7.

[3Com-ui-tty7] redirect

screen-length Syntax

screen-length screen-length

undo screen-length

View

User interface view

Parameter

screen-length: Number of rows displayed in a screen in the event of split screen display, which is in the range of 0 to 512.


Description

Using the screen-length command, you can set the number of rows displayed in one screen at the terminal. Using the undo screen-length command, you can restore the number of rows in a terminal screen to 24.

By default, the number of rows in one screen is 24.

screen-length 0 indicates to disable the split screen function.

Example

Set the number of rows in one screen of the terminal to 30.

[3Com-ui-console0] screen-length 30

send Syntax

send [ number | all | type-name number ]

ViewUser view

Parameter

all: Sends messages to all user interfaces.

type-name: Name of user interface type.

number: Absolute/Relative user interface number.

Description

Using the send command, you can transfer messages between user interfaces.

Using the send all command, you can send messages to all user-interfaces.

Using the send number command, you can send messages to the user interface defined by specifying its number.

Using the send type-name number command, you can send messages to the user interface of type-name with specified number.

Example

Send messages to the console user-interface.

<3Com> send con 0Enter message, end with CTRL+Z or Enter; abort with CTRL+C:Hello,good morning!Send message? [Y/N]

set authenticationpassword

Syntax

set authentication password { simple | cipher } password

undo set authentication password


View

User interface view

Parameter

simple: Plain text password.

cipher: Encrypted password.

password: If password form is set to simple, the parameter password must be in plain text. If the password form is set to cipher, the password can be either in encrypted text or in plain text depending on what has been input. A plain-text password can be a string of no more than 16 consecutive characters, 1234567 for example. An encrypted password, however, must be of 24 characters in length and must be in ciphertext, _(TT8F]Y\5SQ=^Q`MAF4<1!! for example.

Description

Using the set authentication password command, you can set a local authentication password. Using the undo set authentication password command, you can remove the local authentication password.

Regardless of whether the password format is set to plain text or ciphertext, a user must input plain text password during the authentication.

When configuring a password, you must specify its format to simple or cipher. If the former has been specified, the password saved in the configuration file will be in plain text. If the latter is specified, however, the password will be displayed in ciphertext regardless of whether the password you enter is a simple password of 1 to 16 bytes or an encrypted password of 24 bytes.

By default, Telnet users is required to undergo login password authentication (which can be set by using the authentication-mode password command). If no password has been configured, the following information will be displayed:

password required, but none set

For related command, see authentication-mode.

Example

Set the local authentication password for the user interfaces vtys 0 to 4 to "3Com".

[3Com-ui-vty0-4] authentication-mode password[3Com-ui-vty0-4] set authentication password simple 3Com

shell Syntax

shell

undo shell


View

User interface view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the shell command, you can enable terminal services on a user interface. Using the undo shell command, you can remove the current setting.

By default, the terminal services are enabled on all the user interfaces.

Some constraints are put on the undo shell command. First, CON does not support this command. Second, if there is only AUX but no CON on a router (AUX and CON shares the same port), the AUX will not support this command as well. These constraints do not apply to other types of user interfaces.

Example

Disable terminal services on the virtual terminals (VTYs) 0 to 4.

[3Com] user-interface vty 0 4[3Com-ui-vty0-4] undo shell

The following information will be displayed for a login Telnet terminal:

% connection refused by remote host!

speed Syntax

speed speed-value

undo speed

View

User interface view

Parameter

speed-value: Transmission rate in bps.

Description

Using the speed command, you can set the transmission rate of a user interface. Using the undo speed command, you can restore the default transmission rate of the user interface.

By default, the transmission rate is 9600bps.

Only when the serial interface works in asynchronous flow mode will the configuration be effective.


The transmission rates supported by asynchronous serial interfaces include:

■ 300bps

■ 600bps

■ 1200bps

■ 4800bps

■ 9600bps

■ 19200bps

■ 38400bps

■ 57600bps

■ 115200bps

Example

Set the transmission rate of the user interface to 19200bps.

[3Com-ui-vty0] speed 19200

stopbits Syntax

stopbits { 1.5 | 1 | 2 }

undo stopbits

View

User interface view

Parameter

■ 1.5: Sets the stop bit to 1.5.

■ 1: Sets the stop bit to 1.

■ 2: Sets the stop bit to 2.

Description

Using the stopbits command, you can set the stop bit of a user interface. Using the undo stopbits command, you can restore the default stop bit of the user interface.

By default, the stop bit is set to 1.

Only when the serial interface works in asynchronous flow mode will the configuration be effective.

Example

Set the stop bit to 1.5.

[3Com-ui-vty0] stopbits 1.5


3.1.23 user privilege

Syntax

user privilege level level

undo user privilege level

View

User interface view

Parameter

level: Command level in the range of 0 to 3.

Description

Using the user privilege command, you can configure the command accessing level commensurate with the users accessing the system from the current user interface. Using the undo user privilege command, you can disable the current setting.

By default, the default command accessing levels of CON user interface and other user interfaces have been set to 3 and 0.

If the command accessing level assigned to a user interface conflicts with the precedence level assigned to the used username in the granted rights, the rights commensurate with the username will be preferred. For example, the precedence of the user 007 allows 007 to access level-3 commands and the privilege level assigned to the user interface VTY 0 only allows the login users to access level-2 commands. If 007 accesses the system from VTY0 in this case, it will be able to access the commands of level-3 and lower levels.

Example

Assign the users accessing the system from the user interface with the privilege allowing them to access level-2 commands.

[3Com-ui-vty0] user privilege level 2

After the user accesses the router from vty 0 via Telnet, the terminal will display:

<3Com>

user-interface Syntax

user-interface [ type-keyword ] user-interface-number [ ending-user-interface-number ]

View

System view


Parameter

type-keyword: Type name of user-interface.

user-interface-number: The first user-interface to be configured.

ending- user-interface-number: The last user-interface to be configured.

Description

Using the user-interface command, you can enter the single-user interface view or multi-user interface view.

Example

Enter the user-interface console 0 view to configure console 0.

[3Com] user-interface console 0[3Com-ui-console0]

Enter the user-interface vty 0 view to configure vty 0.

[3Com] user-interface vty 0[3Com-ui-vty0]

Enter the user-interface vty view to configure user-interfaces vtys 0 through 3.

[3Com] user-interface vty 0 3[3Com-ui-vty0-3]

enter the user-interface view to configure user-interfaces 0 through 4, including of console port type, of AUX interface type and of VTY interface type. The user interface types will be configured depending on the configuration interface available on the router.

The following example configures one console user interface and three VTY user interfaces, which may be right for the case where the router does not provide the AUX interface.

[3Com] user-interface 0 3[3Com-ui0-3]

debugging ntp-service

Syntax

debugging ntp-service { access | adjustment | authentication | event | filter | packet | parameter | refclock | selection | synchronization | validity | all }

undo debugging ntp-service { access | adjustment | authentication | event | filter | packet | parameter | refclock | selection | synchronization | validity | all }

View

User view

debugging ntp-service 103

Parameter

access: NTP access control debugging.

adjustment: NTP clock adjustment debugging.

all: All the NTP information debugging.

authentication: NTP identification authentication debugging.

event: NTP event debugging.

filter: NTP filter information debugging.

packet: NTP packet debugging.

parameter: NTP clock parameter debugging.

refclock: NTP reference clock debugging.

selection: NTP clock selection information debugging.

synchronization: NTP clock synchronous information debugging.

validity: Validity debugging of NTP remote host.

Description

Using the debugging ntp-service command, you can enable debugging of all types of NTP service information. Using the undo debugging ntp-service command, you can disable NTP service debugging.

By default, all the information debugging is disabled.

Example

Enable the ntp access control debugging.

<3Com> debugging ntp-service access

display ntp-servicesessions

Syntax

display ntp-service sessions [ verbose ]

View

Any view

Parameter

verbose: Displays the detailed information of sessions.

Description

Using the display ntp-service sessions command, you can display the status of all the sessions maintained by the local device ntp.


By default, the status of all the sessions maintained by the local device NTP is displayed.

The command without parameter verbose will display the brief information of all the sessions maintained by the local device NTP.

The command with parameter verbose will display the detailed information of all the sessions maintained by the local device NTP.

Example

Display the brief information of all the sessions maintained by the local device NTP

<3Com> display ntp-service sessions sourcerefidstnowpollreachdelayoffsetdis******************************************************************[12345]1.0.1.11LOCAL(0)316437726.1199.539.7note: 1 source(master),2 source(peer),3 selected,4 candidate,5 configured

display ntp-servicestatus

Syntax

display ntp-service status

View

Any view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the display ntp-service status command, you can display the state information of the NTP service.

Example<3Com> display ntp-service statusclock status: unsynchronized clock stratum: 16 reference clock ID: none nominal frequency: 100.0000 Hz actual frequency: 100.0000 Hz clock precision: 2^18 clock offset: 0.0000 ms root delay: 0.00 ms root dispersion: 0.00 ms peer dispersion: 0.00 ms reference time: 00:00:00.000 UTC Jan 1 1900(00000000.00000000)

Description of the display information is shown in the following table.

Table 3 Stating information of the NTP service

Display information Description


display ntp-servicetrace

Syntax

display ntp-service trace [ X.X.X.X ]

View

Any view

Parameter

X.X.X.X: The IP address of the NTP server functioning as the reference clock source.

Description

Using the display ntp-service trace command, you can display the summary information of each NTP time server from the local device tracing to the reference clock source.

This command is used to trace to the reference clock source from the local device along the time synchronous NTP server chain and display the summary information of each NTP server.

Example<3Com> display ntp-service traceserver4: stratum 4, offset 0.0019529, synch distance 0.144135server3: stratum 3, offset 0.0124263, synch distance 0.115784server2: stratum 2, offset 0.0019298, synch distance 0.011993server1: stratum 1, offset 0.0019298, synch distance 0.011993 refid 'GPS Reciever'

The above information displays the synchronous chain of server4. It indicates that server 4 can be synchronized to server 3, server 3 to server 2 and server 2 to server 1. Server 1 is synchronized from the reference clock source GPS Receiver.

ntp-service access Syntax

ntp-service access { query | synchronization | server | peer } acl-number

undo ntp-service access { query | synchronization | server | peer }

synchronized Indicate that the local system is synchronized to a remote NTP server or a clock source

unsynchronized Indicate that the local system is not synchronized to any remote NTP serverstratum The NTP stratum of the local systemreference If the local system has been synchronized to a remote NTP server or a clock

source, it indicates the address of the remote server or clock source IDnominal freq Nominal frequency of the hardware clock of the local systemactual freq Actual frequency of the hardware clock of the local systemprecision Precision of the local system clockreftime Reference timestampoffset Offset of the NTP server relative to the local clockroot delay Overall delay from the local to the master reference clockroot disper Dispersion of the local master reference clockpeer disper Dispersion of the remote NTP server


View

System view

Parameter

query: Query authority is limited.

synchronization: Only the server is permitted to access.

server: Allows the server to perform access and query.

peer: Absolute access.

acl-number: IP address access list number in the range of 1 to 99.

Description

Using the ntp-service access command, you can set the access control authority of the local device services. Using the undo ntp-service access command, you can remove the access control authority that has been set.

By default, there is no access authority.

This command is used to set the access authority of the NTP service of the local device. A security approach of minimum authority is provided in this manual. The more secure approach is to perform ID authentication. When there is an access request, this command can be used to make the matches in sequence in a way of from the minimum access authority to the maximum authority. All matches are based on the first match. The match order is peer, server, synchronization, query.

Example

Enable the peer in No.76 access list to perform time request, query control and time synchronization on the local device.

[3Com] ntp-service access peer 76

Enable the peer in No.28 access list to perform time request, query control on the local device.

[3Com] ntp-service access server 28

4.1.6 ntp-service authentication enable

Syntax

ntp-service authentication enable

undo ntp-service authentication enable

View

System view


Parameter

None

Description

Using the ntp-service authentication enable command, you can setNTP-service ID authentication. Using the undo ntp-serviceauthentication enable command, you can remove NTP-service IDauthentication.

By default, no ID authentication is set.

Example

Enable NTP ID authentication. [3Com] ntp-service authentication enable

ntp-serviceauthentication-keyid

Syntax

ntp-service authentication-keyid number authentication-mode md5 value

undo ntp-service authentication-keyid number

View

System view

Parameter

number: Key number in the range of 1 to 4294967295.

value: Key itself that is represented with 1 to 32 ASCII characters.

Description

Using the ntp-service authentication-keyid command, you can set NTP authentication key. Using the undo ntp-service authentication-keyid command, you can remove NTP authentication key.

By default, no authentication key is set.

This command is used to set NTP authentication key, which only supports MD5 authentication.

Example

Set MD5 ID authentication key. The key ID number is 10 and the key is BetterKey.

[3Com] ntp-service authentication-keyid 10 authentication-mode md5 BetterKey

ntp-servicebroadcast-client

Syntax

ntp-service broadcast-client


undo ntp-service broadcast-client

View

Interface view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the ntp-service broadcast-client command, you can configure the NTP broadcast client mode. Using the undo ntp-service broadcast-client command, you can remove the NTP broadcast client mode.

By default, no NTP broadcast client service is configured.

This command is used to specify the local interface on the local device to receive the NTP broadcast packets. The local device is run in client mode. It first listens discreetly to the broadcast packets from the server. When the first broadcast packet is received, the local device enables a short client/server mode to exchange messages with the remote server in order to estimate network delay. Then it enters the client mode to listen discreetly to the broadcast packets and synchronize the local clock according to the coming broadcast packets.

Example

Enable the interface Ethernet 1/0/1 to receive NTP broadcast message.

[3Com] interface ethernet 1/0/1[3Com-Ethernet1/0/1] ntp-service broadcast-client

ntp-servicebroadcast-server

Syntax

ntp-service broadcast-server [ authentication-keyid keyid | version number ] *

undo ntp-service broadcast-server

View

Interface view

Parameter

authentication-keyid: Defines the ID authentication key.

keyid: Key ID number used to transmit message to broadcast clients, which is in the range of 1 to 4294967295.

version: Defines the NTP version number.

number: NTP version number in the range of 1 to 3.


Description

Using the ntp-service broadcast-server command, you can configure NTP broadcast server mode. Using the undo ntp-service broadcast-server command, you can remove the NTP broadcast server mode.

By default, no broadcast service is configured and the version number is 3.

This command is used to specify an interface on the local device to transmit NTP broadcast packets. The local device is run in broadcast-server mode, which acts as the broadcast server to transmit broadcast messages periodically to the broadcast clients.

Example

Enable Ethernet 1/0/0 to transmit NTP broadcast packets. No.4 key is used for encryption and NTP version number is set to 3.

[3Com] interface ethernet 1/0/0[3Com-Ethernet1/0/0] ntp-service broadcast-server authentication-key 4 version 3

ntp-servicemax-dynamic-sessions

Syntax

ntp-service max-dynamic-sessions number

undo ntp-service max-dynamic-sessions

View

System view

Parameter

number: Number of sessions allowed to be established locally. It is in the range of 0 to (232-1).

Description

Using the ntp-service max-dynamic-sessions command, you can set the number of sessions allowed to be established locally. Using the undo ntp-service max-dynamic-sessions command, you can restore the default number of the sessions.

By default, 100 sessions are allowed to be established.

Example

Set the number of sessions the local allows to establish to 50.

[3Com] ntp-service max-dynamic-sessions 50

ntp-servicemulticast-client

Syntax

ntp-service multicast-client [ X.X.X.X ]


undo ntp-service multicast-client [ X.X.X.X ]

View

Interface view

Parameter

X.X.X.X: Multicast IP address, which is a Class D address.

Description

Using the ntp-service multicast-client command, you can configure the NTP multicast client mode. Using the undo ntp-service multicast-client command, you can remove the NTP multicast client mode.

By default, no multicast client service is configured and the X.X.X.X is 224.0.1.1.

This command is used to specify an interface on the local device to receive the NTP multicast packets. The local device is run in client mode. It first listens discreetly to the multicast packets from the server. When the first multicast packet is received, the local device enables a short client/server mode to exchange messages with the remote server in order to estimate network delay. Then it enters the client (multicast-client) mode to listen discreetly to the multicast packets and synchronize the local clock according to the coming multicast packets.

Example

Configure Ethernet 1/0/0 to receive NTP multicast packets. The multicast address corresponding to the multicast packets is 244.0.1.1.

[3Com] interface ethernet 1/0/0[3Com-Ethernet1/0/0] ntp-service multicast-client 224.0.1.1

ntp-servicemulticast-server

Syntax

ntp-service multicast-server [ X.X.X.X ] [ authentication-keyid keyid | ttl ttl-number | version number ] *

undo ntp-service multicast-server [ X.X.X.X ]

View

Interface view

Parameter

X.X.X.X: Multicast IP address, which is a Class D address. The default address is 224.0.1.1.

authentication-keyid: Defines the ID authentication key.

keyid: ID number used when transmitting messages to the multicast clients in the range of 1 to 4294967295.

ttl: Defines the life span of the multicast packet.


ttl-number: Life span of the multicast packet in the range of 1 to 255.



Description

Using the ntp-service multicast-server command, you can configure the NTP multicast server mode. Using the undo ntp-service multicast-server command, you can remove the NTP multicast server mode.

By default, no multicast service is configured, the IP address is 224.0.1.1 and the version number is 3.

This command is used to specify an interface on the local device to transmit NTP multicast packets. The local device is run in server (multicast-server) mode, which acts as the multicast server to transmit multicast messages periodically to the multicast clients.

Example

Configure Ethernet 1/0/0 to transmit NTP multicast messages. The multicast address is 244.0.1.1, encrypted by No.4 key. The NTP version number is set to 3.

[3Com] interface ethernet 1/0/0[3Com-Ethernet1/0/0] ntp-service multicast-server 224.0.1.1 authentication-keyid 4 version 3

ntp-servicerefclock-master

Syntax

ntp-service refclock-master [ X.X.X.X ] [ layers-number ]

undo ntp-service refclock-master [ X.X.X.X ]

View

System view

Parameter

X.X.X.X: IP address of the reference clock 127.127.t.u.

layers-number: Specifies the stratum of the local clock, which is in the range of 1 to 15.

Description

Using the ntp-service refclock-master command, you can set the external reference clock or the local clock to be the NTP master clock. Using the undo ntp-service refclock-master command, you can remove the setting of the NTP master clock.

By default, the X.X.X.X is not specified and the stratum is 1.


Setting the external reference clock or the local clock to be the NTP master clock provides other devices with synchronous time. The X.X.X.X is the IP address 127.127.t.u of the reference clock. When no IP address is specified, the local clock is the NTP master clock by default. This command can be used to specify the stratum of the NTP master clock.

Example

Set the local device to be the NTP master clock to provide synchronous time for other peers. The stratum is set to 3.

[3Com] ntp-service refclock-master 3

ntp-service reliableauthentication-keyid

Syntax

ntp-service reliable authentication-keyid number

undo ntp-service reliable authentication-keyid number

View

System view

Parameter

number: Key number in the range of 1 to 4294967295.

Description

Using the ntp-service reliable authentication-keyid command, you can specify the key to be reliable. Using the undo ntp-service reliable authentication-keyid command, you can remove the specified reliable key.

By default, no reliable authentication key is set.

If ID authentication is enabled, this command is used to specify that one or more keys are reliable. That is, the client can only synchronize the server that provides the reliable key. The client cannot synchronize the server that provides keys not being reliable.

Example

Enable NTP ID authentication in MD5 encryption method. The key ID number is 37 and the key is BetterKey. The key is specified to be reliable.

[3Com] ntp-service authentication enable[3Com] ntp-service authentication-keyid 37 authentication-mode md5 BetterKey[3Com] ntp-service reliable authentication-keyid 37

ntp-servicesource-interface

Syntax

ntp-service source-interface {interface-type interface-number }

undo ntp-service source-interface


View

System view

Parameter

interface-type: Interface type, which determines an interface along with the interface-number.

interface-number: Interface number, which determines an interface along with the interface-type.

Description

Using the ntp-service source-interface command, you can specify the interface for the local end to transmit NTP messages. Using the undo ntp-service source-interface command, you can delete the interface for the local end to transmit NTP messages.

The source IP address is determined by the output interface.

The source IP address is the specified one when specifying the local to transmit all the NTP messages. The IP address is obtained from the specified interface. If the user does not want the IP addresses on other interfaces to become the destination address responding to the messages, this command can be used to specify one interface to send all the NTP packets.

Example

Specify the source IP address of all the NTP output packets to use the IP address on the interface Ethernet 1/0/0.

[3Com] ntp-service source-interface ethernet 1/0/0

ntp-service unicast-peer Syntax

ntp-service unicast-peer X.X.X.X [ version number | authentication-key keyid | source-interface {interface-type interface-number } | priority ] *

undo ntp-service unicast-peer X.X.X.X

View

System view

Parameter

X.X.X.X: IP address of the remote server.



authentication-keyid: Defines ID authentication key.


keyid: Key ID number in the range of 1 to 4294967295, which is used when transmitting messages to the remote server.

source-interface: Specifies the interface name.


interface-number: Interface number, which determines an interface along with the interface-type. The source IP address for the NTP packets sent from the local end to the peer is got from this interface.

priority: Specifies the server as the preferred one.

Description

Using the ntp-service unicast-peer command, you can configure the NTP peer mode. Using the undo ntp-service unicast-peer command, you can remove the NTP peer mode.

By default, the version number is 3, ID authentication is not supported and the server is not the preferred one.

This command is used to set the remote server specified by the X.X.X.X as the peer of the local device. The local device is run in symmetric active mode. The X.X.X.X is a host address and cannot be the address of the broadcast, multicast or reference clock. In this configuration, the local device can be synchronized to the remote server and the remote server can also be synchronized to the local server.

Example

Display the configuration that the peer 128.108.22.44 provides the synchronous time for the local and the local peer can provide synchronous time for the peer. The version number is 3. The IP address of the NTP packets is obtained from Ethernet 1/0/0.

[3Com] ntp-service unicast-peer 128.108.22.44 version 3 source-interface ethernet 1/0/0

ntp-serviceunicast-server

Syntax

ntp-service unicast-server X.X.X.X [ version number | authentication-keyid keyid | source-interface {interface-type interface-number } | priority ] *

undo ntp-service unicast-server X.X.X.X

View

System view

Parameter

X.X.X.X: IP address of the remote server.


SNMP Configuration Commands 115


authentication-keyid: Defines ID authentication key.

keyid: Key ID number in the range of 1 to 4294967295, which is used when transmitting messages to the remote server.

source-interface: Specifies the interface name.


interface-number: Interface number, which determines an interface along with the interface-type. The source IP address for the NTP packets sent from the local end to the server is got from this interface.

priority: Specifies the server as the preferred one.

Description

Using the ntp-service unicast-server command, you can configure the NTP server mode. Using the undo ntp-service unicast-server command, you can remove the NTP server mode.

By default, the version number is 3, ID authentication is enabled and the server is not the preferred one.

This command is used to set the remote server specified by the X.X.X.X as the local time server. The X.X.X.X is a host address and cannot be the IP address of the broadcast, multicast or reference clock. In this configuration, the local client device can be synchronized to the remote server and the remote server cannot be synchronized to the local client device.

Example

Configure the local device to be provided with the synchronous time by the server 128.108.22.44. The version number is 3.

[3Com] ntp-service unicast-server 128.108.22.44 version 3

SNMP Configuration Commands

debugging snmp-agent Syntax

debugging snmp-agent { header | packet | process | trap }

undo debugging snmp-agent { header | packet | process | trap }

View

User view


Parameter

header: Enables the debugging of packet information header.

packet: Enables the packet debugging.

process: Enables the process debugging of SNMP packets.

trap: Enables the debugging of Trap packets.

Description

Using the debugging snmp-agent command, you can enable the SNMP Agent debugging and specify the debugging information of SNMP module. Using the undo debugging snmp-agent command, you can remove the current settings.

By default, the SNMP Agent debugging is disabled.

Example

Enable the debugging of SNMP Agent packet information header.

<3Com> debugging snmp-agent header

display snmp-agent Syntax

display snmp-agent { local-engineid | remote-engineid }

View

Any view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the display snmp-agent command, you can display the SNMP engine ID of local or remote device.

The SNMP engine is the only identification of the SNMP management, and it uniquely identifies a SNMP entity in one management domain. The SNMP engine is an important component of the SNMP entity, completing the functions of SNMP messages such as message dispatching, message processing, security authentication and access control.

Example

Display the engine ID of the local device.

<3Com> display snmp-agent local-engineidSNMP local EngineID: 000007DB7F0000013859

in the above information:


SNMP local EngineID indicates the ID of the local SNMP engine.

display snmp-agentcommunity

Syntax

display snmp-agent community [ read | write ]

View

Any view

Parameter

read: Displays the community name information with the read-only authority.

write: Displays the community name information with the authority of read and write.

Description

Using the display snmp-agent community command, you can display the currently configured community name of SNMPv1 or SNMPv2.

Example

Display the currently configured community name.

<3Com> display snmp-agent communityCommunity name:8040zlz Group name:8040zlz Storage-type: nonVolatile

Community name:8040core Group name:8040core Storage-type: nonVolatile

display snmp-agentgroup

Syntax

display snmp-agent group [ group-name ]

View

Any view

Parameter

group-name: Specifies the group name of the SNMP information to be displayed, ranging 1 to 32 bytes.

Description

Using the display snmp-agent group command, you can display the group information based on USM. Without parameters, the command displays the group information corresponding to all the specified group names, including group name, security mode, storage types on the router etc.


Example

Display the SNMP group name and security mode.

<3Com> display snmp-agent groupGroup name: v3r2 Security model: v3 noAuthnoPriv Readview: ViewDefault Writeview: <no specified> Notifyview :<no specified> Storage-type: nonVolatile

The corresponding fields displayed above are described in the following table:

Table 4 Description of display snmp-agent group fields

display snmp-agentmib-view

Syntax

display snmp-agent mib-view [ exclude | include | viewname view-name ]

View

Any view

Parameter

exclude: Specifies to exclude the SNMP MIB view attributes displayed and set.

include: Specifies to include the SNMP MIB view attributes displayed and set.

viewname: Specifies the view name to be displayed.

Description

Using the display snmp-agent mib-view command, you can display the currently configured MIB view.

Example

Display the currently configured MIB view.

<3Com> display snmp-agent mib-viewView name:ViewDefault MIB Subtree:internet Subtree mask:

Content DescriptionGroupname Name of SNMP group corresponding to the userReadview Name of read-only MIB view corresponding to the

groupWriteview Name of writable MIB view corresponding to the

groupNotifyview Name of notifying MIB view corresponding to the

groupStorage-type the type of storage type


Storage-type: nonVolatile View Type:included View status:active

View name:ViewDefault MIB Subtree:snmpUsmMIB Subtree mask: Storage-type: nonVolatile View Type:excluded View status:active

View name:ViewDefault MIB Subtree:snmpVacmMIB Subtree mask: Storage-type: nonVolatile View Type:excluded View status:active

View name:ViewDefault MIB Subtree:snmpModules.18 Subtree mask: Storage-type: nonVolatile View Type:excluded View status:active

The following table describes the parameters displayed above.

Table 5 Description of display snmp-agent mib-view fields

CAUTION: When the SNMP Agent is disabled, "Snmp Agent disabled" will be displayed for all the above display commands.

display snmp-agentstatistics

Syntax

display snmp-agent statistics

View

Any view

Parameter

None

Content DescriptionView name View nameMIB Subtree MIB subtreeStorage-type Storage typeViewType: Included/excluded Indicate whether to enable or disable the access to a

MIB objectActive Indicate the state of lines in the list


Description

Using the diplay snmp-agent statistics command, you can display the state and statistics of SNMP.

Example

Check the statistics of SNMP communication.

<3Com> display snmp-agent statistics41 Messages delivered to the SNMP entity0 Messages which were for an unsupported version7 Messages which used an unknown community name0 Messages which represented an illegal operation for the community supplied0 ASN.1 or BER errors in the process of decoding18 MIB objects retrieved successfully0 MIB objects altered successfully0 Get-request PDUs accepted and processed0 Get-next PDUs accepted and processed0 Set-request PDUs accepted and processed57 Messages passed from the SNMP entity0 SNMP PDUs which had a tooBig error (Maximum packet size 1500)0 SNMP PDUs which had a noSuchName error0 SNMP PDUs which had a badValue error0 SNMP PDUs which had a general error25 Response PDUs accepted and processed11 Trap PDUs accepted and processed

The following table describes the fields displayed above:

Table 6 Description of diplay snmp-agent statistics fields

Content DescriptionMessages delivered to the SNMP entity Total number of input SNMP packetsMessages which were for an unsupported version

Number of packets with version errors

Messages which used an unknown community name

Number of packets with community name errors

Messages which represented an illegal operation for the community supplied

Number of packets with authority errors corresponding to community name

ASN.1 or BER errors in the process of decoding Number of SNMP packets with encoding errorsMIB objects retrieved successfully Number of variables requested by NMSMIB objects altered successfully Number of variables set by NMSGet-request PDUs accepted and processed Number of get-request packets accepted and

processed (PDU: Protocol Data Unit)Get-next PDUs accepted and processed Number of received packets that get next

requests Set-request PDUs accepted and processed Number of received packets that set requestsMessages passed from the SNMP entity Total number of output SNMP packetsSNMP PDUs which had a tooBig error Number of SNMP packets with Too_big errors(Maximum packet size 1500) Maximum SNMP packet size is 1500.SNMP PDUs which had a noSuchName error Number of packets with requests of non-existing

MIB objectSNMP PDUs which had a badValue error Number of SNMP packets with Bad_values errorsSNMP PDUs which had a general error Number of SNMP packets with General_errorsResponse PDUs accepted and processed Number of response packets accepted and

processedTrap PDUs accepted and processed Number of Trap packets accepted and processed


display snmp-agentsys-info

Syntax

display snmp-agent sys-info [ contact | location | version ]*

View

Any view

Parameter

contact: Displays the contact information of the local device.

location: Displays the physical location information of the local device.

version: Displays the SNMP version running in the local agent.

Description

Using the display snmp-agent sys-info command, you can display the system information of the local SNMP device.

Example

Display the system information.

<3Com> display snmp-agent sys-info

display snmp-agentusm-user

Syntax

display snmp-agent usm-user [ engineid engineid | username user-name | group group-name ] *

View

Any view

Parameter

engineid: Displays the SNMPv3 user information of the specified engine ID.

engineid-string: Character string of the engine ID.

username: Displays the information of the specified SNMPv3 user.

user-name: User name, in the range of 1 to 32 bytes.

group: Displays the user information belonging to the related SNMP group.

group-name: Group name, in the range of 1 to 32 bytes.

Description

Using the display snmp-agent usm-user command, you can display the information about SNMP users.


An SNMP user is the remote user who executes SNMP management operation. The snmp-agent usm-user command is used to specify the SNMP user.

Example

Display the information about all the current users.

<3Com> display snmp-agent usm-userUser name: authuserEngine ID: 8000007DB20000000C025808 active

The following table describes the corresponding fields displayed above.

Table 7 Description of display snmp-agent usm-user fields

snmp-agent Syntax

snmp-agent

undo snmp-agent

View

System view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the snmp-agent command, you can enable the SNMP Agent and specify the SNMP configuration information. Using the undo snmp-agent command, you can disable SNMP Agent.

By default, the SNMP Agent is disabled.

The snmp-agent command can be used to enable SNMP Agent, and any configuration command of snmp-agent can also enable SNMP Agent. However, the undo form of the corresponding command does not have the functions. It will be invalid configuring the undo form of the command when the SNMP Agent is not enabled.

The undo snmp-agent command is used to disable the SNMP Agent on the condition that SNMP Agent has been enabled.

Content Descriptionauthuser Modify display informationUser name Character string used to identify the SNMP userEngine ID Character string used to identify the SNMP

deviceActive Indicate the state of SNMP USER


Example

Disable the operating SNMP version.

[3Com] undo snmp-agentSNMP Agent disabled

snmp-agent community Syntax

snmp-agent community { read | write } community-name [ [ mib-view view-name ] | [ acl acl-number ] ]*

undo snmp-agent community community-name

View

System view

Parameter

read: Indicates that the community name has the read-only authority in the specified view.

write: Indicates that the community name has the read and write authority in the specified view.

community-name: Character string of community name.

mib-view: MIB view available for the specified community name

view-name: Name of MIB view.

acl: Sets the ACL corresponding to the community name.

acl-number: Number of the ACL, range 1 to 99.

Description

Using the snmp-agent community command, you can set the community access name of SNMPV1 and SNMPV2C and MIB views and ACLs available for the community name. Using the undo snmp-agent community command, you can remove the setting.

For the related command, see snmp-agent group, snmp-agent usm-user.

Example

Set the community name to comaccess and allow read-only access with this community name.

[3Com] snmp-agent community read comaccess

Set the community name to mgr and enable reading and writing access.

[3Com] snmp-agent community write mgr


Delete the community name comaccess.

[3Com] undo snmp-agent community comaccess

snmp-agent group Syntax

snmp-agent group { v1 | v2c } group-name { [ read read-view ] | [ write write-view ] | [ notify notify-view ] } [ acl acl-number ]

undo snmp-agent group { v1 | v2c } group-name

snmp-agent group v3 group-name [ authentication | privacy ] { [ read read-view ] | [ write write-view ] | [ notify notify-view ] } [ acl acl-number ]

undo snmp-agent group v3 group-name [ authentication | privacy ]

View

System view

Parameter

v1: V1 security mode the user uses.

v2c: V2C security mode the user uses.


group-name: Group name, in the range of 1 to 32 bytes.

authentication: Performs authentication of the packet without encryption.

privacy: Performs authentication and encryption of the packet.

read: Enables the setting of read-only view.

read-view: Name of the read-only view, in the range of 1 to 32 bytes.

write: Enables the setting of reading and writing view.

write-view: Name of the reading and writing view, in the range of 1 to 32 bytes.

notify: Enables the setting of notify view.

notify-view: Name of the notify view , in the range of 1 to 32 bytes.

acl: Sets the list of access view.

acl-number: Standard access list, in the range of 1 to 99.

Description

Using the snmp-agent group command, you can configure a new SNMP group, i.e., to map the SNMP user to the SNMP view. Using the undo snmp-agent group command, you can delete a specified SNMP group.


By default, the snmp-agent group group-name v3 command adopts the method of not authenticating and encrypting.

For the related command, see snmp-agent mib-view, snmp-agent usm-user.

Example

Create an SNMPv3 group known as Johngroup.

[3Com] snmp-agent group v3 Johngroup

snmp-agentlocal-engineid

Syntax

snmp-agent local-engineid engineid

undo snmp-agent local-engineid

View

System view

Parameter

engineid: Character string of engine ID. It must be a hexadecimal number with the length of 5 to 32.

Description

Using the snmp-agent local-engineid command, you can configure an ID for the local SNMP engine on the router. Using the undo snmp-agent local-engineid command, you can remove the current settings.

By default, the engine ID is "enterprise number + equipment information" of the company. Each device determines the equipment information. It can be either the IP address, MAC address or the device defined hexadecimal number string.

For the related command, see snmp-agent usm-user.

Example

Configure the name of the local equipment as 12345.

[3Com] snmp-agent local-engineid 12345

snmp-agent mib-view Syntax

snmp-agent mib-view { included | excluded } view-name oid-tree

undo snmp-agent mib-view view-name

View

System view


Parameter

view-name: Name of the view.

oid-tree: OID MIB subtree for the Mib object subtree, which can be a character string of the variable OID or a character string of variable name. For example, it can be character strings such as 1.4.5.3.1 and system character strings or use "*" as wildcard, for example, 1.4.5.*.*.1.

included: Indicates to include the MIB subtree.

excluded: Indicates to exclude the MIB subtree.

Description

Using the snmp-agent mib-view command, you can create or update the information about a view. Using the undo snmp-agent mib-view command, you can delete the view information.

By default, the view name is ViewDefault and the OID is 1.3.6.1.

Currently, this command supports not only the input of the character string of the variable OID as a parameter but also the input of the node name as a parameter.

For the related command, see snmp-agent group.

Example

Create a view that includes all MIB-II objects.

[3Com] snmp-agent mib-view included mib2 1.3.6.1

snmp-agent packetmax-size

Syntax

snmp-agent packet max-size byte-count

undo snmp-agent packet max-size

View

System view

Parameter

byte-count: The maximum length of the SNMP packets that Agent can receive/send, in the range of 484 to 17940 bytes. The default value is 1500 bytes.

Description

Using the snmp-agent packet max-size command, you can set the maximum length of the SNMP message packets that Agent can receive/forward. Using the undo snmp-agent packet max-size command, you can remove the current setting.


Example

Set the maximum length of the SNMP packet that Agent can receive/forward to 1042 bytes.

[3Com] snmp-agent packet max-size 1042

snmp-agent sys-info Syntax

snmp-agent sys-info { contact sysContact | location sysLocation | version { { v1 | v2c | v3 } * | all } }

undo snmp-agent sys-info { contact | location | version { { v1 | v2c | v3 } * | all } }

View

System view

Parameter

contact: Sets the system maintenance contact information.

sysContact: Character sting describing the system maintenance contact information.

location: Sets the physical location of the device.

sysLocation: Device location information.

version: Sets the SNMP version number used by the system.

v1: SNMP V1.

v2c: SNMP V2C.

v3: SNMP V3.

*: Indicates selecting one to three items from the three options of v1, v2c and v3.

all: SNMP V1, SNMP V2C and SNMP V3.

Description

Using the snmp-agent sys-info command, you can set the system information, including the system maintenance information, physical location information of the device and the SNMP version number used. Using the undo snmp-agent sys-info command, you can remove the current setting.

By default,

By default, the system contact information is "R&D Beijing,3Com Technologies Co.,Ltd.", the system location character string is "Beijing China" and the version is SNMPv3

For the related command, see display snmp-agent sys-info.


Example

Set the system maintenance information as call Operator at 010-82882488.

[3Com] snmp-agent sys-info contact call Operator at 010-82882488

snmp-agent target-host Syntax

snmp-agent target-host trap address udp-domain X.X.X.X [ udp-port port-number ] params securityname security-string [ v1 | v2c | v3 { authentication | privacy } ]

undo snmp-agent target-host X.X.X.X securityname security-string

View

System view

Parameter

trap: Specifies the host as the trap host.

address: Specifies the address of the destination host where the SNMP message transmits.

udp-domain: Specifies that the transmission domain of the destination host is based on UDP.

X.X.X.X: IP address of the host.

udp-port: Specifies the port.

port-number: Specifies the port number that receives the trap packet.

params: Specifies the information of the logging host that generates SNMP messages.

securityname: Specifies the community name of SNMPV1, V2C or the username of SNMPV3.

security-string: Community name of SNMPV1, V2C or the username of SNMPV3, in the range of 1 to 32 bytes.

v1: SNMPV1.

v2c: SNMPv2c.

v3: SNMPV3.

authentication: Performs authentication with the packet without encryption.

privacy: Performs both authentication and encryption with the packet.


Description

Using the snmp-agent target-host command, you can set the destination that receives the SNMP notification. Using the undo snmp-agent target-host command, you can remove the host that receives the SNMP notification.

■ The snmp-agent target-host command should be used in cooperation with the snmp-agent trap enable command.

■ The snmp-agent trap enable command is used to enable to forward Trap packets. If one host is specified to forward notify message, the host should be configured at least one snmp-agent target-host command and one snmp-agent trap enable command.

For the related command, see snmp-agent trap enable, snmp-agent trap source, snmp-agent trap life.

Example

Enable to send SNMP Trap packets to 10.1.1.1, using the community name of comaccess.

[3Com] snmp-agent trap enable snmp[3Com] snmp-agent target-host trap address udp-domain 10.1.1.1 params securityname comaccess

Send SNMP Trap packets to 10.1.1.1, using the community name of public.

[3Com] snmp-agent trap enable standard[3Com] snmp-agent target-host trap address udp-domain 10.1.1.1 params securityname public

snmp-agent trap enable Syntax

snmp-agent trap enable [ trap-type [ trap-list ] ]

undo snmp-agent trap enable [ trap-type [ trap-list ] ]

View

System view

Parameter

trap-type: Enables the trap packet of this type.

trap-list: The parameter list corresponding to the trap packets of trap-type.

Description

Using the snmp-agent trap enable command, you can enable the device to send Trap packets and set the trap or notification parameters. Using the undo snmp-agent trap enable command, you can remove the current setting.

By default, sending Trap packets is disabled.


The snmp-agent trap enable command indicates to allow sending all types of SNMP Trap packets of all the modules, when there is no parameter.

The snmp-agent trap enable command should be used in cooperation with the snmp-agent target-host command. The snmp-agent target-host command is used to specify the hosts to which the Trap information will be sent. To send Trap information, the user should configure at least one snmp-agent target-host command.

The module trap-type forwarding the Trap packets can be snmp, bgp and vrrp (VRRP Trap packets).

Types of packets that SNMP modules can send include authentication, coldstart, linkdown, linkup and warmstart.

For the related command, see snmp-agent target-host, snmp-agent trap-source, snmp-agent trap-timeout.

Example

Allow sending the Trap packets, which fail to perform SNMP authentication, to 10.1.1.1. The trap packets are in the form of V2C with the community name of public.

[3Com] snmp-agent trap enable snmp authentication[3Com] snmp-agent target-host trap address udp-domain 10.1.1.1 params securityname public v2c

Enable to send all types of BGP Trap packets to 10.1.1.1. The trap packets are in the form of V3 with the community name of super. The packets are authenticated but not encrypted.

[3Com] snmp-agent trap enable bgp[3Com] snmp-agent target-host trap address udp-domain 10.1.1.1 params securityname super v3 authentication

snmp-agent trap life Syntax

snmp-agent trap life seconds

undo snmp-agent trap life

View

System view

Parameter

seconds: Timeout in seconds, ranging 1 to 2592000 with the default value as 120 seconds.


Description

Using the snmp-agent trap life command, you can set the conservation time of the Trap packet and the Trap packets exceeding the time will be dropped. Using the undo snmp-agent trap life command, you can remove the current setting.

If the conservation time for the Trap packets the system has configured is seconds, the Trap packets over the conservation time will be discarded without being sent or conserved.

For the related command, see snmp-agent trap enable, snmp-agent target-host.

Example

Set the timeout of the Trap packet to 60 seconds.

[3Com] snmp-agent trap-life 60

snmp-agent trapqueue-size

Syntax

snmp-agent trap queue-size size

undo snmp-agent trap queue-size

View

System view

Parameter

size: Length of the message queue, ranging 1 to 1000.

Description

Using the snmp-agent trap queue-size command, you can set the length of the message queue of the Trap packet sent to the destination host. Using the undo snmp-agent trap queue-size command, you can cancel the setting.

By default, the length is 100.

For the related command, see snmp-agent trap enable, snmp-agent target-host, snmp-agent trap life.

Example

Set the length of the message queue of the host forwarding the Trap packet to 200.

[3Com] snmp-agent trap queue-size 200

snmp-agent trap source Syntax

snmp-agent trap source interface-type interface-number [ subinterface-type ]

undo snmp-agent trap source


View

System view

Parameter



subinterface-name: Subinterface type.

Description

Using the snmp-agent trap source command, you can specify the source address from which Trap will be sent. Using the undo snmp-agent trap source command, you can remove the Trap source address.

There is always a Trap address when the SNMP Trap message is being sent from a server, no matter from which interface it is sent. This command can be used to trace a special event.

For the related command, see snmp-agent trap enable, snmp-agent target-host.

Example

Specify the IP address of the Ethernet interface 1/0/0 as the source address of Trap packet.

[3Com] snmp-agent trap source ethernet 1/0/0

snmp-agent usm-user Syntax

snmp-agent usm-user { v1 | v2c } user-name group-name [ acl acl-number ]

undo snmp-agent usm-user { v1 | v2c } user-name group-name

snmp-agent usm-user v3 user-name group-name [ [ authentication-mode { md5 | sha } auth-password ] [ privacy des56 priv-password ] ] [ acl acl-number ]

undo snmp-agent usm-user v3 user-name group-name { local | engineid engineid-string }

View

System view

Parameter


v2c: V2C security mode the user uses.


user-name: User name, in the range of 1 to 32 bytes.


group-name: Group name the user is corresponding to, in the range of 1 to 32 bytes.

authentication-mode: Specifies the security level as requiring authentication.

md5: Specifies the authentication protocol as HMAC-MD5-96.

sha: Specifies the authentication protocol as HMAC-SHA-96.

auth-password: Authentication password, which is a character string in the range of 1 to 64 bytes.

privacy: Specifies the security level as encrypted.

des56: Specifies the encryption protocol as DES.

priv-password: Encryption password, which is a character string in the range of 1 to 64 bytes.

acl: Sets the list of access view.

acl-number: Standard access list, in the range of 1 to 99.

local: Indicates the local entity user.

engineid: Specifies the engine ID associated with the user.

engineid-string: Character string of engine ID.

Description

Using the snmp-agent usm-user command, you can add a new user to a SNMP group. Using the undo snmp-agent usm-user command, you can delete a SNMP group user.

When the user configures a remote user for a certain Agent, the engine ID is needed during authentication. If the engine ID changes after the user has been configured, the user corresponding to the original engine ID will be ineffective.

For SNMPV1 and SNMPV2C, this command adds a new community name. For SNMPV3, it adds a new user to a SNMP group.

For the related command, see snmp-agent group, snmp-agent community, snmp-agent local-engineid.

Example

Add a user named "John" to the SNMP group named "Johngroup", with the security level being "auth", the authentication protocol being HMAC-MD5-96 and the password being "hello".

[3Com] snmp-agent usm-user v3 John Johngroup authentication-mode md5 hello


Terminal Service Commands

Terminal Service ofTelnet

debugging telnet Syntax

debugging telnet

undo debugging telnet

View

User view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the debugging telnet command, you can enable the debugging for Telnet connection. Using the undo debugging telnet command, you can disable the debugging for Telnet connection.

By default, the debugging for Telnet connection is disabled.

For the related command, see telnet.

Example<3Com> debugging telnet

display tcp status Syntax

display tcp status

View

Any view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the display tcp status command, you can display all TCP connections currently established with the router.

This command is used to display all TCP connections currently established with the router. Compared with display users, the display tcp status command can display more information about Telnet clients and servers.

Terminal Service Commands 135

The information that this command can display includes: the local address of TCP connection, local port number, external address, external port number, and connection state.

For the related command, see telnet.

Example<3Com> display tcp statusTCPCB Local Address Foreign Address State129.102.100.142 23 129.102.001.092 ESTABLISHED028ca414 0.0.0.0.23 0.0.0.0.0 LISTEN

The above shown information indicates: one TCP connection has been set up. the local IP address of the TCP connection is 129.102.100.142 with the local port number as 23, and the remote IP address is 129.102.001.92, and there is also a local server process monitoring the No. 23 port.

telnet Syntax

telnet [ vpn-instance vpn-instance-name ] host-ip-address [ service-port ]

View

User view

Parameter

vpn-instance vpn-instance-name: Sets the vpn-instance name of MPLS VPN.

host-ip-address: Hostname or IP address of the remote router, in dotted decimal format.

service-port: TCP port number for the remote router to provide Telnet service, in the range of 0 to 65535.

Description

Using the telnet command, you can log on another device from the current router.

By default, if the service-port is not specified, the Telnet port number is 23.

By executing the telnet command, the user can conveniently log on another device from a router to achieve remote management.

For the related command, see display tcp status.

Example

Log on another router 3Com2 (the IP address is 129.102.0.1) from the current router 3Com1.

<3Com>telnet 129.102.0.1Trying 129.102.0.1...Service port is 23


Connected to 129.102.0.1<3Com2>

SSH Configuration Commands

debugging rsa Syntax

debugging rsa

undo debugging rsa

View

User view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the debugging rsa command, you can send the detailed information about each process and packet structure of RSA algorithm to information center in debugging form and to debug certain user-interface separately. Using the undo debugging rsa command, you can disable the debugging.

By default, the debugging is disabled.

For the related command, see rsa local-key-pair create, rsa local-key-pair destroy.

Example

Enable the RSA debugging.

<3Com> debugging rsa

debugging ssh server Syntax

debugging ssh server { VTY index | all }

undo debugging ssh server { VTY index | all }

View

User view

Parameter

index: Debugged SSH channel. In default, its value ranges from 0 to 4 and is limited by VTY number.

all: All SSH channels.

SSH Configuration Commands 137

Description

Using the debugging ssh server command, you can send the information about negotiation process regulated by SSH1.5 protocol to information center as debugging formation and to debug certain user-interface separately. Using the undo debugging ssh server command, you can disable the debugging.

By default, the debugging is disabled.

For the related command, see ssh server authentication-retries, ssh server rekey-interval, ssh server timeout.

Example

Print debugging information when running SSH.

[3Com] debugging ssh server vty 0 00:23:20: SSH0: starting SSH control process00:23:20: SSH0: sent protocol version id SSH-1.5-3Com-1.2500:23:20: SSH0: protocol version id is - SSH-1.5-1.2.2600:23:20: SSH0: SSH_SMSG_PUBLIC_KEY msg00:23:21: SSH0: SSH_CMSG_SESSION_KEY msg - length 112, type 0x0300:23:21: SSH: RSA decrypt started00:23:21: SSH: RSA decrypt finished00:23:21: SSH: RSA decrypt started00:23:21: SSH: RSA decrypt finished

display rsa local-key-pairpublic

Syntax

display rsa local-key-pair public

View

Any view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the display rsa local-key-pair public command, you can display the public key of host key pair of server and server key pair. If no key is generated, the system will prompt that no key is found, e.g., RSA keys not found.

For the related command, see rsa local-key-pair create.

Example<3Com> display rsa local-key-pair public% Key pair was generated at: 12:26:33 UTC 2002/4/4 Key name: rtvrp_Host Usage: Encryption Key Key Data:30470240 AF7DB1D0 DA78944F 53B7B59B 40D425D0 DC9C57D2 A60916C2 1F165807 08B84DDB 5F4DB8E7 A115B74E 2D41D96C AC61D276 AA027E41 DD48DE64 696E0934 EB872805 02030100 01


% Key pair was generated at: 12:26:45 UTC 2002/4/4 Key name: rtvrp_Server Usage: Encryption Key Key Data:30670260 C05280D9 BA0D56C8 7BE43379 8634CDE7 83ABA9A2 3F36280E 25995487 4FF6AD7A 0E57871C 761E6D92 9914D8C5 CC577388 5B580B94 C2172C8F 36039EED 160A0478 651DED3A 9CCF1AAD D800AAF2 DF7FBEC4 A13ADA59 9E738319 AF366B8B 519D39F5 02030100 01

display rsapeer-public-key

Syntax

display rsa peer-public-key [ brief | name keyname ]

View

Any view

Parameter

brief: Displays the brief information of all the remote public key.

keyname: Specifies the key name to be displayed. It is the continuous character string, 0< length value<64.

Description

Using the display rsa peer-public-key command, you can display the specified RSA public key. If there is no public key specified, all public keys will be displayed.


Example<3Com> display rsa peer-public-keyAddress Bits Name 1023 abcd 1024 hq 1024 wn1 1024 hq_all[3Com] display rsa peer-public-key name abcdKey name:abcdKey address:Data:30818602 8180739A 291ABDA7 04F5D93D C8FDF84C 42746319 91C164B0 DF178C55 FA833591 C7D47D53 81D09CE8 2913D7ED F9C08511 D83CA4ED 2B30B809 808EB0D1 F52D045D E40861B7 4A0E1355 23CCD74C AC61F8E5 8C452B2F 3F2DA0DC C48E3306 367FE187 BDD94401 8B3B69F3 CBB0A573 202C16BB 2FC1ACF3 EC8F828D 55A36F1C DDC4BB45 504F0201 25

display ssh server Syntax

display ssh server { status | session }

View

Any view


Parameter

status: Displays the SSH status information.

session: Displays SSH session information.

Description

Using the display ssh server command, you can display the SSH status or session.

For the related command, see ssh server authentication-retries, ssh server rekey-interval, ssh server timeout.

Example

Display SSH status and configuration parameters.

[3Com]display ssh server statusSSH version : 1.5SSH connection timeout : 60 secondsSSH server key generating interval : 1 hoursSSH Authentication retries : 3 times Display SSH session respectively.[3Com] display ssh server sessionConnectionVersionEncryptionStateUsernameVTY0 1.5 DESSession started3ComVTY3 1.5 DESSession startedrouter

peer-public-key end Syntax

peer-public-key end

View

Public key view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the peer-public-key end command, you can return to the system view from the public key view.

For the related command, see rsa peer-public-key and public-key-code begin.

Example

Exit public view and save the configuration.

[3Com] rsa peer-public-key 3Com003[3Com-rsa-public-key] peer-public-key end[3Com]


display sshuser-information

Syntax

display ssh user-information [ username ]

View

Any view

Parameter

username: Valid SSH user name defined by AAA.

Description

Using the display ssh user-information command, you can display the information about current SSH user including user name, corresponding key name and user authentication mode. If you specify the username parameter, then the information about the specified user will be displayed.

For the related command, see ssh user username assign rsa-key, ssh user username authentication-type.

Example

Display the user information.

[3Com] display ssh user-informationUsername user-public-key-name authentication-typeJin jinrsahanqi1 816pubpassword1024 file3rsa4000 hq_rsaallhanqi_rsahq_rsa rsahanqi_allhq_all all

protocol inbound Syntax

protocol inbound { all | ssh | telnet | pad }

View

User interface view of VTY type

Parameter

all: Supports all the protocols, including Telnet and SSH.

ssh: Only supports SSH, not support Telnet.

telnet: Only supports Telnet, not support SSH.

pad: Only supports pad protocol.


Description

Using the protocol inbound command, you can specify the protocols supported by the current user interface.

By default, the system supports all the protocols, that is, Telnet and SSH.

When the command is used to specify the protocols supported by the current user interface and SSH is enabled, SSH is still unavailable if the rsa key of the local router is not configured. The configuration result will take effect at the next login request.

If SSH is configured as the protocols supported by the current user interface, you should configure the corresponding authentication method as authentication-mode local or authentication-mode scheme default (using AAA) to ensure the successful login. If the authentication method is configured as authentication-mode password and authentication-mode none, the configuration of protocol inbound ssh will fail.

For the related command, see user-interface vty.

Example

Disable the Telnet function of vty0 to vty4 and only support the SSH function.

[3Com] user-interface vty 0 4[3Com-ui-vty0-4] protocol inbound ssh Disable the Telnet function of vty0 and only support the SSH function.[3Com] user-interface vty 0[3Com-ui-vty0] protocol inbound ssh

public-key-code begin Syntax

public-key-code begin

View

Public key view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the public-key-code begin command, you can enter the edit view of public key.

Before using this command, you must use the rsa peer-public-key command to specify one key name. After the public-key-code begin command is input, the system enters the edit view of public key and you can input the key data. When the key data are input, the space can exist between characters and you can press enter key to continue the data input. The public key configured must be the hex


character ring coded according to public key format. The public key is generated in stochastic mode by the client software supporting SSH.

For the related command, see rsa peer-public-key, public-key-code end.

Example

Enter the edit view of public key and to input key.

[3Com] rsa peer-public-key 3Com003 [3Com-rsa-public-key] public-key-code begin[3Com-key-code] 308186028180739A291ABDA704F5D93DC8FDF84C427463[3Com-key-code] 1991C164B0DF178C55FA833591C7D47D5381D09CE82913[3Com-key-code] D7EDF9C08511D83CA4ED2B30B809808EB0D1F52D045DE4[3Com-key-code] 0861B74A0E135523CCD74CAC61F8E58C452B2F3F2DA0DC[3Com-key-code] C48E3306367FE187BDD944018B3B69F3CBB0A573202C16[3Com-key-code] BB2FC1ACF3EC8F828D55A36F1CDDC4BB45504F020125[3Com-key-code] public-key-code end

public-key-code end Syntax

public-key-code end

View

Public key edit view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the public-key-code end command, you can quit public key edit view to public key view and to save the public key configured by the user. In addition, to quit public key view to public key chain view.

After this command is executed, the edit process of public key will be ended. Before saving the public key, the system will check the validity of key. If there are illegal characters in the public key character string configured by the user, the system will display relevant prompt information that illegal characters are input. The public key configured by the user will be discarded so this configuration fails. If the public key configured is valid, it will be saved in public key chain table of client.

For the related command, see rsa peer-public-key, public-key-code begin.

Example

Quit and save the configuration.

[3Com-rsa-key-code] public-key-code end[3Com-rsa-public-key]


rsa local-key-pair create Syntax

rsa local-key-pair create

View

System view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the rsa local-key-pair create command, you can generate the local RSA host key pair and server key pair.

When this command is used to configure, the system will give alarm and prompt that former key will be replaced if RSA key has existed. The view of generated key pair is router name+ server and router name+ host, e.g., 3Com_host and 3Com_server. This command will not be stored in configuration file.

After this command is input, the system will prompt you to enter the digit of host key. The digit of server key pair should differ from that of host key pair in 128 digits at least. The minimum length of server key pair and host key pair is 512 digits and the maximum length is 2048 digits. If there has been key pair, the user should confirm whether to change it.

The primary operation to accomplish SSH login is to configure and generate local RSA key pair. Before performing other SSH configurations, you must accomplish the configuration of the rsa local-key-pair create command to generate local key pair. It is necessary to execute this command only once and it is unnecessary to execute again after the router restarts.

For the related command, see rsa local-key-pair destroy.

Example

Configure and generate local host key pair and server key pair.

[3Com] rsa local-key-pair createThe name for the keys will be: rtvrp_Host% You already have RSA keys defined for rtvrp_Host% Do you really want to replace them? [yes/no]:yChoose the size of the key modulus in the range of 512 to 2048 for your Keys.Choosing a key modulus greater than 512 may take a few minutes.How many bits in the modulus [512]:512Generating keys........++++++++++++........................++++++++++++..........++++++++............................++++++++[3Com]


rsa local-key-pairdestroy

Syntax

rsa local-key-pair destroy

View

System view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the rsa local-key-pair destroy command, you can remove all RSA keys of server (including host key pair and server key pair).

After this command is input, you should confirm whether to remove all RSA keys of server. And this command is not stored in configuration file.


Example

Remove all keys of server.

[3Com] rsa local-key-pair destroy% Keys to be removed are named rtvrp_Host .% Do you really want to remove these keys? [yes/no]:y[3Com]

rsa peer-public-key Syntax

rsa peer-public-key key-name

View

System view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the rsa peer-public-key command, you can enter the view of public key view.

After the command is input, the system will enter the view of public key view. This command can be used to configure the public key of client with the public-key-code begin command together. The public key of client is generated in stochastic mode by the client software. Please use the client software supporting SSH1.5.

For the related command, see public-key-code begin, public-key-code end.


Example

Enter the public key view.

[3Com] rsa peer-public-key 3Com002[3Com-rsa-public]

ssh serverauthentication-retries

Syntax

ssh server authentication-retries times

undo ssh server authentication-retries

View

System view

Parameter

times: Specifies the authentication re-try times, 1<=re-try times<=5.

Description

Using the ssh server authentication-retries command, you can set the SSH connection authentication re-try times to enable it in next login. Using the undo ssh server authentication-retries command, you can restore the default value of SSH connection authentication retry times.

By default, the re-try times are 3.

For the related command, see display ssh sever.

Example

Specify the re-try times for registration authentication as 4.

[3Com] ssh server authentication-retries 4

ssh server rekey-interval Syntax

ssh server rekey-interval hours

undo ssh server rekey-interval

View

System view

Parameter

hours: Updates period. It ranges from 1 to 24 in hour. 0 cannot be input for this parameter.


Description

Using the ssh server rekey-interval command, you can set the update times of server key. Using the undo ssh server rekey-interval command, you can cancel the current settings.

By default, the server key is not updated.


Example

Set the update interval of server key to 3 hours.

[3Com] ssh server rekey-interval 3[3Com]

ssh server timeout Syntax

ssh server timeout seconds

undo ssh server timeout

View

System view

Parameter

seconds: Specifies the login time-out time. It ranges from 1 to 120 seconds.

Description

Using the ssh server timeout command, you can set the time-out time of SSH connection authentication to enable it valid in next login. Using the undo ssh server timeout command, you can restore the default value of time-out time of SSH connection authentication.

By default, the time-out time is 60 seconds.


Example

Set the login time-out time to 80 seconds.

[3Com] ssh server timeout 80

ssh user assign Syntax

ssh user username assign rsa-key keyname

undo ssh user username assign rsa-key


View

System view

Parameter

keyname: Configured public key name of client. It is the continuous character string, 0< length value £ 32.

username: Valid SSH user name defined by AAA module.

Description

Using the ssh user assign command, you can assign one existing public key (keyname) for the user (username). Using the undo ssh user assign command, you can delete the relationship between the user and its public key.

When the system assigns public key for the user, the system will regard the public key assigned last if the user has been assign a public key.

AAA module takes charge of the creation and deletion of local system users. When AAA module creates one user of SSH type, it will notice SSH and SSH will add the user into user set maintained by it. When AAA module deletes any one user, it will notice SSH and SSH will match the user in its user name set. SSH will delete the user from the user set if it finds the match of the user in user name set.

The new configured user public key will be valid in next login.

For the related command, see display ssh user-information.

Example

Assign key key1 for the user smith.

[3Com] ssh user smith assign rsa-key key1[3Com]

ssh userauthentication-type

Syntax

ssh user username authentication-type { password | rsa | all }

undo ssh user username authentication-type { password | rsa | all }

View

System view

Parameter

password: Forces to specify the authentication mode of the user as password.

rsa: Forces to specify the authentication mode of the user as RSA.

all: Specifies the authentication mode of the user as either password or RSA.


Description

Using the ssh user authentication-type command, you can specify the authentication method for a special user. Using the undo ssh user authentication-type command, you can restore the default mode that login is always denied.

By default, the system will always deny the login.

The authentication mode must be specified for the new user, or the user will not be able to login. The new configured authentication mode will take effect in next login.

For the related command, see display ssh user-information.

Example

Specify the authentication mode as password for the user smith.

[3Com] ssh user smith authentication-type password[3Com3Com]

3 INTERFACE MANAGEMENT COMMANDS

Interface Management Commands

debugging physical Syntax

debugging physical { all | error | cell | packet } interface interface-type interface-number

undo debugging physical { all | error | cell | packet } interface interface-type interface-number

View

User view

Parameter

all: Enables alarming of all levels.

error: Enables error-level alarming.

cell: Enables cell-level alarming.

packet: Enables packet-level alarming.

interface interface-type interface-number: Specifies interface type and number.

Description

Using the debugging physical command, you can enable alarming for a specified interface. Using the undo debugging physical command, you can disable alarming for a specified interface.

Example

None

description Syntax

description interface-description

undo description

150 CHAPTER 3: INTERFACE MANAGEMENT COMMANDS

View

Interface view

Parameter

interface-description: Character string describing the router interface, which is allowed to comprise no more than 80 characters. By default, the description string is “3Com Router, xxxxxx interface”.

Description

Using the description command, you can set the interface description. Using the undo description command, you can restore the default interface description.

This command has no special purpose or function other than identifying an interface.

For related command, see display interface.

Example

Change the description of the Ethernet interface Ethernet 0/0/0 to “3Com Router Ethernet interface”.

[3com]interface ethernet 0/0/0[3com-Ethernet0/0/0]description 3Com Router ethernet interface

display interface Syntax

display interface type number [ .sub-number ]

View

Any view

Parameter

type: Interface type which is used along with number to identify an interface.

number: Interface number which is used along with type for identifying an interface.

sub-number: Subinterface number.

Description

Using the display interface command, you can display the current running state and other information of an interface.

Executing this command will display the following information:

■ Physical state and protocol state of the interface

■ Physical features of the interface (including operating mode, DTE/DCE, clock selection, external cable, etc.)

Interface Management Commands 151

■ IP address of the interface

■ The encapsulated link layer protocol of the interface and the running state of the link layer protocol and the statistics.

■ Statistics of the incoming and outgoing packets on the interface

For a related command, see reset counters interface.

Example

View the running state and the relevant information of Serial 0/0/0.

[3com]display interface serial 0/0/0Serial0/0/0 is up , line protocol is upDescription : 3Com Router, Serial0/0/0 InterfaceThe Maximum Transmit Unit is 1500, The keepalive is 10(sec)Internet protocol processing : disabledLink layer protocol is PPPLCP opened, MPLSCP stoppedFIFO queuing: (Outbound queue:Size/Length/Discards)FIFO: 0/75/0Physical layer is synchronous,Baudrate is 64000 bpsInterface is DCE, Cable type is V35 5 minutes input rate 0.56 bytes/sec, 0.04 packets/sec 5 minutes output rate 0.66 bytes/sec, 0.05 packets/sec 51 packets input, 640 bytes, 0 no buffers 55 packets output, 700 bytes, 0 no buffers 0 input errors, 0 CRC, 0 frame errors 0 overrunners, 0 aborted sequences, 0 input no buffers DCD=UP DTR=UP DSR=UP RTS=UP CTS=UP

Table 1 Description of the displayed interface information

interface Syntax

interface type number [ .sub-number ]

undo interface type number [ .sub-number ]

Field DescriptionSerial0 is up Physical layer state of the interfaceline protocol is up Link layer state of the interface5 minutes input rate The input rate of the interface within the last

five minutes5 minutes output rate The output rate of the interface within the

last five minutesFIFO queueing: FIFO Type of the output queue on the interface51 packets input, 640 bytes, 0 no buffers Packets and bytes received by the interface

and the packets discarded due to the unavailability of receive-buffer.

55 packets output, 700 bytes, 0 no buffers Packets and bytes sent by the interface and the packets discarded due to the unavailability of send-buffer.

input errors:0, CRC:0, frame errors:0 The received packets that contain errors, including CRC errors and frame errors.

DCD=UP DTR=UP DSR=UP RTS=UP CTS=UP States of the physical electric signals DCD, DTR, DSR, RTS, and CTS


View

System view

Parameter

type: Interface type. The following table lists the interfaces that VRP supports so far.

number: Interface number. VRP numbers the interfaces separately by interface type, with the numbers of each type of interfaces begin at 0 or 1.

sub-number: Subinterface number, which is separated from the main interface number by a dot (“.”).

Description

Using the interface command, you can enter the specified interface view or create a logical interface or subinterface. Using the undo interface command, you can delete a specified logical interface or subinterface.

Table 2 Interfaces supported by VRP

An interface name is represented by interface type + interface number. For example, Ethernet0/0/0 represents the Ethernet interface numbered 0/0/0, and Serial0/0/0.1 represents the first subinterface on the interface Serial0/0/0, and interface Serial3/0/0:2 is the second channel set of the CE1/PRI interface (namely controller interface) numbered 3/0/0.

To simplify input, the type portion of the interface name can be shortened to several leading letters, given that these letters do not conflict with other interface types. Therefore, you can input e0/0/0 for Ethernet 0/0/0 and s0/0/0.1 for Serial 0/0/0.1.

You can enter the view of the desired physical interface and creating logical interfaces or subinterfaces as needed by executing the interface command.

You can create subinterfaces for an Ethernet interface or a serial interface encapsulated with X.25 or Frame Relay (FR). The subinterface numbered 0 corresponds to the main interface.

Interface Description AttributeATM ATM interface Physical interfaceAUX AUX interface Physical interfaceAnalogmodem Analog modem interface Physical interfaceAsync Asynchronous serial interface Physical interfaceBri ISDN BRI interface Physical interfaceBridge-Template Bridge-group virtual interface Logical interfaceDialer Dialer interface Logical interfaceEthernet Ethernet interface Physical interfaceLogic-Channel Logic-channel interface Logical interfaceLoopback Loopback interface Logical interfaceNULL Null interface Logical interfaceMFR Multi-link FR (MFR) interface Logical interfaceSerial Synchronous serial interface Physical interfaceVirtual-Ethernet VE interface Logical interfaceVirtual-Template Virtual-template interface Logical interfaceTunnel Tunnel interface Logical interface

Interface Management Commands 153

Note that executing the undo interface command also deletes the defined logical interfaces (such as dialer, tunnel, and virtual-template interfaces) and subinterfaces.

Example

Enter the Ethernet interface view in system view.

[3com]interface ethernet 0/0/0[3com-Ethernet0/0/0]

Switch from Ethernet0 view to the view of the subinterface Serial0/0/0.1.

[3com-Ethernet0/0/0]interface serial0/0/0.1[3com-Serial0/0/0.1]

reset counters interface Syntax

reset counters interface [ type number ]

View

User view

Parameter

type: Interface type which is used along with number for identifying an interface.

number: Interface number which is used along with type for identifying an interface.

Description

Using the reset counters interface command, you can clear the statistics of the transmitted and received packets on an interface.

If no interface has been specified, the statistics about the transmitted and received packets on all the interfaces are cleared.

To count the traffic size on an interface within a specific period, you must clear the existing statistics about the transmitted and received packets on the interface before taking a new count.

For a related command, see display interface.

Example

Clear the statistics about the transmitted and received packets on Serial 0/0/0.

<3com> reset counters interface serial 0/0/0

shutdown Syntax

shutdown

undo shutdown


View

Interface view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the shutdown command, you can shut down an interface. Using the undo shutdown command, you can enable an interface.

This command takes effect not only on physical interfaces but also on tunnel and MFR interfaces.

In some circumstances, such as when you are modifying the operating parameters of an interface, the modification do not take effect immediately. Rather, you must shut down the interface and re-enable it.


Example

Shut down Ethernet 0/0/0.

[3com-Ethernet0/0/0]shutdown% Interface Ethernet0/0/0 is down% Interface Ethernet0/0/0 changed state to DOWN% Line protocol ip on interface Ethernet0/0/0, changed state to DOWN

Fundamental Ethernet Interface Configuration Commands

display interfaceethernet

Syntax

display interface ethernet interface-number

View

Any view

Parameter

interface-number: Interface number. If no interface has been specified, the configuration and state information of all the interfaces will be displayed.

Description

Using the display interface ethernet command, you can view the configuration parameters, current running state, and some other information of an Ethernet interface.

Fundamental Ethernet Interface Configuration Commands 155

Example

View the state information of the Ethernet interface 2/0/0.

<3com> display interface ethernet 2/0/0Ethernet2/0/0 current state : UPLine protocol current state : UPDescription : 3Com Routers, Ethernet0/0 InterfaceThe Maximum Transmit Unit is 1500, Hold timer is 10(sec)Internet Address is 172.31.29.103/16IP Sending Frames' Format is PKTFMT_ETHNT_2, Hardware address is 00e0.fc06.3085Media type is twisted pair, loopback not set, promiscuous mode not set100Mb/s-speed mode,Full-duplex mode,link type is autonegotiationOutput flow-control is unsupported, input flow-control is unsupportedOutput queue : (Urgent queue : Size/Length/Discards) 0/500/0Output queue : (FIFO queuing : Size/Length/Discards) 0/75/0 Last 5 minutes input rate 227.13 bytes/sec, 2.67 packets/sec Last 5 minutes output rate 0.00 bytes/sec, 0.00 packets/sec Input: 542665 packets, 47721004 bytes 271460 broadcasts, 271205 multicasts 0 errors, 0 runts, 0 giants, 0 CRC, 0 align errors, 0 overruns, 0 dribbles, 0 aborts, 0 no buffers Output:0 packets, 0 bytes 0 errors, 0 underruns, 0 collisions 0 deferred

duplex Syntax

duplex { full | half | negotiation }

undo duplex

View

Ethernet interface view

Parameter

full: Sets the Ethernet interface to work in full duplex mode.

half: Sets the Ethernet interface to work in half duplex mode.

negotiation: Sets the Ethernet interface to work in auto-negotiation mode.

Description

Using the duplex command, you can set the operating mode of the 100Base-TX FE interface. Using the undo duplex command, you can restore the default operating mode of the Ethernet interface.

By default, the Ethernet interface is working in auto-negotiation mode.


An Ethernet interface on a router that is connected to a hub must work in half-duplex mode. When an Ethernet interface is connected to a network device that supports full-duplex, it must work in full-duplex mode, however.

Before setting the FE interface to work in auto-negotiation mode, you must make sure that the connected remote end has been working in auto-negotiation mode. If this cannot be guaranteed, the two parties should use the forced setting for the consistency in operating mode.

For related commands, see speed and display interface.

Example

Set the 100Base-TX FE interface to work in full duplex mode.

[3com-Ethernet0/0/0] duplex full

loopback Syntax

loopback

undo loopback

View


Parameter

None

Description

Using the loopback command, you can enable an Ethernet interface to perform loopback. Using the undo loopback command, you can disable loopback.

By default, the Ethernet interface is disabled to perform loopback.

You must enable the Ethernet interface to perform loopback only for the purpose of testing some special functions.

Example

Enable the Ethernet interface to perform loopback.

[3com-Ethernet0/0/0]loopback

mtu Syntax

mtu size

undo mtu

View


Fundamental Ethernet Interface Configuration Commands 157

Parameter

size: MTU size on the Ethernet interface, which is in bytes. It is in the range of 46 to 1500 if the adopted frame format is Ethernet_II.

Description

Using the mtu command, you can set the maximum transmission unit (MTU) of the Ethernet interface. Using the undo mtu command, you can restore the default configuration.

MTU defaults to 1500 if the adopted frame format is Ethernet_II.

The MTU setting of an Ethernet interface can affect the assembly and fragmentation of IP packets on the interface.


Example

Set MTU of the Ethernet interface to 1492.

[3com-Ethernet0/0/0]mtu 1492

speed Syntax

speed { 10 | 100 | negotiation }

undo speed

View


Parameter

10: Forces the FE interface to work in 10Base-T (at 10Mbps) mode.

100: Forces the FE interface to work in 100Base-TX (100Mbps) mode.

negotiation: Sets the FE interface to work in auto-negotiation mode.

Description

Using the speed command, you can set the operating speed of the FE interface. Using the undo speed command, you can restore the default operating speed of the FE interface.

By default, the FE interface operates in auto-negotiation mode.

Before setting the FE interface to work in auto-negotiation mode, you must make sure that the connected remote end has been working in auto-negotiation mode. If this cannot be guaranteed, the two parties should use the forced setting for operating consistency.

For related commands, see duplex and display interface.


Example

Set the FE interface to work in 10Base-T mode.

[3com-Ethernet0/0/0]speed 10

Fundamental WAN Interface Configuration Commands

async mode Syntax

async mode { protocol | flow }

View

Asynchronous serial interface view, AUX interface view

Parameter

protocol: Protocol mode, with which the local end directly adopts the configured link layer protocol parameters to set up a link with the remote end after setting up a physical link.

flow: Flow mode, which is also known as interactive mode. With this approach, the two ends set up a link by interacting with each other upon the setup of a physical link. Specifically, the calling party sends the configuration commands to the called party (it is equal to the operation of manually inputting configuration commands at the remote end), sets the link layer protocol operating parameters of the called party, and then sets up the link. This approach is normally adopted in the event of man-machine interaction.

Description

Using the async mode command, you can set the operating mode of an asynchronous serial interface.

By default, the asynchronous serial interface is working in protocol mode and the AUX interface in flow mode.

For related command, see modem.

Example

Set the asynchronous serial interface to work in flow mode.

[3com-Serial0/0/0]async mode flow

baudrate Syntax

baudrate baudrate

Fundamental WAN Interface Configuration Commands 159

View

Serial interface view

Parameter

baudrate: Baud rate of serial interface in bps. It is in the range of 300 to 115200 for an asynchronous serial interface and 1200 to 2048000 for a synchronous serial interface.

Description

Using the baudrate command, you can set the baud rate for a serial interface.

By default, the baud rate is 9600 bps on the asynchronous serial interface and 64000 bps on a synchronous serial interface.

Following are the baud rates available for the asynchronous serial interface.

300 bps, 600 bps, 1200 bps, 2400 bps, 4800 bps, 9600 bps, 19200 bps, 38400 bps, 57600 bps, 115200 bps.

Following are the baud rates available for the synchronous serial interface.

1200 bps, 2400 bps, 4800 bps, 9600 bps, 19200 bps, 38400 bps, 57600 bps, 64000 bps, 72000 bps, 115200 bps, 128000 bps, 384000 bps, 2048000 bps.

The baud rate range available for the synchronous serial interface depends on the applied physical electric specifications.

■ V.24 DTE/DCE supports the range of 1200 bps to 64000 bps

■ V.35 DCE/DCE, X.21 DTE/DCE, EIA/TIA-449 DTE/DCE and EIA-530 DTE/DCE supports the range of 1200 bps to 2048000 bps

After a synchronous/asynchronous serial interface makes the synchronous/asynchronous switchover, the baud rate of the interface will resume the default baud rate in the new operating mode.

When setting baud rate for a serial interface, you should take into consideration the elements, such as operating mode (synchronous/asynchronous mode) and the electric specifications of the connected external cable. In addition, you should note that the baud rate of asynchronous serial interface is only significant for the connection between router and modem. If two modems are concerned, they will negotiate the baud rate between them. Therefore, different baud rate settings can be set on the routers at the two ends of a connection, if the routers are working in asynchronous mode. In synchronous mode, however, the router working as DCE will determine the baud rate for the line transmission. Therefore, you must set baud rate at the DCE side.

Example

Set the baudrate of the asynchronous serial interface to 115200bps.

[3com-Serial0/0/0]baudrate 115200


clock Syntax

clock { dceclk | dteclk1 | dteclk2 | dteclk3 | dteclk4 }

View


Parameter

dceclk: Sets the interface clock selection mode to DCE clock.

dteclk1: Sets the interface clock selection mode to DTE clock option 1.




Description

Using the clock command, you can set the clock selection mode for a synchronous serial interface.

By default, dceclk (providing clock to the DTE device) and dteclk3 are selected for the synchronous serial interfaces at the DCE side and the DTE side.

Different operating clocks are selected for the synchronous serial interfaces working as DTE and DCE, as shown in the following figure.

Figure 1 Selecting a clock for a synchronous serial interface

In the figure, “TxClk” represents transmitting clock and “RxClk” receiving clock.

As a DCE device is required to provide clock for the remote DTE device, you must select DCEclk as the operating clock for the synchronous serial interface working as DCE.

Working as DTE, the synchronous serial interface must accept the clock provided by the remote DCE. As transmitting and receiving clocks of synchronization devices are independent, the receiving clock of a DTE device can be either the transmitting or receiving clock of the DCE device. So is the transmitting clock. Therefore, four clock options are available for a DTE device.

The following table gives the four clock selection options.

DCE DTE

TxClk

RxClk


Table 3 Clock options available for a synchronous serial interface working as DTE

In the table, the clock ahead of “=” is the DTE clock and the one after is the DCE clock.

Example

Set the synchronous serial interface working as DTE to use the clock selection option DTEclk2.

[3com-Serial0/0/0]clock dteclk2

code nrzi Syntax

code nrzi

undo code

View

Synchronous serial interface view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the code nrzi command, you can set the digital signal coding format to None-Return-to-Zero-Inverse (NRZI) for a synchronous serial interface. Using the undo code command, you can restore the digital coding format of the synchronous serial interface to NRZ.

The digital signal coding format defaults to NRZ on the synchronous serial interface.

Example

Set the digital signal coding format to NRZI on the synchronous serial interface.

[3com-Serial0/0/0]code nrzi

detect Syntax1 Asynchronous serial interface

detect dsr-dtr

undo detect dsr-dtr

2 Synchronous serial interface

Clock selection option DescriptionDTEclk1 TxClk = TxClk, RxClk = RxClkDTEclk2 TxClk = TxClk, RxClk = TxClkDTEclk3 TxClk = RxClk, RxClk = TxClkDTEclk4 TxClk = RxClk, RxClk = RxClk


detect { dcd | dsr-dtr }

undo detect { dcd | dsr-dtr }

View

Synchronous serial interface view, asynchronous serial interface view

Parameter

dsr-dtr: Detects DSR and DTR signals of DSU/CSU.

dcd: Detects the DCD signal of the DSU/CSU on the serial interface.

Description

Using the detect command, you can enable data carrier detection as well as level detection on a serial interface. Using the undo detect command, you can disable data carrier detection as well as level detection on the serial interface.

By default, serial interfaces are enabled to make data carrier and level detection.

If this function has been disabled on a serial interface, the system will not detect the DCD and DSR/DTR signals when determining the state (UP or DOWN) of the serial interface.

Example

Disable the serial interface to make data carrier detection.

[3com-Serial0/0/0]undo detect dcd

idle-mark Syntax

idle-mark

undo idle-mark

View


Parameter

None

Description

Using the idle-mark command, you can set the line idle-mark of the synchronous serial interface to “FF”. Using the undo idle-mark command, you can restore the line idle-mark of the synchronous serial interface to “7E”.

Line idle-mark of synchronous serial interfaces defaults to “7E”.

In normal circumstances, the synchronous serial interface uses the code “7E” to identify the idle state of the line. However, there are still some devices that use


“FF” (that is, the high level of all “1s”) to make the identification. For the sake of compatibility in this case, it is necessary to configure the line idle-mark of the synchronous serial interface.

Example

Set the line idle-mark of the synchronous serial interface to FF.

[3com-Serial0/0/0]idle-mark

invert transmit-clock Syntax

invert transmit-clock

undo invert transmit-clock

View


Parameter

None

Description

Using the invert transmit-clock command, you can enable the inverting of the transmit-clock signal of the synchronous serial interface at the DTE side. Using the undo invert transmit-clock command, you can disable inverting the signal.

By default, transmit-clock signal inversion is disabled on the synchronous serial interface at DTE side.

In some special cases, for the purpose of eliminating the half-period delay of the clock on the line, you may make the configuration to make the system invert the transmit-clock signal of the synchronous serial interface at the DTE side. This command can take effect only on some specific DCE devices. Clock inversion is unnecessary for general applications.

For related commands, see physical-mode and clock.

Example

Invert the transmit-clock of the synchronous serial interface at DTE side.

[3com-Serial0/0/0]invert transmit-clock

loopback Syntax

loopback

undo loopback

View



Parameter

None

Description

Using the loopback command, you can enable a serial interface to perform loopback. Using the undo loopback command, you can disable the serial interface to perform loopback.

By default, loopback of the serial interface is disabled.

It is necessary for you to enable the serial interface to perform loopback only for the purpose of testing some special functions.

Example

Enable the serial interface to perform loopback.

[3com-Serial0/0/0]loopback

mtu Syntax

mtu size

undo mtu

View


Parameter

size: MTU size on the serial interface, which is in the range of 128 to 1500 bytes and defaults to 1500.

Description

Using the mtu command, you can set the MTU of a serial interface. Using the undo mtu command, you can restore the default setting.

The MTU setting of a serial interface can affect the assembly and fragmentation of IP packets on the interface.

Example

Set MTU of the serial interface to 1200.

[3com-Serial0/0/0]mtu 1200

physical-mode Syntax

physical-mode { sync | async }

Fundamental CE1/PRI Interface Configuration Commands 165

View


Parameter

sync: Sets the synchronous/asynchronous serial interface to work in synchronous mode.

async: Sets the synchronous/asynchronous serial interface to work in asynchronous mode.

Description

Using the physical-mode command, you can set the operating mode of a synchronous/asynchronous serial interface.

By default, the synchronous/asynchronous serial interface is working in synchronous mode.

Example

Set the synchronous/asynchronous serial interface to work in asynchronous mode.

[3com-Serial0/0/0]physical-mode async

Fundamental CE1/PRI Interface Configuration Commands

channel-set Syntax

channel-set set-number timeslot-list range

undo channel-set set-number

View

CE1/PRI interface view

Parameter

set-number: The number of the channel set formed by bundling the timeslots on the interface, which is in the range of 0 to 30.

range: The number of the timeslots that are bundled, which is in the range of 1 to 31. When specifying the timeslots to be bundled, you can specify a single timeslot by specifying a number, a range of timeslots by specifying a range between number1-number2, or several discrete timeslots by specifying number1, number2-number3.


Description

Using the channel-set command, you can bundle some timeslots of a CE1/PRI interface into a channel-set. Using the undo channel-set command, you can remove the specified timeslot bundle.

By default, no timeslots are bundled into channel-sets.

A CE1/PRI interface in CE1/PRI mode is physically divided into 32 timeslots numbered from 0 through 31.

In actual applications, all the timeslots except timeslot 0 can be bundled into multiple channel-sets and the system will automatically create a serial interface for each set. This serial interface has the same logic features of synchronous serial interface.

The serial interface is numbered in the form of serial interface-number :set-number. The interface-number starts from the maximum serial interface number plus 1, and the set-number is the number of the channel-set.

Only one timeslot bundling mode can be supported on one CE1/PRI interface during a time period. In other words, this command cannot be used together with the pri-set command.

For related command, see pri-set.

Example

Bundle the timeslots 1, 2, 5, 10-15, and 18 of the CE1/PRI interface into channel-set 0.

[3com-E1 3/0/0]channel-set 0 timeslot-list 1,2,5,10-15,18

Make the same configuration on the CE1/PRI interface on the remote router.

[3com-E1 3/0/0]channel-set 0 timeslot-list 1,2,5,10-15,18

clock Syntax

clock { master | slave }

undo clock

View


Parameter

master: Adopts the internal clock mode.

slave: Adopts the line clock mode.


Description

Using the clock command, you can set the clock mode on a CE1/PRI interface. Using the undo clock command, you can restore the default clock mode on the interface.

By default, the CE1/PRI interface adopts the line clock mode (slave).

When a CE1/PRI interface is working as DCE, chose the internal clock for it, that is, master clock mode. When it is working as DTE, chose the line clock, that is, slave clock mode for it.

Example

Set the clock mode of the CE1/PRI interface to internal clock (master) mode.

[3com-E1 3/0/0]clock master

code Syntax

code { ami | hdb3 }

undo code

View


Parameter

ami: Adopts Alternate Mark Inversion (AMI) line code format.

hdb3: Adopts High Density Bipolar 3 (HDB3) line code format. This parameter is only significant for a CE1/PRI interface.

Description

Using the code command, you can set the line code format for a CE1/PRI interface. Using the undo code command, you can restore the default line code format of the interface.

The line code format of CE1/PRI interface defaults to hdb3.

You should keep the line code format of the interface in consistency with that used by the remote device.

Example

Set the line code format of the interface E1 3/0/0 to ami.

[3com-E1 3/0/0]code ami

controller e1 Syntax

controller e1 number


View

System view

Parameter

number: The CE1/PRI interface number.

Description

Using the controller e1 command, you can enter a CE1/PRI interface view.

Example

Enter the view of the interface E1 3/0/0.

[3com]controller E1 3/0/0[3com-E1 3/0/0]

display controller e1 Syntax

display controller [ e1 number ]

View

Any view

Parameter

number: Interface number.

Description

Using the display controller e1 command, you can display the information related to a CE1/PRI interface.


■ Physical state of interface

■ Clock mode of interface

■ Frame check mode of interface

■ Line code format of interface

Example

Display the information related to the E1 interface.

[3com]display controller E1 3/0/0E1 1-0 is down. Applique type is Channelized E1 - 75 OHM unbalanced Framing is NO-CRC4, Line Code is HDB3, Source Clock is slave. Alarm State is Loss of Frame Alignment.


frame-format Syntax

frame-format { crc4 | no-crc4 }

undo frame-format

View


Parameter

crc4: Sets the frame format on the CE1 interface to CRC4.

no-crc4: Sets the frame format on the CE1 interface to no-CRC4.

Description

Using the frame-format command, you can set the frame format of CE1 interface. Using the undo frame-format command, you can restore the default frame format of the interface.

By default, the frame format of CE1 interface is no-crc4.

A CE1/PRI interface working in CE1 mode supports both crc4 and no-crc4 frame formats. Among them, crc4 supports the 4-bit Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) on physical frames whereas no-crc4 does not.

Example

Set the frame format of the interface E1 3/0/0 to crc4.

[3com-E1 3/0/0]frame-format crc4

loopback Syntax

loopback { local | remote }

undo loopback

View


Parameter

local: Enables the interface to perform local loopback.

remote: Enables the interface to perform remote loopback.

Description

Using the loopback command, you can enable a CE1/PRI interface to perform loopback. Using the undo loopback command, you can disable the CE1/PRI interface to perform loopback.


By default, the interface is disabled to perform loopback in any form.

Loopback is used to check the condition of interface or cable. This function should be disabled when they are in normal operation.

If a serial interface formed by bundling timeslots of the CT1/PRI interface is encapsulated with PPP and is set to perform loopback, it is normal for the state of the link layer protocol to be reported as DOWN.

Example

Set the interface E1 3/0/0 to perform local loopback.

[3com-E1 3/0/0]loopback local

pri-set Syntax

pri-set timeslot-list [ range ]

undo pri-set

View


Parameter


Description

Using the pri-set command, you can bundle the timeslots of a CE1/PRI interface into a pri-set. Using the undo pri-set command, you can remove the timeslot bundle.

By default, no timeslots are bundled into pri-set.

When perform pri-set bundling on a CE1/PRI interface, you should note that you are not allowed to bundle only timeslot 16, as it will be used as the D channel for transmitting signals. Attempts to bundle only timeslot 16 will fail.

In a pri-set formed by bundling the timeslots of a CE1/PRI interface, timeslot 0 is used for Frame Synchronization Control (FSC), timeslot 16 as a D channel for signaling transmission, and other timeslots as B channels for data transmission. You may bundle the timeslots except for timeslot 0 into a pri-set (as the D channel, timeslot 16 is automatically bundled). The logic features of this pri-set will be the same like those of an ISDN PRI interface. If no timeslots are specified for bundling, all the timeslots except for timeslot 0 will be bundled into an interface similar to an ISDN PRI interface in the form of 30B+D.


The system will automatically create a serial interface after the operation of timeslot bundling on the interface. This serial interface has the same logic features of ISDN PRI interface. The serial interface is numbered in the form of serial number:15. Where, number is the maximum serial interface number plus 1.

Only one timeslot bundling mode can be supported on one CE1/PRI interface during a time period. In other words, this command cannot be used together with the channel-set command.

For a related command, see channel-set.

Example

Bundle the timeslots 1, 2, and 8-12 of the CE1/PRI interface into a pri-set.

[3com-E1 3/0/0]pri-set timeslot-list 1,2,8-12

using Syntax

using { ce1 | e1 }

undo using

View


Parameter

e1: In E1 mode

ce1: In CE1/PRI mode

Description

Using the using command, you can configure the operating mode for a CE1/PRI interface. Using the undo using command, you can restore the default operating mode.

By default, the CE1/PRI interface is working in CE1/PRI mode.

A CE1/PRI interface can work in either E1 mode (also called non-channelized mode) or CE1/PRI mode (that is, channelized mode).

A CE1/PRI interface in E1 mode equals an interface of 2 Mbps data bandwidth, on which, no timeslots are divided. Its logic features are the same like those of a synchronous serial interface. When working in CE1/PRI mode, it is physically divided into 32 timeslots numbered from 0 to 31. Among them, timeslot 0 is used for transmitting the Frame Synchronization Control information. This interface can work as either a CE1 interface or a PRI interface.

After the CE1/PRI interface is enabled to work in E1 mode by using the using e1 command, the system will automatically create a serial interface numbered serial interface-number:0. The interface-number starts from the maximum serial interface number plus 1t.


Example

Set the CE1/PRI interface to work in E1 mode.

[3com-E1 3/0/0]using e1

Fundamental CT1/PRI Interface Configuration Commands

cable Syntax

cable { long { 0db | -7.5db | -15db | -22.5db } | short { 133ft | 266ft | 399ft | 533ft | 655ft } }

undo cable

View

CT1/PRI interface view

Parameter

long: Matches a 655-feet and longer transmission line. The options for this parameter include 0db, -7.5db, -15db and -22.5db. The attenuation parameter is selected depending on the signal quality received at the receiving end. In this case, no external CSU is needed.

short: Matches a transmission cable under 655 feet. The options for this parameter include 133ft, 266ft, 399ft, 533ft and 655ft. The length parameter is selected depending on the actual length of the transmission line.

Description

Using the cable command, you can set cable attenuation and length on a CT1/PRI interface to match the distance of the transmission line. Using the undo cable command, you can restore the default value

The transmission cable attenuation that the CT1/PRI interface matches defaults to long 0db.

This command is mainly used to configure the signal waveform for transmission to satisfy various transmitting needs. In practice, the signal quality received by the receiving end determines whether this command will be used. If the signal quality is relatively good, use the default setting. In this case, the CT1/PRI interface does not need an external CSU device.

Example

Set the length of the transmission cable that the CT1/PRI interface matches to 133 feet.

[3com-T1 1/0/0] cable short 133ft

Fundamental CT1/PRI Interface Configuration Commands 173

channel-set Syntax

channel-set set-number timeslot-list range [ speed { 56k | 64k } ]

undo channel-set set-number

View


Parameter

set-number: The number of the channel-set formed by bundling the timeslots of the interface, which is in the range of 0 to 23.


speed { 56k | 64k }: The speed of the timeslot bundle, which is in Kbps. If 56k is selected, the timeslots will be bundled into N x 56 Kbps bundles, and if 64k is selected, the timeslots will be bundled into N x 64 Kbps bundles. By default, the system uses 64k.

Description

Using the channel-set command, you can bundle some timeslots of a CT1/PRI interface into a channel-set. Using the undo channel-set command, you can remove the specified channel-set.


A CT1/PRI interface is physically divided into 24 timeslots numbered from 1 through 24. In actual applications, all the timeslots can be bundled into multiple channel-sets and the system will automatically create a serial interface for each set. This serial interface has the same logic features of synchronous serial interface.

The serial interface is numbered in the form of serial interface-number:set-number. Where, interface-number starts from the maximum serial interface number plus 1, and set-number is the number of the channel-set.

Only one timeslot bundling mode can be supported on one CT1/PRI interface during a time period. In other words, this command cannot be used together with the pri-set command.

For a related command, see pri-set.

Example

Bundle the timeslots 1, 2, 5, 10-15and 18 of the CE1/PRI interface into channel-set 0.

[3com-T1 1/0/0]channel-set 0 timeslot-list 1,2,5,10-15,18


clock Syntax


undo clock

View


Parameter



Description

Using the clock command, you can set the clock mode on a CT1/PRI interface. Using the undo clock command, you can restore the default clock mode on the interface.

By default, the CE1/PRI interface adopts the line clock mode (slave).

When a CT1/PRI interface is working as DCE, chose the internal clock for it, that is, master clock mode. When it is working as DTE, chose the line clock, that is, the slave clock mode for it.

Example

Set the clock mode of the CT1/PRI interface to internal clock (master) mode.

[3com-T1 1/0/0] clock master

code Syntax

code { ami | b8zs }

undo code

View


Parameter

ami: Adopts the AMI line code format.

b8zs: Adopts the Bipolar with 8-Zero Substitution (b8zs) line code format.

Description

Using the code command, you can set the line code format for a CT1/PRI interface. Using the undo code command, you can restore the default line code format of the interface.


The line code format of CT1/PRI interface defaults to b8zs.

You should keep the line code format of the interface consistent with the one used by the remote device.

Example

Set the line code format of the interface T1 1/0/0 to ami.

[3com-T1 1/0/0] code ami

controller t1 Syntax

controller t1 number

View

System view

Parameter

number: The CT1/PRI interface number.

Description

Using the controller t1 command, you can enter a CT1/PRI interface view.

Example

Enter the view of the interface T1 1/00.

[3com]controller t1 1/0/0[3com-T1 1/0/0]

display controller t1 Syntax

display controller t1 number

View

Any view

Parameter

number: Interface number.

Description

Using the display controller t1 command, you can display the information related to a CT1/PRI interface. All T1 interfaces will be displayed if no parameter is selected.


■ Physical state of interface

■ Clock mode of interface


■ Frame check mode of interface

■ Line code format of interface

Example

Display the information related to the T1 interface.

[3com]display controller t1 1/0/0

frame-format Syntax

frame-format { sf | esf }

undo frame-format

View


Parameter

sf: Sets the frame format of CT1/PRI interface to Super Frame (SF).

esf: Sets the frame format of CT1/PRI interface to Extended Super Frame (ESF).

Description

Using the frame-format command, you can set the frame format on a CT1/PRI interface. Using the undo frame-format command, you can restore to the default frame format on the interface.

The frame format on the CT1/PRI interface defaults to ESF.

A CT1/PRI interface supports two frame formats, that is, SF and ESF. In SF format, multiple frames can share the same FSC and signaling information, so that more significant bits can be used for transmitting user data. In practice, a system should be tested often. The application of ESF makes it possible for the system to provide the services while it is being tested.

Example

Set the frame format of T1 1/0/0 to SF.

[3com-T1 1/0/0]frame-format sf

loopback Syntax

loopback { local | remote }

undo loopback

View



Parameter

local: Enables the CT1/PRI interface to perform local loopback.

remote: Enables the interface to perform remote loopback.

Description

Using the loopback command, you can enable a CT1/PRI interface to perform loopback. Using the undo loopback command, you can disable the CT1/PRI interface to perform loopback.

By default, the interface is disabled to perform loopback in any form.

Loopback is used to check the condition of interface or cable. This function should be disabled when they are in normal operation.

If a serial interface formed by bundling timeslots of the CT1/PRI interface is encapsulated with PPP and is set to perform loopback, it is normal for the state of the link layer protocol to be reported as DOWN.

Example

Set the interface T1 1/0/0 to perform local loopback.

[3com-T1 1/0/0]loopback remote

pri-set Syntax

pri-set [ timeslot-list range ]

undo pri-set

View


Parameter


Description

Using the pri-set command, you can bundle the timeslots of a CT1/PRI interface into a pri-set. Using the undo pri-set command, you can remove the timeslot bundle.

By default, no timeslots are bundled into pri-set.

When performing pri-set bundling on a CT1/PRI interface, you should note that you are not allowed to bundle only timeslot 24, because it is the D channel for transmitting signals. Attempts to bundle only timeslot 24 will fail.


In a pri-set formed by bundling the timeslots of a CT1/PRI interface, timeslot 24 is used as D channel for signaling transmission, and other timeslots as B channels for data transmission. All the timeslots can be randomly bundled into a pri-set (as a D channel, timeslot 24 is automatically bundled). The logic features of this pri-set will be the same as those of an ISDN PRI interface. If no timeslots are specified for bundling, all the timeslots will be bundled into an interface similar to an ISDN PRI interface in the form of 23B+D.

The system will automatically create a serial interface after the operation of timeslot bundling on the interface. This serial interface has the same logic features as an ISDN PRI interface. The serial interface is numbered in the form of serial number:23, in which number starts from the maximum serial interface number plus 1.

Only one timeslot bundling mode can be supported on one CE1/PRI interface during a time period. In other words, this command cannot be used together with the channel-set command.

For a related command, see channel-set.

Example

Bundle the timeslots 1, 2, and 8-12 of the CT1/PRI interface into a pri-set.

[3com-T1 1/0/0]pri-set timeslot-list 1,2,8-12

E1-F Interface Configuration Commands

display fe1 serial Syntax

display fe1 [ serial serial-number ]

View

Any view

Parameter

serial serial-number: Interface type and number. If no interface is specified, the information of all the E1-F interfaces will be displayed.

Description

Using the display fe1 serial command, you can view the configuration and state of E1-F interface.

If the specified interface is a serial interface rather than an E1-F interface, the system will display the error prompt “The serial is not a factional interface”.

Example

Display the information of the E1-F interface.

E1-F Interface Configuration Commands 179

[3com] display fe1Serial4/0/0 Fractional E1, status is down. Work mode is FRAMED - 120 OHM balanced. Framing : NO-CRC4, Line Code is HDB3, Clock : Slave. Alarm State : Loss-of-Signal.

Table 4 Description of displaying controller FE1 items

fe1 clock Syntax

fe1 clock { master | slave }

undo fe1 clock

View

E1-F interface view

Parameter

master: Internal clock is used.

slave: Line clock is used.

Description

Using the fe1 clock command, you can configure clock used by an E1-F interface. Using the undo fe1 clock command, you can restore the default clock of the interface.

By default, the interfaces use the slave clock.

For an E1-F interface used as DCE, master clock should be used. If the interface is used as DTE, however, the slave clock should be used.

Example

Set the E1-F interface to use internal clock.

[3com-Serial0/0/0] fe1 clock master

fe1 code Syntax

fe1 code { ami | hdb3 }

undo fe1 code

View

E1-F interface view

Item DescriptionFraming Frame format (crc4/no-crc4)Line Code line code format (ami/hdb3)Clock Clock mode (master/slave)Alarm State Alarm information


Parameter

ami: Adopts AMI line code format.

hdb3: Adopts HDB3 line code format.

Description

Using the fe1 code command, you can configure line code format for an E1-F interface. Using the undo fe1 code command, you can restore the default line code format of interface.

By default, E1-F interfaces adopt hdb3.

The line code of an interface should be set consistent with that of the peer.

Example

Set the line code format of the E1-F interface to AMI.

[3com-Serial0/0/0] fe1 code ami

fe1 frame-format Syntax

fe1 frame-format { crc4 | no-crc4 }

undo fe1 frame-format

View

E1-F interface view

Parameter

crc4: Adopts CRC4 as the framing format for the E1-F interface.

no-crc4: Adopts no-CRC4 as the framing format for the E1-F interface..

Description

Using the fe1 frame-format command, you can configure the framing format for an E1-F interface. Using the undo fe1 frame-format command, you can restore the default framing format of the interface.

By default, E1-F interfaces use no-crc4.

Example

Set the framing format for the E1-F interface to CRC4.

[3com-Serial0/0/0] fe1 frame-format crc4

fe1 loopback Syntax

fe1 loopback { local | remote }

E1-F Interface Configuration Commands 181

undo fe1 loopback [ local | remote ]

View

E1-F interface view

Parameter

local: Places the interface in local loopback.

remote: Places the interface in remote loopback.

Description

Using the fe1 loopback command, you can configure an E1-F interface in local or remote loopback. Using the undo fe1 loopback command, you can disable the local and remote loopback on the interface.

By default, the interfaces are not placed in local or remote loopback.

Local loopback and remote loopback are used for testing the state of interface or cable itself. These functions should be disabled in normal cases. On an interface, using this command, but with different arguments, can enable local loopback and remote loopback, but these two functions cannot be enabled at the same time.

Example

Place the E1-F interface in local loopback.

[3com-Serial0/0/0] fe1 loopback local

fe1 timeslot-list Syntax

fe1 timeslot-list { all | range }

undo fe1 timeslot-list

View

E1-F interface view

Parameter

all: Binds all the time slots on an interface, the interface rate will become 31 X 64kbps (that is, 1984kbps) after binding.

range: Time slots participating in the binding operation, it is in the range of 1 to 31. When specifying time slots for binding, you can configure a single time slot by using the form of “number”, the time slots in a range by using the form of “number1-number2”, or multiple time slots by using the form of “number1, number2-number3”.


Description

Using the fe1 timeslot-list command, you can configure the time slots that will participate in the binding operation on an E1-F interface. Using the undo fe1 timeslot-list command, you can restore the default setting of time slot binding.

By default, all the time slots on an E1-F interface are bound. That is, the E1-F interface rate defaults to 1984kbps.

Time slot binding operation on an E1-F interface will result in changing of interface rate. For example, after the user binds the time slots 1 through 10, the interface rate will become 10 X 64kbps.

If an E1-F interface is working in unframed mode, the fe1 timeslot-list command cannot be configured.

For related commands, see fe1 unframed.

Example

Bind the time slots 1, 2, 5, 10 through 15, and 18 on the E1-F interface.

[3com-Serial0/0/0] fe1 timeslot-list 1,2,5,10-15,18

fe1 unframed Syntax

fe1 unframed

undo fe1 unframed

View

E1-F interface view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the fe1 unframed command, you can configure an E1-F interface to work in unframed mode. Using the undo fe1 unframed command, you can configure the E1-F interface to work in framed mode.

By default, E1-F interfaces work in framed mode.

When it works in unframed mode, it is a non-timeslots interface of 2048kbps data bandwidth. In this case, it is logically equivalent to a synchronous serial interface.

When it works in framed mode, however, it is physically divided into 32 time slots numbered in the range of 0 to 31, and time slot 0 is used for transmitting synchronization information.

For related commands, see fe1 timeslot-list.

T1-F Interface Configuration Commands 183

Example

Set the E1-F interface to work in unframed mode.

[3com-Serial0/0/0] fe1 unframed

T1-F Interface Configuration Commands

ft1 cable Syntax

ft1 cable { long decibel | short length }

undo ft1 cable

View

T1-F interface view

Parameter

long decibel: Matches the transmission line longer than 655 feet. The argument decibel can take 0db, -7.5db, -15db, or -22.5db, depending on the signal quality at the receiving end. In this case, no external CSU is required.

short length: Matches transmission line shorter than 655 feet. The argument length can take 133ft, 266ft, 399ft, 533ft, and 655ft, depending on the length of transmission line.

Description

Using the ft1 cable command, you can configure attenuation or length of the transmission line matched a T1-F interface. Using the undo ft1cable command, you can restore the default setting.

By default, the transmission line attenuation matched T1-F interfaces is long 0db.

This command is mainly used for configuring the signal waveform required for different types of transmission. In practice, you can decide whether to use this command according to the signal quality at the receiving end. If the signal quality is acceptable, the default setting can be used.

Example

Set the length of the transmission line matched the T1-F interface to 133 feet.

[3com-Serial0/0/0] ft1 cable short 133ft

display ft1 serial Syntax

display ft1 [ serial serial-number ]


View

Any view

Parameter

serial serial-number: Interface type and number. If no interface is specified, the information of all the T1-F interfaces will be displayed.

Description

Using the display ft1 serial command, you can view the configuration and state of T1-F interface.

If the specified interface is a serial interface rather than a T1-F interface, the system will display the error prompt “The serial is not a factional interface”.

Example

Display the information of the T1-F interface.

[3com] display ft1Serial4/0/0 Fractional T1, status is down. Work mode is framed - 100 OHM balanced. Framing : ESF, Line Code is B8ZS, Clock : Slave. Alarm State : Loss-of-Signal.

Table 5 Description of displaying controller FT1 items

ft1 clock Syntax

ft1 clock { master | slave }

undo ft1 clock

View

T1-F interface view

Parameter

master: Internal clock is used.

slave: Line clock is used.

Description

Using the ft1 clock command, you can configure the clock used by an E1-F or T1-F interface. Using the undo ft1 clock command, you can restore the default clock of the interface.

Item DescriptionFraming Frame format (crc4/no-crc4)Line Code line code format (ami/hdb3)Clock Clock mode (master/slave)Alarm State Alarm information


By default, the interfaces use the slave clock.

For a T1-F interface used as DCE, master clock should be used. If the interface is used as DTE, however, the slave clock should be used.

Example

Set the T1-F interface to use internal clock.

[3com-Serial0/0/0] ft1 clock master

ft1 code Syntax

ft1 code { ami | b8zs }

undo ft1 code

View

T1-F interface view

Parameter

ami: Adopts AMI line code format.

b8zs: Adopts B8ZS line code format.

Description

Using the ft1 code command, you can configure the line code format for a T1-F interface. Using the undo ft1 code command, you can restore the default line code format of interface.

By default, T1-F interfaces adopt b8zs.

The line code of an interface should be set in consistency with that of the peer.

Example

Set the line code format of the T1-F interface to AMI.

[3com-Serial0/0/0] ft1 code ami

ft1 frame-format Syntax

ft1 frame-format { sf | esf }

undo ft1 frame-format

View

T1-F interface view

Parameter

sf: Adopts SF as the framing format for the T1-F interface.


esf: Adopts ESF as the framing format for the T1-F interface.

Description

Using the ft1 frame-format command, you can configure the framing format for a T1-F interface. Using the undo ft1 frame-format command, you can restore the default framing format of the interface.

By default, T1-F interfaces use esf.

T1-F interfaces support SF and ESF. In SF, multiple frames can share the same frame synchronization and signaling information, so that more significant bits can be used for transmitting user data. In practice, the system test is often required. The application of ESF technology can ensure normal service when system test is being carried out.

Example

Set the framing format for the T1-F interface to SF.

[3com-Serial0/0/0] ft1 frame-format sf

ft1 loopback Syntax

ft1 loopback { local | remote }

undo ft1 loopback [ local | remote ]

View

T1-F interface view

Parameter

local: Places the interface in local loopback.

remote: Places the interface in remote loopback.

Description

Using the ft1 loopback command, you can configure a T1-F interface in local or remote loopback. Using the undo ft1 loopback command, you can disable the local and remote loopback on the interface.

By default, the interfaces are not placed in local or remote loopback.

Local loopback and remote loopback are used for testing the state of interface or cable itself. These functions should be disabled in normal cases. On an interface, using this command but with different arguments can respectively enable local loopback and remote loopback, but these two functions cannot be enabled at the same time.

Example

Place the T1-F interface in local loopback.


[3com-Serial0/0/0] ft1 loopback local

ft1 timeslot-list Syntax

ft1 timeslot-list { all | range } [ speed { 56 | 64 } ]

undo ft1 timeslot-list

T1-F interface view

Parameter

all: Binds all the time slots on an interface. The interface rate will become 24 X 64kbps (that is, 1536kbps) after binding.

range: Time slots participating in the binding operation. It is in the range of 1 to 24. When specifying time slots for binding, you can configure a single time slot by using the form of “number”, the time slots in a range by using the form of “number1-number2”, or multiple time slots by using the form of “number1, number2-number3”.

speed { 56 | 64 }: Speed in kbps, which is used for time slot binding. If the argument 56 is used, timeslots will be bound into N X 56kbps. If the argument 64 is used, timeslots will be bound into N X 64kbps.

Description

Using the ft1 timeslot-list command, you can configure the time slots that will participate in the binding operation on a T1-F interface. Using the undo ft1 timeslot-list command, you can restore the default setting of time slot binding.

By default, all the time slots on a T1-F interface are bound. That is, the T1-F interface rate defaults to 1536kbps.

When performing time slot binding on a T1-F interface, the speed assigned to a time slot defaults to 64kbps.

The time slot binding operation on a T1-F interface results in a change of interface rate. For example, after the user binds the time slots 1 through 10, the interface rate becomes 10 X 64kbps (or 10 X 56 kbps).

Example

Bind the time slots 1, 2, 5, 10 through 15, and 18 on the T1-F interface.

[3com-Serial0/0/0] ft1 timeslot-list 1,2,5,10-15,18


Fundamental CE3 Interface Configuration Commands

clock Syntax


undo clock

View

CE3 interface view

Parameter



Description

Using the clock command, you can set the clock mode on a CE3 interface. Using the undo clock command, you can restore the default clock mode on the interface.

By default, the CE3 interface adopts the line clock mode (slave).

The clock is selected depending on the connected remote device. If it is a transmission device, the local end will use the line clock.

If the CE3 interfaces on the two routers are directly connected, one router should use the internal clock whereas the other router uses the line clock.

Example

Configure the CE3 interface with internal clock.

[3com-E3 1/0/0] clock master

controller e3 Syntax

controller e3 interface-number

View

System view

Parameter

interface-number: CE3 interface number.

Fundamental CE3 Interface Configuration Commands 189

Description

Using the controller e3 command, you can enter the CE3 interface view.

For related command, see display controller e3.

Example

Enter the view of the interface E3 1/0/0.

[3com]controller e3 1/0/0[3com-E3 1/0/0]

display controller e3 Syntax

display controller e3 interface-number

View

Any view

Parameter

interface-number: CE3 interface number.

Description

Using the display controller e3 command, you can view the state information of a CE3 interface.

In addition to the state information of the CE3 interface, the command can display the information of each E1 line on the CE3 interface if the interface is working in CE3 mode.

Example

Display the information related to the interface E3 1/0/0.

[3com]display controller e3 1/0/0 E3 1/0/0 is up Description : 3Com Routers, E3 1/0 Interface Applique type is CE3 - 75 OHM unbalanced Frame-format G751, line code HDB3, clock slave, national-bit 1,loopback not set Alarm: none ERROR: 0 BPV, 0 EXZ, 0 FrmErr, 0 FEBEE3-0 CE1 1 is up Frame-format NO-CRC4, clock master, loopback not setE3-0 CE1 2 is up Frame-format NO-CRC4, clock slave, loopback localE3-0 CE1 3 is up Frame-format NO-CRC4, clock slave, loopback remoteE3-0 CE1 4 is up Frame-format CRC4, clock slave, loopback not setE3-0 CE1 5 is up Frame-format NO-CRC4, clock slave, loopback not setE3-0 CE1 6 is up Frame-format NO-CRC4, clock slave, loopback not set


E3-0 CE1 7 is up Frame-format NO-CRC4, clock slave, loopback not setE3-0 CE1 8 is up Frame-format NO-CRC4, clock slave, loopback not setE3-0 CE1 9 is up Frame-format NO-CRC4, clock slave, loopback not setE3-0 CE1 10 is up Frame-format NO-CRC4, clock slave, loopback not setE3-0 CE1 11 is up Frame-format NO-CRC4, clock slave, loopback not setE3-0 CE1 12 is up Frame-format NO-CRC4, clock slave, loopback not setE3-0 CE1 13 is up Frame-format NO-CRC4, clock slave, loopback not setE3-0 CE1 14 is up Frame-format NO-CRC4, clock slave, loopback not setE3-0 CE1 15 is up Frame-format NO-CRC4, clock slave, loopback not setE3-0 CE1 16 is up Frame-format NO-CRC4, clock slave, loopback not set

e1 channel-set Syntax

e1 line-number channel-set set-number timeslot-list range

undo e1 line-number channel-set set-number

View

CE3 interface view

Parameter

line-number: E1 line number in the range of 1 to 16.

set-number: The number of the channel-set formed by bundling the timeslots of E1 line, which is in the range of 0 to 30.


Description

Using the e1 channel-set command, you can bundle the timeslots of an E1 line. Using the undo e1 channel-set command, you can remove the timeslot bundle.


A CE3 interface can be channelized into 64Kbps lines and the timeslots of each E1 line can be bundled up to 31 channels.

When an E1 line operates at framed (CE1) mode, you can bundle the timeslots on it. The system will automatically create a serial interface numbered serial number /


line-number:set-number. For example, the serial interface created by the channel-set 0 of the first e1 line on E3 7/0 will be numbered 7/0/1:0. This interface can operate at N x 64 Kbps and has the same logic features of a synchronous serial interface on which you make other configurations.

For related command, see e1 unframed.

Example

Bundle a 128Kbps serial interface on the first E1 line on the interface E3 1/0/0.

[3com-E3 1/0/0]e1 1 channel-set 1 timeslot-list 1,2

e1 set clock Syntax

e1 line-number set clock { master | slave }

undo e1 line-number set clock

View

CE3 interface view

Parameter




Description

Using the e1 set clock command, you can set the clock mode for an E1 line on a CE3 interface. Using the undo e1 clock command, you can restore the default setting.

By defaults, the E1 lines on a CE3 interface adopt line clock.

The E1 lines on a CE3 interface working in channelized mode are allowed to use separate clocks.

Example

Configure the first E1 line on the E3 interface to adopt line clock mode.

[3com-E3 1/0/0]e1 1 set clock slave

e1 set frame-format Syntax

e1 line-number set frame-format { crc4 | no-crc4 }

undo e1 line-number set frame-format


View

CE3 interface view

Parameter


crc4: The frame format adopted by an E1 line is crc4.

no-crc4: The frame format adopted by an E1 line is no-crc4.

Description

Using the e1 set frame-format command, you can configure the frame format for an E1 line. Using the undo e1 set frame-format command, you can restore the default setting.

By default, the frame format no-crc4 is used for E1 line.

Only if an E1 line is working in framed format (which can be set by using the undo e1 unframed command) can this command be configured.

For related command, see e1 unframed.

Example

Configure the first E1 line on the E3 interface to adopt the frame format crc4.

[3com-E3 1/0/0]e1 1 set frame-format crc4

e1 set loopback Syntax

e1 line-number set loopback { local | remote }

undo e1 line-number set loopback

View

CE3 interface view

Parameter


local: Enables E1 line to perform local loopback.

remote: Enables E1 line to perform remote loopback.

Description

Using the e1 set loopback command, you can set the loopback mode of an E1 line on an E3 interface. Using the undo e1 set loopback command, you can disable the E1 line to loop back.

By default, E1 lines are disabled to loop back.


If an E1 line encapsulated with PPP has been set to perform loopback, it is normal for the state of the link layer protocol to be reported as DOWN.

Example

Set the loopback mode of the first E1 line on the E3 interface to local.

[3com-E3 1/0/0]e1 1 set loopback local

e1 shutdown Syntax

e1 line-number shutdown

undo e1 line-number shutdown

View

CE3 interface view

Parameter


Description

Using the e1 shutdown command, you can shut down an E1 line on the CE3 interface. Using the undo e1 shutdown command, you can enable the E1 line.

By default, E1 line is enabled.

This command will affect not only the specified E1 line but also the serial interfaces formed by bundling the timeslots of the E1 line. Executing the e1 shutdown command on the specified E1 line will shut down all these serial interfaces and the data transmission and receiving will be stopped as a result. Likewise, executing the undo e1 shutdown command will re-enable all these serial interfaces.

Example

Shut down the first E1 line on the E3 interface.

[3com-E3 1/0/0]e1 1 shutdown

e1 unframed Syntax

e1 line-number unframed

undo e1 line-number unframed

View

CE3 interface view

Parameter



Description

Using the e1 unframed command, you can set an E1 line on a CE3 interface to work in unframed mode (E1 mode). Using the undo e1 unframed command, you can set the E1 line on the CE3 interface to work in framed mode (CE1 mode).

By default, E1 lines are working in framed mode.

An E1 line in unframed mode does not contain the frame control information and cannot be divided into timeslots. Naturally, no timeslot bundling can be performed on it. In this case, the system automatically creates a serial interface numbered serial number / line-number:0 for it. This interface operates at 2048 Kbps and has the same logic features of a synchronous serial interface on which you can make other configurations.

For related command, see e1 channel-set.

Example

Set the first E1 line on the E3 interface to work in unframed mode.

[3com-E3 1/0/0]e1 1 unframed

loopback Syntax

loopback { local | payload | remote }

undo loopback

View

CE3 interface view

Parameter

local: Enables the CE3 interface to perform local loopback.

payload: Places the CE3 interface in an remote payload loopback. Data passes the framer in this case and will be looped back after payload is generated.

remote: Enables the CE3 interface to perform remote loopback. Data does not go through the framer in this case and will be looped back before the payload has been generated.

Description

Using the loopback command, you can configure the loopback mode of a CE3 interface. Using the undo loopback command, you can disable the CE3 interface to perform loopback.

By default, loopback is disabled on the CE3 interface.

It is necessary for you to enable the CE3 interface to perform loopback only for the purpose of testing some special functions.


If a CE3 interface encapsulated with PPP has been set to perform loopback, it is normal for the state of the link layer protocol to be reported as DOWN.

Example

Enable the interface E3 1/0/0 to perform local loopback.

[3com-E3 1/0/0] loopback local

national-bit Syntax

national-bit { 0 | 1 }

undo national-bit

View

CE3 interface view

Parameter

0: Sets the national bit of the CE3 interface to 0.

1: Sets the national bit of the CE3 interface to 1.

Description

Using the national-bit command, you can configure national bit for a CE3 interface. Using the undo national-bit command, you can restore the default setting.

The national bit of CE3 interface defaults to 1.

It is necessary to set the national bit of an E3 interface to 0 only in some special circumstances.

For the related command, see controller e3.

Example

Set the national bit of the interface E3 1/0/0 to 0.

[3com-E3 1/0/0] national-bit 0

using Syntax

using { e3 | ce3 }

undo using

View

CE3 interface view


Parameter

e3: Sets the CE3 interface to work in unchannelized mode.

ce3: Sets the CE3 interface to work in channelized mode.

Description

Using the using command, you can configure the operating mode of a CE3 interface. Using the undo using command, you can restore the default setting.

By default, the CE3 interface is working in channelized mode.

Only when the CE3 interface is working in channelized mode can you configure the E1 lines on it.

When the CE3 interface is working in unchannelized mode, the system automatically creates a serial interface numbered serial number / 0:0 for it. This interface operates at 34.368 Mbps and has the same logic features of a synchronous serial interface on which you can make other configurations.

For related command, see controller e3.

Example

Configure the interface E3 1/0/0 to work in unchannelized mode.

[3com-E3 1/0/0]using e3

Fundamental CT3 Interface Configuration Commands

cable Syntax

cable feet

undo cable

View

CT3 interface view

Parameter

feet: Cable length in the range of 0 to 450 feet.

Description

Using the cable command, you can configure the length of the cable with which a CT3 interface is connected. Using the undo cable command, you can restore the default length of the cable with which the CT3 interface is connected.

The parameter feet defaults to 49.

Fundamental CT3 Interface Configuration Commands 197

The length of the cable for CT3 interface connection refers to the distance between the router and the cable distribution rack.

Example

Set the cable length to 50 feet for the interface T3 1/0/0.

[3com-T3 1/0/0]cable 50

clock Syntax


undo clock

View

CT3 interface view

Parameter



Description

Using the clock command, you can set the clock mode on a CT3 interface. Using the undo clock command, you can restore the default clock mode on the interface.

By default, the CT3 interface adopts the line clock mode (slave).

The clock is selected depending on the connected remote device. If it is a transmission device, the local end will use the line clock.

If the CT3 interfaces on the two routers are directly connected, one router should use the internal clock whereas the other router uses the line clock.

Example

Configure the CT3 interface with internal clock.

[3com-T3 1/0/0]clock master

controller t3 Syntax

controller t3 interface-number

View

System view

Parameter

interface-number: CT3 interface number.


Description

Using the controller t3 command, you can enter the CT3 interface view.

For the related command, see display controller t3.

Example

Enter the view of the interface T3 1/0/0.

[3com]controller t3 1/0/0[3com-T3 1/0/0]

crc Syntax

crc { 16 | 32 | no-crc}

undo crc

View


Parameter

16: Adopt 16-bit CRC.

32: Adopt 32-bit CRC.

no-crc: Adopt no CRC.

Description

Using the crc command, you can configure CRC mode of the serial interface formed by CT3. Using the undo crc command, you can restore the default setting.

By default, 16-bit CRC is used.

For the related commands, see t1 channel-set, t1 unframed, and using.

Example

Apply 32-bit CRC to the serial interface formed by the interface T3 1/0/0 in unchannelized mode.

[3com-Serial1/0/0:0] crc 32

frame-format Syntax

frame-format { c-bit | m23 }

undo frame-format

View

CT3 interface view


Parameter

c-bit: Sets the frame format to C-bit.

m23: Sets the frame format to m23.

Description

Using the frame-format command, you can configure the frame format used by a CT3 interface. Using the undo frame-format command, you can restore the default frame format used by the CT3 interface.

By default, the CT3 interface adopts the C-bit frame format.

Example

Set the frame format of the interface T3 1/0/0 to m23.

[3com-T3 1/0/0] frame-format m23

loopback Syntax

loopback { local | payload | remote }

undo loopback

View

CT3 interface view

Parameter

local: Enables the CT3 interface to perform local loopback.

payload: Places the CT3 interface in an external payload loop. Data passes the framer in this case and will be looped back after payload is generated.

remote: Enables the CT3 interface to perform remote loopback. Data does not go through the framer in this case and will be looped back before the payload has been generated.

Description

Using the loopback command, you can configure the loopback mode of a CT3 interface. Using the undo loopback command, you can disable the CT3 interface to perform loopback.

By default, loopback is disabled on the CT3 interface.

Loopback is usually used for some special detection. It should not be enabled in normal working condition.

If a CT3 interface encapsulated with PPP has been set to perform loopback, it is normal for the state of its link layer protocol to be reported as DOWN.


Example

Enable the interface T3 1/0/0 to perform local loopback.

[3com-T3 1/0/0]loopback local

t1 channel-set Syntax

t1 line-number channel-set set-number timeslot-list range [ speed { 56k | 64k } ]

undo t1 line-number channel-set set-number

View

CT3 interface view

Parameter

line-number: T1 line number in the range of 1 to 28.

set-number: The number of the channel-set formed by bundling the timeslots of T1 line, which is in the range of 0 to 23.


speed: Timeslot bundling mode. If 56k is selected, the timeslots will be bundled into N x 56Kbps. If 64k is selected, the timeslots will be bundled into N x 64 Kbps. Speed defaults to 64k.

Description

Using the t1 channel-set command, you can bundle the timeslots of a T1 line. Using the undo t1 channel-set command, you can remove the timeslot bundle.


When a T1 line operates at framed (CT1) mode, you can bundle the timeslots on it. The system will automatically create a serial interface numbered serial number / line-number:set-number for the channel-set. This interface operates at N x 64 Kbps (or N x 56 Kbps) and has the same logic features of a synchronous serial interface on which you can make other configurations.

For a related command, see t1 unframed.

Example

Bundle a 128Kbps serial interface on the first T1 line on the interface T3 1/0/0.

[3com-T3 1/0/0]t1 1 set channel-set 1 timeslot-list 1,2


t1 set clock Syntax

t1 line-number set clock { master | slave }

undo t1 line-number set clock

View

CT3 interface view

Parameter


master: Adopts the internal clock.

slave: Adopts the line clock.

Description

Using the t1 set clock command, you can set the clock mode for a T1 line on a CT3 interface. Using the undo e1 clock command, you can restore the default setting.

By defaults, the T1 lines on a CT3 interface adopt line clock.

The E1 lines on a CE3 interface working in channelized mode are allowed to use separate clocks.

Example

Configure the first T1 line on the T3 interface to adopt line clock.

[3com-T3 1/0/0]t1 1 set clock slave

t1 set frame-format Syntax

t1 line-number set frame-format { esf | sf }

undo t1 line-number set frame-format

View

CT3 interface view

Parameter


esf: Set the T1 line to use the Extended Super Frame (ESF) format.

sf: Set the T1 line to use the Super Frame (SF) format.


Description

Using the t1 set frame-format command, you can configure the frame format of T1 line. Using the undo t1 set frame-format command, you can restore the default setting.

By default, the frame format of T1 line is esf.

Only if a T1 line is working in framed format (which can be set by using the undo t1 unframed command) can this command be configured.

For the related commands, see t1 set unframed and using.

Example

Adopt the frame format SF for the first T1 line on the T3 interface.

[3com-T3 1/0/0]t1 1 set frame-format sf

t1 set loopback Syntax

t1 line-number set loopback { local | remote }

undo t1 line-number set loopback

View

CT3 interface view

Parameter


local: Enables the T1 line to perform local loopback.

remote: Enables the T1 line to perform remote loopback.

Description

Using the t1 set loopback command, you can set the loopback mode of a T1 line on a T3 interface. Using the undo t1 set loopback command, you can disable the T1 line to loop back.

By default, T1 lines are disabled to loop back.

If a T1 line encapsulated with PPP has been set to perform loopback, it is normal for the state of its link layer protocol to be reported as DOWN.

Loopback is usually used for some special tests. It should not be enabled in normal working condition.

Example

Set the loopback mode on the first T1 line on the T3 interface to local.

[3com-T3 1/0/0]t1 1 set loopback local


t1 shutdown Syntax

t1 line-number shutdown

undo t1 line-number shutdown

View

CT3 interface view

Parameter


Description

Using the t1 shutdown command, you can shut down a T1 line on the CT3 interface. Using the undo t1 shutdown command, you can enable the T1 line.

By default, T1 line is enabled.

This command will affect not only the specified T1 line but also the serial interfaces formed by bundling the timeslots of the T1 line. Executing the t1 shutdown command on the specified T1 line will shut down all these serial interfaces and the data transmission and receiving will be stopped as a result. Likewise, executing the undo t1 shutdown command will re-enable all these serial interfaces.

Example

Shut down the first T1 line on the T3 interface.

[3com-T3 1/0/0]t1 1 shutdown

t1 unframed

Syntax

t1 line-number unframed [ speed { 56k | 64k } ]

undo t1 line-number unframed

View

CT3 interface view

Parameter


speed: Timeslot bundling mode. If 56k is selected, the timeslots will be bundled into N x 56Kbps. If 64k is selected, the timeslots will be bundled into N x 64 Kbps. Speed defaults to 64k.


Description

Using the t1 unframed command, you can set a T1 line on a CT3 interface to work in unframed mode (T1 mode). Using the undo t1 unframed command, you can set the T1 line on the CT3 interface to work in framed mode (CT1 mode).

By default, T1 lines are working in framed mode.

A T1 line in unframed mode does not contain the frame control information and cannot be divided into timeslots. Naturally, no timeslot bundling can be performed on it. In this case, the system automatically creates a serial interface numbered serial number / line-number:0 for it. This interface operates at 1544 Kbps and has the same logic features of a synchronous serial interface on which you can make other configurations.

For the related command, see t1 channel-set.

Example

Set the first T1 line on the T3 interface to work in unframed mode.

[3com-T3 1/0/0]t1 1 unframed

using Syntax

using { t3 | ct3 }

View

CT3 interface view

Parameter

t3: Sets the CT3 interface to work in unchannelized mode.

ct3: Sets the CT3 interface to work in channelized mode.

Description

Using the using command, you can configure the operating mode of a CT3 interface. Using the undo using command, you can restore the default setting.

By default, the CT3 interface is working in channelized mode.

Only when the CT3 interface is working in channelized mode can you configure the T1 lines on it.

When the CT3 interface is working in unchannelized mode, the system automatically creates a serial interface numbered serial number / 0:0 for it. This interface operates at 44.736 Mbps and has the same logic features of a synchronous serial interface on which you can make other configurations.

Example

Configure the interface T3 1/0/0 to work in unchannelized mode.

ATM E3/T3 Interface Configuration Commands 205

[3com-T3 1/0/0]using t3

display controller t3 Syntax

display controller t3 interface-number

View

Any view

Parameter

interface-number: CT3 interface number.

Description

Using the display controller t3 command, you can view the state information of a CT3 interface.

In addition to the state information of the CT3 interface, the command can display the information of each T1 line on the CT3 interface if the interface is working in CT3 mode.

Example

Display the information related to the interface T3 1/0/0.

[3com]display controller t3 1/0/0T3 1/0/0 is downDescription : 3Com Routers, T3 1/0 Interface Frame-format C-BIT Parity, line code B3ZS, cable 49 feet, clock slave, loopback not set Alarm: none ERROR: 0 BiPolarViolation, 0 EXcessiveZero, 1 FrameError 0 ParityBitError, 0 C-BitParityBitError, 0 FarEndBlockError

ATM E3/T3 Interface Configuration Commands

cable Syntax

cable { long | short }

undo cable

View

ATM T3 Interface view

Parameter

long: Long distance mode. Cable length ranges from 151 to 500 meters.

short: Short distance mode. Cable length ranges from 0 to 150 meters.


Description

Using the cable command, you can configure the cable mode of the ATM T3 cable, to set the distance between the router and the cable distribution frame. Using the undo cable command, you can restore the default setting.

By default, short distance mode is used.

Example

Set the cable length mode of ATM T3 1/0/0 to long.

<3com> system-view[3com] interface atm 1/0/0[3com-Atm1/0/0] cable long

clock Syntax


undo clock

View

ATM E3/T3 interface view.

Parameter

master: Sets the clock mode of ATM E3/T3 to master mode.

slave: Sets the clock mode of ATM E3/T3 to slave mode.

Description

Using the clock command, you can set the clock mode of ATM E3/T3 interface. Using the undo clock command, you can restore the default setting.

By default, the clock mode of ATM E3/T3 interface is slave mode.

Example

Set clock mode of ATM E3/T3 interface 2/0/0 as master.

<3com> system-view[3com] interface atm 2/0/0[3com-Atm2/0/0] clock master

display interface atm Syntax

display interface atm [ interface-number ]

View

Any view

ATM E3/T3 Interface Configuration Commands 207

Parameter

interface-number: Interface number of ATM E3/T3.

Description

Using the display interface atm command, you can view the configuration and status of ATM E3/T3 interface. If no interface-number is specified, the system will display the configuration and status of all ATM interfaces.

Example

View the configuration and status of ATM E3/T3 interface 1/1/0.

<3com> display interface atm 1/1/0

frame-format Syntax

frame-format { g832-adm | g751-adm | g751-plcp }

frame-format { cbit-adm | cbit-plcp | m23-adm | m23-plcp }

undo frame-format

View

ATM E3/T3 interface view

Parameter

g832-adm: Configures frame format of ATM E3 as G.823 ATM direct mapping.

g751-adm: Configures frame format of ATM E3 as G.751 ATM direct mapping.

g751-plcp: Configures frame format of ATM E3 as G.751 Physical Layer Convergence Protocol (PLCP).

cbit-adm: Configures frame format of ATM T3 as C-bit ATM direct mapping.

cbit-plcp: Configures frame format of ATM T3 as C-bit PLCP.

m23-adm: Configures frame format of ATM T3 as M23 ATM direct mapping.

m23-plcp: Configures frame format of ATM T3 as M23 PLCP.

Description

Using the frame-format command, you can configure frame format of ATM E3/T3 interface. Using the undo frame-format command, you can restore the default configuration.

By default, frame format g751-plcp is used for ATM E3 and cbit-plcp used for ATM T3.


Example

Configure ATM E3 interface 1/0/0 to use frame format G.832 ADM.

<3com> system-view[3com] interface atm 1/0/0[3com-Atm1/0/0] frame-format g832-adm

loopback Syntax

loopback { cell | local | payload | remote }

undo loopback

View


Parameter

cell: Internal cell loopback

local: Internal loopback.

payload: External payload loopback.

remote: External line loopback.

Description

Using the loopback command, you can enable the loopback function of the interface. Using the undo loopback command, you can disable the loopback function.

By default, loopback is disabled.

Example

Enable external payload loopback of ATM E3/T3 interface 2/0/0.

<3com> system-view[3com] interface atm 2/0/0[3com-Atm2/0/0] loopback payload

scramble Syntax

scramble

undo scramble

View


ATM 25M Interface Configuration Commands 209

Parameter

None

Description

Using the scramble command, you can enable scrambling function of ATM E3/T3 interface. Using the undo scramble command, you can disable the scrambling function.

By default, the scrambling function of ATM E3/T3 interface is enabled.

The scramble command is used to enable the scramble and descramble function on payload, with no influence on the cell header.

Example

Disable the scramble function of ATM E3/T3 interface 2/0/0.

<3com> system-view[3com] interface atm 2/0/0[3com-Atm2/0/0] undo scramble

ATM 25M Interface Configuration Commands

clock Syntax


undo clock

View

ATM interface view

Parameter



Description

Using the clock command, you can set the clock mode on an ATM interface. Using the undo clock command, you can restore the default clock mode on the interface.

By default, the ATM interface adopts the slave clock.

When an ATM interface is working as DCE, choose the master clock mode. When it is working as DTE, choose the slave clock mode for it. When ATM interfaces of two routers are directly connected by fiber, one end should be configured with the master clock mode and the other with the slave clock mode.


Example

Adopt the master clock on the ATM interface 4/0/0.


ATM OC-3c/STM-1 Interface Configuration Commands

clock Syntax


undo clock

View

ATM interface view

Parameter



Description

Using the clock command, you can set the clock mode on an ATM interface. Using the undo clock command, you can restore the default clock mode on the interface.

By default, the ATM interface adopts the slave clock.

When an ATM interface is working as DCE, choose the master clock mode. When it is working as DTE, choose the slave clock mode for it. When ATM interfaces of two routers are directly connected by fiber, one end should be configured with the master clock mode and the other with the slave clock mode.

Example

Adopt the master clock on the ATM interface 4/0/0.


display interface atm Syntax

display interface atm [ interface-number ]

ATM OC-3c/STM-1 Interface Configuration Commands 211

View

Any view

Parameter

interface-number: Interface number. If no interface has been specified, the configuration and state information of all the ATM interfaces will be displayed.

Description

Using the display interface atm command, you can view the configuration and state information of ATM OC-3c/STM-1 interface(s).

Example

View the configuration and state information of the ATM interface 4/0/0.

<3com> display interface atm 4/0/0

frame-format Syntax

frame-format { sdh | sonet }

undo frame-format

View

ATM interface view

Parameter

sdh: Sets the frame format to SDH STM-1.

sonet: Sets the frame format to SONET OC-3.

Description

Using the frame-format command, you can set the frame format of ATM OC-3c/STM-1 interface. Using the undo frame-format command, you can restore the default setting.

The frame format on the ATM OC-3c/STM-1 interface defaults to SONET.

Example

Set the frame format on the ATM OC-3c/STM-1 interface to SDH.

[3com-Atm4/0/0] frame-format sdh

loopback Syntax

loopback { cell | local | remote }

undo loopback


View

ATM interface view

Parameter

cell: Enables the ATM interface to perform cell loopback.

local: Enables the ATM interface to perform local loopback.

remote: Enables the ATM interface to perform the remote loopback.

Description

Using the loopback command, you can enable the loopback function on an ATM OC-3c/STM-1 interface. Using the undo loopback command, you can disable the loopback function.

By default, loopback function is disabled.

It is necessary for you to enable the interface to perform loopback only for the purpose of testing some special functions. You should not enable the loopback function when the interface is providing normal services.

Example

Enable the ATM interface to perform local loopback.

[3com-Atm4/0/0] loopback local

scramble Syntax

scramble

undo scramble

View

ATM interface view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the scramble command, you can enable an undo scramble to scramble the payload on ATM OC-3c/STM-1 interface. Using the undo scramble command, you can disable the scrambling function.

By default, the ATM OC-3c/STM-1 interface is enabled to scramble the payload.

Executing the scramble command will make an interface to scramble and descramble the payload but will not affect the cell headers.

G.SHDSL Interface Configuration Commands 213

Example

Disable the ATM interface to scramble the payload.

[3com-Atm4/0/0] undo scramble

G.SHDSL Interface Configuration Commands

activate Syntax

activate

undo activate

View

ATM interface view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the activate command, you can enable a G.SHDSL interface. Using the undo activate command, you can disable a G.SHDSL interface.

By default, a G.SHDSL interface is active.

A G.SHDSL interface must be activated before it can transmit services. Activation refers to the training between the G.SHDSL end and the STU-C end. Based on such preset items as SHDSL standard, channel mode, upstream and downstream rates and SNR margin in link template. The training process detects line distance and performance, negotiates between two ends and determines if the interface can run normally under such condition. If the training succeeds, a communication link is set up between two ends and the interface is activated, on which services can be transferred. When the interface is deactivated, no communication link exists, so you must activate the interface again,if you want to transmit services over it.

The commands are mainly used in link testing and fault diagnosis.

The difference between the activate/undo activate command and the shutdown/undo shutdown command is that the former only functions on the G.SHDSL interface.

A G.SHDSL interface is always on so it will enter the active state as long as the link is functional. The router supports timed loop detection, so the G.SHDSL interface is activated when the link performance has deteriorated.


Example

Deactivate the G.SHDSL interface.

[3com-Atm3/0/0] undo activate

shdsl annex Syntax

shdsl annex { a | b }

undo shdsl annex

View

ATM interface view

Parameter

a: Annex a

b: Annex b

Description

Using the shdsl annex command, you can configure annex standard at an SHDSL interface. You cannot activate a link with different standard types at both ends. Using the undo shdsl annex command, you can restore the default standard.

By default, annex b is selected.

Example

Restore the default standard type at the SHDSL interface.

[5680-Atm1/0/0]undo shdsl annex

shdsl rate Syntax

shdsl rate { auto | rate }

undo rate

View

ATM interface view

Parameter

auto: Auto-negotiation mode

rate: Specify maximum rate, in the range of 64~2312.


Description

Using the shdsl rate command, you can specify maximum rate at SHDSL interface or just select auto-negotiation mode. Using the undo rate command, you can restore the default setting.

By default, auto is selected.

Example

Restore the auto mode at the interface.

[3com-Atm1/0/0] undo shdsl rate

shdsl snr Syntax

shdsl snr threshold

undo snr

View

ATM interface view

Parameter

threshold: In the range of 5~30. By default, it is 25.

Description

Using the shdsl snr command, you can specify SNR (signal-to-noise ratio) value at an SHDSL interface. Using the undo snr command, you can restore the default value.

Example

Restore SNR value to the default value.

[3com-Atm1/0/0] undo shdsl snr

shdsl margin Syntax

shdsl margin { disable | value }

undo margin

View

ATM interface view

Parameter

disable: Ignores target margin in link negotiation.

value: Sets target margin value, in the range of 0~10.


Description

Using the shdsl margin command, you can enable SNR target margin. Using the undo margin command, you can restore the default value.

By default, the SNR target margin is 3.

Example

Set shdsl margin to 8.

[3com-Atm1/0/0] shdsl margin 8

display dsl configuration Syntax

display dsl configuration interface atm interface-number

View

Any view

Parameter


Description

Using the display dsl configuration command, you can view DSL configuration information.

Example

Display G.SHDSL configuration information.

[3com-Atm3/0/0]display dsl configuration interface atm 3/0 GSHDSL line parameter and mode Configuration Mode: CPE Standard: G991.2 Annex: B Wire Type: 2 Framing: 3 SNR Threshold: 25 dB Line Rate: Auto Adaptive Target Margin: 3 dB Psd Mode: Sym PSD Power-Backoff: Disable

--Actual Handshake Status -- 00: 0002 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 10: 0000 0008 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0008 0000 20: 0000 0000 0002 0002 0004 0010 --Local Handshake Status -- 00: 0002 0001 0000 0000 0000 0000 0034 003f 003f 003f 10: 003f 003f 0003 0034 003f 003f 003f 003f 003f 0003 20: 0000 0000 0003 0003 000f 0010 --Remote Handshake Status -- 00: 0002 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0030 003f 003f 003f


10: 003f 000f 0000 0030 003f 003f 003f 003f 000f 0000 20: 0000 0000 0003 0003 0004 0010

display dsl status Syntax

display dsl status interface atm interface-number

View

Any view

Parameter


Description

Using the display dsl status interface atm command, you can view DSL interface state.

Example

Display G.SHDSL interface state.

[3com-Atm3/0/0]display dsl status interface atm 3/0/0 Operating Mode: CPE Standard: G991.2 Wire Type: 2 Phy Op State: Active Xcvr Op State: Data Mode LineRate Mode: Adaptive Target Margin: 3 dB LOC Detect: 0 Losw Defect: 0 Frm Sync: 1

Tx Cells: 0 Rx Cells: 0 Drop Cells: 0 HecErr Cells: 0 CRCS: 135 SEGAS: 335 LOSWS: 4

Int Count TX EOC: 0 RX EOC: 4 RX LOSD: 0 RX SEGA: 0 RX PS: 0 RX SEGD: 0 RX LOSWS: 1

Actual Rate(kbps): 2064 Actual Annex: B Actual SNR (dB): 38 Actual LoopAttn(dB): 0.9


Actual RecvGain(dB): 11.4 Actual TxPower(dBm): 14.5 Actual Wire Type: 2 FrmOH Stat: 0x0f Rmt Encoder A : 0x6e010000 Rmt Encoder B : 0x31030000 Rmt NSF Cusdata : 0x0000 Rmt NSF CusID : 0x0000 Rmt Country Code : 0x00b5 Rmt Provider Code: 0x4753504e NPSG Rmt Vendor Data: 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00

Table 6 Displaying information of display dsl status

display dsl version Syntax

display dsl version interface atm interface-number

View

Any view

Parameter


Description

Using the display dsl version command, you can display DSL version and functions available.

Example

Display G.SHDSL version.

[3com-Atm3/0/0] display dsl version interface atm 3/0/0 Dsl Line Type: G.SHDSL ATM SAR Device: 0x823614f1 ATM SAR Revision: 0x02 Chipset Vendor: GSPN

Field DescriptionOperating Mode CPE stands for customer premises equipment and CO for central

office. Wire Type The options include 2-line type and 4-line type. Currently only

2-line type is available. Phy Op State Interface state and the options include activating, active,

startup, deactivated and test mode. Xcvr Op State Transceiver state and the options include idle, data mode,

handshaking and training. Actual LoopAttn(dB) Actual loop attenuationActual RecvGain(dB) Actual receive gainActual TxPower(dBm) Actrual transmit gain FrmOH Stat FirmWare Over Head stateRmt NSF Cusdata User dataRmt NSF CusID User ID

ADSL Interface Configuration Commands 219

Firmware Rel-Rev: R2.3.1-0 DSP Version: 1 PCB Version: 0.0 CPLD Version: 0.0 Driver Version: 2.0 Hardware Version: 1.0 ITU G991.2 ANNEX A: Supported ITU G991.2 ANNEX B: Supported

ADSL Interface Configuration Commands

activate Syntax

activate

undo activate

View

ADSL interface view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the activate command, you can activate an ADSL interface. Using the undo activate command, you can deactivate an ADSL interface.

By default, the ADSL interface is active.

Before an ADSL port can operate services, you must activate it. “ACTIVATE” in this particular context refers to the training conducted between an ADSL central office and a remote ATU-R. The activation procedure will be specified in compliance with the ADSL standard, channel mode, uplink and downlink speeds, and the noise tolerance specified in the line configuration template. It will test the line distance and state, make the central office and the remote device make negotiation, and confirm whether the normal operation is allowed in the these conditions. If the training succeeds, the central office and the remote device can set up a communication connection for transporting services between them. This process is also called port activation. This connection will disappear upon the deactivation of the ADSL port. To transport new services, you must re-activate the port.

This command is used to manually activate/deactivate an ADSL line for the purpose of testing and troubleshooting.

The commands activate/undo activate and shutdown/undo shutdown are different because the former can only take effect on ADSL lines.

You should note that ADSL is always online, which is different from DCC. Therefore, after the device is booted, the ADSL interface will automatically enable


the activation task and enter the active state. It will stay active as long as the line is in good condition. The router tests the line performance at a regular interval and will automatically deactivate the line and perform a new training and re-activation once it finds out that the line performance has deteriorated.

Example

Deactivate the ADSL interface.

[3com-Atm1/0]undo activate

adsl standard Syntax

adsl standard { auto | gdmt | glite | t1413 }

undo adsl standard

View

ADSL interface view

Parameter

auto: Auto-sensing mode.

gdmt: Adopts the G.DMT(G992.1) standard.

glite: Adopts the G.Lite (G992.2) standard.

t1413: Adopts the T1.413 standard.

Description

Using the adsl standard command, you can set the standard applied to an ADSL interface. Using the undo adsl standard command, you can restore the default standard used by the ADSL interface.

By default, the ADSL standard is set to auto.

You should note that this configuration does not take effect unless you activate the interface again. If you want to make it take effect immediately, you can execute the shutdown/undo shutdown command or the activate/undo activate command.

Example

Set the standard for the interface atm1/0/0 as T1.413.

[3com-Atm1/0/0]adsl stand t1413

[3com -Atm1/0/0]shutdown

Interface Atm1/0/0 has already been shutdown

[3com -Atm1/0/0]undo shutdown


[3com -Atm1/0/0]

%Nov 20 21:17:12 2003 5680 PHY/2/PHY: Atm1/0: change status to up

%Nov 20 21:17:13 2003 5680 IFNET/5/UPDOWN:Line protocol on the interface Atm1/0/0 turns into UP state

[3com -Atm1/0/0]display dsl configuration int atm 1/0/0

Line Params Set by User

Standard: T1.413

Annex: A

Framing: 3

Coding Gain(dB): Auto

Tx Pow Attn(dB): 0

Bit-Swap: disable

LinkCheck: Enable

Actual Config Near End Far End

Standard: T1.413 T1.413

Trellis Coding: Enable Enable

Framing: 3 3

Vendor ID: 0x0039 0x0004

AS0 (DS) LS0(US)

Rate(Bytes): 238 26

Rate(kbps): 7616 832

Latency: Intlv Intlv

FEC(fast): 0 0

S/D/R(Inlv): 1/64/16 8/8/16


DMT Bits Allocation Per Bin (Up/Down Bits:249/2148)

00: 0 0 0 0 0 0 7 8 a a a a 8 a b c c c b b b b b b 9 9 a a 9 8 8 0

20: 0 0 0 0 2 2 2 3 4 4 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 8 8 8 9 9 a a a a a a a 8 9 a

40: 0 a a a a b b b b b a b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b

60: b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b a 9 4 a b b b b b b b b b

80: b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b

a0: b b b a b a b a b b a b b b b b a a b a a b b a a a a a a a a a

c0: a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a

e0: a 9 9 a 9 9 9 9 9 9 8 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 8 8 8 8 8 7 7 7 7 6 6 6

adsl tx_attenuation Syntax

adsl tx_attenuation attenuation

undo adsl tx_attenuation

View

ADSL interface view

Parameter

attenuation: Attenuation value, in the range of 0~12. By default, it is 0.

Description

Using the adsl tx_attenuation command, you can set attenuation value for ADSL transmit power. Using the undo adsl tx_attenuation command, you can restore the default value.

Example[3com-Atm1/0/0] adsl tx_attenuation 10

display dsl configuration Syntax

display dsl configuration interface atm interface-number

View

Any view

Parameter



Description

Using the display dsl configuration command, you can display the actual ADSL configuration information.

Example

Display the actual ADSL configuration information.

[3com-Atm1/0]display dsl configuration interface atm 1/0

Line Params Set by User

Standard: T1.413

Annex: A

Framing: 3

Coding Gain(dB): Auto

Tx Pow Attn(dB): 0

Bit-Swap: disable

LinkCheck: Enable

Actual Config Near End Far End

Standard: T1.413 T1.413

Trellis Coding: Enable Enable

Framing: 3 3

Vendor ID: 0x0039 0x0004

AS0 (DS) LS0(US)

Rate(Bytes): 238 26


Latency: Intlv Intlv

FEC(fast): 0 0

S/D/R(Inlv): 1/64/16 8/8/16


DMT Bits Allocation Per Bin (Up/Down Bits:249/2148)

00: 0 0 0 0 0 0 7 8 a a a a 8 a b c c c b b b b b b 9 9 a a 9 8 8 0

20: 0 0 0 0 2 2 2 3 4 4 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 8 8 8 9 9 a a a a a a a 8 9 a

40: 0 a a a a b b b b b a b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b

60: b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b a 9 4 a b b b b b b b b b

80: b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b

a0: b b b a b a b a b b a b b b b b a a b a a b b a a a a a a a a a

c0: a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a

e0: a 9 9 a 9 9 9 9 9 9 8 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 8 8 8 8 8 7 7 7 7 6 6 6

Table 7 Displaying information of display dsl configuration

display dsl status Syntax

display dsl status interface atm interface-number

View

Any view

Parameter


Description

Using the display dsl status command, you can display the DSL state information.

Example

Display the ADSL state information of the interface 1/0/0.

[3com-Atm1/0/0]display dsl status interface atm 1/0/0

State of driver/chipsets

Phy Op State: Active

Field DescriptionLine Params Set by User Line parameters at ATU-R end, for example, standard, DMT mode,

framing, trellis coding or not. You can only modify the standard for special testing or diagnosis, but not the others.

The following information appears after the link is activated. Actual Config Actual operating parameters after the link is activatedRate(kbps) Negotiated rate, AS0 (DS) downlink and LS0 (US) uplink, in units of kbpsLatency Delay mode and the options include fast and interleave.


Xcvr Op State: Data Mode

Active Params Near End Far End

SNR Margin(dB): 16.0 3.0

Attenuation(dB): 1.0 2.0

Coding Gain(dB): 5.5

Tx Power(dBm): 8.3 21.7

Tx Bin Number: 25 219


Adsl Count Near End Far End

SEF(sef): 0 0

LOS(los): 0 0

RSI(fec-I): 0 0

RSF(fec-F): 0 0

CRCI(crc-I): 2 0

CRCF(crc-F): 0 0

ATM Count

NCDI(ncd-I): 0 0

NCDF(ncd-F): 0 0

OCDI(ocd-I): 0

OCDF(ocd-F): 0

HECI(hec-I): 0 0

HECF(hec-F): 0 0

Adsl Defects

Overall: 0

SEF(sef): 0 0


LOS(LOS): 0 0

ATM Defects

NCDI(ncd-I): 0 0

NCDF(ncd-F): 0 0

LCDI(lcd-I): 0 0

LCDF(lcd-F): 0 0

Table 8 Displaying information with display dsl status

display dsl version Syntax

display dsl version interface atm interface-number

View

Any view

Parameter


Description

Using the display dsl version command, you can display the DSL version information and the supported capabilities.

Example

Display the ADSL version information.

[3com-Atm1/0/0]display dsl version interface atm 1/0/0

Adsl board chipset and version info

Dsl Line Type: Adsl Over Pots

Field DescriptionState of driver/chipsetsInterface state and transceiver statePhy Interface state and options include activating, active, startup,

deactivated and test mode Xcvr Transceiver state and options include idle, data mode, handshaking and

training. The following information appears after the link is activated. Active Params Link parameters, which include SNR margin, attenuation, Tx Bin

Number etc. The Present rate(kbps) is consistent with the result of the display dsl configuration command.

Adsl Count Error and correction statistics form the chipset. For their types, refer to ITU-T G. 992 and ANSI T1.413-1998.

Adsl Defects It shows the current link situation. When the link has deteriorated, non-zero value may appear. While it turns to normal or is activated again, those existing statistics are cleared. The Overall failures value is a aggregate value, but others are not.

Fundamental Logical Interface Configuration Commands 227

Dsl Line Type: Adsl Over Pots

ATM SAR Device: 0x823614f1

ATM SAR Revision: 0x02

Chipset Vendor: GSPN

FW Release: T7941

Revision: 1

DSP Version: 0

AFE Version: 0

PCB Version: 0.0

CPLD Version: 1.0

Driver Version: 2.0

Hardware Version: 1.0

Adsl Capability

ANSI T1.413 Issue 2: Supported

ITU G992.1 ANNEX A: Supported

ITU G992.2 : Supported

Fundamental Logical Interface Configuration Commands

This chapter only discusses basic configuration of logical interfaces. For configuration of link-layer and network-layer protocols, refer to corresponding sections in this guide.

Sub-InterfaceConfiguration

Commands

interface Syntax

interface interface-type interface-number.subinterface-number [ p2mp | p2p ]

undo interface interface-type interface-number.subinterface-number

View

System view


Parameter

interface-type: Type of interface

interface-number: Number of interface, including slot number, card number, and port number.

subinterface-number: Number of sub-interface, ranging from 0 to 4096.

p2mp: Configures type of sub-interface as point to multipoint

p2p: Configures type of sub-interface as point to point

Description

Using the interface command, you can create sub-interface of point to multipoint or point to point types. Using the undo interface command, you can delete specified sub-interface.

By default, the type of sub-interface is point to multipoint.

Presently, point to multipoint or point to point sub-interface can be configured to ATM interface, interface with frame relay or X.25 as its link layer protocol type. In contrast, sub-interface of Ethernet is of broadcast type.

Up to 1024 sub-interfaces can be created for one main-interface.

Example

Create a sub-interface on ATM interface 2/0/0.

<3com> system-view[3com] interface atm 2/0/0.1[3com-Atm2/0/0.1]

interface ethernet Syntax

interface ethernet interface-number.subinterface-number

undo interface ethernet interface-number.subinterface-number

View

System view

Parameter

interface-number: Number of interface, including slot number, card number, and port number.

subinterface-number: Number of sub-interface, ranging from 0 to 4096.

Logic-Channel Interface 229

Description

Using the interface ethernet command, you can create Ethernet sub-interface. Using the undo interface ethernet command, you can delete specified Ethernet sub-interface.

Ethernet sub-interface is used for VLAN configuration. For a detailed configuration procedure for VLAN, refer to the section Link Layer Protocol chapter in the 3Com Router Configuration Guide.

Up to 256 sub-interfaces can be created for one Ethernet interface.

Example

Create a sub-interface on Ethernet interface 1/0/0.

[3com] interface ethernet 1/0/0.1[3com-Ethernet1/0/0.1]

Logic-Channel Interface

interface logic-channel Syntax

interface logic-channel interface-number

undo interface logic-channel interface-number

View

System view

Parameter

interface-number: Number of logic-channel, in range of 0~1023.

Description

Using the interface logic-channel command, you can create logic-channel interface. Using the undo interface ethernet command, you can delete logic-channel interface.

Once it is created, a logic-channel interface stays in UP state until it is deleted.

Example

Create the logic-channel interface 100.

[3com] interface logic-channel 100[3com-Logic-Channel100]


Configuration Command of Virtual Template and Virtual Access Interface

broadcast-limit link Syntax

broadcast-limit link number

undo broadcast-limit link

View

Virtual template view

Parameter

number: Maximum link number that the virtual template supports for sending multicast or broadcast packets, ranging from 0 to 128. The default value is 30.

Description

Using the broadcast-limit link command, you can configure the maximum link number that virtual template supports for sending multicast or broadcast packets. Using the undo broadcast-limit link command, you can restore the default configuration.

When there are many links on a virtual template, sending multicast or broadcast packets from each link may influence the function of the system. In this case, the broadcast-limit link command can be used as a limitation, so that multicast or broadcast packets are discarded if the link number exceeds the limitation.

Example

Configure maximum link number of virtual template 1 supporting sending multicast or broadcast packet to be 100.

[3com] interface virtual-template 1[3com-Virtual-Template1] broadcast-limit link 100

display interfacevirtual-template

Syntax

display interface virtual-template [ number ]

View

Any view

Parameter

virtual-template: Virtual template.

number: Number of virtual template, ranging from 0 to 1023. The state of all virtual template will be displayed, if this parameter is not specified.

Configuration Command of Virtual Template and Virtual Access Interface 231

Description

Using the display interface virtual-template command, you can view the status information of virtual template.

Example

View the state of specified virtual template.

<3com> display interface virtual-template 1

display virtual-access Syntax

display virtual-access [ slot slot-number | vt vt-number | user user-name | peer peer-address | va-number ]

View

Any view

Parameter

slot-number: Slot number of virtual access interface.

vt-number: Virtual template number of virtual access interface.

user-name: Login username of virtual access interface.

peer-address: Peer end address of virtual access interface.

va-number: Sequence number of virtual access interface.

State information of all virtual access interfaces will be displayed, if no parameter is specified.

Description

Using the display virtual-access command, you can view the state information of virtual access interface.

Example

View state information of all virtual access interfaces.

<3com> display virtual-access

interfacevirtual-template

Syntax

interface virtual-template number

undo interface virtual-template number

View

System view


Parameter

number: Number of virtual template, ranging from 0 to 1023.

Description

Using the interface virtual-template command, you can create virtual template or enter existing virtual template view. Using the undo interface virtual-template command, you can delete specified virtual template.

A virtual template should be created before the creation of a virtual access interface, and should be closed after the virtual access interface has been closed and will not be reused.

In deleting the virtual template, make sure that all its derived virtual access interfaces have been removed and this virtual template is not in use any more.

Example

Create virtual template 10.

[3com] interface virtual-template 10[3com-Virtual-Template10]

MP-group Interface Configuration Command

display interfacemp-group

Syntax

display interface mp-group [ number ]

View

Any view

Parameter

number: Number of MP-group interface. If the number of the interface is not specified, status information of all MP-group interfaces is displayed.

Description

Using the display interface mp-group command, you can view the status of MP-group interface.

Example

View status information of MP-group interface.

<3com> display interface mp-group

MP-group Interface Configuration Command 233

interface mp-group Syntax

interface mp-group number

undo interface mp-group number

View

System view

Parameter

number: Number of a MP-group interface. The sequence number ranges from 0 to 1023 so, at most, 1024 MP-group interfaces are supported by one interface card.

Description

Using the interface mp-group command, you can create a MP-group interface. Using the undo interface mp-group command, you can delete specified MP-group interface.

This command is used in concert with the ppp mp mp-group command. Either MP-group interface or interface added in MP group can be configured first.

Example

Create MP-group interface 3/0/0.

[3com] interface mp-group 3/0/0[3com-mp-group 3/0/0]

ppp mp mp-group Syntax

ppp mp mp-group number

undo ppp mp mp-group number

View

Interface view

Parameter

number: Number of MP-group interface

Description

Using the ppp mp mp-group command, you can add the current interface to a specified MP group. Using the undo ppp mp mp-group command, you can remove the current interface from a specified MP group.

This command is used with the interface mp-group command. Either MP-group interface or interface added in MP group can be configured first.

It should be noted that the interface added to an MP group must be consistent with the slot of the MP-group interface.


In addition, the interface added to an MP group must be a physical interface. Tunnel interfaces do not support this command.

Example

Add serial port 3/0/0 to MP group 3.

[3com] interface serial 3/0/0[3com-Serial3/0/0] ppp mp mp-group 3/0/0

Remove serial port 3/0/0 from MP group 3/0/0.

[3com-Serial3/0/0] undo ppp mp mp-group 3/0/0

Virtual Ethernet Interface Configuration Command

display interfacevirtual-ethernet

Syntax

display interface virtual-ethernet [ number ]

View

Any view

Parameter

number: Number of virtual Ethernet interfaces, with sequence number ranging from 0 to 1023. If the number of interfaces is not specified, the status of all virtual Ethernet interfaces will be displayed.

Description

Using the display interface virtual-ethernet command, you can view status of a virtual Ethernet interface.

Example

View the status information of virtual Ethernet interface 1/0/0.

<3com> display interface virtual-ethernet 1/0/0

interfacevirtual-ethernet

Syntax

interface virtual-ethernet number

undo interface virtual-ethernet number

View

System view

Virtual Ethernet Interface Configuration Command 235

Parameter

number: Number of virtual Ethernet interface, with sequence number ranging from 0 to 1023.

Description

Using the interface virtual-ethernet command, you can create a virtual Ethernet interface. Using the undo interface virtual-ethernet command, you can delete the specified virtual Ethernet interface.

Virtual Ethernet interface is mainly applied to PPPoEoA and IPoEoA.

Example

Create virtual Ethernet interface 12 on interface card 0 of slot 6.

[3com] interface virtual-ethernet 6/0/12[3com-Virtual-Ethernet6/0/12]

mac-address Syntax

mac-address H-H-H

undo mac-address

View

Virtual Ethernet interface view

Parameter

H-H-H: Mac address of virtual Ethernet interface, in the form of hex character string.

Description

Using the mac-address command, you can configure the Mac address of a virtual Ethernet interface. Using the undo mac-address command, you can restore the default configuration.

By default, for a virtual Ethernet interface created on VIU, its MAC address is the same as the MAC address of Ethernet interface carried by VIU itself.

For a virtual Ethernet interface created on RSU, its MAC address is 0 by default.

Example

Configure the MAC address of virtual Ethernet interface 10/0/0.

[3com] interface virtual-ethernet 10/0/0[3com-Virtual-Ethernet10/0/0] mac-address 1000-1000-1000


Configuration Command of Loopback Interface and Null Interface

display interfaceloopback

Syntax

display interface loopback [ number ]

View

Any view

Parameter

number: Number of Loopback interface, which must be an existing one. If number of interface is not specified, status of all created loopback interface will be displayed.

Description

Using the display interface loopback command, you can view status of the loopback interface.

For the related command, see interface loopback.

Example

View status information of specified Loopback interface.

<3com> display interface loopback 6LoopBack6 current state : UPLine protocol current state :UP Description : 3Com Routers, LoopBack6 InterfaceThe Maximum Transmit Unit is 1536Internet Address is 10.10.1.1/8

display interface null Syntax

display interface null [ 0 ]

View

Any view

Parameter

0: Number of Null interface, fixed as 0.

Description

Using the display interface null command, you can view status of Null interface.

The parameter does not affect the execution result.

Configuration Command of Loopback Interface and Null Interface 237

For a related command, see interface null.

Example

View status information of Null0 interface.

<3com> display interface null 0NULL0 current state : UPLine protocol current state :UP (spoofing)Physical is NULL DEVDescription : 3Com Routers, NULL0 InterfaceThe Maximum Transmit Unit is 1500Internet protocol processing : disabled 5 minutes input rate 0 bytes/sec, 0 packets/sec 5 minutes output rate 0 bytes/sec, 0 packets/sec 0 packets input, 0 bytes, 0 drops 0 packets output, 0 bytes, 0 drops

interface loopback Syntax

interface loopback number

undo interface loopback number

View

System view

Parameter

number: Number of Loopback interface, ranging from 0 to 1023.

Description

Using the interface loopback command, you can create a Loopback interface or enter Loopback interface view. Using the undo interface loopback command, you can delete a specified Loopback interface.

After a Loopback interface is created, it always keeps up state, and bears loopback feature, so it is often used to improve the reliability of configuration.

For the related command, see display interface loopback.

Example

Create Loopback interface 5.

[3com] interface loopback 5[3com-LoopBack5]

interface null Syntax

interface null 0


View

System view

Parameter

none

Description

Using the interface null command, you can enter the Null interface view.

There is only one Null interface, fixed as null0, which is fixed, and cannot be deactivated or deleted.

For the related command, see display interface null.

Example

Enter view of Null0 interface.

[3com] interface null 0[3com-NULL0]

4 LINK LAYER PROTOCOL

PPP and MP Configuration Commands

display ppp mp Syntax

display ppp mp [ interface interface-type interface-num ]

View

Any view

Parameter

interface-type interface-num: Used to specify the interface to be viewed.

Description

Using the display ppp mp command, you can view all the interface information and statistics of MP.

For the related commands, see link-protocol ppp and ppp mp.

Example

Display the MP interface information.

<3Com> display ppp mpTemplate is Virtual-Template1Bundle, quid0, 1 member, slot 3, Master link is Virtual-Template1:00 lost fragments, 0 reordered, 0 unassigned, sequence 0/0 rcvd/sentThe bundled son channels are: Serial3/0/0

Table 1 3ComMP display information description

Field DescriptionTemplate is Virtual-Template1 Virtual-template interfaceBundle quid0 Bundle name1 member The number of bound channelsslot 3 Bundled in slot 3Master link is Virtual-Template1:0 Master link0 lost fragments Lost fragments0 reordered Reordered packet number0 unassigned Unassigned fragmentssequence 0/0 rcvd/sent Received sequence number/sent sequence

numberThe bundled son channels are: The following displays all the bundled son

channels at this logical channel

240 CHAPTER 4: LINK LAYER PROTOCOL

Display PPP configuration and operating state of the interface.

The part in boldface is the relative information of PPP, including the current status of LCP and IPCP. Users can diagnose some faults according to the information.

ip tcp vjcompress Syntax

ip tcp vjcompress

undo ip tcp vjcompress

View

Interface view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the ip tcp vjcompress command, you can enable a PPP interface to compress the VJ TCP header. Using the undo ip tcp vjcompress command, you can disable the PPP interface to compress the VJ TCP header.

If the VJ TCP header is permitted to compress at the PPP interface, the interface at the opposite end shall also permit to compress the VJ TCP header. This command is only used in the centralized environment.

By default, the VJ TCP header is disabled to compress at the PPP interface.

Example

The VJ TCP header is permitted to compress at the PPP interface

[3Com-dialer0] ip tcp vjcompress

link-protocol ppp Syntax

link-protocol ppp

View

VT view or Dialer view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the link-protocol ppp command, you can configure the link-layer protocol encapsulated on the interface as PPP.

By default, the link-layer protocol for interface encapsulation is PPP.

PPP and MP Configuration Commands 241

PPP is a link-layer protocol bearing network-layer packets over the point-to-point link. It defines a whole set of protocols including LCP (link control protocol), NCP (network-layer control protocol), PAP (Password Authentication Protocol) and CHAP (Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol). It is widely used for it supports user authentication, easy scalability and synchronization/asynchronization.

For the related command, see display interface.

Example

Configure PPP encapsulation on interface Serial 0/0/0.

[3Com--Dialer0] link-protocol ppp

mp binding-mode Syntax

ppp mp binding-mode { authentication | both | descriptor }

undo ppp mp binding-mode

View

System view

Parameter

authentication: Performs the MP binding according to the authentication user name of PPP.

both: Performs the MP binding based on both the authentication user name of PPP and the terminal identifier.

descriptor: Performs the MP binding according to the terminal identifier.

Description

Using the ppp mp binding-mode command, you can set the MP binding condition. Using the undo ppp mp binding-mode command, you can restore the default value of the MP binding condition.

By default, it performs the MP binding based on both the authentication user name of PPP and the terminal identifier.

User name is the peer one received by the PPP link performing the PAP or CHAP authentication, while the terminal identifier, as a unique flag of a Router, is the peer one received in performing the LCP negotiation. The system can perform the MP binding base on the received user name and terminal identifier, and then the interfaces with the identical user name or the same terminal identifier is bound together.

For the related command, see ppp mp user.


Example

Perform the MP binding only based on the user name of the PPP authentication.

[3Com] ppp mp binding-mode authentication

ppp accounting scheme Syntax

ppp accounting scheme { default | scheme -name }

undo ppp accounting

View

Interface view

Parameter

default: Indicates that the default accounting method list is adopted.

scheme -name: Accounting method list, indicating that which method list is adopted for accounting.

Description

Using the ppp accounting scheme command, you can set accounting for PPP user. Using the undo ppp accounting command, you can disable the accounting .

By default, no ppp accounting is performed.

After PPP authentication succeeds, AAA will begin to charge the peer user. The command is used to configure the accounting method list. Please refer to “AAA Configuration” for the detailed method list configuration.

For the related commands, see ppp authentication-mode and aaa authentication-scheme ppp.

Example

Configure to adopt the default accounting method list for accounting on Serial 0/0/0.

[3Com-Serial0/0/0] ppp accounting scheme default

pppauthentication-mode

Syntax

ppp authentication-mode { chap | pap } [ call-in ] [ scheme { default | scheme -name } ]

undo ppp authentication-mode

View

Interface view


Parameter

One of chap and pap should be selected.

call-in: Authenticates the peer only when the remote user calls in.

default and scheme-name: indicates the authentication algorithm lists configured by user while authenticating. For detailed description, refer to “AAA section”.

Description

Using the ppp authentication-mode command, you can set the local PPP authentication algorithm for the peer router. Using the undo ppp authentication-mode command, you can cancel the configuration, i.e. no authentication.

By default, no authentication is performed.

There are two PPP authentication algorithms:

■ PAP is a 2-way handshake authentication, which sends the password in plain text.

■ CHAP is a 3-way handshake authentication, which sends the password in encrypted text.

In addition, the defined AAA authentication algorithm list can be used.

Either CHAP or PAP is just an authentication process. The success of the authentication is decided by AAA, which can authenticate on the basis of the local authentication database or AAA server.

For the related commands, see local-user, ppp chap user, ppp pap local-user, aaa authentication-scheme ppp, ppp pap password, and ppp chap password.

Example

Authenticate the peer router by means of PAP on interface Serial0/0/0.

[3Com-Serial1/0/0] ppp authentication-mode pap

ppp chap password Syntax

ppp chap password { simple | cipher } password

undo ppp chap password

View

Interface view

Parameter

password: Password.

simple or cipher: Passwords in plain text or in encrypted text.


Description

Using the ppp chap password command, you can configure the default CHAP password while performing CHAP authentication. Using the undo ppp chap password command, you can cancel the configuration.

While configuring CHAP authentication, you should configure the local password to be the same as the user password at the other end.

For the related commands, see ppp authentication-mode chap and local-user.

Example

Set the user password as 3Com in plain text when the local router perform the authentication via CHAP.

[3Com-Serial1/0/0] ppp chap password simple 3Com

ppp chap user Syntax

ppp chap user username

undo ppp chap user

View

Interface view

Parameter

username: User name of CHAP authentication, which is the one sent to the peer equipment to be authenticated.

Description

Using the ppp chap user command, you can configure the user name when performing the CHAP authentication. Using the undo ppp chap user command, you can delete the existing configuration.

By default, the user name of the CHAP authentication is blank.

While configuring CHAP authentication, you should configure the username of each end as the local_user of the peer end, and configure the corresponding password accordingly.

For the related commands, see ppp authentication-mode and local-user.

Example

Configure the local user name as Root when CHAP authentication is performed on interface Serial0/0/0.

[3Com-Serial1/0/0] ppp chap user Root


ppp compression iphc Syntax

ppp compression iphc [ nonstandard | rtp-connections rtp-connections | tcp-connections tcp-connections ]

View

Interface view

Parameter

nonstandard: uses the nonstandard mode in compressing the IP/UDP/RTP header

rtp-connections rtp-connections: sets the maximum rtp-connections of the iphc function, its value ranges from 3 to 1000.

tcp-connections tcp-connections: sets the maximum number of tcp-connections of the iphc function, its value ranges from 3 to 256.

Description

Using the ppp compression iphc command, you can enable the iphc.

For the related command, see link-protocol ppp.

Example

None

ppp compression stac-lzs Syntax

ppp compression stac-lzs

undo ppp compression stac-lzs

View

Interface view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the ppp compression stac-lzs command, you can set the PPP protocol to use the Stac compression algorithm. Using the undo ppp compression stac-lzs command, you can disable the compression at the relevant interface.

By default, compression is disabled.

When stac-lzs compression is configured on the interface, the data frame size can be reduced through data compression without losing the data. However, this configuration will add load to the router. It is recommended that this function be disabled when the router has already been overloaded. In addition, only when


stac-lzs is configured at both ends of a point-to-point link, will this link support the stac-lzs compression.


Example

Configure stac-lzs compression on the local router.

[3Com-Serial0/0/0] ppp compression stac-lzs

ppp ipcp dns Syntax

ppp ipcp dns { primary-dns-address [ secondary-dns-address ] | admit-any }

undo ppp ipcp dns { primary-dns-address [ secondary-dns-address ] | admit-any }

View

Interface view

Parameter

primary-dns-address: Address of the primary DNS server.

secondary-dns-address: Address of the secondary DNS server.

admit-any: Accepts any DNS address requested by the peer.

Description

Using the ppp dns command, you can enable the Router to provide the DNS address for the peer. Using the undo ppp dns command, you can disable this process.

By default, the Router does not provide the DNS address for the peer.

When other devices are connected with the Router (e.g. PC is connected to the Router by dialing up) via the PPP protocol, the Router can assign the DNS address to the peer equipment after the negotiation. Thus, the peer equipment can directly access the network via the domain name.

If you connect the Router with your PC, you can use the command winipcfg or ipconfig /all on your PC to view the DNS address provided by the Router.

For the related commands, see ppp authentication–mode pap and local-user.

Example

Configure the primary DNS address of the local Router as 100.1.1.1, and the secondary DNS address as 100.1.1.2.

[3Com-Serial0/0/0] ppp ipcp dns 100.1.1.1 100.1.1.2


ppp mp Syntax

ppp mp

undo ppp mp

View

Interface view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the ppp mp command, you can enable the interface encapsulated with PPP to operate in the MP mode. Using the undo ppp mp command, you can enable the interface to operate in the Single PPP mode.

By default, the interface encapsulated with PPP operates in the Single PPP mode.

To increase the bandwidth, multiple PPP links can be bound to form a logical MP interface. For this purpose, it is necessary to specify a virtual-template in system view. MP can be configured and used only at the physical interfaces which can encapsulate PPP. To enable MP, you must configure the ppp mp command and the PAP or CHAP authentication at the physical interface.

For the related commands, see link-protocol ppp, ppp mp user, and interface virtual-template.

Example

Configure the PPP encapsulated interface Serial0/0/0 to work in MP mode.

[3Com-Serial1/0/0] ppp mp

ppp mp lfi Syntax

ppp mp lfi [ delay-per-frag max-delay ]

undo ppp mp lfi [ delay-per-frag ]

View

Virtual template interface view

Parameter

max-delay: Maximum delay in millisecond, its value ranges from 1 to 1000.

Description

Using the ppp mp lfi command, you can configure the link fragmentation and interleaving features. Using the undo ppp mp lfi command, you can restore the default configuration.


By default, the value of number is 10.

Example

Set a maximum delay of 100 milliseconds for per fragmentation.

[3Com-Virtual-Template0] ppp mp lfi delay-per-frag 100

ppp mp max-bind Syntax

ppp mp max-bind max-bind-num

undo ppp mp max-bind

View


Parameter

max-bind-num: Indicates maximum number of links which can be bound, in the range from 1 to 128.

Description

Using the ppp mp max-bind command, you can configure maximum number of bound links of MP. Using the undo ppp mp max-bind command, you can restore the default configuration.

By default, its value is 16.

Normally, it is not necessary to configure the parameter, which should be performed under the guidance of technical engineers when necessary. Such a configuration may have impact on the performance of PPP. If it is necessary to bind more than 16 PPP channels, the parameter max-bind-num can be changed.

If a VIU board reports failure in MP removing links, it is possible that the maximum binding number is smaller than the actually configured one. Make sure that the maximum binding number should be larger than the actual one.

For the related command, see ppp mp.

Example

Set the maximum number of bound links to 12.

[3Com-Virtual-Template10] ppp mp max-bind 12

ppp mp min-fragment Syntax

ppp mp min-fragment size

undo ppp mp min-fragment


View


Parameter

size: Minimum packet size for MP outgoing packet fragmentating. When the MP outgoing packet is smaller than this value, fragmentating is avoided. When the MP packet is larger than this value, fragment is involved. It is in byte in the range from 128 to 1500.

Description

Using the ppp mp min-fragment command, you can set the minimum packet size when MP outgoing packets begin to be fragmented in multiple-link binding. Using the undo ppp mp min-fragment command, you can restore the default setting.

By default, it is 128.

If the small packet fragmentating is not expected, this command can be used to set larger packet size value of the MP packet fragment.

For the related command, see ppp mp.

Example

Set the minimum packet of the MP packet fragmentating to 500 bytes.

[3Com-Virtual-Template10] ppp mp min-fragment 500

ppp mp user Syntax

ppp mp user username bind virtual-template number

undo ppp mp user username

View

System view

Parameter

username: User name

number: Virtual-template number.

Description

Using the ppp mp user command, you can configure MP binds based on the username. Using the undo ppp mp user command, you can cancel MP binds.

During the establishment of a PPP connection, after PPP authentication succeeds, if a virtual-template is specified, MP will be bound on the basis of parameters of the virtual-template and a new virtual interface will be formed to transfer data.

Operating parameters that could be configured on the virtual-template include:


■ Local IP address and the IP address (or IP address pool) assigned to the peer PPP

PPP working parameter

For the related commands, see ppp mp and ppp mp max-bind.

ExampleSpecify the corresponding virtual-template as 1 for the username 3Com, and configure the IP address of the virtual-template as 202.38.60.1.[3Com] ppp mp user 3Com bind virtual-template 1[3Com] interface virtual-template 1[3Com-virtual-template1] ip address 202.38.60.1 255.255.255.0

ppp mp virtual-template Syntax

ppp mp virtual-template [ number ]

undo ppp mp

View

Interface view

Parameter

number: Configures the virtual template number to be bound by the interface, which ranges from 0 to 1023.

Description

Using the ppp mp virtual-template command, you can configure the virtual template number to be bound by the interface. Using the undo ppp mp command, you can disable the MP binding of the interface.

By default, the MP binding of the interface is disabled, and the interface works in ordinary PPP mode.

This command specifies the virtual template number to be bound on the interface. The interface using this command to perform the MP binding needs not configuring PAP or CHAP authentication. Two or more interfaces with the same virtual template number is bound directly together. Moreover, this command is mutually exclusive with the ppp mp command. That is, only one of the two commands can be configured on a same interface.

For the related commands, see link-protocol ppp and interface virtual-template.

Example

Configure the PPP encapsulated interface Serial0/0/0 to work in MP view.

[3Com-Serial0/0/0] ppp mp virtual-template 1


ppp pap local-user Syntax

ppp pap local-user username password { simple | cipher } password

undo ppp pap local-user

View

Interface view

Parameter

username: Username sent.

password: Password sent.

simple: Password in plain text.

cipher: Password in encrypted text.

Description

Using the ppp pap local-user command, you can configure the username and password sent by the local router when it is authenticated by the peer router via the PAP method. Using the undo ppp pap local-user command, you can disable the configuration.

By default, when the local router is authenticated by the peer router via the PAP method, both the username and the password sent by the local router are empty.

When the local router is authenticated via the PAP method by the peer router, the username and password sent by the local router must be the same as the user and password of the peer router.

For the related commands, see ppp authentication pap-mode and local-user.

Example

Set the username of the local router authenticated by the peer end via the PAP method as 3Com and the password as 3Com.

[3Com-Serial1/0/0] ppp pap local-user 3Com password simple 3Com

ppp timer hold Syntax

ppp timer hold seconds

undo ppp timer hold

View



Parameter

seconds: Time interval for the interface to send keepalive packet in second. The value ranges from 0 to 32767 and defaults to 10.

Description

Using the ppp timer hold command, you can set the timer to send keepalive packet, while using the undo ppp timer hold command, you can restore the default value.

For the very slow data links, the seconds parameter must not be set too small. Because the long datagram can only be transferred totally after a long time, the transfer of keepalive datagram is delayed. The data link would be regarded to be broken if the interface has not received the keepalive packet from the other end for many keepalive periods. So if the keepalive time is set to a very long time, the datalink would be considered to be broken by the other end, and then be closed.

The keepalive time must be set same at the two end of a ppp link.


Example

Set the PPP timer hold to 20 seconds.

[3Com-Serial1/0/0] ppp timer hold 20

ppp timer negotiate Syntax

ppp timer negotiate seconds

undo ppp timer negotiate

View

Interface view

Parameter

seconds: Time of negotiation timeout in seconds. During the PPP negotiation, if the local end does not receive the response packet of the peer end, PPP will resend the last packet. The time ranges from 1 to 10 seconds.

Description

Using the ppp timer negotiate command, you can set the PPP negotiation timeout, while using the undo ppp timer negotiate command, you can restore the default value.

By default, the PPP timeout is 3 seconds.


PPPoE Server Configuration Commands 253

Example

Set the PPP negotiation timeout to 5 seconds.

[3Com-Serial1/0/0] ppp timer negotiate 5

PPPoE Server Configuration Commands

display pppoe-serversession

Syntax

display pppoe-server session { all | packet | statistics interface interface-type interface-number }

View

Any view

Parameter

all: Displays all information of each PPPoE session.

packet: Displays packet statistics of each PPPoE session.

statistics: Displays the statistics information of PPPoE sessions over an interface.

interface-type interface-number: Specifies an interface.

Description

Using the display pppoe-server session command, you can view the status and statistics of PPPoE session.

For the related commands, see link-protocol ppp and pppoe-server bind.

Example

View all the session information of PPPoE.

<3Com> display pppoe-server session allSID Intf State OIntf RemMAC LocMAC2 Virtual-Template1:0 UP Ethernet0/2/0 0050.ba22.7369 00e0.fc08.f4deTable 2 Output information description

View the statistics information of PPPoE session.

Field DescriptionSID Session IdentifierIntf The corresponding Virtual-Template interfaceState State of sessionsOIntf corresponding Ethernet interfaceRemMAC Remote MAC, MAC address of the other end.LocMAC Local MAC


<3Com> display pppoe-server session packetSID RemMAC LocMAC InP InO InD OutP OutO OutD1 0050ba1a02ce 0001af02a40f 42 2980 0 16 343 0

Table 3 Description of the output

pppoe-server bindvirtual-template

Syntax

pppoe-server bind virtual-template number

undo pppoe-server bind

View

Interface view

Parameter

number: Number of the virtual-template for access to PPPoE, and its value ranges from 0 to 1023.

Description

Using the pppoe-server bind virtual-template command, you can enable PPPoE on the virtual-template specified by the Ethernet interface. Using the undo pppoe-server bind command, you can disable PPPoE protocol on the relevant interface.

By default, PPPoE protocol is disabled.


Example

Enable PPPoE on virtual-template 1 of Ethernet interface Ethernet1/0/0.

[3Com-Ethernet1/0/0] pppoe-server bind virtual-template 1

pppoe-servermax-sessions local-mac

Syntax

pppoe-server max-sessions local-mac number

undo pppoe-server max-sessions local-mac

Field DescriptionInP In Packets, Packages received InO In Octets, Bytes receivedInD In Discards, Received and then discarded

packages OutP Out Packets, Packages sentOutO Out Octets, Bytes sentOutD Out Discard, Discarded packages that might be

sent.

PPPoE Server Configuration Commands 255

View

System view

Parameter

number: Maximum number of sessions that can be established at a local MAC address, which ranges from 1 to 4069.

Description

Using the pppoe-server max-sessions local-mac command, you can set the maximum number of PPPoE sessions that can be established at a local MAC address. Using the undo pppoe-server max-sessions local-mac command, you can restore the default configuration.


For the related commands, see pppoe-server max-sessions remote-mac and pppoe-server max-sessions total.

Example

Set the maximum number of PPPoE sessions that can be established at a local MAC address to 50.

[3Com] pppoe-server max-sessions local-mac 50

pppoe-servermax-sessions

remote-mac

Syntax

pppoe-server max-sessions remote-mac number

undo pppoe-server max-sessions remote-mac

View

System view

Parameter

number: Maximum number of PPPoE sessions that can be established at a peer MAC address, which ranges from 1 to 4096.

Description

Using the pppoe-server max-sessions remote-mac command, you can set the maximum number of PPPoE sessions that can be established at a peer MAC address. Using the undo pppoe-server max-sessions remote-mac command, you can restore the default configuration.


For the related commands, see pppoe-server max-sessions local-mac and pppoe-server max-sessions total.


Example

Display how to set the maximum number of PPPoE sessions that can be established at a remote MAC address to 50.

[3Com] pppoe-server max-sessions remote-mac 50

pppoe-servermax-sessions total

Syntax

pppoe-server max-sessions total number

undo pppoe-server max-sessions total

View

System view

Parameter

number: maximum number of PPPoE sessions that the system can establish, which ranges from 1 to 65535.

Description

Using the pppoe-server max-sessions total command, you can set the maximum number of PPPoE sessions that the system can establish. Using the undo pppoe-server max-sessions total command, you can restore the default configuration.


For the related commands, see pppoe-server max-sessions remote-mac and pppoe-server max-sessions local-mac.

Example

Set the maximum number of PPPoE sessions established by the system to 3000.

[3Com] pppoe-server max-sessions total 3000

PPPoE Client Configuration Commands

debugging pppoe-client Syntax

debugging pppoe-client option [ interface type number ]

View

User view and system view

PPPoE Client Configuration Commands 257

Parameter

option: PPPoE Client debugging switch type, see the following table for more details.

interface type number: Interface type and number, used to enable the debugging switch of the specified interface. If no interface is specified, the system will enable the debugging switch of all interfaces.

Table 4 PPPoE Client debugging switch type and explanation

Description

The command debugging pppoe-client is used to enable PPPoE Client debugging switch.

Example

None

display pppoe-serversession

Syntax

display pppoe-client session { summary | packet } [ dial-bundle-number number ]

View

Any view

Parameter

summary: Displays the summary of PPPoE session.

packet: Displays the statistics of PPPoE session data packet.

dial-bundle-number number: Displays the statistics of the specified PPPoE session. If PPPoE session is not specified, the system will display the statistics of all PPPoE sessions.

Description

The command display pppoe-client session is used to display the status and statistics of PPPoE session.

Example

Display the summary of PPPoE session.

[3Com]display pppoe-client session summaryPPPoE Client Session:

Debugging switch type Explanationall Enable all PPPoE Client debugging switchesdata Enable the PPPoE Session phase data packet debugging switcherror Enable PPPoE Client error information debugging switchevent Enable PPPoE Client event debugging switchpacket Enable PPPoE Discovery phase negotiation packet debugging switchverbose Display the verbose contents of PPPoE data


ID Bundle Dialer Intf Client-MAC Server-MAC State

1 1 1 Eth0 00e0fc0254f3 00049a23b050 PPPUP

2 2 2 Eth0 00e0fc0254f3 00049a23b050 PPPUP

For more details of the display information, see the following table.

Table 5 Explanation of display pppoe-client session summary

Display the statistics of PPPoE session data packet

<3Com> display pppoe-server session packetPPPoE Client Session: SID InP InO InD OutP OutO OutD=============================================================1 164 6126 0 83 1069 02 304 9886 0 156 2142 0

For more details of the display information, see the following table.

Table 6 Explanation of the information displayed by pppoe-client session packet

pppoe-client Syntax

pppoe-client dial-bundle-number number [ no-hostuniq ] [ idle-timeout seconds [ queue-length packets ] ]

undo pppoe-client dial-bundle-number number

View

Ethernet interface view or virtual Ethernet interface view

Parameter

dial-bundle-number number: Dialer Bundle number corresponding to PPPoE session, and its value ranges from 1 to 255.The parameter number can be used to identify a PPPoE session, or as a PPPoE session.

Field ExplanationID Session ID, PPPoE session IDServer-MAC Server MAC, server MAC addressClient-MAC Client MAC, client MAC addressDialer Corresponding Dialer interface of PPPoE sessionBundle Dialer Bundle containing PPPoE sessionIntf Ethernet interface containing PPPoE sessionState State of PPPoE session

Field ExplanationSID Session ID, PPPoE session IDInP In Packets: number of received packetsInO In Octets: number of received octetsInD In Discards: number of received illegal and discarded packetsOutP Out Packets: number of sent packetsOutO Out Octets: number of sent octetsOutD Out Discard: number of sent and discarded illegal packets

PPPoE Client Configuration Commands 259

no-hostuniq: The call originated from PPPoE Client does not carry the Host-Uniq field. By default, no no-hostuniq parameter is configured, i.e. PPPoE session works in permanent online mode by default.

idle-timeout seconds: Idle time of PPPoE session in seconds, and its value ranges from 1 to 65535. If the parameter is not configured, PPPoE session will work in permanent online mode. Otherwise, it will works in packet trigger mode.

queue-length packets: packet number cached in the system before PPPoE session is established, its value ranges from 1 to 100.Only after idle-timeout is configured will the parameter be enabled. By default, packets is 10.

Description

Using the pppoe-client command, you can establish a PPPoE session and specify the Dialer Bundle corresponding to the session. Using the undo pppoe-client command, you can delete a PPPoE session.

By default, no PPPoE session is configured.

Multiple PPPoE sessions can be configured at one Ethernet interface, i.e. one Ethernet interface might simultaneously belong to multiple Dialer Bundles. However, one Dialer Bundle only has one Ethernet interface. PPPoE session and Dialer Bundle are one-to-one. If the Dialer Bundle at a certain Dialer has had one Ethernet interface used by PPPoE, any other interfaces cannot be added to this Dialer Bundle. Likewise, if Dialer Bundle has had interfaces other than the PPPoE Ethernet interface, this Dialer Bundle can also not be added to the Ethernet interface used by PPPoE Client.

When PPPoE session works in permanent online mode, and the physical lines go UP, the Router will immediately initiate PPPoE call to establish PPPoE session. This PPPoE connection will exist constantly unless users use the command undo pppoe-client to delete PPPoE session. When PPPoE session works in packet trigger mode, the Router will not initiate PPPoE call to establish PPPoE session unless it has data to transmit. If there is no data transmission on the PPPoE link within seconds, the Router will automatically terminate PPPoE session. Only after it has new data to transmit, PPPoE session will be re-established.

For the related command, see reset pppoe-client.

Example

Create a PPPoE session on the interface Ethernet 0/0/0.

[3Com-Ethernet0/0/0]pppoe-client dial-bundle-number 1

reset pppoe-client Syntax

reset pppoe-client { all | dial-bundle-number number }

View

User view


Parameter

all: Clears all PPPoE sessions.

dial-bundle-number number: Dialer Bundle number, its value ranges from 1 to 255. Used to clear the PPPoE session corresponding to Dialer Bundle.

Description

Using the reset pppoe-client command, you can terminate PPPoE session and re-initiate the connection later.

If PPPoE session in permanent online mode is terminated using the command reset pppoe-client, the Router will automatically re-establish PPPoE session in sixteen seconds. If PPPoE session is terminated in packet trigger mode using the command reset pppoe-client, the Router will not re-establish PPPoE session unless it has data to transmit.

For the related command, see pppoe-client.

Example

Clear all PPPoE sessions, and re-initiate PPPoE session later.

<3Com>reset pppoe-client all

VLAN Configuration Commands

display vlan interface Syntax

display vlan interface interface-type interface-num

View

Any view

Parameter

interface-type interface-num: Specifies the interface. At present, the interface types supported include Ethernet interface and Gigabit Ethernet interface, and it only supports sub-interface.

Description

Using the display vlan interface command, you can view VLAN configuration information on a certain interface (only supporting sub-interface).

Example

Display the VLAN configuration information at the Ethernet interface 2/0/0.1.

<3Com> display vlan interface ethernet 2/0/0.1

VLAN Configuration Commands 261

encapsulation isl vid 60

display vlanmax-packet-process

Syntax

display vlan max-packet-process vid

View

Any view

Parameter

vid: VLAN ID, used to identify a VLAN.

Description

Using the display vlan max-packet-process command, you can view the maximum number of processed packets configured on a certain VLAN per second.

For the related command, see max-packet-process.

Example

Display the maximum number of processed packets configured on the VLAN 10.

<3Com> display vlan max-packet-process 10Max Packet Process Count for Vid 10 is 300000

display vlan statisticsinterface

Syntax

display vlan statistics interface interface-type interface-num protocol { arp | ip }

View

Any view

Parameter

interface-type interface-num: Used to specify the interface. At present, the interface types supported include Ethernet interface and Gigabit Ethernet interface, and it only supports sub-interface.

arp: packet type is ARP.

ip: packet type is IP.

Description

Using the display vlan statistics interface command, you can view the packet statistics on a certain VLAN.

For the related command, see reset vlan statistics interface.

Example

Display the VLAN statistics on Ethernet subinterface 2/0/0.1.


<3Com> display vlan statistics interface ethernet 0/2/0.1Packets Discarded : 0Packets forwarded to IP/ARP module : 0Packets forwarded by VLAN module: 0

display vlan statistics vid Syntax

display vlan statistics vid vid

View

Any view

Parameter


Description

Using the display vlan statistics vid command, you can view the packet statistics on a certain VLAN, e.g. the received packet number and the sent packet number.

For the related command, see reset vlan statistics interface.

Example

Display the packet statistics on VLAN 10.

<3Com> display vlan statistics vid 10Packets received: 53Packets transmitted: 14

max-packet-process Syntax

max-packet-process count vid

undo max-packet-process vid

View

System view

Parameter

count: Maximum number of processed packets.


Description

Using the max-packet-process command, you can set the maximum number of processed packets per second on a certain VLAN. Using the undo max-packet-process command, you can restore it to the default setting.

By default, the system has no limitation of the maximum number of processed packets.

VLAN Configuration Commands 263

After setting the maximum number of processed packets per second on a certain VLAN, and the received packet number belonging to this VLAN reaches the limitation, the subsequently received packets belonging to the VLAN will be discarded. Through this command, you can perform flow control.

For the related command, see display vlan max-packet-process.

Example

Set the maximum number of processed packets per second on the VLAN 10 as 200000.

[3Com] max-packet-process 200000 10

reset vlan statisticsinterface

Syntax

reset vlan statistics interface interface-type interface-number

View

User view

Parameter

interface-type interface-num: Used to specify the interface. At present, the interface types supported include Ethernet interface and Gigabit Ethernet interface, and it only supports sub-interface.

Description

Using the reset vlan statistics interface command, you can clear VLAN statistics on a certain interface.

For the related command, see show vlan statistics interface.

Example

Clear the VLAN statistics on Ethernet subinterface 2/0/0.1.

<3Com> reset vlan statistics interface ethernet 2/0/0.1

reset vlan statistics vid Syntax

reset vlan statistics vid vid

View

User view

Parameter


Description

Using the reset vlan statistics vid command, you can clear the VLAN statistics.


For the related command, see display vlan statistics vid.

Example

Clear the statistics with VLAN ID 10.

<3Com> reset vlan statistics vid 10

vlan-type dot1q Syntax

vlan-type dot1q vid vid

View

Interface view

Parameter

vid: VLAN ID, used to identify a VLAN, its value ranges from 1 to 4094.

Description

Using the vlan-type dot1q command, you can set the encapsulation types on the sub-interface.

By default, there is no encapsulation on the subinterface, nor VLAN ID related to the subinterface.

For the related command, see display vlan interface.

Example

Set the Ethernet sub-interface 2/0/0.1 to be related to VLAN ID 60, and its encapsulation format is dot1q.

[3Com-Ethernet2/0/0.1] vlan-type dot1q vid 60

ISDN Configuration Commands

debugging isdn Syntax

debugging isdn { cc | q921 | q931 | spid } [ interface type number ]

undo debugging isdn { cc | q921 | q931| spid } [ interface type number ]

View

User view

Parameter

cc: Enables ISDN CC module debugging.

q921: Enables Q.921 debugging.

ISDN Configuration Commands 265

q931: Enables ISDN Q.931 module debugging.

spid: Enables SPID debugging for the BRI interfaces running the NIprotocol.

interface type number: Interface type and number. You can enableISDN signaling debugging on an interface by specifying its type andnumber. If no interface has been specified, the system will enableISDN signaling debugging on all the ISDN interfaces.

Description

Using the debugging isdn command, you can enable ISDN debugging. Using the undo debugging isdn command, you can disable ISDN debugging.

You must enable terminal debugging first before ISDN debugging can take effect.

Example

Enable CC debugging.

<3Com> debugging isdn cc

Disable CC debugging.

<3Com> undo debugging isdn cc

display isdnactive-channel

Syntax

display isdn active-channel [ interface type number ]

View

Any view

Parameter

interface type number: Interface type and number.

Description

Using the display isdn active-channel command, you can view the active call information on ISDN interfaces. If no interface has been specified, the system will display the active call information on all the ISDN interfaces.

The displayed information can help you with ISDN call troubleshooting.

Example

Display the active call information on the interface bri 0/0/0.

[3Com] display isdn active-channel interface bri 0/0/0Bri0/0/0 :-------------------------------------------------------------Channel Call Call Calling Calling Called Called Info Property Type Number Subaddress Number SubaddressB1 Digital Out 8810124


B2 Analog In 8810118 380 8810150 2201-------------------------------------------------------------

display isdn call-info Syntax

display isdn call-info [ interface type number ]

View

Any view

Parameter

interface type number: Interface type and number.

Description

Using the display isdn call-info command, you can view the current states of ISDN interfaces. If no interface has been specified, the system will display the current states of all the ISDN interfaces.

Executing this command will output the state of each layer of the ISDN protocol on one or all interfaces, including the information of Q.921, Q.931 and CC modules. You may make troubleshooting based on the output information.

For the related command, see display interfaces.

Example

Display the current states of all ISDN interfaces.

[3Com]display isdn call-infoBri0/0/0:Link Layer: TEI = NONE, State = TEI_UNASSIGNED Network Layer: 0 connection(s)

Serial0/0/0:15: Link Layer: TEI = 0, State = MULTIPLE_FRAME_ESTABLISHED Network Layer: 1 connection(s) Connection 1: CCIndex: 0x0000, State: Active, CES: 1, Channel: 0x00000002 Calling_Num[:Sub]: 003 Called_Num[:Sub]: 002

Table 7 Description of the information displayed by executing display isdn call-info

Item DescriptionBri0/0/0 The interface Bri0/0/0 runs ISDN.Link Layer: TEI = 0, State = MULTIPLE_FRAME_ESTABLISHED

Displays the parameters related to the link layer protocol Q.921 of ISDN on the interface.

Network Layer: 1 connection(s) There is only one network layer connection on the interface currently.

CCIndex Call indexState Call stateChannel Channel mapCalling_Num[:Sub] Calling number: calling sub-addressCalled_Num[:Sub] Called number: called sub-address


Disabling an interface will clear all the statistic data related to the interface and new counting will be started.

display isdn call-record Syntax

display isdn call-record [ interface type number ]

View

Any view

Parameter

interface type number: Displays only the call history of the specified interface.

Description

Using the display isdn call-record command, you can view the information of ISDN call history.

Executing this command will display information of the calls activated in the last 15 minutes, but the number of retained entries is limited to 100.

Example

Display the information of ISDN call history.

[3Com] display isdn call-recordCall Calling Called Start Stop SecondsType Number Number Time Time Used--------------------------------------------------------------------In 10660016 10660016 03-07-05 11:23:09 - 0In 10660022 10660022 03-07-05 11:23:09 - 0Out - 660016 03-07-05 11:23:01 03-07-05 11:23:04 3Out - 660022 03-07-05 11:23:01 03-07-05 11:23:04 3In 10660016 10660016 03-07-05 11:23:01 03-07-05 11:23:04 3In 10660022 10660022 03-07-05 11:23:01 03-07-05 11:23:04 3

display isdn parameters Syntax

display isdn parameters { protocol | interface type number }

View

Any view

Parameter

protocol: ISDN protocol type, which can be DSS1, NTT, NI, ETSI, ANSI or AT&T.

interface type number: ISDN interface type and number.


Description

Using the display isdn parameters command, you can view the system parameters at layers 2 and 3 of the ISDN protocol, such as the durations of system timers and frame size.

If only ISDN protocol is specified, the system will display the default system parameters of ISDN.

For the related command, see display interfaces.

Example

Display the system parameters of the ISDN protocol DSS1.

[3Com] display isdn parameters dss1DSS1 ISDN layer 2 system parameters: T200(sec) T202(sec) T203(sec) N200 K(Bri) K(Pri) 1 2 10 3 1 7

DSS1 ISDN layer 3 system timers: Timer-Number Value(sec) T301 240 T302 15 T303 4 T304 30 T305 30 T308 4 T309 90 T310 40 T313 4 T314 4 T316 120 T317 10 T318 4 T319 4 T321 30 T322 4Table 8 Description of the displayed system parameters of ISDN

display isdn spid Syntax

display isdn spid [ interface type number ]

Item DescriptionT200(sec) Retransmit-timer (in seconds) of the L2 protocol of ISDNT202(sec) Retransmit-timer (in seconds) for the TEI request messages of the ISDN

L2 protocolT203(sec) The maximum link idle time (in seconds) of the ISDN L2 protocolN200 The maximum retransmission timesK(Bri) The maximum number of unacknowledged frames (slide window size)

on the ISDN BRI port.K(Pri) The maximum number of unacknowledged frames (slide window size)

on the ISDN PRI port.Timer-Number ISDN L3 timerValue(sec) Duration (in seconds) of each ISDN L3 timer


View

Any view

Parameter

interface type number: ISDN interface type and number.

Description

Using the display isdn spid command, you can view the related information of SPID on the BRI interface running the NI protocol.

You may execute this command to view the SPID type, SPID value and some other information when ISDN is running. Executing this command without specifying an interface, you may view the related information of SPI on all the SPID-supported BRI interfaces. Alternatively, you may view the information only on one interface by specifying its type and number.

Example

Display the related information of SPID on the NI-supported interface bri 0/0/0.

[3Com] display isdn spid interface bri 0/0/0Interface bri 0/0/0: SPID Type : AUTO SPID B1 :SPID Num: 124345

Neg State : SPID_ASSIGNEDInit State: INIT_NULL SPID B2 :SPID Num: 45645754Neg State : SPID_ASSIGNEDInit State: INIT_NULL SPID timer : 30 seconds SPID resend: 2

Table 9 Description of the SPID parameters

Item DescriptionSPID Type SPID Type, which can be NIT, STATIC (having only the L3 initialization

process), or AUTO (including both the negotiation and the L3 initialization)SPID B1 SPID value of the BRI interface B1 channel. It can be a static configuration

or the result of a dynamic negotiation, all depending on the specified SPID Type.

SPID Num SPID value of the BRI interface.It can be a static configuration or the result of a dynamic negotiation, all depending on the specified SPID Type.

Neg State Negotiation state of the SPID, which can be SPID_UNASSIGNED, ASSIGN_AWAITING_SPID, SPID_ASSIGNED, ASSIGN_AWAITING_CALL_CLEAR.

Init State Initialization state of the SPID, which can be INIT_NULL, INIT_IND, INIT_PROCEEDING, INIT_END, INIT_AWAITING_CALL_CLEAR.

SPID B2 SPID value of the BRI interface B2 channel. It can be a static configuration or the result of a dynamic negotiation, all depending on the specified SPID Type.

SPID timer Duration of the timer TSPIDSPID resend SPID message retransmission times


isdn bch-local-manage Syntax

isdn bch-local-manage

undo isdn bch-local-manage

View

ISDN interface view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the isdn bch-local-manage command, you can enable local ISDN B channel management. Using the undo isdn bch-local-manage command, you can disable the setting.

It is very important to put appropriate control on the B channels used for calls in process, especially in the PRI mode. Proper channel management can improve call efficiency and reduce call loss. Normally, the centralized B channel management provided by exchanges can work well. For this reason, you are recommended to adopt the management function provided by exchanges in most cases, despite the ISDN module can provide the channel management function as well.

Example

Enable local ISDN B channel management.

[3Com-Bri2/0/0] isdn bch-local-manage

isdn bch-select-way Syntax

isdn bch-select-way { ascending | descending}

View

ISDN interface view

Parameter

ascending: Selects B channels in ascending order.

descending: Selects B channels in descending order.

Description

Using the isdn bch-select-way command, you can set a B channel selection method.

By default, B channels are selected in ascending order.


Example

Configure B channel selection method on the interface Bri2/0/0 to descending order.

[3Com-Bri2/0/0] isdn bch-select-way descending

isdn caller-number Syntax

isdn caller-number caller-number

undo isdn caller-number

View

ISDN interface view

Parameter

caller-number: Caller number that an incoming ISDN call can carry, which is a character string of 1 to 24 characters.

Description

Using the isdn caller-number command, you can configure the range of the numbers that the router can receive. Using the undo isdn caller-number command, you can delete the configured caller number.

Example

Configure the router to receive only the incoming calls from the caller numbers with 400.

[3Com-Serial0/0/0:15] isdn caller-number 400

isdn calling Syntax

isdn calling calling-number

undo isdn calling

View

ISDN interface view

Parameter

calling-number: Calling number.

Description

Using the isdn calling command, you can have the messages from a calling party to a called party carry the calling number. Using the undo isdn calling command, you can delete calling number in the messages that a calling party transmitted.


This command mainly applies on BRI interfaces. If a calling party has configured this command on its BRI interface, the call party will be able to see the calling number by viewing the call history information.

Example

Configure the message from a calling party to a called party on interface Bri0/0/0 to carry calling number.

[3Com-Bri0/0/0] isdn calling 8060170

isdncheck-called-number

Syntax

isdn check-called-number check-index called-party-number [ : subaddress ]

undo isdn check-called-number check-index

View

ISDN BRI Interface view, ISDN PRI Interface view

Parameter

check-index: Called number or subaddress checking index, which is in the range of 1 to 3.

called-party-number: Called number, a string comprising 1 to 20 digits.

subaddress: Subaddress, which is a string comprising digits and/or case-insensitive English letters and is 1 to 20 characters in length.

Description

Using the isdn check-called-number command, you can configure the called number or subaddress that the system should verify when receiving a digital call. Using the undo isdn check-called-number command, you can remove the configuration.

By default, the system does not check the called number or subaddress carried by incoming digital calls.

This command is used for setting the examined item when a digital call is received. If a subaddress is specified, the system will deny an incoming digital call if the calling party sends a wrong subaddress or does not send at all.

Example

Check whether the called number carried by incoming digital calls is 66668888 on the interface Bri 0/0/0.

[3Com-Bri0/0/0] isdn check-called-number 1 66668888 : 123

isdn crlength Syntax

isdn crlength call-reference-length


undo isdn crlength

View

ISDN interface view

Parameter

call-reference-length: ISDN call reference length, which can be one or two bytes.

Description

Using the isdn crlength command, you can set length of the call reference used when a call is placed on an ISDN interface. Using the undo isdn crlength command, you can restore the default ISDN call reference length on the interface.

Call reference is equal to the sequence number that the protocol assigns to each call. It is one or two bytes in length and can be used cyclically.

When the router receives a call from a remote device, it can automatically identify the length of the call reference. However, some devices on the network do not have such capability. In the event that the router is required to place calls to such a device connected to it, you must configure the router to use the same call reference length configured on the connected device.

By default, the call reference length is two bytes for E1 PRI and T1 PRI interfaces and one byte for BRI interfaces.

You are not allowed to configure this command on an ISDN interface if there is still a call on it. This command can take effect only if it is configured when there is no call on the interface. Alternatively, you can manually disable the interface by executing the shutdown command, configure the command, and then enable the interface by executing the undo shutdown command. The operations, however, will lead to the disconnection of the call existing on the interface.

Example

Set the call reference length carried by the ISDN messages on the PRI interface serial0/0/0:15 to 1 byte.

[3Com-serial0/0/0:15] isdn crlength 1

isdn ignore connect-ack Syntax

isdn ignore connect-ack

undo isdn ignore connect-ack

View

ISDN interface view

Parameter

None


Description

Using the isdn ignore connect-ack command, you can configure the router to switch the ISDN protocol state to ACTIVE to start the data and voice service communications after sending a CONNECT message without having to wait for a CONNECT ACK message. Using the undo isdn ignore connect-ack command, you can restore the default setting.

By default, in the event that the router is communicating with an exchange, the ISDN protocol must wait for the CONNECT ACK message in response to the CONNECT message before it can switch to the ACTIVE state to start data and voice service communications.

In the event that the router is communicating with an ISDN exchange, its settings must be the same as those on the exchange.


Example

Set the call process on the BRI interface 0/0/0 to proceed to the ACTIVE state without waiting for CONNECT ACK messages.

[3Com-Bri0/0/0] isdn ignore connect-ack

isdn ignore hlc Syntax

isdn ignore hlc

undo isdn ignore hlc

View

ISDN interface view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the isdn ignore hlc command, you can disable ISDN to carry the higher layer compatibility (HLC) information element in the SETUP messages sent when placing voice calls. Using the undo isdn ignore hlc command, you can configure ISDN to carry the HLC information element in SETUP messages.

By default, HLC information element is carried in SETUP messages when placing voice calls.




Example

Configure ISDN to carry the HLC information element in the SETUP messages for the voice calls placed on the Bri interface 0/0/0.

[3Com-Bri0/0/0] isdn ignore hlc

isdn ignore llc Syntax

isdn ignore llc

undo isdn ignore llc

View

ISDN interface view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the isdn ignore llc command, you can disable ISDN to carry the Lower Layer Compatibility (LLC) information element in the SETUP messages sent when placing voice calls. Using the undo isdn ignore llc command, you can configure ISDN to carry the LLC information element in SETUP messages.

By default, LLC information element is carried in SETUP messages when placing voice calls.



Example

Disable ISDN to carry the LLC information element in the SETUP messages for the voice calls placed on the interface Bri 0/0/0.


[3Com-Bri0/0/0] isdn ignore llc

isdn ignoresending-complete

Syntax

isdn ignore sending-complete [ incoming | outgoing ]

undo isdn ignore sending-complete [ incoming | outgoing ]

View

ISDN interface view

Parameter

incoming: Ignores the Sending Complete Information Element in SETUP messages with respect to incoming calls.

outgoing: Sends SETUP messages without the Sending Complete Information Element with respect to outgoing calls.

Description

Using the isdn ignore sending-complete command, you can configure the ISDN protocol to ignore the processing on the Sending Complete Information Element. Using the undo isdn ignore sending-complete command, you can restore the default setting.

By default, in the event that the router is communicating with an exchange, the ISDN protocol checks whether the received SETUP messages carry the Sending Complete Information Element with respect to incoming calls and carries the Sending Complete Information Element in SETUP messages with respect to outgoing calls.



You can configure this command on an interface only when the ISDN protocol running on the interface is DSS1 or ETSI.

Example

Ignore the Sending Complete Information Element in the received SETUP messages.

[3Com-Bri0/0/0] isdn ignore sending-complete incoming

Disable carrying the Sending Complete Information Element in the transmitted SETUP messages.


[3Com-Bri0/0/0] isdn ignore sending-complete outgoing

isdn L3-timer Syntax

isdn L3-timer timer-name time-interval

undo isdn L3-timer { timer-name | all }

View

ISDN interface view

Parameter

timer-name: Name of a L3 timer of the ISDN protocol.

time-interval: Timer duration, which can take on one of the values listed in the following table.

all: Restores the default durations of all the L3 timers.

Table 10 Description of Q931 timers

Description

Using the isdn L3-timer command, you can configure the duration of an ISDN L3 timer. Using the undo isdn L3-timer command, you can restore the default duration of the ISDN L3 timer on the interface.

You can view the default durations of the L3 timers in the ISDN protocol by executing the display isdn parameters command.

Example

Set the duration of the L3 timer T301 on the interface Bri 0/0/0 to 160 seconds.

[3Com-Bri0/0/0] isdn l3-timer t301 160

isdn number-property Syntax

isdn number-property number-property [ calling | called ]

undo isdn number-property [ calling | called ]

timer-name Value range (in units) Default (in units)t301 30 ~ 1200 240t302 5 ~ 60 15t303 2 ~ 10 4t304 10 ~ 60 30t305 4 ~ 30 30t308 2 ~ 10 4t309 10 ~ 180 90t310 10 ~ 180 40t313 2 ~ 10 4t316 2 ~ 180 120t322 2 ~ 10 4


View

ISDN interface view

Parameter

number-property: Type and number scheme of ISDN numbers. The argument takes on a hex value in the range of 0 to FF. When it is expressed in 8 bits, bits 1 through 4 represent the code scheme, bits 5 through 7 represent the code type, and bit 8 is reserved. The following table lists the possible number type and code schemes. For more information, see the related protocol for reference.

Table 11 Types and code schemes of ISDN numbers

Protocol

Field (Bit) value DefinitionType Code scheme

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

ANSI

0 0 0 User-specified0 1 0 National network identification0 1 1 International network identification

0 0 0 0 Unknown/user-specified0 0 0 1 Carrier identification code0 0 1 1 Data network identification code (ITU-T

Recommendation X.121)

AT&T

0 0 0 Unknown0 0 1 International number0 1 0 National number1 0 0 Subscriber number

0 0 0 0 Unknown0 0 0 1 ISDN/telephony numbering loan (

Recommendation E.164/E.163)1 0 0 1 Private numbering plan

DSS1

0 0 0 Unknown0 0 1 International number0 1 0 National number0 1 1 Network specific number1 0 0 Subscriber number1 1 0 Abbreviated number1 1 1 Reserved for extension

0 0 0 0 Unknown0 0 0 1 ISDN/telephony numbering plan(

Recommendation E.164)0 0 1 1 Data numbering plan( Recommendation X.121)0 1 0 0 Telex numbering plan( Recommendation F.69)1 0 0 0 National standard numbering plan1 0 0 1 Private numbering plan1 1 1 1 Reserved for extension

ETSI

0 0 0 Unknown0 0 1 International number0 1 0 National number0 1 1 Network specific number1 0 0 Subscriber number1 1 0 Abbreviated number1 1 1 Reserved for extension


Recommendation E.164)0 0 1 1 Data numbering plan( Recommendation X.121)0 1 0 0 Telex numbering plan( Recommendation F.69)1 0 0 0 National standard numbering plan1 0 0 1 Private numbering plan1 1 1 1 Reserved for extension


The undefined bits in all the protocols are reserved for other purposes.

calling: Code scheme of the calling number.

called: Code scheme of the called number.

Description

Using the isdn number-property command, you can set type and code scheme of ISDN calling numbers or called numbers. Using the undo isdn number-property command, you can restore the default type and code scheme of ISDN calling numbers or called numbers.

By default, the number type and code scheme are respectively unknown and ISDN for both ISDN calling numbers and called numbers, and the number-property representing them is 01 in hex format.


Example

Set both number type and code scheme of ISDN calling numbers on the interface Bri 0/0/0 to unknown.

[3Com-Bri0/0/0] isdn number-property 0 calling

isdn overlap-sending Syntax

isdn overlap-sending [ digits ]

undo isdn overlap-sending

NI

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Unknown number in Unknown numbering plan

0 0 1 0 0 0 1 International number in ISDN numbering plan (Rec. E.164)

0 1 0 0 0 0 1 National number in ISDN numbering plan (Rec. E.164)

0 1 1 1 0 0 1 Network specific number in private numbering plan

1 0 0 0 0 0 1 Local (directory) number in ISDN numbering plan (Rec. E.164)

1 1 0 1 0 0 1 Abbreviated number in private numbering plan

NTT

0 0 0 Unknown0 1 0 National number0 1 1 Network specific number1 0 0 Subscriber number


Recommendation E.164)1 0 0 1 Private numbering plan


View

ISDN interface view

Parameter

digits: The number of the digits, which is sent each time in overlap-sending mode and is in the range of 1 to 15.By default, digits are 10.

Description

Using the isdn overlap-sending command, you can set the system to send the called number information in the overlap mode on the ISDN interface. Using the undo isdn overlap-sending command, you can set the system to send the called information in full mode.

In "overlap-sending” mode, the digits of each called number will be sent separately and the number of the digits sent each time can be set using this command.

In "full-sending" mode, all the digits of each called number will be collected and sent at a time.

By default, full-sending mode applies.


Overlap-sending is only suitable for four ISDN protocols: ANSI, DSS1, ETSI, and NI.

Example

Apply the overlap-sending function on the interface Bri0/0/0 and set the number of digits allowed to be sent each time to 12 digits.

[3Com-Bri0/0/0] isdn overlap-sending 12

isdn pri-slipwnd-size Syntax

isdn pri-slipwnd-size window-size

isdn pri-slipwnd-size default

View

Interface view

Parameter

window-size: Slide window size in the range of 5 to 14. By default, the slide window size on PRI interfaces is 7.


Description

Using the isdn pri-slipwnd-size command, you can set the slide window size on a PRI interface. Using the isdn pri-slipwnd-size default command, you can restore the default slide window size on the PRI interface.

Example

Configure the slide window size on the interface e1 0/0/0 to 10.

[3Com] controller e1 0/0/0[3Com-E1 0/0/0] using[3Com-E1 0/0] pri-set[3Com-Serial0/0/0:15] isdn pri-slipwnd-size 10

isdn protocol-type Syntax

isdn protocol-type protocol

View

ISDN interface view

Parameter

protocol: ISDN protocol, which can be DSS1, NTT, NI, ETSI, ANSI, or AT&T.

Description

Using the isdn protocol-type command, you can set the ISDN protocol to be run on an ISDN interface.

By default, both BRI and PRI interfaces run the ISDN protocol DSS1.


You are allowed to configure:

ANSI ISDN on BRI and T1 PRI interfaces;

AT&T ISDN on T1 PRI interfaces;

DSS1 ISDN on BRI, E1 PRI, and T1 PRI interfaces;

ETSI ISDN on BRI, E1 PRI, and T1 PRI interfaces;

NI (National ISDN) on BRI interfaces;

NTT ISDN on BRI and T1 PRI interfaces.


Example

Apply ISDN ETSI on the interface Bri0/0/0.

[3Com-Bri0/0/0] isdn protocol-type etsi

isdn send-restart Syntax

isdn send-restart

undo isdn send-restart

View

System view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the isdn send-restart command, you can set restart mark in a distributed system (AR 46 series routers), so that the MPU will control the PRI interface to send RESTART message after re-establishing a link. Using the undo isdn send-restart command, you can remove the restart mark.

This command is invalid for the MCU in a centralized system, AR 28 Series Routers for example.

Example

Enable the MCU to automatically send RESTART messages to interface boards automatically.

[3Com] isdn send-restart

Disable automatic RESTART message sending.

[3Com] undo isdn send-restart

isdn spid auto_trigger Syntax

isdn spid auto_trigger

View

ISDN BRI interface view

Parameter

None


Description

Using the isdn spid auto_trigger command, you can enable SPID auto-negotiation once on the BRI interface running the NI protocol.

On a BRI interface compliant with the North American ISDN protocol, the router can place a call only after SPID negotiation or initialization. SPID information can be obtained via static configuration or dynamic negotiation. You may manually trigger a new SPID negotiation request by executing this command if the SPID negotiation in dynamic negotiation fails or just for the purpose of testing.

By default, a BRI interface does not originate a SPID negotiation request unless triggered by a call.

This command applies only on the BRI interface running the NI protocol.

Example

Manually trigger a new SPID negotiation request on the interface bri0/0/0.

[3Com-bri0/0/0] isdn spid auto_trigger

isdn spid nit Syntax

isdn spid nit

undo isdn spid nit

View


Parameter

None

Description

Using the isdn spid nit command, you can set the SPID processing mode to NIT (Not Initial Terminal) on an NI-compliant BRI interface. Using the undo isdn spid nit command, you can disable the NIT mode on the BRI interface.

By default, NIT mode does not apply on BRI interfaces. Instead, static SPID or dynamic SPID negotiation is applied.

On an NI-compliant BRI interface, calls can be placed only after the SPID negotiation or initialization is finished. When the router is communicating with an NI-compliant exchange that does not support SPID negotiation, you can use this command to set the SPID processing mode on the router to NIT and the ISDN will ignore ISPID negotiation and initialization.

This command applies only on NI-compliant BRI interfaces.


Example

Ignore SPID negotiation and initialization on the interface bri0/0/0, i.e., adopting the NIT mode.

[3Com-bri0/0/0] isdn spid nit

isdn spid timer Syntax

isdn spid timer seconds

undo isdn spid timer

View


Parameter

seconds: Duration of the SPID timer, which is in the range of 1 to 255 seconds, and defaults to 30 seconds.

Description

Using the isdn spid timer command, you can set the duration of the timer TSPID for an NI-compliant BRI interface to timer_length. Using the undo isdn spid timer command, you can restore the default duration of the timer TSPID for the NI-compliant BRI interface.

On a BRI interface compliant with the ISDN protocol in North America, calls can be placed only after the SPID negotiation or initialization is finished. SPID information can be obtained via static configuration or dynamic negotiation. The timer TSPID is started when the terminal originates a negotiation or initialization request by sending the INFORMATION message. You can use this command to modify the duration of TSPID.


Example

Set the duration of TSPID on the interface bri0/0/0 to 50 seconds.

[3Com-bri0/0/0] isdn spid timer 50

isdn spid service Syntax

isdn spid service [audio | data | speech]

undo isdn spid service

View



Parameter

audio: Supports audio service.

data: Supports data service.

speech: Supports voice service.

Description

Using the isdn spid service command, you can configure the service types that must be supported in SPI negotiation on the BRI interface adopting NI protocol. Using the undo isdn spid service command, you can delete he service types that must be supported in SPI negotiation on the BRI interface adopting NI protocol.

There are three types of services. You can select any one or none. None means all services are supported. By default, SPID needs to support data and voice service simultaneously.

Generally, as for the BRI interface adopting North America ISDN protocol, you need to negotiate or initialize SPID before originate a call. During negotiation, SPCS may send multiple SPIDs and carry the service types supported by the SPID, therefore, the router needs to choose a proper SPID according to the local service type.

This command can only be applied on the BRI interface adopting NI protocol.

Example

Set the service type supported by BRI interface to data and voice.

[3Com-bri0] isdn spid service data[3Com-bri0/0] isdn spid service speech

isdn spid resend Syntax

isdn spid resend times

undo isdn spid resend

View


Parameter

times: An integer in the range of 1 to 255 times, which defaults to 1.

Description

Using the isdn spid resend command, you can set the number of INFORMATION message retransmission attempts for SPID negotiation or initialization on an NI-compliant BRI interface. Using the undo isdn spid resend command, you can restore the default number of INFORMATION message retransmission attempts on the interface.


On a BRI interface compliant with the ISDN protocol in North America, calls can be placed only after the SPID negotiation or initialization is finished. The timer TSPID is started when the terminal originates a negotiation or initialization request by sending the INFORMATION message. If the terminal does not receive any response upon the expiration of TSPID, it will retransmit the INFORMAITON message. You can use this command to modify the number of INFORMATION message retransmission attempts.


Example

Set the allowed number of INFORMATION retransmission attempts to five.

[3Com-bri0/0/0] isdn spid resend 5

isdn spid1 Syntax

isdn spid1 spid

undo isdn spid1

View


Parameter

spid: String comprising 1 to 20 digits.

Description

Using the isdn spid1 command, you can configure SPID information for the B1 channel on an NI-compliant BRI interface. Using the undo isdn spid1 command, you can remove the SPID information of the B1 channel on the interface.

On a BRI interface compliant with the ISDN protocol in North America, calls can be placed only after the SPID negotiation or initialization is finished. SPID information can be obtained via static configuration or dynamic negotiation. Only after SPID information is configured for the B1 channel on the BRI interface can the system makes the L3 initialization to place calls normally.

By default, SPID for the B1 channel on a BRI interface is null.


Example

Set SPID to “012345” for the B1 channel on the interface bri0/0/0.

[3Com-bri0/0/0] isdn spid1 012345

isdn spid2 Syntax

isdn spid2 spid


undo isdn spid2

View


Parameter

spid: String comprising 1 to 20 digits.

Description

Using the isdn spid2 command, you can configure SPID information for the B1 channel on an NI-compliant BRI interface. Using the undo isdn spid2 command, you can remove the SPID information of the B1 channel on the interface.

On a BRI interface compliant with the ISDN protocol in North America, calls can be placed only after the SPID negotiation or initialization is finished. SPID information can be obtained via static configuration or dynamic negotiation. Only after SPID information is configured for the B2 channel on the BRI interface can the system makes the L3 initialization to place calls normally.

By default, SPID for the B2 channel on a BRI interface is null.


Example

Set SPID to “012345” for the B2 channel on the interface bri0/0/0.

[3Com-bri0/0/0] isdn spid2 012345

isdn statistics Syntax

isdn statistics { clear | continue | display [ flow ] | start | stop }

View

ISDN interface view

Parameter

clear: Clears the statistics.

continue: Continues counting.

display: Displays the statistics.

display flow: Displays the statistic information about message flows.

start: Starts counting.

stop: Stops counting.


Description

Using the isdn statistics command, you can have the system make statistics on the information received and transmitted at an ISDN interface.

By default, no statistics is made on the information transmitted and received at interfaces.

You can input the isdn statistics start command in the view of an interface to start making statistics on the messages received and transmitted at the interface, isdn statistics display command to view the statistic information, isdn statistics continue to continue the effort in making statistics, isdn statistics display flow to view the statistics in the form of flow, and isdn statistics stop to stop making statistics.

Example

Display statistics information on the PRI interface.

[3Com-serial0/0/0:15] isdn statistics displayQ.931 message received and sent out on current port:CALL_PROC Send(0) Recv(6)SETUP Send(6) Recv(13)CONN Send(13) Recv(5)SETUP_ACK Send(0) Recv(6)CONNECT_ACK Send(5) Recv(13)DISCONNECT Send(3) Recv(16)RELEASE Send(1) Recv(18)RELEASE_COM Send(18) Recv(1)

SLIP Configuration Commands

debugging slip Syntax

debugging slip { event | error | packet | all }

View

User view

Parameter

packet: Enables packet debugging output switch.

Description

Using the debugging slip command, you can enable the debugging switch of the SLIP protocol.

Example

None

HDLC Configuration Commands 289

link-protocol slip Syntax

link-protocol slip

View

Interface view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the link-protocol slip command, you can set the link layer protocol of the interface as SLIP.

By default, the link-layer protocol for interface is PPP.

P2P link can use simpler link layer protocol SLIP(Serial Line IP), which is mainly used to run TCP/IP on the P2P serial port. SLIP is only used for the asynchronous link.

SLIP only defines the start and end identifiers of frame, so as to intercept IP packet on the serial line. Compared with PPP, SLIP has no address concept, negotiation process, differentiation of packet types (so only one network protocol can be supported at the same time) and error correction function.

The link layer protocol of the interface shall be consistent with that of the peer interface.

Example

Configure the link layer protocol on the interface Serial0/0/0 as SLIP.

[3Com-Serial0/0/0] link-protocol slip

HDLC Configuration Commands

link-protocol hdlc Syntax

link-protocol hdlc

View

Interface view

Parameter

None


Description

Using the link-protocol hdlc command, you can configure the interface encapsulation as HDLC. HDLC is a link layer protocol and can bear network layer protocols, such as IP and IPX.

By default, the interface is encapsulated with PPP.

For the related commands, see timer hold and display interface.

Example

Configure HDLC encapsulation on interface Serial1/0/0.

[3Com-Serial1/0/0] link-protocol hdlc

timer hold Syntax

timer hold seconds

undo timer hold

View

Interface view

Parameter

seconds: Value of the polling interval. The value is in the range from 0 to 32767 in seconds. 0 indicates that the link detection function is disabled.

Description

Using the timer hold command, you can set the polling interval. Using the undo timer hold command, you can restore the default value of the polling interval.

By default, the value of seconds is 10 seconds.

The polling interval should be set to equal at the two ends of the data link. A zero polling interval set in both ends will close the polling operation of the data link.


Example

Set the value of polling interval on interface Serial1/0/0 to 100 seconds.

[3Com-Serial1/0/0] timer hold 100

Frame Relay Configuration Commands 291

Frame Relay Configuration Commands

debugging fr Syntax

debugging fr { all | inarp | compress | congestion | de | event | fragment | lmi | mfr control | packet | transmit-rate } [ interface interface-type interface-number [ dlci dlci-number ] ]

undo debugging fr { all | inarp | compress | congestion | de | event | fragment | ipc | lmi | mfr control | packet | transmit-rate } [ interface interface-type interface-number [ dlci dlci-number ] ]

View

User view

Parameter

all: All frame relay information debugging.

arp: Information debugging of frame relay address resolution protocol. When this parameter is in use, DLCI can be specified.

compress: Information debugging of frame relay compression.

congestion: Information debugging of frame relay traffic congestion management.

de: DE information debugging of FRTS.

event: Information debugging of frame relay event. When this parameter is used, no interface can be specified.

fragment: Information debugging of frame relay fragment. When this parameter is in use, DLCI must be specified.

lmi: Information debugging of frame relay LMI (Local Management Interface) protocol.

mfr control: Information debugging of multilink frame relay bundle and bundle link.

packet: Information debugging of frame relay packet. When this parameter is in use, DLCI can be specified.

transmit-rate: Information debugging of FRTS transmit rate.


interface-number: Interface number, in 3-dimension form (slot number/card number/interface number).


dlci dlci-number: DLCI number of virtual circuit, ranging from 16 to 1007.

Description

Using the debugging fr command, you can enable frame relay information debugging. Using the undo debugging fr command, you can disable frame relay information debugging.

By default, frame relay information debugging is disabled.

For multilink frame relay, if the information debugging of multilink frame relay bundle and bundle link (mfr control) are enabled, the sent/received bundle link controlling information and status change of bundle link will be displayed.

If FRTS function is enabled, the change of frame relay sending rate can be seen after the transmit rate information debugging (transmit-rate) is enabled.

The enabling of frame relay information debugging greatly affects system performance, so this command should be used cautiously.

Example

Enable frame relay compression debugging of all interfaces.

<3Com> debugging fr compress

Enable the FRTS congestion management debugging of serial interface 5/0/1.

<3Com> debugging fr congestion interface serial 5/0/1

Enable DE debugging of FRTS on serial interface 5/0/1.

<3Com> debugging fr de interface serial 5/0/1

Enable FRTS transmit rate debugging of serial interface 5/0/1.

<3Com> debugging fr transmit-rate interface serial 5/0/1

Enable debugging of the bundle interface MFR1/0/0, supposing several links have been bundle on it.

<3Com> debugging fr mfr control interface mfr1/0/0serial3/0/2(Out):MFR msg=Add_link, Length=28, Link=serial5/1/0, BL state=Add_sent e1 00 01 01 07 4d 46 52 30 00 02 0c 53 65 72 69 61 6c 32 3aserial3/0/2(In):MFR msg=Add_link, Length=30, Link=serial5/1/0, BL state=Add_sent e1 00 01 01 09 6b 70 6c 6b 70 6c 00 02 0c 53 65 72 69 61 6cserial3/0/2(Out):MFR msg=Add_link_ack, Length=28, Link=serial5/1/0, BL state=Add_rx e1 00 02 01 07 4d 46 52 30 00 02 0c 53 65 72 69 61 6c 32 3aserial3/0/2(Out):MFR msg=Hello, Length=9, Link=serial5/1/0, BL state=Up e1 00 05 03 06 43 4b 01 f6serial3/0/2(In):MFR msg=Hello_ack, Length=9, Link=serial5/1/0, BL state=Up e1 00 05 03 06 2f f7 00 a5


display fr compress Syntax

display fr compress [ interface interface-type interface-number ]

View

Any view.

Parameter


interface-number: Interface number, in 3-dimension form: slot number/card number/interface number.

Description

Using the display fr compress command, you can view the statistics information of the frame relay compression. If no interface is specified, the DLCI statistics information of all the interfaces will be displayed.

For the related command, see fr compression frf9.

Example

View the frame relay compression statistics information of MFR interface 4/0/0.

<3Com> display fr compress interface mfr 4/0/0MFR4/0/0 -DLCI:25 uncompressed bytes xmt/rcv 0/0 compressed bytes xmt/rcv 0/0 1 min avg ratio xmt/rcv 0.000/0.000 5 min avg ratio xmt/rcv 0.000/0.000

display fr dlci-switch Syntax

display fr dlci-switch [ interface interface-type interface-num ]

View

Any view

Parameter

interface-type: Type of the interface.

interface-number: Number of the interface, including slot-number/ card-number/ port-number.

The specified interface can only be main interface. Information of all interfaces will be displayed without specifying interface.

Description

Using the display fr dlci-switch command, you can view the information of the configured FR switching to check if the frame relay switching of a user is correctly configured.


For the related command, see fr dlci-switch.

Example

View the information of the configured FR switching.

<3Com> display fr dlci-switchStatus Interface(Dlci) < -----> Interface(Dlci) Inactive Serial0/1/1:10(100) Serial1/1/0:10(100)

Table 12 Description of the output information of command display fr dlci-switch

display fr inarp-info Syntax

display fr inarp-info [ interface interface-type interface-num ]

View

Any view

Parameter

interface-type interface-num: Used to specify the interface to be viewed. Only the main interface can be specified here. The information of all interfaces will be displayed for the command without specifying an interface.

Description

Using the display fr inarp-info command, you can view the packet statistics of the FR inverse address resolution protocol.

The packets of FR inverse ARP include the address resolution request packet and address resolution reply packet. According to the output information via this command, you can diagnose if the inverse ARP operates normally.

For the related command, see fr inarp.

Example

Display the packet statistics of the FR inverse address resolution protocol.

<3Com> display fr inarp-infointerface Serial1/1/1:1:dlci type size in/out/drop200 FRF12(ETE) 80 0/0/0

Table 13 Output information description

Item DescriptionStatus The status of FR switching functionInterface(Dlci) < -- > Interface(Dlci) Input interface and its DLCI, output interface and its DLCI

Item Descriptioninterface Current interfacedlci DLCI numbertype Fragment typesize Fragment sizein/out/drop Received/transmitted/dropped fragments


display fr interface Syntax

display fr interface interface-type interface-num

View

Any view

Parameter

interface-type interface-num: Used to specify the interface to be viewed. The specified interface can be a main interface or a sub-interface. The whole information will be displayed for the command without specifying an interface.

Description

Using the display fr interface command, you can view the FR status, which is helpful for you to perform fault diagnosis.


Example

Display the FR protocol status.

<3Com> display fr interfaceSerial1/0/0, DTE, physical up, protocol upSerial1/0/0.1, multi-point, protocol upSerial1/0/0.2, point-to-point, protocol downSerial2/0/0, DCE, physical down, protocol down

This command displays the protocol status of each interface encapsulated with FR.

The above information indicates that: Frame Relay interface type of Serial1/0/0 is DTE. Physical layer protocol and link layer protocol of Serial1/0/0 are activated.

display fr lmi-info Syntax

display fr lmi-info [ interface interface-type interface-num ]

View

Any view

Parameter

interface-type interface-num: Used to specify the interface to be viewed. The whole information will be displayed for the command without specifying an interface.

Description

Using the display fr lmi-info command, you can view the statistics of LMI protocol frame.


The LMI protocol is used to maintain the current frame relay link, including the status enquiry packet and status packet. The displayed information helps you to diagnose the faults.

For the related command, see fr interface-type.

Example

Display the statistics of LMI protocol frame.

<3Com> display fr lmi-infoFrame relay LMI statistics for interface Serial1/0/0(DTE)T391DTE = 10 (keepalive 10)N391DTE = 6, N392DTE = 3, N393DTE = 4out status enquiry = 96, in status = 85status timeout = 3, discarded messages = 3Frame relay LMI statistics for interface Serial2/0/0 (DCE, ANSI)T391DTE = 0 (no keepalive)T392DCE = 15, N392DCE = 3, N393DCE = 4in status enquiry = 0, out status = 0 status enquiry timeout = 0, discarded messages = 0

The above shows various information about the FR LMI protocol.

For example, the Frame Relay interface type of Serial1/0/0 is DTE. LMI protocol type is Cisco-compatible protocol. T391 parameter on DTE side is 10. N391 parameter on DTE side is 6. N392 parameter on DTE side is 3. N393 parameter on DTE side is 4. The number Status Enquiry packets sent through Serial1/0/0 is 96. Received Status Enquiry packets are 85. Timeout packets are 3. Discarded packets are 3.

display fr map-info Syntax

display fr map-info [ interface interface-type interface-num ]

View

Any view

Parameter


Description

Using the display fr map-info command, you can view the FR address mapping table.

The displayed information via the command indicates whether the static mapping configured by a user is correct and whether the dynamic address mapping operates normally.

For the related commands, see fr map ip and fr inarp.


Example

Display Frame Relay address mapping table.

<3Com> display fr map-infoMap Statistics for interface Serial1/0/2 (DTE)DLCI = 100, IP INARP 100.100.1.1, Serial1/0/2create time = 2002/10/21 14:48:44, status = ACTIVEencapsulation = ietf, vlink = 14, broadcastDLCI = 200, IP INARP 100.100.1.1, Serial1/0/2create time = 2002/10/21 14:34:42, status = ACTIVEencapsulation = ietf, vlink = 0, broadcastDLCI = 300, IP 1.1.1.1, Serial1/0/2create time = 2002/10/21 15:03:35, status = ACTIVEencapsulation = ietf, vlink = 15

The above indicates the information of each MAP configured with Frame Relay protocol.

For example, as for the first address mapping, the mapping indicates that PVC (DLCI=100) on Serial1/0/2 establishes the address mapping with the peer end (IP address is 100.100.1.1) through Inverse ARP. The time of creating the mapping is 2002/10/21 14:48:44, and its status is active. Encapsulation format is IETF, and broadcast packet is available.

display fr pvc-info Syntax

display fr pvc-info [ interface interface-type interface-num ]

View

Any view

Parameter


Description

Using the display fr pvc-info command, you can view the FR PVC table.

This command displays the statistics of the FR PVC status and receiving/sending data on this VC.

For the related command, see fr dlci.

Example

Display the FR PVC table.

<3Com> display fr pvc-infoPVC statistics for interface Serial1/0/0 (DTE, physical UP)DLCI = 100, USAGE = UNUSED (0000), INTERFACE = Serial1/0/0create time = 2000/04/01 23:55:39, status = active


in BECN = 0, in FECN = 0in packets = 0, in bytes = 0out packets = 0, out bytes = 0DLCI = 102, USAGE = LOCAL (0010), INTERFACE = Serial1/0/0.1create time = 2000/04/01 23:56:14, status = activein BECN = 0, in FECN = 0in packets = 0, in bytes = 0out packets = 0, out bytes = 0

The information listed above shows various information about the FR PVC.

The above information indicates that: The PVC (DLCI=100) is the one (UNUSED) obtained through negotiating with the peer end via LMI. It is configured on Serial1/0/0. Establishing time is 2000/04/01 23:55:39. PVC status is active. The packets received of Forward Explicit Congestion Notifications (FECN) and Backward Explicit Congestion Notifications (BECN) are both 0. Received/sent frames are 0. Received/sent bytes are 0.

display fr statistics Syntax

display fr statistics [ interface interface-type interface-num ]

View

Any view

Parameter

interface-type interface-num: Used to specify the interface to be viewed. Only the main interface can be specified here. The information of all interfaces will be displayed for the command without specifying an interface.

Description

Using the display fr statistics command, you can view the current Frame Relay statistics about receiving and sending packets.

The output information of this command can help the user to perform FR traffic statistics and fault diagnosis.


Example

Display the Frame Relay statistics about receiving and sending packets.

<3Com> display fr statisticsFrame relay packet statistics for interface Serial1/0/0 (DTE)in packets = 84, in bytes = 1333out packets = 92, out bytes = 1217discarded in packets = 13, discarded out packets = 0 Frame relay packet statistics for interface Serial1/1/0 (DCE)in packets = 0, in bytes = 0out packets = 0, out bytes = 0discarded in packets = 0, discarded out packets = 0


The above information displays Frame Relay statistics about receiving and sending packets.

For instance, it is known from the above information that the Frame Relay interface type of Serial1/0/0 is DTE. Received packets are 84. Received bytes are 1333. Sent packets are 92. Sent bytes are 1217. Discarded packets in received ones are 13. Discarded packets in sent ones are 0.

display interface mfr Syntax

display interface mfr [interface-number .sub-number]

View

Any view

Parameter


Sub-number: sub-interface number.

Description

This command is used to display the information of FR interface, including the statistical information.

Example

To view the configuration and status information of MFR interface 4/0/123

<3Com> display interface mfr 4/0/123MFR4/0/123 current state : UPLine protocol current state : UPDescription : 3Com, 3Com Series, MFR4/0/123 InterfaceThe Maximum Transmit Unit is 1500Internet Address is 12.12.12.2/16link-protocol is FRAME-RELAY IETF LMI DLCI is 0, LMI type is Q.933a, frame relay DTE LMI status enquiry sent 435, LMI status received 435 LMI status timeout 0, LMI message discarded 0FIFO queuing: (Outbound queue:Size/Length/Discards)FIFO: 0/75/0 5 minutes input rate 0 bytes/sec, 0 packets/sec 5 minutes output rate 0 bytes/sec, 0 packets/sec 1058 packets input, 832389 bytes, 0 drops 619 packets output, 828190 bytes, 0 drops

display mfr Syntax

display mfr [ interface interface-type interface-number | verbose ]

View

Any view


Parameter



verbose: Displays detailed statistics information, including the number of controlling packets sent and received.

Description

Using the display mfr command, you can view configuration and statistics information of multilink frame relay bundle and bundle link. If no bundle or bundle link is specified, information of all bundles and bundle links will be displayed.

For the related command, see link-protocol fr mfr and interface mfr.

Example

View configuration and state information of all frame relay bundles and frame relay bundle links.

<3Com-Serial4/1/2>display mfrBundle interface:MFR4/1/0, Bundle state = down, Bundle class = A, fragment disabled Bundle BID = MFR4/1/0 Number of bundle links = 0, Peer's bundle-id = Bundle links:

Bundle interface:MFR4/1/1, Bundle state = down, Bundle class = A, fragment disabled Bundle BID = MFR4/1/1 Number of bundle links = 1, Peer's bundle-id = Bundle links: Serial4/1/1, PHY state = up, link state : add sent, LID : Serial4/1/1

View detailed state information of all frame relay bundle links.

<3Com> display mfr verboseBundle interface:MFR4/1/0, Bundle state = down, Bundle class = A, fragment disabled Bundle BID = MFR4/1/0 Number of bundle links = 0, Peer's bundle-id = Bundle links:

Bundle interface:MFR4/1/1, Bundle state = down, Bundle class = A, fragment disabled Bundle BID = MFR4/1/1 Number of bundle links = 1, Peer's bundle-id = Bundle links: Serial4/1/1, PHY state = up, link state : add sent, LID : Serial4/1/1 Bundle Link statistics:


Add_link: sent packets = 112, rcv'd packets = 2, Add_link_ack: sent packets = 2, rcv'd packets = 2, Add_link_rej: sent packets = 0, rcv'd packets = 0, Remove_link: sent packets = 0, rcv'd packets = 0, Remove_link_ack: sent packets = 0, rcv'd packets = 0, Hello: sent packets = 2180, rcv'd packets = 2174, Hello_ack: sent packets = 2174, rcv'd packets = 2174, outgoing pak dropped = 0, incoming pak dropped = 83 Cause code = ack timer expiry, Ack timer = 4, Hello timer = 10, Max retry count = 2, Current count = 0, Peer LID =

Table 14 Output information description of display mfr command

Item DescriptionBundle interface BundleBundle state Running state of bundle interfaceBundle class Class A indicates if there is one bundle link is in up state, the bundle is

flagged as up. Moreover, all bundle links should be flagged as down before the bundle is down.

fragment disabled Disable fragmentation functionBundle BID Bundle identifierNumber of bundle links Number of bundle linksPeer's bundle-id Bundle identifier of the peerBundle links Physical interface information of each bundle linkPHY state Running state of physical interfaceLink state Running state of bundle link line protocolLID Bundle link identifierBundle Link statistics: Packet statistics information of bundle linkAdd_link Number of “Add_link” packets sent and received

The “Add_link” packet is used to notify the peer that the local node has prepared for processing frames.

Add_link_ack Number of “Add_link” acknowledgment packets sent and received

The “Add_link_ack” packet is used to notify the peer that an “Add_link” packet has been received.

Add_link_rej Number of “Add_link” reject packets sent and received

The “Add_link_rej” packet is used to notify the peer that an “Add_link” packet has been rejected.

Remove_link Number of “Remove_link” packets sent and receivedThe “Remove_link” packet is used to notify the peer that the local node is removing a bundle link from the bundle.

Remove_link_ack Number of “Remove_link” acknowledgement packets sent and received

The “Remove_link_ack” packet is used to notify the peer that a “Remove_link” packet has been received.

Hello Number of “Hello” packets sent and received.

The “Hello” packet is used to maintain link state.Hello_ack Number of “Hello” acknowledgment packets sent and received.

The “Hello_ack” packet is used to notify the peer that a “Hello” packet has been received.

outgoing pak dropped Number of discarded packets that are sentincoming pak dropped Number of discarded packets that are received


fr compression frf9 Syntax

fr compression frf9

undo fr compression

View

Frame relay interface view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the fr compression frf9 command, you can enable frame relay compression function. Using the undo fr compression command, you can disable frame relay compression function.

By default, frame relay compression function is disabled.

This command is only valid for point-to-point interfaces. In other words, it is used for frame relay sub-interfaces of point-to-point type.

Only when the frame relay packets type of the interface is IETF, can frame relay compression take effect. When this command is configured, the system will automatically change the packet type of the interface into IETF if the frame relay packets type of an interface is not IETF.

Cause code The reason for bundle link to be in the current state, possibly being the following values:

inconsistent bundle: The peer has associated the bundle with another bundle, thus making inconsistent BID.none: The link is in normal state.bundle link idle: The peer bundle link is idle, which generally occurs when the peer bundle interface is disabled.ack timer expiry: The current link state is caused by the timeout of the local T-ack timer.loopback detected: Loopback is enabled on the physical line of local bundle link.other: Other reasons, such as LID error.unexpected Add_link: The “add_link” message is received when the bundle link is in up state. This case may occur when the line protocol is ready for being enabled and will disappear once the connection is created.

Ack timer The time of resending hello message before bundle link receives acknowledgment message or of waiting for hello acknowledgment message before resending an “add_link” message used for initial synchronization.

Hello timer Interval for bundle link to send hello messageMax retry count Maximum retry times for bundle link to resend hello message or

resend “Add_link” that is used for initial synchronization before the bundle link waits for hello acknowledgement message.

Current count Current retry timesPeer LID Bundle link identifier of the peer link


For the related command, see fr map.

Example

Enable frame relay compression on the point-to-point frame relay sub-interface Serial4/1/3.1.

[3Com] interface serial 4/1/3.1 p2p[3Com-Serial4/1/3.1] fr compression frf9

fr compression iphc Syntax

fr compression iphc

undo fr compression iphc

View

Frame Relay interface view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the fr compression iphc command, you can enable the IP header compression. Using the undo fr compression iphc command, you can disable the function.

By default, the Frame Relay compression function is disabled.

For the related command, see fr map.

Example

Configure the Frame Relay interface Serial 4/1/0 to adopt IP header compression.

[3Com-Serial4/1/0] fr compression iphc

fr dlci Syntax

fr dlci dlci

undo fr dlci dlci

View

Interface view

Parameter

dlci: Virtual circuit number allocated for Frame Relay interface. The range of the number is 16 to 1007. 0 to 15 and 1008 to 1023 are reserved by the protocol for special purpose.


Description

Using the fr dlci command, you can configure the virtual circuit for Frame Relay interface. Using the undo fr dlci command, you can cancel the configuration.

When the Frame Relay interface type is DCE or NNI, it is necessary to manually configure virtual circuit for interface (either main interface or sub-interface). When the Frame Relay interface type is DTE, if the interface is main interface, the system will automatically configure the virtual circuit according to the peer device.


Example

Assign a virtual circuit with DLCI 100 to Frame Relay sub-interface Serial1/0/0.1.

[3Com-Serial1/0/0.1] fr dlci 100

fr dlci-switch Syntax

fr dlci-switch in-dlci interface interface-type interface-number dlci out-dlci

undo fr dlci-switch in-dlci

View

Frame relay interface view and MFR interface view

Parameter

in-dlci: DLCI assigned to an interface to receive datagram, ranging from 16 to 1007.



out-dlci: DLCI of the specified interface where the packet is forwarded, ranging from 16 to 1007.

Description

Using the fr dlci-switch command, you can configure a static route for frame relay PVC switching. Using the undo fr dlci-switch command, you can delete a static route for frame relay PVC switching.

By default, no static route for frame relay PVC switching is configured.

Before the static route of frame relay PVC is configured, it is necessary to enable the frame relay PVC switching first by using the command fr switching.

The type of the interface for forwarding packets can be either a frame relay interface or an MFR interface. If Tunnel interface is specified as the forwarding interface, the frame relay packets over IP can be realized.


For the related command, see fr switching.

Example

Configure a static route that allows packets on the link with DLCI of 100 on Seiral1/0/0 to be forwarded via the link with DLCI of 200 on interface Serial2/0/0.

[3Com-Serial1/0/0] fr dlci-switch 100 interface serial2/0/0 dlci 200

Configure a static route that allows packets on the link with DLCI of 200 on Seiral4/1/2 to be forwarded via the link with DLCI of 300 on Tunnel interface Serial4/0/0.

[3Com-Serial4/1/2] fr dlci-switch 200 interface Tunnel4/0/0 dlci 300

fr inarp Syntax

fr inarp [ ip ] [ dlci ]

undo fr inarp [ ip ] [ dlci ]

View

Interface view

Parameter

Ip: Indicates that the inverse address resolution is performed on the ip network protocol.

dlci: Data link connection identifier number, i.e., virtual circuit number, indicating that the inverse address resolution is performed for this DLCI number only.

Description

Using the fr inarp command, you can enable the inverse address resolution of Frame Relay. Using the undo fr inarp command, you can disable this function.

By default, system permits enabling the Frame Relay inverse address resolution.

When the Frame Relay sends data over the interface, it is necessary to map the network address to the DLCI numbers. Such a map can be specified manually or can be completed via the function of automatic inverse address resolution. Automatic inverse address resolution can be started by using the command.

If it is expected to enable the inverse address resolution function of all PVCs, the command without any parameters is adopted.

If it is expected to enable the inverse address resolution function in the specified data link, the command with dlci parameter is adopted.

For the related commands, see fr map, reset fr inarp, and display fr map-info.


Example

Enable the inverse address resolution at all PVCs of the Frame Relay interface Serial1/0/0.

[3Com-Serial1/0/0] fr inarp

fr interface-type Syntax

fr interface-type { dce | dte | nni }

undo fr interface-type

View

Interface view

Parameter

dte, dce and nni: Three types of Frame Relay interfaces.

Description

Using the fr interface-type command, you can set the Frame Relay interface type. Using the undo fr interface-type command, you can restore the default Frame Relay interface type.

By default, the frame relay interface type is DTE

In Frame Relay, there are two communicating parties, namely, the user side and network side. The user side is called Data Terminal Equipment (DTE), and the network side is called Data Communications Equipment (DCE). In a Frame Relay network, the interface between the Frame Relay switches is Network-to-Network Interface (NNI), and the corresponding interface adopts the NNI operating view. If the device is used as Frame Relay switching, the Frame Relay interface should operate in the NNI view or DCE mode. NE16E/08E/05 routers support the three modes.

In NE16E/08E/05 routers, while configuring the Frame Relay interface type as DCE or NNI, it is unnecessary to perform the fr switching command in the System view. Please notice that this is different from Cisco.

For the related command, see link-protocol fr.

Example

Set the type of the frame relay interface Serial1/0/0 to DCE.

[3Com] interface Serial1/0/0[3Com-Serial1/0/0] fr interface-type dce

fr iphc Syntax

fr iphc { nonstandard | rtp-connections number1 | tcp-connections number2 | tcp-include }


undo fr iphc { nonstandard | rtp-connections number1 | tcp-connections number2 | tcp-include }

View


Parameter

nonstandard: Nonstandard compatible compression format.

rtp-connections number1: The number of RTP compression connections, ranging from 3 to 255. By default, the number of RTP compression connections is 256.

tcp-connections number2: The number of TCP compression connections, ranging from 3 to 255. By default, the number of TCP compression connections is 256.

tcp-include: Includes TCP header compression when performing RTP compression.

Description

Using the fr iphc command, you can enable IP header compression function, including RTP/TCP header compression. Using the undo fr iphc command, you can disable this function.

For the related configuration, see fr map ip.

Example

Configure the number of RTP compression connections as 200 on the frame relay Serial1/0/0.

[3Com-Serial1/0/0] fr iphc rtp-connections 200

fr lmi n391dte Syntax

fr lmi n391dte n391-value

undo fr lmi n391dte

View

Interface view

Parameter

Status counter of the PVC. The range of the value is 1 to 255.

Description

Using the fr lmi n391dte command, you can configure N391 parameter at the DTE side. Using the undo fr lmi n391dte command, you can restore the default value.

By default, its value is 6.


The DTE sends a Status-Enquiry packet at regular interval set by T391 to the DCE. There are two types of Status-Enquiry packets: link integrity authentication packet and link status enquiry packet. The N391 parameter defines the ratio of sending the two types of packets, that is, link integrity authentication packets: link status enquiry packets = (N391 - 1): 1.


Example

Set DTE as the operating mode of Frame Relay interface Serial1/0/0, and the counter value of the PVC status to 10.

[3Com-Serial1/0/0] link-protocol fr[3Com-Serial1/0/0] fr interface-type dte[3Com-Serial1/0/0] fr lmi n391dte 10

fr lmi n392dce Syntax

fr lmi n392dce n392-value

undo fr lmi n392dce

View

Interface view

Parameter

n392-value: Error threshold, which ranges from 1 to 10.

Description

Using the fr lmi n392dce command, you can set N392 parameter at the DCE side. Using the undo fr lmi n392dce command, you can restore the default configuration.

By default, the parameter value is 3.

The DCE requires the DTE to send a Status-Enquiry packet at regular interval (set by T392). If the DCE does not receive the Status-Enquiry packet within a period of time, it will record the error by adding 1 to the error count. If the errors exceed the threshold, the DCE would consider the physical channels and all the DLCIs to be unavailable.

N392 and N393 together define the “error threshold”. N393 defines the event number observed and N392 defines the error threshold of that number (N393). That is, if number of errors that occurred to the DCE reaches N392 in N393 events, DCE will consider the errors have reached the threshold and declare the physical channels and all DLCIs to be unavailable.

N392 should be less than N393.

For the related commands, see fr interface-type and fr lmi n393dce.


Example

Set the operation of frame relay interface Serial1/0/0 as DCE mode and sets N392 to 5 and N393 to 6.

[3Com] interface Serial1/0/0[3Com-Serial1/0/0] link-protocol fr[3Com-Serial1/0/0] fr interface-type dce[3Com-Serial1/0/0] fr lmi n392dce 5[3Com-Serial1/0/0] fr lmi n393dce 6



undo fr lmi n392dte

View

Interface view

Parameter

n392-value: Error threshold, which ranges from 1 to 10.

Description

Using the fr lmi n392dte command, you can set N392 parameter at the DTE side. Using the undo fr lmi n392dte command, you can restore the default configuration.

By default, the parameter is 3.

The DTE sends a Status-Enquiry packet at a regular interval to the DCE to inquire the link status. On receiving this packet, the DCE will immediately send a Status-Response packet. If the DTE does not receive the response packet in the specified time, it will record the error by adding 1 to the error count. If the errors exceed the threshold, the DTE will consider that the physical channels and all the DLCIs to be unavailable.

N392 and N393 together define the “error threshold”. N393 indicates the event number observed and N392 indicates the error threshold of that number (N393). That is, if N392 errors occurred in N393 Status-Enquiry packets in the DTE, the DTE would consider that the error has exceeded the threshold and declare the physical channels and all DLCIs to be unavailable.

N392 at DTE side should be less than N393 at DTE side.

For the related commands, see fr interface-type and fr lmi n393dte.

Example

Set the operation of frame relay interface Serial1/0/0 as the DTE mode and sets N392 to 5 and N393 to 6.

[3Com-Serial1/0/0] link-protocol fr


[3Com-Serial1/0/0] fr interface-type dte[3Com-Serial1/0/0] fr lmi n392dte 5[3Com-Serial1/0/0] fr lmi n393dte 6

fr lmi n393dce Syntax

fr lmi n393dce n393-value

undo fr lmi n393dce

View

Interface view

Parameter

Event counter. The range of the value is 1~10.

Description

Using the fr lmi n393dce command, you can set the N393 parameter at the DCE side. Using the undo fr lmi n393dce command, you can restore the default configuration.


The DCE requires the DTE to send a Status-Enquiry packet at a regular interval (set by T392). If the DCE does not receive the Status-Enquiry packet, it will record the error by adding 1 to the error count. If the errors exceed the threshold, the DCE would consider the physical channels and all the DLCIs to be unavailable.

N392 and N393 together define the “error threshold”. N393 defines the event number observed and N392 defines the error threshold of that number (N393). That is, if the number of errors that occurred to the DCE reach N392 in N393 events, DCE will consider the errors have reached the threshold and declare the physical channels and all DLCIs to be unavailable.

N392 at DCE side should be less than N393 at DCE side.

For the related commands, see fr interface-type and fr lmi n392dce.

Example

Set the operation of frame relay interface Serial1/0/0 as DCE mode and sets N392 to 5 and N393 to 6.

[3Com] interface Serial1/0/0[3Com-Serial1/0/0] link-protocol fr[3Com-Serial1/0/0] fr interface-type dce[3Com-Serial1/0/0] fr lmi n392dce 5[3Com-Serial1/0/0] fr lmi n393dce 6




undo fr lmi n393dte

View

Interface view

Parameter

Event counter. The range of the value is 1~10.

Description

Using the fr lmi n393dte command, you can set N393 parameter at the DTE side. Using the undo fr lmi n393dte command, you can restore the default configuration.


The DTE sends a Status-Enquiry packet at a regular interval to the DCE to inquire the link status. On receiving this packet, the DCE will immediately send a Status-Response packet. If the DTE does not receive the response packet in the specified time, it will record the error by adding 1 to the error count. If the errors exceed the threshold, the DTE will consider that the physical channels and all the DLCIs to be unavailable.

N392 and N393 together define the “error threshold”. N393 indicates the event number observed and N392 indicates the error threshold of that number (N393). That is, if N392 errors occurred in N393 Status-Enquiry packets in the DTE, the DTE would consider that the error count has exceeded the threshold and declare the physical channels and all DLCIs to be unavailable.

N392 at DTE side should be less than N393 at DTE side.

For the related commands, see fr interface-type and fr lmi n392dte.

Example

Set the operation of frame relay interface Serial1/0/0 as the DTE mode and sets N392 to 5 and N393 to 6.

[3Com-Serial1/0/0] link-protocol fr[3Com-Serial1/0/0] fr interface-type dte[3Com-Serial1/0/0] fr lmi n392dte 5[3Com-Serial1/0/0] fr lmi n393dte 6

fr lmi t392dce Syntax

fr lmi t392dce t392-value

undo fr lmi t392dce

View

Interface view


Parameter

t392-value: Value of the polling timer. The range of the value is 5 to 30, in seconds.

Description

Using the fr lmi t392dce command, you can set T392 parameter at the DCE side. Using the undo fr lmi t392dce command, you can restore the default configuration.

By default, the parameter value is 15s.

This parameter defines the maximum time for DCE waiting for a Status-Enquiry.

T392 at DCE side should be greater than T391 at DTE side.


Example

Set the frame relay interface Serial1/0/0 to operate in DCE mode and set T392 to 10s.

[3Com] interface Serial1/0/0[3Com-Serial1/0/0] link-protocol fr[3Com-Serial1/0/0] fr interface-type dce[3Com-Serial1/0/0] fr lmi t392dce 10

fr lmi type Syntax

fr lmi type { ansi | nonstandard | q933a }

undo fr lmi type

View

Interface view

Parameter

ansi: Standard LMI protocol type of ANSI T1.617 Appendix D.

nonstandard: Nonstandard compatible LMI protocol type.

q933a: Standard LMI protocol type of Q.933 Appendix A.

Description

Using the fr lmi type command, you can configure the Frame Relay LMI protocol type. Using the undo fr lmi type command, you can restore to the default value of LMI protocol type.

By default, the LMI protocol type is q933a.


The NE16E/08E/05 routers usually support three LMI protocols, namely, Q.933 Appendix A, ANSI T1.617 Appendix D and Nonstandard compatible LMI protocol.


Example

Set the FR LIMI type of Serial1/0/0 to nonstandard.

[3Com-Serial1/0/0] fr lmi type nonstandard

fr map ip Syntax

fr map ip { protocol-address [ ip-mask ] | default } dlci [ broadcast ] [ nonstandard | ietf ]

undo fr map ip { protocol-address | default } dlci

View

Interface view

Parameter

protocol-address: Peer protocol address.

ip-mask: IP mask used to establish a network segment map.

dlci: local virtual circuit number, and the range of the value is 16 to 1007.

default: Indicates that the system establishes one default map.

broadcast: optional, which is used to specify if broadcast packet can be sent in the mapping.

nonstandard: Indicates that map adopts nonstandard compatible encapsulation format.

letf: Indicates that map adopts ietf encapsulation format.

Description

Using the fr map ip command, you can add a FR address mapping. Using the undo fr map ip command, you can cancel the configuration.

By default, no static address mapping existing and inverse address resolution enabled.

The mapping can be manually established or can be completed via the inverse address resolution protocol. Manually configure the static mapping when there are a few peer hosts or there is a default route. When the peer router supports inverse address resolution protocol and the network is rather complex, the dynamic address mapping is established via the inverse address resolution protocol.

For the related commands, see display fr map and fr inarp.


Example

The peer router IP address connected to the local interface serial1/0/0 is 202.38.163.252. There is a virtual circuit with DLCI 50 on local Serial1/0/0 connected to this router. Configure the static address mapping as follows:

[3Com-Serial1/0/0] fr map ip 202.38.163.252 50

fr switch Syntax

fr switch name [ interface interface-type interface-number dlci dlci1 interface interface-type interface-number dlci dlci2 ]

undo fr switch name

View

System view

Parameter

name: Name of PVC used for frame relay switching, consisting of 30 characters at most.

interface interface-type interface-number dlci dlci: DLCI number at both ends of PVC as well as the type and number of its interface. The peer can be specified as Tunnel interface.

Description

Using the fr switch command, you can create a PVC used for frame relay switching and enter frame relay switching view. Using the undo fr switch command, you can delete a specified PVC.

By default, there is no PVC used for frame relay switching.

The interface for forwarding packets can be either a frame relay interface or an MFR interface. If Tunnel interface is specified as the forwarding interface, frame relay packets over IP can thus be realized.

In frame relay switching view, the shutdown/undo shutdown operation can be executed on a PVC.

If a PVC used for switching has been configured, its interface and DLCI cannot be changed any longer. To change them, you must delete the defined PVC used for switching first.

For the related commands, see display fr pvc-info, fr dlci-switch, fr switching, and fr dlci.

Example

Create a PVC named pvc1 on the DCE serving as the switch, which is from the DCLI 100 of serial interface 0/0/0 to the DLCI 200 of serial interface 1/0/0.


[3Com] fr switching[3Com] fr switch pvc1 interface serial 0/0/0 dlci 100 interface serial 1/0/0 dlci 200[3Com-fr-switching-pvc1]

fr switching Syntax

fr switching

undo fr switching

View

System view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the fr switching command, you can enable frame relay PVC switching. Using the undo fr switching command, you can disable frame relay PVC switching.

By default, no FR switching is enabled.

The command is used to enable Frame Relay PVC switching.

Example

Enable PVC switching on FR interface.

[3Com] fr switching

interface mfr Syntax

interface mfr interface-number [ .subnumber]

undo interface mfr interface-number [ .subnumber ]

View

System view

Parameter

interface-number: Interface number of a multilink frame relay bundle, including slot number/card number/interface number, in which interface number ranges from 0 to 1023.

subnumber: Sub-interface number of a multilink frame relay bundle, ranging from 0 to 4095.


Description

Using the interface mfr command, you can create a multilink frame relay bundle interface or sub-interface and enter the corresponding interface view. Using the undo interface mfr command, you can delete a specified multilink frame relay bundle interface or sub-interface.

By default, there is no multilink frame relay interface or sub-interface.

Before using the undo interface mfr command to delete an MFR interface, you must delete all physical interfaces from the MFR interface.

Before an MFR sub-interface is created, the MFR interface must be created first.

For the related commands, see link-protocol fr mfr and mfr bundle-name.

Example

Create a multilink frame relay bundle interface with a point-to-multipoint sub-interface.

[3Com] interface mfr 4/0/123[3Com-MFR4/0/123] quit[3Com] interface mfr 4/0/123.1[3Com-MFR4/0/123.1]

link-protocol fr Syntax

link-protocol fr [ nonstandard | ietf ]

View

Interface view

Parameter

nonstandard: Nonstandard compatible encapsulation format.

ietf: Default encapsulation format according to the Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF) standard.

Description

Using the link-protocol fr command, you can encapsulate interface link layer protocol as Frame Relay.

By default, the link-layer protocol encapsulated on the interface is PPP, and the frame relay encapsulation format is IETF.

In VRP, the Frame Relay encapsulation can be either ietf or nonstandard compatible encapsulation (nonstandard). IETF encapsulation conforms to RFC1490, that is, it supports the IETF standard.



Example

Configure Frame Relay encapsulation on interface Serial1/0/0 and select the nonstandard encapsulation compatible format.

[3Com-Serial1/0/0] link-protocol fr nonstandard

link-protocol fr mfr Syntax

link-protocol fr mfr interface-number

View

Interface view

Parameter


Description

Using the link-protocol fr mfr command, you can configure the current physical interface as a multilink frame relay bundle link and bundle it onto a specified MFR interface.

By default, there is no multilink frame relay bundle link.

When this command is configured, the specified MFR interface must exist. A maximum of 16 physical interfaces can be bundled onto an MFR interface.

To delete a physical interface from an MFR interface, use the link-protocol command to apply a link layer protocol of non frame relay MFR to the interface.

For the related commands, see interface mfr and mfr link-name.

Example

Configure the current serial interface as a bundle link and add it onto the frame relay bundle interface mfr4/0/123.

[3Com-Serial4/1/2] link-protocol fr mfr 4/0/123

mfr bundle-name Syntax

mfr bundle-name [ name ]

undo mfr bundle-name [ name ]

View

MFR interface view


Parameter

name: Bundle identification, in the form of character string, with a length ranging from 1 to 49.

Description

Using the mfr bundle-name command, you can set frame relay bundle identification (BID). Using the undo mfr bundle-name command, you can restore the default value.

By default, BID is in the form of “mfr + frame relay bundle number”, such as mfr4/0/123.

Each multilink frame relay bundle has a BID, which is only significant at the local. Therefore, the BIDs at both ends of the link can be the same.

When changing the BID of an interface, you must execute the shutdown/undo shutdown command on the interface to make the new BID valid.

For the related command, see mfr link-name.

Example

Set the frame relay link BID to bundle1.

[3Com-MFR4/0/123] mfr bundle-name bundle1

mfr fragment Syntax

mfr fragment

undo mfr fragment

View

MFR interface view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the mfr fragment command, you can enable fragmentation of a multilink frame relay bundle. Using the undo mfr fragment command, you can disable the function.

By default, the fragmentation of a multilink frame relay bundle is disabled.

For the related commands, see mfr fragment-size and mfr window-size.

Example

Enable fragmentation on the MFR interface 4/0/123.


[3Com] interface mfr 4/0/123[3Com-MFR4/0/123] mfr fragment

mfr fragment-size Syntax

mfr fragment-size bytes

undo mfr fragment-size

View


Parameter

bytes: Fragment size, in bytes, ranging from 60 to 1500.

Description

Using the mfr fragment-size command, you can configure the maximum fragment size allowed on a frame relay bundle link. Using the undo mfr fragment-size command, you can restore the default setting.

By default, the maximum fragment size allowed on a frame relay bundle link is of 300 bytes.

The priority of the fragment size configured in frame relay interface view is higher than that of the one configured in MFR interface view.

For the related commands, see mfr fragment and mfr window-size.

Example

Configure the maximum fragment size allowed on the multilink frame relay bundle link Serial4/1/2 to be 70 bytes.

[3Com-Serial4/1/2] mfr fragment-size 70

mfr link-name Syntax

mfr link-name [ name ]

undo mfr link-name [ name ]

View


Parameter

name: Name of a bundle link identification, in the form of character string, ranging from 1 to 49.


Description

Using the mfr link-name command, you can set the frame relay bundle link identification (LID). Using the undo mfr link-name command, you can restore the default setting.

By default, LID is the name of the corresponding physical interface.

The peer equipment identifies a frame relay bundle link via LID or associates the bundle link with a frame relay bundle by using LID. LID is locally valid; therefore, the LIDs at both ends of a link can be the same.

When changing the bundle LID on an interface, you must execute the shutdown/undo shutdown command on the interface to make the new bundle LID valid.

For the related command, see mfr bundle-name.

Example

Set the bundle LID of the multilink frame relay bundle link Serial4/1/2 to be bl1.

[3Com-Serial4/1/2] mfr link-name bl1

mfr retry Syntax

mfr retry number

undo mfr retry

View


Parameter

number: The maximum times that a bundle link can resend hello messages, ranging from 1 to 5. By default, it is twice.

Description

Using the mfr retry command, you can set the maximum times that a frame relay bundle link can resend hello message when waiting for a hello acknowledgement message. Using the undo mfr retry command, you can restore the default setting.

If the times that a bundle link resends hello message reach the maximum without receiving acknowledgement from the peer, the system will regard the link protocol on the bundle link to be malfunctioning.

Only after the link-protocol fr mfr command is used to associate a frame relay bundle link interface with a frame relay bundle, can this command be configured.

For the related commands, see mfr timer ack and mfr timer hello.


Example

Set the bundle link Serial4/1/2 to resend hello message for 3 times at most.

[3Com-Serial4/1/2] mfr retry 3

mfr timer ack Syntax

mfr timer ack seconds

undo mfr timer ack

View


Parameter

seconds: Time of waiting for hello acknowledgment message before resending hello message, in second, ranging from 1 to 10. By default, it is 4 seconds.

Description

Using the mfr timer ack command, you can set the time of waiting for hello acknowledgment message before frame relay bundle link resends hello message. Using the undo mfr timer ack command, you can restore the default setting.

For the related commands, see mfr timer hello and mfr retry.

Example

Set the frame relay bundle link Serial4/1/2 to wait for 6 seconds before resending hello message.

[3Com-Serial4/1/2] link-protocol fr mfr 4/0/123[3Com-Serial4/1/2] mfr timer ack 6

mfr timer hello Syntax

mfr timer hello [ seconds ]

undo mfr timer hello [ seconds ]

View


Parameter

seconds: Interval for a bundle link to send hello message, in seconds, ranging from 1 to 180. By default, it is 10 seconds.


Description

Using the mfr timer hello command, you can set the interval for a frame relay bundle link to send hello message. Using the undo mfr timer hello command, you can restore the default setting.

Both ends of a frame relay bundle link periodically send hello message to the peer end. After the peer receives the hello message, it will response hello acknowledgement message.

For the related commands, see mfr timer ack and mfr retry.

Example

Set the bundle link Serial4/1/2 to send hello message once every 15 seconds.

[3Com-Serial4/1/2] mfr timer hello 15

mfr window-size Syntax

mfr window-size number

undo mfr window-size

View

MFR interface view

Parameter

number: Number of fragments, ranging from 1 to 16.

Description

Using the mfr window-size command, you can configure the number of fragments that can be held by the window used in sliding window algorithm when multilink frame relay reassembles received fragments.

By default, the size of a sliding window is equal to the number of physical interfaces of an MFR bundle.

For the related commands, see interface mfr, mfr fragment, and mfr fragment-size.

Example

Set the size of the sliding window of the MFR bundle interface MFR4/0/123 to be 8.

[3Com-MFR4/0/123] mfr window-size 8

shutdown Syntax

shutdown


undo shutdown

View

Frame relay switching view

Description

Using the shutdown command, you can disable any current switching PVCs. Using the undo shutdown command, you can enable any current switching PVCs.

By default, switching PVC is enabled.

Example

Disable all the current switching PVCs.

[3Com] fr switch pvc1 interface serial 1/0/0 dlci 100 interface serial 2/0/0 dlci 200[3Com-fr-switching-pvc1] shutdown

reset fr inarp Syntax

reset fr inarp

View

User view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the reset fr inarp command, you can clear the address mapping established by inverse ARP.

In some special cases, for example, when the network architecture changes, the dynamic address maps originally established will become invalid. hence it is necessary to establish them again. Users can use this command to clear all the dynamic address maps.

For the related command, see fr inarp.

Example

Clear all the Frame Relay dynamic address maps.

[3Com] reset fr inarp

timer hold Syntax

timer hold seconds

undo timer hold


View

Interface view

Parameter

seconds: value of polling timer, which ranges from 0 to 32767 in seconds. 0 indicates that the LMI protocol is disabled.

Description

Using the timer hold command, you can configure the polling timer at the DTE side. Using the undo timer hold command, you can restore its default value.

By default, the parameter is 10 seconds.

The parameter defines the interval of Status-Enquiry packet sent by DTE.

For the related commands, see fr interface-type and fr lmi t392dce.

Example

Configure that Frame Relay interface serial1/0/0 to work in DTE mode, and set the value of polling timer to 15 seconds.

[3Com-Serial1/0/0] link-protocol fr[3Com-Serial1/0/0] fr interface-type dte[3Com-Serial1/0/0] timer hold 15

ATM Configuration Commands

atm-class Syntax

atm-class atm-class-name

undo atm-class atm-class-name

View

Interface view and PVC view

Parameter

atm-class-name: Name of ATM-Class.

Description

Using the atm-class command, you can apply a set of parameters (which are defined in ATM-Class) to an ATM interface or a PVC. Using the undo atm-class command, you can delete the specified ATM-Class.

For the related command, see atm class.

ATM Configuration Commands 325

Example

Apply an ATM-Class named "main" to the interface Atm1/0/0.

[3Com-Atm1/0/0] atm-class main

atm class Syntax

atm class atm-class-name

undo atm class atm-class-name

View

System view

Parameter

atm-class-name: Name of ATM-Class.

Description

Using the atm class command, you can create an ATM-Class and enter the ATM-Class view. Using the undo atm class command, you can delete the specified ATM-Class.

An ATM-Class is a group of predefined parameters that can be used for ATM interface or PVC.

For the related command, see atm-class.

Example

Create an ATM-Class named "main".

[3Com] atm class main

clock Syntax


undo clock

View

ATM master interface view

Parameter

master: Specify ATM interface to use the internal transmission clock signal.

slave: Restore the line clock signal.


Description

Using the clock command, you can specify ATM interface to use internal transmission clock signal. Using the undo clock command, you can restore the usage of network clock signal.

By default, ATM interface uses the network clock signal. This clock signal is usually provided by the device which provides ATM interfaces.

When two network devices are directly connected in the back-to-back method through the ATM interfaces, this command is used to set the internal transmission clock at the ATM interface of one device.

Although this command is valid on both ATM main interface and sub-interface, it can only be used in ATM main interface view and there is not this command in ATM sub-interface view.

For the related command, see display atm interface.

Example

Specify ATM interface Atm1/0/0 to use the internal transmission clock.

[3Com-Atm1/0/0] clock master

debugging atm all Syntax

debugging atm all

undo debugging atm all

View

User view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the debugging atm all command, you can enable all the debugging switches of ATM. Using the undo debugging atm all command, you can disable the debugging.

By default, all the ATM debugging switches are disabled.

Because the use of this command can lead to a mass of output information, this may cause that users cannot control network devices through terminals and the efficiency of packet transmitting and receiving may be greatly damaged.

For the related commands, see debugging atm error, debugging atm event, and debugging atm packet.


debugging atm error Syntax

debugging atm error [ interface { interface-name | interface-type interface-num } [ pvc { pvc-name | vpi/vci } ] ]

undo debugging atm error [ interface { interface-name | interface-type interface-num } [ pvc { pvc-name | vpi/vci } ] ]

View

User view

Parameter

interface-name: ATM interface name. For detailed naming rules, please refer to the “Interface Configuration” chapter in this manual. If it is not specified, all the error debugging of ATM are enabled (including global debugging, interface-level debugging and PVC-level debugging).

interface-type: Interface type, which can determine an ATM interface together with interface-num.

interface-num: Interface number, which can determine an ATM interface together with interface-type.

pvc-name: PVC name, optional. If no PVC name and VPI/VCI pair are specified, all the error debugging of the PVC will be enabled.

vpi/vci: VPI/VCI pair, optional. For more details, please refer to “Parameter Description” in the pvc command.

Description

Using the debugging atm error command, you can enable the error debugging of ATM. Using the undo debugging atm error command, you can disable the debugging.

By default, all the ATM error debugging switches are disabled.

The interface-name parameter is actually composed of interface-type and interface-num. The difference of using them only lies in the space. In the command line, there are spaces in interface-type and interface-num, but there is no space in interface-name.

For the related commands, see display debugging and debugging atm all.

Example

Enable all the error debugging of ATM.

<3Com> debugging atm error


debugging atm event Syntax

debugging atm event [ interface { interface-name | interface-type interface-num } [ pvc { pvc-name | vpi/vci } ] ]

undo debugging atm event [ interface { interface-name | interface-type interface-num } [ pvc { pvc-name |[ vpi/vci ] | vpi/vci } ] ]

View

User view

Parameter

interface-name: ATM interface name. For detailed naming rules, please refer to “Interface Configuration” part of this manual. If it is not specified, all the event debugging of ATM is enabled by default (including global debugging, interface-level debugging and PVC-level debugging).



pvc-name: PVC name, optional. If no PVC name and no VPI/VCI pair are specified, all the event debugging of PVC will be enabled.


Description

Using the debugging atm event command, you can enable the event debugging of ATM. Using the undo debugging atm event command, you can disable the debugging.

By default, all the debugging of ATM event is disabled.


This command is used to enable all the debugging of events that happen at the ATM interface or a PVC, which can be used to trace some essential events of the system. Such information may be helpful for detecting network faults.

Example

The example is a case to enable the debugging of ATM events and display the results.

Enable all the event debugging of ATM.

<3Com> debugging atm event


debugging atm packet Syntax

debugging atm packet [ interface { interface-name | interface-type interface-num } [ pvc { pvc-name [ vpi/vci ] | vpi/vci } ] ]

undo debugging atm packet [ interface { interface-name | interface-type interface-num } [ pvc { pvc-name [ vpi/vci ] | vpi/vci } ] ]

View

User view

Parameter

interface-name: ATM interface name, optional. For detailed naming rules, please refer to “Interface Configuration” part of this manual. If it is not specified, all the packet debugging of ATM are enabled by default (including global debugging, interface-level debugging and PVC-level debugging).



pvc-name: PVC name, optional. If no PVC name and no VPI/VCI pair are specified, all the packet debugging of PVC will be enabled.


Description

Using the debugging atm packet command, you can enable the packet debugging of ATM. Using the undo debugging atm packet command, you can disable the debugging.

By default, all the debugging of ATM packet is disabled.


After the packet switch is enabled, the detailed information about receiving/sending packets at the ATM interface or PVC will be displayed. This will be very helpful for system troubleshooting.

The received packets will display all the information about received frames , which can indicate whether the sending side correctly encapsulates these frames. This will be greatly helpful for the network device detection.

Packet debug information displays the PDU byte information in hex, through which technical support personnel or engineers can locate some system errors.


Since the use of this command can lead to a mass of output information during each packet receiving and transmitting, this may cause that users cannot control network devices through their terminals, and thus greatly affect the efficiency of packet transmitting and receiving.

Example

The example is a case to enable the debugging of ATM packet and display the results.

Enable all the packet debugging of ATM.

<3Com> debugging atm packet

After some time, the following messages may appear:

……*515396.229644-atm-8-debug8: Atm1/0/0 pvc 1/32 out ppp pkt, snap, 22*515396.229710-atm-8-debug8: FE FE 03 CF FF 03 C0 21 01 22 00 0E 01 04 05 DC*515396.229812-atm-8-debug8: 05 06 00 00 1F 38*515396.232644-atm-8-debug8: Atm1/0/0 pvc 1/32 out ppp pkt, snap, 22*515396.232710-atm-8-debug8: FE FE 03 CF FF 03 C0 21 01 23 00 0E 01 04 05 DC*515396.232812-atm-8-debug8: 05 06 00 00 1F 38

It indicates that PPP packets are being output from PVC 1/32 of Atm1/0/0.

display atm class Syntax

display atm class [ atm-class-name ]

View

Any view

Parameter

atm-class-name: ATM-Class name.

Description

Using the display atm class command, you can view the information about ATM-Class. By default, if no ATM-Class name is specified, the information of all ATM-Class is displayed.

For the related command, see atm class.

Example

Display the information about the ATM-Class named "main" in devices.

<3Com> display atm class main

The following information is displayed:


ATM VC-CLASS: mainService ubr 8000encapsulation aal5snap

The explanation on the above messages is:

ATM-Class name is "main", and the following contents are set in the ATM-Class: the service type is unspecified bit rate and the output peak rate of ATM cells is 8000 and the AAL encapsulation type is SNAP.

display atm interface Syntax

display atm interface [ interface-name | interface-type interface-num ]

View

Any view

Parameter

interface-name: ATM interface name. For detailed naming rules, please refer to “Interface Configuration” part of this manual. If it is not specified, all the information about ATM interface will be displayed by default.



Description

Using the display atm interface command, you can locate the problems efficiently and get detailed information related to ATM configuration.

The interface-name parameter is actually composed of interface-type and interface-num. The difference of using them only lies in the space. In the command line, there are spaces in interface-type and interface-num, but there is no space in interface-name. When the interface is the main interface, the information of all interfaces (including sub-interface) at the interface will be displayed.

For the related command, see display atm.

Example

Display the information about ATM interface atm4/0/0.

<3Com> display atm interface atm 4/0/0


ATM interface Atm4/0/0, State UPPort Information:Maximum VCs: 1024,PVCs: 4, MAPs: 4


input pkts: 0, input bytes: 0, input pkt errors: 0output pkts: 69, output bytes: 2218, output pkt errors: 8Sub-interface Information:PVCs: 4, MAPs: 4input pkts: 0, input bytes: 0, input pkt errors: 0output pkts: 69, output bytes: 2218, output pkt errors: 8


The maximum number of PVCs on the ATM interface is 1024. The input packets, bytes and errors of input packets are all 0; output packets are 69, output bytes are 2218 and output packet errors are 8; there are totally 4 PVCs and 4 MAPs at the interface and the interface status is active (UP).

display atm map-info Syntax

display atm map-info [ interface { interface-name | interface-type interface-num } [ pvc { pvc-name | vpi/vci } ] ]

View

Any view

Parameter

interface-name: ATM interface name. For detailed naming rules, please refer to “Interface Configuration” part of this manual. If it is not specified, all the information about the higher layer mapping table of ATM interface will be displayed by default.



pvc-name: PVC name, optional parameter. If no PVC name and no VPI/VCI pair are specified, the information of the higher layer protocol mapping table about all PVCs within specified ATM interface will be displayed by default.


Description

Using the display atm map-info command, you can view the information about the upper layer protocol mapping table of ATM.


For the related commands, see map ip, map ppp, and map bridge.


Example

Display the information about the upper layer protocol mapping table of all ATM interfaces.

<3Com> display atm map-info


Atm1/0/0, PVC 1/32, PPP, Virtual-Template10, UPAtm1/0/0, PVC 1/33, IP & Mask, State UP100.11.1.1, mask 255.255.0.0, vlink 1Atm1/0/0, PVC 2/101, ETH, Virtual-Ethernet1/1/1, MAC 00E0.FC01.0203, UP


PVC 1/32 of Atm 1/0/0 interface uses PPPoA mapping, the VT interface numbered 10 is used and the status is activated (UP);

PVC 1/33 of Atm 1/0/0 interface uses IPoA mapping, the configured mapping static IP address is 100.11.1.1, the address mask is 255.255.0.0, it occupies No.1 vlink and its status is activated (UP);

PVC 2/101 of Atm 1/0/0 interface uses PPPoEoA mapping or IPoEoA mapping, VE interface numbered 1/1/1 is adopted, the configured MAC address is 00E0.FC01.0203 and its status is activated (UP).

display atm pvc-group Syntax

display atm pvc-group [ interface { interface-name | interface-type interface-num } [ pvc { pvc-name [ vpi/vci ] | vpi/vci } ] ]

View

Any view

Parameter

interface-name: ATM interface name. The detailed naming rules can be determined according to the actual-configured network device type. If it is not specified, all the information about PVC-Group of ATM interface will be displayed by default.



pvc-name: PVC name, optional. If no PVC name and no VPI/VCI pair are specified, the information about all PVC-Groups within the specified ATM interface will be displayed by default.


vpi/vci: VPI/VCI pair, optional. For more details, please refer to “Parameter description” in the pvc command.

Description

Using the display atm pvc-group command, you can view the information about PVC-Group.

The interface-name parameter is actually composed of interface-type and interface-num. The difference of using them only relies on a space. In the command line, there is a space in interface-type and interface-num, but there is no space in interface-name.

For the related command, see pvc-group.

Example

Display the information about PVC-Group of all ATM interfaces.

<3Com> display atm pvc-group


VPI/VCI PVC-NAME STATE ENCAP PROT INTERFACE GROUP1/32 3Com UP SNAP IP Atm10/1/0(UP) 1/321/33 UP SNAP IP Atm10/1/0(UP) 1/323/34 UP SNAP IP Atm10/1/0(UP) 1/322/32 UP MUX IP Atm10/1/0.1(UP) 2/322/33 UP MUX IP Atm10/1/0.1(UP) 2/32

The explanation on the above messages is as follows (Taking the first record as an example, and the last four records can refer to the following explanation.):

PVC with VPI/VCI pair as 1/32, its has been activated (UP) and the name is "3Com". The AAL encapsulation type is SNAP. The application type is IPoA. The interface is ATM main interface: Slot number is 1, adapter number is 1 and the interface number is 0. The PVC-Group is created based on PVC "1/32".

display atm pvc-info Syntax

display atm pvc-info [ interface { interface-name | interface-type interface-num } [ pvc { pvc-name [ vpi/vci ] | vpi/vci } ] ]

View

Any view

Parameter

interface-name: ATM interface name. For detailed naming rules, please refer to “Interface Configuration” part of this manual. If it is not specified, all the information about PVC of ATM interface will be displayed by default.




pvc-name: PVC name, optional parameter. If no PVC name and no VPI/VCI pair are specified, the information about all PVCs within the specified ATM interface will be displayed by default.


Description

Using the display atm pvc-info command, you can view the information about PVC.


For the related command, see pvc.

Example

Display the information about PVC of all ATM interfaces.

<3Com> display atm pvc-info


VPI/VCI | STATE | PVC-NAME | INDEX | ENCAP | PROT | INTERFACE--------|-------|----------|-------|-------|------|----------1/32 |UP |3Com |1 |SNAP |IP |Atm1/0/0 (UP)1/33 |UP |3Com |5 |MUX |None |Atm1/0/0 (UP)1/55 |UP |datacomm |2 |SNAP |PPP |Atm1/0/0.1 (UP)2/66 |UP | |4 |SNAP |IP |Atm1/0/0.4 (UP)2/101 |UP |beijing |3 |SNAP |ETH |Atm1/0/0.2 (UP)

The explanation on the above messages is as follows (Taking the first record as an example, and the last four records can refer to the following explanation.):

PVC with VPI/VCI pair as 1/32, its has been activated (UP) and the name is "3Com". The index number is 1. The AAL encapsulation type is SNAP. The application type is IPoA. The interface is ATM main interface: Slot number is 1, adapter number is 0 and the interface number is 0.

encapsulation Syntax

encapsulation aal5-encap

undo encapsulation

View

PVC view


Parameter

aal5-encap: AAL5 encapsulation type, its possible values are as follows:

■ aal5snap: LLC/SNAP (Logical Link Control / Subnet Access Protocol) encapsulation type

■ aal5mux: MUX encapsulation type

■ aal5nlpid: RFC1490 encapsulation type

Description

Using the encapsulation command, you can specify ATM AAL5 encapsulation type for PVC. Using the undo encapsulation command, you can restore the default encapsulation.

By default, aal5snap encapsulation is adopted.

Only aal5snap encapsulation supports InARP protocol. InARP is not supported when aal5mux and aal5nlpid encapsulations are adopted.

To change the encapsulation type for PVC to aal5mux or aal5nlpid, InARP must be deleted first.

In addition, some types of encapsulations may not support some applications method (one or more of IPoA, IPoEoA, PPPoA and PPPoEoA). When such cases appear, the system will give a prompt.

Example

The two examples can both specify AAL5 encapsulation type of PVC as aal5snap.

Display how to specify AAL5 encapsulation type of PVC 1/32 as aal5snap.

[3Com-atm-pvc-Atm1/0/0-1/32] encapsulation aal5snap

Display how to specify AAL5 encapsulation type of PVC 1/33 as aal5snap.

[3Com-atm-pvc-Atm1/0/0-1/33] undo encapsulation

interface atm Syntax

interface atm interface-num

interface atm interface-number.subinterface-num [ multi-point | point-to-point ]

undo interface atm interface-number.subinterface-num

View

System view

Parameter

Interface number: ATM master interface number. For detailed numbering rules, please refer to “Interface Configuration” part of this manual.


subinterface number: ATM sub-interface number. For detailed numbering rules, please refer to “Interface Configuration” part of this manual..

multi-point | point-to-point: Sub-interface connection type.

Description

Using the interface atm command, you can create an ATM sub-interface or enter an ATM interface view. Using the undo interface atm command, you can delete an ATM sub-interface.

By default, the connection type of sub-interface is multi-point.

ATM sub-interface has two connection types: multi-point and point-to-point. Multiple PVCs can be created at the sub-interface of multi-point connection type, but only one PVC can be created at the sub-interface of point-to-point type.


Example

The two examples display how to enter the ATM main interface or create/enter the ATM sub-interface.

Enter the main interface Atm1/0/0.

[3Com] interface atm 1/0/0

Create/enter the sub-interface Atm1/0/0.1 and set its connection type as point-to-point.

[3Com] interface atm 11/1/0.1 p2p

ip-precedence Syntax

ip-precedence{ pvc-name [ vpi/vci ] | vpi/vci } { min [ max ] | default }

undo ip-precedence{ pvc-name [ vpi/vci ] | vpi/vci }

View

ATM PVC-Group view

Parameter

pvc-name: PVC name, whose maximum length is 16 characters (case insensitive). It should be unique at ATM interface. And it shouldn't be legal VPI/VCI pair. For example, "1/20" cannot be a PVC name. The PVC corresponding to pvc-name must have already been created.

vpi/vci: vpi is ATM Virtual Path Identifier (VPI), which ranges from 0 to 255; vci is ATM Virtual Channel Identifier (VCI) , which ranges from 0 to 2047. Usually, the vci values from 0 to 31 are reserved for special usage and cannot be used. PVC corresponding to vpi/vci must have already been created.

min: Minimum preference of IP packets carried by the PVC.


max: Maximum preference of IP packets carried by the PVC.

default: Packets carried by the PVC with default preference.

Description

Using the ip-precedence command, you can set the precedence of IP packets carried over PVC. Using the undo ip-precedence command, you can delete the precedence configuration of IP packets carried over PVC.

This command can be only used to set the PVC within the PVC-Group. The specified minimum preference min must be less than or equal to the specified maximum preference max.

For the related commands, see pvc-group and pvc.

Example

Display how to set an IP packet named "3Com" whose VPI/VCI is 1/32 and the PVC carrying preference is 0 to 3.

[3Com-atm-pvc-group-Atm1/0/0-1/32-3Com] ip-precedence 3Com 1/32 0 3

map bridge Syntax

map bridge virtual-ethernet interface-num

undo map bridge

View

PVC view

Parameter

interface-num: Interface number of the VE interface, which is determined by a set of tri-dimensional indices, i.e., slot number/module number/port number.

Description

Using the map bridge command, you can establish the IPoEoA mapping or PPPoEoA mapping on the PVC. Using the undo map bridge command, you can delete the mapping.

By default, no mapping is configured.

Before using this command, make sure that VE has been created.

As the upper layer of the link layer on the VE interface is Ethernet and the lower layer is carried by AAL5, the MAC address used by VE is not the actual MAC address and it cannot be obtained from the hardware and must be configured manually. Users need to configure the correct MAC address by themselves.


Example

The following example shows a complete process of IPoEoA configuration.

Establish a VE interface Virtual-Ethernet2/0/0.

[3Com] interface virtual-ethernet 2

Configure IP address 10.1.1.1/16 for the VE interface.

[3Com-Virtual-Ethernet2/0/0] ip address 10.1.1.1 255.255.0.0[3Com-Virtual-Ethernet2/0/0] quit

Establish PVC 1/102 on the ATM interface Atm2/0/0

[3Com] interface atm 2/0/0[3Com-Atm2/0/0] pvc 1/102

Establish the IPoE mapping using the established VE interface in PVC view.

[3Com-atm-pvc-Atm2/0/0-1/102] map bridge virtual-ethernet2

map ip Syntax

map ip { ip-address [ ip-mask ] | default | inarp [ minutes ] } [ broadcast ]

undo map ip { ip-address | default | inarp }

View

PVC view

Parameter

ip-address: Opposite IP address mapping to PVC.

ip-mask: IP address mask, optional. If a packet cannot find the next hop at the interface, but the next hop address belongs to the network segment specified by ip-address and ip-mask, it can be sent over the PVC.

default: A mapping with the default route property is set. If a packet cannot find a mapping with the same address of next hop at the interface, but one PVC has the default mapping, the packet can be sent over the PVC.

inarp: Enables Inverse Address Resolution Protocol (InARP) at PVC.

minutes: Time interval to send InARP packets in minutes, optional. The range of the value is 1 to 600 and the default value is 15.

broadcast: Pseudobroadcast, optional parameter. If a mapping with such property is configured at PVC, the broadcast packets at the interfaces should be sent a copy at the PVC.


Description

Using the map ip command, you can create IPoA mapping for PVC. Using the undo map ip command, you can delete the mapping.

By default, no mapping is configured. If a mapping is set, pseudobroadcast is not supported by default.

When InARP is used, it must be aal5snap encapsulation type. InARP is not supported when aal5mux and aal5nlpid encapsulations are adopted.

Example

The two examples are the cases creating IPoA mapping for PVC.

Display how to create a static mapping at PVC 1/32, specify the opposite IP address to 61.123.30.169 and support pseudobroadcast.

[3Com-atm-pvc-Atm1/0/0-1/32] map ip 61.123.30.169 broadcast

Display how to enable InARP at PVC 1/33 to automatically obtain the opposite address and send InARP packets every 10 minutes.

[3Com-atm-pvc-Atm1/0/0.1-1/33] map ip inarp 10

map ppp Syntax

map ppp virtual-template vt-number

undo map ppp View

View

PVC view

Parameter

Virtual-template (VT) Interface number corresponding to PPPoA. It should be created previously.

Description

Using the map ppp command, you can create PPPoA mapping at PVC in PVC view. Using the undo map ppp command, you can delete the mapping.

By default, no mapping is configured.

Before this command is used, the VT must have already been created.

Example

Display a complete PPPoA configuration process.

At first, a VT interface with the number 10 is created and its IP address is configured.


[3Com] interface virtual-template 10[3Com-Virtual-Template10] ip address 202.38.160.1 255.255.255.0[3Com-Virtual-Template10] quit

And then PVC 1/101 at ATM interface Atm1/0/0 is created.

[3Com] interface atm 1/0/0[3Com-Atm1/0/0] pvc 1/101

The newly created VT interface is used to create the PPPoA mapping.

[3Com-atm-pvc-Atm1/0/0-1/101] map ppp virtual-template 10

mtu Syntax

mtu mtu-number

undo mtu

View

Interface view

Parameter

mtu-number: MTU size of ATM interface in bytes, the range of the value is 128 to 16384.

Description

Using the mtu command, you can set the size of Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU) of the ATM interface. Using the undo mtu command, you can restore the default of the value.

By default, 1500 bytes.

MTU of ATM interface only influences the packet assembling and packet disassembling of IP layer at the ATM interface. Because of the limit of the QoS queue length (for example, the default length of the FIFO queue is 75), the too small MTU will lead to too many fragments and will be dropped by the QoS queue. In this case, the length of the QoS queue can be enlarged appropriately. FIFO is the queue dispatching mechanism used by PVC by default, and its queue length can be changed by using the fifo queue-length command in the PVC view.

This command can be used in ATM main interface and sub-interface at the same time.

Example

Display how to set MTU of ATM interface Atm1/0/0 to 1492 bytes.

[3Com-Atm1/0/0] mtu 1492

oam frequency Syntax

oam frequency frequency [ up up-count down down-count retry-frequency retry-frequency ]


undo oam frequency

View

PVC view, ATM Class view.

Parameter

frequency: Time interval to send OAM F5 Loopback cells in seconds, and the range of the value is 1 to 600.

up-count: The number of OAM F5 Loopback cells continuously and correctly received before PVC status changes to UP. The range of the number is 1 to 600.

down-count: The number of OAM F5 Loopback cells continuously and correctly not received before PVC status changes to DOWN. The range of the number is 1 to 600.

retry-frequency: Before PVC status changes, the sending interval of OAM F5 Loopback cell in retransmission check, in second. The range of the value is 1 to 1000.

Description

Using the oam frequency command, you can enable the transmission of OAM F5 Loopback cell so as to check the PVC status. You can also enable OAM F5 Loopback retransmission check or modify the related parameters of the retransmission check. Using the undo oam frequency command, you can disable the transmission and retransmission check of the cell.

By default, OAM F5 Loopback cell transmission is disabled, but if OAM F5 Loopback cell is received, it should be responded. By default, up-count is 3, down-count is 5 and retry-frequency is 1 second.

Example

Display how to enable OAM F5 Loopback check at PVC 1/32, with the period of 12 seconds. And set the retransmission check up-count as 4, down-count as 4 and retransmission period as 1 second.

[3Com-atm-pvc-Atm1/0/0-1/32] oam frequency 12 up 4 down 4 retry-frequency 1

pvc Syntax

pvc { pvc-name [ vpi/vci ] | vpi/vci }

undo pvc { pvc-name [ vpi/vci ] | vpi/vci }

View

ATM interface view or PVC-Group view


Parameter

pvc-name: PVC name, whose maximum length is 16 characters. It shall be unique at ATM interface (case insensitive), and can not be legal VPI/VCI pair. For example, "1/20" cannot be a PVC name.

vpi/vci: vpi is ATM Virtual Path Identifier (VPI) in the range 0 to 255; vci is ATM Virtual Channel Identifier (VCI). Its value range depends on interface type. See the following table for reference. Usually, the vci values from 0 to 31 are reserved for special usage and cannot be used.

Table 15 VCI range for each type of ATM interface

1) vpi and vci cannot both be 0.

2) A PVC in certain PVC-Group cannot be deleted at ATM interface.

Description

Using the pvc command, you can create a PVC or enter the PVC view at ATM interface or in PVC-Group view. Using the undo pvc command, you can delete the specified PVC.

By default, no PVC is created.

This command is used to create a PVC with specified VPI/VC.

Once pvc-name is specified for one PVC (e.g. "3Com"), it is possible to re-enter the PVC view by inputting pvc pvc-name (e.g. " pvc 3Com"). The deletion of the PVC can be done by inputting undo pvc pvc-name (e.g. " undo pvc 3Com") or through the undo pvc vpi/vci (if the VPI/VCI of this PVC is 1/32, it is " undo pvc 1/32") command.

The VPI/VCI pair of each PVC is unique at an ATM interface (including main interface and sub-interface).

The actual number of PVCs that can be created is determined by the pvc max-number command.

For the related commands, see display atm pvc-info and pvc max-number.

Example

Display how to create a PVC named "3Com" with VPI/VCI as 1/101.

[3Com-Atm1/0/0] pvc 3Com 1/101

Interface type VCIADSL <0-255>GSHDSL <0-255>ATMOC3 <0-1023>ATM25 <0-511>ATME3 <0-1023>ATMT3 <0-1023>


pvc-group Syntax

pvc-group { pvc-name [ vpi/vci ] | vpi/vci }

undo pvc-group { pvc-name [ vpi/vci ] | vpi/vci }

View

ATM interface view

Parameter

pvc-name: PVC name, whose maximum length is 16 characters. It is case insensitive and should be unique at ATM interface. And it shouldn't be legal VPI/VCI pair. For example, "1/20" cannot be a PVC name. The PVC corresponding to pvc-name must have already been created.

vpi/vci: vpi is ATM Virtual Path Identifier (VPI) in the range 0 to 255; vci is ATM Virtual Channel Identifier (VCI). For its value range, refer to VCI range for each type of ATM interface. Usually, the vci values from 0 to 31 are reserved for special usage and cannot be used. PVC corresponding to vpi/vci must have already been created.

Description

Using the pvc-group command, you can create a PVC-Group or enter the PVC-Group view at ATM interface. Using the undo pvc-group command, you can delete the specified PVC-Group.

Once pvc-name is specified for some PVC (e.g. "3Com"), it is possible to enter the PVC-Group view by inputting pvc-group pvc-name (e.g. "pvc-group 3Com"). The deletion of the PVC-Group can be done by inputting undo pvc-group pvc-name (e.g. "undo pvc-group 3Com") or through the undo pvc-group vpi/vci (if the VPI/VCI of this PVC is 1/32, it is " undo pvc-group 1/32") command.

For the related commands, see ip-precedence and pvc.

Example

Display how to create a PVC-Group based on the name "3Com" and the PVC with VPI/VCI as 1/32.

[3Com-Atm1/0/0] pvc-group 3Com 1/32.

pvc max-number Syntax

pvc max-number max-number

undo pvc max-number

View



Parameter

max-number: Maximum number of supported VCs. Value range of this parameter depends on interface type, as shown in the following table:

Table 16 The maximum number of VCs allowed for each type of ATM interface

Description

Using the pvc max-number command, you can set the maximum number of ATM interface virtual circuits (VC). Using the undo pvc max-number command, you can restore the default value.

This command is used to set the maximum number of the total available VCs for ATM main interfaces and sub-interfaces.

Although this command is valid on both ATM main interface and sub-interface, it can only be used in ATM main interface view and there is not this command in ATM sub-interface view.


Example

The two examples can both make ATM interface Atm1/0/0 support totally 2048 VCs.

Display how to set ATM interface Atm1/0/0 to totally support maximum 2048 VCs.

[3Com-Atm1/0/0] pvc max-number 2048

Display how to set ATM interface Atm1/0/0 to support the default maximum number of VCs (2048).

[3Com-Atm1/0/0] undo pvc max-number

pvp limit Syntax

pvp limit vpi peak-rate

undo pvp limit vpi

View


Interface type max-numberADSL <1-32>GSHDSL <1-32>ATMOC3 <1-1024>ATM25 <1-256>ATME3 <1-1024>ATMT3 <1-1024>


Parameter

vpi: Virtual path identifier of ATM network, its value ranges from 0 to 255.

peak-rate: Normal flow to be held. Value range of this parameter depends on interface type, as shown in the following table:

Table 17 Value ranges of peak-rate

Description

Using the pvp limit command, you can set the parameters for VP policing. Using the undo pvp limit command, you can delete the VP policing.

By default, the VP policing is not performed.

When applying VP policing, the parameters of PVC are still valid. Only when the parameters of PVC and VP policing are satisfied, will the packets be transmitted. When calculating the traffic, the LLC/SNAP, MUX and NLPID headers are included, but the ATM cell head is not included.

For the related commands, see pvc, service cbr, service vbr-nrt, and service vbr-rt, service ubr.

Example

Set the traffic of VP with vpi 1 to 2M.

[3Com-Atm1/0/0] pvp limit 1 2000

service cbr Syntax

service cbr output-pcr [ cdvt cdvt_value ]

View

PVC view

Parameter

output-pcr: Output peak rate of ATM cell in Kbit/s. Value range of this parameter depends on interface type, as shown in the following table

Table 18 Value ranges of output-pcr

Interface type peak-rateADSL <64-640>GSHDSL <64-2312>ATMOC3 <2000-155000>ATM25 <64-25600>ATME3 <64-34000>ATMT3 <64-45000>

Interface type output-pcrADSL <64-640>GSHDSL <64-2312>


cdvt_value: cell delay variation tolerance, in ìs, and the range of the value is 0 to 10000ìs.

Description

Using the service cbr command, you can specify PVC service type as constant bit rate (CBR).

By default, the service type is UBR after creating a PVC. When the value of cdvt is not specified, it is 500ìs by default.

This command is used to set the PVC service type and parameter. The newly specified PVC service type will replace the existing service type. It is recommended that the PVC with larger bandwidth be created first and then the one with smaller bandwidth. If the creation fails, the cdvt_value can be adjusted larger to create the PVC once more. The above case will be prompted in the command line, as follows:

“fail to set service parameter, please adjust cdvt value”

The command does not support ATM E1 interface and ATM E3 interface.

For the related commands, see service vbr-nrt, service vbr-rt, and service ubr.

Example

Create a PVC named "3Com" with VPI/VCI as 1/101.


Specify the service type of the PVC as cbr and the peak rate of ATM cell as 50,000Kbits/s.Cell delay variation tolerance is 1000ìs.

[3Com-atm-pvc-Atm1/0/0-1/101-3Com] service cbr 50000 cdvt 1000

service ubr Syntax

service ubr output-pcr

View

PVC view

Parameter

output-pcr: Output peak rate of ATM cell in Kbit/s. For the value ranges of this parameter, see Value ranges of output-pcr.

ATMOC3 <2000-155000>ATM25 <64-25600>ATME3 <64-34000>ATMT3 <64-45000>


Description

Using the service ubr command, you can specify the service type of PVC as Unspecified Bit Rate (UBR) and specify the related rate parameters.

By default, the service type is UBR after creating a PVC.

This command as well as the service vbr-nrt, service vbr-rt and service cbr commands can be used to set the service type and service parameters of PVC. The newly specified PVC service type will supersede the existing service type.

For the related commands, see service vbr-nrt, service vbr-rt, and service cbr.

Example


[3Com-Atm1/0/0] service pvc 3Com 1/101

Display how to specify the service type of the PVC as ubr and the peak cell rate of ATM cell as 100,000Kbps.

[3Com-atm-pvc-Atm1/0/0-1/101-3Com] service ubr 100000

service vbr-nrt Syntax

service vbr-nrt output-pcr output-scr output-mbs

View

PVC view

Parameter

output-pcr: Peak rate of ATM cell output in Kbit/s. For the value ranges of this parameter, see Value ranges of output-pcr.

output-scr: Sustainable rate of ATM cell output in Kbps. Its value ranges are the same as those of output-pcr.

output-mbs: Maximum burst size of ATM cell output, i.e., the maximum cache size of ATM cell output at the interface in cell number.

Description

Using the service vbr-nrt command, you can specify the service type of PVC as Variable Bit Rate-Non Real Time (VBR-NRT) and specify the related rate parameters.


This command as well as the service ubr, service vbr-rt and service cbr commands can be used to set the service type and service parameters of PVC. The newly specified PVC service type will supercede the existing service type.

For the related commands, see service vbr-rt, service ubr, and service cbr.


Example



Display how to specify the service type of the PVC as VBR-NRT and set the peak bit rate of ATM cell to 100,000kbit/s, sustainable bit rate to 50,000Kbps, the maximum burst size to 320 cells.

[3Com-atm-pvc-Atm1/0/0-1/101-3Com] service vbr-nrt 100000 50000 320

service vbr-rt Syntax

service vbr-rt output-pcr output-scr output-mbs

View

PVC view

Parameter

output-pcr: Peak cell rate of ATM output in Kbit/s. For the value ranges of this parameter, see .

output-scr: Sustainable cell rate of ATM output in Kbps. Its value ranges are the same as those of output-pcr.

output-mbs: Maximum burst size of ATM cell output, i.e., the maximum cache size of ATM cell output at the interface in cell number. The range of the value is 1 to 512. When it is used in ATM E3 interface, the range of the parameter is 1 to 512.

Description

Using the service vbr-rt command, you can set the service type of PVC to Variable Bit Rate - Real Time (VBR-RT) and specify the related rate parameters in the PVC view.


This command as well as the service ubr, service cbr and service vbr-nrt commands can be used to set the service type and service parameters of PVC. The newly specified PVC service type will supercede the existing service type. The command does not support ATM E1 interface.

For the related commands, see service cbr, service ubr, and service vbr-nrt.

Example


[3Com-if-Atm1/0/0] pvc 3Com 1/101

Display how to specify the service type of the PVC as VBR-NRT and set the peak cell rate of ATM to 100,000kbit/s, sustainable cell rate to 50,000Kbps, the maximum burst size to 320 cells.


[3Com-atm-pvc-Atm1/0/0-1/101-3Com] service vbr-rt 100000 50000 320

LAPB and X.25 Configuration Commands

channel Syntax

channel { interface serial interface-number | xot ip-address }

undo channel { interface serial interface-number | xot ip-address }

View

X.25 hunt group view

Parameter

interface-number: Interface number, its value ranges from 0 to 3.

ip-address: IP address of the peer XOT host.

Description

Using the channel command, you can add X.25 interface or XOT channel of one serial port to the current hunt group. Using the undo channel command, you can delete the specified interface or XOT channel from the current hunt group.

One interface may belong to six hunt groups at most at the same time.

For the related command, see X25 hunt-group.

Example

Add the serial interface serial0/0/0 to the hunt group hg1.

[3Com] x25 hunt-group hg1 round-robin[3Com-hg-hg1] channel interface serial0/0/0

debugging pad Syntax

debugging pad { all | error | event | packet }

undo debugging pad { all | error | event | packet }

View

User view

Parameter

all: All debugging switch of PAD.

error: Error debugging switch of PAD.

LAPB and X.25 Configuration Commands 351

event: Event debugging switch of PAD.

packet: Packet debugging switch of PAD.

Description

Using the debugging pad command, you can enable the debugging switch of PAD.

Using the undo debugging pad command, you can disable the debugging switch of PAD.

Example

None

debugging x25 xot Syntax

debugging x25 xot { all | event | packet }

undo debugging x25 xot { all | event | packet }

View

User view

Parameter

all: All debugging switch of XOT.

event: Event debugging switch of XOT.

packet: Packet debugging switch of XOT

Description

Using the debugging x25 xot command, you can enable the debugging switch of XOT

Using the undo debugging x25 xot command, you can disable the debugging switch of XOT

Example

None

display interface Syntax

display interface serial [ number ]

View

Any view


Parameter

number: Serial interface number.

Description

Using the display interface command, you can view the LAPB or X.25 interface information. After configuring PVC of X.25, users can use the command to obtain the status information on one interface.

Example

Encapsulate Serial0/0/0 with LAPB protocol and view the encapsulated interface information using the following commands.

<3Com> system-view[3Com] interface Serial1/0/0[3Com-Serial0/0/0] linl-protocol lapb[3Com-Serial0/0/0] display interface serial 0/0/0Serial0/0/0 current state : UPLine protocol current state : UPDescription : 3Com, 3Com Series, Serial4/0/0 InterfaceThe Maximum Transmit Unit is 1500, Holder timer is 10(sec)Internet protocol processing : disabled Link-protocol is X.25 DCE Ietf, address is , state R1, modulo 8 input/output: window sizes 7/7, packet sizes 256/256 Channels: Incoming-only 10-20, Two-way 30-40, Outgoing-only 50-60 Timers: T10 60, T11 180, T12 60, T13 60, Idle_Timer 0 (seconds) New configuration(will be effective after restart): modulo 8 input/output: window sizes 7/7, packet sizes 256/256 Channels: Incoming-only 10-20, Two-way 30-40, Outgoing-only 50-60 Statistic: Restarts 0 (Restart Collisions 0) Refused Incoming Call 0, Failing Outgoing Call 0 input/output: RESTART 1/1 CALL 9/2 DIAGNOSE 0/0 DATA 119/121 INTERRUPT 0/0 Bytes 2497/2731 RR 6/113 RNR 0/0 REJ 0/0 Invalid Pr: 0 Invalid Ps: 0 Unknown: 0Link-protocol is LAPB LAPB DCE, module 8, window-size 7, max-frame 12056, retry 10 Timer: T1 3000, T2 1500, T3 0 (milliseconds), x.25-protocol state CONNECT, VS 6, VR 3, Remote VR 6 IFRAME 147/254, RR 11/6, RNR 0/0, REJ 0/0 FRMR 0/0, SABM 0/1, DM 0/0, UA 1/0 DISC 0/0, invalid ns 0, invalid nr 0, link resets 0FIFO queuing: (Outbound queue:Size/Length/Discards)FIFO 0/75/0Physical layer is synchronous,Interface is DTE, Cable type is V24 5 minutes input rate 0.00 bytes/sec, 0.01 packets/sec 5 minutes output rate 0.07 bytes/sec, 0.01 packets/sec 159 packets input, 3338 bytes, 0 no buffers 261 packets output, 4057 bytes, 0 no buffers 0 input errors, 0 CRC, 0 frame errors 0 overrunners, 0 aborted sequences, 0 input no buffersDCD=UP DTR=UP DSR=UP RTS=UP CTS=UP


The above information will be displayed after entering the command series, in which the contents in boldface are those related to X.25 and LAPB protocols. The main parameters are described as follows:

■ Link-protocol is X.25 DCE Ietf: Current encapsulation protocol of this interface is X.25 protocol that works in DCE mode, and the data packet encapsulation format is IETF.

■ address is: X.121 address of this X.25 interface; this field will be empty if there is no address.

■ state: Current status of this X.25 interface.

■ modulo: Data packets and traffic control packets sent by this X.25 interface are numbered in modulo 8 mode.

■ input/output: Window sizes 7/7, packet sizes 256/256: Flow control parameters of this X.25 interface, including receiving window size, sending window size, maximum received packet size (in bytes), and maximum sent packet size (in bytes).

■ Channels: Channel range division of this X.25 interface, sequentially as incoming-only channel section, two-way channel section, outgoing-only channel section; if both demarcating values of an section are 0, this section is disabled.

■ Timers: Delay values of various timers of this X.25 interface, in unit of second.

■ New Configuration: New configuration of this X.25 interface taking effect after next restart; if this configuration is wrong, the default value will be restored.

■ Restarts 0 ( Restart Collision 0): Statistics of this X.25 interface, including times of restart (including restart collision).

■ Refused Incoming Call: Statistics information of this X.25 interface: times of call refusals. times of call failures.

■ Failing Outgoing Call: Statistics information of this X.25 interface:

■ input/output: RESTART 1/1 ... REJ 0/0:Statistics information of this X.25 interface: quantities of received and sent packets, format: received quantity/sent quantity.

■ Invalid Pr: Error statistics information of this X.25 interface: total of received data packets and traffic control packets carrying erroneous acknowledgement numbers.

■ Invalid Ps: Error statistics information of this X.25 interface: total of received data packets carrying erroneous sequence numbers.

■ Unknown: Error statistics information of this X.25 interface: total of received irresolvable packets.

■ Link-protocol is LAPB: Current encapsulation protocol of this interface is LAPB protocol.

■ LAPB DCE: LAPB of this interface works in DCE mode.

■ module 8: Information frame and monitoring frame sent by this interface LAPB are numbered in the modulo 8 view.

■ window-size 7: Window size of this interface LAPB is 7.


■ max-frame 12056: The maximum length of frame sent by the interface LAPB is 12056 bits.

■ retry 10: Maximum re-sending times of information frame of this interface LAPB is 10.

■ timer: Delay value of timers of this interface LAPB, in milliseconds. The unit of T3 is second.

■ state: Current status of this interface LAPB.

■ VS: Sending variable of this interface LAPB.

■ VR: Receiving variable of this interface LAPB.

■ Remote VR: Peer’s last acknowledgment on information frame received by this interface LAPB.

■ IFRAME 147/254 ... DISC 0/0: Statistics information of frames sent and received by this interface LAPB, format: received quantity/sent quantity.

■ Invalid ns: Error statistics of this interface LAPB, including total of received information frames carrying erroneous sequence numbers.

■ Invalid nr: Error statistics of this interface LAPB, including total of received information frames and monitoring frames carrying erroneous acknowledgment numbers.

■ Link resets: Restarting times of this interface LAPB link.

display x25 alias-policy Syntax

display x25 alias-policy [ interface interface-type slot-number ]

View

Any view

Parameter


slot-number: Interface number.

Description

Using the display x25 alias-policy command, you can view X.25 alias table.

For the related command, see x25 alias-policy.

Example

Display X.25 alias table.

<3Com> display x25 alias-policyAlias for Serial0/0/0:Alias for Serial1/0/0: Alias- 1:$20112405$strict Alias- 2:$20112450left Alias- 3:20112450$right


The above information indicates: the interface Serial0/0/0 is set without alias, and the interface Serial1/0/0 is set with 3 aliases, which are $20112405$ (in strict match mode), $20112405 (in left alignment match mode) and 20112405$ (in right alignment match mode).

display x25hunt-group-info

Syntax

display x25 hunt-group-info [ hunt-group-name ]

View

Any view

Parameter

hunt-group-name: hunt group name

Description

Using the display x25 hunt-group-info command, you can view the status information of X.25 hunt group.

You can use this command to learn the hunt group of the Router and the information about the interfaces and XOT channel inside the hunt group.

For the related command, see x25 hunt-group.

Example

Display the status information of X.25 hunt group hg1.

[3Com] display x25 hunt-group-info hg1HG_ID : hg1 HG_Type: round-robin member state vc-used in-pkts out-pktsSerial0/0/0 Last 2 51 20Serial1/0/0 Next 1 21 151.1.1.1 Normal 1 24 3

The following table introduces the meaning of each field in the displayed information.

Table 19 Explanation of each field in the command display x25 hunt-group-info

Field Explanationhg1 Hunt group nameround-robin Hunt group call channel selection policymember Interfaces or XOT channel contained in hunt groupstate The state of the current interface or XOT channel, including:

Last:Last: last used

Next: interfaces or XOT channel selected by rotary selection policy next

Normal: normal statevc-used Call number on the interface or XOT channel (including call success and call failure)in-pkts Input flow on the interface or XOT channel in packetsout-pkts Output flow on the interface or XOT channel in packets


display x25 map Syntax

display x25 map

View

Any view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the display x25 map command, you can view the X.25 address mapping table.

The X.25 address mapping can be configured in two methods: special configuration (through the x25 map command) or implied configuration (through the x25 pvc command). The display x25 map command can be used to show all the address mappings.

For the related commands, see x25 map, x25 pvc, x25 switch pvc, x25 xot pvc, and x25 fr pvc.

Example

Display the X.25 address map table.

<3Com> display x25 mapInterface:Serial3/0/0(protocol status is up):ip address:202.38.162.2 X.121 address: 22 map-type: SVC_MAP VC-number: 0 Facility: ACCEPT_REVERSE; BROADCAST; PACKET_SIZE: I 512 O 512 ;

display x25 pad Syntax

display x25 pad [ pad-id ]

View

Any view

Parameter

pad-id: PAD ID, its value ranges from 0 to 255. If it is not specified, all PAD connection information will be displayed.

Description

Using the display x25 pad command, you can view X.25 PAD connection information.


PAD is a kind of application similar to telnet. It can establish the connection between two ends through X121 address, and then, to carry out configuration operations.

For the related commands, see display x25 vc and x25 xot.

Example

Display X.25 PAD connection information.

[3Com] display x25 pad UI-INDEX130: From remote 22 connected to local 11, State: Normal X.3Parameters(In): 1:1,2:0,3:2,4:1,5:0,6:0,7:21,8:0,9:0,10:0,11:1412:0,13:0,14:0,15:0,16:127,17:21,18:18,19:0,20:0,21:0,22:0 X.3Parameters(Out):1:1,2:0,3:2,4:1,5:0,6:0,7:21,8:0,9:0,10:0,11:1412:0,13:0,14:0,15:0,16:127,17:21,18:18,19:0,20:0,21:0,22:0Input:Pkts(total/control): 13/2 bytes:12 queue(size/max) :0/200Output:Pkts(total/control): 15/2 bytes:320

display x25 switch-tablepvc

Syntax

display x25 switch-table pvc

View

Any view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the display x25 switch-table pvc command, you can view X.25 switching virtual circuit table.

For the related commands, see x25 pvc, x25 switch pvc, x25 xot pvc, x25 fr pvc, and x25 switch svc.

Example

Display X.25 switching virtual circuit table.

[3Com] display x25 switch-table pvc#1 (In: Serial0/0/0-vc1024)<— —>(Out: Serial1/0/0-vc1}#2 (In: Serial1/0/0-vc1024)<— —>(Out: Serial0/0/0-vc1}

display x25 switch-tablesvc

Syntax

display x25 switch-table svc { dynamic | static }


View

Any view

Parameter

None

Description

The command display x25 switch-table svc is used to display X.25 switching routing table.

For the related command, see x25 switch svc.

Example

Display X.25 switching routing table.

[3Com] display x25 switch-table svc staticNumber Destination Substitute- Substitute- CUD SwitchTo(type/name)src dst1 11 I/Serial2/0/02 22 I/Serial2/1/03 133 H/hg14 132 T/123.123.123.1235 133 T/123.123.123.123T/124.124.124.124T/125.125.125.1256 111 222 333 T/4.4.4.4Total of static svc is 6.The item type of SwitchTo meaning:I: interface H: hunt-group T: xot

The following table introduces the meaning of each field in the displayed information.

Table 20 Explanation of each field in the command display x25 switch-table svc

display x25 vc Syntax

display x25 vc [ lci ]

View

Any view

Field ExplanationNumber Sequence number of this route in the routing tableSubstitute-src X.121 source address after substitution, if the content is blank, it means no substitution.Substitute-dst X.121 destination address after substitution, if the content is blank, it means no substitutioCUD Call User DataSwitchTo Forwarding address of this route, including interface, XOT channel and hunt group


Parameter

lci: Logical channel identifier, its value ranges from 1 to 4095. If the logical channel identifier is not specified, all virtual circuits will be displayed.

Description

Using the display x25 vc command, you can view the information about the X.25 virtual circuit.

SVC (Switched Virtual Circuit) is set up temporarily by X.25 through call connection when data transmission is required. PVC is configured manually and exists regardless of the data transmission requirement. When the router works in X.25 switched mode, virtual circuits will be set up in order to transfer the switched data. The information about these virtual circuits can be shown via this command, and only some fields in the displayed information differ.

For the related commands, see x25 pvc, x25 switch pvc, x25 xot pvc, and x25 fr pvc.

Example

Display X.25 virtual circuit.

<3Com> display x25 vcInterface: Serial2/0/0 SVC 1 State: P4 Map: ip 10.1.1.2 to 130 Window size: input 2 output 2 Packet Size: input 128 output 128 Local PS: 5 Local PR: 5 Remote PS: 5 Remote PR: 4 Local Busy: FALSE Reset times: 0 Input/Output: DATA 5/5 INTERRUPT 0/0 RR 0/0 RNR 0/0 REJ 0/0 Bytes 420/420 Snd Queue(Current/Max): 0/200Interface: Serial2/1/0 SVC 10 State: P4 SVC <--> Serial2/0/0 SVC 60 Window size: input 2 output 2 Packet Size: input 128 output 128 Local PS: 0 Local PR: 0 Remote PS: 0 Remote PR: 0 Local Busy: FALSE Reset times: 0 Input/Output: DATA 5/5 INTERRUPT 0/0 RR 0/0 RNR 0/0 REJ 0/0 Bytes 420/420 Snd Queue(Current/Max): 0/200Interface: Serial2/0/0-1.1.1.1 PVC 1 State: P/Inactive XOT PVC <--> Serial2/0/0 PVC 1 connected Window size: input 2 output 2 Packet Size: input 128 output 128


Local PS: 0 Local PR: 0 Remote PS: 0 Remote PR: 0 Local Busy: FALSE Reset times: 0 Input/Output: DATA 0/0 INTERRUPT 0/0 RR 0/0 RNR 0/0 REJ 0/0 Bytes 0/0 Snd Queue(Current/Max): 1/200Interface: Serial2/0 PVC 1 State: D3 PVC <--> XOT Serial2/0/0-1.1.1.1 PVC 1 connected Window size: input 2 output 2 Packet Size: input 128 output 128 Local PS: 0 Local PR: 0 Remote PS: 0 Remote PR: 0 Local Busy: FALSE Reset times: 0 Input/Output: DATA 0/0 INTERRUPT 0/0 RR 0/0 RNR 0/0 REJ 0/0 Bytes 0/0 Snd Queue(Current/Max): 0/200Interface: Serial2/0/0 SVC 59 State: P4 PAD: UI-130 From remote 130 connected to local 220 Window size: input 2 output 2 Packet Size: input 128 output 128 Local PS: 3 Local PR: 1 Remote PS: 1 Remote PR: 2 Local Busy: FALSE Reset times: 0 Input/Output: DATA 9/11 INTERRUPT 0/0 RR 6/2 RNR 0/0 REJ 0/0 Bytes 53/363 Snd Queue(Current/Max): 0/200

display x25 xot Syntax

display x25 xot

View

Any view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the display x25 xot command, you can view XOT link information.

You can use the command display x25 xot to view the detailed information about all XOT links, including peer ip and port, local ip and port, keepalive setting of socket and come/go interface names.

For the related commands, see x25 switch svc xot and x25 xot pvc.


Example

Display XOT link information.

[3Com] display x25 xotSVC 1024: ( ESTAB ) tcp peer ip: 10.1.1.1, peer port: 1998 tcp local ip: 10.1.1.2, local port: 1024 socket keepalive period: 5, keepalive tries: 3 come interface name: Serial0/0/0-10.1.1.1-1024 go interface name: Serial0/0/0:

The above information indicates: there is one established XOT link via SVC, whose peer IP is 10.1.1.1, peer port is 1998, local IP is 10.1.1.2, local port is 1024, keepalive period of socket is 5 seconds, keepalive tries are 3, come interface name is Serial0/0/0-10.1.1.1-1024 (XOT interface), and go interface name is Serial0/0/0.

lapb max-frame Syntax

lapb max-frame n1-value

undo lapb max-frame

View

Interface view

Parameter

n1-value: The value of the parameter N1 in bits, and its value ranges from 1096 to 12104.By default, the parameter N1 of LAPB is 12032.

Description

Using the lapb max-frame command, you can configure the LAPB parameter N1. Using the undo lapb max-frame command, you can restore the default value.

N1 shall indicate the maximum bit of I frame that DCE or DTE wish to receive from DTE or DCE, and its value is maximum transmission unit (MTU) plus the total bytes of protocol header times 8, which stipulates the maximum length of transmission frame.

Example

Set the parameter N1 of LAPB on the interface Serial 0/0/0 is 1160.

[3Com-Serial0/0/0] lapb max-frame 1160

lapb modulo Syntax

lapb modulo { 128 | 8 }

undo lapb modulo


View

Interface view

Parameter

128: Using modulus 128 numbering view.

8: Using modulus 8 numbering view.

Description

Using the lapb modulo command, you can specify the LAPB frame numbering view (also called modulo). Using the undo lapb modulo command, you can restore the default value.

By default, the LAPB frame protocol view is modulo 8.

There are two LAPB frame numbering views: modulo 8 and modulo 128. Each information frame (I frame) is numbered in sequence, ranging from 0 to the modulo minus 1. In addition, sequential numbers will cycle within the range of modulo.

Modulo 8 is a basic view, LAPB can implement all the standards via the view. It is sufficient for most links.

For the related command, see lapb window-size.

Example

Set the LAPB frame numbering view on Serial0/0/0 to modulo 8.

[3Com-Serial0/0/0] lapb modulo 8

lapb retry Syntax

lapb retry n2-value

undo lapb retry

View

Interface view

Parameter

n2-value: The value of N2, its value ranges from 1 to 255.By default, the parameter N2 of LAPB is 10.

Description

Using the lapb retry command, you can configure LAPB parameter N2. Using the undo lapb retry command, you can restore the default value.

The value of N2 indicates the maximum retries that DCE or DTE sends one frame to DTE or DCE.


Example

Set the LAPB parameter N2 on Serial0/0/0 to 20.

[3Com-Serial0/0/0] lapb retry 20

lapb timer Syntax

lapb timer { t1 t1-value | t2 t1-value | t3 t3-value }

undo lapb timer { t1 | t2 | t3 }

View

Interface view

Parameter■ t1-value: The value of timer T1 in ms, its value ranges from 1 to 64000ms.The

default value of T1 is 2000ms.

■ t2-value: Value of the timer T2 in ms, ranging 1 to 32000.The default value of T2 is 1000ms.

■ t3-value: Value of the timer T3 in ms, its value ranges from 0 to 255. The default value of T3 is 0ms.

Description

Using the lapb timer command, you can configure the LAPB timers T1, T2 and T3..Using the undo lapb timer command, you can restore their default values.

T1 is a transmission timer. When T1 expires, DTE (DCE) will start retransmission. The value of T1 shall be greater than the maximum time between the sending of a frame and the receiving of its response frame.

T2 is a reception timer. When it expires, the DTE/DCE must send an acknowledgement frame so that this frame can be received before the peer DTE/DCE T1 timer expires (T2<T1).

T3 is an idle channel timer, when it expires, the DCE reports to the packet layer that the channel stays idle for a long time. T3 should be greater than the timer T1 (T3>T1) on a DCE. When T3 is 0, it indicates that it does not function yet.

Example

Set the LAPB timer T1 on Serial0/0/0 to 3000ms.

[3Com-Serial0/0/0] lapb timer t1 3000

lapb window-size Syntax

lapb window-size k-value

undo lapb window-size


View

Interface view

Parameter

k-value: Maximum number of I frame of unacknowledged sequence number that DTE or DCE may send, if the modulus is 8, the value of the window parameter K ranges 1 to 7. If the modulus is 128, the value of the window parameter K ranges 1 to 127. By default, the window parameter K is 7.

Description

Using the lapb window-size command, you can configure the LAPB window parameter K. Using the undo lapb window-size command, you can restore the default value of the LAPB window parameter K.

The value of the window parameter K is determined by the value of modulus.

For the related command, see lapb modulo.

Example

Set the LAPB window parameter K on the interface Serial 0/0/0 to be 5.

[3Com-Serial0/0/0] lapb window-size 5

link-protocol lapb Syntax

link-protocol lapb [ dte | dce ] [ ip | multi-protocol ]

View

Interface view

Parameter■ dte: Indicates that the interface works in DTE mode of LAPB.

■ dce: Indicates that the interface works in DCE mode of LAPB.

■ ip: Indicates that the network layer protocol borne by LAPB is IP.

Description

Using the link-protocol lapb command, you can specify the link layer protocol of the interface as LAPB.

By default, DTE is the default LAPB operating mode. IP is the default network layer protocol.

Though LAPB is a layer-2 protocol of X.25, it can act as an independent link-layer protocol for simple data transmission. Generally, LAPB can be used when two routers are directly connected with a dedicated line. At that time one end works in the DTE mode, and the other in the DCE mode.



Example

Configure LAPB as the link layer protocol of the interface Serial 0/0/0, and enable it to work in DCE mode.

[3Com-Serial0/0/0] link-protocol lapb dce

link-protocol x25 Syntax

link-protocol x25 [ dte | dce ] [ ietf | nonstandard ]

View

Interface view

Parameter■ dte: Indicates that the interface works in DTE mode.

■ dce: Indicates that the interface works in DCE mode.

■ letf: Based on the standard stipulation of the IETF RFC 1356, encapsulate IP or other network protocols on the X.25 network.

■ nonstandard: Encapsulates IP or other network protocols on the X.25 network with nonstandard.

Description

Using the link-protocol x25 command, you can encapsulate X.25 protocol to the specified interface.

By default, the link-layer protocol for interface is PPP. When the interface uses X.25 protocol, it works in DTE IETF mode by default.

If the X.25 switching function is not used, and two Routers are directly connected back to back via the X.25 protocol, one Router shall work in DTE mode, while the other shall work in DCE mode. When two Routers are connected via the X.25 public packet network, they shall generally work in DTE mode. If the X.25 switching function is used, the Router shall generally work in DCE mode.

In practice, select the IETF format of datagram if there is no special requirement.


Example

Specify X.25 as the link layer protocol of the interface Serial 0/0/0 that works in DTE IETF mode.

[3Com-Serial0/0/0] link-protocol x25 dte ietf

pad Syntax

pad x121-address


View

User view

Parameter

x121-address: x121 destination address.

Description

Using the pad command, you can establish a PAD connection with the remote site.

PAD is a kind of application similar to telnet. It can establish the connection between two ends through X121 address, and then, to carry out configuration operations.

Example

Establish a PAD connection, and the destination x121 address is 2.

<03Com> pad 2

reset xot Syntax

reset xot local local-ip-address local-port remote remote-ip-address remote-port

View

User view

Parameter■ local-ip-address: Local IP address of the XOT connection.

■ local-port: Local port number of the XOT connection.

■ remote-ip-address: Remote IP address of the XOT connection.

■ remote-port: Remote port number of the XOT connection.

Description

For SVC, using the reset xot command, you can initiatively clear an XOT link.

For PVC, using reset xot command, you can initiatively reset an XOT link.

You can initiatively clear or reset the XOT link using the command reset xot. When you clear or reset the XOT link, you can obtain the required ports using the commands display x25 xot or display tcp status.

For the related commands, see display x25 vc, x25 switching, display x25 xot, and display tcp status.

Example

Clear or reset an XOT link.

[3Com] reset xot local 10.1.1.1 1998 remote 10.1.1.2 1024


x25 alias-policy Syntax

x25 alias-policy match-type alias-string

undo x25 alias-policy match-type alias-string

View

Interface view

Parameter

match-type: Match type of the alias. There are 9 optional match types:

■ free: Free match

■ free-ext: Extended free match

■ left: Left alignment match

■ left-ext: Extended left alignment match

■ right: Right alignment match

■ right-ext: Extended right alignment match

■ strict: Strict match

■ whole: Whole match

■ whole-ext: Extended whole match

alias-string: String of the alias

Description

Using the x25 alias-policy command, you can configure the alias of an X.121 address. Using the undo x25 alias-policy command, you can delete the alias of an X.121 address.

By default, no x.25 alias is configured.

When an X.25 call is forwarded between networks, different X.25 networks may perform some operations on the destination addresses (that is, the called DTE address) carried by this call packet, for example, regularly adding or deleting the prefix and suffix. In this case, a user needs to set an interface alias for the router to adapt this change. Please consult your ISP to learn if the network supports this function before deciding whether the alias function is enabled or not.

For the details about the X.25 alias matching method, please see the chapter LAPB and X.25 Configurations in Operation Manual.

For the related commands, see display x25 alias-policy and x25 x121-address.

Example

Configure the link-layer protocol on interface Serial0/0/0 as X.25 and its X.121 address to 20112451, and set two aliases with different match types for it.

[3Com] interface serial 0/0/0


[3Com-Serial0/0/0] link-protocol x25[3Com-Serial0/0/0] x25 x121-address 20112451[3Com-Serial0/0/0] x25 alias-policy right 20112451$[3Com-Serial0/0/0] x25 alias-policy left $20112451

With the above configurations, a call whose destination address is 20112451 can be accepted as long as it can reach the local X.25 interface Serial0/0/0, no matter whether the network is performing the prefix adding operation or suffix adding operation.

x25 call-facility Syntax

x25 call-facility facility-option

undo x25 call-facility facility-option

View

Interface view

Parameter

facility-option: User facility option, its value includes:

■ closed-user-group number: Specifies a closed user group (CUG) number for the X.25 interface. The facility enables DTE to belong to one or more CUGs. CUG allows the DTEs in it to communicate with each other, but not to communicate with other DTEs.

■ packet-size input-size output-size: Specifies the maximum packet size negotiation in initiating call from X.25 interface. Maximum packet size negotiation is part of flow control parameter negotiation. It needs two parameters: maximum reception packet size and maximum transmission packet size, which must range from 16 to 1024 (including 16 and 1024), and must be the integer power of 2.

■ reverse-charge-request: Specifies reverse charging request while calling from X.25 interface.

■ roa-list name: Specifies an ROA list name configured by the command X25 roa-list in system view for the X.25 interface.

■ send-delay value: Specifies the maximum network send delay request while calling from X.25 interface. You can set this request to any value ranging from 0 to 65534 ms (including 0 and 65534).

■ threshold in out: Specifies throughput negotiation while calling from X.25 interface. The values of in/out are defined as 75, 150, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, and 48000.

■ window-size input-window-size output-window-size: Specifies the window size negotiation while calling from X.25 interface. Window size negotiation is a part of flow control parameter negotiation. It needs two parameters: reception window size and transmission window size, which must be in the range of 1 to modulo -1 (including 1 and modulo -1).The default values of the two parameters are 2.


Description

Using the x25 call-facility command, you can set user options for an X.25 interface. After an option is set, all X.25 calls from the X.25 interface will carry the relevant information field in call packet. Using the undo x25 call-facility command, you can delete the set option.

By default, no facility is set.

The user facilities set via this command are available for all the calls originating from this X.25 interface. You can set a user option for an X.25 call from a certain address mapping through the command x25 map protocol-name protocol-address x.121-address x.121-address [ option ].

For the related command, see x25 map.

Example

Specify the flow control parameter negotiation with the peer end for the calls from the X.25 interface serial0/0/0.

[3Com-Serial0/0/0] x25 call-facility packet-size 512 512[3Com-Serial0/0/0] x25 call-facility window-size 5 5

x25 cug-service Syntax

x25 cug-service [ incoming-access ] [ outgoing-access ] [ suppress { all | preferential } ]

undo x25 cug-service

View

Interface view

Parameter

■ incoming-access: Performs the suppress processing of incoming access

■ outgoing-access: Performs the suppress processing of outgoing access

■ all: Suppresses all CUGs configured with preferential suppress

■ preferential: Only processes those CUGs configured with preferential suppress

Description

Using the x25 cug-service command, you can map the local CUG facility to the network CUG. When the call with CUG facility meets CUG suppress conditions, it will be processed. Using the undo x25 cug-service command, you can delete CUG suppress. The command is used on DCE side, and you can use the command link-protocol x25 dce to set DCE as the working mode of the interface.

By default, no CUG suppress is defined.

For the related commands, see x25 call-facility and x25 local-cug.


Example

Define the suppress processing of incoming access on the interface Serial0/0/0.

[3Com-Serial0/0/0] x25 cug-service incoming-access

x25 default-protocol Syntax

x25 default-protocol protocol-type

undo x25 default-protocol

View

Interface view

Parameter

protocol-type: Protocol type, may be IP.

Description

Using the x25 default-protocol command, you can set the default upper-layer protocol carried over X.25 for the X.25 interface. Using the undo x25 default-protocol command, you can restore the default upper-layer protocol.

By default, IP is carried over X.25.

During X.25 SVC setup, the called device will check the call user data field of X.25 call request packet. If it is an unidentifiable one, the called device will deny the setup of the call connection. However, a user can specify a default upper-layer protocol carried over X.25. When X.25 receives a call with unknown CUD, the call can be treated based on the default upper-layer protocol specified by a user.


Example

Set the default upper-layer protocol over the X.25 interface Serial0/0/0 as IP.

[3Com-Serial0/0/0] x25 default-protocol ip

x25 hunt-group Syntax

x25 hunt-group hunt-group-name { round-robin | vc-number }

undo x25 hunt-group hunt-group-name

View

System view

Parameter

hunt-group-name: Name of hunt group.


■ round-robin: Select call channel using cyclic selection policy.

■ vc-number: Select call channel using the policy of computing available logical channel.

Description

Using the x25 hunt-group command, you can create or enter an X.25 hunt group. Using the undo x25 hunt-group command, you can delete the specified X.25 hunt group.

X.25 hunt group supports two call channel selection policies: round-robin mode and vc-number mode, and a hunt group only uses one channel selection policy. The round-robin mode will select next interface or XOT channel inside hunt group for each call request using cyclic selection method. The vc-number mode will select the interface with the most idle-logical channels in hunt group for each call request.

A hunt group can have 10 interfaces or XOT channels at most, and it may nondistinctively select the available channels between interface and XOT channel.

XOT channel cannot join the hunt group that adopts the vc-number selection policy.

For the related command, see display x25 hunt-group.

Example

Create hunt group hg1 which uses cyclic selection policy.

[3Com] x25 hunt-group hg1 round-robin[3Com-hg-hg1]

x25 ignorecalled-address

Syntax

x25 ignore called-address

undo x25 ignore called-address

View

Interface view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the x25 ignore called-address command, you can enable it to ignore the X.121 address of the called DTE when X.25 initiates calls. Using the undo x25 ignore called-address command, you can disable this function.

By default, this function is disabled.


According to X.25, the calling request packet must carry the address bits. However, on some occasions, the X.25 calling request does not have to carry the called/calling DTE address in a specific network environment or as is required by the application. This command enables users to specify whether the call request packet sent by X.25 in the 3Com series routers carries the called DTE address.

For the related commands, see x25 response called-address, x25 response calling-address, and x25 ignore calling-address.

Example

Specify the call request packet from the X.25 interface Serial0/0/0 not to carry the called DTE address.

[3Com-Serial0/0/0] x25 ignore called-address

x25 ignorecalling-address

Syntax

x25 ignore calling-address

undo x25 ignore calling-address

View

Interface view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the x25 ignore calling-address command, you can enable it to ignore the X.121 address of the calling DTE when X.25 initiates calls. Using the undo x25 ignore calling-address command, you can disable this function.


According to X.25, the calling request packet must carry the address bits. However, on some occasions, the X.25 calling request does not have to carry the called/calling DTE address in a specific network environment or as is required by the application. This command enables users to specify whether the call request packet sent by X.25 in the 3Com series routers carries the calling DTE address.

For the related commands, see x25 response called-address, x25 response calling-address, and x25 ignore called-address.

Example

Specify the call request packet from the X.25 interface Serial0/0/0 not to carry the calling DTE address.

[3Com-Serial0/0/0] x25 ignore calling-address


x25 local-cug Syntax

x25 local-cug cug-number network-cug cug-number [ no-incoming ] [ no-outgoing ] [ preferential ]

undo x25 local-cug cug-number

View

Interface view

Parameter■ local-cug cug-number: Number of local cug.

■ network-cug cug-number: Number of network cug.

■ no-incoming: Suppresses incoming access.

■ no-outgoing: Suppresses outgoing access.

■ preferential: Suppresses the CUGs configured with preferential.

Description

Using the x25 local-cug command, you can define CUG suppress rules. Using the undo x25 local-cug command, you can delete the rules. CUG suppress rules have two: suppressing all CUG facilities and suppressing the mapping CUG facility configured with preferential.

By default, no suppress rule is defined.

For the related commands, see x25 call-facility and x25 cug-service.

Example

Define the rule on the serial interface Serial0/0/0: the incoming calls with 100 local CUGs or 200 network CUGs are denied.

[3Com-Serial0/0/0] x25 cug-service[3Com-Serial0/0/0] x25 local-cug 100 network-cug 200 no-incoming

x25 map Syntax

x25 map { ip | compressedtcp } protocol-address x121-address x.121-address [ option ]

undo x25 map { ip | compressedtcp } protocol-address

View

Interface view

Parameter■ ip: Uses IP protocol.

■ compressedtcp: Uses TCP header compression.

■ protocol-address: Network protocol address of the peer host.


■ x.121-address: X.121 address of the peer host.

■ option: Specifies some attributes or user facilities for the address mapping.

Description

Using the x25 map command, you can set the address mapping between IP address used by LANs and X.121 address. Using the undo x25 map command, you can delete one existing mapping.

By default, no address mapping is set.

Since X.25 protocol can multiplex more logical virtual circuits on a physical interface, you need to manually specify the mapping relation between all network addresses and X.121 address.

Once you have specified an address mapping, its contents (including protocol address, X.121 address and all options) cannot be changed. To make modifications, you can first delete this address mapping via the undo x25 map command, and then establish one new address mapping.

Two or more address mappings with an identical protocol address shall not exist on the same X.25 interface.

Detailed explanations are as follows:

■ broadcast: Sends any broadcasts of internetworking protocol and the multicast of IP to the destination. This option provides powerful support for some routing protocols (such as Routing Information Protocol).

■ closed-user-group group-number: Number of the closed user group corresponding to this address mapping.

■ encapsulation-type: Encapsulation type, optional types include nonstandard, ietf, multi-protocol and snap.

■ idle-timer minutes: Maximum idle time for the VC associated with the address mapping. 0 means that the idle time is infinite.

■ no-callin: Disables accepting call to the address mapping.

■ no-callout: Disables call originating from the address mapping.

■ packet-size input-packet output-packet: When the address mapping is used to originate a call, it will negotiate the maximum packet size in bytes with the peer end. Its value must range from 16 to 4096 (including 16 and 4096), and must be the integer power of 2.

■ reverse-charge-accept: If a call initiated by the address mapping carries reverse charging request, to accept the call, this option must be configured in the address mapping.

■ reverse-charge-request: Specifies reverse charging request while calling from the address mapping.

■ roa-list name: Specifies an ROA list name configured by the command X25 roa-list in system view for the X.25 interface.

■ send-delay milliseconds: When the address mapping is used to originate a call, it carries the maximum transmission delay request.


■ threshold in out: When the address mapping is used to originate a call, it negotiates throughput with the peer end. The values of in/out are defined to be 75, 150, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, and 48000.

■ vc-per-map count: Maximum number of VCs associated with the address mapping.

■ window-size input-window-size output-window-size: When the address mapping is used to originate a call, it negotiates the window size with the peer end. The values of input-window-size and output-window-size range between 1 and the number that is 1 less than the modulus of the X.25 interface where the address mapping exists (including 1 and modulus minus 1).

For the related commands, see display x25 map, x25 reverse-charge-accept, x25 call-facility, x25 timer idle, and x25 vc-per-map.

Example

Set two address mappings on the X.25 interfaces Serial0/0/0 and Serial1/0/0, respectively, and the four address mappings have different attributes.

[3Com] interface serial 0/0/0[3Com-Serial0/0/0] x25 map ip 202.38.160.11 x121-address 20112451 reverse-charge-request reverse-charge-accept[3Com-Serial0/0/0] x25 map ip 202.38.160.138 x121-address 20112450 packet-size 512 512 idle-timer 10[3Com] interface serial1/0/0[3Com-Serial1/0/0] x25 map ip 20.30.4.1 x121-address 25112451 window-size 4 4 broadcast[3Com-Serial0/0/0] x25 map ip 20.30.4.8 x121-address 25112450 no-callin

x25 modulo Syntax

x25 modulo modulus

undo x25 modulo

View

Interface view

Parameter

modulus: Modulus, whose value is 8 or 128.

Description

Using the x25 modulo command, you can set the window modulus of an X.25 interface. Using the undo x25 modulo command, you can restore its default window modulus.

By default, the window modulus of X.25 interface is modulus 8 mode.

The slip window is the basis for X.25 traffic control, and the key about the slip window is that the sent packets are numbered cyclically in order and are to be acknowledged by the peer end. The order in numbering refers to the ascending


order, like “…2, 3, 4, 5, 6…” “Cyclically” means that the numbering starts again from the beginning when a certain number (called modulus) is reached. For example, when the modulus is 8, the numbering goes “…4, 5, 6, 7, 0, 1…”.

X.25 defines two numbering modulus: 8 (also called the basic numbering) and 128 (also called extended numbering), and the X.25 of the 3Com series routers supports both views.

For the related commands, see display interface, x25 call-facility, x25 map, x25 pvc, x25 switch pvc, x25 xot pvc, x25 fr pvc, and x25 window-size.

Example

Set the modulus on the X.25 interface Serial0/0/0 to 128.

[3Com-Serial0/0/0] x25 modulo 128

x25 packet-size Syntax

x25 packet-size input-packet output-packet

undo packet-size

ViewInterface view

Parameter■ input-packet: Maximum input packet length in bytes, its value ranges from 16

to 1024 (including 16 and 1024) and must be the integer power of 2.By default, the maximum input packet length of X.25 interface is 128 bytes.

■ output-packet: Maximum output packet length in bytes, its value ranges from 16 to 1024 (including 16 and 1024) and must be the integer power of 2. By default, the maximum output packet length of X.25 interface is 128 bytes.

Description

Using the x25 packet-size command, you can set the maximum input and output packet lengths of X.25 interface. Using the undo x25 packet-size command, you can restore their default values.

Usually, the X.25 packet-switching network has a limitation of the transmission packet size, and the maximum size of a data packet sent by the DTE shall not exceed this size (otherwise it will trigger the reset of the VC).In this way, the DTE devices at sending end and receiving end are required to have datagram fragmentation and reassembly functions. The DTE device at sending end fragments the datagram with a length exceeding the maximum transmission packet length based on the maximum transmission packet length, and sets M bit in other fragments besides the final fragment. After receiving these fragments, the DTE at receiving end will reassemble them as a datagram to submit the upper-layer protocol based on the M bit. Please consult users' ISP about this maximum receiving packet length.


Normally, the maximum receiving packet length is equivalent to the maximum send packet. Unless users' ISP allows, please do not set these two parameters to different values.

For the related commands, see x25 call-facility, x25 pvc, x25 switch pvc, x25 xot pvc and x25 fr pvc.

Example

Set the maximum receiving packet length and maximum sending packet length on X.25 interface Serial0/0/0 to 256 bytes.

[3Com-Serial0/0/0] x25 packet-size 256 256

x25 pvc

Syntax x25 pvc pvc-number protocol-type protocol-address x121-address x.121-address [ option ]

undo x25 pvc pvc-number

View

Interface view

Parameter

■ pvc-number: PVC number, which must range from 1 to 4095 (including 1 and 4095), and must be in the PVC channel range.

■ protocol-type: Upper-layer protocol carried over the permanent virtual circuit, which may be IP or compressedtcp.

■ protocol-address: Network protocol address of the peer end of the PVC.

■ x.121-address: X.121 address of the peer end of this PVC.

■ option: Attribute of the PVC.

Description

Using the x25 pvc command, you can configure one PVC route encapsulated with datagram. Using the undo x25 pvc command, you can delete this route.

By default, no PVC encapsulated with datagram is created. When creating such a PVC, you do not set the relevant attributes for the PVC, its flow control parameters will be the same as that of the X.25 interface on which it resides (the flow control parameters on an X.25 interface can be set by the x25 packet-size and x25 window-size commands).

As one corresponding address mapping is impliedly established while establishing the PVC, it is unnecessary (or impossible) to establish an address mapping first before establishing PVCs.

Before establishing PVCs, users should first enable the PVC channel section. The section is between 1 and the latest unprohibited channel section PVC number minus 1 (including 1 and the lowest PVC number minus 1). Naturally, if the lowest


PVC number is 1, the PVC section will be disabled naturally. The following table shows some typical PVC sections.

Table 21 PVC channel section of some typical configurations

Detailed explanations of PVC options are follows:

■ broadcast: Forward broadcast packet to the peer PVC.

■ encapsulation-type: Encapsulation type, which may be nonstandard, ietf, multi-protocol and snap.

■ packet-size input-packet output-packet: Specifies the maximum receiving packet length and maximum sending packet length. The length is counted in byte, which must range from 16 to 4096 (including 16 and 4096), and must be the integer power of 2.

■ window-size input-window-size output-window-size: Specifies the receiving window and transmitting window sizes of the VC, which range between 1 and the number that is 1 less than the modulus of the X.25 interface where the address mapping exists (including 1 and modulus minus 1).

For the related commands, see display x25, x25 map.

Example

Configure the link layer protocol on the interface Serial0/0/0 to X.25, enable PVC channel section, and set two VCs.

[3Com] interface serial 0/0/0[3Com-Serial0/0/0] link-protocol x25[3Com-Serial0/0/0] x25 vc-range bi-channel 8,102 4[3Com-Serial0/0/0] x25 pvc 2 ip 202.38.168.1 x121-address 20112451 broadcast packet-size 512 512[3Com-Serial0/0/0] x25 pvc 6 ip 202.38.168.3 x121-address 20112453 broadcast window-size 5 5

x25 queue-length Syntax

x25 queue-length queue-length

undo x25 queue-length

View

Interface view

Incoming-only channel range Two-way channel range Outgoing-only channel range[0, 0] [1, 1024] [0, 0][0, 0] [10, 24] [0, 0][1, 10] [15, 30] [0, 0][5, 10] [15, 25] [30, 32][0, 0] [0, 0] [20, 45][0, 0] [0, 0] [0, 0]


Parameter

queue-length: Length of queue in packets, which ranges from 0 to 9999.By default, the data queue length on X.25 VC is 500.

Description

Using the x25 queue-length command, you can set the data queue length on X.25 VC. Using the undo x25 queue-length command, you can restore its default value.

When the data traffic is too heavy, you can use this command to extend the receiving queue and sending queue of the X.25 VC to avoid data loss that may affect transmission performance. It should be noted here that modifying this parameter would not affect the existing data queue of VC.

For the related command, see x25 packet-size

Example

Set the VC data queue length of the X.25 interface Serial0/0/0 to 75 datagrams.

[3Com-Serial0/0/0] x25 queue-length 75

x25 receive-threshold Syntax

x25 receive-threshold count

undo x25 receive-threshold

View

Interface view

Parameter

count: The number of data packets that can be received before previous acknowledgement, ranging from 0 to input window size. If it is set to 0 or the input window size, this function will be disabled. If it is set to 1, X.25 of the 3Com serial routers will send an acknowledgement for each correct packet received. By default, the number of data packets that can be received on X.25 before previous acknowledgement is 0.

Description

Using the x25 receive-threshold command, you can set the number of receivable maximum packets before X.25 sends the acknowledged packet. Using the undo x25 receive-threshold command, you can restore its default value.

After enabling this function, the 3Com series routers can send acknowledgement to the peer router upon the receipt of some correct packets, even if the input window is not yet full. If there is not much data traffic in users' application environment and users pay more attention to the response speed, they can appropriately adjust this parameter to meet the requirement.

For the related command, see x25 window.


Example

Specify that each VC on the X.25 interface Serial0/0/0 acknowledges each correctly received data packet.

[3Com-Serial0/0/0] x25 receive-threshold 1

x25 responsecalled-address

Syntax

x25 response called-address

undo x25 response called-address

View

Interface view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the x25 response called-address command, you can enable X.25 to carry the address information of the called DTE in sending call reception packet. Using the undo x25 response called-address command, you can disable the above function.


According to X.25, the call receiving packet of a call may or may not carry an address code group, depending on the specific network requirements. This command enables users to easily specify whether the call receiving packet of a call sent by X.25 of the 3Com series routers carries the called DTE address.

For the related commands, see x25 response calling-address, x25 ignore called-address, and x25 ignore calling-address.

Example

Specify that the call receiving packet of a call sent from the X.25 interface Serial0/0/0 carries the called DTE address.

[3Com-Serial0/0/0] x25 response called-address

x25 responsecalling-address

Syntax

x25 response calling-address

undo x25 response calling-address

View

Interface view


Parameter

None

Description

Using the x25 response calling-address command, you can enable X.25 to carry the address information of the calling DTE in sending call reception packet. Using the undo x25 response calling-address command, you can disable the above function.


According to X.25, the call receiving packet of a call may or may not carry an address code group, depending on the specific network requirements. This command enables users to easily specify whether the call receiving packet of a call sent by X.25 of the 3Com series routers carries the calling DTE address.

For the related commands, see x25 response called-address, x25 ignore called-address, and x25 ignore calling-address.

Example

Specify that the call receiving packet of a call sent from the X.25 interface Serial0/0/0 carries the calling DTE address.

[3Com-Serial0/0/0] x25 response calling-address

x25reverse-charge-accept

Syntax

x25 reverse-charge-accept

undo x25 reverse-charge-accept

View

Interface view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the x25 reverse-charge-accept command, you can enable this interface to accept the call with “reverse charging request”, the information added by some certain user facilities. Using the undo x25 reverse-charge-accept command, you can disable this above function.


This function does not affect any call without “reverse charging request”.

If you enable this function on an X.25 interface, all these calls that reach the interface will be accepted. If you enable this function for a certain address mapping by the option reverse-charge-accept in the command x25 map, only such


calls that reach the interface and map this address will be accepted, while other calls (carrying reverse charging request, and not mapping this address) will be cleared.


Example

Set the “accepting calls with reverse charging request” function on interface Serial0/0/0.

[3Com-Serial0/0/0] x25 reverse-charge-accept

x25 roa-list Syntax

x25 roa-list roa-name roa-id1 [ , id2, id3.... ]

undo x25 roa-list roa-name id1 [ , id2, id3.... ]

View

System view

Parameter

roa-name: Name of ROA.

id: ID specified for this ROA, and its value ranges from 0 to 9999. You can specify multiple IDs for the ROA.

Description

Using the x25 roa-list command, you can define ROA list. Using the undo x25 roa-list command, you can delete ROA list items.

By default, no ROA list is defined.

You can configure multiple (0 to 20) ROAs, and each ROA can be specified with multiple(1 to 10) IDs. After configuring ROA, you can cite it by its name in the commands x25 call-facility or x25 map.

For the related commands, see x25 call-facility and x25 map.

Example

Define two ROA lists, and cite them on the interfaces Serial 0/0/0 and Serial 1/0/0.

[3Com] x25 roa-list list1 11 23 45[3Com] x25 roa-list list2 345[3Com] interface serial 0/0/0[3Com-Serial0/0/0] x25 call-facility roa-size list1[3Com] interface serial 1/0/0[3Com-Serial0/0/0] x25 call-facility roa-list list2


x25 switch pvc Syntax

x25 switch pvc pvc-number1 interface serial number pvc pvc-number2 [ option ]

undo x25 switch pvc pvc-number1

View

Interface view

Parameter

pvc-number1: PVC number on the input interface, and its value ranges from 1 to 4095.

pvc-number2: PVC number on the output interface, and its value ranges from 1 to 4095.

number: Number of the input interface.

option: Attribute of PVC.

Description

Using the x25 switch pvc (packet switching) command, you can configure one PVC route. Using the undo x25 switch pvc command, you can delete one PVC route.

By default, no PVC route is defined.

Based on the X.25 switching configuration, you can use the 3Com series Routers as a simple X.25 switch. When PVC switching is configured, the link layer protocols on the input and output interfaces must be X.25. Moreover, the specified PVCs on the two interfaces have been presented and enabled. Note that PVC switching cannot be configured on the X.25 sub-interface.

Detailed explanations of PVC options are follows:

■ broadcast: Forwards broadcast packet to the peer PVC.

■ encapsulation-type: Encapsulation type, which may be nonstandard, ietf, multi-protocol and snap.


■ window-size input-window-size output-window-size: Specifies the input window and output window sizes of the VC, which range between 1 and the number that is 1 less that the modulus of the X.25 interface where the address mapping exists (including 1 and modulus minus 1).

For the related commands, see display x25 vc and x25 switching.


Example

Perform the packet switching between PVC1 on the Serial0/0/0 and PVC1 on the Serial1/0/0.

[3Com-Serial0/0/0] link-protocol x25 dce ietf[3Com-Serial0/0/0] interface serial1/0/0[3Com-Serial0/0/0] link-protocol x25 dce ietf[3Com-Serial1/0/0] x25 switch pvc 1 interface serial 0/0/0 pvc 1

x25 switch svchunt-group

Syntax

x25 switch svc x.121-address [ sub-dest destination-address ] [ sub-source source-address ] hunt-group hunt-group-name

undo x25 switch svc x.121-address [ sub-dest destination-address ] [ sub-source source-address ] hunt-group hunt-group-name

View

System view

Parameter

x.121-address: Destination address of X.121.This parameter consists of mode matching string, and its length ranges from 1 to 15 characters. For the specific description of mode matching, see the segment Description.

sub-dest destination-address: Substitution destination address.

sub-source source-address: Substitution source address.

hunt-group-name: Name of hunt group.

Description

Using the x25 switch svc hunt-group command, you can add an X.25 switching route whose forwarding address is a hunt group. Using the undo x25 switch svc hunt-group command, you can delete the specified X.25 switching route.

By default, no X.25 switching route is configured.

After the X.25 switching route whose forwarding address is a hunt group is configured, the relevant X.25 call request packet will be forwarded to different interfaces or XOT channels in the specified hunt group, so as to implement the load sharing under X.25 protocol.

Table 22 X.121 mode matching rules

Wildcard characters Matching rules Example* Matching zero or more previous characters fo*+ Matching zero or more previous characters fo+^ Matching the beginning of the entered characters ^hell$ Matching the end of the entered characters ar$\char Matching a single character specified by char. b\+


Table 23 Input rules of X.121 address mode matching string

For the related commands, see display x25 switch-table svc.

Example

Add an X.25 switching route, whose destination address is 8888 and forwarding address is the hunt group hg1, and substitute the destination address with 9999.

[3Com] x25 switch svc 111 sub-dest 9999 sub-source 8888 hunt-group hg1

x25 switch svc xot Syntax

x25 switch svc x.121-address [ sub-dest destination-address ] [ sub-source source-address ] xot ip-address1 [ ip-address2 ] … [ ip-address6 ] [ xot-option ]

undo x25 switch svc x.121-address [ sub-dest destination-address ] [ sub-source source-address ] [ xot ip-address1 [ ip-address2 ] … [ ip-address6 ] ]

View

System view

Parameter

x.121-address: Destination address of X.121. This parameter consists of mode matching string, and its length ranges from 1 to 15 characters. For the specific description of mode matching, see Table 10-4 and Table 10-5.

sub-dest destination-address: Substitution destination address.

sub-source source-address: Substitution source address.

ip-address1 - ip-address6: Destination IP address of XOT connection, up to 6 addresses can be configured.

xot-option: XOT channel parameter option. For the specific configuration, see XOT channel parameter option.

. Matching arbitrary single character l.st

.* Matching arbitrary zero or more characters. fo.*

.+ Matching arbitrary one or more characters. fo.+

Characters Input rules* Cannot be placed at the beginning of character string

Cannot be placed after the symbol ^

Cannot be placed before and after the symbols + and *.+ Cannot be placed at the beginning of character string

Cannot be placed after the symbol ^

Cannot be placed before and after the symbols + and *.\ Cannot be placed at the end of character string^ Cannot be placed before the symbols + and *.


Description

Using the x25 switch svc xot command, you can add an X.25 switching route whose forwarding address is XOT channel. Using the undo x25 switch svc xot command, you can delete the specified X.25 switching route.

By default, no X.25 switching route is configured.

After configuring the XOT switching command of X.25 SVC, a user can cross IP network from the local X.25 network to implement the interconnection with the remote X.25 network. If a user configures the keepalive attribute, the link detection for XOT will be supported.

Table 24 XOT channel parameter option

For the related commands, see x25 switch svc interface, displayx25 switch-table svc, and x25 switching.

Example

Switch SVC 1 to the destination address 10.1.1.1.

[3Com] x25 switch svc 1 xot 10.1.1.1

x25 switching Syntax

x25 switching

undo x25 switching

View

System view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the x25 switching command, you can enable the X.25 switching function. Using the undo x25 switching command, you can disable this function, which will not affect the established VC switching function.

By default, X.25 packet switching function is disabled.

X.25 packet switching is used to accept packets from an X.25 interface and send them to a certain interface based on the destination information contained in the packets. The Router can be used as a small-sized packet switch by the packet layer switching function.

Option Explanationtimer seconds Keepalive timer delay of XOT connection. The timer sends the keepa

detect the connection availability. Its value ranges from 1 to 3600.retry times Number of maximum retries of sending keepalive. If the number exc

connection will be disconnected. Its value ranges from 3 to 3600.source interface-type interface-name Interface name of initiating XOT connection


For the related commands, see x25 pvc, x25 switch pvc, x25 xot pvc, x25 fr pvc, x25 switch svc, display x25 vc, and display x25 switch-table svc.

Example

Enable X.25 switching function.

[3Com] x25 switching

x25 timer hold Syntax

x25 timer hold minutes

undo x25 timer hold

View

Interface view

Parameter

minutes: Value of delay time in minutes, and its value ranges from 0 to 1000. If the previous call failed at one destination, the X.25 won’t send calls to such a destination again within the time set by this command.

By default, the delay time is 0.

Description

Using the x25 timer hold command, you can set the delay to send calls to a destination with failed calls. Using the undo x25 timer hold command, you can restore its default value.

Frequently sending call requests to a wrong destination (which does not exist or is faulty) will deteriorate the operating efficiency of the 3Com series router. The use of this function can avoid this problem to a certain extent. If this parameter is set to 0, it is equal to disabling the function. In addition, this function is only effective to the calls originated from the local. That is to say, this parameter is meaningless when the X.25 operates in the switching mode.


Example

Set the parameter of the X.25 interface Serial0/0/0 to 5 minutes.

[3Com-Serial0/0/0] x25 timer hold 5

x25 timer idle Syntax

x25 timer idle minutes

undo x25 timer idle


View

Interface view

Parameter

minutes: Maximum idle time of SVC in minutes, and its value ranges from 0 to 255.By default, this value is 0.

Description

Using the x25 timer idle command, you can set the maximum idle time of the SVC on the interface. Using the undo x25 timer idle command, you can restore its default value.

When a SVC stays idle (no data transmission) for a period (the period length is decided by the parameter), the router will clear this SVC automatically. If this parameter is set to 0, this SVC will be reserved no matter how long it stays idle.

The configuration of this parameter will affect all the SVCs on this X.25 interface. Also users can set the maximum idle time for a SVC attached to this address mapping through the option in the command x25 map.

For PVC or the established SVC for X.25 switching, the command will be disabled.


Example

Set the maximum idle time of the SVC on the interface Serial 0/0/0 to 10 minutes.

[3Com-Serial0/0/0] x25 timer idle 10

x25 timer tx0 Syntax

x25 timer tx0 seconds

undo x25 timer tx0

View

Interface view

Parameter

seconds: Delay time for the X.25 restarting timer in seconds. It ranges 0 to 1000. By default, the delay on the X.25 DTE restarting timer is 180 seconds and that on the DCE timer is 60 seconds.

Description

Using the x25 timer tx0 command, you can set the restart/retransmission timer delay for DTE (or DCE). Using the undo x25 timer tx0 command, you can restore their default values.


According to X.25, a timer should be started when a DTE sends a restart request (or a DCE sends a restart indication). If no peer acknowledgement is received after this timer is timeout, the sending end will take some measures to guarantee the normal proceeding of the local procedure. This parameter specifies the delay time of this timer before the timeout.

For the related commands, see x25 timer tx1, x25 timer tx2, and x25 timer tx3.

Example

Set the restarting timer delay on the X.25 interface Serial0/0/0 to 120 seconds.

[3Com-Serial0/0/0] x25 timer tx0 120



undo x25 timer tx1

View

Interface view

Parameter

seconds: Delay time of calling request (indication) transmission timer in seconds, and its value ranges from 0 to 1000. By default, the delay time on a DTE call timer is 200 seconds; that on a DCE call sending timer is 180 seconds.

Description

Using the x25 timer tx1 command, you can set calling request (indication) transmission timer delay for DTE (or DCE). Using the undo x25 timer tx1 command, you can restore its default value.

According to X.25, a timer should be started when a DTE sends a call request (or a DCE sends a call indication). If no peer acknowledgement is received after this timer is timeout, the sending end will take some measures to guarantee the normal proceeding of the local procedure. This parameter specifies the delay time of this timer before the timeout.


Example

Set the timer delay on the X.25 interface Serial0/0/0 to 100 seconds.

[3Com-Serial0/0/0] x25 tx1 100



undo x25 timer tx2


View

Interface view

Parameter

seconds: Delay time of resetting request (indication) timer in seconds, and its value ranges from 0 to 1000. By default, the delay time on a DTE reset timer is 180 seconds; that on a DCE reset timer is 60 seconds.

Description

Using the x25 timer tx2 command, you can set resetting request (indication) transmission timer delay for DTE (or DCE). Using the undo x25 timer tx2 command, you can restore its default value.

According to X.25, a timer should be started when a DTE sends a reset request (or a DCE sends a reset indication). If no peer acknowledgement is received after this timer is timeout, the sending end will take some measures to guarantee the normal proceeding of the local procedure. This parameter specifies the delay time of this timer before the timeout.


Example

Set the reset timer delay on the X.25 interface Serial0/0/0 to 120 seconds.

[3Com-Serial0/0/0] x25 tx2 120



undo x25 timer tx3

View

Interface view

Parameter

seconds: Delay time of clearing request (indication) transmission timer in seconds, and its value ranges from 0 to 1000. By default, the delay time on a DTE clearing timer is 180 seconds; that on a DCE clearing timer is 60 seconds.

Description

Using the x25 timer tx3 command, you can set clearing request (indication) transmission timer delay for DTE (or DCE). Using the undo x25 timer tx3 command, you can restore its default value.

According to X.25, a timer should be started when a DTE sends a clear request (or a DCE sends a clear indication). If no peer acknowledgement is received after this timer is timeout, the sending end will take some measures to guarantee the


normal proceeding of the local procedure. This parameter specifies the delay time of this timer before the timeout.


Example

Set the delay time of clearing timer on the X.25 interface Serial0/0/0 to 100 seconds.

[3Com-Serial0/0/0] x25 timer tx3 100

x25 vc-per-map Syntax

x25 vc-per-map count

undo x25 vc-per-map

View

Interface view

Parameter

count: Maximum number of VCs, and its value ranges from 1 to 8.By default, its value is 1.

Description

Using the x25 vc-per-map command, you can set the maximum number of VCs for connections with the same destination device. Using the undo x25 vc-per-map command, you can restore their default values.

If the parameter is greater than 1, and the sending window and the sending queue of VC are filled full, the system will create a new VC to the same destination. If the new VC cannot be created, the datagram will be discarded.

For the related commands, see display interface and x25 map.

Example

Set the maximum value of VCs on the X.25 interface Serial 0/0/0 to 3.

[3Com-Serial0/0/0] x25 vc-per-map 3

x25 vc-range Syntax

x25 vc-range [ in-channel lic hic ] [ bi-channel ltc htc ] [ out-channel loc hoc ]

undo x25 vc-range

View

Interface view


Parameter

ltc htc: Lowest and highest two-way channels of X.25 VC, and its value ranges from 0 to 4095. If htc (highest two-way channel) is set to 0, ltc (lowest two-way channel) must also be set to 0, which indicates that the two-way channel section is disabled. By default, the htc of X.25 VC is 1024.

lic hic: Lowest and highest incoming-only channels of X.25 VC, and its value ranges from 0 to 4095.If hic (highest incoming-only channel) is set to 0, lic (lowest incoming-only channel) must also be set to 0, which indicates that the incoming-only channel section is disabled. By default, the hic in X.25 VC range is 0.

loc hoc: Lowest and highest outgoing-only channels of X.25 VC, and its value ranges from 0 to 4095. If hoc (highest outgoing-only channel) is set to 0, loc (lowest outgoing-only channel) must also be set to 0, which indicates that the outgoing-only channel section is disabled. By default, the hoc in X.25 VC range is 0.

Description

Using the x25 vc-range command, you can set highest and lowest values of X.25 VC range. Using the undo x25 vc-range command, you can restore their default values.

By default, VRP X.25 disables incoming-only channel range and outgoing-only channel, and only the two-way channel range (1-1024) is reserved for use. Please set the VC range correctly according to the requirements of the ISP.

Example

Configure the link layer protocol on the interface Serial 0/0/0 to X.25, enable incoming-only channel section and two-way channel section and disable outgoing –only channel section. After executing a series of commands, the three sections are [1, 7], [8, 1024] and [0, 0], respectively.

[3Com] interface serial 0/0/0[3Com-Serial0/0/0] link-protocol x25[3Com-Serial0/0/0] x25 vc-range in-channel 1 7 bi-channel 8 1024

x25 window-size Syntax

x25 window-size input-window-size output-window-size

undo x25 window-size

View

Interface view

Parameter

input-window-size: Size of input window. When X.25 window modulus is 8, its value ranges from 1 to 7. When X.25 window modulus is 128, its value ranges from 1 to 127.By default, its value is 2.


output-window-size: Size of output window. When X.25 window modulus is 8, its value ranges from 1 to 7. When X.25 window modulus is 128, its value ranges from 1 to 127. By default, its value is 2.

Description

Using the x25 window-size command, you can set the sizes of input and output windows on the interface X.25. Using the undo x25 window-size command, you can restore their default values.

This parameter in-packets determines the maximum number of correctly received packets before X.25 sends the acknowledgement information. As long as the bandwidth allows, the greater the window size, the higher the transmission efficiency.

Out-packets determines the maximum number of data packets sent by X.25 before it receives the correct acknowledgment information. As long as the bandwidth allows, the greater the window size, the higher the transmission efficiency.

Please consult users' ISP about the sending and receiving window sizes. Unless supported by the network, do not set these two parameters to different values.

For the related commands, see display interface, x25 map, x25 pvc, x25 switch pvc, x25 xot pvc, x25 fr pvc, and x25 receive-threshold.

Example

Set the receiving and sending window sizes on the X.25 interface Serial0/0/0 to 5.

[3Com-Serial0/0/0] x25 window-size 5 5

x25 x121-address Syntax

x25 x121-address x.121-address

undo x25 x121-address

View

Interface view

Parameter

x.121-address: X.121 address of an interface. It is formatted using the numerical string from 1 to 15 bytes.

Description

Using the x25 x121-address command, you can set the X.121 address of an X.25 interface. Using the undo x25 x121-address command, you can delete the address.

If the Router is accessed to X.25 public packet network, the ISP must assign a valid X.121 address to it. If two Routers are only directly connected back to back, a user


can randomly specify the valid X.121 address. If you only wants the Router to work in switching mode, the X.121 address needs not to be configured.

When you reconfigure an X.121 address for an X.25 interface, you need not delete the original X.121 address, because the new address will overwrite the old one. After an X.25 interface is re-configured, the original X.121 address will be deleted. So the X.121 address must be re-configured to work properly.

Note: For the format of the X.121 address and the dynamic conversion between IP address and X.121 address, please refer to ITU-T Recommendation X.121 and the relative RFC document.


Example

Configure the link layer protocol on the interface Serial 0/0/0 as X.25, and X.121 address as 20112451.

[3Com] interface serial 0/0/0[3Com-Serial0/0/0] link-protocol x25[3Com-Serial0/0/0] x25 x121-address 20112451

x25 xot pvc Syntax

x25 xot pvc pvc-number1 ip-address interface type number pvc pvc-number2 [ xot-option ] [ packet-size input-packet output-packet window-size input-window-size output-window-size ]

undo x25 pvc pvc-number1

View

Interface view

Parameter■ pvc-number1: Number of PVC on the local interface, and its value ranges from

1 to 4095.

■ pvc-number2: Number of PVC on the peer interface, and its value ranges from 1 to 4095.

■ ip-address: IP address of the peer destination for connection with XOT.

■ interface type number: Type and number of interface, and the interface type can only be Serial.

■ xot-option: Option of XOT channel parameter. For the specific configuration, see XOT channel parameter option.


■ window-size input-window-size output-window-size: Specifies the receiving window and sending window sizes of the VC, which range between 1 and the


number that is 1 less than the modulus of the X.25 interface where the address mapping exists (including 1 and modulus minus 1).

Description

Using the x25 xot pvc command, you can add a PVC route of XOT. Using the undo x25 pvc command, you can delete the specified PVC route of XOT.

By default, no PVC route is configured.

After configuring the XOT switching command of X.25 PVC, a user can cross IP network from the local X.25 network to implement the interconnection with the remote X.25 network. If a user configures the keepalive attribute, the link detection for XOT will be supported.

For the related commands, see display x25 vc and x25 switching.

Example

Connect PVC1 on the interface Serial0/0/0(10.1.1.1) of Router RTA with PVC2 on the interface Serial1/0/0(10.1.1.2) of Router RTB via XOT tunnel, and then perform packet switching.

Perform the configurations on the Router RTA.

[3Com-Serial0/0/0] ip address 10.1.1.1 255.255.255.0[3Com-Serial0/0/0] link-protocol x25 dce ietf[3Com-Serial0/0/0] x25 xot pvc 1 10.1.1.2 interface serial 1/0/0 pvc 2

Perform the configurations on the Router RTB.

[3Com-Serial1/0/0] ip address 10.1.1.2 255.255.255.0[3Com-Serial0/0/0] link-protocol x25 dce ietf[3Com-Serial1/0/0] x25 xot pvc 2 10.1.1.1 interface serial 0/0/0 pvc 1

x29 timerinviteclear-time

Syntax

x29 timer inviteclear-time seconds

View

System view

Parameter

seconds: Delay time in seconds, and its value ranges from 5 to 2147483. The delay of waiting for response after inviting PAD clear procedure, its default value is 5.

Description

Using the x29 timer inviteclear-time command, you can set the delay of waiting for response after inviting PAD clear procedure. After exceeding the time, the system will forcedly exit from the PAC connection and start x.25 clear procedure.


Example

Set the parameter of X.29 to 10 seconds.

[3Com] x29 timer inviteclear-time 10

5 NETWORK PROTOCOL

IP Address Configuration Commands

display ip interface Syntax

display ip interface { interface-type interface-number | interface-name }

View

Any view

Parameter


interface-number: Interface sequence number.

interface-name: Interface name.

Description

Using the display ip interface command, you can display the running condition of all the interfaces.

Example

3Com<3Com> display ip interface Ethernet6/0/0

Ethernet6/0/0 current state : UPLine protocol current state : UPInternet Address : 5.5.5.5/8Broadcast address : 0.0.0.0The Maximum Transmit Unit : 1500 bytesinput packets : 1231, bytes : 57557, multicasts : 1177output packets : 0, bytes : 0, multicasts : 0

The following information is displayed: the current physical link state of Ethernet 6/0/0 is UP, the protocol of link layer is UP, the IP address is 5.5.5.5, the broadcast address is 0.0.0.0, the maximum transmit unit is 1500 bytes and some other information about packets receiving/sending via this interface.

ip address Syntax

ip address ip-address net-mask [ sub ]

398 CHAPTER 5: NETWORK PROTOCOL

undo ip address [ ip-address net-mask [sub] ]

View

Interface view

Parameter

ip-address: Interface IP address, in dot delimitated decimal format.

net-mask: The mask of the corresponding subnet, in dot delimitated decimal format.

sub: To enable communications among different subnets, the configured slave IP address should be used.

Description

Using the ip address command, you can set an IP address for an interface. Using the undo ip address command, you can delete an IP address of the interface.

By default, no IP address is configured.

IP address is classified into five types, and users can select proper IP subnet according to actual conditions. Moreover, in the case that part of the host address is composed of 0 or the entire host address is composed of 1, the address has some special use and can not be used as ordinary IP address.

The mask identifies the network number in an IP address.

Under normal conditions, one interface only needs to be configured with one IP address. However, to enable one interface of a router to connect to several subnets, one interface can be configured with several IP addresses. Among them, one is master IP address, and others are slave IP addresses. Following is the relationship between the master and slave IP addresses:

If a master IP address is configured while there’s already an existing master IP address, the original one will be deleted and the newly configured will take effect.

The command undo ip address without parameters indicates to delete all the IP addresses of the interface. The command undo ip address ip-address net-mask indicates to delete the master IP address and undo ip address ip-address net-mask sub indicates to delete the slave address. All the slave addresses must be deleted before the master IP address can be deleted.

In addition, any two IP addresses configured for all interfaces on a router cannot be located in the same subnet.

For the related commands, see ip route-static, display ip interface, and display interface.

Example

Configure the interface Serial 0/0/0 with the master IP address as 129.102.0.1, the slave IP address is 202.38.160.1, and the subnet mask of both is 255.255.255.0.

IP Address Configuration Commands 399

[3Com-Serial1/0/0] ip address 129.102.0.1 255.255.255.0[3Com-Serial1/0/0] ip address 202.38.160.1 255.255.255.0 sub

ip addressppp-negotiate

Syntax

ip address ppp-negotiate

undo ip address ppp-negotiate

View

Interface view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the ip address ppp-negotiate command, you can allow IP address be assigned through negotiation at the interface. Using the undo ip address ppp-negotiate command, you can disable this function.

By default, no interface ip address negotiation is allowed.

As PPP supports IP address negotiation, only when the interface is encapsulated with the link-layer protocol PPP, can the IP address negotiation at this interface be configured.

Normally, it is not necessary to configure ip address negotiation. Only in some special circumstances such as accessing Internet through the ISP, the IP addresses of the interface that is connected with the ISP are allocated by the ISP through negotiation.

When IP address negotiation for the interface is configured, it is not necessary to configure the IP address manually for this interface.

Example

Display how to set IP address of interface Serial 0/0/0 to be allocated by peer through negotiation.

[3Com-Serial0/0/0] ip address ppp-negotiate

ip address unnumbered Syntax

ip address unnumbered { interface interface-type interface-number | interface-name }

undo ip address unnumbered

View

Interface view


Parameter

interface-type: Name of the unnumbered interface.

interface-number: Serial number of the unnumbered interface.

interface-name: Interface name of the unnumbered interface.

Description

Using the ip address unnumbered command, you can enable an interface to borrow the IP address of another interface. Using the undo ip address unnumbered command, you can disable this function on the interface.

By default, an interface does not borrow IP addresses from other interfaces.

This command is used to enable serial interfaces encapsulated with PPP, HDLC, Frame Relay, SLIP and Tunnel to borrow the IP addresses from the Ethernet interface or other interfaces.

Example

Display how to make the serial interface 0/0/0 encapsulated with PPP borrow the unnumbered IP address from Ethernet interface 0/0/0.

[3Com-Serial0/0/0] ip address unnumbered Ethernet 0/0/0

remote address Syntax

remote address { ip-address | pool [ pool-number ] }

undo remote address

View

Interface view

Parameter

ip-address: IP address.

pool-number: Address pool number, i.e., assigning one address in the pool-number to the peer interface. It is a number ranging 0 to 99 with the default value as 0.

Description

Using the remote address command, you can configure to assign IP address for the peer interface. Using the undo remote address command, you can disable to assign IP address for the peer interface.

By default, the interface does not assign address for the peer interface.

When an interface is encapsulated with PPP, but not configured with IP address, perform the following task to configure the negotiable attribute of IP address for this interface (configuring the ip address ppp-negotiate command on local router

ARP Configuration Commands 401

while configuring the remote address command on the peer router), so that the local interface can accept the IP address originated from PPP negotiation. This IP address is assigned by the opposite end. This configuration is mainly used to obtain IP address assigned by ISP when accessing Internet via ISP.

For the related command, see ip address ppp-negotiate.

Example

The serial interface encapsulated with PPP assigns an IP address 10.0.0.1 for the peer.

[3Com-Serial0/0/0] remote address 10.0.0.1

ARP Configuration Commands

arp static Syntax

arp static ip-address ethernet-address [ vpn-instance-name ]

undo arp ip-address [ vpn-instance-name ]

View

System view

Parameter

ip-address: IP addresses of the ARP mapping entries in dot deliminated decimal format.

ethernet-address: Ethernet MAC address of ARP mapping entries. Its format is H-H-H, in which H is a hexadecimal number with 1 to 4 bits.

vpn-instance-name: The name of VPN instance.

Description

Using the arp static command, you can configure ARP mapping table. And using the undo arp command, you can delete mapping items corresponding to some addresses in the ARP mapping table.

By default, the mapping table of the system ARP is empty and the address mapping can be obtained through dynamic ARP.

Normally, ARP mapping table is maintained by dynamic ARP, only in special circumstances is manual configuration needed. Besides, ARP mapping table is used for LAN only, WAN address resolution is accomplished in a different way, for instance the inverse address resolution of frame relay.

For the related commands, see arp static and display arp.


Example

Configure the Ethernet MAC address e0-fc01-0 corresponding to the IP address 129.102.0.1.

[3Com] arp static 129.102.0.1 e0-fc01-0

Configure the Ethernet MAC address aa-fcc-12 corresponding to the IP address 11.0.0.1.

[3Com] arp static 11.0.0.1 aa-fcc-12

debugging arp packet Syntax

debugging arp packet

undo debugging arp packet

View

User view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the debugging arp packet command, you can enable ARP packets debugging; and using the undo debugging arp packet command, you can disable the function.

Example

Enable ARP packets debugging.

<3Com> debugging arp packet

display arp Syntax

display arp [ static | dynamic | all ]

View

Any view

Parameter■ static: Indicates to show the static ARP entries.

■ dynamic: Indicates to show the dynamic ARP entries.

■ all: Indicates to show all ARP entries.

Description

Using the display arp command, you can view the ARP mapping table.

ARP Configuration Commands 403

By default, all the ARP entries of the RSU are displayed.

For the related commands, see arp static and reset arp.

Example

Display all static ARP entries.

<3Com> display arp staticIP Address MAC AddressType Vrf NameInterface129.102.0.100e0-fc01-0000S10.110.28.4400e0-fc07-5b2bIEth0/0

reset arp Syntax

reset arp [ all | dynamic | static | interface { interface-type interface-number | interface-name } ]

View

User view

Parameter■ static: Indicates to clear the static ARP entries.

■ dynamic: Indicates to clear the dynamic ARP entries.

■ all: Indicates to clear all ARP entries.

■ interface: Indicates the selected interface.

■ interface-type: Interface type.

■ interface-number: Interface sequence number.

■ interface-name: Interface name.

Description

Using the reset arp command, you can clear the ARP entries in the ARP mapping table.

By default, if slot-number is not specified, the operation will be performed upon RSU board.

When operation is performed to the interface with specified interface, the interface type can only be Ethernet, GE or virtual Ethernet and only the dynamic entries can be deleted on the interface.

For the related commands, see arp static and display arp.

Example

The following example shows how to delete the dynamic entries in the ARP mapping table on Ethernet 0/0/0.

<3Com> reset arp interface Ethernet 0/0/0


Static Domain Name Resolution

display ip host Syntax

display ip host

View

Any view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the display ip host command, you can display all the host names and their corresponding IP addresses.

Example

Display all the host names and their corresponding IP addresses.

<3Com> display ip host Host Age Flags Address(es) eth 0 static 6.1.1.1 3Com 0 static 1.1.1.1

ip host Syntax

ip host hostname ip-address

undo ip host hostname [ ip-address ]

View

System view

Parameter■ hostname: The name of a host, a character string with its length from 1 to 20.

■ ip-address: The IP address corresponding to a host name, whose format can be A.B.C.D

Description

Using the ip host command, you can configure the IP address corresponding to a host name; while using the undo ip host command, you can remove the IP address corresponding to a host name.

By default, the static domain name table is empty, i.e. there’s no host name and IP address pair.

DHCP Public Configuration Commands 405

Example

Configure the IP address corresponding to the host name router1 as 10.110.0.1.

[3Com] ip host router1 10.110.0.1

Configure the IP address corresponding to the host name router2 as 10.110.0.2.


Configure to assign the IP address 10.110.0.3 to the host name router3.


Remove the IP address 10.110.0.2 corresponding to the host name router2.

[3Com] undo ip host router2 10.110.0.2

DHCP Public Configuration Commands

dhcp enable Syntax

dhcp enableundo dhcp enable

View

System view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the dhcp enable command, you can enable DHCP services. Using the undo dhcp enable command, you can disable DHCP services.

By default, DHCP services are enabled.

Before you can configure DHCP, you must enable DHCP services. This configuration is essential to both DHCP server and DHCP relay.

Example

Enable DHCP services on current router.

[3Com] dhcp enable

dhcp select (in InterfaceView)

Syntax

dhcp select { global | interface | relay }


undo dhcp select

View

Interface view

Parameter

■ global: The address DHCP client gets is the one selected by the local DHCP server from a global address pool upon the receipt of the DHCP request from the client.

■ interface: The address DHCP client gets is the one selected by the local DHCP server from an interface address pool upon the receipt of the DHCP request from the client.

■ relay: The address DHCP client gets is allocated by an external DHCP server.

Description

Using the dhcp select command in interface view, you can select a method for disposing the DHCP packets destined to the local device. Using the undo dhcp select command in interface view, you can restore the default setting.

By default, DHCP packets destined to the local device will be sent to the internal server and the clients sending them will be allocated with addresses selected from a global address pool (in global approach).

For the related command, see dhcp select (in system view).

Example

Allocate addresses selected from an interface address pool on the internal DHCP server to the clients sending DHCP packets destined to the local device.

[3Com-Ethernet1/0/0] dhcp select interface

dhcp select (in SystemView)

Syntax

dhcp select { global | interface | relay } { interface ethernet-subinterface-range | all }

undo dhcp select { interface ethernet-subinterface-range | all }

View

System view

Parameter

■ global: The address DHCP client gets is the one selected by the local DHCP server from a global address pool upon the receipt of the DHCP request from the client.

■ interface: The address DHCP client gets is the one selected by the local DHCP server from an interface address pool upon the receipt of the DHCP request from the client.

■ relay: The address DHCP client gets is allocated by an external DHCP server.

DHCP Public Configuration Commands 407

■ ethernet-subinterface-range: Includes all the subinterfaces between two subinterfaces (including these two subinterfaces) by inserting the keyword “to” between these two interfaces.

■ all: All the interfaces.

Description

Using the dhcp select command in system view, you can select a method for multiple interfaces in a specified range to dispose the DHCP packets destined to the local device. Using the undo dhcp select command in system view, you can restore the default setting.

By default, DHCP packets destined to the local device will be sent to the internal server and the clients sending them will be allocated with addresses selected from a global address pool (in global approach).

For the related command, see dhcp select (in interface view).

Example

Configure the interfaces in the range of Ethernet2/0/0.1 to Ethernet2/0/0.5 to allocate addresses selected from an interface address pool maintained by the internal server to the clients sending DHCP packets destined to the local device.

[3Com] dhcp select interface interface ethernet 2/0/0.1 to ethernet 2/0/0.5

dhcp server detect Syntax

dhcp server detect

undo dhcp server detect

View

Interface view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the dhcp server detect command, you can enable pseudo-DHCP-server detection. Using the undo dhcp server detect command, you can disable the function.

By default, pseudo-DHCP-server detection is disabled.

Example

Enable pseudo DHCP server detection on the interface Ethernet 2/0/0.

[3Com-Ethernet2/0/0] dhcp server detect


DHCP Server Configuration Commands

debugging dhcp server Syntax

debugging dhcp server { all | error | events | packets }

undo debugging dhcp server { all | error | events | packets }

View

User view

Parameter

■ all: All debugging functions of DHCP server.

■ error: Error debugging on the DHCP server, specifically, the debugging on the errors that occur when the DHCP server processes DHCP packets, allocates addresses, etc.

■ events: Event debugging on the DHCP server, specifically, the debugging on the events such as address allocation, ping detection timeout, etc.

■ packet: DHCP packet debugging, specifically, the debugging on the packets that the DHCP server has received and sent and on the ping packets sent for the purpose of detection and the received response packets.

Description

Using the debugging dhcp server command, you can enable debugging on the DHCP server. Using the undo debugging dhcp server command, you can disable debugging.

By default, debugging is disabled on the DHCP server.

Example

Enable event debugging on the DHCP server.

<3Com> debugging dhcp server events*0.62496500-DHCP SER-8-DHCPS_DEBUG_COMMON:DhcpServer: ICMP Timeout*0.62496583-DHCP SER-8-DHCPS_DEBUG_COMMON:DhcpServer: Still Need to ICMP detect for 1 times*0.62497000-DHCP SER-8-DHCPS_DEBUG_COMMON:DhcpServer: ICMP Timeout*0.62497083-DHCP SER-8-DHCPS_DEBUG_COMMON:DhcpServer: All Try finished*0.62497166-DHCP SER-8-DHCPS_DEBUG_COMMON:DhcpServer: Ack User's Lease

Enable packet debugging on the DHCP server.

<3Com> debugging dhcp server packet*0.62080906-DHCP SER-8-DHCPS_DEBUG_COMMON:DhcpServer: receive DHCPRELEASE from 00.05.5D.85.D5.45.*0.62081016-DHCP SER-8-DHCPS_DEBUG_COMMON:DhcpServer: Release Lease for MAC 00.05.5D.85.D5.45. IP is 5.5.5.2*0.62082240-DHCP SER-8-DHCPS_DEBUG_COMMON:

DHCP Server Configuration Commands 409

DhcpServer: receive DHCPDISCOVER from 00.05.5D.85.D5.45.*0.62082350-DHCP SER-8-DHCPS_DEBUG_COMMON:DhcpServer: Sending ICMP ECHO to Target IP: 5.5.5.2*0.62082733-DHCP SER-8-DHCPS_DEBUG_COMMON:DhcpServer: Sending ICMP ECHO to Target IP: 5.5.5.2*0.62083233-DHCP SER-8-DHCPS_DEBUG_COMMON:DhcpServer: Send DHCPOFFER to MAC=> 00.05.5D.85.D5.45. Offer IP=> 5.5.5.2*0.62083366-DHCP SER-8-DHCPS_DEBUG_COMMON:DhcpServer: receive DHCPREQUEST from 00.05.5D.85.D5.45.*0.62083483-DHCP SER-8-DHCPS_DEBUG_COMMON:DhcpServer: Send DHCPACK to MAC=> 00.05.5D.85.D5.45. Offer IP=> 5.5.5.2

Enable error debugging on the DHCP server.

<3Com> debugging dhcp server error*0.63269475-DHCP SER-8-DHCPS_DEBUG_COMMON:DhcpServer: Icmp Packet is not EHHOREPLY!

dhcp server dns-list (inInterface View)

Syntax

dhcp server dns-list ip-address [ ip-address ]

undo dhcp server dns-list { ip-address | all }

View

Interface view

Parameter

■ ip-address: IP address of DNS. You can configure up to eight IP addresses separated by spaces in a command.

Description

Using the dhcp server dns-list command in interface view, you can configure DNS IP addresses for an interface configured with a DHCP address pool. Using the undo dns-list command in interface view, you can delete the configuration.

By default, no DNS address is configured.

By far, only up to eight DNS server addresses can be set in each DHCP address pool.

For the related commands, see dhcp server dns-list (in system view), dhcp server ip-pool, and dns-list.

Example

Configure the DNS server address 1.1.1.254 for the DHCP address pool of the interface Ethernet1/0/0.[3Com] interface ethernet 1/0/0[3Com-Ethernet 1/0/0] dhcp server dns-list 1.1.1.254

dhcp server dns-list (inSystem View)

Syntax

dhcp server dns-list ip-address [ ip-address ] { interface ethernet-subinterface-range | all }


undo dhcp server dns-list { ip-address | all } { interface ethernet-subinterface-range | all }

View

System view

Parameter

■ ip-address: IP address of DNS. You can configure up to eight IP addresses separated by spaces in a command.

■ ethernet-subinterface-range: Includes any the subinterfaces whose interface number lies between the two given subinterface number (including these two subinterfaces) by inserting the keyword “to” between these two interface numbers.

■ all: In the undo form of the command, the first “all” refers to all the Gateway (GW) addresses and the second, all the interfaces.

Description

Using the dhcp server dns-list command in system view, you can assign DNS IP addresses to the DHCP address pool of multiple interfaces in a specified range. Using the undo dns-list command in system view, you can delete the configuration.

By default, no DNS address is configured.

Only up to eight DNS server addresses, by far, can be set in each DHCP address pool.

For the related commands, see dhcp server dns-list (in interface view), dhcp server ip-pool, and dns-list.

Example

Assign the DNS server address 1.1.1.254 to the DHCP address pool of the interfaces in the range of Ethernet1/0/0.0 to Ethernet2/0/0.5.

[3Com] dhcp server dns-list 1.1.1.254 interface ethernet 2/0/0.0 to ethernet 2/0/0.5

dhcp serverdomain-name (in

Interface View)

Syntax

dhcp server domain-name domain-name

undo dhcp server domain-name domain-name

View

Interface view

Parameter

■ domain-name: Domain name that the DHCP server allocates to clients, which is a string comprising at least three characters and at most 50 characters.

Description

Using the dhcp server domain-name command in interface view, you can configure the domain name that the DHCP address pool of the current interface


allocates to clients. Using the undo dhcp server domain-name command in interface view, you can delete the configured domain name.

By default, no domain name has been allocated to DHCP clients and domain name is null.

For the related commands, see dhcp server ip-pool, dhcp server domain-name (in system view), and domain-name.

Example

Configure the domain name eth1_0_0.com.cn in an interface DHCP address pool.

[3Com] interface ethernet 1/0/0[3Com-Ethernet 1/0/0] dhcp server domain-name eth1_0_0.com.cn

dhcp serverdomain-name (in System

View)

Syntax

dhcp server domain-name domain-name { interface ethernet-subinterface-range | all }

undo dhcp server domain-name domain-name { interface ethernet-subinterface-range | all }

View

System view

Parameter

■ domain-name: Domain name that the DHCP server allocates to clients, which is a string comprising 3 to 50 characters.

■ ethernet-subinterface-range: Includes any the subinterfaces whose interface number lies between two subinterface numbers (including these two subinterfaces) by inserting the keyword “to” between these two interface numbers.


Description

Using the dhcp server domain-name command in system view, you can configure the domain name that the DHCP address pool of the interfaces in a specified range allocates to DHCP clients. Using the undo dhcp server domain-name command in system view, you can delete the configured domain name.

By default, no domain name is configured for clients.

After configuring this command, you cannot view the configuration of this command by executing the display current-configuration command. By executing the dhcp server domain-name command respectively on the specified interfaces, you can fulfill the batch configurations of the command.

For the related command, see dhcp server ip-pool.

Example

Configure eth2_1_5.com.cn as the domain name in the interface DHCP address pool of the interfaces Ethernet2/0/0.1 through Ethernet2/0/0.5.

[3Com] dhcp server domain-name eth1_0_0.com.cn interface ethernet 2/0/0.1 to ethernet 2/0/0.5


dhcp server expired (inInterface View)

Syntax

dhcp server expired { day day [ hour hour [ minute minute ] ] | unlimited }

undo dhcp server expired

View

Interface view

Parameter

■ day day: Number of days in the range of 0 to 365.

■ hour hour: Number of hours in the range of 0 to 23.

■ minute minute: Number of hours in the range of 0 to 59.

■ unlimited: The valid period is unlimited.

Description

Using the dhcp server expired command in interface view, you can configure a valid period allowed for leasing IP addresses in the current interface DHCP address pool. Using the undo dhcp server expired command in interface view, you can restore the default setting.

By default, the leasing valid period is one day.

For the related commands, see dhcp server ip-pool, dhcp server expired (in system view), and expired.

Example

Set the valid period for leasing IP addresses in the interface address pool maintained by Ethernet1/0/0 to unlimited.

[3Com] interface ethernet 1/0/0[3Com-Ethernet 1/0/0] dhcp server expired unlimited

dhcp server expired (inSystem View)

Syntax

dhcp server expired { day day [ hour hour [ minute minute ] ] | unlimited } { interface ethernet-subinterface-range | all }

undo dhcp server expired { interface ethernet-subinterface-range | all }

View

System view

Parameter








Description

Using the dhcp server expired command in system view, you can configure a valid period allowed for leasing IP addresses in the interface DHCP address pool of the interfaces in a specified range. Using the undo dhcp server expired command in system view, you can restore the default setting.


After configuring this command, you cannot view the configuration by executing the display current-configuration command. By calling the dhcp server expired command respectively on the specified interfaces, you can fulfill the batch configurations of the command.

For the related commands, see dhcp server ip-pool, dhcp server expired (in interface view), and expired.

Example

Set the valid period for leasing IP addresses in the interface address pool of the interfaces in the range of Ethernet2/0/0.1 to Ethernet2/0/0.5 to unlimited.

[3Com] dhcp server expired unlimited interface ethernet 2/0/0.1 to ethernet 2/0/0.5

dhcp server forbidden-ip Syntax

dhcp server forbidden-ip low-ip-address [ high-ip-address ]

undo dhcp server forbidden-ip low-ip-address [ high-ip-address ]

View

System view

Parameter

■ low-ip-address: The low IP address that does not participate in the auto-allocation.

■ high-ip-address: The high IP address that does not participate in the auto-allocation. It must belong to the same segment to which the low-ip-address belongs as well and must not be smaller than the low-ip-address. If this parameter is not specified, there will be only one IP address, i.e., low-ip-address.

Description

Using the dhcp server forbidden-ip command, you can exclude IP addresses in a specified range to participate in the auto-allocation. Using the undo dhcp server forbidden-ip command, you can delete the configuration.

By default, all the IP addresses in address pools participate in the auto-allocation.

You can configure multiple IP address ranges that do not participate in the auto-allocation. Before using the undo dhcp server forbidden-ip command to delete the setting, you must make sure that you are using exactly the same parameters that you have configured. In other words, you cannot delete only some addresses from the configured range.

For the related commands, see dhcp server ip-pool, network, and static-bind ip-address.


Example

Reserve the IP addresses in the range of 10.110.1.1 to 10.110.1.63 so that these addresses will not participate in the address auto-allocation.

[3Com] dhcp server forbidden-ip 10.110.1.1 10.110.1.63

3.2.9 dhcp server ip-pool

Syntax

dhcp server ip-pool pool-name

undo dhcp server ip-pool pool-name

View

System view

Parameter

pool-name: Address pool name uniquely identifying an address pool, which is a string comprising at least one character and 35 characters at most.

Description

Using the dhcp server ip-pool command, you can create a DHCP address pool and access the DHCP address pool view. Using the undo dhcp server ip-pool command, you can delete the specified address pool.

By default, no DHCP address pool is created.

If the specified address pool has existed, executing the dhcp server ip-pool command will directly access the DHCP address pool view. If the address pool does not exist, the DHCP server will create it before accessing the DHCP address pool view. Each DHCP server is allowed to configure multiple address pools but no more than 50.

For the related commands, see dhcp enable, expired, and network.

Example

Create DHCP address pool 0.

[3Com] dhcp server ip-pool 0[3Com-dhcp-0]

dhcp server nbns-list (inInterface View)

Syntax

dhcp server nbns-list ip-address [ ip-address ]

undo dhcp server nbns-list { ip-address | all }

View

Interface view

Parameter

■ ip-address: IP address of NetBIOS server. You can configure up to eight IP addresses separated by spaces in a command.

■ all: All the NetBIOS server IP addresses.


Description

Using the dhcp server nbns-list command in interface view, you can configure NetBIOS server addresses in the DHCP address pool of current interface. Using the undo dns-list command in interface view, you can delete the configuration.

By default, no NetBIOS address is configured.

By far, only up to eight NetBIOS addresses can be configured in each DHCP address pool.

For the related commands, see dhcp server ip-pool, dhcp server nbns-list (in system view), nbns-list, and netbios-type.

Example

In the DHCP address pool of Ethernet1/0/0, allocate the NetBIOS server at 10.12.1.99 to the clients.

[3Com] interface ethernet 1/0/0[3Com-Ethernet 1/0/0] dhcp server nbns-list 10.12.1.99

dhcp server nbns-list (inSystem View)

Syntax

dhcp server nbns-list ip-address [ ip-address ] { interface ethernet-subinterface-range | all }

undo dhcp server nbns-list { ip-address | all } { interface ethernet-subinterface-range | all }

View

System view

Parameter


■ all: In the undo form of the command, the first “all” refers to all the NetBIOS server addresses and the second, all the interfaces.


Description

Using the dhcp server nbns-list command in system view, you can configure NetBIOS server addresses for the clients that get ip address from the DHCP address pool of the interfaces in a specified range. Using the undo dhcp server nbns-list command in system view, you can delete the configuration.



After configuring this command, you cannot view the configuration by executing the display current-configuration command. By calling the dhcp server nbns-list command respectively on the specified interfaces, you can fulfill the batch configurations of the command.


For the related commands, see dhcp server ip-pool, dhcp server nbns-list (in interface view), nbns-list, and netbios-type.

Example

In the DHCP address pool of interfaces in the range of Ethernet2/0/0.1 to Ethernet2/0/0.5, assign the NetBIOS server at 10.12.1.99 to the clients.

[3Com] dhcp server nbns-list 10.12.1.99 interface ethernet 2/0/0.1 to ethernet 2/0/0.5

dhcp server netbios-type(in Interface View)

Syntax

dhcp server netbios-type { b-node | h-node | m-node | p-node }

undo dhcp server netbios-type

View

Interface view

Parameter

■ b-node: Broadcast mode, i.e., hostname-IP maps are obtained by means of broadcast.

■ p-node: Peer-to-peer mode, i.e., maps are obtained by means of communicating with the NetBIOS server.

■ m-node: Mixed (m) mode, i.e., the mode of type b nodes running “peer-to-peer” communications mechanism.

■ h-node: Hybrid (h) mode, i.e., the mode of type p nodes possessing some of the broadcast features.

DescriptionUsing the dhcp server netbios-type command in interface view, you can configure the NetBIOS node type of the DHCP clients of the current interface. Using the undo dhcp server netbios-type command in interface view, you can restore the default setting.

By default, clients adopt type h node (h-node).

Hostname-IP maps are required in the event that DHCP clients use the NetBIOS protocol on a WAN.

For the related commands, see dhcp server ip-pool, netbios-type, dhcp server netbios-type (in system view), and nbns-list.

Example

In the DHCP address pool of Ethernet1/0/0, set the NetBIOS node type of its clients to p-node.

[3Com] interface ethernet 1/0/0[3Com-Ethernet 1/0/0] dhcp server netbios-type p-node

dhcp server netbios-type(in System View)

Syntax

dhcp server netbios-type { b-node | h-node | m-node | p-node } { interface ethernet-subinterface-range | all }

undo dhcp server netbios-type { interface ethernet-subinterface-range | all }


View

System view

Parameter







Description

Using the dhcp server netbios-type command in system view, you can configure a NetBIOS node type for the DHCP clients of the interfaces in a specified range. Using the undo dhcp server netbios-type command in system view, you can restore the default setting.


Hostname-IP maps are required in the event that DHCP clients use the NetBIOS protocol on a WAN.

After configuring this command, you cannot view the configuration by executing the display current-configuration command. By calling dhcp server netbios-type respectively on the specified interfaces, you can fulfill the batch configurations of the command.

For the related commands, see dhcp server ip-pool, netbios-type, dhcp server netbios-type, and nbns-list.

Example

In the DHCP address pool of interfaces in the range of Ethernet2/0/0.1 to Ethernet2/0/0.5, set the NetBIOS node type of clients to p-node.

[3Com] dhcp server netbios-type p-node interface ethernet 2/0/0.1 to ethernet 2/0/0.5

dhcp server option (inInterface View)

Syntax

dhcp server option code { ascii ascii-string | hex hex-string | ip-address ip-address }

undo dhcp server option code

View

Interface view

Parameter

■ code: Option value that needs to be assigned by the user.


■ ascii ascii-string: ASCII string.

■ hex hex-string: 2-digit or 4-digit hexadecimal string, such as hh or hhhh.

■ ip-address ip-address: IP address.

Description

Using the dhcp server option command in interface view, you can configure a DHCP self-defined option for the DHCP address pool of the current interface. Using the undo dhcp server option command in interface view, you can delete the configuration.

For the related commands, see option and dhcp server option (in system view).

Example

Define the hexadecimal strings of the option code 100 to 0x11 and 0x22 for the DHCP address pool of the interface Ethernet1/0/0.

[3Com] interface ethernet 1/0/0[3Com-Ethernet 1/0/0] dhcp server option 100 hex 11 22

dhcp server option (inSystem View)

Syntax

dhcp server option code { ascii ascii-string | hex hex-string | ip-address ip-address } { interface ethernet-subinterface-range | all }

undo dhcp server option code { interface ethernet-subinterface-range | all }

View

System view

Parameter







Description

Using the dhcp server option command in system view, you can configure a DHCP self-defined option for the interfaces in a specified range. Using the undo dhcp server option command in system view, you can delete the configuration.

After configuring this command, you cannot view the configuration by executing the display current-configuration command. By calling dhcp server option respectively on the specified interfaces, you can fulfill the batch configurations of the command.

For the related commands, see dhcp server option (in interface view) and option.


Example

Define the hexadecimal strings of the option code 100 to 0x11 and 0x22 for the interface DHCP address pool of the interfaces in the range of Ethernet2/0/0.1 to Ethernet2/0/0.5.

[3Com] dhcp server option 100 hex 11 22 interface ethernet 2/0/0.1 to ethernet 2/0/0.5

dhcp server ping Syntax

dhcp server ping { packets number | timeout milliseconds }

undo dhcp server ping { packets | timeout }

View

System view

Parameter

■ packets number: The maximum number of ping packets allowed to be sent, which is in the range of 0 to 10 and defaults to 2, with 0 indicating that no ping operation will be performed.

■ timeout milliseconds: The longest time period that the DHCP server waits for the response to each ping packet, which is in the range of 0 to 10000 milliseconds and defaults to 500 milliseconds.

Description

Using the dhcp server ping command, you can configure the maximum number of ping packets that the DHCP server is allowed to send and the longest time period that the DHCP server should wait for the response to each ping packet. Using the undo dhcp server ping command, you can restore the default settings.

To prevent the address collision resulted from repeated IP address allocation, DHCP server sends ping packets to detect that an address is available.

Example

Allow the DHCP server to send up to ten ping packets and wait 500 milliseconds (the default setting) for the response to each packet.

[3Com] dhcp server ping packets 10

3.2.17 dhcp server static-bind

Syntax

dhcp server static-bind ip-address ip-address mac-address mac-address

undo dhcp server static-bind { ip-address ip-address | mac-address mac-address }

View

Interface view

Parameter

■ ip-address: Statically bound IP address. It must be a valid IP address selected from the current interface address pool.

■ mac-address: Statically bound MAC address.


Description

Using the dhcp server static-bind command, you can configure a static address binding in the DHCP address pool of the current interface. Using the undo dhcp server static-bind command, you can delete the configuration.

By default, static address binding is not configured in any interface address pool.

In all the static address binding operations performed on an interface, the IP addresses and the MAC addresses must be unique.

Example

Statically bind the MAC address 0000-e03f-0305 with the IP address 10.1.1.1.

[3Com-Ethernet1/0/0] dhcp server static-bind 10.1.1.1 0000-e03f-0305

display dhcp serverconflict

Syntax

display dhcp server conflict [ ip ip-address | all ]

View

Any view

Parameter

■ ip-address: A specified IP address.

■ all: All the IP addresses.

Description

Using the display dhcp server conflict command, you can view the DHCP address conflict statistics, including the information in conflicted IP address, conflict detection type, conflict time, etc.

If no optional parameter has been specified, the information displayed will depend on the current view:

■ In Ethernet interface view, the information displayed is concerned with the address pool of the current interface.

■ In any other views, the information displayed is concerned with all the address pools.

For the related command, see reset dhcp server conflict.

Example

View the DHCP address conflict statistics.

<3Com> display dhcp server conflict Address Discover Time 10.110.1.2 Jan 11 2003 11:57: 7 PMTable 1 Description of the information displayed by executing display dhcp server conflict

Major item DescriptionAddress The conflicted IP addressDiscover Time Time when the conflict is discovered


display dhcp serverexpired

Syntax

display dhcp server expired [ ip ip-address | pool [ pool-name ] | interface [ interface-name ] all ]

View

Any view

Parameter


■ pool-name: Name of a global address pool. All the global address pools will apply if no address pool has been specified.

■ interface-name: Interface address pool. All the interface address pools will apply if no interface has been specified.

■ all: All the IP addresses.

Description

Using the display dhcp server expired command, you can view the expired address leases in a DHCP address pool. In certain conditions, the addresses of the expired leases will be allocated to other DHCP clients.

Example

View the expired leases in DHCP address pools.

<3Com> display dhcp server expired allGlobal pool: IP address Hardware address Lease expiration TypeInterface pool: IP address Hardware address Lease expiration Type

Table 2 Description of the information displayed by executing display dhcp server expired

display dhcp serverfree-ip

Syntax

display dhcp server free-ip

View

Any view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the display dhcp server free-ip command, you can view the ranges of available addresses in DHCP address pools, i.e., information of the IP addresses that have not been allocated yet.

Major item DescriptionGlobal pool: Expired address leases in global address pools. Interface pool: Expired address leases in interface address pools. IP address The bound IP address Hardware address The bound MAC address Lease expiration The lease expiration timeType Address binding type


Example

View the ranges of the available addresses in DHCP address pools.

<3Com> display dhcp server free-ipIP Range from 1.0.0.0 to 2.2.2.1IP Range from 2.2.2.3 to 2.255.255.255IP Range from 4.0.0.0 to 4.255.255.255IP Range from 5.5.5.0 to 5.5.5.0IP Range from 5.5.5.2 to 5.5.5.255

display dhcp serverip-in-use

Syntax

display dhcp server ip-in-use [ ip ip-address | pool [ pool-name ] | interface [ interface-name ] ]

View

Any view

Parameter

■ ip-address: Specifies an IP address. If no IP address has been specified, information of all the bound addresses will be displayed.

■ pool-name: Specifies a global address pool. If no global address pool has been specified, the bound addresses in all the global address pools will be displayed.

■ interface-name: Specifies an interface address pool. If no interface address pool has been specified, the bound addresses in all the interface address pools will be displayed.

Description

Using the display dhcp server ip-in-use command, you can view the address binding information of DHCP clients, such as the information in hardware address, IP address, and address lease expiration.

If no optional parameter has been specified, the information output by executing the command will be:

■ In Ethernet interface view, the information in the address pool of the current interface.

■ In any other views, the information in all the address pools.

For the related command, see reset dhcp server ip-in-use.

Example

View the DHCP address binding information.

<3Com> display dhcp server ip-in-use allGlobal pool: IP address Hardware address Lease expiration Type 2.2.2.2 44444-4444-4444 NOT Used Manual

Interface pool: IP address Hardware address Lease expiration Type 5.5.5.1 0050-ba28-930a Jun 5 2003 10:56: 7 AM Auto:COMMITED


Table 3 Description of the information output by executing display dhcp server ip-in-use

display dhcp serverstatistics

Syntax

display dhcp server statistics

View

Any view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the display dhcp server statistics command, you can view the statistics on the DHCP server, including such information as number of DHCP address pools, automatically or manually bound address and expired addresses, number of unknown packets, number of DHCP request packets, and number of response packets.

For the related command, see reset dhcp server statistics.

Example

View the statistic information on the DHCP server.

<3Com> display dhcp server statistics Global Pool: Pool Number: 5 Binding Auto: 0 Manual: 1 Expire: 0 Interface Pool: Pool Number: 1 Binding Auto: 1 Manual: 0 Expire: 0 Boot Request: 6 Dhcp Discover: 1 Dhcp Request: 4 Dhcp Decline: 0 Dhcp Release: 1 Dhcp Inform: 0 Boot Reply: 4 Dhcp Offer: 1 Dhcp Ack: 3 Dhcp Nak: 0

Major item DescriptionGlobal pool: Address binding information of global address

pools Interface pool: Address binding information of interface address

pools IP address The bound IP address Hardware address The bound MAC address Lease expiration The lease expiration timeType Address binding type


Bad Messages: 0Table 4 Description of the information output by executing display dhcp server statistics

display dhcp server tree Syntax

display dhcp server tree [ pool [ pool-name ] | interface [ interface-name ] | all ]

View

Any view

Parameter

■ pool-name: Name of a global address pool. All the global address pools will apply if no address pool has been specified.

■ interface-name: Interface address pool. All the interface address pools will apply if no interface has been specified.

■ all: All the DHCP address pools.

Description

Using the display dhcp server tree command, you can view the tree-structure information of DHCP address pools, including the address pool at each node, option, address lease period, and DNS server information.

If no optional parameter has been specified, the information output by executing the command will be:

■ In Ethernet interface view, the information displayed is concerned with the address pool of the current interface.

■ In any other views, the information in all the address pools.

Example

View the tree-structure information of DHCP address pools.

<3Com> display dhcp server tree allGlobal pool: Pool name: 5 network 10.10.1.0 255.255.255.0 Child node:6 Sibling node:7 option 1 ip-address 255.0.0.0 expired 1 0 0 option 58 hex 00 00 A8 C0 option 59 hex 00 00 00 3C

Major item DescriptionGlobal Pool: Statistics of global address pools Interface Pool: Statistics of interface address pools Pool Number Number of address pools Auto Number of automatically bound IP addresses Manual Number of manually bound IP addresses Expire Number of IP addresses of expired leasesBoot Request Number of messages that DHCP clients sent to

the DHCP server Dhcp Discover, Dhcp Request, Dhcp Decline, Dhcp Release, Dhcp Inform

Statistics of the received DHCP packets

Boot Reply Number of messages that the DHCP server sent to DHCP clients

Dhcp Offer, Dhcp Ack, Dhcp Nak Statistics of the transmitted DHCP packets Bad Messages Statistics of packets containing errors


Pool name: 6 host 10.10.1.2 255.0.0.0 hardware-address 1111.2222.3333 ethernetParent node:5 option 1 ip-address 255.255.0.0 expired 1 0 0 option 58 hex 00 00 A8 C0 option 59 hex 00 00 00 3C Pool name: 7 network 10.10.1.64 255.255.255.192 PrevSibling node:5 Sibling node:8 option 1 ip-address 255.0.0.0 Pool name: 8 network 20.10.1.1 255.255.255.0 Child node:9 PrevSibling node:7 option 1 ip-address 255.0.0.0 gateway-list 2.2.2.2 nbns-list 3.3.3.3 netbios-type m-node expired 2 0 0 option 58 hex 00 01 51 80 option 59 hex 00 00 00 3C Pool name: 9 network 30.10.1.64 255.255.255.0Parent node:8 option 1 ip-address 255.0.0.0 gateway-list 2.2.2.2 dns-list 1.1.1.1 domain-name 444444 nbns-list 3.3.3.3 netbios-type m-node expired 2 0 0 option 58 hex 00 01 51 80 option 59 hex 00 00 00 3C Interface pool: Pool name: Ethernet11/2/0 network 5.5.5.0 mask 255.255.255.0 option 1 ip-address 255.255.255.0 gateway-list 5.5.5.5 expired 1 0 0 option 58 hex 00 00 A8 C0 option 59 hex 00 00 00 3CTable 5 Description of the information output by executing display dhcp server tree

Major item DescriptionGlobal pool: Global address pool information Interface pool: Interface address pool information Pool Name: Address pool name network Address ranges available for allocationhost 10.10.1.2 255.0.0.0

hardware-address 1111.2222.3333 ethernet

Statically bound IP address and MAC address


dns-list Syntax

dns-list ip-address [ ip-address ]

undo dns-list { ip-address | all }

View

DHCP address pool view

Parameter

ip-address: IP address of the DNS. You can configure up to eight IP addresses separated by spaces in a command.

Description

Using the dns-list command, you can configure DNS server IP addresses in a global DHCP address pool. Using the undo dns-list command, you can delete the configuration.

By default, no DNS server address is configured.

By far, only up to eight DNS server addresses can be set in each DHCP address pool.

For the related commands, see dhcp server dns-list interface, dhcp server dns-list, and dhcp server ip-pool.

Example

Specify 1.1.1.254 as a DNS server address for DHCP address pool 0.

[3Com] dhcp server ip-pool 0[3Com-dhcp-0] dns-list 1.1.1.254

domain-name Syntax

domain-name domain-name

undo domain-name domain-name

View


child node:6 The child node of the current node is address pool 6. The node in this position can be: Child node, which is the child node (subnet) address pool of the current address pool Parent node, which is the father node (natural network segment) address pool of the current node Sibling node, which is the next sibling node (another subnet on the same natural network segment) address pool. The order of sibling nodes depends on the order in which they are configured. PrevSibling node, which is the previous sibling node of the current node

option Self-definable DHCP optionexpired The address lease period that is indicated by days, hours, and minutesgateway-list The egress GW router allocated to DHCP clients dns-list The DNS servers allocated to DHCP clientsdomain-name Domain name specified for DHCP clients nbns-list The NetBIOS server allocated to DHCP clientsnetbios-type NetBIOS node type specified for DHCP clients


Parameter

domain-name: Domain name that the DHCP server allocates to clients, which is a string comprising at least three characters and at most 50 characters.

Description

Using the domain-name command, you can configure the domain name that a global address pool of the DHCP server allocates to clients. Using the undo domain-name command, you can delete the configured domain name.

By default, no domain name has been allocated to DHCP clients and domain name is null.

For the related commands, see dhcp server ip-pool, dhcp server domain-name interface, and dhcp server domain-name.

Example

Set the domain name of DHCP address pool 0 to mydomain.com.cn.

[3Com] dhcp server ip-pool 0[3Com-dhcp-0] domain-name mydomain.com.cn

expired Syntax

expired { day day [ hour hour [ minute minute ] ] | unlimited }

undo expired

View


Parameter





DescriptionUsing the expired command, you can configure a valid period allowed for leasing IP addresses in a global DHCP address pool. Using the undo expired command, you can restore the default setting.


For the related commands, see dhcp server ip-pool, dhcp server expired, and dhcp server expired interface.

Example

Set the IP address lease period of global address pool 0 to three minutes, two hours, and one day.

[3Com] dhcp server ip-pool 0[3Com-dhcp-0] expired 1 2 3


gateway-list Syntax

gateway-list ip-address [ ip-address ]

undo gateway-list { ip-address | all }

View


Parameter

■ ip-address: IP address of egress GW router. You can configure up to eight IP addresses separated by spaces in a command.

■ all: IP addresses of all the egress GW routers.

Description

Using the gateway-list command, you can configure IP addresses of the egress GW routers used by DHCP clients. Using the undo gateway-list command, you can delete the configuration.

By default, no egress GW router is configured.

For the related commands, see dhcp server ip-pool and network.

Example

Associate the egress GW router at 10.110.1.99 with DHCP address pool 0.

[3Com] dhcp server ip-pool 0[3Com-dhcp-0] gateway-list 10.110.1.99

nbns-list Syntax

nbns-list ip-address [ ip-address ]

undo nbns-list { ip-address | all }

View


Parameter


■ all: All the NetBIOS server IP addresses.

Description

Using the nbns-list command, you can configure NetBIOS server addresses in a global DHCP address pool for the clients. Using the undo nbns-list command, you can remove the configured NetBIOS server addresses.



For the related commands, see dhcp server ip-pool, dhcp server nbns-list, dhcp server nbns-list interface, and netbios-type.


Example

In the DHCP address pool 0, allocate the NetBIOS server at 10.12.1.99 to the clients.

[3Com] dhcp server ip-pool 0[3Com-dhcp-0] nbns-list 10.12.1.99

netbios-type Syntax

netbios-type { b-node | h-node | m-node | p-node }

undo netbios-type

View


Parameter





Description

Using the netbios-type command, you can configure the NetBIOS node type of the clients of a global DHCP address pool. Using the undo netbios-type command, you can restore the default setting.


For the related commands, see dhcp server ip-pool, dhcp server netbios-type (in interface view), dhcp server netbios-type (in system view), and nbns-list.

Example

Specify b-node as the NetBIOS node type of clients of DHCP address pool 0.

[3Com] dhcp server ip-pool 0[3Com-dhcp-0] netbios-type b-node

network Syntax

network ip-address [ mask netmask ]

undo network

View


Parameter

■ ip-address: The subnet address of an IP address pool used for dynamic allocation.


■ mask netmask: Network mask of the IP address pool. Natural mask will be adopted if the parameter is not specified.

Description

Using the network command, you can configure an IP address range used for dynamic allocation. Using the undo network command, you can delete the configuration.

By default, no IP address range has been configured for dynamic allocation.

Each DHCP address pool can be configured with a network segment and the new configuration will replace the old one. If the system requires several such address segments, you should configure them in multiple address pools.

For the related commands, see dhcp server ip-pool and dhcp server forbidden-ip.

Example

Use 192.168.8.0/24 as the address space for DHCP address pool 0.

[3Com-dhcp-0] network 192.168.8.0 mask 255.255.255.0

option Syntax

option code { ascii ascii-string | hex hex-string | ip-address ip-address }

undo option code

View


Parameter





Description

Using the option command, you can configure the self-defined options for a DHCP global address pool. Using the undo option command, you can delete the DHCP self-defined options.

New options are emerging along with the development of DHCP. In order to accommodate these options, manual option addition is supported so that they can be added into the attribute list maintained by the DHCP server.

For the related commands, see dhcp server option (in interface view) and dhcp server option interface (in system view).

Example

Define the hexadecimal strings of the option code 100 to 0x11 and 0x22.

[3Com-dhcp-0] option 100 hex 11 22

reset dhcp serverconflict

Syntax

reset dhcp server conflict [ ip-address | all ]


View

User view

Parameter


■ all: All the address pools.

Description

Using the reset dhcp server conflict command, you can clear the statistics about DHCP address collision.

In the case that no parameter has been specified when the command is configured, the scope in which that the command takes effect will depend on the view in which the command is executed.

■ If the command is executed in Ethernet interface view, it will take effect on the address pool of the current interface.

■ If the command is executed in any other views, it will take effect on all the address pools.

For the related command, see display dhcp server conflict.

Example

Clear all the address collision statistics.

<3Com> reset dhcp server conflict

reset dhcp serverip-in-use

Syntax

reset dhcp server ip-in-use [ ip ip-address | pool [ pool-name ] | interface [ interface-name ] | all ]

View

User view

Parameter

■ ip-address: Binding information of a specified IP address.

■ pool-name: Specifies a global address pool. All the global address pools will apply if no address pool has been specified.

■ interface-name: Specifies an interface address pool. If no interface has been specified, all the interface address pools will apply.

■ all: All the address pools.

Description

Using the reset dhcp server ip-in-use command, you can clear the DHCP dynamic address binding information.

In the case that no parameter has been specified when the command is configured, the scope in which that the command takes effect will depend on the view in which the command is executed.

■ If the command is executed in Ethernet interface view, it will take effect on the address pool of the current interface.


■ If the command is executed in any other views, it will take effect on all the address pools.

For the related command, see display dhcp server ip-in-use.

Example

Clear the binding information of the address 10.110.1.1.

<3Com> reset dhcp server ip-in-use ip 10.110.1.1

reset dhcp serverstatistics

Syntax

reset dhcp server statistics

View

User view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the reset dhcp server statistics command, you can clear the statistics on the DHCP server, including such information as number of DHCP address pools, automatically and manually bound addresses and expired addresses, number of unknown packets, number of DHCP request packets, and number of response packets.

For the related command, see display dhcp server statistics.

Example

Clear statistic information of the DHCP server.

<3Com> reset dhcp server statistics

static-bind ip-address Syntax

static-bind ip-address ip-address [ mask netmask ]

undo static-bind ip-address

View


Parameter

■ ip-address: IP address to be bound.

■ netmask: Mask of the IP address to be bound. If it is not specified, the natural mask will be adopted.

Description

Using the static-bind ip-address command, you can bind an IP address statically. Using the undo static-bind ip-address command, you can delete the statically bound IP address.

By default, no IP address is bound statically.

DHCP Client Configuration Commands 433

The commands static-bind ip-address and static-bind mac-address must be used in pairs so that an IP address and a MAC address can be bound together.

For the related commands, see dhcp server ip-pool, network, and static-bind mac-address.

Example

Bind the PC at the MAC address 0000-e03f-0305 with the IP address 10.1.1.1 using the mask 255.255.255.0.

[3Com-dhcp-0] static-bind ip-address 10.1.1.1 mask 255.255.255.0[3Com-dhcp-0] static-bind mac-address 0000-e03f-0305

static-bind mac-address Syntax

static-bind mac-address mac-address

undo static-bind mac-address

View


Parameter

mac-address: The host MAC address to be bound, which is in the format of H-H-H.

Description

Using the static-bind mac-address command, you can bind a MAC address statically. Using the undo static-bind mac-address command, you can delete the statically bound MAC address.

By default, no MAC address is bound statically.

The commands static-bind mac-address and static-bind ip-address must be used in pairs so that a MAC address and an IP address can be bound together.

For the related commands, see dhcp server ip-pool, and static-bind ip-address.

Example

Bind the PC at the MAC address 0000-e03f-0305 with the IP address 10.1.1.1 using the mask 255.255.255.0.

[3Com-dhcp-0] static-bind ip-address 10.1.1.1 mask 255.255.255.0[3Com-dhcp-0] static-bind mac-address 0000-e03f-0305

DHCP Client Configuration Commands

debugging dhcp client Syntaxdebugging dhcp client { event | packet | error | all }

undo debugging dhcp client { event | packet | error | all }

View

User view


Parameter

■ event: Protocol events of the DHCP client, which include address allocation and data updating.

■ packet: DHCP packets received and sent by the DHCP client.

■ error: Unknown packet information or error information.

■ all: Enables debugging of the DHCP client in all the information (event, packet, and error).

Description

Using the debugging dhcp client command, you can enable debugging on the DHCP client. Using the undo debugging dhcp client command, you can disable debugging on the DHCP client. By default, DHCP client debugging is disabled.

Example

Enable event debugging on the DHCP client.

<3Com>debugging dhcp client event

display dhcp client Syntaxdisplay dhcp client [ verbose ]

View

Any view

Parameter

verbose: Statistic details of the DHCP client.

Description

Using the display dhcp client command, you can display the statistic information of the DHCP client. Executing the command attached without the keyword parameter verbose will display only the brief address allocation information on the DHCP client.

ExampleDisplay the statistic details of the DHCP client.

[3Com] display dhcp client verboseDHCP client statistic infomation:Ethernet0/0:Current machine state: BOUNDAlloced IP: 169.254.0.2 255.255.0.0Alloced lease: 86400 seconds, T1: 43200 seconds, T2: 75600 secondsLease from 2002.09.20 01:05:03 to 2002.09.21 01:05:03Server IP: 169.254.0.1Transaction ID = 0x3d8a7431Default router: 2.2.2.2DNS server: 1.1.1.1Domain name: 3Com.comClient ID: 3Com-00e0.fc0a.c3ef-Ethernet0/0Next timeout will happen after 0 days 11 hours 56 minutes 1 seconds.

Ethernet2/0:

DHCP Client Configuration Commands 435

Current machine state: HALT

The statistic information shows that two interfaces, i.e., Ethernet0/0 and Ethernet2/0, have been configured to be DHCP clients.

Ethernet0/0 has been assigned with the address 169.254.0.2/16 subject to the lease expiration of 86400 seconds and the current machine state is BOUND. The renewal timer is set to 43200 seconds, the rebinding timer to 75600 seconds, and the lease expiration to the period since 2002.09.20 01:05:03 to 2002.09.21 01:05:03. The selected DHCP server is at 169.254.0.1, the GW at 2.2.2.2, and the DNS server at 1.1.1.1, given the domain name is 3Com.com. In addition, the next timeout will happen 1 second, 56 minutes, and 11 hours later.

The allocation process has not been started at Ethernet2/0 yet. The current machine state is HALT, which is normally as a result of the DOWN state of the interface.

Display more details of the DHCP client.

[3Com]display dhcp client verbose DHCP client statistic infomation:Ethernet0/0:Current machine state: BOUNDAlloced IP: 169.254.0.2 255.255.0.0Alloced lease: 300 seconds, T1: 150 seconds, T2: 262 secondsLease from 2002.09.15 07:11:55 to 2002.09.15 07:16:55Server IP: 169.254.0.1Transaction ID = 0x3d8432b1Client ID: 3Com-00e0.fc0a.c3ef-Ethernet0/0Next timeout will happen after 0 days 0 hours 1 minutes 36 seconds.Table 6 Statistic information field description of DHCP client

ip address dhcp-alloc Syntaxip address dhcp-alloc

undo ip address dhcp-alloc

View

Interface view

Parameter

None

Item DescriptionEthernet0/0 Interface where the client is allowed to dynamically obtain an IP address Current machine state State of the client state machine Alloced IP IP address allocated to the client lease Lease period T1 Duration of the renewal timer T2 Duration of the rebinding timer Lease from….to…. The starting time and the end time of the leaseServer IP The selected DHCP server address Transaction ID Transaction ID Client ID User IDDefault router GW address DNS server DNS server address Domain name Domain name Requested IP The requested IP address Offered IP The provided IP address


Description

Using the ip address dhcp-alloc command, you can allocate local IP addresses by making use of DHCP. Using the undo ip address dhcp-alloc command, you can disable the allocation of local IP addresses via DHCP negotiation. This command must be configured and executed in Ethernet interface (including subinterface) view.

By default, DHCP negotiation is not used for the allocation of local IP addresses.

Example

Adopt DHCP negotiation for the allocation of local IP addresses on Ethernet0/0/0.

[3Com-Ethernet0/0/0] ip address dhcp-alloc

DHCP Relay Configuration Commands

debugging dhcp relay Syntax

debugging dhcp relay

undo debugging dhcp relay

View

User view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the debugging dhcp relay command, you can enable debugging on the DHCP-relay module. Using the undo debugging dhcp relay command, you can disable DHCP-relay module debugging.

Example

Enable DHCP-relay module debugging.

<3Com>debugging dhcp relay

dhcp relay release Syntax

dhcp relay release { client-ip mac-address } [ server-ip ]

View

Interface view

System view

Parameter

■ client-ip: IP address of the DHCP client.

■ mac-address: MAC address of the DHCP client, which is in the format of H-H-H.

DHCP Relay Configuration Commands 437

■ server-ip: IP address of the DHCP server.

Description

Using the dhcp relay release command, you can send an IP address releasing request to a DHCP server via the DHCP relay.

Given no IP address of DHCP server has been specified, release packets will be sent either to all the DHCP servers if this command is configured in system view or to all the relay addresses configured on an interface if this command is configured in the interface view.

Example

Send a release packet to the DHCP server at 10.110.91.174, requesting to release the IP address 192.2.2.25, which was offered to the client whose MAC address is 0050-ba34-2000.

[3Com] dhcp relay release 192.2.2.25 0050-ba34-2000 10.110.91.174

display dhcp relayaddress

Syntax

display dhcp relay address [ interface interface-name | all ]

View

Any view

Parameter

■ interface-name: Specifies an interface name, which is represented by interface type plus interface number.


Description

Using the display dhcp relay address command, you can view the DHCP relay address configuration of an interface.

For the related commands, see ip relay address and ip relay address interface.

Example

View the DHCP relay address configurations of all the interfaces.

<3Com> display dhcp relay address all ** Ethernet11/2/0 DHCP Relay Address ** Relay Address [0] : 3.3.3.3

display dhcp relaystatistics

Syntax

display dhcp relay statistics

View

Any view

Parameter

None


Description

Using the display dhcp relay statistics command, you can view the statistics of DHCP relay in packet errors, DHCP packets received from clients, DHCP packets received from and sent to servers, and DHCP packets sent to clients (including unicast and broadcast packets).

Example

View DHCP relay statistics.

<3Com> display dhcp relay statistics Bad Packets recieved: 0 DHCP packets received from clients: 0 DHCP DISCOVER packets received: 0 DHCP REQUEST packets received: 0 DHCP INFORM packets received: 0 DHCP DECLINE packets received: 0 DHCP packets received from servers: 0 DHCP OFFER packets received: 0 DHCP ACK packets received: 0 DHCP NAK packets received: 0 DHCP packets sent to servers: 0 DHCP packets sent to clients: 0 Unicast packets sent to clients: 0

ip relay address Syntax

ip relay address ip-address

undo ip relay address [ ip-address ]

View

Interface view

Parameter

ip-address: IP relay address in dot-deliminated decimal format.

Description

Using the ip relay address command, you can specify the exact location of a DHCP server by configuring an IP relay address for it. Using the undo ip relay address command, you can delete one or all relay IP addresses used by an interface.

By default, no relay IP address has been configured.

Executing undo ip relay address without ip-address will delete all the relay IP addresses configured on the current interface.

As the packets sent by DHCP client machines in some phases of DHCP are broadcast packets, the interfaces configured with relay IP addresses must support broadcast. In other words, this command can be used on the broadcast-supported network interfaces, Ethernet interfaces for example.

For the related command, see dhcp select interface.

Example

Add two relay IP addresses on Ethernet 0/0/0.

DHCP Relay Configuration Commands 439

[3Com-Ethernet0/0/0] ip relay address 202.38.1.2[3Com-Ethernet0/0/0] ip relay address 202.38.1.3

ip relay address cycle Syntax

ip relay address cycle

undo ip relay address cycle

View

System view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the ip relay address cycle command, you can adopt the polling approach to relay packets, ensuring that different clients use different DHCP servers and the same clients use the same DHCP server so long as it is possible. Using the undo ip relay address cycle command, you can adopt the broadcast approach to relay packets so as to broadcast client requests to all the DHCP servers.

By default, the broadcast approach is adopted.

Suppose that there are three clients, i.e., A, B, and C, and the DHCP server has been configured with three relay addresses, i.e., S1, S2, and S3. If the polling approach is adopted to relay packets, A, B, and C will respectively use the relay addresses S1, S2, and S3. If A is shut down and restarted again, it will continue to use S1. But if a client other than these three clients started, it will use S1. Thus, the relay addresses will be used cyclically.

For the related command, see ip relay address.

Example

Adopt the polling approach to relay.

[3Com] ip relay address cycle

ip relay addressinterface

Syntax

ip relay address ip-address [ interface ethernet-subinterface-range | all ]

undo ip relay address { ip-address | all } { interface ethernet-subinterface-range | all }

View

System view

Parameter

■ ip-address: IP address of the DHCP server.

■ ethernet-subinterface-range: Includes all the subinterfaces whose interface number lies between two subinterface numbers (including these two subinterfaces) by inserting the keyword “to” between these two interface numbers.


■ all: In the undo form of the command, the first “all” refers to all the relay addresses and the second all, the interfaces.

Description

Using the ip relay address interface command, you can configure a relay address for the Ethernet interfaces in a specified range for the purpose of transparent forwarding. Using the undo ip relay address interface command, you can delete the configured relay address.

By default, no relay IP address has been configured on any Ethernet interface.

For the related command, see ip relay address.

Example

Add a relay IP address for the interfaces in the range of Ethernet2/0/0.1 to Ethernet2/0/0.5.

[3Com] ip relay address 202.38.1.2 interface ethernet 2/0/0.1 to ethernet 2/0/0.5

reset dhcp relaystatistics

Syntax

reset dhcp relay statistics

View

User view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the reset dhcp relay statistics command, you can clear the DHCP relay statistics.

For the related command, see display dhcp relay statistics.

Example

Clear the DHCP relay statistics.

<3Com> reset dhcp relay statistics

IP Performance Configuration Commands

debugging ip Syntaxdebugging ip { icmp | packet [ acl { acl-number1 | acl-number2 } ] }

undo debugging ip { icmp | packet }

ViewUser view

IP Performance Configuration Commands 441

Parameter■ acl-number1: ACL based on the interface, in the range of 1000 to 1999.

■ acl-number2: ACL in the range of 1 to 199. The ACL in the range of 1 to 99 is the basic ACL and that in the range of 100 to 199 is the advanced ACL.

DescriptionUsing debugging ip icmp command, you can enable the ICMP debugging. Using the undo debugging ip icmp command, you can disable the ICMP debugging.

The debugging ip packet command is used to enable the IP packet debugging. The filtration to the debugging information can be accomplished by filtering the IP packets via acl. Using the undo debugging ip packet command, you can disable the IP packet debugging.

Example

Enable the IP debugging.<3Com> debugging ip packet*0.129680-IP-8-debug_case:Delivering, interface = Serial0/0/0, version = 4, headlen = 20, tos = 6,pktlen = 70, pktid = 49, offset = 0, ttl = 1, protocol = 17,checksum = 50, s = 1.1.1.2, d = 224.0.0.2prompt: IP packet is delivering up!

*0.129680-IP-8-debug_case:Sending, interface = Serial0/0/0, version = 4, headlen = 20, tos = 6,pktlen = 70, pktid = 49, offset = 0, ttl = 1, protocol = 17,checksum = 55147, s = 1.1.1.2, d = 224.0.0.2prompt: Sending the packet from local at Serial0/0/0<3Com> debugging ip icmp*0.157090-IP-8-debug_icmp:ICMP Receive: echo(Type=8, Code=0), Src = 127.0.0.1, Dst = 1.1.1.2

*0.157090-IP-8-debug_icmp:ICMP Send: echo-reply(Type=0, Code=0), Src = 1.1.1.2, Dst = 127.0.0.1

*0.157090-IP-8-debug_icmp:ICMP Receive: echo-reply(Type=0, Code=0), Src = 1.1.1.2, Dst = 127.0.0.1

debugging tcp event Syntaxdebugging tcp event [ task_id socket_id ]

undo debugging tcp event [ task_id socket_id ]

ViewUser view

Parameter■ task_id: The ID of a task.

■ socket_id: The ID of a socket.


DescriptionUsing the debugging tcp event command, you can enable TCP events debugging. And using the undo debugging tcp event command, you can disable TCP events debugging.

There is limitation for the number of debugging switches enabled, that is, only a fixed number of debugging switches can be enabled at one time (combination of task ID and socket ID). In addition, when TCP is enabled to receive connection request reactively, a new socket will be created to establish that connection, and some programs will create a new task to process the connection, like Telnet server. So to view information about connection, such parameters as task_id and socket_id cannot be used for filtering.

ExampleEnable debugging of TCP events.

<3Com> debugging tcp event*0.630270-SOCKET-8-TCP EVENT:1043494683: task = Co0(2), socketid = 0,TCPCB 0x02c6fd74 created

*0.630270-SOCKET-8-TCP EVENT:1043494683: task = Co0(2), socketid = 1,state CLOSED changed to SYN_SENT

*0.630270-SOCKET-8-TCP EVENT:1043494683: task = Co0(2), socketid = 1,sending SYN, seq = 74249530,LA = 127.0.0.1:1025, FA = 1.1.1.1:23

*0.630270-SOCKET-8-TCP EVENT:1043494683: task = Co0(2), socketid = 1,advertising MSS = 512, LA = 127.0.0.1:1025, FA = 1.1.1.1:23

*0.630270-SOCKET-8-TCP EVENT:1043494683: task = VTYD(9), socketid = 0,received MSS = 512, LA = 1.1.1.1:23, FA = 127.0.0.1:1025

*0.50959090-SOCKET-8-TCP EVENT:733759463: sending RST to 2.2.2.1:11022

*0.1293330-SOCKET-8-TCP EVENT:1043495346: task = Co0(2), socketid = 1,connection refused because remote sent RST!LA = 1.1.1.1:1026, FA = 1.1.1.2:21<3Com> display debuggingTCP: TCP event debugging is on for task any socket any

debugging tcp md5 Syntax

debugging tcp md5

undo debugging tcp md5


View

User view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the debugging tcp md5 command, you can enable the MD5 authentication debugging of the TCP connection. Using the undo debugging tcp md5 command, you can disable the MD5 authentication debugging of the TCP connection.

Example

Enable the MD5 authentication debugging of the TCP connection.

<3Com> debugging tcp md5

debugging tcp packet Syntax■ debugging tcp packet [ task_id socket_id ]

■ undo debugging tcp packet [ task_id socket_id ]

ViewUser view



DescriptionUsing the debugging tcp packet command, you can enable the debugging of TCP connection. The number of debugging switches users can enable is limited, that is, at the same time only a fixed number of debugging switches can be enabled (combination of task ID and socket ID). Using the undo debugging tcp packet command, you can disable the debugging of TCP connection.

ExampleEnable the debugging of TCP connection.

<3Com> debugging tcp packet<3Com> display debugging*0.100070-SOCKET-8-TCP PACKET:1043204051: Input: Co0(5) socketId = 2, state = SYN_SENT,src = 127.0.0.1:1025, dst = 2.2.2.2:23,seq = 11084380, ack = 0, optlen = 4, flag = SYN ,window = 81921043204051: Output: Co0(5) SocketId = 2, State = SYN_SENT,src = 127.0.0.1:1025, Dst = 2.2.2.2:23,Seq = 11084380, Ack = 0, Datalen = 4, Flag = ACK PSH ,Window = 81921043204051: Retrans: Co0(5) SocketId = 2, State = SYN_SENT,Src = 127.0.0.1:1025, Dst = 2.2.2.2:23,Seq = 11084380, Ack = 0, Optlen = 4, Flag = SYN ,Window = 8192


4.1.5 debugging udp packet

Syntax

debugging udp packet [ task_id socket_id ]

undo debugging udp packet [ task_id socket_id ]

View

User view



DescriptionUsing the debugging udp packet command, you can enable the debugging of UDP connection. The number of debugging switches users can enable is limited, that is, at the same time only a fixed number of debugging switches can be enabled (combination of task ID and socket ID). Using the undo debugging udp packet command, you can disable the debugging of UDP connection.

ExampleEnable the debugging of UDP connection.

<3Com> debugging udp packet<3Com> display debugging*0.377770-SOCKET-8-UDP:1043494431: Output: task = ROUT(6), socketid = 3,src = 1.1.1.1:520, dst = 255.255.255.255:520, datalen = 24,

display fib Syntaxdisplay fib

ViewAny view

ParameterNone

DescriptionUsing the display fib command, you can view the summary of the Forwarding Information Base.

This command outputs the Forwarding Information Base in a list, in which each line represents one route. The following points are included:

■ Destination address/mask length

■ Next hop

■ The current flag, which is expressed in the combination of G, H and U. G represents Gateway, H is Host (host route), and U is UP (available).

■ Time stamp


■ Outbound interface

ExampleDisplay the summary of the forwarding information base.

<3Com> display fibDestination/MaskNexthopFlagTimeStampIInterface80.10.0.2/3280.10.0.2GHUt[0]Serial2/0/080.10.255.255/32127.0.0.1HUt[0]InLoopBack080.10.0.0/1680.10.0.1Ut[0]Serial2/0/080.50.0.2/3280.50.0.2GHUt[0]Serial2/0/080.50.255.255/32127.0.0.1HUt[0]InLoopBack0

4.1.7 display fib acl

Syntax

display fib acl { listnumber | listname }

View

Any view

Parameter■ listnumber: The ACL rules expressed in number, ranging from 1 to 99.

■ listname: The ACL rules expressed in name.

DescriptionUsing the display fib acl command, you can filter and display FIB information. According to ACL number or name entered, you can display the FIB table entries matching the filtering rules in a format.

A standard ACL name must be input if the ACL is expressed in name; otherwise, the system will prompt an abnormal entering. When the ACL name or number ranging from 1 to 99 is entered, the corresponding ACL will be searched. If no ACL is found, all FIB table entries information will be displayed; and if such an ACL is found, the FIB table entries information will be output in a format.

If the number of FIB table entries matching the filtering rules is 0, the following information will be output:

Route entry matched by access-list 2:Summary count: 0

If the number of FIB table entries matching the filtering rules is not 0, the FIB table entry information will be output in the following format:

Route entry matched by access-list 1:Summary count: 1Destination/MaskNexthopFlagTimeStampInterface127.0.0.0/8127.0.0.1Ut[0]InLoopBack0

ExampleDisplay the FIB table entries matched by the ACL.

<3Com> display fib acl 10Route entry matched by access-list 10:


Summary counts: 1Destination/MaskNexthopFlagTimeStampInterface127.0.0.0/8127.0.0.1Ut[0]InLoopBack0

display fib begin Syntaxdisplay fib | [ { begin | include | exclude } text ]

ViewAny view

Parameter■ text: Character.

Description■ Using the display fib command, you can output the lines related to the line

containing the character string text in the buffer according to the regular expression.

■ Using the display fib | begin text command, you can view the lines beginning from the line containing the character string text to the end line of the buffer.

■ Using the display fib | include text command, you can just view the lines containing the character string text.

■ Using the display fib | exclude text command, you can view the lines not containing the character string text.

ExampleDisplay the lines beginning from the line containing the character string “169.254.0.0” to the end line of the buffer:

<3Com> display fib | begin 169.254.0.0Destination/MaskNexthopFlagTimeStampInterface169.254.0.0/162.1.1.1Ut[0]Ethernet0/0/02.0.0.0/162.1.1.1Ut[0]Ethernet0/0/0127.0.0.0/8127.0.0.1Ut[0]InLoopBack0

Display all the lines containing the character string “Ethernet0”:

<3Com> display fib | include ethernet0/0/0Destination/MaskNexthopFlagTimeStampInterface169.254.0.0/162.1.1.1Ut[0]Ethernet0/0/02.0.0.0/162.1.1.1Ut[0]Ethernet0/0/0

Display all the lines not containing the character string ”169.254.0.0”:

<3Com> display fib | exclude 169.254.0.0Destination/MaskNexthopFlagTimeStampInterface2.0.0.0/162.1.1.1Ut[0]Ethernet0/0/0127.0.0.0/8127.0.0.1Ut[0]InLoopBack0

display fib ip-prefix Syntaxdisplay fib ip-prefix listname


ViewAny view

Parameter■ listname: The name of the prefix list.

Description

Using the display fib ip-prefix command, you can filter and display FIB information. According to the name of prefix-list entered, you can display the FIB entries matching the filtering rules in the prefix list in a format.

If no FIB table entry matching the prefix list, the prompt information will be displayed that the number of FIB entry matched by the prefix list is 0; if the name of ip-prefix cannot be found, all FIB table entries will be displayed; if the FIB table entries after filtering is not 0, they will be output in a format.

If no FIB table entry matching the prefix list, the following information will be output:

Route entry matched by prefix-list abc1:Summary count: 0

If the number of FIB table entries after filtering is not 0, FIB table entry information will be output in the following format:

Route entry matched by prefix-list abc2:Summary count: 1Destination/Mask Nexthop Flag TimeStamp Interface127.0.0.0/8 127.0.0.1 U t[0] InLoopBack0

ExampleDisplay the FIB table entries matched by the prefix list abc0.

<3Com> display fib ip-prefix abc0Route Entry matched by prefix-list abc0:Summary count: 4Destination/MaskNexthopFlagTimeStampInterface127.0.0.0/8127.0.0.1Ut[0]InLoopBack0127.0.0.1/32127.0.0.1Ut[0]InLoopBack0169.0.0.0/82.1.1.1SUt[0]Ethernet 0/0/0169.0.0.0/152.1.1.1SUt[0]Ethernet 0/0/0

display fib longer Syntaxdisplay fib dest-addr1 [ dest-mask2 ] [ longer ]

1. Using the above command, you can display the FIB table entries matching the destination address. Different parameters selected leads to different matching methods.

display fibdest-addr1 dest-mask1 dest-addr2 dest-mask2

2. Using the above command, you can display the FIB table entries whose destination address ranges from dest-addr1 dest-mask1 to dest-addr2 dest-mask2, including the FIB entries exactly matching dest-addr1 dest-mask1 and dest-addr2 dest-mask2.


ViewAny view

Parameter■ dest-addr1: The destination IP address 1, which is expressed in dot-deliminated

decimal format.

■ dest-mask1: The subnet mask 1 corresponding to the destination IP address 1, which is the mask in dot-deliminated decimal format or the mask length in integer format.

■ dest-addr2: The destination IP address 2, which is expressed in dot-deliminated decimal format.

■ dest-mask2: The subnet mask 2 corresponding to the destination IP address 2, which is the mask in dot-deliminated decimal format or the mask length in integer format.

DescriptionDifferent parameters selected leads to different matching methods.

■ display fib dest-addr: According to the destination address, if FIB table entries can be found within the range of natural mask, all the subnets will be displayed. Otherwise, only the FIB table entries found by operating the longest match will be displayed.

■ display fib dest-addr dest-mask: The FIB table entries exactly matching the destination address and mask are displayed.

■ display fib dest-addr longer: The FIB table entries matching the destination addresses within the range of natural mask.

■ display fib dest-addr dest-mask longer: The FIB table entries matching the destination IP addresses within the entered mask range.

■ The display fib dest-addr1 dest-mask1 dest-addr2 dest-mask2 command is used to display FIB table entries whose destination address is within the range from dest-addr1 dest-mask1 to dest-addr2 dest-mask2.

ExampleDisplay the FIB table entries whose destination address matches169.253.0.0 longest with the natural mask range.

<3Com> display fib 169.253.0.0Destination/MaskNexthopFlagTimeStampInterface169.0.0.0/162.1.1.1 Ut[0]Ethernet0/0/0

Display the FIB entries whose destination address is within the range from 69.254.0.0/16 to 169.254.0.6/16.

<3Com> display fib 169.254.0.0 255.255.0.0 169.254.0.6 255.255.0.0Destination/MaskNexthopFlagTimeStampInterface169.254.0.1/162.1.1.1Ut[0]Ethernet0/0/0

display fib statistics Syntaxdisplay fib statistics


ViewAny view

ParameterNone

Description Using the display fib statistics command, you can display the total numbers of FIB table entries.

ExampleDisplay the total numbers of FIB table entries.

<3Com> display fib statisticsRoute Entry Count : 30

display ipfast-forwarding cache

Syntax

display ip fast-forwarding cache

View

Any view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the display ip fast-forwarding cache command, you can view the information on the fast-forwarding table.

Example

Display the information of the fast-forwarding table.

[Router] display ip fast-forwarding cacheFast-Forwarding cache:Index SrIP SrPort DsIP DsPort Pro Input_If Output_If FLAG600:0 1.1.3.149 1463 10.10.26.30 23 6 Ethernet0/0/0 Ethernet1/0/0 81

The above information indicates that the latest cache contains the data flow from port 1463 at 1.1.3.149 to port 23 at 10.10.26.30, with a protocol number 6, i.e. the TCP data, ingress is Ethernet0/0/0 and the egress is Ethernet1/0/0.

display ip interface Syntaxdisplay ip interface [ interface-type interface-number | interface-name ]

ViewAny view

Parameter■ interface-type: Interface type.


■ interface-number: Interface number.


DescriptionUsing the display ip interface command, you can view the information of IP interfaces.

By default, if no interface is specified, the information about all IP interfaces will be displayed.

This command is used to display all the information related to IP on the interface.

The information is helpful for fault diagnosis. For the related command, see display interface.

ExampleDisplay IP-related information at the interface Serial 0/0/0.

<3Com> display ip interface Serial 0/0/0Serial 0/0/0 current state : UPLine protocol current state : UPInternet Address : 10.10.10.10/16Broadcast address : 10.10.255.255The Maximum Transmit Unit : 1500 bytesinput packets : 1231, bytes : 57557, multicasts : 1177output packets : 0, bytes : 0, multicasts : 0

The above information shows that the physical link state of the interface serial 0/0/0 is UP, link-layer protocol state is UP, the maximum transmit unit is 1500 bytes, the IP address is 10.10.10.10, the broadcast subnet is 10.10.255.255 and the packet receiving/sending conditions at this interface.

display ip socket Syntaxdisplay ip socket [ socktype sock_type ] [ task_id socket_id ]

ViewAny view

Parameter■ sock_type: The type of a socket: (tcp:1, udp 2, raw ip 3)

■ task_id: The ID of a task.


DescriptionUsing the display ip socket command, you can display the information about all sockets in the current system.

ExampleDisplay the information about the socket of TCP type.

<3Com> display ip socket socktype 1SOCK_STREAM:Task = VTYD(9), socketid = 1, Proto = 6,LA = 0.0.0.0:23, FA = 0.0.0.0:0,


sndbuf = 4096, rcvbuf = 4096, sb_cc = 0, rb_cc = 0,socket option = SO_ACCEPTCONNsocket state = SS_PRIV SS_ASYNCSOCK_DGRAM:Task = ROUT(6), socketid = 1, Proto = 17,LA = 0.0.0.0:0, FA = 0.0.0.0:0,sndbuf = 9216, rcvbuf = 41600, sb_cc = 0, rb_cc = 0,socket option = SO_UDPCHECKSUMsocket state = SS_PRIV SS_ASYNCSOCK_RAW:Task = ROUT(6), socketid = 2, Proto = 2,LA = 0.0.0.0, FA = 0.0.0.0,sndbuf = 32767, rcvbuf = 32767, sb_cc = 0, rb_cc = 0,socket option = 0,socket state = SS_PRIV SS_NBIO SS_ASYNC

Explanations of the display information:

■ SOCK_STREAM: the socket type.

■ Proto: the protocol number used by the socket.

■ sndbuf: the sending buffer size of the socket.

■ rcvbuf: the receiving buffer size of the socket.

■ sb_cc: the current data size in the sending buffer. The value makes sense only for the socket of TCP type, because only TCP is able to cache data.

■ rb_cc: the current data size in the receiving buffer.

■ socket option: the option of the socket.

■ socket state: the state of the socket.

Display the information about the socket with socket ID as 4 and task ID as 8.

<3Com> display ip socket 8 4Task = VTYD(8), socketid = 4, Proto = 6,LA = 0.0.0.0:23, FA = 0.0.0.0:0,sndbuf = 4096, rcvbuf = 4096, sb_cc = 0, rb_cc = 0,socket option = SO_ACCEPTCONNsocket state = SS_PRIV SS_ASYNC

display ip statistics Syntaxdisplay ip statistics

ViewAny view

ParameterNone

DescriptionUsing the display ip statistics command, you can view IP traffic statistics information. This command is used to display such statistics information as IP packet transmit/receive, packet assembly/disassembly, which is helpful to fault diagnosis.


For the related commands, see display interface, display ip interface, and reset ip statistics.

ExampleDisplay the IP traffic statistic information.

<3Com> display ip statisticsIP Protocol:Sent packets:sent out: 67, forwarded: 0, raw packets: 0discarded: 0, routing failed: 98Received packets:total:782477, local host: 6500, format error: 0checksum error: 0, option error: 0, protocol error: 18Fragmented packets:total: 0, fragmented: 0, reassembled: 0timeout: 0, error: 0, failed: 0 sent: 0ICMP protocol:Sent packets:redirected: 0, unreached: 67, echoed: 0 echo replied: 0, mask requested: 0, mask replied: 0 src quenched: 0, parameter req: 0, timestamp req: 0Received packets:format error: 0, checksum error: 0, redirected: 0 unreached: 0, echoed: 0, echo replied: 0 mask req: 0, mask replied: 0, src quenched: 0 parameter req: 0, timestamp req: 0

display tcp statistics Syntaxdisplay tcp statistics

ViewAny view

ParameterNone

DescriptionUsing the display tcp statistics command, you can view TCP traffic statistic information.

The command is used to display the traffic statistic information of all the active TCP connections. Statistics information is classified into two parts: receiving and sending, and each part is further classified according to different types of packets. For example, for receiving packets, there are retransmission packets number, keep-alive detection packets number, etc. Also the statistics closely related to connection are displayed, such as connection number received, retransmission packets number and keep-alive detection packets number. The unit of statistics results is packet, and sometimes is byte.

For the related command, see display tcp status.

ExampleDisplay the TCP traffic statistic information.

<3Com> display tcp statisticsReceived packets:


Total: 0packets in sequence: 0 (0 bytes)window probe packets: 0, window update packets: 0checksum error: 0, bad offset : 0, too short : 0duplicate packets : 0 (0 bytes), partially duplicate packets : 0(0 bytes)out-of-order packets : 0 (0 bytes)packets with data after window : 0 (0 bytes)packets after close : 0ack packets:0 (0 bytes), duplicate ack packets:0, ack packets with unsend data:0Sent packets:Total: 0urgent packets: 0control packets: 0 ( 0 RST)window probe packets: 0, window update packets: 0data packets : 0 (0 bytes), data packets retransmitted: 0 (0 bytes)ack only packets : 0(0 delayed)Total retransmit timeout: 0, connections dropped in retransmit timeout: 0Keepalive timeout: 0, keepalive probe: 0, dropped connections in keepalive: 0Initiated connections: 0, accepted connections: 0,established connections: 0Closed connections: 0,( dropped: 0, embryonic dropped: 0)Dropped packets with MD5 authentication : 0Permitted packets with MD5 authentication : 0

The above information means:

■ Receiving statistics:

■ Total number of packets received: 0

■ The number of packets reaching as the order (total bytes: 0): 0

■ Window detection packets number: 0, window upgrading packets number: 0.

■ The number of packet verification errors: 0, the number of packet length errors: 0.

■ The number of totally repeated packets: 0 (the total bytes: 0), the number of partial repeated packets: 0 (the total bytes: 0).

■ The number of packets with confusing order: 0 (the total bytes: 0).

■ The number of packets reaching outside of the receiving window: 0 (the total bytes: 0).

■ The number of packets reaching after connection being closed: 0.

■ The confirmed packets number: 0 (the bytes of the confirmed data: 0), the repeated confirmed packets number: 0, ACK packets number already being confirmed but not being sent yet: 0.

■ Sending statistics:

■ Total number of packets sent: 0.

■ The urgent packets number: 0.

■ The control packets number: 0. (RST packets number: 0).


■ The window detection packets number: 0, the window upgrading packets number: 0.

■ The data packets number: 0 (the total bytes: 0) he retransmission packets number: 0 (the total bytes: 0).

■ ACK packets number: 0 (delay ACK packets number: 0)

■ The time-out times of retransmission timer: 0, the connection number discarded due to retransmission times beyond limitation: 0.

■ The time-out times of keep-alive timer: 0, the times of sending keep-alive detection packets: 0.

■ The number of connections initiated: 0, the number of connections received: 0, the number of connections established: 0.

■ The number of connections closed already: 0, the number of connections discarded accidentally (after SYN is received):0, the times of connections actively failed to establish (before SYN is received): 0.

■ The packets number discarded after MD5 verification: 0.

■ The packets number passing MD5 verification: 0.

display tcp status Syntaxdisplay tcp status

ViewAny view

ParameterNone

DescriptionUsing the display tcp status command, you can monitor TCP connection any time.

For the related command, see display local-user.

ExampleDisplay the TCP connection status.

<3Com> display tcp statusTCPCB Local AddressForeign AddressState0442c394 10.110.93.146.2310.110.93.175.1538ESTAB045d8074 0.0.0.0.210.0.0.0.0 LISTEN

display udp statistics Syntaxdisplay udp statistics

ViewAny view

ParameterNone


DescriptionUsing the display udp statistics command, you can view TCP traffic statistic information.

The command is used to display the traffic statistic information of all the active TCP connections. Statistics information is classified into two parts: receiving and sending, and each part can be further classified according to different types of packets, as checksum packets and error packets, for example. Moreover there are statistics closely related to connection, such as the number of broadcast packets. The statistics information is organized in terms of packet.

For relate configuration, please refer to the reset udp statistics command.

ExampleDisplay the UDP traffic statistic information.

<3Com> display udp statisticsReceived packet:Total:0checksum error:0shorter than header:0, data length larger than packet:0no socket on port:0broadcast:0not delivered, input socket full:0input packets missing pcb cache:0Sent packet:Total:0

The displayed information is explained as below:

UDP packet is received, 0 packet has checksum error. And there is 0 packet whose packet length is shorter than the packet header, 0 packet whose data length is bigger than the packet length, 0 packet whose socket uses this port No. 0 packet being broadcast packet, 0 packet not being delivered due to full socket buffer, 0 packet not finding pcb and 0 UDP packet being sent.

ip fast-forwarding Syntax

ip fast-forwarding [ inbound | outbound ]

undo ip fast-forwarding

View

Interface view

Parameter

■ inbound: Allows fast-forwarding only on the inbound interface.

■ outbound: Allows fast-forwarding only on the outbound interface.

Description

Using the ip fast-forwarding command, you can enable fast packet forwarding on the outbound interface. Using the undo ip fast-forwarding command, you can disable fast-forwarding on the outbound interface.

By default, fast-forwarding is allowed on both inbound and outbound interfaces.


Fast-forwarding is well-suited to high-speed links (such as Ethernet and FR). Its function will be render useless, however, on a low-speed link, due to the low transmission rate such a link can provide.

3Com Series Routers support fast-forwarding on the links of various high-speed interfaces such as Ethernet, synchronous PPP, FR, and HDLC, on the interfaces configured with firewall and NAT features, and on the virtual tunnel interface of GRE as well. However, it should be noted that the interface configured with the function of fast-forwarding will be unable to send ICMP redirection packets.

Example

Disable the interface to fast forward packets.

[3Com-Ethernet/0/0] undo ip fast-forwarding

Enable the interface to fast forward packets on ingress.

[3Com-Ethernet0/0/0] ip fast-forwarding inbound

reset ip fast-forwardingcache

Syntax

reset ip fast-forwarding cache

View

User view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the reset ip fast-forwarding cache command, you can reset the fast-forwarding cache.

This command is used to clear the fast-forwarding cache. The fast-forwarding table will not contain any fast-forwarding entry after having been cleared.

Example

Clear the fast-forwarding cache.

<3Com> reset ip fast-forwarding cache

reset ip statistics Syntaxreset ip statistics

ViewUser view

ParameterNone

DescriptionUsing the reset ip statistics command, you can clear the IP statistics information. In some special cases, it is necessary to clear the IP statistics information and perform new statistics.


For the related commands, see display ip interface and display ip statistics.

ExampleClear IP statistics information.

<3Com> reset ip statistics

reset tcp statistics Syntaxreset tcp statistics

ViewUser view

ParameterNone

Description

Using the reset tcp statistics command, you can clear TCP traffic statistic information. After the execution of this command, there’s no prompt information on the screen, and the existing statistics are cleared.

For the related command, see display tcp statistics.

ExampleDisplay the TCP traffic statistic information.

<3Com> reset tcp statistics

reset udp statistics Syntaxreset udp statistics

ViewUser view

ParameterNone

DescriptionUsing the reset udp statistics command, you can clear the UDP statistics information. After the execution of this command, there’s no prompt information on the screen, and the existing statistics are cleared.

ExampleClear UDP traffic statistics information.

<3Com> reset udp statistics

tcp mss Syntaxtcp mss value

undo tcp mss


ViewInterface view

Parameter■ Value: The threshold for the TCP packet to be fragmented, with the value

ranging from 128 to 2048.

DescriptionUsing the tcp mss command, you can designate a value as a threshold for TCP packets to be fragmented. The undo tcp mss command is used to prevent TCP packets from being fragmented. As the default MTU of the interface being 1500 bytes, this restricts the total length of encryption packet head + data link expenditure + IP packet head + TCP packet to 1500 bytes. So the dear length of TCP packets to fragment may be about 1200 bytes.

By default, TCP packets are not fragmented.

ExampleConfigure the threshold of TCP packet fragmentation to be 300.

3Com-Ethernet0/0/0] tcp mss 300

tcp timer fin-timeout Syntaxtcp timer fin-timeout time-value

undo tcp timer fin-timeout

ViewSystem view

Parameter■ time-value: TCP finwait timer value, in second, with the value range of 76 to

3600.

DescriptionUsing the tcp timer fin-timeout command, you can configure the TCP finwait timer. Using the undo tcp timer fin-timeout command, you can restore the default value of the timer.

By default, TCP finwait timer value is 675 seconds.

When the TCP connection status changes from FIN_WATI_1 to FIN_WAIT_2, the finwait timer is enabled. If FIN packet is not received before the timeout of finwait timer, the TCP connection will be closed.

The configuration of this parameter needs to be implemented under the guidance of the technical support engineers.

For the related commands, see tcp timer syn-timeout and tcp window.

ExampleConfigure the TCP finwait timer value as 675 seconds.

[3Com] tcp timer fin-timeout 675


tcp timer syn-timeout Syntaxtcp timer syn-timeout time-value

undo tcp timer syn-timeout

View

System view

Parameter■ time-value: TCP synwait timer value in second, with the value range of 2 to

600.

DescriptionUsing the tcp timer syn-timeout command, you can configure the TCP synwait timer. Using the undo tcp timer syn-timeout command, you can restore the default value of the timer.

By default, TCP synwai timer value is 75 seconds.

When a syn packet is sent, TCP enables the synwait timer. If the response packet is not received before synwait timeout, the TCP connection will be disabled.


For the related commands, see tcp timer fin-timeout and tcp window.

ExampleConfigure the TCP synwait timer value as 75 seconds.

[3Com] tcp timer syn-timeout 75

tcp window Syntaxtcp window-size window

undo tcp window

ViewSystem view

Parameter■ window-size: The size of the transceiving buffer of the connection-oriented

Socket in kilobytes (KB), with the value ranging 1 to 32.

DescriptionUsing the tcp window command, you can configure the size of the transceiving buffer of the connection-oriented Socket. Using the undo tcp window command, you can restore the default size of the buffer.

By default, the size of the connection-oriented transceiving buffer is 4K bytes.


For the related commands, see tcp timer fin-timeout and tcp timer syn-timeout.


ExampleConfigure the size of the transceiving buffer of the connection-oriented Socket as 4 KB.

[3Com] tcp window 4

NAT Configuration Commands

debugging nat Syntaxdebugging nat { alg | event | packet [ interface { interface-type interface-number | interface-name } ] }

undo debugging nat { alg | event | packet [ interface { interface-type interface-number | interface-name } ] }

ViewUser view

Parameter

■ alg: Enables the application level gateway NAT debugging information.

■ event: Enables NAT event debugging information.

■ packet: Enables NAT data packet debugging information.

■ Interface: Enables NAT packet debugging for a special interface.

DescriptionUsing the debugging nat command, you can enable the NAT debugging function. Using the undo debugging nat command, you can disable the NAT debugging function.

display nat Syntaxdisplay nat { address-group | aging-time | all | outbound | server | statistics | session [ vpn-instance vpn-instance-name ] [ slot slot-number ] [ destination ip-addr ] [source global global-addr | source inside inside-addr ] }

ViewAny view

Parameter

■ address-group: Displays the information of the address pool.

■ aging-time: Displays the effective time for NAT connection.

■ all: Displays all the information about NAT.

■ outbound: Displays the information of the outbound NAT.

■ server: Displays the information of the internal server.

■ statistics: Displays the statistics of current NAT records.

■ session: Displays the information of the currently activated connection.

NAT Configuration Commands 461

■ vpn-instance vpn-instance-name: Displays the NAT table items of a special VPN. The omittance of this parameter means that NAT items for all VPNs will be listed out.

■ slot slot-number: Designates the slot number of an interface. This parameter is reserved especially for distributed environment use.

■ destination ip-addr: Displays the NAT table items of a special IP destination.

■ source global global-addr: Only displays the NAT entry with address as global-addr after NAT.

■ source inside inside-addr: Only displays the NAT entry with internal address as inside-addr.

DescriptionUsing the display nat command, you can display the configuration of address translation. Users can verify if the configuration of address translation is correct according to the output information after execution of this command. When address translation connection information is displayed, the parameters of global-addr and inside-addr can be specified for the display nat session command simultaneously.

Example

Display all the information about address translation.

<3Com> display nat allNAT address-group Information: 1: from 11.1.1.1to11.1.1.20 2: from 22.1.1.1to22.1.1.20NAT outbound information: Serial0/0/0: acl(11)-NAT address-group(1) [no-pat] Serial0/0/0: acl(22)-NAT address-group(2) [no-pat]Server in private network information:InterfaceGlobalAddrGlobalPort InsideAddr InsidePort ProSerial0/0/0201.119.11.380805.5.5.580(www)6(tcp)Serial0/0/0201.119.11.32121 5.5.5.521(ftp)6(tcp)NAT aging-time value information:tcp------aging-time value is 240(seconds)udp------aging-time value is 40(seconds)icmp-----aging-time value is 20(seconds)

The information above indicates:

Two address pools are configured: Address pool 1 ranges from 11.1.1.1 to 11.1.1.20, and address tool 2 ranges from 22.1.1.1 to 22.1.1.20.

Two address translation associations are configured at Serial0/0/0: ACL 11 is associated with address pool 1 and one-to-one address translation is performed; and ACL 22 is associated with address pool 2, and one-to-one address translation is performed.

Serial0/0/0 is configured with 2 internal servers: the www server of http://202.119.11.3:8080, whose internal address is 5.5.5.5; and the ftp server of ftp://202.119.11.3:2121, whose internal address is 5.5.5.5.


nat address-group Syntaxnat address-group group-number start-addr end-addr

undo nat address-group group-number

ViewSystem view

Parameter■ group-number: defined Address pool ID, it is an integer ranging from 0 to 31.

■ start-addr: Starting IP address in the address pool.

■ end-addr: Ending IP address in the address pool.

DescriptionUsing the nat address-group command, you can configure an address pool. Using the undo nat address-group command, you can delete an IP address pool.

Address pool indicates the cluster of some outside IP addresses. If start-addr and end-addr are the same, it means that there is only one address.

CAUTION: The length of an address pool (numbers of all addresses contained in an address pool) cannot exceed 256.

The address pool cannot be deleted, if it has been correlated to some certain access control list to perform the address translation.

ExampleConfigure an address pool from 202.110.10.10 to 202.110.10.15, with its NAT pool ID being 1.

[3Com] nat address-group 1 202.110.10.10 202.110.10.15

nat aging-time Syntaxnat aging-time { | default | { tcp | udp | icmp } time-value} }

ViewSystem view

Parameter■ time-value: A time value, expressed in second and ranging from 10 to 600..

■ tcp: The timeout of TCP connection.

■ udp: The timeout of UDP connection.

■ icmp: The time-out time of the protocol ICMP.

■ default: Sets to the default value.

DescriptionUsing the nat aging-time command, you can set the valid time of nat connection.

By default, the valid time for tcp address translation is 240 seconds, for udp it is 40 seconds, and for icmp it is 20 seconds.


This command is used to set the valid time of address translation connection, and different time values are set for different types of protocols. The time value is in second.

ExampleSet the valid connection time of TCP to 240 seconds.

[3Com] nat aging-time tcp 240

nat outbound Syntaxnat outbound acl-number [ address-group group-number [ no-pat ] ]

undo nat outbound acl-number [ address-group group-number [ no-pat ] ]

View

Interface view

Parameter

■ address-group: Configures address translation by means of address pool. If the address pool is not specified, use the IP address of the interface as the translated address, i.e., the "easy ip" feature.

■ no-pat: Uses simple address translation, which means only to translate the address of the packet but not use port information.

■ acl-number: ACL index in the range of 1 to 199 (the advanced ACL can be used).

■ group-number: The number of a defined address pool.

DescriptionUsing the nat outbound command, you can associate an ACL with an address pool, indicating that the address specified in the acl-number can be translated by using address pool group-number. Using the undo nat outbound command, you can remove the corresponding address translation.

Translation of the source address of the packet that conforms to the ACL is accomplished by configuring the association between the ACL and the address pool. The system performs address translation by selecting one address in the address pool or by directly using the IP address of the interface. Users can configure different address translation associations at the same interface. The corresponding undo form of the command can be used to delete the related address translation association. Normally, this interface is connected to ISP, and serves as the exit interface of the inside network.

The command without the address-group parameter implements the "easy-ip" feature. When performing address translation, the IP address of the interface is used as the translated address and the ACL can be used to control which addresses can be translated.

ExampleEnable the hosts of the 10.110.10.0/24 network segment to perform address translation by selecting the addresses from 202.110.10.10 to 202.110.10.12 as the translated address. Suppose that the interface Serial0/0/0 connects to ISP.

[3Com] acl number 1


[3Com-acl-basic-1] rule permit source 10.110.10.0 0.0.0.255[3Com-acl-basic-1] rule deny

Configure the address pool.

[3Com] nat address-group 1 202.110.10.10 202.110.10.12

Allow address translation and use the addresses of address pool 1 for address translation. During translation, the information of TCP/UDP port is used.

[3Com-Serial0/0/0] nat outbound 1 address-group 1

Delete the corresponding configuration.

[3Com-Serial0/0/0] undo outbound 1 address-group 1

Configuration of simple address translation (not using the TCP/UDP port information to perform the address translation)

[3Com-Serial1/0/0] nat outbound 1 address-group 1 no-pat


[3Com-Serial0/0/0] undo nat outbound 1 address-group 1 no-pat

The configuration that can be used when performing address translation by using the IP address of interface Serial0/0/0 directly.

[3Com-Serial0/0/0] nat outbound 1


[3Com-Serial0/0/0] undo nat outbound 1

nat server Syntaxnat server [ vpn-instance vpn-instance-name ] protocol pro-type global global-addr global-port1 global-port2 inside host-addr1 host-addr2 host-port

nat server [ vpn-instance vpn-instance-name ] protocol pro-type global global-addr [ global-port ] inside host-addr [ host-port ]

undo nat server [ vpn-instance vpn-instance-name ] protocol pro-type global global-addr global-port1 global-port2 inside host-addr1 host-addr2 host-port

undo nat server [ vpn-instance vpn-instance-name ] protocol pro-type global global-addr [ global-port ] inside host-addr [ host-port ]

ViewInterface view

Parameter■ vpn-instance-name: The virtual route forwarding instance of the VPN the

internal server belongs to. If the parameter is not configured, it represents that the internal server belongs to an ordinary private network, other than one MPLS VPN.


■ global-addr: An IP address provided for the outside to access (a legal IP address).

■ global-port: A service port number provided for the outside to access. If ignored, its value shall be the same with the host-port’s value.

■ host-addr: IP address of the server in internal LAN.

■ host-port: Service port number provided for a server in the range of 0 to 65535, and the common used port numbers are replaced by key words. For example, www service port number is 80, which can also be represented by www. ftp service port number is 21, and ftp can also stands for it. If the inside-port is 0, it indicates that all the types of services can be provided and the key word any can be used to stand for it in this situation. If the parameter is not configured, it is considered as the case of any, which is the same as that there is a static connection between global-addr and host-addr. When the host-port is configured as any, the global-port also should be any, otherwise the configuration is illegal.

■ global-port1, global-port2: Specifies a port range through two port numbers, forming a corresponding relation with the internal host address range. global-port2 must be larger than global-port1.

■ host-addr1, host-addr2: Defines a group of consecutive address ranges, which respectively one-to-one matches the port ranges defined above. host-addr2 must be bigger than host-addr1. The number of the address ranges should be the same as the number of ports defined by global-port1 and global-port2.

■ pro-type: The protocol type carried by IP, possibly being a protocol ID, or a key word as a substitution. For example: icmp (its protocol ID is 1), tcp (its protocol ID is 6), udp (its protocol ID is 7).

DescriptionUsing the nat server command, you can define the mapping table of an internal server. Users can access the internal server with the address and port as host-addr and host-port respectively through the address port defined by global-addr and global-port. Using the undo nat server command, you can remove the mapping table.

Through this command, you can configure some internal network servers for outside use. The internal server can locate in the ordinary private network or in MPLS VPN. For example, www, ftp, telnet, kpop3, dns and so on.

Up to 256 internal server conversion commands can be configured on one interface and at most 4096 internal servers can be configured on one interface. Up to 1024 internal server conversion commands can be configured in one system. If the nat servers are configured in the form of port range (i.e., specify a port range through configuring global-port1 and global-port2, forming a corresponding relation with the address range of the internal hosts), then the number of internal servers will be the same as that of the ports configured, and the max number of them are also 4096.

The interface on which this command is configured is interconnected with ISP and serves as the gateway of the internal network.

ExampleSpecify the IP address of the interior www server of the LAN as 10.110.10.10, the IP address of the interior ftp server as 10.110.10.11. It is expected that the outside


can access WEB through http:// 202.110.10.10:8080 and connect FTP web site through ftp://202.110.10.10. Suppose that Serial0/0/0 is connected to ISP.

[3Com-Serial0/0/0] nat server protocol tcp global 202.110.10.10 8080 inside 10.110.10.10 www[3Com] ip vpn-instance vrf10[3Com-vpn-instance] route-distinguisher 100:001[3Com-Serial0/0/0] nat server protocol tcp global 202.110.10.10 inside 10.110.10.11 ftp

Specify one interior host 10.110.10.12, expecting that the host of the exterior network can ping it with ping 202.110.10.11 command.

[3Com-Serial0/0/0] nat server protocol icmp global 202.110.10.11 inside 10.110.10.12

Delete the www server.

[3Com-Serial0/0/0] undo nat server protocol tcp global 202.110.10.10 8070 inside 10.110.10.10 www

By the command below, the internal ftp server of VPN vrf10 can be removed.

[3Com-Serial0/0/0] undo nat server protocol tcp global 202.110.10.11 8070 inside 10.110.10.11 ftp

Specify an outside address as 202.110.10.10, and map the ports ranging from 1001 to 1100 to the addresses of 10.110.10.1 to 10.110.10.100 respectively to access ftp service inside VPN vrf10. 202.110.10.10:1001 accesses 10.110.10.1 and 202.110.10:1002 accesses 10.110.10.2, etc.

[3Com-Serial0/0/0] nat server protocol tcp global 202.110.10.10 1001 1100 inside 10.110.10.1 10.110.10.100 telnet

reset nat Syntaxreset nat { log-entry | session slot slot-number }

ViewUser view

Parameter■ log-entry: Clears NAT log buffer.

■ slot slot-number: Number of the interface card, which only exists in the distributed environment.

■ session: Clears the information of the address translation table.

DescriptionThis command is used to clear up the mapping tables of address translation in the memory and release all the memory dynamically allocated to store the mapping tables.

ExampleIn the central environment, clear NAT log buffer.

IP Unicast Policy Routing Configuration Commands 467

<3Com> reset nat log-entry

In the distributed environment, clear NAT log buffer.

<3Com> reset nat log-entry slot 10

In the central environment, clear information of the address translation table.

<3Com> reset nat session

In the distributed environment, clear information of the address translation table.

<3Com> reset nat session slot 10

IP Unicast Policy Routing Configuration Commands

apply defaultoutput-interface

Syntaxapply default output-interface interface-type interface-number [ ... interface-type interface-number ]

undo apply default output-interface interface-type interface-number [ ... interface-type interface-number ]

ViewRoute-policy view



DescriptionUsing the apply default output-interface command, you can set default forwarding interface for packets. Using the undo apply default output-interface command, you can cancel the configuration of the default forwarding interface of packets.

This command is used to set forwarding interface for the matched IP packet, and the clause is valid for the packet whose route has not been found.

For the related commands, see apply ip-precedence, apply ip-address next-hop, apply output-interface, and apply ip-address default next-hop.

ExampleSet the default forwarding interface of packets as serial 0/0/0.

[3Com-route-policy] apply default output-interface serial 0/0/0

apply ip-address defaultnext-hop

Syntaxapply ip-address default next-hop ip-address [...ip address ]

undo apply ip-address default next-hop ip-address [...ip address ]



Parameter■ ip-address: IP address of default next hop.

DescriptionUsing the apply ip-address default next-hop command, you can set the default next hop of a packet. Using the undo apply ip-address default next-hop command, you can cancel the configured default packet next hop.

This command is only valid for the packet whose route has not been found.

For the related commands, see apply ip-precedence, apply output-interface, apply default output-interface, and apply ip-address next-hop.

ExampleSet the default next hop of a packet to 1.1.1.1.

[3Com-route-policy] apply ip-address default next-hop 1.1.1.1

apply ip-addressnext-hop

Syntaxapply ip-address next-hop ip-address [ ip-address ]

undo apply ip-address next-hop ip-address [ ip-address ]


Parameter■ ip-address: IP address of next hop.

DescriptionUsing the apply ip-address next-hop command, you can set the packet next hop. Using the undo apply ip-address next-hop command, you can cancel the configuration about the next hop.

This command is used to set the next hop for the matched IP packet and at most two next hops can be specified. The next hop should be adjacent to this device.

For the related commands, see apply ip-precedence, apply output-interface, apply default output-interface, and apply ip-address default next-hop.

ExampleSet the packet next hop to 1.1.1.1.

[3Com-route-policy] apply ip-address next-hop 1.1.1.1

apply ip-precedence Syntaxapply ip-precedence value

undo apply ip-precedence



Parameter■ value: The preference value. There are totally 8 (in the range 0 to 7)

preferences:

0 routine

1 priority

2 immediate

3 flash

4 flash-override

5 critical

6 internet

7 network

DescriptionUsing the apply ip-precedence command, you can set precedence of IP packets. Using the undo apply ip-precedence command, you can remove the precedence of IP packets. This command is used to configure the set clause of route-policy and the preference for the matched IP packets.

For the related commands, see apply output-interface, apply ip-address next-hop, apply default output-interface, and apply ip-address default next-hop.

ExampleSet the preference of IP packet to 5 (critical).

[3Com-route-policy] apply ip-precedence critical

apply output-interface Syntaxapply output-interface interface-type interface-number [ interface-type interface-number ]

undo apply output-interface interface-type interface-number [ interface-type interface-number ]




DescriptionUsing the apply output-interface command, you can set a packet forwarding interface. Using the undo apply output-interface command, you can cancel the configuration on a forwarding interface.

This command is used to set the packet forwarding interface for the matched IP packet. At most two forwarding interfaces can be specified.

For the related commands, see apply ip-precedence, apply ip-address next-hop, apply default output-interface, and apply ip-address default next-hop.


ExampleSpecify forwarding interface as serial0/0/0 for the matched IP packet.

[3Com-route-policy] apply output-interface Serial 0/0/0

display ip policy Syntaxdisplay ip policy

ViewAny view

ParameterNone

DescriptionUsing the display ip policy command, you can view the routing policies of local and configured interface policy routings. This command is used to display the routing policies of local and configured interface policy routings.

ExampleDisplay the routing policies of the local and configured interface policy routings.

<3Com> display ip policyRoute-policyInterfacepr02 Localpr02 Virtual-Template0pr01 Ethernet 0/0/0

The first line is prompt information. The first row shows where is used the routing policy indicated in the second row. Take the first line as an example, "local" indicates that the policy routing is used on the local router, i.e., all packets sent from the local router (not forward through it) using the policy routing "pr02". The second and third lines represent that the interfaces virtual-template0 and Ethernet0/0/0 use route policy pr02 and pr01 respectively.

display ip policy setup Syntaxdisplay ip policy setup { policy-tag | local | interface interface-type interface-number }

ViewAny view

Parameter■ policy-tag: Displays the setting information of policy routings identified by

map-tag.

■ local: Displays the setting information of local policy routings.

■ interface: Displays the setting information of interface policy routings.




DescriptionUsing the display ip policy setup command, you can view the setting information of policy routings.

The display output of the display ip policy setup local command is the same as that with policy-tag which will be shown soon, except that it displays the policy routing enabled on the local router but not the configuration of a certain specified route-policy.

The display ip policy setup interface command displays the configuration of the policy routing enabled on the interface.

ExampleDisplay the specific configurations of the specified policy routing, enabled or disabled.

<3Com> display ip policy setup pr01route-policy pr01 permit node 0if-match acl 11apply ip-address next-hop 3.3.3.3

This command displays the specific configuration of the policy routing named pr01. As shown above, the policy routing has one 0 node and includes an if-match clause and an apply clause. For the accurate meanings of the if-match clause and the apply clause, you can refer to the configuration guide of the command. The example shows how the option map-tag is used.

display ip policy statistic Syntaxdisplay ip policy statistic { { policy-tag | local | interface interface-type interface-number } [ verbose ] }

ViewAny view

Parameter■ policy-tag: Displays the statistics of the policy identified by policy-tag

performing policy routing process on packets.

■ local: Displays the statistics of local policy routing packets.

■ interface: Displays the statistics of interface policy routings.



■ verbose: Displays the detailed information.

DescriptionUsing the display ip policy statistic command, you can view the statistics of policy routings.

ExampleDisplay the matching statistics of the specified policy routing.

<3Com> display ip policy statistic locallocal policy pr02 summary information:


Main boardTotal success packet number: 0Total failure packet number: 0

The above information shows the forwarding success and failure times for all the forwarding policy (i.e., the apply clause) of the local router policy routing.

To display the more detail statistics classified according to each apply clause, the option verbose should be added.

<3Com> display ip policy statistic local verboselocal policy pr02 detail information:Main boardapply output-interface: NULL0Total success packet number: 0Fail for interface not exists: 0Fail for interface down: 0apply ip-address next-hop: 5.5.5.5Total success packet number: 0Fail for error next-hop: 0Fail for interface not exists: 0Fail for interface down: 0

If the optional field verbose is added, the more detail statistics of each apply clause in the policy routing will be displayed separately and the statistics of the forwarding errors has been classified.

if-match acl Syntaxif-match acl acl-number

undo if-match acl acl-number


Parameter■ acl-number: Address access control list number.

DescriptionUsing the if-match acl command, you can set the match condition for IP address. Using the undo if-match acl command, you can delete the IP address match condition.

An acl-number can be basic standard access-list or advanced access-list.

For the related command, see if-match packet-length.

ExampleSet packets that accord with the access list 10 to be matched.

[3Com] route-policy map1 permit node 10[3Com-route-policy] if-match acl 10

if-match packet-length Syntaxif-match packet-length min-len max-len


undo if-match packet-length


Parameter■ min-len: Minimum packet length of network layer.

■ max-len: Maximum packet length of network layer.

DescriptionUsing the if-match packet-length command, you can set length match conditions of IP packets. Using the undo if-match packet-length command, you can delete the configuration about IP packet length match conditions.

For the related command, see if-match acl.

ExampleSet the packet in the range 100 to 200 to be matched.

[3Com] route-policy map1 permit node 10[3Com-route-policy] if-match packet-length 100 200

ip local policyroute-policy

Syntax

ip local policy route-policy policy-tag

undo ip local policy route-policy policy-tag

ViewSystem view

Parameterpolicy-tag: Policy name.

DescriptionUsing the ip local policy route-policy command, you can enable local policy routing. Using the undo ip local policy route-policy command, you can delete the existing setting of the policy routing.

By default, interface local policy routing is disabled.

This command is used to enable or disable the local policy routing for the packets sent by the local device. If there is no special demand, it is recommended that users do not configure local policy routing.

For the related command, see ip policy route-policy.

ExampleEnable a local policy routing at system view. The policy routing is specified by route-policy AAA.

[3Com] ip local policy route-policy AAA

ip policy route-policy Syntaxip policy route-policy policy-name


undo ip policy route-policy policy-name

ViewInterface view

Parameterpolicy-name: Policy name.

DescriptionUsing the ip policy route-policy command, you can enable policy routing at an interface. Using the undo ip policy route-policy command, you can delete the existing policy routing at an interface.

By default, interface policy routing is disabled.

For the related command, see ip local policy route-policy.

ExampleEnable the policy routing specified by route-policy AAA at the interface Ethernet 0/0/0.

[3Com-ethernet0/0/0] ip policy route-policy AAA

IP Multicast Policy Routing Configuration Commands

apply ip-addressnext-hop

Syntaxapply ip-address next-hop { acl acl-number | ip-address [ ip-address ] }

undo apply ip-address next-hop [ acl acl-number | ip-address [ ip-address ] ]


Parameter■ acl-number: Standard ACL number ranging from 1 to 99.

■ ip-address: Specifies the next hop address. Multiple next hop addresses can be specified.

DescriptionUsing the apply ip-address command, you can configure the next hop IP address list in a route-node. Using the undo apply ip-address command, you can remove the configuration.

By default, no apply clause is defined.

This command specifies the next hop address for packets that match the if-match acl command. It specifies the next hop IP address list for multicast policy routing through the ACL. This command is in juxtaposition relation with the apply output-interface command. If both apply clauses are configured at the same time, in multicast policy routing, the packets will be replicated and forwarded to all the

IP Multicast Policy Routing Configuration Commands 475

interfaces and next hops specified by the ACLs respectively. This is different from that only one apply clause works in unicast policy routing.

For the next hop IP address, the specified ACL is the standard ACL.

For the related commands, see if-match acl, apply output-interface, and display ip multicast-policy.

apply output-interface Syntaxapply output-interface acl acl-number

undo apply output-interface [ acl acl-number ]


Parameteracl-number: ID of interface-based ACL, ranging from 1000 to 1999.

DescriptionUsing the apply output-interface command, you can configure an outgoing interface list in a route-node. Using the undo apply output-interface command, you can remove the configuration.


This command specifies outgoing interfaces for packets that match the if-match command. It specifies outgoing interfaces for multicast policy routing through the ACL. The action executed to packets that meet the if-match conditions defined by the match clause is as follows: If outgoing forwarding interfaces are set in the route-node through the ACL, the packets will be replicated and forwarded to all interfaces specified by the ACL.

For an outgoing interface, the specified ACL is the one based on interface.

This command is in juxtaposition relation with the apply ip-address next-hop command. If both apply clauses are configured at the same time, in multicast policy routing, the packets will be replicated and forwarded to all the interfaces and next hops specified by the ACLs respectively. This is different from that only one apply clause works in unicast policy routing.

For the related commands, see apply ip-address next-hop, if-match acl, and display ip multicast-policy.

debugging ipmulticast-policy

Syntaxdebugging ip multicast-policy [ acl-number ]

undo debugging ip multicast-policy

ViewUser view

Parameter■ acl-number: ID of interface-based ACL ranging 1000 to 1999.


DescriptionUsing the debugging ip multicast-policy command, you can enable the debugging of IP multicast policy routing. Using the undo debugging ip multicast-policy command, you can disable the debugging of multicast policy routing.

The contents of the debugging information contain the route-node that the packets match and the next hop/outgoing interface to which the packets are forwarded. The debugging information output can be filtered with the interface-based ACL.

It should be noted that enabling the debugging would affect the performance of the system. You should disable the debugging when the system is running normally.

For the related command, see route-policy.

display ipmulticast-policy

Syntaxdisplay ip multicast-policy [ setup interface interface-name | statistic interface interface-name ]

ViewAny view

Parameter■ interface-name: Interface name.

DescriptionUsing the display ip multicast-policy command, you can view the multicast policy routing information.

ExampleDisplay the information about the multicast policy routing configured on interface Ethernet2/0/0.

[3Com] display ip multicast-policy setup interface ethernet2/0/0route-policy cc permit node 10if-match acl 110apply ip-address next-hop acl 50route-policy cc permit node 20if-match acl 120apply output-interface acl 1005

Display the statistic information about the multicast policy routing configured on interface Ethernet2/0/0.

[3Com] display ip multicast-policy statistic interface ethernet2/0/0interface Ethernet2/0/0 multicast-policy routing summary information:Total packets matched: 5Total packets forward : 20

if-match acl Syntaxif-match { acl acl-number | ip-prefix ip-prefix-name }

undo if-match { acl acl-number | ip-prefix ip-prefix-name }

IP Multicast Policy Routing Configuration Commands 477


Parameter■ acl-number: Standard or extended ACL number ranging from 1 to 199.

■ ip-prefix-name: Specifies the name of an address prefix list used for filtering.

DescriptionUsing the if-match acl command, you can set conditions that multicast packets should meet in each policy node. Using the undo if-match acl command, you can remove the match conditions set.

By default, no if-match clause is defined.

If a packet meets the if-match conditions specified in a policy node, actions specified by the node will be performed. If a packet does not meet the if-match conditions specified in a policy node, the next node will be detected. If a packet does not meet the conditions of all policy nodes, the packet will return to the normal forwarding flow. The configuration and use of this command are the same as those of the same command in the unicast policy routing.

ip multicast-policyroute-policy

Syntaxip multicast-policy route-policy policy-name

undo ip multicast-policy route-policy policy-name

ViewInterface view

Parameterpolicy-name: Specifies the name of a route-policy, which uniquely identifies one route-policy.

DescriptionUsing the ip multicast-policy route-policy command, you can enable a multicast policy routing on an interface. Using the undo ip multicast-policy route-policy command, you can remove a multicast policy route applied on the interface.

By default, no multicast route policy is enabled.

Using this command can enable multicast policy routing defined by the route-policy named policy-name on an interface.

When multicast policy routing is configured on an interface of a router, all multicast packets entering the router on the interface will be filtered.

The filter method is that all policy nodes of the route-policy specified by the policy routing are tried in the order of the ascending sequence of the numbers. If a packet meets the if-match conditions specified in a policy node, actions specified by the node will be performed. If a packet does not meet the if-match conditions specified in a policy node, the next node will be detected. If a packet does not meet the conditions of any policy nodes, the packet will return to the normal forwarding flow.



ExampleEnable multicast policy routing named map1 on interface Ethernet 2/0/0.

[3Com-Ethernet2/0/0] ip multicast-policy route-policy map1

route-policy Syntaxroute-policy policy-name { permit | deny } node sequence-number

undo route-policy policy-name [ permit | deny ] [ node sequence-number ]

ViewSystem view

Parameter■ policy-name: Specifies the name of a route-policy, which uniquely identifies

one route-policy.

■ permit: Specifies the match mode of the route-policy node defined as permit. When a route entry meets the if-match clause of the node, the entry is permitted to pass the filter of the node and the apply clause of the node will be performed. If a route entry does not meet the if-match clause of the node, the next node of the route-policy will be tested. For multicast policy routing configuration, all the if-match clauses except the if-match acl clause are invalid.

■ deny: Specifies the match mode of the route-policy node defined as deny. When a route entry meets the if-match clause of the node, the entry is denied to pass the filter of the node and the next node will not be tested. For multicast policy routing configuration, all the if-match clauses except the if-match acl clause are invalid.

■ sequence-number: Identifies a node in the route-policy. When the route-policy is used for routing information filtering, the node with a smaller sequence-number is tested first. This parameter ranges from 0 to 65535.

DescriptionUsing the route-policy command, you can configure a route-policy node and enter the route-policy view. Using the undo route-policy command, you can remove a route-policy or a node.

By default, no route-policy is defined.

The policy of IP multicast policy routing is implemented by configuring route-policies. Multiple route-policies can be configured on a router. Each route-policy may contain multiple route-nodes. Different route-nodes in a route-policy are identified by different integer sequence-numbers. In each route-node, set the conditions that packets should match (i.e., the match rule) with the if-match command and configure the forwarding actions to be executed to packets that meet the match conditions with the apply command.

The logical relation that filter the if-match clauses is “and”. This means that any if-match clause passing the filter will cause others to be ignored.

Only the if-match acl clause is effective for multicast policy routing. The logical relation between route-policy nodes is “or”. That is, one packet forwarded in one policy node results in all the following nodes being ignored. If all permit nodes can

IPX Configuration Commands 479

not succeed in matching with the features of packet or any deny node is matched, the packet will then be forwarded or discarded normally, up to the route table.

When multicast policy routing is configured on an interface of a router, all multicast packets entering the router on the interface will be filtered. The filter method is that all policy nodes of the route-policy are applied in the ascending sequence of their ID(a number).

For the related commands, see if-match, apply output-interface, apply ip-address next-hop, and display ip multicast-policy.

ExampleConfigure a route-policy named map1 with the node ID of 10 and with the match mode of permit and enter the route-policy view.

[3Com] route-policy map1 permit node 10[3Com-route-policy]

IPX Configuration Commands

debugging ipx packet Syntax

debugging ipx packet [ interface-type interface-num | interface-name ]

undo debugging ipx packet [ interface-type interface-num | interface-name ]

View

User view

Parameter


■ interface-num: Interface number.


Description

Using the debugging ipx packet command, you can enable IPX packet debugging switch to view the contents of IPX packet received and transmitted. Using the undo debugging ipx packet command, you can disable the debugging switch. By default, IPX packet debugging switch is disabled.

Example

Enable IPX packet debugging switch.

<3Com> debugging ipx packet*0.8942310-IPX-8-IPXPKT:Sending, interface = Serial3/0/0,pktlen = 40, hops = 0, pkttype = 0x1,dstnet = 0xb, dstnode = ffff-ffff-ffff, dstsocket = 0x453,srcnet = 0xb, srcnode = 00e0-fc01-5517, srcsocket = 0x453prompt: Sending the packet.*0.8942610-IPX-8-IPXPKT:Delivering, interface = Serial3/0/0,


pktlen = 480, hops = 0, pkttype = 0x4,dstnet = 0xb, dstnode = ffff-ffff-ffff, dstsocket = 0x452,srcnet = 0xb, srcnode = 00e0-fc01-54f6, srcsocket = 0x452prompt: IPX packet is delivering up!Table 7 Description of display information of the debugging ipx packet command

debugging ipx ping Syntax

debugging ipx ping

undo debugging ipx ping

View

User view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the debugging ipx ping command, you can enable IPX Ping packet debugging switch to view the contents of Ping packet received and transmitted. Using the undo debugging ipx ping command, you can disable the debugging switch.

By default, IPX Ping packet debugging switch is disabled.

Example

Enable IPX Ping packet debugging switch.

<3Com> debugging ipx ping*0.15396012-IPX-8-IPXPING:Ping receiving: Request, Src = a.00e0-fc04-8859, Dst = a.00e0-fc01-54f6*0.15396130-IPX-8-IPXPING:Ping sending: Response, Src = a.00e0-fc01-54f6, Dst = a.00e0-fc04-8859Table 8 Description of display information of the debugging ipx ping command

Item Descriptionpktlen = Length of packet in decimal format (not including MAC address header).hops = How many routers the packet has passed through.pkttype = Packet type in hexadecimal format.dstnet = Destination network number of the packet.dstnode = Destination node address of the packet.dstsocket = Destination socket of the packet.srcnet = Source network number of the packet.srcnode = Source node address of the packet.srcsocket = Source socket of the packet.promt: Prompt of how router processes the packet and reasons of discarding packet.

Item DescriptionSrc = Source address of Ping packet.Dst = Destination address of Ping packet.


debugging ipx rip Syntax

debugging ipx rip { packet [ verbose ] | event }

undo debugging ipx rip { packet [ verbose ] | event }

View

User view

Parameter■ packet: Debugging information of packet received and transmitted.

■ verbose: Displays detailed information about packet received and transmitted.

■ event: Event debugging information, such as Up/Down of an interface and related timer events.

DescriptionUsing the debugging ipx rip command, you can enable RIP debugging switch to view information on RIP packet received and transmitted, routing changes and timer expiry. Using the undo debugging ipx rip command, you can disable RIP debugging switch.

By default, IPX RIP debugging switch is disabled.

ExampleEnable IPX RIP packet debugging switch.

<3Com> debugging ipx rip packetSend RIP Response to Ethernet0/0, length 96src:a.00e0-fc01-5517(453), dst:a.ffff-ffff-ffff(453)Number of Entries in Pkt: 8

Enable IPX RIP packet verbose debugging switch.

<3Com> debugging ipx rip packet verboseSend RIP Response to Ethernet0/0, length 96src:a.00e0-fc01-5517(453), dst:a.ffff-ffff-ffff(453)Number of Entries in Pkt: 8 Network 0x1, hops 2, delay 2 Network 0x2, hops 2, delay 2 Network 0x3, hops 2, delay 2 Network 0x4, hops 2, delay 2 Network 0x5, hops 2, delay 2 Network 0x6, hops 2, delay 2 Network 0x8, hops 2, delay 8 Network 0xa, hops 1, delay 2

Enable IPX RIP event debugging switch.

<3Com> debugging ipx rip event*0.274181351-IPXRIP-8-IPXRIP_Event:The number 1 equal route nexthop: 00e0-fc04-8859*0.274181450-IPXRIP-8-IPXRIP_Event:The network 8 totally have 1 equal route

debugging ipxrtpro-flash

Syntax

debugging ipx rtpro-flash


undo debugging ipx rtpro-flash

View

User view

ParameterNone

DescriptionUsing the debugging ipx rtpro-flash command, you can turn on the debugging switch of route refreshing in the IPXRM module. Using the command, you can turn off the debugging switch of route refreshing in the IPXRM module.

This kind of debugging information is generated when routes are refreshed for the sake of route change.

ExampleSwitch on route refreshing debugging for IPXRM module.

<3Com>debugging ipx rtpro-flash<3Com>

Remove an IPX static route.

[3Com]undo ipx route-static b2 Serial 1

*0.18537610 3Com RMX/8/DBG:

IPXRM set a Rth on the flash list, ulRthDest = 0xb2 .

[3Com]

*0.18537820 3Com RMX/8/DBG:

IPXRM finish a flash, reset a Rth on the flash list, ulRthDest = 0xb2 .

[3Com]

debugging ipxrtpro-interface

Syntax

debugging ipx rtpro-interface

undo debugging ipx rtpro-interface

View

User view

ParameterNone

DescriptionUsing the debugging ipx rtpro-interface command, you can turn on the debugging switch of interface change in the IPXRM module. Using the undo debugging ipx rtpro-interface command, you can turn off the debugging switch of interface change in the IPXRM module.

Such debugging information is generated whenever IPXRM module receives interface change messages. These messages are generated when interface status changes between up and down, or interface is added or removed.


ExampleEnable IPX RIP packet debugging switch

<3Com> debugging ipx rip packet

Switch on interface change debugging for IPXRM module.

<3Com>debugging ipx rtpro-interface<3Com>

Trigger interface change by using shut/undo shut command.

[3Com-Serial1] shut[3Com-Serial1]

%Oct 24 14:11:27 2003 3Com PHY/2/PHY: Serial1: change status to down

%Oct 24 14:11:27 2003 3Com IFNET/5/UPDOWN:Line protocol on the interface Serial1 turns into DOWN state

%Oct 24 14:11:27 2003 3Com IFNET/5/UPDOWN:Protocol IPX on the interface Serial1 turns into DOWN state

*0.19023320 3Com RMX/8/DBG:IPXRM recieve interface change msg, msg type IPX_IF_DOWN .if_index is 0x286 .Interface name is Serial1 .

[3Com-Serial1][3Com-Serial1]undo shut[3Com-Serial1]

%Oct 24 14:11:34 2003 3Com PHY/2/PHY: Serial1: change status to up

%Oct 24 14:11:34 2003 3Com IFNET/5/UPDOWN:Line protocol on the interface Serial1 turns into UP state

%Oct 24 14:11:34 2003 3Com IFNET/5/UPDOWN:Protocol IPX on the interface Serial1 turns into UP state

*0.19032220 3Com RMX/8/DBG:IPXRM recieve interface change msg, msg type IPX_IF_UP .if_index is 0x286 .Interface name is Serial1 .

[3Com-Serial1]

debugging ipxrtpro-routing

Syntax

debugging ipx rtpro-routing

undo debugging ipx rtpro-routing

View

User view

Parameter

None


Description

Using the debugging ipx rtpro-routing command, you can turn on the debugging switch of route change in the IPXRM module. Using the command, you can turn off the debugging switch of route change in the IPXRM module.

This kind of debugging information is generated when route changes as addition, deletion or attribute adjustment occur.

ExampleSwitch on route change debugging for IPXRM module.

<3Com>debugging ipx rtpro-routing<3Com>

Add a static route

3Com]ipx route-static d10 Serial 1

*0.19579120 3Com RMX/8/DBG:IPXRM ADD route !

Dest: d10 Nexthop: 0.0000-0000-0000

Interface: a.00e0-fcfb-3a00(Serial1)

Protocol: Static Preference: 60

Ticks: 6 Hops: 1

*0.19579230 3Com RMX/8/DBG:IPXRM route change to ACTIVE !

Dest: d10 Nexthop: 0.0000-0000-0000

Interface: a.00e0-fcfb-3a00(Serial1)

Protocol: Static Preference: 60

Ticks: 6 Hops: 1

debugging ipx sappacket

Syntax

debugging ipx sap [ packet [ verbose ] | event ]

undo debugging ipx sap [ packet [ verbose ] | event ]

View

User view

Parameter

■ packet: Debugging information of packet received and transmitted.

■ verbose: Displays detailed information about packet received and transmitted.

■ event: Event debugging information, such as Up/Down of an interface and related timer events.

Description

Using the debugging ipx sap command, you can enable IPX SAP debugging switch to view information on SAP packet received and transmitted, routing changes and


timer expiry. Using the undo debugging ipx sap command, you can disable IPX SAP debugging switch.

Enabling IPX SAP debugging switch, you can confirm whether SAP packet is received. Normally, a router or server sends out an SAP update packet every minute. By default, each SAP packet includes up to seven service information items at most. If a lot service information needs advertising on the network, the router sends out multiple packets per update. For example, if a router has 20 service information items in SIT, it sends three SAP packets per update. The first SAP includes the first seven items, the second SAP includes the next seven items, and the last update includes the last six items.

The debugging ipx sap command generates significant amount of output, use it with caution on networks that have many interfaces and a great deal of service information. Disable debugging switch immediately after debugging to reduce effect to normal services as possible.

Example

Enable SAP packet verbose debugging switch.

<3Com> debugging ipx sap packet verbose*0.20909856-IPXSAP-8-IPX SAP: MSG: Receive Response Packet From Eth0,Length 480Src: 000a.0000-0104-8f02 (0452) Dest: 000a.ffff-ffff-ffff (0452)Number of entries in pkt: 7 Server type 2000 "PS1" 0008.000a-000a-000a (0452) hop 3 Server type 2345 "kkkkk" 000d.0005-0005-0005 (0452) hop 6 Server type 9000 "kiran-temp" 000d.0006-0006-0006 (0452) hop 16 Server type 6000 "kiran3" 000d.0003-0003-0003 (0452) hop 6 Server type 5000 "kiran2" 000d.0002-0002-0002 (0452) hop 16 Server type 4000 "kiran1" 000d.0001-0001-0001 (0452) hop 16 Server type 1000 "FS2" 000d.000a-000a-000a (0452) hop 2

Enable SAP packet debugging switch.

<3Com> debugging ipx sap packet*0.20909856-IPXSAP-8-IPX SAP : MSG:Recieve Response Packet From Eth0,Length 480Src: 000a.0000-0104-8f01 (0452) Dest: 000a.ffff-ffff-ffff (0452)Number of entries in pkt: 4

Enable SAP event debugging switch.

<3Com> debugging ipx sap Event*0.20776625-IPXSAP-8-IPX SAP: MSG:IPXSAP: Route UP Event Received: N

display ipx interface Syntax

display ipx interface [ interface- type interface-num | interface-name ]

View

Any view

Parameter

■ Interface-type: Interface type.


■ Interface-num: Interface number.

■ Interface-name: Interface name.

Description

Using the display ipx interface command, you can view IPX interface configuration information and interface parameters in communication devices.

Example

Display IPX configuration and statistics of the interface Ethernet1/0/0.

<3Com> display ipx interface ethernet 1/0/0Ethernet1/0/0 is upIPX address is 2.00E0-FC01-0000 [up]SAP is enabledSplit horizon is enabledUpdate change only is disabledForwarding of IPX type 20 propagation packet is enabledDelay of this IPX interface, in ticks is 1SAP GNS response is enabledRIP packet maximum size is 432 bytesSAP packet maximum size is 480 bytesIPX encapsulation is Netware 802.30 received, 0 sent0 bytes received, 0 bytes sent0 RIP received, 0 RIP sent, 0 RIP discarded0 RIP specific requests received, 0 RIP specific responses sent0 RIP general requests received, 0 RIP general responses sent0 SAP received, 0 SAP sent, 0 SAP discarded0 SAP requests received, 0 SAP responses sent

Table 9 Description of display information of the display ipx interface command

Item DescriptionEthernet1/0/0 is ... In terms of physical layer and link layer status, the current interface is UP, DOWN or a

IPX address is ... IPX network ID and node value of the current interface. Refer to the commipx enable for details of network ID and node value.

[up] IPX protocol status of the current interface.SAP is … Whether SAP is enabled on the current interface.Split horizon is … Whether split horizon is enabled on the current interface. The related com

split-horizon.Update change only is … Whether trigger update is enabled on the current interface. The related co

update-change-only.Forwarding of IPX type 20 propagation packet is ...

Whether IPX type 20 propagation packet is permitted to be forwarded on trelated command is ipx netbios-propagation.

Delay of this IPX interface, in ticks is ...

Delay value of the current interface. The value is configured by the ipx tick

SAP GNS response is ... Whether SAP GNS reply is enabled on the current interface. The related cogns-disable-reply.

RIP packet maximum size is ... bytes Maximum size of RIP updating packet on the current interface. The relatedmtu.

SAP packet maximum size is ... bytesMaximum size of SAP updating packet on the current interface. The relatemtu.

received Total number of packets received on the current interface.sent Total number of packets sent on the current interface.bytes received Total number of bytes received on the current interface.bytes sent Total number of bytes sent on the current interface.RIP received Total number of IPX RIP packets received on the current interface.RIP sent Total number of IPX RIP packets sent on the current interface.RIP discarded Total number of IPX RIP packets discarded on the current interface.RIP specific requests received Total number of IPX RIP specific requests received on the current interface.RIP specific responses sent Total number of IPX RIP specific responses sent on the current interface.RIP general requests received Total number of IPX RIP general requests received on the current interface.


display ipx routing-table Syntax

display ipx routing-table [ network ] [ verbose ]

display ipx routing-table protocol { default | direct | rip | static } [ inactive | verbose ]

View

Any view

Parameter

■ network: Destination network ID of IPX static route. It is an 8-bit hexadecimal number, ranging from 1 to 0xFFFFFFFE. Display IPX routing information to specified destination network ID.

■ verbose: Displays detailed route information, including active and inactive routes.

■ default: Displays all the default routing information.

■ direct: Displays all the directly connected routing information.

■ rip: Displays all IPX RIP routing information.

■ static: Displays all IPX static routing information.

■ inactive: Only displays inactive routing information.

Description

■ Using the display ipx routing-table command, you can view active IPX routing information.

■ Using the display ipx routing-table verbose command, you can view detailed IPX routing information, including active and inactive routes.

■ Using the display ipx routing-table network command, you can view active IPX routing information to specified destination network ID.

■ Using the display ipx routing-table network verbose command, you can view detailed IPX routing information to specified destination network ID, including active and inactive routes.

■ Using the display ipx routing-table protocol { rip | static | default | direct } command, you can view IPX routing information for specified destination type, including active and inactive routes.

■ Using the display ipx routing-table protocol { rip | static | default | direct } verbose command, you can view detailed IPX routing information for specified destination type, including active and inactive routes.

Example

Display active IPX routing information.

[3Com] display ipx routing-tableRouting tables:Summary count: 4

RIP general responses sent Total number of IPX RIP general responses sent on the current interfacSAP received Total number of SAP packets received on the current interface.SAP sent Total number of SAP packets sent on the current interface.SAP discarded Total number of SAP packets discarded on the current interface.SAP requests received Total number of SAP requests received on the current interface.SAP responses sent Total number of SAP responses sent on the current interface.


Dest_Ntwk_ID Proto Pre Ticks Hops Nexthop Interface0x11 Direct 0 6 0 0.0000-0000-0000 Serial0/0/00x22 RIP 100 7 1 11.0000-0165-6401 Serial0/0/00x33 Direct 0 1 0 0.0000-0000-0000 Ethernet0/0/00x100 Static 60 6 1 0.0000-0000-0000 Serial0/0/0

The following table explains the contents in the above displayed information:

Description of display information of the display ipx routing-table command

Display detailed IPX routing information, including active and inactive routes.

<3Com> display ipx routing-table verboseRouting tables:Destinations: 103 Routes: 103Destination Network ID: 0x11 Protocol: Direct Preference: 0 Ticks: 6 Hops: 0 Nexthop: 0.0000-0000-0000 Time: 0 Interface: 11.0000-0165-6400(Serial0) State: <Active>Destination Network ID: 0x22 Protocol: RIP Preference: 100 Ticks: 7 Hops: 1 Nexthop: 11.0000-0165-6401Time: 15 Interface: 11.0000-0165-6400(Serial0) State: <Active>Destination Network ID: 0x33 Protocol: Direct Preference: 0 Ticks: 1 Hops: 0 Nexthop: 0.0000-0000-0000Time: 0 Interface: 33.0000-0165-6400(Ethernet0) State: <Active>Destination Network ID: 0x100 Protocol: Static Preference: 60 Ticks: 6 Hops: 1 Nexthop: 0.0000-0000-0000Time: 0 Interface: 11.0000-0165-6400(Serial0) State: <Active>Table 10 Description of display information of the display ipx routing-table verbose command

Item DescriptionDest_Ntwk_ID Destination network ID of the routeProto Protocol type of the routePre Preference of the routeTicks Ticks value of the routeHops Hops value of the routeNexthop The next hop of the routeInterface Outgoing interface of the route

Item Description

TimeAging time value of the route. Without aging, the value of interface route and static route is 0.


display ipx routing-tablestatistics

Syntax

display ipx routing-table statistics

View

Any view

ParameterNone

Description

Using the display ipx routing-table statistics command, you can view IPX routing statistics.

Example

Display IPX routing statistics.

<3Com> display ipx routing-table statisticsRouting tables:Proto/State route active added deleted freedDirect 2 2 2 0 0Static 1 1 2 1 1RIP 1 1 1 0 0Default 0 0 0 0 0Total 4 4 5 1 1

display ipx service table Syntax

display ipx service-table [ [ type service-type | name name | network network | order { network | type } ] | [ inactive ] ] [ verbose ]

View

Any view

Parameter

■ type: Displays information for specified service type ID.

■ service-type: The type of service.

■ name: Displays information for specified server name.

■ name: Name of the server.

■ network: Displays service information of the server on specified network segment.

■ network: The network ID of the network segment.

■ order: Displays service information after classified by the type.

■ network: Classified by the network ID.

■ type: Classified by the service type.

■ inactive: Displays inactive service information.

■ verbose: Displays details about service information.

StateState can be <Active>, <Inactive> or <Delete>. <Active> indicates active route, <Inaindicates inactive route and <Delete> indicates the route is being deleted.


Description

Using the display ipx service-table command, you can view contents of IPX service information table. The output information of the command helps users with IPX SAP troubleshooting.

Example

Display contents of IPX service information table.

[3Com] display ipx service-tableAbbreviation: S - Static, Pref - Preference(Decimal), NetId - Network number,NodeId - Node address, hop - Hops(Decimal), Recv-If - Interface from which the service is receievedName Type NetId NodeId Sock Pref Hops Recv-IfFS2 1000 000d 000a-000a-000a 0452 500 02 Eth1/0/0PS1 2000 0008 000a-000a-000a 0452 500 03 Eth1/0/0kkkkk 2345 000d 0005-0005-0005 0452 500 06 Eth1/0/0Hello3 6000 000d 0003-0003-0003 0452 500 06 Eth1/0/0

Display contents of service information table of type 5.

[3Com] display ipx service-table type 5Abbreviation: S - Static, Pref - Preference(Decimal), NetId - Network number,NodeId - Node address, hop - Hops(Decimal), Recv-If - Interface from which the service is receievedName Type NetId NodeId Sock Pref Hops Recv-IfPrn1 0005 000d 000a-000a-000a 0452 500 02 Eth1/0/0Prn2 0005 0008 000a-000a-000a 0452 500 03 Eth1/0/0Prn3 0005 000d 0005-0005-0005 0452 500 06 Eth1/0/0Prn4 0005 000d 0006-006-0006 0452 500 06 Eth1/0/0

display ipx statistics Syntax

display ipx statistics

View

Any view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the display ipx statistics command, you can view statistics and type of IPX packet transmitted and received.

Example

Display IPX statistics.

<3Com> display ipx statisticsReceived: 0 total, 0 packets pitched 0 packets size errors, 0 format errors


0 bad hops(>16), 0 discarded(hops=16) 0 other errors, 0 local destination 0 can not be dealedSent: 0 forwarded, 0 generated 0 no route, 0 discardedRIP: 0 sent, 0 received 0 responses sent, 0 responses received 0 requests received, 0 requests dealed 0 requests sent, 0 periodic updatesSAP: 0 general requests received 0 specific requests received 0 GNS requests received 0 general responses sent 0 specific responses sent 0 GNS responses sent 0 periodic updates, 0 errorsTable 11 Description of display information of the display ipx statistics command

ipx enable Syntax

ipx enable [ node node ]

undo ipx enable

View

System view

Item DescriptionReceived Statistics for received messages0 total Total number of received messages0 packets pitched Total number of messages whose headers are re-pitched0 packets size errors Total number of discarded messages due to packet size errors0 format errors Total number of discarded messages due to encapsulation format erro0 bad hops Total number of messages whose hop field values exceed 160 discarded(hop=16) Total number of messages whose hop field values are 160 other errors Total number of discarded messages due to other errors0 local destination Total number of messages which have local destinations0 can not be dealt Total number of messages that can not be dealt withSent: Statistics for sent messages0 forwarded Number of messages which need to be forwarded0 generated Number of messages which are sent by router itself0 no route Number of messages which do not find routes0 discarded Number of messages discarded during sendingRIP: Statistics for RIP messages0 sent Number of RIP messages sent by router0 received Number of RIP messages received0 responses sent Number of RIP response messages sent by router0 responses received Number of RIP response messages received0 requests received Number of RIP request messages received0 requests dealt Number of RIP request messages dealt0 requests sent Number of RIP request messages sent by router0 periodic updates Number of RIP periodic update messages sent by routerSAP: Statistics for SAP messages0 general requests received Number of received SAP general request messages0 specific requests received Number of received SAP specific request messages0 GNS requests received Number of received SAP GNS request messages0 general responses sent Number of sent SAP general response messages0 specific responses sent Number of sent SAP specific response messages0 GNS responses sent Number of sent SAP GNS response messages0 periodic updates Number of SAP periodic update messages sent by router0 errors Number of error SAP messages


Parameter

■ node: node value of the router. It is a 48-bit value represented by a triplet of four-digit hexadecimal numbers separated by “-“. It is neither a broadcasting address nor a multicast address. If the parameter is not configured, the router will assign MAC address of the first Ethernet interface as its node value.

If there is no Ethernet interface in the router, the system will assign a random node value based on the system clock.

Description

Using the ipx enable command, you can activate IPX. Using the undo ipx enable command, you can deactivate IPX and remove all IPX configurations simultaneously.

Activating IPX again after executing the undo ipx enable command, you can not restore any IPX configuration.

Example

Enable IPX.

[3Com] ipx enable

Disable IPX.

[3Com] undo ipx enable

ipx encapsulation Syntax

ipx encapsulation [ dot2 | dot3 | ethernet-2 | snap ]

undo ipx encapsulation

View

Ethernet Interface view

Parameter

■ dot2: Encapsulation format is Ethernet_802.2.

■ dot3: Encapsulation format is Ethernet_802.3.

■ ethernet-2: Encapsulation format is Ethernet_II.

■ snap: Encapsulation format is Ethernet_SNAP.

Description

Using the ipx encapsulation command, you can set IPX frame encapsulation format on Ethernet interface. Using the undo ipx encapsulation command, you can restore the default IPX frame encapsulation format.

By default, IPX frame encapsulation format on Ethernet interface is dot3 (Ethernet_802.3).

In WAN interfaces, IPX frame only supports PPP encapsulation.

Example

Configure IPX frame encapsulation format on the interface Ethernet0/1/0 as Ethernet_II.

[3Com-Ethernet 0/1/0] ipx encapsulation ethernet-2


Restore the default IPX frame encapsulation format on the interface Ethernet0/1/0.

[3Com-Ethernet 0/1/0] undo ipx encapsulation

ipx netbios-propagation Syntax

ipx netbios-propagation

undo ipx netbios-propagation

View

Interface view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the ipx netbios-propagation command, you can configure the router to forward type 20 broadcast packets on the current interface. Using the undo ipx netbios-propagation command, you can disable the forwarding of type 20 packets.

By default, type 20 broadcast packets will be discarded by the router rather than forwarded.

IPX type 20 packet is a packet for NetBIOS (Network Basic Input/Output System) defined by Novell NetWare.

Example

Enable the receipt and forwarding of type 20 broadcast packets.

[3Com-Ethernet 0/1/0] ipx netbios-propagation

Disable the receipt and forwarding of type 20 broadcast packets.

[3Com-Ethernet 0/1/0] undo ipx netbios-propagation

ipx network Syntax

ipx network network-number

undo ipx network

View

Interface view

Parameter

■ network: Network ID of IPX interface in hex. It ranges from 0x1 to FFFFFFFD.

Description

Using the ipx network command, you can configure a network ID for an interface. Using the undo ipx network command, you can delete IPX network ID of an interface.

By default, IPX is disabled on all interfaces after it is activated. There is no IPX network ID on the interface.


Example

Configure the interface Ethernet0/1/0 as IPX interface and assign it with a network ID.

[3Com-Ethernet 0/1/0] ipx network 675

Cancel the configuration of the interface Ethernet0/1/0 as IPX interface.

[3Com-Ethernet 0/1/0] undo ipx network

ipx rip import-route Syntax

ipx rip import-route static

undo ipx rip import-route static

View

System view

Parameter■ static: Imported static route.

DescriptionUsing the ipx rip import-route static command, you can import static routes into RIP. RIP adds them in their route updates. Using the undo ipx rip import-route static command, you can disable the importation of static routes.

ExampleImport a static route to RIP.

[3Com] ipx rip import-route static

ipx rip mtu Syntax

ipx rip mtu bytes

undo ipx rip mtu

View

Interface view

Parameter

■ bytes: Maximum RIP updating packet size in byte, ranging from 432 to 1500. By default, it is 432.

Description

Using the ipx rip mtu command, you can configure RIP updating packet size. Using the undo ipx rip mtu command, you can restore the default configuration.

By default, the maximum size of RIP updating packets is 432 bytes. In RIP updating packets, the size of each routing information item is 8 bytes and the size of IPX header and RIP header is 32 bytes. So an updating packet can carry up to 50 routing information items at most.


Example

Configure the maximum size of RIP updating packets on the interface Ethernet1/0/0 to 500 bytes.

[3Com-Ethernet1/0/0] ipx rip mtu 500

ipx rip multiplier Syntax

ipx rip multiplier multiplier

undo ipx rip multiplier

View

System view

Parameter■ multiplier: It is used to calculate the aging period of RIP routing information

table items, ranging from 1 to 1000. By default, the value is 3. The actual aging time is the value of multiplier multiplied by the RIP updating interval.

Description

Using the ipx rip multiplier command, you can configure the aging period of RIP routing information table items. Using the undo ipx rip multiplier command, you can restore the default configuration.

By default, RIP aging period is 3 times of updating interval.

Routers may contain a timer for each item in their routing information table, which keeps track of elapsed time since the route was received. Every time the updating packet containing the routing information is received, the timer is reset to zero. If RIP route is not updated in a period of time, the system will regard the route is no longer valid and delete it from the routing table.

For the related command, see ipx rip timer update.

Example

Configure RIP aging period of routing information table items is 5 times of updating interval.

[3Com] ipx rip multiplier 5

ipx rip timer update Syntax

ipx rip timer update seconds

undo ipx rip timer update

View

System view

Parameter

■ seconds: RIP updating interval in second, ranging from 10 to 60000.


Description

Using the ipx rip timer update command, you can configure RIP updating interval. Using the undo ipx rip timer update command, you can restore the default value of RIP updating interval.

By default, the RIP updating interval is 60 seconds.

On a network, routers need constantly exchange routing information with each other to keep routing information consistent with actual network topology. In RIP, directly connected routers periodically send updating packets to each other.

The changes of RIP updating interval will affect aging period. For the related command, see ipx rip multiplier.

Example

Configure RIP updating interval to 30 seconds.

[3Com] ipx rip timer update 30

ipx route Syntax

ipx route-static network [ network.node | interface-type interface-num | interface-name ] [ preference value ] [ tick ticks hop hops ]

undo ipx route-static { network [ network.node | interface-type interface-num | interface-name ] | all }

View

System view

Parameter

■ network: Destination network ID of IPX static route. It is an 8-bit hexadecimal number, ranging from 1 to 0xFFFFFFFE.

■ network.node: The next hop address of IPX static route. network is the network ID of the next hop. node is a triplet of four-bit hexadecimal numbers separated by “-“, each ranging from 1 to 0xFFFF.

■ interface-type: Outgoing interface type, only supporting the interface with PPP encapsulation. It can be Serial or POS interface.

■ interface-num: Outgoing interface number.

■ interface-name: Outgoing interface name.

■ preference: Route preference. The preference of directly connected routes is fixed to 0 and cannot be changed. By default, the preference of active IPX static route is 60 and can be configured. The preference of dynamic IPX routes is fixed to 100 and cannot be changed.

■ value: Route preference value, ranging from 0 to 255. The less the value, the higher the preference.

■ ticks: It indicates the necessary time to destination network (1 tick = 1/18 second). By default, it is the tick value of outgoing interface. Interfaces of different types have different default tick values. The tick value of Ethernet interface is 1 and that of Serial interface is 6. When the tick value of an interface is modified, the tick value of the corresponding static route will also be changed.


■ hops: Number of routers which are passed by to destination network. By default, the value is 1.

■ all: All IPX static routes.

Description

Using the ipx route-static command, you can configure IPX static route. Using the undo ipx route-static command, you can delete static route.

The system regards the IPX static route with destination network ID being -2 (0xFFFFFFFE) as the default route.

Example

Configure an IPX static route with destination network ID being 0x5a, the next hop being 1000.0-0c91-f61f, ticks 10 and hops 2.

[3Com] ipx enable[3Com] ipx route-static 5a 1000.0-0c91-f61f 10 2

Configure the default IPX route with the next hop being 3.4a-60-7, ticks 10, hops 2 and preference 20.

[3Com] ipx enable[3Com] ipx route-static -2 3.4a.60.7 tick 10 hop 2 preference 20

Configure an IPX static route with destination network ID being 3a, outgoing interface being Serial1/0/0, ticks 10, hops 2 and preference 30.

[3Com] ipx enable[3Com] ipx route-static 3a serial 0/0/0 tick 10 hop 2 preference 30

ipx routeload-balance-path

Syntax

ipx route load-balance-path paths

undo ipx route load-balance-path

View

System view

Parameter

■ paths: The maximum equivalent route number to the same destination address, ranging from 1 to 64. By default, the value is 1.

Description

Using the ipx route load-balance-path command, you can configure the equivalent route number to the same destination address. Using the undo ipx route load-balance-path command, you can restore the default configuration.

The equivalent route number to the same destination address is the maximum number of active equivalent routes in the current system. If the newly configured value is less than the current active route number, the system will change the excessive active routes to inactive status.

Example

Configure the equivalent route number to the same destination address to 30.


[3Com] ipx route load-balance-path 30

ipx routemax-reserve-path

Syntax

ipx route max-reserve-path paths

undo ipx route max-reserve-path

View

System view

Parameter

■ paths: The maximum dynamic route number to the same destination address, ranging from 1 to 255. By default, the value is 4.

Description

Using the ipx route max-reserve-path command, you can configure the maximum dynamic route number to the same destination address. Using the undo ipx route max-reserve-path command, you can restore the default configuration.

When the dynamic route number to the same destination address exceeds the maximum value configured, the newly found dynamic routes will not be added into the routing table, discarded directly. If the newly configured value is less than the original one, the excessive routes in the current routing table will not be deleted until they get aging themselves or are deleted manually.

Example

Configure the maximum dynamic route number to the same destination address to 200.

[3Com] ipx route max-reserve-path 200

ipx sap disable Syntax

ipx sap disable

undo ipx sap disable

View

Interface view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the ipx sap disable command, you can disable SAP on the current interface. Using the undo ipx sap disable command, you can enable SAP on the current interface.

By default, the interface SAP is enabled as soon as IPX is enabled.

Example

Disable SAP on the interface Ethernet0/0/0.

[3Com-Ethernet0/0/0] ipx sap disable


Re-enable SAP on the interface Ethernet0/0/0.

[3Com-Ethernet0/0] undo ipx sap disable

ipx sap gns-disable-reply Syntax

ipx sap gns-disable-reply

undo ipx sap gns-disable-reply

View

Interface view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the ipx sap gns-disable-reply command, you can disable IPX GNS reply on the current interface. Using the undo ipx sap gns-disable-reply command, you can enable IPX GNS reply on the current interface.

By default, GNS reply is enabled on an interface.

Example

Disable GNS reply on the interface Ethernet0/0/0.

[Ethernet0/0/0] ipx sap gns-disable-reply

Re-enable GNS reply on the interface Ethernet0/0/0.

[Ethernet0/0/0] undo ipx sap gns-disable-reply

ipx sap gns-load-balance Syntax

ipx sap gns-load-balance

undo ipx sap gns-load-balance

View

System view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the ipx sap gns-load-balance command, you can configure the router to respond GNS request in Round-robin method, i.e., all servers respond GNS request in turn. Using the undo ipx sap gns-load-balance command, you can configure the nearest server to respond GNS request.

By default, for GNS request, a router will inform all servers it knows to respond in Round-robin method to avoid overload of one server.

For the related command, see ipx sap gns-disable-reply.

Example

Configure the nearest server to respond GNS request.


[3Com] undo ipx sap gns-load-balance

Configure all servers to respond GNS request in Round-robin method.

[3Com] ipx sap gns-load-balance

ipx sapmax-reserve-servers

Syntax

ipx sap max-reserve-servers length

undo ipx sap max-reserve-servers

View

System view

Parameter

■ length: The length of the dynamic service information reserve queue, ranges from1 to 2048. By default, the value is 2048.

Description

Using the ipx sap max-reserve-servers command, you can configure the length of the service information reserve queue. Using the undo ipx sap max-reserve-servers command, you can restore the default configuration.

If the newly configured service information queue length is less than the present one, the items in SIT will not be deleted. If the service information item number for the same service type exceeds the maximum value configured, the new service information will not be added.

Example

Set the maximum length of service information reserve queue to 1024.

[3Com] ipx sap max-reserve-servers 1024

ipx sap mtu Syntax

ipx sap mtu bytes

undo ipx sap mtu

View

Interface view

Parameter

■ bytes: The maximum SAP packet size in byte, ranging from 480 to 1500. By default, the value is 480.

Description

Using the ipx sap mtu command, you can configure the maximum size of SAP updating packet. Using the undo ipx sap mtu command, you can restore the default configuration.

By default, the maximum size of SAP updating packet is 480 bytes. The size of IPX header and SAP header is 32 bytes, so a 480-byte SAP updating packet contains 7 service information items (64 bytes each).


Example

Set the maximum size of SAP updating packet on the interface Ethernet1/0/0 to 674 bytes (carrying 10 service information items at most).

[3Com-Ethernet0/0/0] ipx sap mtu 674

ipx sap multiplier Syntax

ipx sap multiplier multiplier

undo ipx sap multiplier

View

System view

Parameter

■ multiplier: It is used to calculate the aging period of SAP service information table items, ranging from 1 to 1000. By default, the value is 3. When the updating interval is 60 seconds, the aging period is 60*3 = 180 seconds.

Description

Using the ipx sap multiplier command, you can configure the aging period of SAP service information table items. Using the undo ipx sap multiplier command, you can restore the default value of SAP aging period.

By default, the aging period of SAP service information table items is 3 times of SAP updating interval.

For the related command, see ipx sap timer update.

Example

Set the aging period of SAP service information table items is 5 times of updating interval.

[3Com] ipx sap multiplier 5

ipx sap timer update Syntax

ipx sap timer update seconds

undo ipx sap timer update

View

System view

Parameter

■ seconds: SAP updating interval, ranging from 10 to 60000 seconds. By default, the value is 60 seconds.

Description

Using the ipx sap timer update command, you can configure SAP updating interval. Using the undo ipx sap timer update command, you can restore the default value of SAP updating interval.

When an interface adopts trigger update method, the command configuration does not take effect.


For the related commands, see ipx sap multiplier and ipx update-change-only.

Example

Configure SAP updating interval to 300 seconds.

[3Com] ipx sap timer update 300

ipx service Syntax

ipx service service-type name network.node socket hop hopcount preference preference

undo ipx service { { service-type [ name [ network.node ] ] [ preference preference ] } | all }

View

System view

Parameter

■ service-type: Service type is a 4-byte hexadecimal number. 0 indicates all service types.

■ name: The server name which provides the service, in character string with the maximum length being 48 bytes.

■ network.node: Network ID and node value of a server. Network ID is represented by an 8-bit hexadecimal number, ranging from 0x1 to 0xFFFFFFFD. The 0s in front can be omitted when inputting. Node value is used to identify a node in the network, with the length of 48 bits, represented by a triplet of 4-digit hexadecimal numbers separated by “-“.

■ socket: It is represented by a 4-bit hexadecimal number, ranging from 0x1 to 0xFFFF.

■ hop-count: The number of hops to the server in decimal, ranging from 1 to 15. Note that hop count more than or equal to 16 implies the service is unreachable.

■ preference: The preference of service information, ranging from 1 to 255. The less the value, the higher the preference. By default, the preference of the static service information table items is 60 and the preference of the dynamic one is 500.

Description

Using the ipx service command, you can add a static service information item to SIT. Using the undo ipx service command, you can delete a static service information item from SIT.

The NetWare server uses SAP to advertise service information and stores the service information to SIT which is dynamically updated by SAP. Adding a service information item to SIT, users can access the service.

Example

Add a static service information item with service type 4, service name “FileServer”, server network ID 130, node value 0000-0a0b-abcd, server hops 1 and server preference 60.


[3Com] ipx service 4 FileServer 130.0000-0a0b-abcd 451 hop 1 preference 60[3Com] ipx service 4 FileServer 130.0000-0a0b-abcd 451 hop 1[3Com] ipx service 114 MyServer 199.0000-0a0b-abcd 451 hop 10

Service information with server type 114 will not be advertised if there is no active route to the network 199.

ipx split-horizon Syntax

ipx split-horizon

undo ipx split-horizon

View

Interface view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the ipx split-horizon command, you can enable split horizon on the current interface. Using the undo ipx split-horizon command, you can disable split horizon on the current interface.

By default, split horizon is enabled on the interface.

Split horizon is a way to avoid routing loops, i.e., routing information received from an interface is not permitted to be sent from the interface. The function does not take effect to point-to-point connection links.

Example

Enable split horizon on the interface Ethernet1/1/0.

[3Com-Ethernet1/1/0] ipx split-horizon

Disable split horizon on the interface Ehernet1/1/0.

[3Com-Ethernet1/1/0] undo ipx split-horizon

ipx tick Syntax

ipx tick ticks

undo ipx tick

View

Interface view

Parameter■ ticks: Delay time in tick, ranging from 0 to 30000. One tick is 1/18 second

(approximately 55 ms). By default, the delay of Ethernet interface is 1 tick, that of the asynchronous serial port is 30 ticks and that of WAN port is 6 ticks.


Description

Using the ipx tick command, you can configure the delay of interface sending IPX packets. Using the undo ipx tick command, you can restore the default value of interface delay.

As the IPX RIP delay field, the delay value configured by the ipx tick command is a basis for the optimal routing selection.

Example

Configure the delay is 5 ticks on the interface Ethernet1/0/0.

[3Com-Ethernet1/0/0] ipx tick 5

ipx update-change-only Syntax

ipx update-change-only

undo ipx update-change-only

View

Interface view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the ipx update-change-only command, you can enable trigger update on the current interface. Using the undo ipx update-change-only command, you can disable trigger update on the current interface.

By default, trigger update is disabled on the interface.

IPX RIP and SAP periodically advertise updating broadcast packets. Users can configure trigger update to avoid broadcast flood.

Example

Enable trigger update on the interface Ethernet1/1/0.

[3Com-Ethernet 1/1/0] ipx update-change-only

Disable trigger update on the interface Ethernet1/1/0.

[3Com-Ethernet 1/1/0] undo ipx update-change-only

ping ipx Syntax

ping ipx network.node [ -c count ] [ -t timeout ] [ -s size ]

View

Any view

Parameter

■ network.node: Ping destination address. The parameter network can be an eight-bit hexadecimal number ranging from 0x1 to 0xFFFFFFFD. The 0s in front can be omitted when inputting. The parameter node is a 48-bit value represented by a triplet of four-digit hexadecimal numbers separated by “-“.


The 0s in front of node value cannot be omitted.

■ count: Number of Ping packets that are sent. By default, the value is 5.

■ timout: The period of time to wait for Ping response. By default, the value is 2 seconds.

■ size: Ping packet size. By default, the value is 100 bytes.

Description

Using the ping ipx command, you can check host reachability and network connectivity in IPX network.

Example

Ping system whose destination address is 675.0000-a0b0-fefe with default parameters.

<3Com> ping ipx 675.0000-a0b0-fefe

reset ipx statistics Syntax

reset ipx statistics

View

User view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the reset ipx statistics command, you can clear IPX statistics by the system.

Example

Clear IPX statistics.

<3Com> reset ipx statistics

reset ipx routing-tablestatistics

Syntax

reset ipx routing-table statistics protocol [all | default | direct | rip | static]

View

User view

Parameter

■ all: Clears statistical information of all types IPX route.

■ default: Clears the statistical information of the default IPX route type.

■ direct: Clears the statistical information of the IPX route directly connected.

■ rip: Clears the statistical information of the IPX RIP route.

■ static: Clears the statistical information of the static IPX route.


Description

The reset ipx routing-table statistics command is used to clear the statistical information of a specified type of IPX route. Such information can be shown upon the terminal using the display ipx routing-table statistics command.

Example

Add 5 IPX static routes to the router, then delete them, and then add anther 9 IPX static routes. The IPX route statistical information would be as follows:

[3Com]dis ipx routing-table statistics

Routing tables:

Proto/State route active added deleted freed

Direct 1 1 1 0 0 Static 9 9 14 5 5 RIP 0 0 0 0 0 Default 0 0 0 0 0

Total 10 10 15 5 5 [3Com]Clear the IPX static route.<3Com>reset ipx routing-table statistics protocol static

This will erase the specific routing counters information.

Are you sure?[Y/N]y

<3Com>

The displayed statistical information shows that all three items (add, delete, freed) of static route have changed to 0, and the below Total item has also changed accordingly.

<3Com>dis ipx routing-table statistics

DLSw Configuration Commands

bridge-set (insynchronous serial

interface view)

Syntaxbridge-set bridge-set-number

undo bridge-set bridge-set-number

ViewSynchronous serial interface view

DLSw Configuration Commands 507

Parameter■ bridge-set-number: The bridge group number the synchronous serial port is to

be added into, ranging from 1 to 63.

DescriptionUsing the bridge-set (in Synchronous serial interface system view) command, you can add the synchronous serial interface encapsulated into SDLC into the bridge group. Using the undo bridge-set (in synchronous serial interface view) command, you can delete the interface from the DLSw bridge group.

By default, no synchronous serial port is added into the bridge group.

In order for the SDLC encapsulated synchronous serial port to join the DLSw forwarding, the SDLC interface is needed to added into a bridge group by using this command. What is different is that the bridge group on the Ethernet interface joins the local forwarding, while the bridge group configured on the SDLC only joins the DLSw forwarding, that is, all the data on it will be forwarded onto the TCP tunnel. If it is configured in the Ethernet Interface view, the Ethernet interface of the same group number on the router can forward packets transparently. But packets cannot be transferred transparently between the serial ports. Each serial port only exchanges packet with the remote end.

ExampleAdd the Serial1/0/0 into the DLSw bridge group numbered 20.

[3Com] dlsw bridge-group 20[3Com] interface Serial1/0/0[3Com-Serial1/0/0] bridge-set 20

bridge-set (in theEthernet Interface view)

Syntaxbridge-set bridge-set-number

undo bridge-set bridge-set-number

ViewEthernet Interface view

Parameter■ bridge-set-number: The bridge group number that the Ethernet interface is

added into, ranging from 1 to 63.

DescriptionUsing the bridge-set (in the Ethernet Interface view) command, you can add the Ethernet interface into the bridge. Using the undo bridge-set (in the Ethernet Interface view) command, you can delete the interface from the DLSw bridge group.

By default, no Ethernet interface is added into the bridge group.

After an Ethernet interface is added into the bridge group, the LLC2 packets on the Ethernet interface can be sent to the remote peer through the related TCP tunnel.

ExampleAdd the Ethernet1/0/0 interface into the DLSw bridge group numbered 20.


[3Com] dlsw bridge-group 20[3Com] interface Ethernet1/0/0[3Com-Ethernet1/0/0] bridge-set 20

code nrzi Syntaxcode nrzi

undo code

ViewSynchronous serial interface system view

ParameterNone

DescriptionUsing the code nrzi command, you can configure the NRZI encoding of the synchronous serial port. Using the undo code nrzi command, you can remove the NRZI encoding of the synchronous serial port.

By default, the NRZ encoding is configured on the synchronous serial port.

There are two coding schemes, NRZI and NRZ, available on the synchronous serial port. The NRZ coding scheme is generally used in our router. The serial port coding scheme of some SNA devices is the NRZI coding scheme. Therefore the coding scheme of the router needs to be changed according to the encoding of the connected device.

ExampleConfigure the NRZI encoding on the Serial1/0/0.

[3Com-Serial1/0/0] code nrzi

debugging dlsw Syntax

debugging dlsw { circuit [ correlator ] | tcp [ ip-address ] }

undo debugging dlsw { circuit [ correlator ] | tcp [ ip-address ] }

ViewUser view

Parameter■ circuit: Enables the DLSw circuit debugging.

■ correlator: Distinguishes different IDs of the circuits.

■ tcp: Enables the debugging of the DLSw peers.

■ ip-address: IP address.

DescriptionUsing the debugging dlsw command, you can enable the DLSw debugging. Using the undo debugging dlsw command, you can disable the DLSw debugging.


debugging llc2 Syntaxdebugging llc2 circuit [ correlator ]

undo debugging llc2 circuit [ correlator ]

ViewUser view

Parameter■ correlator: Distinguishes different IDs of the circuits.

DescriptionUsing the debugging llc2 command, you can enable the LLC2 debugging. Using the undo debugging llc2 command, you can disable the LLC2 debugging.

debugging sdlc Syntaxdebugging sdlc [ all | event | packet ]

undo debugging sdlc { all | event | packet }

ViewUser view

Parameter■ all: Enables all debuggings of the SDLC.

■ event: Enables the SDLC event debugging.

■ packet: Enables the SDLC packet debugging.

DescriptionUsing the debugging sdlc command, you can enable the SDLC debugging. Using the undo debugging sdlc command, you can disable the SDLC debugging.

display dlswbridge-entry

Syntaxdisplay dlsw bridge-entry [ interface-name | interface-type interface-number ]

ViewAny view

ParameterNone

DescriptionUsing the display dlsw bridge-entry command, you can view the bridge group information.

ExampleDisplay the bridge group information.

<3Com> display dlsw bridge-entryMac_entry Port group hashIndex0000.e81c.b6bf Ethernet0/0/0 1 79


display dlsw circuits Syntaxdisplay dlsw circuits [ circuit-id ] [ verbose ]

ViewAny view

Parameter■ circuit-id: Displays the virtual circuit number of the specified DLSw.

■ verbose: Displays the detail information of the virtual circuits.

DescriptionUsing the display dlsw circuits command, you can view the DLSw virtual circuits. The output information of the command helps the user understand the information regarding DLSw virtual circuits.

ExampleDisplay the general information of the virtual circuits.

<3Com> display dlsw circuitsCorrelator Local addr(LSAP) Remote addr(RSAP) State2ce0005 0020.357b.e065 (4) 0000.1738.6dfd (4) CONNECTED

Syntax description:Correlator: Distinguish different IDs of the circuits

Local addr(LSAP) Local MAC address, with the “lsap” being the last SAP used by the local device.

Remote addr(RSAP) Remote MAC address, with the “rsap” being the last SAP used by the remote device.

State: State of the links.

Display the detail information of the virtual circuits.<3Com> display dlsw circuits verboseCorrelator Local addr(LSAP) Remote addr(RSAP) State2ce0005 0020.357b.e065 (4) 0000.1738.6dfd (4) CONNECTEDPort Ethernet 0/0/0Direction:ORIGINConnection Time: 14:19:49Flow Control: Transmit CW:40 GT:0 Receive CW:40 GT:0Info-Frame: Transmit:0 Receive:0 Drop:0

display dlswinformation

Syntaxdisplay dlsw information [ local ] [ ip-address ]

ViewAny view

Parameter■ local: Displays the local exchange capability information.

■ ip-address: Displays the exchange capability information of specified IP address.


DescriptionUsing the display dlsw information command, you can view the DLSw exchange capability information. The output information of the command facilitates the user to understand the status of the DLSw virtual circuit and perform fault diagnosis.

ExampleDisplay the general information of exchange capability.

<3Com> display dlsw informationDLSw: Capabilities for peer 10.10.20.1:Vendor ID (OUI) : '00000c' (3Com)Version number : 01Release number : 00Init Pacing Window : 40Num of TCP sessions : 01Mac address exclusive : noNetBIOS Name exclusive : noMac address List : noneNetBIOS Name List : noneConfigured IP address : 14.0.0.1Version string :Copyright (c) 1997-2002 3Com TECH CO., LTD.

■ Syntax description:

■ Version number: RFC 1795

■ Release number: Release version of RFC 1795

■ Init Pacing Window: Size of the initiated window

■ Num of TCP sessions: Number of TCP sessions

■ Mac address exclusive: Reachable MAC address registered in the router

■ NetBIOS Name exclusive: Reachable NetBIOS address registered in the router

■ Mac address List: Reachable MAC address list

■ NetBIOS Name List: Reachable NetBIOS address

■ Configured IP address: Local IP address

■ Version string: Version number of 3Com’s router operation system

Display the local exchange capability information.

<3Com> display dlsw information localDLSw: Capabilities for local:Vendor ID (OUI) : '00e0fc' (3Com)Version number : 1Release number : 0Init Pacing Window : 40Num of TCP sessions : 1Mac address exclusive : noNetBIOS Name exclusive : noMac address List : noneNetBIOS Name List : noneConfigured IP address : 12.0.0.1Version string :Copyright (c) 1997-2002 3Com TECH CO., LTD.


display dlsw remote Syntaxdisplay dlsw remote [ ip-address ]

ViewAny view

Parameter■ ip-address: Displays the information of the remote peer with specified IP

address or of all the remote peers.

DescriptionUsing the display dlsw remote command, you can view the information of the remote peers. The output information helps the user to understand the connection state between the DLSw and the remote peers.

ExampleDisplay the information of the remote peers.

<3Com> display dlsw remote Peers: State pkts_rx pkts_tx drops uptime*TCP 11.0.0.1 DISCONNECT 0 0 0 00:00:00*TCP 13.0.0.1 DISCONNECT 0 0 0 00:00:00*TCP 14.0.0.1 CONNECT 1897 1899 0 14:26:22

Syntax description:

*TCP: The * mark indicates the connection can be created on the peer. If there is no this mark before the TCP, it indicates it is an inactivated backup peer.

■ Peers: The IP address used by PEER.

■ State: The PEER state.

■ pkts_rx: The number of packets received by PEER.

■ pkts_tx: The number of packets sent by PEER.

■ drops: The number of packets dropped by PEER.

■ uptime: The connecting time.

display llc2 Syntaxdisplay llc2 [ circuit correlator ]

ViewAny view

Parameter■ correlator: ID used to distinguish different circuits.

DescriptionThe display interface command is used to display statistical information of LLC2.

Example

Display the statistical information of LLC2


<3Com> display llc2 circuit 46465025llc2 circuit index 46465025 Local MAC 0.20.35.7b.e0.65 Remote MAC 0. 0.84.25.1e.e9 Local Sap 4 Remote Sap 4 Role secondary State : NORMAL

dlsw bridge-set Syntaxdlsw bridge-set bridge-set-number

undo dlsw bridge-set bridge-set-number

ViewSystem view

Parameter■ bridge-set-number: ID of bridge group, ranging from 1 to 63, local valid.

DescriptionUsing the dlsw bridge-set command, you can configure the bridge group to connect DLSw . Using the undo dlsw bridge-set command, you can delete the bridge.

In order to forward packets of specified bridge group to the remote end through the TCP connection, a local bridge group needs to be connected with the DLSw by using this command, that is, packets of the local bridge group can be sent to the remote end through the TCP tunnel. This command can be used many times to connect many bridge groups with the DLSw, and make them all capable of joining the forwarding through the TCP tunnel.

ExampleConfigure the bridge group connected with the DLSw, with the ID of the bridge group being 20.

[3Com] dlsw bridge-group 20

dlsw enable Syntaxdlsw enable

undo dlsw enable

ViewSystem view

ParameterNone

DescriptionUsing the dlsw enable command, you can enable the DLSw performance. Using the undo dlsw enable command, you can suspend the DLSw performance.

By default, the DLSw performance is enabled.


After this command is performed, the system will release all dynamic resources, but retain the original configuration.

ExampleSuspend the DLSw performance.

[3Com] undo dlsw enable

Enable the DLSw performance.

[3Com] dlsw enable

dlsw local Syntaxdlsw local ip-address [ init-window init-window-size ] [ keepalive keepalive-interval ] [ max-frame max-frame-size ] [ max-window max-window-size ] [ permit-dynamic ]

undo dlsw local ip-address [ init-window ] [ keepalive ] [ max-frame ] [ max-window ] [ permit-dynamic ]

ViewSystem view

Parameter■ ip-address: IP address of the created local peer.

■ init-window-size: Size of the initialized local response window, ranging from 1 to 2000.

■ keepalive-interval: Time interval for sending the “keepalive”, ranging from 0 to 1200 seconds.

■ max-frame-size: Maximum length of the packet, which can be 516, 1470, 1500, 2052, 4472, 8144, 11407, 11454, or 17800 bytes.

■ max-window-size: Size of the maximum local response window, ranging from 1 to 2000.

■ permit-dynamic: Permits unpreconfigured remote router to initiate connections and dynamically create peers. The remote peer is unnecessarily be configured on the local end using this parameter, and the local peer waits for the connection initiated by the remote peer.

DescriptionUsing the dlsw local command, you can create the DLSw local peer. Using the undo dlsw local command, you can delete the local peer or restore the default values of the parameters.

The default init-window-size is 40. The default keepalive-interval is 30 seconds. The default max-frame-size is 1500 bytes. The default max-window-size is 50.

To create the TCP tunnel is the first step for establishing the DLSw connection. In order to create the TCP tunnel, the DLSw local peer is to be first configured to specify the local IP address that creates the TCP connection before receiving the TCP connection request initiated by the remote router. A router can only have one local peer.


ExampleCreate the DLSw local peer, with the IP address being 1.1.1.1, the size of the local response window being 50, time interval for sending the “keepalive” being 40 seconds, both the maximum length of the packet max-frame-size and the size of the maximum local response window being the default value.

[3Com] dlsw local 1.1.1.1 init-window 50 keepalive 40

dlsw remote Syntaxdlsw remote ip-address [ backup backup-address ] [ priority priority] [ keepalive keepalive-interval ] [ max-frame max-frame-size ] [ max-queue max-queue-length ] [ linger minutes ]

display dlsw remote ip-address

ViewSystem view

Parameter■ ip-address: Specifies the IP address of the remote peer.

■ backup backup-address: the backup IP address of the remote peer.

■ priority priority: Transmission cost, ranging from 1 to 5.

■ keepalive keepalive-interval: Time interval for sending the “keepalive” packet, ranging from 0 to 1200 seconds.

■ max-frame max-frame-size: Maximum length of the packet, which can be 516, 1470, 1500, 2052, 4472, 8144, 11407, 11454, or 17800 bytes.

■ max-queue max-queue-length: Size of the TCP sending/receiving queue, ranging from 50 to 2000.

■ linger minutes: Linger time of the backup connection after the primary peer being disconnected, ranging from 0 to 1440 minutes.

DescriptionUsing the dlsw remote command, you can create the DLSw remote peer. Using the undo dlsw remote command, you can delete the remote peer.

The default priority is 3. The default keepalive-interval is 30 seconds. The default max-frame-size is 1500 bytes. The default max-queue-length is 200. The default seconds is 90 seconds. The default minutes are 5 minutes.

After the local peer is configured, the remote peer needs to be configured to create the TCP tunnel. The router will keep attempting to create the TCP connection with the remote router. A router can be configured with several remote peers so as to create the TCP tunnel with several remote routers.

The following deserves special attention on creating the remote backup-address:

1 In order to create the remote backup-address, the ip-address should be the IP address of the backup peer end, and the backup backup-address should be the IP address of the remote primary peer with the TCP connection already being created. In other words, before creating the remote backup peer connection, the user should ensure that the local end has created the TCP connection with a remote primary peer. If the peer end backup peer is created


the same time the remote peer being first created, the system will prompt the following information:Primary peer ip address does not exist

This prompt indicates that the user should first create a remote primary peer before creating the backup peer.

2 If the backup link still exists after the TCP connection of the primary link is interrupted, the TCP link can be retained (use the display dlsw remote command and a TCP connection can be found still exist) till the backup link linger minutes is also timeout.

ExampleCreate the DLSw remote peer, with the IP address being 2.2.2.2, the transmission cost being 2, the time interval for sending the “keepalive” being 40 seconds, the maximum length lf-size of the packet being the default value, and the size of the TCP sending/receiving queue being 300.

[3Com] dlsw remote 2.2.2.2 priority 2 keepalive 40 max-queue 300

dlsw timer Syntaxdlsw timer [ connect seconds ] [ explorer-wait seconds ] [ local-pending seconds ] [ remote-pending seconds ] [ cache seconds ] [ explorer seconds ]

undo dlsw timer

ViewSystem view

Parameter■ connect seconds: The holding time of a connection, ranging from 1 second to

65535 seconds. The default value is 300 seconds.

■ explorer-wait seconds: The waiting time of local explorer frames, ranging from 1 second to 65535 seconds. The default value is 30 seconds.

■ local-pending seconds: The local pending time, ranging from 1 second to 65535 seconds. The default value is 30 seconds.

■ remote-pending seconds: The remote pending time, ranging from 1 second to 65535 seconds. The default value is 30 seconds.

■ cache seconds: Address saving time in SNA cache, ranging from 1 second to 65535 seconds. The default value is 120 seconds.

■ explorer seconds: The waiting time of remote explorer frames, ranging from 1 second to 65535 seconds. The default value is 30 seconds.

Description

Using the dlsw timer command, you can configure the DLSw timer parameters. Using the undo dlsw timer command, you can restore the default value of the DLSw timer parameters.

By configuring the DLSw timer, the various kinds of timers used for the DLSw to create the virtual circuit can be revised. But the user is suggested not to revise the DLSw timer parameters randomly.


ExampleConfigure the DLSw timer parameters, with the connected timeout being 200 seconds, the waiting timeout of the local explorer frame being 15 seconds, the local waiting timeout being 15 seconds, the remote peer waiting timeout being 25 seconds, the SNA cache address timeout being the default value and the waiting timeout of the remote explorer frame being the default value.

[3Com] dlsw timer connect 20 explorer-wait 15 local-pending 15 remote-pending 25

idle-mark Syntaxidle-mark

undo idle-mark


ParameterNone

DescriptionUsing the idle-mark command, you can configure the idle coding scheme of the synchronous serial port. Using the undo idle-mark command, you can restore the default idle coding scheme of the synchronous serial port.

By default, the synchronous serial port adopts the “7E” coding scheme.

3Com series routers encapsulate “7E” in the packets to identify the free time of the SDLC serial interface, but some SDLC devices adopt full “1” high level instead. In order to be better compatible to this kind devices, the idle coding scheme of the router needs to be changed.

Sometimes when connecting with the AS/400, this command needs to be configured to change the idle coding scheme and accelerate the AS/400 polling speed.

ExampleConfigure the idle coding scheme of the synchronous serial port on the Serial1/0/0 as idle-mark.

[3Com-Serial1/0/0] idle-mark

link-protocol sdlc Syntaxlink-protocol sdlc


ParameterNone


DescriptionUsing the link-protocol sdlc command, you can change the link layer encapsulation protocol of the synchronous serial interface into SDLC.

By default, the encapsulated link layer protocol of the synchronous serial interface is PPP.

The SDLC is a kind of link layer protocol relative to the SNA, with working principal similar to that of the HDLC. In order for the DLSw to work normally, the link layer encapsulation protocol of the synchronous serial interface should be changed into SDLC.

Note all the IP related commands on the interface should be removed before encapsulating the SDLC, as the SDLC link protocol cannot be used to carry the IP protocol, for example, to delete the IP address on the interface, etc.

ExampleConfigure the encapsulation protocol on the Serial1/0/0 as SDLC.

[3Com-Serial1/0/0] link-protocol sdlc

llc2 max-ack Syntaxllc2 max-ack length

llc2 max-ack


Parameter■ length: Length of the LLC2 advanced response window, ranging from 1 to 127.

DescriptionUsing the llc2 max-ack command, you can configure the length of the advance response window before the LLC2 sending the acknowledgement frame. Using the undo llc2 max-ack command, you can restore the default length of the advance response window before the LLC2 sending the acknowledgement frame.

By default, the length of the LLC2 advance response window is 3.

The LLC2 advance response window refers to the maximum receivable information frames before sending the acknowledgement frame, that is, to send the response packet in advance on receiving the packet n.

ExampleConfigure the length of the advanced response window before the LLC2 sends the acknowledgement frame as 5.

[3Com-Ethernet1/0/0] llc2 max-ack 5

llc2 max-send-queue Syntaxllc2 max-send-queue length

undo llc2 max-send-queue



Parameter

■ length: The queue length sending the LLC2 packet, ranging from 20 to 200.

DescriptionUsing the llc2 max-send-queue command, you can configure the queue length sending the LLC2 packet. Using the undo llc2 max-send-queue command, you can restore the default queue length sending the LLC2 packet.

By default, the queue length sending the LLC2 packet is 100. Example

ExampleConfigure the queue length sending the LLC2 packet as 30.

[3Com-Ethernet1/0/0] llc2 max-send-queue 30

llc2 max-transmission Syntaxllc2 max-transmission retries

undo llc2 max-transmission


Parameter■ retries: LLC2 retransmission times, ranging form 1 to 255.

DescriptionUsing the llc2 max-transmission command, you can configure the retransmission times of the LLC2. Using the undo llc2 max-transmission command, you can restore the default retransmission times of the LLC2.

By default, the LLC2 retransmission times are 20 times.

The LLC2 retransmission times refers to the times of resending information frames before the acknowledgement frame is received from the peer end.

ExampleConfigure the LLC2 retransmission times as 10 times.

[3Com-Ethernet1/0/0] llc2 max-transmission 10

llc2 modulo Syntaxllc2 modulo n

undo llc2 modulo


Parameter■ n: The modulus of the LLC2, with the available values of 8 or 128.


DescriptionUsing the llc2 modulo command, you can configure the modulus of the LLC2. Using the undo llc2 modulo command, you can restore the default modulus of the LLC2.

By default, the modulus of the LLC2 is 128.

LLC2, like X25, adopts modulus mode to number information packets, and the modulus of LLC2 is 8 or 128. Ethernet generally uses modulus 128.

ExampleRestore the default modulus of the LLC2.

[3Com-Ethernet1/0/0] undo llc2 modulo

llc2 receive-window Syntaxllc2 receive-window length

undo llc2 receive-window


Parameter■ length: Length of the local response window, ranging from 1 to 127.

DescriptionUsing the llc2 receive-window command, you can configure the maximum packets that can be sent before the LLC2 receives the acknowledgement frame. Using the undo llc2 receive-window command, you can restore the default value of the maximum packets that can be sent before the acknowledgement frame is received.

By default, the length of the LLC2 local response window is 7.

The LLC2 local response window refers to the maximum packets that can be sent continuously before the acknowledgement frame is received.

ExampleConfigure the maximum packets that can be sent before the LLC2 receives the acknowledgement frame as 10.

[3Com-Ethernet1/0/0] llc2 receive-window 10

llc2 timer ack Syntaxllc2 timer ack mseconds

undo llc2 timer ack


Parameter■ mseconds: LLC2 local response time, ranging from 1 to 60000ms.


DescriptionUsing the llc2 timer ack command, you can configure the LLC2 local response time. Using the undo llc2 timer ack command, you can restore the default value of the LLC2 local response time.

By default, the LLC2 local response time is 200ms.

The LLC2 local response time refers to the maximum waiting time for the response from the peer end after an LLC2 data packet is sent.

ExampleConfigure the LLC2 local response time as 10ms.

[3Com-Ethernet1/0/0] llc2 timer ack 10

llc2 timer ack-delay Syntaxllc2 timer ack-delay mseconds

undo llc2 timer ack-delay


Parameter■ mseconds: Local acknowledgement delay time on receiving the information

frames, ranging from 1 to 60000ms.

DescriptionUsing the llc2 timer ack-delay command, you can configure the local acknowledgement delay time when the LLC2 receives information frames. Using the undo llc2 timer ack-delay command, you can restore the default value of the local acknowledgement delay time when the LLC2 receives information frame.

By default, the LLC2 local acknowledgement delay time is 100ms.

The LLC2 local acknowledgement delay time refers to the maximum waiting time for delayed acknowledgement on receiving an LLC2 data packet.

ExampleConfigure the local acknowledgement delay time for received information frames as 200 milliseconds.

[3Com-Ethernet1/0/0] llc2 timer ack-delay 200

llc2 timer busy Syntaxllc2 timer busy mseconds

undo llc2 timer busy


Parameter■ mseconds: The LLC2 BUSY time, ranging from 1 to 60000ms.


DescriptionUsing the llc2 timer busy command, you can configure the LLC2 BUSY time. Using the undo llc2 timer busy command, you can restore the default value of the LLC2 BUSY time.

By default, the LLC2 BUSY time is 300ms.

The LLC2 BUSY time refers to the waiting time before repolling a busy station.

ExampleConfigure the LLC2 BUSY time as 200ms.

[3Com-Ethernet1/0/0] llc2 timer busy 200

llc2 timer poll Syntaxllc2 timer poll mseconds

undo llc2 timer poll


Parameter■ mseconds: LLC2 P/F waiting time, ranging from 1 to 60000ms.

DescriptionUsing the llc2 timer poll command, you can configure the P/F waiting time of the LLC2. Using the undo llc2 timer poll command, you can restore the default value of the LLC2 P/F waiting time.

By default, the LLC2 P/F waiting time is 5000ms.

The LLC2 P/F waiting time refers to the time of waiting for the acknowledgement frame after the frame P is sent.

ExampleConfigure the LLC2 P/F waiting time as 2000ms.

[3Com-Ethernet1/0/0] llc2 timer poll 2000

llc2 timer reject Syntaxllc2 timer reject mseconds

undo llc2 timer reject


Parameter■ mseconds: The LLC2 REJ time, ranging from 1 to 60000ms.

DescriptionUsing the llc2 timer reject command, you can configure the REJ time of the LLC2. Using the undo llc2 timer reject command, you can restore the default value of the LLC2 REJ time.


By default, the LLC2 REJ time is 500ms.

The LLC2 REJ time refers to the waiting time for the acknowledgement frame to come after a deny frame is sent.

ExampleConfigure the LLC2 REJ time as 2000ms.

[3Com-Ethernet1/0/0] llc2 timer reject 2000

reset dlsw bridge-entry Syntaxreset dlsw bridge-entry

ViewUser view

ParameterNone

DescriptionUsing the reset dlsw bridge-entry command, you can clear the entry cache information in the DLSw bridge group.

ExampleClear the entry cache information in the DLSw bridge group.

<3Com> reset dlsw bridge-entry

reset dlsw circuits Syntaxreset dlsw circuits [ circuit-id ]

ViewUser view

Parameter■ circuit-id: The virtual circuit ID of DLSw, ranging from 0 to 4294967295.

DescriptionUsing the reset dlsw circuits command, you can clear the DLSw virtual circuit information.

ExampleClear the virtual circuit information with the virtual circuit number of 100.

<3Com> reset dlsw circuits 100

sdlc controller Syntaxsdlc controller sdlc-address

undo sdlc controller sdlc-address



Parameter■ sdlc-address: The secondary station address of the SDLC.

DescriptionUsing the sdlc controller command, you can configure the secondary station address of the SDLC. Using the undo sdlc controller command, you can delete the secondary station address of the SDLC.

By default, the secondary station address of the SDLC is not configured.

The SDLC protocol permits several virtual circuits running on a single SDLC physical link, with one end connected with the primary station and the other end connected with the secondary station. In order to distinguish each virtual circuit, their SDLC addresses need to be designated. Because the SDLC is in unbalanced mode, a primary device can connects with several secondary devices through the medium of shared machine or SDLC switch, while the secondary devices cannot be connected with each other. And there can exist one and only primary device if any. In this sense, the SDLC devices in the same group can be guaranteed to communicate with each other normally only if the addresses of the secondary devices are specified. This command specifies the SDLC address, which is unique on a physical interface, for the virtual circuit. The configured SDLC address on synchronous serial interface is virtually the address of the SDLC secondary station.

The SDLC address ranges from 0x01 to 0xFE. The SDLC address of a router is only valid on one physical interface, that is, the SDLC addresses configured on different interfaces can be same.

ExampleConfigure the secondary station address of the SDLC on the Serial1/0/0 as 0x05.

[3Com-Serial1/0/0] sdlc controller 05

sdlc mac-map local Syntaxsdlc mac-map local mac-address

undo sdlc mac-map local


Parameter■ mac-address: The virtual MAC address of the SDLC.

DescriptionUsing the sdlc mac-map local command, you can configure the virtual MAC address of the SDLC. Using the undo sdlc mac-map local command, you can delete the virtual MAC address of the SDLC.

By default, the SDLC has no virtual MAC address.


ExampleConfigure the virtual MAC address of the SDLC.

[3Com-Serial1/0/0] sdlc mac-map local 0000-e81c-b6bf

sdlc mac-map remote Syntaxsdlc mac-map remote mac-addr sdlc-addr

undo sdlc mac-map remote mac-addr sdlc-addr


Parameter■ mac-addr: The MAC address of the SDLC peer.

■ sdlc-addr: The SDLC address of the SDLC peer.

DescriptionUsing the sdlc mac-map remote command, you can configure the SDLC peer. Using the undo sdlc mac-map remote command, you can delete the SDLC peer.

By default, the synchronous serial interface has no peer.

This command is used to specify the MAC address of a peer end for an SDLC virtual circuit so as to provide the destination MAC address on the transformation from the SDLC to the LLC2. When configuring the DLSw, an SDLC address should be configured a related partner (peer). The MAC address of the partner (peer) should be the MAC address of the remote SNA device (physical addresses of such devices as the Ethernet and the Token-Ring), or the MAC address of the peer end compounded by the SDLC.

ExampleConfigure the SDLC peer.

[3Com-Serial1/0/0] sdlc mac-map remote 00E0-FC00-0010 0x05

sdlc max-pdu Syntaxsdlc max-pdu n

undo sdlc max-pdu


Parameter■ n: The maximum receivable frame length of the SDLC, ranging from 1 to

17600 bytes.

DescriptionUsing the sdlc max-pdu command, you can configure the maximum receivable frame length of the SDLC. Using the undo sdlc max-pdu command, you can restore the default value of the SDLC maximum receivable frame length.

By default, the maximum receivable frame length of the SDLC is of 265 bytes.


The SDLC maximum frame length refers to the bytes of the largest packet that can be received and sent, excluding the parity bit and the start/stop bit.

The maximum receivable frame length of some PU2.0 devices is of 265 bytes, and that of IBM AS/400 is generally of 521 bytes. Usually we need to configure it the same value as the connected SDLC device.

ExampleConfigure the maximum receivable frame length of the SDLC as 512.

[3Com-Serial1/0/0] sdlc max-pdu 521

sdlc max-send-queue Syntaxsdlc max-send-queue length

undo sdlc max-send-queue


Parameter■ length: The queue length sending the SDLC packet, ranging from 20 to 255.

DescriptionUsing the sdlc max-send-queue command, you can configure the queue length sending the SDLC packet. Using the undo sdlc max-send-queue command, you can restore the default value of the queue length sending the SDLC packet.

By default, the queue length sending the SDLC packet is 50.

ExampleConfigure the queue length sending the SDLC packet on the Serial1/0/0 as 30.

[3Com-Serial1/0/0] sdlc max-send-queue 30

sdlc max-transmission Syntaxsdlc max-transmission retries

undo sdlc max-transmission


Parameter■ retries: The SDLC timeout retransmission times, ranging from 1 to 255 times.

DescriptionUsing the sdlc max-transmission command, you can configure the SDLC timeout retransmission times. Using the undo sdlc max-transmission command, you can restore the default value of the SDLC timeout retransmission times.

By default, the SDLC timeout retransmission times are 20.

The SDLC timeout retransmission times (N2) refers to the retransmission times before receiving the acknowledgement packet from the peer end.


ExampleConfigure the SDLC timeout retransmission times as 30.

[3Com-Serial1/0/0] sdlc max-transmission 30

sdlc modulo Syntaxsdlc modulo n

undo sdlc modulo


Parameter■ n: SDLC modulus, with available value of 8 or 128.

DescriptionUsing the sdlc modulo command, you can configure the modulus of the SDLC. Using the undo sdlc modulo command, you can restore the default modulus of the SDLC.

By default, the SDLC modulus is 8.

SDLC, like X25, adopts modulus mode to number information packets, and the modulus of SDLC is 8 or 128. Generally modulus 8 is selected.

ExampleRestore the default modulus of the SDLC.

[3Com-Serial1/0/0] undo sdlc modulo

sdlc sap-map local Syntaxsdlc sap-map local lsap sdlc-addr

undo sdlc sap-map local lsap sdlc-addr


Parameter■ lsap: The virtual SAP address set by the device connected with the local

interface.

■ sdlc-addr: The SDLC address.

DescriptionUsing the sdlc sap-map local command, you can configure the SAP address on transforming the SDLC into the LLC2. Using the undo sdlc sap-map local command, you can restore the default value of the LLC2 SAP address.

By default, lsap is 04.

When the SDLC packet is translated into the LLC2 packet, the SAP address is needed besides the MAC address.

Generally speaking, the SAP address of the SNA protocol is 0x04 or 0x08 or 0x0C.


For related configuration, please see the sdlc sap-map remote command.

ExampleConfigure the SAP address on translating the SDLC into the LLC2.

[3Com-Serial1/0/0] sdlc sap-map local 08 05

sdlc sap-map remote Syntaxsdlc sap-map remote dsap sdlc-addr

undo sdlc sap-map remote dsap sdlc-addr


Parameter■ dsap: The SAP address of the DLSw peer device. By default, dsap is 04.

■ sdlc-addr: The SDLC address.

DescriptionUsing the sdlc sap-map remote command, you can configure the remote DLSw device SAP address when SDLC is translated into LLC2. And using the undo sdlc sap-map remote command, you can restore the default value.

When the SDLC packet is translated into the LLC2 packet, the SAP address is needed besides the MAC address.

Generally speaking, the SAP address of the SNA protocol is 0x04 or 0x08 or 0x0C.

For related configuration, please see sdlc sap-map local.

ExampleConfigure the remote DLSw device SAP address when SDLC is translated into LLC2.

[3Com-Serial1/0/0] sdlc sap-map remote 0C 05

sdlc simultaneous Syntaxsdlc simultaneous

undo sdlc simultaneous


ParameterNone

DescriptionUsing the sdlc simultaneous command, you can configure the SDLC data to use the bidirectional transmission mode. Using the undo sdlc simultaneous command, you can stop the SDLC data to use the bidirectional transmission mode.

By default, the SDLC data are transmitted in bidirectional mode.


This command configures the synchronous serial interface to work in bidirectional data simultaneous transmission mode. That is, the SDLC primary station can send data to the secondary station and receive data at the same time.

ExampleConfigure the SDLC data to use the bidirectional transmission mode.

[3Com-Serial1/0/0] sdlc simultaneous

sdlc status Syntaxsdlc status { primary | secondary }

undo sdlc status


Parameter■ primary: The primary station of the end, controlling the whole connection

process.

■ secondary: The secondary station of the end, controlled by the primary station.

DescriptionUsing the sdlc role command, you can configure the SDLC role the device acts. Using the undo sdlc role command, you can restore the default SDLC role.

By default, the device has no role.

The SDLC is a kind of link layer protocol in unbalanced mode. That is, the statuses of the devices on the two connected ends are unequal: one is primary and the other is secondary. The primary side, being the primary station, whose role is primary, plays the dominant role and controls the whole connection process. While the other side, being the secondary station, whose role is secondary, receives control passively.

Therefore, the user needs to configure the role for the interface encapsulated with SDLC protocol. On the SDLC role configuration, the roles should be decided by the status of the SDLC device connected with the local router. If the SDLC device connected with the local interface is primary, the local interface is to be set secondary, and vice versa.

In general, the central IBM mainframe is primary, whereas terminal devices, including UNIX hosts and ATM, are secondary.

ExampleConfigure the SDLC device connected with the Serial1/0/0 as primary, and the local interface as secondary.

[3Com-Serial1/0/0] sdlc role secondary

sdlc timer ack Syntaxsdlc timer ack mseconds

undo sdlc timer ack



Parameter■ mseconds: The SDLC primary station response waiting time, ranging from 1 to

60000ms.

DescriptionUsing the sdlc timer ack command, you can configure the SDLC primary station response waiting time (mseconds). Using the undo sdlc timer ack command, you can restore the default value of the SDLC primary station response waiting time.

By default, the configured SDLC primary station response waiting time is 3000ms.

The primary station response waiting time (mseconds) refers to the waiting time for the response from the secondary station after the primary station sends information frames.

ExampleConfigure the SDLC primary station response waiting time (mseconds) as 2000ms.

[3Com-Serial1/0/0] sdlc timer ack 2000

sdlc timer lifetime Syntaxsdlc timer lifetime mseconds

undo sdlc timer lifetime


Parameter■ mseconds: The SDLC secondary station response waiting time, ranging from 1

to 60000ms.

DescriptionUsing the sdlc timer lifetime command, you can configure the SDLC secondary station response waiting time (mseconds). Using the undo sdlc timer lifetime command, you can restore the default value of the SDLC secondary station response waiting time.

By default, the SDLC secondary station response waiting time (mseconds) is 500ms.

The secondary station response waiting time (mseconds) refers to the waiting time for the response from the primary station after the secondary station sends information frames.

ExampleConfigure the SDLC secondary station response waiting time (mseconds) as 1000ms.

[3Com-Serial1/0/0] sdlc timer lifetime 1000


sdlc timer poll Syntaxsdlc timer poll mseconds

undo sdlc timer poll


Parameter■ mseconds: SDLC poll pause timer, ranging from 1 to 10000ms.

DescriptionUsing the sdlc timer poll command, you can configure the SDLC poll pause timer. Using the undo sdlc timer poll command, you can restore the default value of the SDLC poll pause timer.

By default, the SDLC poll pause timer is 1000ms.

The SDLC poll pause timer refers to the waiting interval between the two SDLC nodes polled by the SDLC primary station.

ExampleConfigure the SDLC poll pause timer as 200ms.

[3Com-Serial1/0/0] sdlc timer poll 200

sdlc window Syntaxsdlc window length

undo sdlc window


Parameter■ length: Length of the SDLC local response window, ranging from 1 to 7.

DescriptionUsing the sdlc window command, you can configure the length of the SDLC local response window. Using the undo sdlc window command, you can restore the default length of the SDLC local response window.

By default, the default length of the SDLC local response window is 7.

The SDLC local response window refers to the maximum packets number that can be sent continuously without waiting for the response from the peer end.

ExampleConfigure the length of the SDLC local response window on the Serial1/0/0 as 5.

[3Com-Serial1/0/0] sdlc window 5

sdlc xid Syntaxsdlc xid sdlc-address xid-number


undo sdlc xid sdlc-address


Parameter■ sdlc-address: The SDLC address of the XID, which should be configured

beforehand.

■ xid-number: An integer with a length of 4 bytes, ranging from 1 to 0xFFFFFFFF. The first 12 bits are network numbers, and the last 20 bytes are node numbers.

DescriptionUsing the sdlc xid command, you can configure the XID of the SDLC. Using the undo sdlc xid command, you can delete the XID of the SDLC.

By default, the synchronous serial interface has no XID of the SDLC.

The XID is the ID of a device in the SNA world. Generally speaking, there are two kinds of devices: PU2.0 and PU2.1. The XID has been automatically configured on the PU2.1 devices and they can announce their IDs by exchanging the XID. The PU2.0 devices did not exchange the ID, so they can not get ID automatically. Therefore, this command needs not to be configured on PU2.1 typed devices, whereas it is needed to specify an XID for PU2.0 typed devices.

ExampleConfigure the XID of the SDLC, in which the xid-number is 0x2000.

[3Com3Com-Serial1/0/0] sdlc xid 05 2000

6 ROUTING PROTOCOL

For the specific examples and parameter explanation of VPN instance, refer to the “MPLS” module of this manual.

Display Commands of the Routing Table

display ip routing-table Syntax

display ip routing-table

View

Any view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the display ip routing-table command, you can view the routing table summary.

This command views routing table information in summary form. Each line represents one route. The contents include destination address/mask length, protocol, preference, cost, next hop and output interface.

Only current used route, i.e., best route, is displayed via the display ip routing-table command.

Example

View the summary of current routing table.

<3Com>3Com display ip routing-tableRouting Table: public netDestination/Mask Proto Pre Cost Nexthop Interface1.1.1.0/24 DIRECT 0 0 1.1.1.1 Interface serial1/0/01.1.1.1/32 DIRECT 0 0 127.0.0.1 InLoopBack02.2.2.0/24 DIRECT 0 0 2.2.2.1 Interface serial2/0/02.2.2.1/32 DIRECT 0 0 127.0.0.1 InLoopBack03.3.3.0/24 DIRECT 0 0 3.3.3.1 Interface ethernet1/0/03.3.3.1/32 DIRECT 0 0 127.0.0.1 InLoopBack04.4.4.0/24 DIRECT0 0 4.4.4.1 Interface ethernet2/0/0

534 CHAPTER 6: ROUTING PROTOCOL

4.4.4.1/32 DIRECT 0 0 127.0.0.1 InLoopBack0127.0.0.0/8 DIRECT 0 0 127.0.0. 1 InLoopBack0127.0.0.1/32 DIRECT 0 0 127.0.0.1 InLoopBack0

display ip routing-tableacl

Syntaxdisplay ip routing-table acl { acl-number | acl-name } [ verbose ]

View

Any view

Parameter

■ acl_number: Number of basic ACL, ranging from 1 to 99.

■ acl-name: Name of basic ACL.

■ verbose: With the parameter, this command displays the verbose information of both the active and inactive routes that passed filtering rules. Without the parameter, this command only displays the summary of the active routes that passed filtering rules.

Description

Using the display ip routing-table acl command, you can view the route filtered through specified basic access control list (ACL).

The command is used in tracking route policy to display the route that passed the filtering rule according to the input basic ACL number or name.

The command is only applicable to view the route that passed basic ACL filtering rules.

Example

View the summary of active routes that are filtered through basic ACL 1.

<3Com> display ip routing-table acl 1Routes matched by access-list 1:Summary count: 4Destination/MaskProtoPreCost NexthopInterface127.0.0.0/8Direct00127.0.0.1InLoopBack0127.0.0.1/32Direct00127.0.0.1InLoopBack0169.0.0.0/8Static60 02.1.1.1LoopBack1169.0.0.0/15Static6002.1.1.1LoopBack1 Display the verbose information of the active and inactive routes that are filtered through basic ACL1.<3Com> display ip routing-table acl 1 verboseRoutes matched by access-list 1:Generate Default: no+ = Active Route, - = Last Active, = Both* = Next hop in useSummary count:5**Destination: 127.0.0.0Mask: 255.0.0.0

Protocol: DirectPreference: 0*NextHop: 127.0.0.1Interface: 127.0.0.1(InLoopBack0)Vlinkindex: 0State: <NoAdvise Int ActiveU Retain Multicast Unicast>Age: 3:47Metric: 0/0

**Destination: 127.0.0.1Mask: 255. 255. 255. 255Protocol: DirectPreference: 0*NextHop: 127.0.0.1Interface: 127.0.0.1(InLoopBack0)

Display Commands of the Routing Table 535

Vlinkindex: 0State: <NotInstall NoAdvise Int ActiveU Retain Gateway Multicast Unicast>

Age: 3:47Metric: 0/0**Destination: 179.0.0.0Mask: 255.0.0.0

Protocol: StaticPreference: 60*NextHop: 4.1.1.1Vlinkindex: 0State: <Int Hidden Static Unicast>Age: 3:47Metric: 0/0

**Destination: 169.0.0.0Mask: 255.0.0.0Protocol: StaticPreference: 60*NextHop: 2.1.1.1Interface: 2.1.1.1(LoopBack1)Vlinkindex: 0State: <Int ActiveU Static Unicast>Age: 3:47Metric: 0/0


display ip routing-tableip_address

Syntax

display ip routing-table ip_address [ mask ] [ longer-match ] [ verbose ]

View

Any view

Parameter

■ ip_address: Destination IP address in dotted decimal format.

■ mask: IP address mask, which can be in dotted decimal notation or represented by an integer in the range of 0 to 32.

■ longer-match: Indicates all route destination addresses are matched in the natural mask range.

■ verbose: With the verbose parameter, this command displays the verbose information of both the active and inactive routes. Without the parameter, this command only displays the summary of active routes.

Description

Using the display ip routing-table ip_address command, you can view the routing information of the specified destination address.

With different optional parameters, the output of the command is different. The following is the output description for different forms of this command:

■ display ip routing-table ip_address

If destination address, ip_address, has corresponding routes in natural mask range, this command will display all subnet routes. Or, only the route best matching the destination address, ip_address, is displayed. And only the active matching route is displayed.

■ display ip routing-table ip_address mask,


This command only displays the route fully matching with specified destination address and mask.

■ display ip routing-table ip_address longer-match

This command displays all route destination addresses matching with destination addresses in natural mask range.

ExampleThere is corresponding route in natural mask range. View the summary.<3Com> display ip routing-table 169.0.0.0Routing Tables:Summary count:1Destination/MaskProtoPreCost NexthopInterface169.0.0.0/16Static6002.1.1.1LoopBack1 There is no corresponding route (only the longest matching route is displayed) in natural mask range and summary is viewed.<3Com> display ip routing-table 169.253.0.0Routing Tables:

Summary count:1Destination/MaskProtoPreCost NexthopInterface169.0.0.0/8Static6002.1.1.1LoopBack1 There are corresponding routes in the natural mask range. View the detailed information.<3Com> display ip routing-table 169.0.0.0 verboseRouting Tables:Generate Default: no+ = Active Route, - = Last Active, = Both* = Next hop in useSummary count:2**Destination: 169.0.0.0Mask: 255.0.0.0

Protocol: StaticPreference: 60*NextHop: 2.1.1.1Interface: 2.1.1.1(LoopBack1)Vlinkindex: 0State: <Int ActiveU Static Unicast>Age: 3:47Metric: 0/0


There are no corresponding routes in the natural mask range (only display the longest matching route). View the detailed information.<3Com> display ip routing-table 169.253.0.0 verboseRouting Tables:Generate Default: no+ = Active Route, - = Last Active, = Both* = Next hop in useSummary count:1**Destination: 169.0.0.0Mask: 255.0.0.0

Protocol: StaticPreference: -60*NextHop: 2.1.1.1Vlinkindex: 0State: <Int ActiveU Static Unicast>Age: 3:47Metric: 0/0

display ip routing-tableip_address1 ip_address2

Syntax

display ip routing-table ip_address1 mask1 ip_address2 mask2 [ verbose ]


View

Any view

Parameter

■ ip_address1, ip_address2: Destination IP address in dotted decimal notation. ip_address1 and ip_address2 determine one address range together to display the route in this address range.

■ mask1, mask2: IP address mask, length in dotted decimal notation or integer form.

■ verbose: With the verbose parameter, this command displays the verbose information of both the active and inactive routes. Without the parameter, this command only displays the summary of active routes.

Description

Using the display ip routing-table ip_address1 ip_address2 command, you can view the routing information in the specified destination address range.

Example

View the routing information of destination addresses ranging from 1.1.1.0 to 2.2.2.0.

<3Com> display ip routing-table 1.1.1.0 24 2.2.2.0 24Routing tables: Summary count: 3Destination/Mask Proto Pre Cost Nexthop Interface1.1.1.0/24 DIRECT 0 0 1.1.1.1 Interface serial1/0/01.1.1.1/32 DIRECT 0 0 127.0.0.1 InLoopBack02.2.2.0/24 DIRECT 0 0 2.2.2.1 Interface serial2/0/0

display ip routing-tableip-prefix

Syntax

display ip routing-table ip-prefix ip-prefix-name [ verbose ]

View

Any view

Parameter

■ ip-prefix-name: Prefix list name.

■ verbose: With the parameter, this command displays the verbose information of both the active and inactive routes that passed filtering rules. Without the parameter, this command displays the summary of the active routes that passed filtering rules.

Description

Using the display ip routing-table ip-prefix command, you can view the route that passed the filtering rule according to the specified ip prefix list.

If there is no specified prefix list, this command will display the verbose information of all active and inactive routes with the parameter verbose and it will display the summary of all active routes without the parameter verbose.


Example

Display the summary of the active route that is filtered through ip prefix list abc2.

<3Com> display ip routing-table ip-prefix abc2Routes matched by ip-prefix abc2:

Summary count: 4Destination/MaskProtoPreCost NexthopInterface127.0.0.0/8Direct00127.0.0.1InLoopBack0127.0.0.1/32Direct00127.0.0.1InLoopBack0169.0.0.0/8Static6002.1.1.1LoopBack1169.0.0.0/15Static6002.1.1.1LoopBack1 Display the verbose information of the active and inactive routes that are filtered through ip prefix list abc2.<3Com> display ip routing-table ip-prefix abc2 verboseRoutes matched by ip-prefix abc2:

Generate Default: no+ = Active Route, - = Last Active, = Both* = Next hop in use

Summary count:4**Destination: 127.0.0.0Mask: 255.0.0.0

Protocol: DirectPreference: 0*NextHop: 127.0.0.1Interface: 127.0.0.1(InLoopBack0)Vlinkindex: 0State: <NoAdvise Int ActiveU Retain Multicast Unicast>Age: 3:47Metric: 0/0

**Destination: 127.0.0.1Mask: 255. 255. 255. 255Protocol: DirectPreference: 0*NextHop: 127.0.0.1Interface: 127.0.0.1(InLoopBack0)Vlinkindex: 0

State: <NotInstall NoAdvise Int ActiveU Retain Gateway Multicast Unicast>

Age: 3:47Metric: 0/0**Destination: 179.0.0.0Mask: 255.0.0.0

Protocol: StaticPreference:-60*NextHop: 4.1.1.1Vlinkindex: 0State: <Int Hidden Static Unicast>Age: 3:47Metric: 0/0

**Destination: 169.0.0.0Mask: 255.0.0.0Protocol: StaticPreference: 60*NextHop: 2.1.1.1Interface: 2.1.1.1(LoopBack1)Vlinkindex: 0State: <Int ActiveU Static Unicast>Age: 3:47 Metric: 0/0**Destination: 169.0.0.0Mask: 255.254.0.0Protocol: StaticPreference: 60*NextHop: 2.1.1.1Interface: 2.1.1.1(LoopBack1)Vlinkindex: 0State: <Int ActiveU Static Unicast>Age: 3:47 Metric: 0/0

display ip routing-tableprotocol

Syntax

display ip routing-table protocol protocol [ inactive | verbose ]

View

Any view


Parameter

■ protocol: Has multiple selectable values:

■ direct: Displays direct connection route information

■ static: Displays static route information.

■ bgp: Displays BGP route information.

■ isis: Displays IS-IS route information.

■ ospf: Displays OSPF route information.

■ ospf-ase: Displays OSPF ASE route information.

■ ospf-nssa: Displays OSPF NSSA route information.

■ rip: Displays RIP route information.

■ inactive: With the parameter, this command displays the inactive route information. Without the parameter, this command displays the active and inactive route information.

■ verbose: With the verbose parameter, this command displays the verbose routing information. Without the parameter, this command displays the route summary.

Description

Using the display ip routing-table protocol command, you can view the routing information of specified protocol.

Example

Display all direct connection routes summary.

<3Com> display ip routing-table protocol directDIRECT Routing tables:Summary count: 4DIRECT Routing tables status:<active>:Summary count: 3Destination/MaskProto Pre Cost NexthopInterface:20.1.1.1/32DIRECT 00127.0.0.1InLoopBack0127.0.0.0/8DIRECT 00127.0.0.1InLoopBack0127.0.0.1/32DIRECT 00127.0.0.1InLoopBack0DIRECT Routing tables status:<inactive>:Summary count: 1Destination/MaskProto PreCostNexthopInterface210.0.0.1/32DIRECT 0 0127.0.0.1InLoopBack0 Display the static routing table.<3Com> display ip routing-table protocol staticSTATIC Routing tables: Summary count: 1STATIC Routing tables status:<active>: Summary count: 0STATIC Routing tables status:<inactive>: Summary count: 1Destination/Mask Proto Pre Cost Nexthop Interface1.2.3.0/24 STATIC 60 0 1.2.4.5 Ethernet 2/0/0


display ip routing-tableradix

Syntax

display ip routing-table radix

View

Any view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the display ip routing-table radix command, you can view the routing table information in a tree structure.

Example

View the routing table information in a tree structure.

<3Com> display ip routing-table radixRadix tree for INET (2) inodes 7 routes 5:

+-32+--{210.0.0.1+--0+ | | +--8+--{127.0.0.0 | | | +-32+--{127.0.0.1 | +--1+ | +--8+--{20.0.0.0 | +-32+--{20.1.1.1

display ip routing-tablestatistics

Syntax

display ip routing-table statistics

View

Any view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the display ip routing-table statistics command, you can view the integrated routing information.

The integrated routing information includes total route amount, the route amount added or deleted by protocol, amount of the routes that are labeled deleted but not deleted, the active route amount and inactive route amount.

Example

Display the integrated routing information.

<3Com> display ip routing-table statisticsRouting tables:ProtorouteactiveaddeddeletedfreedBGP 0 0 000DIRECT5 4 5 00RIP 0 0 000STATIC0 0 0 00


IS-IS0 0 0 00OSPF 0 0 000O_ASE0 0 0 00O_NSSA0 0 0 00Total 5 4 500

display ip routing-tableverbose

Syntax

display ip routing-table verbose

View

Any view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the display ip routing-table verbose command, you can view the verbose routing table information.

With the verbose parameter, this command displays the verbose routing table information. The descriptor describing the route state will be displayed first, then the statistics of the entire routing table will be output and finally the verbose description of each route will be output.

All current routes, including inactive routes and invalid routes, can be displayed using the display ip routing-table verbose command.

Example

Display the verbose routing table information.

<3Com> display ip routing-table verboseRouting Tables:Generate Default: no+ = Active Route, - = Last Active, = Both* = Next hop in useDestinations: 4 Routes: 4Holddown: 0 Delete: 9 Hidden: 0**Destination: 127.0.0.0 Mask: 255.0.0.0Protocol: Static Preference: 0*NextHop: 127.0.0.1 Interface: 127.0.0.1(LO0)State: <NoAdv Int Active Retain Rej>Age: 19:31:06 Metric: 0/0**Destination: 127.0.0.1 Mask: 255.255.255.255Protocol: Direct Preference: 0*NextHop: 127.0.0.1 Interface: 127.0.0.1(LO0)State: <NoAdv Int Active Retain>Age: 114:03:05 Metric: 0/0

The statistics of the entire routing table is displayed first, then the verbose description of each route is output. The meanings of route state parameters are explained in the following table:

Table 1 Description of the output information of the display ip routing-table verbose command


display ip routing-tablevpn-instance

Syntax

display ip routing-table vpn-instance vpn-instance-name [ ip-address ] [ verbose ]

View

Any view

Parameter

■ vpn-instance-name: VPN instance name.

■ ip-address: Destination IP address in dotted decimal format.

■ verbose: With the parameter, the command displays the verbose routing information. Without the parameter, the command displays the route summary.

Description

Using the display ip routing-table vpn-instance command, you can view RIP information associated with vpn instance address family.

Given that both ip-address and verbose are configured in the command, you can view all routes to the specified IP address in the VPN-instance, including the local routes as well as the routes learned from the remote.

Example

Display details of the routes to 10.1.1.1 in the VPN-instance vpn1.

<3Com> display ip routing-table vpn-instance vpn1 10.1.1.1 verboseRouting tables: Generate Default: no + = Active Route, - = Last Active, = Both * = Next hop in use Summary count: 2**Destination: 10.1.1.1 Mask: 255.255.255.255 Protocol: DIRECT Preference: 0 *NextHop: 127.0.0.1 Interface: 127.0.0.1(InLoopBack0) Vlinkindex: 0 State: <NoAdvise Int ActiveU Retain Gateway Unicast> Age: 54 Cost: 0/0**Destination: 10.1.1.0 Mask: 255.255.255.0 Protocol: DIRECT Preference: 0 *NextHop: 10.1.1.1 Interface: 10.1.1.1(LoopBack0) Vlinkindex: 0 State: <Int ActiveU Retain Unicast> Age: 54 Cost: 0/0

Main field DescriptionHolddown Number of currently hold down routes – Holddown refers to a route

advertising policy used by some distance vector (D-V) routing protocols (such as RIP) in order to avoid expansion of error routes and improve fast and correct transmission of unreachable routing information. It usually advertises a route fixedly at an interval no matter what changes have happened to the routes to the same destination, which have been learned actually. For details, refer to the specific routing protocol.

Delete Number of routes that have been deleted currently.Hidden Number of currently hidden routes -- Some routes are not available at present

for some reason (e.g., the interface is Down) but are not expected to be deleted. They can be hidden for future restoration.

Static Route Configuration Commands 543

Display the summary of the routes to 10.1.1.1 in the VPN-instance vpn1.

<3Com> display ip routing-table vpn-instance vpn1 10.1.1.1Routing tables: vpn1 Route-Distinguisher: 100:1Destination/Mask Protocol Pre Cost Nexthop Interface10.1.1.1/32 DIRECT 0 0 127.0.0.1 InLoopBack010.1.1.0/24 DIRECT 0 0 10.1.1.1 LoopBack0

Static Route Configuration Commands

delete static-routes all Syntax

delete static-routes all

View

System view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the delete static-routes all command, you can cancel all the static routes.

When this command is used to cancel static routes, the user should confirm the settings before all the configured static routes are canceled.

For the related command, see display ip routing-table and ip route-static.

Example

Delete all the static routes configured on router.

[3Com] delete static-routes allThis will erase all unicast static routes and their configurations, you must reconfigure all static routesAre you sure to delete all the static routes?[Y/N]y

ip route-static Syntax

■ ip route-static ip-address { mask | mask-length } { interface-name | nexthop-address } [ preference preference-value ] [ reject | blackhole ]

■ undo ip route-static ip-address { mask | mask-length } [ interface-name | nexthop-address ] [ preference preference-value ]

■ ip route-static vpn-instance vpn-instance-name1 vpn-instance-name2 … ip-address { mask | mask-length } { interface-name | [ vpn-instance vpn-nexthop-name nexthop-address ] } [ public ] [ preference preference-value ] [ reject | blackhole ]

■ undo ip route-static vpn-instance vpn-instance-name1 vpn-instance-name2 … ip-address { mask | mask-length } { interface-name [ vpn-instance vpn-nexthop-name | nexthop-address ] } [ public ] [ preference preference-value ]


View

System view

Parameter

■ ip-address: Destination IP address, in dotted decimal notation.

■ mask: Mask.

■ mask-length: Mask length. Since "1" s in the 32-bit mask are required to be consecutive, the mask in dotted decimal notation can be replaced by mask-length, which is the number of the consecutive "1" s in the mask.

■ interface-name: Specifies the outbound interface name of the static route. The interfaces of the public network or under other vpn-instances can be taken as the outbound interface of the static route.

■ vpn-instance-name: Indicates a name of VPN instance. It can take a maximum of 6 values.

■ vpn-nexthop-name: Specifies the vpn-instance of the static route next hop.

■ nexthop-address: Specifies the next hop IP address (in dotted decimal notation) of the static route.

■ preference-value: Preference level of the static route in the range from 1 to 255.

■ reject: Indicates an unreachable route.

■ blackhole: Indicates a blackhole route.

Description

Using the ip route-static command, you can configure a static route. Using the undo ip route-static command, you can cancel the configured static route.

Using the ip route-static vpn-instance command, you can configure a static route. In the application of multi-role host, you can configure a static route on a private network to specify the interface of another private network or public network as its outbound interface. Using the undo ip route-static vpn-instance command, you can remove the static route configuration.

By default, the system can obtain the sub-net route directly connected with the router. When configuring a static route, the default preference is 60 if it is not specified. If it is not specified as reject or blackhole, the route will be reachable by default.

Precautions when configuring static route:

■ When the destination IP address and the mask are both 0.0.0.0, it is the default route. If it is failed to detect the routing table, a packet will be forwarded along the default route.

■ For different configuration of preference level, flexible routing management policy can be adopted. For example, configure multiple routes to the same destination. Load sharing can be fulfilled by specifying the same preference for the routes. Route backup can be realized by specifying different preferences.

■ To configure static route, either transmission interface or next hop address can be specified, which one is adopted in practice depends on actual condition. For the interfaces supporting the resolution from network address to link layer address or point-to-point interface, transmission interface or next hop address

RIP Configuration Commands 545

can be specified. But for NBMA interfaces, such as the interface or dialing interface encapsulated with X.25 or frame-relay, they support point-to-multi-point. Except IP route is configured, secondary route, i.e. the map from IP address to link layer address should be established on link layer. In such condition, transmission interface cannot be specified and the next hop IP address should be configured when configuring static route.

■ VT interface cannot be configured as outbound interface.

In some conditions (for example, the link layer is encapsulated with PPP), transmission interface can be specified when opposite address cannot be learned in router configuration. After specifying transmission interface, the configuration of this router is unnecessary to be modified as opposite address changes.

For the related command, see display ip routing-table.

Example

Configure the next hop of the default route as 129.102.0.2.

[3Com] ip route-static 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 129.102.0.2 Configure the static route, whose destination address is 100.1.1.1 and whose next-hop address is 1.1.1.2. [3Com] ip route-static vpn-instance vpn1 100.1.1.1 16 vpn-instance vpn1 1.1.1.2

RIP Configuration Commands

For the specific examples and parameter explanation of VPN instance, refer to “MPLS” module of this manual.

checkzero Syntax

checkzero

undo checkzero

View

RIP view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the checkzero command, you can check the zero field of RIP-1 packet. Using the undo checkzero command, you can cancel the check of the zero fields.

By default, RIP-1 performs the zero field check.

According to the protocol (RFC1058) specifications, some fields in RIP-1 packets must be zero, called zero fields. With the checkzero command, the zero check operation for RIP-1 packet can be enabled or disabled. During the zero check operation, if the RIP-1 packet in which the zero fields are not zeros is received, it will be rejected.

This command is ineffective to RIP-2 since RIP-2 packets have no zero fields.


Example

Configure not to perform zero check for RIP-1 packet.

[3Com-rip] undo checkzerodebugging rip

Syntax

debugging rip { packet | receive | send }

View

User view

Parameter

■ packet: Enables the RIP packets debugging.

■ receive: Enables the RIP receiving packets debugging.

■ send: Enables the RIP sending packets debugging.

Description

Using the debugging rip command, you can enable the RIP packet debugging. Using the undo debugging rip command, you can disable the RIP packet debugging.

Users can learn the current information of receiving and sending RIP packets on each interface by using this command.

Example

Enable the RIP packets debugging.

<3Com> debugging rip packet

default cost Syntax

default cost value

undo default cost

View

RIP view

Parameter

■ value: Default routing cost to be set, ranging from 1 to 16.The default value is 1.

Description

Using the default cost command, you can configure the default routing cost of an imported route. Using the undo default cost command, you can restore the default value.

If no specific routing cost is specified when importing other protocol routes with the import-route command, the importing will be performed with the default routing cost specified by the default cost command.

For the related command, see import-route.


Example

Set the default routing cost of importing other route protocol routes as 3.

[3Com-rip] default cost 3

display rip Syntax

display rip

View

Any view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the display rip command, you can view the current RIP running state and its configuration information.

Example

Display the current running state and configuration information of the RIP protocol.

<3Com> display rip RIP is turned on public net VPN-Instance Checkzero is on Default cost : 1 Summary is on Preference : 100 Period update timer : 30 Timeout timer : 180 Garbage-collection timer : 120 No peer routerTable 2 Description of the output information of the display rip command

display rip vpn-instance Syntax

display rip vpn-instance vpn-instance-name

View

Any view

Parameter

■ vpn-instance vpn-instance-name: VPN instance name.

Item DescriptionRIP is turned on RIP is enabled.public net VPN-Instance Public networks in the VPN-instanceCheckzero is on Enables checkzero of RIP.Default cost : 1 The default cost of the imported route is 1.Summary is on Enables route summary of RIP.Preference : 100 The preference of RIP is 100.Period update timer : 30

Timeout timer : 180

Garbage-collection timer : 120

Setting on the three timers of RIP

No peer router RIP has no peer router.


Description

Using the display rip vpn-instance command, you can view the related configuration of VPN instance of RIP.

Example

None

filter-policy export Syntax

filter-policy { acl-number | ip-prefix ip-prefix-name } export [ routing-protocol ]

undo filter-policy { acl-number | ip-prefix ip-prefix-name } export [ routing-protocol ]

View

RIP view

Parameter

■ acl-number: Access control list number used for filtering the destination addresses of the routing information.

■ ip-prefix-name: Name of address prefix list used for filtering the destination addresses of the routing information.

■ routing-protocol: Routing protocol whose routing information is to be filtered, including direct, isis, bgp, ospf, ospf-ase, ospf-nssa, and static at present.

Description

Using the filter-policy export command, you can configure to filter the advertised routing information by RIP. Using the undo filter-policy export command, you can configure not to filter the advertised routing information.

By default, RIP does not filter the advertised routing information.

For the related commands, see acl, filter-policy import, and ip ip-prefix.

Example

Filter the advertised route information according to acl 3.

[3Com-rip] filter-policy 3 export

filter-policy import Syntax

filter-policy gateway ip-prefix-name import

undo filter-policy gateway ip-prefix-name import

filter-policy { acl-number | ip-prefix ip-prefix-name [ gateway ip-prefix-name ] } import

undo filter-policy { acl-number | ip-prefix ip-prefix-name [ gateway ip-prefix-name ] } import

View

RIP view


Parameter



■ gateway ip-prefix-name: Name of address prefix list used for filtering the addresses of the neighboring routers advertising the routing information.

Description

Using the filter-policy gateway command, you can configure to filter the received routing information distributed from the specified address. Using the undo filter-policy gateway command, you can configure not to filter the received routing information distributed from the specified address.

Using the filter-policy import command, you can configure the filtering to the received global routing information. Using the undo filter-policy import command, you can disable filtering to the received global routing information

By default, RIP does not filter the received routing information.

The range of the routes received by RIP can be controlled by specifying the access control list and the address prefix list.

For the related command, see acl, filter-policy export, and ip ip-prefix.

Example

Configure the filtering of the global routing information according to acl 3.

[3Com-rip] filter-policy 3 import

host-route Syntax

host-route

undo host-route

View

RIP view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the host-route command, you can control the RIP to accept the host route. Using the undo host-route command, you can reject the host route.

By default, router accepts the host route.

In some special cases, RIP receives a great number of host routes in the same network segment. These routes cannot help the path searching much but occupy a lot of resources. In this case, the undo host-route command can be used to reject host routes.

Example

Configure RIP to reject a host route.

[3Com-rip] undo host-route


import-route Syntax

import-route protocol [ cost value ] [ route-policy route-policy-name ]

undo import-route protocol

View

RIP view

Parameter

■ protocol: Specifies the source routing protocol to be imported by RIP. At present, RIP can import the following routes: direct, ospf, ospf-ase, ospf-nssa, static, and bgp and isis.

■ value: Cost value of the route to be imported, ranging from 1 to 16..

■ route-policy route-policy-name: Configured to import the route matching the condition of the specified Route-policy only.

Description

Using the import-route command, you can import the routes of other protocols into RIP. Using the undo import-route command, you can cancel the routes imported from other protocols.

By default, RIP does not import any other routes.

The import-route command is used to import the route of another protocol by using a certain value. RIP regards the imported route as its own route and transmits it with the specified value. This command can greatly enhance the RIP capability of obtaining routes, thus increasing the RIP performance.

If the cost value is not specified, routes will be imported according to the default cost. It is in the range of 1 to 16. If it is larger than or equal to 16, it indicates an unreachable route and the transmission will be stopped in 120 seconds.

For the related command, see default cost.

Example

Import a static route with cost being 4.

[3Com-rip] import-route static cost 4 Set the default cost and import an OSPF route with the default cost.[3Com-rip] default cost 3[3Com-rip] import-route ospf

ipv4-family vpn-instance Syntax

ipv4-family [ unicast ] vpn-instance vpn-instance-name

undo ipv4-family [ unicast ] vpn-instance vpn-instance-name

View

RIP view

Parameter

■ unicast: Unicast address.

■ vpn-instance-name: Associates the specified VPN instance with the IPv4 address family. Enter the MBGP address family view of RIP with this parameter.


Description

Using the ipv4-family command, you can enter MBGP address family view of RIP. Using the undo ipv4-family command, you can cancel all configurations in extended address family view.

ipv4-family command is used to enter the MBGP address family view. In this view, parameters related to address family can be configured for RIP.

undo ipv4-family command is only used in RIP view.

The ipv4-family vpn-instance command is used for BGP/MPLS VPN. For related description, refer to “MPLS VPN“ section in module “MPLS” chapter of this manual.

For the related command, see display rip vpn-instance.

Example

None

network Syntax

network network-address

undo network network-address

View

RIP view

Parameter

network-address: Address of the network enabled/disabled. It can be the IP network address of any interface.

Description

Using the network command, you can enable Routing Information Protocol (RIP) on the interface. Using the undo network command, you can cancel the RIP on the interface.

By default, RIP is disabled on any interface.

After enabling a RIP routing process, it is disabled on any interface by default. RIP at a certain interface must be enabled with the network command.

The undo network command is similar to the interface undo rip work command in terms of function. But they are not identical. Their similarity is that the interface using either command will not receive/transmit RIP routes. The difference between them is that, in the case of undo rip work , other interfaces will still forward the routes of the interface using the undo rip work command. In the case of undo network, it is like to perform undo rip work command on the interface, and the routes of corresponding interfaces cannot be transmitted by RIP. Therefore, the packets transmitted to this interface cannot be forwarded.

When the network command is used on an address, the effect is that the interface on the network segment at this address is enabled. For example, the results of viewing the network 129.102.1.1 with both the display current-configuration command and the display rip command are shown as the network 129.102.0.0.

For the related command, see rip work.


Example

Enable the RIP on the interface with the network address as 129.102.0.0.

[3Com-rip] network 129.102.0.0

peer Syntax

peer ip-address

undo peer ip-address

View

RIP view

Parameter

■ ip-address: IP address of the peer router with which information will be exchanged in unicast mode, represented in the format of dotted decimal.

Description

Using the peer command, you can configure the destination address of the peer to which information is sent in unicast mode. Using the undo peer command, you can cancel the set destination address.

By default, do not send RIP packet to any destination.

This command specifies the sending destination address to fit some non-broadcast networks. Usually, it is not recommended to use this command.

Example

Specify the sending destination address 202.38.165.1.

[3Com-rip] peer 202.38.165.1

preference Syntax

preference value

undo preference

View

RIP view

Parameter

value: Preference level, ranging from 1 to 255. By default, the value is 100.

Description

Using the preference command, you can configure the route preference of RIP. Using the undo preference command, you can restore the default preference.

Every routing protocol has its own preference. Its default value is determined by the specific routing policy. The preference will finally determine the routing algorithm to obtain the optimal route in the IP routing table. This command can be used to modify the RIP preference manually.

Example

Specify the RIP preference as 20.


[3Com-rip] preference 20

reset Syntax

reset

View

RIP view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the reset command, you can reset the system parameters of RIP.

When you need to re-configure parameters of RIP, this command can be used to restore the default setting.

Example

Reset the RIP system.

[3Com-rip] reset

rip Syntax

rip

undo rip

View

system view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the rip command, you can enable the RIP and enter the RIP view. Using the undo rip command, you can cancel RIP.

By default, the system does not run RIP.

To enter the RIP view to configure various RIP global parameters, RIP should be enabled first. Whereas the configuration of parameters related to the interfaces is not restricted by enabling/disabling RIP.

The interface parameters configured previously would be invalid when RIP is disabled.

Example

Enable the RIP and enter the RIP view.

[3Com] rip[3Com-rip]


rip authentication-mode Syntax

rip authentication-mode { { simple password } | { md5 { key-string key-string | key-id key-id } } }

undo rip authentication-mode

View

Interface view

Parameter

■ simple: Simple text authentication mode.

■ password: Simple text authentication key, in character string format with 1 to 16 characters in simple text mode or 24 characters in cipher text mode.

■ md5: MD5 cipher text authentication mode.

■ key-string: MD5 cipher text authentication key, in character string format with 1 to 16 characters in simple text mode or 24 characters in cipher text mode.

■ key-id: MD5 cipher text authentication identifier, ranging from 1 to 255.

Description

Using the rip authentication-mode command, you can configure RIP-2 authentication mode and corresponding parameters. Using the undo rip authentication-mode command, you can cancel the RIP-2 authentication.

RIP-1 does not support authentication. There are two RIP authentication modes: simple text authentication and MD5 cipher text authentication. When MD5 cipher text authentication mode is used, there are two types of packet formats. One of them is described in RFC 1723, which was brought forward earlier. The other format is the one described specially in RFC 2082. The router supports both of the packet formats and the user can select either of them on demands.

For the related command, see rip version.

Example

Specify Interface serial1/0/0 to use the simple text authentication with the key as aaa.

[3Com] interface serial1/0/0[3Com-Serial1/0/0] rip version 2[3Com-Serial1/0/0] rip authentication-mode simple aaa

rip authentication-mode Syntax

rip authentication-mode md5 type { usual | nonstandard }

View

Interface view

Parameter

■ usual: Specifies the MD5 cipher text authentication packet to use the general packet format (RFC1723 standard format).

■ nonstandard: Specifies the MD5 cipher text authentication packet to use a nonstandard packet format described in RFC2082.


Description

Using the rip authentication-mode md5 type command, you can configure md5 type of RIP-2 authentication

By default, use nonstandard type.

RIP-2 packets can be in the following two formats when MD5 authentication is adopted: The earlier raised format is described in RFC1723, which is adopted by Gated. Another format fits into RFC2082 standard, which is adopted by part of the routers in the industry.

For the related commands, see rip authentication-mode and rip version.

Example

Set MD5 authentication at Serial0, and the packet type is "nonstandard".

[3Com] interface serial1/0/0[3Com-Serial1/0/0] rip version 2[3Com-Serial1/0/0] rip authentication-mode md5 type nonstandard

rip input Syntax

rip input

undo rip input

View

Interface view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the rip input command, you can allow an interface to receive RIP packets. Using the undo rip input command, you can cancel an interface to receive RIP packets.

By default, RIP packets at all interfaces (except loopback interface) can be received..

This command is used in cooperation with the other two commands: rip output and rip work. Functionally, rip work is equivalent to rip input & rip output. The latter two control the receipt and the transmission of RIP packets respectively on an interface. The former command equals the functional combination of the latter two commands.

For the related command, see rip output and rip work.

Example

Specify the interface serial1/0/0 not to receive RIP packets.

[3Com-serial1/0/0] undo rip input

rip metricin Syntax

rip metricin value

undo rip metricin


View

Interface view

Parameter

■ value: Additional route metric added when receiving a packet, ranging from 0 to 16. By default, the value is 1.

Description

Using the rip metricin command, you can configure the additional route metric added to the route when an interface receives RIP packets. Using the undo rip metricin command, you can restore the default value of this additional route metric.

This command is valid for the routes distributed by the local network and other routes imported by other routes. This command is invalid for the routes imported by the local router.

For the related command, see rip metricout.

Example

Specify the additional route metric to 2 when the interface serial1/0/0 receives RIP packets.

[3Com] interface serial1/0/0[3Com-serial1/0/0] rip metricin 2

rip metricout Syntax

rip metricout value

undo rip metricout

View

Interface view

Parameter

■ value: Additional route metric added when transmitting a packet, ranging from 1 to 16. By default, the value is 1.

Description

Using the rip metricout command, you can configure the additional route metric to the route when an interface transmits RIP packets. Using the undo rip metricout command, you can restore the default value of this additional route metric.

This command is valid for the routes distributed by the local network and other routes imported by other routes. This command is invalid for the routes imported by the local router.

For the related command, see rip metricin.

Example

Set the additional route metric to 2 when the interface serial1/0/0 transmits RIP packets.

[3Com] interface serial1/0/0[3Com-serial1/0/0] rip metricout 2


rip output Syntax

rip output

undo rip output

View

Interface view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the rip output command, you can configure an interface to transmit RIP packets to the external. Using the undo rip output command, you can cancel an interface to transmit RIP packets to the external.

By default, RIP packets at all interfaces (except loopback interface) can be transmitted.

This command is used in cooperation with the other two commands: rip input and rip work. Functionally, rip work is equivalent to rip input & rip output. The latter two control the receipt and the transmission of RIP packets respectively on an interface. The former command equals the functional combination of the latter two commands.

For the related command, see rip input and rip work.

Example

Disable the interface serial1/0/0 to transmit RIP packets.

[3Com] interface serial1/0/0[3Com-serial1/0/0] undo rip output

rip split-horizon Syntax

rip split-horizon

undo rip split-horizon

View

Interface view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the rip split-horizon command, you can configure an interface to use split horizon when transmitting RIP packets. Using the undo rip split-horizon command, you can configure an interface not to use split horizon when transmitting RIP packets.

By default, an interface is enabled to use split horizon when transmitting RIP packets.


Normally, split horizon is necessary for reducing route loop. Only in some special cases, split horizon should be disabled to ensure the correct execution of protocols.

Example

Specify the interface serial1/0/0 not to use split horizon when processing RIP packets.

[3Com] interface serial1/0/0[3Com-serial1/0/0] undo rip split-horizon

rip version Syntax

rip version { 1| { 2 [ broadcast | multicast ] } }

undo rip version

View

Interface view

Parameter

■ 1: Interface version is RIP-1.

■ 2: Interface version is RIP-2. By default, multicast is used.

■ broadcast: Transmission mode of RIP-2 packet is broadcast.

■ multicast: Transmission mode of RIP-2 packet is multicast.

Description

Using the rip version command, you can configure the version of RIP packets on an interface. Using the undo rip version command, you can restore the default value of RIP packet version on the interface.

By default, the interface RIP version is RIP-1.

RIP-2 has 2 transmission modes: broadcast and multicast. Multicast is the default mode. The multicast address in RIP-2 is 224.0.0.9. One of the advantages of multicast mode is that the hosts that do not run RIP in this network will not receive the broadcast packets. Additionally, hosts running RIP-1 will be prevented from receiving and processing the RIP-2 routes with subnet masks.

When the interface specifies the use of RIP-1, only RIP-1 and RIP-2 broadcast packets will be received. In this case, RIP-2 multicast packets will be rejected. When the interface is specified to use RIP-2 multicast, only RIP-2 multicast packets and RIP-2 broadcast packets will be received. In this case, RIP-1 packets will be rejected.

Example

Configure the interface serial1/0/0 as RIP-2 broadcast mode.

[3Com] interface serial1/0/0[3Com-serial1/0/0] rip version 2 broadcast

rip work Syntax

rip work

undo rip work


View

Interface view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the rip work command, you can enable the running of RIP on an interface. Using the undo rip work command, you can disable the running of RIP on an interface.

By default, RIP is run on an interface.

This command is used in cooperation with rip input, rip output and network commands.

For the related commands, see network, rip input, and rip output.

Example

Disable the interface serial1/0/0 to run the RIP.

[3Com] interface serial1/0/0[3Com-serial1/0/0] undo rip work

summary Syntax

summary

undo summary

View

RIP view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the summary command, you can enable RIP-2 automatic route summarization. Using the undo summary command, you can disable RIP-2 automatic route summarization.

By default, RIP-2 route summarization is enabled.

Route aggregation can be performed to reduce the routing traffic on the network as well as to reduce the size of the routing table. If RIP-2 is used, route summarization function can be disabled with the undo summary command, when it is necessary to broadcast the subnet route.

RIP-1 does not support subnet mask. Forwarding subnet route may cause ambiguity. Therefore, RIP-1 uses route summarization all the time. The undo summary command is invalid for RIP-1.

For the related command, see rip version.

Example

Set RIP version on the interface serial1/0/0 as RIP-2 and disable the route summarization function.


[3Com] interface serial1/0/0[3Com-serial1/0/0] rip version 2[3Com-serial1/0/0] quit[3Com] rip[3Com-rip] undo summary

timers Syntax

timers { update update-timer-length | timeout timeout-timer-length } *

undo timers { update | timeout } *

View

RIP view

Parameters

■ update-timer-length: Period update value, measured in seconds ranging from 1 to 3600. The default value is 30 seconds.

■ timeout-timer-length: Timeout value, measured in seconds ranging from 1 to 3600. The default value is 180 seconds.

Description

Using the timers command, you can modify value for the three timers, Period update, Timeout and Garbage-collection, of RIP. Using the undo timers command, you can restore the default setting.

The default values of timer Period update, Timeout and Garbage-collection are respectively 30s, 180s and 120s.

Usually, the timing length of timer Garbage-collection is fixedly 3 times longer than that of timer Period update. However, in practice, an unreachable route will not be completely deleted until the fourth update packet sent from the same neighbor is received. So the actual timing length of timer Garbage-collection is as 3 to 4 times as that of timer Period update. Additionally, the modification on timer Period update will affect timer Garbage-collection.

The modified value of RIP timers will take effect immediately.

For the related command, see display rip.

Example

Set timer Period update to 10 seconds and timer Timeout to 30 seconds.

[3Com] rip[3Com-rip] timers update 10 timeout 30

OSPF Configuration Commands

abr-summary Syntax

abr-summary ip-address mask [ advertise | not-advertise ]

undo abr-summary ip-address mask

OSPF Configuration Commands 561

View

OSPF area view

Parameter

■ ip-address: Network segment address.

■ mask: Network mask.

■ Advertise: Advertises only the summarized route.

■ Notadvertise: Suppresses the advertisement of the routes in the matched range.

Description

Using the abr-summary command, you can configure the route aggregation on the area border router (ABR). Using the undo abr-summary command, you can cancel the function of route aggregation on the area border router.

By default, the area border router doesn’t aggregate routes.

This command is applicable only to the ABR and is used for the route aggregation in an area. The ABR only transmits an aggregated route to other areas. Route aggregation refers to that the routing information is processed in the ABR and for each network segment configured with route aggregation, there is only one route transmitted to other areas. An area can configure multiple aggregation network segments. Thus OSPF can aggregate various network segments together.

Example

Aggregate the routes in the two network segments, 36.42.10.0 and 36.42.110.0, of OSPF area 1 into one route 36.42.0.0 and transmit it to other areas.

[3Com-ospf-1] area 1[3Com-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.1] network 36.42.10.0 0.0.0.255[3Com-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.1] network 36.42.110.0 0.0.0.255[3Com-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.1] abr-summary 36.42.0.0 255.255.0.0

area Syntax

area area-id

undo area area-id

View

OSPF view, OSPF area view

Parameter

■ area-id: ID of the OSPF area, which can be a decimal integer (ranging from 0 to 4294967295) or in IP address format.

Description

Using the area command, you can enter OSPF area view. Using the undo area command, you can cancel the designated area.

Example

Enter area 0 view.

[3Com-ospf-1] area 0


[3Com-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.0]

asbr-summary Syntax

asbr-summary ip-address mask [ not-advertise | tag value ]

undo asbr-summary ip-address mask [ not-advertise | tag value ]

View

OSPF view

Parameter

■ ip-address: Matched IP address in dotted decimal notation.

■ mask: IP address mask in dotted decimal notation.

■ not-advertise: Not advertises routes matching the specified IP address and mask. Aggregated route will be advertised without this parameter.

■ tag-value: Control advertisement of routes via Route-policy. It is in the range from 0 to 4294967295. If it is not specified, it is 1 by default.

Description

Using the asbr-summary command, you can configure summarization of imported routes by OSPF. Using the undo asbr-summary command, you can cancel the summarization.

By default, summarization of imported routes is disabled.

After the summarization of imported routes is configured, if the local router is an autonomous system border router (ASBR), this command summarizes the imported Type-5 LSAs in the summary address range. When NSSA is configured, this command will also summarize the imported Type-7 LSAs in the summary address range.

If the local router acts as both an ABR and a switch router in the NSSA, this command summarizes Type-5 LSAs transformed from Type-7 LSAs. If the router is not the router in the NSSA, the summarization is disabled.

For the related command, see display ospf asbr-summary.

Example

Set summarization of 3Com imported routes.

[3Com-ospf-1] asbr-summary 10.2.0.0 255.255.0.0 not-advertise

authentication-mode Syntax

authentication-mode [ simple | md5 ]

undo authentication-mode

View

OSPF area view

Parameter

■ simple: Simple text authentication mode.


■ md5: MD5 cipher text authentication mode.

Description

Using the authentication-mode command, you can configure one area of OSPF to support the authentication attribute. Using the undo authentication-mode command, you can cancel the authentication attribute of this area.

By default, an area does not support authentication attribute.

All the routers in one area must use the same authentication mode (no authentication, supporting simple text authentication or MD5 cipher text authentication). If the mode of supporting authentication is configured, all routers on the same segment must use the same authentication key. To configure a simple text authentication key, use the ospf authentication-mode simple command. And, use the ospf authentication-mode md5 command to configure the MD5 cipher text authentication key if the area is configured to support MD5 cipher text authentication mode.

For the related command, see ospf authentication-mode.

Example

Enter area 0 view.

[3Com-ospf-1] area 0 Specify the OSPF area 0 to support MD5 cipher text authentication.[3Com-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.0] authentication-mode md5

debugging ospf Syntax

debugging ospf [ process-id ] { event | { packet [ ack | dd | hello | request | update ] } | lsa-generate | spf | te }

undo debugging ospf [ process-id ] { event | { packet [ ack | dd | hello | request | update ] } | lsa-generate | spf | te }

View

User view

Parameter

■ process-id: OSPF process number. If no process number is specified, all the process debugging is enabled or disabled.

■ event: Enables OSPF event information debugging.

■ packet: Enables OSPF packet information debugging. There are five sorts of packets in OSPF as follows:

■ ack: LSAck packet.

■ dd: Database Description packet.

■ hello: Hello message.

■ request: Link State Request packet.

■ update: Link State Update packet.

■ Lsa-generate: Enables OSPF LSA packet information debugging.

■ spf: Enables the debugging of the calculation of the OSPF shortest-path tree.

■ te: Enables the debugging of OSPF TE.


Description

Using the debugging ospf command, you can enable OSPF debugging. Using the undo debugging ospf command, you can disable the function.

In OSPF multi-process, using debugging command, you can enable the debugging of all the process simultaneously or one of the processes only.

If no process number is specified in the debugging command, the command is valid to all the processes. And it keeps the state during the router running period no matter OSPF process exits or not. In this way, the execution of this command will enable/disable each enabled OSPF debugging. At the same time, the debugging specified by this command will be enabled automatically when new OSPF is enabled.

If there is a specified process number in the debugging command, only the specified process is debugged. The configuration command is invalid if OSPF is not enabled. And the debugging state will not be kept after exiting the process, either.

For the related command, see display debugging ospf.

Example

Enable the information debugging of OSPF packets.

<3Com> debugging ospf packet

default cost Syntax

default cost value

undo default cost

View

OSPF view

Parameter

■ value: Default routing cost of external route imported by OSPF, ranging from 0 to 16777214. By default, its value is 1.

Description

Using the default cost command, you can configure the default cost for OSPF to import external routes. Using the undo default cost command, you can restore the default value of the default routing cost configured for OSPF to import external routes.

Since OSPF can import external routing information and propagate it to the entire autonomous system, it is necessary to specify the default routing cost for the protocol to import external routes.

If multiple OSPFs are enabled, the command is valid to this process only.

Example

Specify the default routing cost for OSPF to import external routes as 10.

[3Com-ospf-1] default cost 10

default interval Syntax

default interval seconds


undo default interval

View

OSPF view

Parameter

■ seconds: Default interval for importing external routes. Its unit is second and the value ranges from 1 to 2147483647. By default, the interval for OSPF to import external routes is 1 second.

Description

Using the default interval command, you can configure the default interval for OSPF to import external routes. Using the undo default interval command, you can restore the default value of the default interval of importing external routes.

Because OSPF can import the external routing information and broadcast it to the entire autonomous system, it is necessary to specify the default interval for the protocol to import external routes.

Example

Specify the default interval for OSPF to import external routes as 10 seconds.

[3Com-ospf-1] default interval 10

default limit Syntax

default limit routes

undo default limit

View

OSPF view

Parameter

■ routes: Default value to the imported external routes in a unit time, ranging from 200 to 2147483647. By default, the value is 1000.

Description

Using the default limit command, you can configure default value of maximum number of imported routes. Using the undo default limit command, you can restore the default value.

OSPF can import external route information and broadcast them to the whole autonomous system, so it is necessary to regulate the default value of external route information imported in one process.

For the related command, see default interval.

Example

Specify the default value of OSPF importing external routes as 200.

[3Com-ospf-1] default limit 200

default tag Syntax

default tag tag


undo default tag

View

OSPF view

Parameter

■ tag: Default tag, ranging from 0 to 4294967295.

Description

Using the default tag command, you can configure the default tag of OSPF when it redistributes an external route. Using the undo default tag command, you can restore the default tag of OSPF when it redistributes the external route.

When OSPF redistributes a route found by other routing protocols in the router and uses it as the external routing information of its own autonomous system, some additional parameters are required, including the default cost and the default tag of the route.

For the related command, see default type.

Example

Set the default tag of OSPF imported external route of the autonomous system as 10.

[3Com-ospf-1] default tag 10

default type Syntax

default type { 1 | 2 }

undo default type

View

OSPF view

Parameter

■ type 1: External routes of type 1.

■ type 2: External routes of type 2.

Description

Using the default type command, you can configure the default type when OSPF redistributes external routes. Using the undo default type command, you can restore the default type when OSPF redistributes external routes.

By default, the external routes of type 2 are imported.

OSPF specifies the two types of external routing information. The command described in this section can be used to specify the default type when external routes are imported.

For the related command, see default tag.

Example

Specify the default type as type 1 when OSPF imports an external route.

[3Com-ospf-1] default type 1


default-cost Syntax

default-cost value

undo default-cost

View

OSPF area view

Parameter

■ value: Specifies the cost value of the default route transmitted by OSPF to the STUB or NSSA area, ranging from 0 to 16777214. The default value is 1.

Description

Using the default-cost command, you can configure the cost of the default route transmitted by OSPF to the STUB or NSSA area. Using the undo default-cost command, you can restore the cost of the default route transmitted by OSPF to the STUB or NSSA area to the default value.

This command is applicable for the border routers connected to STUB or NSSA area.

The stub and default-cost commands are necessary in configuring STUB area. All the routers connected to STUB area must use stub command to configure the stub attribute to this area. Using the default-cost command, you can specify the cost of the default route transmitted by ABR to STUB or NSSA area.

This command is only valid for this process if multiple OSPF processes are enabled.

For the related commands, see stub and nssa.

Example

Set the area 1 as the STUB area and the cost of the default route transmitted to this STUB area to 60.

[3Com-ospf-1] area 1[3Com-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.1] network 20.0.0.0 0.255.255.255[3Com-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.1] stub[3Com-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.1] default-cost 60

default-route-advertise Syntax

default-route-advertise [ always ] [ cost cost-value ] [ type type-value ] [ route-policy route-policy-name ]

undo default-route-advertise [ always ] [ cost ] [ type ] [ route-policy ]

View

OSPF view

Parameter

■ always: Only available for the ASBR. If the parameter is selected, a default route which is advertised via LSAs will be generated no matter whether there is a default route in the routing table. For the ASBR in an general area, the default route is advertised via Type-5 LSA, while in NSSA, the default route is advertised via Type-7 LSA.


■ cost-value: Cost value of this LSA. The cost-value ranges from 0 to 16777214. The default value is 1.

■ type-value: Cost type of this LSA. It ranges from 1 to 2. The default value is 2.

■ route-policy-name: If the default route matches the route-policy specified by route-policy-name, route-policy will affect the value in LSA. The length of route-policy-name parameter ranges from 1 to 19 character.

Description

Using the default-route-advertise command, you can make the system generate a default route to OSPF area. Using the undo default-route-advertise command, you can cancel the generating of default route.

By default, OSPF does not generate default route.

Using the default-route-advertise command at ABR, you can generate a default route which is advertised via the Type-5 LSA or Type-7 LSA no matter whether there is a default route in the routing table.

An OSPF router after the default-route-advertise command is executed will become an ASBR, as is similar to executing the import-route command on an OSPF router. But you cannot import the default route into the OSPF area with the import-route command.

In addition, the default-route-advertise command is not available for the Stub area. For the ABR or ASBR in NSSA, the default-route-advertise command is equivalent to the nssa default-route-advertise command in terms of effect.

This command is valid for the current process only if multiple OSPF processes are enabled.

For the related commands, see import-route and nssa.

Example

If local route has default route, the LSA of default route will be generated, otherwise it won’t be generated.

[3Com-ospf-1] default-route-advertise The LSA of default route will be generated and advertised to OSPF route area even the local router has no default route.[3Com-ospf-1] default-route-advertise always

display debugging ospf Syntax

display debugging ospf

View

Any view

Description

Using the display debugging ospf command, you can view the global OSPF debugging state and each process debugging state.

For the related command, see debugging ospf.

Example

View the global OSPF debugging state and each process debugging state.


<3Com> display debugging ospfOSPF global debugging state:OSPF SPF debugging is onOSPF LSA debugging is on

OSPF process 100 debugging state:OSPF SPF debugging is onOSPF process 200 debugging state:OSPF SPF debugging is onOSPF LSA debugging is on

display ospf abr-asbr Syntax

display ospf abr-asbr

View

Any view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the display ospf abr-asbr command, you can view the information about the Area Border Router (ABR) and Autonomous System Border Router (ASBR) of OSPF.

Example

Display the information of the OSPF ABR and ASBR.

<3Com> display ospf abr-asbrRouting Table to ABR and ASBRDestination Area Cost Type Nexthop Interface Intra 1.2.3.9 0.0.0.0 1 ASBR 1.2.3.9 Ethernet2/0/0

display ospfasbr-summary

Syntax

display ospf asbr-summary [ ip-address mask ]

View

Any view

Parameter

■ ip-address: Matched IP address, in dotted decimal notation.

■ mask: IP address mask in dotted decimal notation.

Description

Using the display ospf asbr-summary command, you can view the summary information of OSPF imported routes.

If the parameters are not configured, the summary information of all imported routes will be viewed.

For the related command, see asbr-summary.


Example

Display the summary information of all OSPF imported routes.

<3Com> display ospf asbr-summaryTotal summary address count: 2

Summary Addressnet : 168.10.0.0mask : 255.254.0.0tag : 1status : AdvertiseThe Count of Route is 0

Summary Addressnet : 1.1.0.0mask : 255.255.0.0tag : 100status : DoNotAdvertiseThe Count of Route is 0

display ospf brief Syntax

display ospf [ process-id ] brief

View

Any view

Parameter

■ process-id: Process number of OSPF. If no process number is specified, this command displays the main information of all OSPF processes in configuration sequence.

Description

Using the display ospf brief command, you can view the summary of OSPF.

Example

Display the OSPF summary.

<3Com> display ospf briefRouterID: 3.3.3.3 Border Router: Area spf-schedule-interval: 5 Routing preference: Inter/Intra: 10 External: 150 Default ASE parameters: Metric: 1 Tag: 0.0.0.1 Type: 2 SPF computation count: 13 Area Count: 2 Nssa Area Count: 0

Area 0.0.0.0: Authtype: none Flags: <> SPF scheduled: <> Interface: 20.0.0.2 (Ethernet1/0/0) Cost: 1 State: BackupDR Type: Broadcast Priority: 1 Designated Router: 20.0.0.1 Backup Designated Router: 20.0.0.2 Timers: Hello 10, Dead 40, Poll 0, Retransmit 5, Transmit Delay 1


Interface: 30.0.0.1 (Ethernet2/0/0) Cost: 1 State: DR Type: Broadcast Priority: 1 Designated Router: 30.0.0.1 Timers: Hello 10, Dead 40, Poll 0, Retransmit 5, Transmit Delay 1

Area 0.0.0.1: Authtype: none Flags: <Transit> SPF scheduled: <> Interface: 40.0.0.1 (LoopBack0) --> 40.0.0.1 Cost: 1562 State: P To P Type: PointToPoint Priority: 1 Timers: Hello 10, Dead 40, Poll 0, Retransmit 5, Transmit Delay 1 Display the routing information of OSPF 100.<3Com> display ospf 100 OSPF Process 100 with Router ID 1.2.3.4 OSPF Protocol Information RouterID: 1.2.3.4 Spf-schedule-interval: 5 Routing preference: Inter/Intra: 10 External: 150 Default ASE parameters: Metric: 1 Tag: 0.0.0.1 Type: 2 SPF computation count: 0 Area Count: 0 Nssa Area Count: 0

display ospf cumulative Syntax

display ospf cumulative

View

Any view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the display ospf cumulative command, you can view the OSPF cumulative information.

Example

Display the OSPF cumulative information.

<3Com> display ospf cumulativeIO StatisticsType InputOutputHello 225 437DB Description7886Link-State Req1818Link-State Update 4853Link-State Ack2521ASE: 1 Checksum Sum: FCAF LSAs originated by this router

Router: 50SumNet: 40SumASB: 2LSAs Originated: 92 LSAs Received: 33


Area 0.0.00.0:Neighbors: 1 Interfaces: 1Spf: 54 Checksum Sum F020rtr: 2 net: 0 sumasb: 0 sumnet: 1

Area 0.0.0.1:Neighbors: 0 Interfaces: 1Spf: 19 Checksum Sum 14EAD rtr: 1 net: 0sumasb: 1sumnet: 1

Routing Table:Intra Area: 2 Inter Area: 0ASE: 1

display ospf error Syntax

display ospf error

View

Any view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the display ospf error command, you can view the statistics of error information which OSPF received.

Example

Display the statistics of error information which OSPF received .

<3Com> display ospf errorOSPF packet error statistics:0: IP: received my own packet0: OSPF: bad packet type0: OSPF: bad version0: OSPF: bad checksum0: OSPF: bad area id0: OSPF: area mismatch0: OSPF: bad virtual link0: OSPF: bad authentication type0: OSPF: bad authentication key 0: OSPF: packet too small0: OSPF: packet size > ip length 0: OSPF: transmit error0: OSPF: interface down0: OSPF: unknown neighbor0: HELLO: netmask mismatch0: HELLO: hello timer mismatch0: HELLO: dead timer mismatch0: HELLO: extern option mismatch0: HELLO: router id confusion0: HELLO: virtual neighbor unknown0: HELLO: NBMA neighbor unknown 0: DD: neighbor state low0: DD: router id confusion0: DD: extern option mismatch0: DD: unknown LSA type 0: LS ACK: neighbor state low0: LS ACK: bad ack0: LS ACK: duplicate ack0: LS ACK: unknown LSA type 0: LS REQ: neighbor state low0: LS REQ: empty request0: LS REQ: bad request0: LS UPD: neighbor state low0: LS UPD: newer self-generate LSA0: LS UPD: LSA checksum bad0: LS UPD:received less recent LSA0: LS UPD: unknown LSA type 0: OSPF routing: next hop not exist0: DD: MTU option mismatch

display ospf interface Syntax

display ospf interface [ interface-type port-number ]


View

Any view

Parameter

■ interface-type: Interface type

■ port-number: Interface number.

Description

Using the display ospf interface command, you can view the OSPF interface information.

Example

Display the OSPF ethernet2/0/0 interface information.

<3Com> display ospf interface ethernet2/0/0Interface: 10.110.0.2 (Ethernet2/0/0) Cost: 1 State: BackupDR Type: Broadcast Priority: 1 Designated Router: 10.110.0.1 Backup Designated Router: 10.110.0.2 Timers: Hello 10, Dead 40, Poll 0, Retransmit 5, Transmit Delay 1

display ospf lsdb Syntax

display ospf [ area-id ] lsdb [ brief ] [ asbr | ase | network | nssa | opaque | router | summary ] [ ip-address ] [ originate-router ip-address ] [ self-originate ]

View

Any view

Parameter

■ area-id: ID of the OSPF area, represented by decimal integer ranging from 0 to 4294967295 or in IP address format.

■ brief: Brief database information.

■ asbr: Database information of Type-4 LSA (summary-Asbr-LSA).

■ ase: Database information of Type-5 LSA (AS-external-LSA).

■ network: Database information of Type-2 LSA (Network-LSA).

■ nssa: Database information of Type-7 LSA (NSSA-external-LSA)

■ opaque: Database information of Opaque LSA.

■ router: Database information of Type-1 LSA (Router-LSA)

■ summary: Database information of Type-3 LSA (Summary-Net-LSA)

■ ip-address: Link state ID in IP address format.

■ originate-router ip-address: IP address of the router advertising LSA packet.

■ self-originate: Database information of self-originated LSA generated by local router..


Description

Using the display ospf lsdb command, you can view the database information about OSPF connecting state.

Example

Display the database information about OSPF connecting state.

<3Com> display ospf lsdb OSPF Process 1 with Router ID 123.1.1.1 Link State Database

Area: 0.0.0.0Type LinkState ID AdvRouter Age Len Sequence Metric WhereRtr 1.1.1.1 1.1.1.1 563 36 80000008 0 SpfTreeNet 1.1.1.2 123.1.1.1 595 32 80000001 0 SpfTree

AS External Database:Type LinkState ID AdvRouter Age Len Sequence Metric WhereASE 1.1.0.0 1.1.1.1 561 36 80000001 1 UninitializedASE 123.1.1.1 1.1.1.1 561 36 80000001 1 Uninitialized

Display the brief database information about OSPF connecting state.

<3Com> display ospf lsdb brief OSPF Process 1 with Router ID 1.1.1.1 LS Database Statistics:Area ID Stub Router Network S-Net S-ASBR Type-7 Subtotal??0.0.0.0 0 2 1 1 0 0 40.0.0.1 0 2 1 1 0 4 8AS External 4Total 0 4 2 2 0 4 16

Display the database information of Type-7 LSA.

<3Com> display ospf lsdb nssa OSPF Process 1 with Router ID 1.1.1.1 Link State Database

Area: 0.0.0.1

type : NSSAls id : 1.1.0.0adv rtr : 1.1.1.1ls age : 93len : 36seq : 80000002chksum : 0x3c66options : (No Type 7/5 translation, DC)Net mask : 255.255.0.0 Tos 0 metric: 1 E type : 2 Forwarding Address :2.2.2.1


Tag: 1

Display database information of summary route.

<3Com> display ospf lsdb summary OSPF Process 1 with Router ID 1.1.1.1 Link State Database Area: 0.0.0.0Type : SumNetLs id : 2.2.0.0Adv rtr : 1.1.1.1Ls age : 304Len : 28seq : 80000001chksum : 0x61d4Options : (DC)Net mask : 255.255.0.0 Tos 0 metric: 1

Display database information of Type-1 LSA.

<3Com> display ospf lsdb router Link State Data Base Area: 0.0.0.0Type : RouterLs id : 20.0.0.1Adv rtr : 20.0.0.1Ls age : 988Len : 36seq : 80000006chksum : 0x428cOptions : (DC) ASBRLink count: 1 Link ID: 20.0.0.1 Data : 20.0.0.1 Type : TransNet Metric : 10


<3Com> display ospf lsdb network OSPF Process 1 with Router ID 1.1.1.1 Link State Database Area: 0.0.0.0Type : NetLs id : 1.1.1.2Adv rtr : 123.1.1.1Ls age : 515Len : 32seq : 80000002chksum : 0xc470Options : (DC)Net mask : 255.255.0.0 Attached Router 123.1.1.1 Attached Router 1.1.1.1



<3Com> display ospf lsdb asbr OSPF Process 1 with Router ID 2.2.2.2 Link State Database Area: 0.0.0.1Type : SumASBLs id : 123.1.1.1Adv rtr : 1.1.1.1Ls age : 20Len : 28seq : 80000001chksum : 0x1f9bOptions : (DC) Tos 0 metric: 1


<3Com> display ospf lsdb ase OSPF Process 1 with Router ID 1.1.1.1 Link State Databasetype : ASEls id : 1.1.0.0adv rtr : 1.1.1.1ls age : 15len : 36seq : 80000001chksum : 0x4a8options : (DC)Net mask : 255.255.0.0 Tos 0 metric: 1 E type : 2 Forwarding Address :0.0.0.0 Tag: 1

Display the LSA packets advertised from the router at 3.3.3.3.

<3Com> display ospf lsdb originate-router 3.3.3.3

Link State Database Area: 0.0.0.0Type LinkState ID AdvRouter Age Len Sequence Metric WhereStub 30.0.0.0 3.3.3.3 -1 24 0 0 SpfTreeSNet 40.0.0.0 3.3.3.3 1524 28 80000006 1562 Inter List

Area: 0.0.0.1Type LinkState ID AdvRouter Age Len Sequence Metric WhereStub 40.0.0.0 3.3.3.3 -1 24 0 0 SpfTreeASB 20.0.0.1 3.3.3.3 1524 28 80000003 1 SumAsb List

Display database information of the LSA packets generated by local router.

<3Com> display ospf lsdb self-originate OSPF Process 1 with Router ID 1.1.1.1 Link State Database

Area: 0.0.0.0Type LinkState ID AdvRouter Age Len Sequence Metric Where


Rtr 1.1.1.1 1.1.1.1 539 36 80000016 0 SpfTreeSNet 2.2.0.0 1.1.1.1 445 28 80000008 1 Inter List

Area: 0.0.0.1Type LinkState ID AdvRouter Age Len Sequence Metric WhereRtr 1.1.1.1 1.1.1.1 539 36 8000000e 0 SpfTreeSNet 1.1.0.0 1.1.1.1 445 28 8000000a 1 Inter ListASB 123.1.1.1 1.1.1.1 445 28 80000007 1 SumAsb List

AS External Database:Type LinkState ID AdvRouter Age Len Sequence Metric WhereASE 100.0.0.0 1.1.1.1 849 36 8000000a 2 Ase ListASE 1.1.0.0 1.1.1.1 737 36 8000000e 1 Ase List

display ospf nexthop Syntax

display ospf nexthop

View

Any view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the display ospf nexthop command, you can view the information about the next-hop

Example

Display the OSPF next-hop information.

<3Com> display ospf nexthopAddress Type Refcount Intf Addr Intf Name---------------------------------------------------------------------202.38.160.1Direct 3202.38.160.1 Interface serial2/0/0202.38.160.2Neighbor 1202.38.160.1 Interface serial2/0/0

display ospf peer Syntax

display ospf peer [ brief ]

View

Any view

Parameter

brief: Brief information of neighbors in areas.


Description

Using the display ospf peer command, you can view the information about the neighbors in OSPF areas.

Using the display ospf peer brief command, you can view the brief information of neighbors in OSPF, mainly the neighbor number at all states in every area.

The display format of OSPF neighbor valid time is different according to the length of time. Description is as follows:

XXYXXMXXD: More than a year, namely year: month: day

XXXdXXhXXm: More than a day but less than a year, that is, day: hour: minute

XX: XX: XX: Less than a day, namely hour: minute: second

Example

View the information of OSPF peer.

<3Com> display ospf peerArea 0.0.0.0 interface 1.1.1.1(Serial2/0/0)'s neighbor(s) RouterID: 1.1.1.3 Address: 1.1.1.3 State: Full Mode: Nbr is Master Priority: 1 DR: 1.1.1.3 BDR: 1.1.1.1 Dead timer expires in 31s Neighbor is comes for 00:08:24

View the brief information of neighbors in areas.

<3Com> display ospf peer brief OSPF Process 1 with Router ID 1.1.1.1 Neighbor Statistics Area ID Down Attempt Init 2-Way ExStart Exchange Loading Full Total 0.0.0.0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0.0.0.1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 Total 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 2

display ospfrequest-queue

Syntax

display ospf request-queue

View

Any view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the display ospf request-queue command, you can view the information about the OSPF request-queue.

Example

View the information about the OSPF request-queue.

<3Com> display ospf request-queue The Router's Neighbors is RouterID: 103.160.1.1 Address: 103.169.2.5


Interface: 103.169.2.2 Area: 0.0.0.1LSID:129.11.25.0 AdvRouter:103.160.1.1 Sequence:80000001 Age:201LSID:129.11.25.0 AdvRouter:103.160.1.1 Sequence:80000001 Age:201LSID:129.11.25.0 AdvRouter:103.160.1.1 Sequence:80000001 Age:201

display ospfretrans-queue

Syntax

display ospf retrans-queue

View

Any view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the display ospf retrans-queue command, you can view the information about the OSPF retransmission queue.

Example

View the information about the OSPF retransmission queue.

<3Com> display ospf retrans-queue OSPF Process 200 with Router ID 103.160.1.1 Retransmit List

The Router's Neighbors is RouterID: 162.162.162.162 Address: 103.169.2.2 Interface: 103.169.2.5 Area: 0.0.0.1 Retrans list: Type: ASE LSID:129.11.77.0 AdvRouter:103.160.1.1 Type: ASE LSID:129.11.108.0 AdvRouter:103.160.1.1

display ospf routing Syntax

display ospf routing

View

Any view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the display ospf routing command, you can view the information about OSPF routing table.

Example

View the routing table information related to OSPF.

<3Com> display ospf routingRouting for Network


Destination Cost Type NextHop AdvRouter Area10.110.0.0/16 1 Net 10.110.0.1 10.110.0.1 030.110.0.0/16 1 Stub 30.110.0.1 3.3.3.3 0

Total Nets: 2 Intra Area: 2 Inter Area: 0 ASE: 0 NSSA: 0

display ospf vlink Syntax

display ospf vlink

View

Any view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the display ospf vlink command, you can view the information about OSPF virtual links.

Example

View OSPF virtual links information.

<3Com> display ospf vlink Virtual-link Neighbor-id -> 1.1.1.1, State: Down Cost: 0 State: Down Type: Virtual Transit Area: 0.0.0.1 Timers: Hello 10, Dead 40, Poll 0, Retransmit 5, Transmit Delay 1

filter-policy export Syntax

filter-policy { acl-number | ip-prefix ip-prefix-name } export [ routing-protocol ]

undo filter-policy {acl-number | ip-prefix ip-prefix-name} export [ routing-protocol ]

View

OSPF view

Parameter

■ acl-number: Access control list number.

■ ip-prefix-name Name of the address prefix list.

■ routing-protocol: Protocol advertising the routing information, including direct, isis, bgp, rip and static at present.

Description

Using the filter-policy export command, you can configure the rule of OSPF filtering the advertised routing information. Using the undo filter-policy export command, you can cancel the filtering rules that have been set.

By default, no filtering of the distributed routing information is performed.


In some cases, it may be required that only the routing information meeting some conditions can be advertised. Then, the filter-policy command can be used to configure the filtering conditions for the routing information to be advertised. Only the routing information passing the filtration can be advertised.

For the related commands, see acl and ip ip-prefix

Example

Configure OSPF that only advertises the routing information permitted by acl 1.

[3Com] acl number 1[3Com-acl-basic-1] rule permit source 11.0.0.0 0.255.255.255[3Com-acl-basic-1] rule deny source any[3Com-ospf] filter-policy 1 export


filter-policy { acl-number | ip-prefix ip-prefix-name | gateway prefix-list-name } import

undo filter-policy { acl-number | ip-prefix ip-prefix-name | gateway ip-prefix-name } import

View

OSPF view

Parameter



■ gateway ip-prefix-name: Name of address prefix list used for filtering the addresses of the neighboring routers advertising the routing information.

Description

Using the filter-policy import command, you can configure the OSPF rules of filtering the routing information received. Using the undo filter-policy import command, you can cancel the filtering of the routing information received.

By default, no filtering of the received routing information is performed.

In some cases, it may be required that only the routing information meeting some conditions can be received. Then, the filter-policy command can be used to set the filtering conditions for the routing information to be advertised. Only the routing information passed the filtration can be received.

Using the filter-policy import command, you can filter the routes calculated by OSPF. Only the filtered routes can be added to the routing table. The filtering can be performed according to the next hop and destination of the route.

Since OSPF is a dynamic routing protocol based on link state, its routing information hides in the link state, this command cannot filter the advertised/received routing information in link state. There is more limitation when using this command in OSPF than using it in distance vector routing protocol.

This command is valid for this process only if multiple OSPF processes are enabled.


Example

Filter the received routing information according to the rule defined by the access control list 2.

[3Com] acl number 2[3Com-acl-basic-2] rule permit source 20.0.0.0 0.255.255.255[3Com-acl-basic-2] rule deny source any[3Com-ospf-1] filter-policy 2 import

import-route Syntax

import-route protocol [ cost value ] [ type value ] [ tag value ] [ route-policy route-policy-name ]


View

OSPF view

Parameter

■ protocol: Specifies the source routing protocol that can be imported. At present, it includes direct, rip, bgp, isis, static, ospf, ospf-ase, and ospf-nssa.

■ ospf process-id: Imports only the internal routes found by OSPF process-id as external routing information. If no process number is specified, the OSPF default process number 1 is used.

■ ospf-ase process-id: Imports only the ASE external routes found by OSPF process-id as external routing information. If no process number is specified, the OSPF default process number 1 is used.

■ ospf-nssa process-id: Imports only the NSSA external routes found by OSPF process-id as external routing information. If no process number is specified, the OSPF default process number 1 is used.

■ route-policy route-policy-name: Imports only the routes matching the specified Route-policy.

Description

Using the import-route command, you can import the information of another routing protocol. Using the undo import-route command, you can cancel the imported external routing information.

By default, the routing information of other protocols is not imported.

Example

Specify an imported RIP route as the route of type 2, with the route tag as 33 and the route cost as 50.

[3Com-ospf-1] import-route rip type 2 tag 33 cost 50 Specify OSPF process 100 to import the route found by OSPF 160.[3Com-ospf-160] import-route ospf 160

network Syntax

network ip-address wildcard

undo network ip-address wildcard


View

OSPF area view

Parameter

■ ip-address: Address of the network segment where the interface locates.

■ wildcard: IP address wildcard mask, which is similar to the reversed form of the mask of IP address. But when configure this parameter, you can type it as mask of IP address, it could be translated as wildcard mask by VRP system.

Description

Using the network command, you can configure the interface running OSPF. Using the undo network command, you can cancel the interface running OSPF.

By default, the interface does not belong to any area.

To run the OSPF protocol on one interface, the master IP address of this interface must be in the range of the network segment specified by this command. If only the slave IP address of the interface is in the range of the network segment specified by this command, this interface will not run OSPF protocol.

After OSPF multi-instance is configured, different OSPF processes are bound with different VPN instances. The network addresses between different processes can be the same or included. But for the same VPN instance, the network addresses between different OSPF processes cannot be the same or included. Otherwise, the later configured command cannot be valid and the following will be displayed: Network already set in OSPF process xx, that is, if network 10.1.0.0 0.0.255.255 is enabled in process 100, network 10.1.0.0 0.0.255.255, network 10.1.1.0 0.0.0.255 or network 10.0.0.0 0.255.255.255 will fail to be enabled in other OSPF processes.

CAUTION: OSPF configuration can only enable the interfaces that belong to the same VPN instance.

After OSPF is configured multi-instance, if different VPN instances are bound in the OSPF process, the network addresses between different processes can be the same or included. But for the same VPN instance, the network addresses between different OSPF processes cannot be the same or included.

For the related command, see ospf.

Example

Specify the interfaces whose master IP addresses are in the segment range of 10.110.36.0 to run the OSPF protocol and specify the number of the OSPF area (where these interfaces are located) as 6.

[3Com-ospf] area 6[3Com-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.6] network 10.110.36.0.0 0.0.0.255 Enable OSPF process 100 on the router and specify the number of the area where the interface is located as 2.[3Com] router id 10.110.1.9[3Com] ospf 100[3Com-ospf-100] area 2[3Com-ospf-100-area-0.0.0.2] network 131.108.20.0 0.0.0.255 Enable OSPF process 200 on the router and specify the number of the area where the interface is located as 1.


[3Com] ospf 200 vpn-instance vpn1[3Com-ospf-200] area 1 [3Com-ospf-200-area-0.0.0.1] network 131.108.20.0 0.0.0.255 Enable OSPF process 300 on the router and specify the number of the area where the interface is located as 2.[3Com] ospf 300 vpn-instance vpn1[3Com-ospf-300] area 2 [3Com-ospf-300-area-0.0.0.2] network 131.108.20.0 0.0.0.255Network already set in OSPF process 200

nssa Syntax

nssa [ default-route-advertise ] [ no-import-route ] [ no-summary ]

undo nssa

View

OSPF area view

Parameter

■ default-route-advertise: Only available for the NSSA ABR or ASBR. When using the parameter at NSSA ABR, you can generate Type-7 LSAs for the default route no matter whether there exists the default route 0.0.0.0 in the routing table. When using the parameter at NSSA ASBR, you can generate Type-7 LSAs for the default route only if there exists the default route 0.0.0.0 in the routing table.

■ no-import-route: Forbids AS external routes to be imported in to the NSSA as Type-7 LSAs. This parameters is available for the NSSA ABR and for the ASBR in OSPF AS, to ensure all external route information is imported into the OSPF areas.

■ no-summary: Only available for the NSSA ABR. When the parameter is selected, the NSSA ABR advertises a default route via the Summary-LSAs (Type-3) in the area, but no other Summary-LSAs to other areas.

Description

Using the nssa command, you can configure an area as NSSA area. Using the undo nssa command, you can cancel the function.

By default, NSSA area is not configured.

For all the routers in the NSSA area, the command nssa must be used to configure the area as NSSA .

Example

Configure area 1 as NSSA.

[3Com-ospf-1] area 1[3Com-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.1] network 10.110.0.0 0.255.255.255[3Com-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.1] nssa

opaque-capability Syntax

opaque-capability enable

undo opaque-capability


View

OSPF view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the opaque-capability enable command, you can enable the Opaque capability of OSPF. Using the undo opaque-capability command, you can disable the Opaque capability of OSPF.

CAUTION: By default, Opaque capability of OSPF is enabled.

If the application based on Opaque LSA is enabled, for example, the area TE capability is enabled, the Opaque capability cannot be disabled.

Example

Enable Opaque capability.

[3Com-ospf-100] opaque-capability enable

ospf Syntax

ospf [ process-id ]

undo ospf [ process-id ]

View

System view

Parameter

■ process-id: Number of OSPF. If no process number is specified, the default number 1 is used.

Description

Using the ospf command, you can enable the OSPF protocol. Using the undo ospf command, you can disable the OSPF protocol.

After enabling OSPF protocol, the user can make the corresponding configuration in OSPF view.

By default, the system does not run the OSPF protocol.

VRP supports OSPF multi-process. Multiple OSPF processes can be enabled by specifying different process numbers on a router.

It is suggested that user should specify router-id with parameter router-id when enabling OSPF. Different router-ids should be specified for different processes if multiple processes are enabled on the router.

For the related command, see network.

Example

Enable the running of the OSPF protocol.

[3Com] router id 10.110.1.8[3Com] ospf


Enable OSPF process 120 to run OSPF.[3Com] router id 10.110.1.8[3Com] ospf 120[3Com-ospf-120]

ospfauthentication-mode

Syntax

ospf authentication-mode { simple password | md5 key-id key }

undo ospf authentication-mode { simple | md5 }

View

Interface view

Parameter

■ simple password: Character string not exceeding 8 characters using simple text authentication.

■ key-id: ID of the authentication key in MD5 cipher text authentication mode in the range from 1 to 255.

■ key: MD5 authentication key. If it is input in a simple form, MD5 key is a character string of 1 to 16 characters. And it will be displayed in a cipher text form in a length of 24 characters when display current-configuration command is executed. Inputting the 24-character MD5 key in a cipher text form is also supported.

Description

Using the ospf authentication-mode command, you can configure the authentication mode and key between adjacent routers. Using the undo ospf authentication-mode command, you can cancel the authentication key that has been set.

By default, the interface does not authenticate the OSPF packets.

The passwords for authentication keys of the routers on the same network segment must be identical. In addition, using authentication-mode command, you can set the authentication type of the area authentication key so as to validate the configuration.

For the related command, see authentication-mode.

Example

Set the area 1 where the network segment 131.119.0.0 of Interface serial1/0/0 is located to support MD5 cipher text authentication. The authentication key identifier is set to 15 and the authentication key is 3Com.

[3Com-ospf-1] area 1[3Com-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.1] network 131.119.0.0 0.0.255.255[3Com-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.1] authentication-mode md5[3Com-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.1] interface serial 1/0/0[3Com-Serial1/0/0] ospf authentication-mode md5 15 3Com

ospf cost Syntax

ospf cost value

undo ospf cost


View

Interface view

Parameter

■ value: Cost for running OSPF protocol, ranging from 1 to 65535.

Description

Using the ospf cost command, you can configure different packet sending costs so as to send packets from different interfaces. Using the undo ospf cost command, you can restore the default costs.

By default, the interface automatically calculates the costs required for running OSPF protocol according to the current Baud rate.

Example

Specify the cost spent when an interface runs OSPF as 33.

[3Com] interface serial1/0/0[3Com-Serial1/0/0] ospf cost 33

ospf dr-priority Syntax

ospf dr-priority value

undo ospf dr-priority

View

Interface view

Parameter

■ value: Interface priority for electing the "designated router", ranging from 0 to 255. By default, the value is 1.

Description

Using the ospf dr-priority command, you can configure the priority for electing the "designated router" on an interface. Using the undo ospf dr-priority command, you can restore the default value.

Interface priority determines the interface qualification when electing the “designated router”. The interface with high priority is considered first when there is collision in election.

Example

Set the priority of the interface Ethernet1/0/0 to 8, when electing the DR.

[3Com] interface Ethernet1/0/0[3Com-Ethernet1/0/0] ospf dr-priority 8

ospf mib-binding Syntax

ospf mib-binding process-id

undo ospf mib-binding

View

System view


Parameter

■ process-id: Number of OSPF process.

Description

Using the ospf mib-binding command, MIB operation can be bound on the specified OSPF process. Using the undo ospf mib-binding command, you can restore the default configuration.

MIB operation is always bound on the first process enabled by OSPF protocol. Using the this command, MIB operation can be bound on other OSPF processes. Using the undo ospf mib-binding command, you can cancel the binding configuration. MIB operation is rebound automatically by OSPF protocol on the first enabled process.

By default, MIB operation is bound on the first enabled OSPF process.

Example

Bind MIB operation on OSPF process 100.

[3Com] ospf mib-binding 100 Cancel MIB operation binding[3Com] undo ospf mib-binding

ospf mtu-enable Syntax

ospf mtu-enableundo ospf mtu-enable

View

Interface view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the ospf mtu-enable command, you can enable the interface to write MTU value when sending DD packets. Using the undo ospf mtu-enable command, you can restore the default settings.

By default, the MTU value is 0 when sending DD packets, i.e. the actual MTU value of the interface is not written.

Database Description Packets (DD packets) are used to describe its own LSDB when the router running OSPF protocol is synchronizing the database.

The default MTU value of DD packet is 0. With this command, the specified interface can be set manually to write the MTU value area in DD packets when sending DD packets, i.e. the actual MTU value of the interface is written in.

Example

Set interface Ethernet1/0/0 to write MTU value area when sending DD packets.

[3Com] interface Ethernet1/0/0[3Com-Ethernet1/0/0] ospf mtu-enable


ospf network-type Syntax

ospf network-type { broadcast | nbma | p2mp | p2p }

undo ospf network-type

View

Interface view

Parameter

■ broadcast: Changes the interface network type to broadcast.

■ nbma: Changes the interface network type to Non-Broadcast Multicast Access.

■ p2mp: Changes the interface network type to point-to-multipoint.

■ p2p: Changes the interface network type to point-to-point.

Description

Using the ospf network-type command, you can configure the network type of OSPF interface. Using the undo ospf network-type command, you can restore the default network type of the OSPF interface.

OSPF divides networks into four types by link layer protocol:

■ Broadcast: If Ethernet is adopted, OSFP defaults the network type to broadcast.

■ Non-Broadcast Multi-access (nbma): If Frame Relay, ATM, HDLC or X.25 is adopted, OSPF defaults the network type to NBMA.

■ Point-to-Multipoint (p2mp): OSPF will not default the network type of any link layer protocol to p2mp. The general undertaking is to change a partially connected NBMA network to p2mp network if the NBMA network is not fully-meshed.

■ Point-to-point (p2p): If PPP or LAPB is adopted, OSPF defaults the network type to p2p.

If there is a router not supporting multicast address on the broadcast network, the interface network type can be changed to NBMA. The interface network type can also be changed from NBMA to broadcast.

A network that can be called an NBMA network or can be changed to a broadcast network should satisfy the following condition: there is a virtual circuit directly connects any two routers on the network. In other words, the network is full-meshed. If the network cannot satisfy this condition, the interface network type must be changed to point-to-multipoint. In this way, these two routers can exchange routing information via a router directly connected with the two routers.

If there are only two routers running OSPF protocol on the same network segment, the interface network type can be changed to point-to-point.

Note: When the network type of an interface is NBMA or it is changed to NBMA manually, the peer command must be used to configure the neighboring point.

For the related command, see ospf dr-priority.

Example

Set the interface serial1/0/0 to NBMA type.


[3Com] interface serial1/0/0[3Com-serial1/0/0] ospf network-type nbma

ospf timer dead Syntax

ospf timer dead seconds

undo ospf timer dead

View

Interface view

Parameter

■ seconds: Dead interval of the OSPF neighbor. It is in second and ranges from 1 to 65535.

Description

Using the ospf timer dead command, you can configure the dead interval of the OSPF neighbor. Using the undo ospf timer dead command, you can restore the default value of the dead interval of the neighbor.

By default, the dead interval for the OSPF neighbors of p2p and broadcast interfaces is 40 seconds, and for those of p2mp and nbma interfaces is 120 seconds.

The dead interval of OSPF neighbors means that within this interval, if no Hello message is received from the neighbor, the neighbor will be considered to be invalid. The value of dead seconds should be at least 4 times of that of the Hello seconds. The dead seconds for the routers on the same network segment must be identical.

For the related command, see ospf timer hello.

Example

Set the neighbor dead interval on the interface serial1/0/0 to 80 seconds.

[3Com] interface serial1/0/0[3Com-serial1/0/0] ospf timer dead 80

ospf timer hello Syntax

ospf timer hello seconds

undo ospf timer hello

View

Interface view

Parameter

■ seconds: Interval in seconds for an interface to transmit hello message. It ranges from 1 to 255.

Description

Using the ospf timer hello command, you can configure the interval for transmitting Hello messages on an interface. Using the undo ospf timer hello command, you can restore the default value.


By default, the interval is 10 seconds for an interface of p2p or broadcast type to transmit Hello messages, and 30 seconds for an interface of nbma or p2mp type.

For the related command, see ospf timer dead.

Example

Configure the interval of transmitting Hello packets on the interface serial1/0/0 to 20 seconds.

[3Com] interface serial1/0/0[3Com-serial1/0/0] ospf timer hello 20

ospf timer poll Syntax

ospf timer poll seconds

undo ospf timer poll

View

Interface view

Parameter

■ seconds: Specifies the poll Hello messages interval, ranging from 1 to 65535 and measured in seconds. By default, the value is 120 seconds.

Description

Using the ospf timer poll command, you can configure the poll Hello message interval on nbma and p2mp network. Using the undo ospf timer poll command, you can restore the default value.

On the nbma and p2mp network, if a neighbor is invalid, the Hello message will be transmitted regularly according to the poll seconds. You can configure the poll seconds to specify how often the interface transmits Hello message before it establishes adjacency with the adjacent router. The value of poll seconds should be no less than 3 times of that of Hello seconds.

Example

Configure to transmit poll Hello message from interface serial2/0/0 every 130 seconds.

[3Com-serial2/0/0] ospf timer poll 130

ospf timer retransmit Syntax

ospf timer retransmit interval

undo ospf timer retransmit

View

Interface view

Parameter

■ interval: Interval in seconds for re-transmitting LSA on an interface. It ranges from 1 to 65535.The default value is 5 seconds.


Description

Using the ospf timer retransmit command, you can configure the interval for LSA re-transmitting on an interface. Using the undo ospf timer retransmit command, you can restore the default interval value for LSA re-transmitting on the interface.

If a router running OSPF transmits a "link state advertisement"(LSA) to the peer, it needs to wait for the acknowledgement packet from the peer. If no acknowledgement is received from the peer within the LSA retransmission, this LSA will be re-transmitted. According to RFC2328, the LSA retransmission between adjacent routers should not be set too short. Otherwise, unexpected retransmission will be caused.

Example

Specify the retransmission for LSA transmitting between the interface serial1/0/0 and the adjacent routers to 12 seconds.

[3Com] interface serial1/0/0[3Com-serial1/0/0] ospf timer retransmit 12

ospf trans-delay Syntax

ospf trans-delay seconds

undo ospf trans-delay

View

Interface view

Parameter

■ seconds: Transmitting delay of LSA on an interface. It is in seconds and ranges from 1 to 3600. By default, the value is 1 second.

Description

Using the ospf trans-delay command, you can configure the LSA transmitting delay on an interface. Using the undo ospf trans-delay command, you can restore the default value of the LSA transmitting delay on an interface.

LSA will age in the "link state database" (LSDB) of the router as time goes by (add 1 for every second), but it will not age during network transmission. Therefore, it is necessary to add a period of time set by this command to the aging time of LSA before transmitting it.

Example

Specify the trans-delay of transmitting LSA on the interface serial1/0/0 as 3 seconds.

[3Com] interface serial1/0/0[3Com-serial1/0/0] ospf trans-delay 3

peer Syntax

peer ip-address [ dr-priority dr-priority-number ]

undo peer ip-address


View

OSPF view

Parameter

■ ip-address: IP address of the neighboring point.

■ dr-priority-number: Represents the corresponding value of the network neighbor priority, being an integer ranging from 0 to 255. The default value is 1.

Description

Using the peer command, you can configure the IP address of adjacent routers and specify a DR priority on an NBMA network. Using the undo peer command, you can cancel the configuration.

On the frame relay network, a full-meshed network (i.e. there is a VC directly connecting any two routers on the network) can be implemented by configuring map. Thus OSPF can perform in the same way in the frame relay network as in the broadcast network (such as electing DR and BDR). However, the IP address of adjacent routers and their election rights must be configured manually for the interface because adjacent routers cannot be found dynamically by advertising Hello messages.

Example

Configure the IP address of peer router as 10.1.1.1.

[3Com-ospf-1] peer 10.1.1.1

preference Syntax

preference [ ase ] value

undo preference [ ase ]

View

OSPF view

Parameter

■ value: OSPF protocol route preference, ranging from 1 to 255.

■ ase: Preference of an imported external route of the AS.

Description

Using the preference command, you can configure the preference of an OSPF protocol route. Using the undo preference command, you can restore the default value of the OSPF protocol route.

By default, the preference of an OSPF protocol internal route is 10 and the preference of an external route is 150.

Because multiple dynamic routing protocols could be running on a router, there is the problem of routing information sharing among routing protocols and selection. Therefore, a default preference is specified for each routing protocol. When multiple routes to the same destination are found by different routing protocols, the route found by high preference routing protocol will be selected to forward IP packets.


Example

Specify the preference of an external imported route of the AS as 160.

[3Com-ospf-1] preference ase 160

reset ospf Syntax

reset ospf [ statistics ] { all | process-id }

View

User view

Parameter

■ statistics: Resets statistics of the OSPF process.

■ process-id: OSPF process number. If no OSPF process number is specified, all the OSPF processes should be reset.

■ all: Resets all the OSPF processes.

Description

Using the reset ospf all command, you can reset all the OSPF processes. Using the parameter of statistics to reset statistics about OSPF.

The reset ospf process-id command can be used to reset the specified process and clear statistics data. Using the parameter of statistics to reset statistics about OSPF.

Using the reset ospf command to reset the OSPF process, the following results are expected:

■ Clear invalid LSA immediately without waiting for LSA timeout.

■ If the Router ID changes, a new Router ID will take effect by executing the command.

■ Re-elect DR and BDR conveniently.

■ OSPF configuration will not be lost if the system is restarted.

■ Delete the original OSPF routes.

■ After OSPF process is restarted, new routes and LSA will be generated correspondingly and LSA will be advertised.

The system will require the user to confirm whether to re-enable the OSPF protocol after execution of the command.

Example

Reset all the OSPF processes

<3Com> reset ospf all Reset the OSPF process 200<3Com> reset ospf 200

router id Syntax

router id router-id

undo router id


View

System view

Parameter

■ router-id: Router ID that is a 32-bit unsigned integer.

Description

Using the router id command, you can configure the ID of a router running the OSPF protocol. Using the undo router id command, you can cancel the router ID that has been configured.

By default, no router ID is configured.

Router ID is a 32-bit unsigned integer that uniquely identifies a router in an OSPF autonomous system. If the router ID specified, the configurations of OSPF can not be set.

When the router ID is configured manually, the IDs of any two routers cannot be identical in the autonomous system. So, the IP address of certain interface might as well be selected as the ID of this router.

The modified router ID will not be valid unless OSPF is re-enabled.

For the related command, see ospf.

Example

Set the router ID to 10.1.1.3.

[3Com] router id 10.1.1.3

silent-interface Syntax

silent-interface interface-type interface-number

undo silent-interface interface-type interface-number

View

OSPF view

Parameter

■ interface-type: Specifies the interface type

■ interface-number: Specifies the interface number.

Description

Using the silent-interface command, you can disable an interface to transmit OSPF packet. Using the undo silent-interface command, you can restore the default setting.

By default, the interface is enabled to transmit OSPF packet.

You can use this command to disable an interface to transmit OSPF packet, so as to prevent the router on some network from receiving the OSPF routing information.


Different processes can disable the same interface to transmit OSPF packet. While silent-interface command only takes effect on the interface enabled with OSPF by this process, being invalid for the interface enabled by other processes.

Example

Disable interface serial2/0/0 to transmit OSPF packet.

[3Com-ospf-1] silent-interface serial2/0/0 Disable interface Ethernet2/0/0 to transmit OSPF packet in both OSPF process 100 and OSPF process 200.[3Com] router id 10.110.1.9[3Com] ospf 100[3Com-ospf-100] silent-interface ethernet 2/0/0[3Com-ospf-100] quit[3Com] router id 20.18.0.7[3Com] ospf 200[3Com-ospf-200] silent-interface ethernet 2/0/0

snmp-agent trap enableospf

Syntax

snmp-agent trap enable ospf [ process-id ] [ trap-type ]

undo snmp-agent trap enable ospf [ trap-type ]

View

System view

Parameter

■ process-id: OSPF process number. If no OSPF process number is specified, this command is valid for all the current OSPF processes.

■ trap-type: Type of SNMP TRAP packet transmitted by OSPF. It can be the keyword in the following table.

Table 3 SNMP TRAP type keywords

keyword descriptionifauthfail Enables the InterfaceAuthenticationFailure trap packetsifcfgerror Enables the InterfaceConfigError trap packetsifrxbadpkt Enables the InterfaceRecieveBadPacket trap packetsifstatechange Enables the InterfaceStateChange trap packetsiftxretransmit Enables the InterfaceTxRetransmitPacket trap packetslsdbapproachoverflow

Enables the LsdbApproachOverflow trap packets

lsdboverflow Enables the LsdbOverflow trap packetsmaxagelsa Enables the MaxAgeLsa trap packetsnbrstatechange Enables the NeighborStateChange trap packetsoriginatelsa Enables the OriginateLsa trap packetsvirifauthfail Enables the VirtualInterfaceAuthenticationFailure trap

packetsvirifcfgerror Enables the VirtualInterfaceConfigError trap packetsvirifrxbadpkt Enables the VirtualInterfaceRecieveBadPacket trap packetsvirifstatechange Enables the VirtualInterfaceStateChange trap packetsviriftxretransmit Enables the VirtualInterfaceTxRetransmitPacket trap packetsvirnbrstatechange Enables the VirtualNeighborStateChange trap packets


Description

Using the snmp-agent trap enable ospf command, you can enable the TRAP function of OSPF. Using the undo snmp-agent trap enable ospf command, you can disable the TRAP function.

This command takes no effect on the OSPF process enabled after its execution.

By default, no OSPF process is enabled to transmit TRAP packets.

For detailed configuration of SNMP TRAP, refer to “system management” section in this manual.

Example

Enable TRAP function of OSPF process 100.

<3Com> snmp-agent trap enable ospf 100

spf-schedule-interval Syntax

spf-schedule-interval interval

undo spf-schedule-interval

View

OSPF view

Parameter

■ Interval: SPF calculation interval of OSPF, which is in seconds in the range of 1 to 10. The default value is 5 seconds.

Description

Using the spf-schedule-interval command, you can configure the route calculation interval of OSPF. Using the undo spf-schedule-interval command, you can restore the default setting.

According to the Link State Database (LSDB), the router running OSPF can calculate the shortest path tree taking itself as the root and determine the next hop to the destination network according to the shortest path tree. By adjusting SPF calculation interval, network frequently changing can be restrained, which may lead to that too many bandwidth resources and router resources will be used.

Example

Set the OSPF route calculation interval of 3Com to 6 seconds.

[3Com-ospf-1] spf-schedule-interval 6

stub Syntax

stub [ no-summary ]

undo stub

View

OSPF area view


Parameter

■ no-summary: Only available for the ABR in Stub area. When this parameter is selected, the ABR only advertises the Summary-LSA for the default route, but no other Summary-LSAs. The area is also called totally stub area.

Description

Using the stub command, you can configure the type of an OSPF area as the STUB area. Using the undo stub command, you can cancel the settings.

By default, no area is set to be the STUB area.

All the routers in a Stub area must be configured with the corresponding attribute.

For the related command, see default-cost.

Example

Set the type of OSPF area 1 to the STUB area.

[3Com-ospf] area 1[3Com-ospf-area-0.0.0.1] stub

vlink-peer Syntax

vlink-peer router-id [ hello seconds] [ retransmit seconds ] [ trans-delay seconds ] [ dead seconds ] [ simple password | md5 keyid key ]

undo vlink-peer router-id

View

OSPF area view

Parameter

■ router-id: Router ID of virtual link neighbor.

■ hello seconds: Interval that router transmits hello message. It ranges from 1 to 8192 seconds. This value must equal the hello seconds value of the router virtually linked to the interface. By default, the value is 10 seconds,

■ retransmit seconds: Specifes the interval for re-transmitting the LSA packets on an interface. It ranges from 1 to 8192 seconds. By default, the value is 5 seconds.

■ trans-delay seconds: Specifes the interval for delaying transmitting LSA packets on an interface. It ranges from 1 to 8192 seconds. By default, the value is 1 second.

■ dead seconds: Specifies the interval of death timer. It ranges from 1 to 8192 seconds. This value must equal the dead seconds of the router virtually linked to it and must be at least 4 times of the hello seconds. By default, the value is 40 seconds.

■ simple password: Specifies the simple text authentication key, not exceeding 8 characters, of the interface. This value must equal the authentication key of the virtually linked neighbor.

■ keyid: Specifies the MD5 authentication key ID. Its value ranges from 1 to 255. It must be equal to the authentication key ID of the virtually linked neighbor.

Integrated IS-IS Configuration Commands 599

■ key: Specifies the authentication key on an interface. It is a character string not exceeding 16 characters. This value must equal the authentication key of the virtually linked neighbor. And the key will be displayed in a cipher text form in a length of 24 characters when display current-configuration command is executed. Inputting the key in a cipher text form with 24 characters long is also supported.

Description

Using the vlink-peer command, you can create and configure a virtual link. Using the undo vlink-peer command, you can cancel an existing virtual link.

According to RFC2328, the OSPF area should be connected with the backbone network. You can use vlink-peer command to keep the connectivity. Virtual link somewhat can be regarded as a common ospf enabled interface so that you can easily understand how to configure the parameters such as hello, retransmit, and trans-delay on it.

One thing should be mentioned. When configuring virtual link authentication, authentication-mode command is used to set the authentication mode as MD5 cipher text or simple text on the backbone network.

For the related command, see authentication-mode, and display ospf.

Example

Create a virtual link to 10.110.0.3 and use the MD5 cipher text authentication mode.

[3Com-ospf] area 10.0.0.0[3Com-ospf-area-10.0.0.0] vlink-peer 10.110.0.3 md5 3 345

Integrated IS-IS Configuration Commands

area-authentication-mode

Syntaxarea-authentication-mode { simple | md5 } password [ ip | osi ]

undo area-authentication-mode { simple | md5 } [ ip | osi ]

ViewIS-IS view

Parameter■ simple: Transmits the password in simple text.

■ md5: Transmits the password encrypted with MD5.

■ password: Specifies the password to be configured, in the range of 1~24 bits.

■ ip: Specifies the IP authentication password.

■ osi: Specifies the OSI authentication password.

■ The configuration of ip or osi authentication password is independent of the real network environment.


DescriptionUsing the area-authentication-mode command, you can configure IS-IS to authenticate the received Level-1 routing information packets (LSP, CSNP and PSNP), according to the pre-defined mode and password. Using the undo area-authentication-mode command, you can configure IS-IS not to authenticate the said packets.

In default configuration, the system will not authenticate the received Level-1 routing information packets, and there is no password. By using this command, you can clear all the Level-1 routing packets, whose area authentication passwords are not consistent with the one set via this command. At the same time, this command will let IS-IS insert the area authentication password into all the Level-1 routing packets sent by this node, in a certain mode.

For the related commands, see reset isis all, domain-authentication-mode, and isis authentication-mode.

Example

Set the area authentication password as "hello" and the authentication type as simple.

[3Com] isis[3Com-isis] area-authentication-mode simple hello

cost-style Syntaxcost-style { narrow | wide | compatible | narrow-compatible | wide-compatible } [ relax-spf-limit ]

ViewIS-IS view

Parameter■ narrow: Only receives/sends packets whose cost type is narrow.

■ wide: Only receives/sends packets whose cost type is wide.

■ compatible: Receives/sends packets whose cost type is narrow or wide.

■ narrow-compatible: Receives packets whose cost type is narrow or wide, but only send packets whose cost type is narrow.

■ wide-compatible: Receives packets whose cost type is narrow or wide, but only send packets whose cost type is wide.

■ relax-spf-metric: Permits to receive routes whose cost value is larger than 1024. If this item is not set, the route whose metrics value is larger than 1024 will be discarded. This setting is only valid for compatible, narrow-compatible, and wide-compatible.

DescriptionUsing the cost-style command, you can set the cost type of an IS-IS packet received/sent by the router. Using the undo cost-style command, you can restore the default setting.

By default, IS-IS only receives/sends packets whose cost type is narrow.

For the related command, see isis cost.


Example Set IS-IS to receive packets whose cost type is narrow or wide, but only send packets whose cost type is narrow.

[3Com] isis[3Com-isis] cost-style narrow-compatible

debugging isis Syntaxdebugging isis { adjacency | all | authentication-error | checksum-error | circuit-information | configuration-error | datalink-receiving-packet | datalink-sending-packet | general-error | interface-information | memory-allocating | receiving-packet-content | self-originate-update | sending-packet-content | snp-packet | spf-event | spf-summary | spf-timer | task-error | timer | update-packet }

undo debugging isis { adjacency | all | authentication-error | checksum-error | circuit-information | configuration-error | datalink-receiving-packet | datalink-sending-packet | general-error | interface-information | memory-allocating | receiving-packet-content | self-originate-update | sending-packet-content | snp-packet | spf-event | spf-summary | spf-timer | task-error | timer | update-packet }

ViewUser view

Parameter■ adjacency: IS-IS adjacency related packets.

■ all: All IS-IS related debugging information.

■ authentication-error: IS-IS authentication errors.

■ checksum-error: IS-IS checksum errors.

■ circuit-information: Information about IS-IS enabled interface.

■ configuration-error: IS-IS configuration errors.

■ datalink-receiving-packet: Data link layer's packets-receiving status.

■ datalink-sending-packet: Data link layer's packets-sending status.

■ general-error: IS-IS error information.

■ interface-information: Information about IS-IS enabled data link layer.

■ memory-allocating: IS-IS memory allocating status.

■ receiving-packet-content: Packets received through IS-IS protocol.

■ self-originate-update: Packets locally updated through IS-IS protocol.

■ sending-packet-content: Packets sent through IS-IS protocol.

■ snp-packet: CSNP/PSNP packet of IS-IS.

■ spf-event: IS-IS SPF events.

■ spf-summary: Statistics about IS-IS performing SPF calculation.

■ spf-timer: IS-IS SPF trigger events.

■ task-error: IS-IS events status.


■ timer: IS-IS timer.

■ update-packet: Updated packets through IS-IS protocol.

DescriptionUsing the debugging isis command, you can enable IS-IS debugging. Using the undo debugging isis command, you can disable the function.

Example Enable all the information debugging of IS-IS.

<3Com> debugging isis all

default-route-advertise Syntaxdefault-route-advertise [ route-policy [ route-policy-name ] ]

undo default-route-advertise [ route-policy [ route-policy-name ] ]

ViewIS-IS view

Parameter■ route-policy-name: Name of the specified route-policy.

DescriptionUsing the default-route-advertise command, you can configure the default route of Level-1 and Level-2 routers. Using the undo default-route-advertise command, you can cancel this configuration.

By default, Level-2 router generates the default route.

This command can be set on Level-1 router or Level-2 router. By default, the default route is generated on L2 LSP. If apply isis level-1 is set in route-policy view, the default route will be generated on L1 LSP. If apply isis level-2 command is used in route-policy view, the default route will be generated on L2 LSP. If apply isis level-1-2 is set in route-policy view, the default route will be generated on both L1 LSP and L2 LSP.

Example Set the current router to generate the default route on the LSP of corresponding level.

[3Com-isis] default-route-advertise

display isis interface Syntaxdisplay isis interface [ verbose ]

ViewAny view

Parameter■ verbose: If this parameter is used, the details of the interface will be displayed.


DescriptionUsing the display isis interface command, you can view the information of the IS-IS enabled interface.

This command views the information of the IS-IS enabled interface, including interface name, IP address, link state of the interface and so on. Besides displaying all the information shown by the display isis interface command, the display isis interface verbose command displays such information about the IS-IS parameters of the interface as CSNP packet broadcast interval, Hello message broadcast interval and number of invalid Hello messages.

Example Display the information about the IS-IS enabled interface.

<3Com> display isis interfaceInterface IP Address Id Link.Sta IP.Sta MTU Type DREthernet1/0/0 2.1.1.12 001 Up Up 1497 L12 No/No

Display the details of the IS-IS enabled interface.

<3Com> display isis interface verboseInterface IP Address Id Link.Sta IP.Sta MTU Type DREthernet1/0/0 2.1.1.12 001 Up Up 1497 L12 No/No Secondary IP Address(es): Csnp-Interval: L110L210 Hello-Interval: L110L210Hold Time : L1 30 L2 30 Lsp Interval: 1 Cost : L110L210 Priority : L164L264 Retransmit Interval:5

display isis lsdb Syntaxdisplay isis lsdb [ l1 ] [ l2 ] [ level-1 ] [ local ] [ level-2 ] [ verbose ] [ LSPID ]

View

Any view

Parameter■ l1 and Level-1: Both refer to the link state database of Level-1.

■ l2 and level-2: Both refer to the link state database of Level-2.

■ local: Displays the Contents of the Local LSP Database

■ verbose: Displays the verbose information of the link state database.

■ LSPID: Specifies the LSPID of the network-entity-title.

DescriptionUsing the display isis lsdb command, you can view the link state database of the IS-IS.

Example Display the output information of display isis lsdb command.

<3Com> display isis lsdb


IS-IS Level-1 Link State DatabaseLSPID LSP Seq Num LSP Checksum LSP-Holdtime ATT/P/OL0050.0500.5004.00-00 0x0000000e 0x3670 1084 0/0/00050.0500.5005.00-00 0x00000010 0xf94 333 0/0/0IS-IS Level-2 Link State DatabaseLSPID LSP Seq Num LSP Checksum LSP-Holdtime ATT/P/OL0050.0500.5004.00-00* 0x0000001d 0x3e8 1089 0/0/00050.0500.5005.00-00 0x00000023 0x676e 343 0/0/0

display isis mesh-group Syntaxdisplay isis mesh-group

ViewAny view

ParameterNone

DescriptionUsing the display isis mesh-group command, you can view the IS-IS mesh group.

This command is used for displaying the configurations of the mesh-group of the current router interface.

Example Add Interface serial1/0/0 and Interface serial2/0/0 running IS-IS into mesh group 100.

[3Com-Serial1/0/0] isis mesh-group 100[3Com-Serial1/0/0] interface Interface serial2/0/0[3Com-Serial2/0/0] isis mesh-group 100 Display the information of IS-IS mesh-group.[3Com-serial2/0/0] display isis mesh-groupSerial1/0/0 100Serial2/0/0 100

display isis peer Syntaxdisplay isis peer [ verbose ]

ViewAny view

Parameter■ verbose: When this parameter is configured, the area address carried in the

Hello message from the peer will be displayed. Otherwise, only the summary information will be displayed.

DescriptionUsing the display isis peer command, you can view IS-IS peer information.

The display isis peer verbose command yields not only all the outputs of the display isis peer command, but also the area address, Up time and IP address of the directly connected interface of the peer.


Example Display the output information of display isis peer command.

<3Com> display isis peer NET Interface Id State HoldTime Type Pri0001.0002.0002 Ethernet2/0/0 0001.0002.0008.01 Up 26s L1(L12) 640001.0002.0002 Ethernet1/0/0 002 Up 29s L1 0 Output more information by using the verbose parameter.<3Com> display isis peer verbose NET Interface Id State HoldTime Type Pri0001.0002.0002 Ethernet2/0/0 0001.0002.0008.01 Up 24s L1 64 Area Address: 01 02 IP Address: 175.1.19.36 Period: 00:25:300001.0002.0002 Ethernet1/0/0 002 Up 27s L1 0 Area Address: 01 02 IP Address: 175.1.19.22 Period: 00:00:51

display isis route Syntaxdisplay isis route

ViewAny view

ParameterNone

DescriptionUsing the display isis route command, you can view IS-IS routing information.

Example View the output information of display isis route command.

<3Com> display isis route ISIS Level - 1 Forwarding Table :

Type - D -Direct, C -Connected, I -ISIS, S -Static, O -OSPF B -BGP, R -RIP

Flags: R-Added to RM, L-Advertised in LSPs, U-Up/Down Bit Set

Destination/Mask In.Met Ex.Met NextHop Interface Flags----------------------------------------------------------------------------D 4.0.0.0/8 10 NULL Direct Ethernet2/0/0 R/L/-I 55.55.0.0/16 20 NULL 4.0.0.2 Ethernet2/0/0 R/L/- 3.0.0.2 Ethernet1/0/0I 0.0.0.0/0 10 NULL 4.0.0.2 Ethernet2/0/0 R/-/-


3.0.0.2 Ethernet1/0/0

ISIS Level - 2 Forwarding Table : Type - D -Direct, C -Connected, I -ISIS, S -Static, O -OSPF B -BGP, R -RIP

Flags: R-Added to RM, L-Advertised in LSPs, U-Up/Down Bit Set

Destination/Mask In.Met Ex.Met NextHop Interface Flags----------------------------------------------------------------------------D 4.0.0.0/8 10 NULL Direct Ethernet2/0/0 R/L/-D 99.99.0.0/16 10 NULL Direct LoopBack3 R/L/-

display isis spf-log Syntaxdisplay isis spf-log

ViewAny view

ParameterNone

DescriptionUsing the display isis spf-log command, you can view the SPF calculation log of the IS-IS.

Example View the output information of display isis spf-log command.

<3Com> display isis spf-logDetails of Level 1 SPF Run:-------------------------------Trig.Event No.Of NodesDurationStartTimeIS_SPFTRIG_ADJDOWN2023:10:54IS_SPFTRIG_NEWADJ3023:10:54IS_SPFTRIG_LSPCHANGE3023:10:54IS_SPFTRIG_PERIODIC2023:10:37IS_SPFTRIG_PERIODIC2023:10:52IS_SPFTRIG_CIRC_UP3023:10:53IS_SPFTRIG_CIRC_UP3023:10:53IS_SPFTRIG_LSPCHANGE3023:10:53Details of Level 2 SPF Run:-------------------------------Trig.Event No.Of NodesDurationStartTimeIS_SPFTRIG_NEWADJ4023:10:54IS_SPFTRIG_LSPCHANGE4023:10:54IS_SPFTRIG_PERIODIC4023:10:37IS_SPFTRIG_PERIODIC4023:10:52IS_SPFTRIG_PERIODIC4023:10:52IS_SPFTRIG_CIRC_UP5023:10:53IS_SPFTRIG_LSPCHANGE5023:10:53


IS_SPFTRIG_CIRC_UP7023:10:53IS_SPFTRIG_LSPCHANGE7023:10:53IS_SPFTRIG_LSPCHANGE7023:10:53IS_SPFTRIG_ADJDOWN4023:10:54IS_SPFTRIG_ADJDOWN4023:10:54

domain-authentication-mode

Syntaxdomain-authentication-mode { simple | md5 } password [ ip | osi ]

undo domain-authentication-mode { simple | md5 } [ ip | osi ]

ViewIS-IS view

Parameter■ simple: Transmits the password in simple text.

■ md5: Transmits the password in MD5 encryption.

■ password: Specifies the password to be configured.



■ The configuration of ip or osi authentication password is independent of the real network environment.

DescriptionUsing the domain-authentication-mode command, you can configure IS-IS route area to authenticate the received Level-2 routing packets (LSP, CSNP, PSNP), according to the pre-defined mode and password. Using the undo domain-authentication-mode command, you can configure IS-IS not to authenticate the said packets.

In default configuration, the system will not authenticate the received Level-2 routing packets, and there is no password. By using this command, you can discard all the Layer 2 routing packets, whose area authentication passwords do not consist with the one set via this command. At the same time, this command will let IS-IS insert the area authentication password into all the Layer 2 routing packets sent by this node, in a certain mode.

For the related commands, see area-authentication-mode and isis authentication-mode.

Example When you need to authenticate the layer 2 routing packets, you can select the simple mode, and the password is "3Com".

[3Com] isis[3Com-isis] domain-authentication-mode simple

filter-policy export Syntaxfilter-policy acl-number export [ protocol ]

undo filter-policy acl-number export [ protocol ]


ViewIS-IS view

Parameter■ acl-number: Specifies the number of the access control list, ranging from 1 to

199.

■ protocol: Specifies the protocols that distribute routing information, including direct, static, rip, bgp, ospf, ospf-nssa and ospf-ase at present. Without this parameter, all the distributed routes will be filtered.

DescriptionUsing the filter-policy export command, you can configure to filter the routes distributed by IS-IS. Using the undo filter-policy export command, you can cancel the filtering for the exporting routes.

By default, IS-IS does not filter any distributed routing information.

In some cases, it may be required that only the routing information meeting some conditions can be advertised. Then, the filter-policy command can be used to set the filtering conditions for the routing information to be advertised. Only the routing information passing the filtering can be advertised.

For the related command, see filter-policy import.

Example Use acl 6 to filter the routes distributed by IS-IS.

[3Com-isis] filter-policy 6 export

filter-policy import Syntaxfilter-policy acl-number import

undo filter-policy acl-number import

ViewIS-IS view

Parameter■ acl-number: Specifies the number of the access control list, ranging from 1 to

199.

DescriptionUsing the filter-policy import command, you can configure to filter the routes received by IS-IS. Using the undo filter-policy import command, you can configure not to filter the received routes.

By default, IS-IS does not filter the received routing information.

In some cases, only the routing information meeting the specified conditions will be accepted. You can configure thefilter-policy to specify the filter conditions so as to accept the desired routing information only.

For the related command, see filter-policy export.


Example Filter the received routes by using acl 3.

[3Com-isis] filter-policy 3 import

ignore-lsp-checksum-error

Syntaxignore-lsp-checksum-error

undo ignore-lsp-checksum-error

ViewIS-IS view

ParameterNone

DescriptionUsing the ignore-lsp-checksum-error command, you can configure the IS-IS to ignore the checksum error of LSP. Using the undo ignore-lsp-checksum-error command, you can configure the IS-IS not to ignore the checksum error of LSP.

By default, the checksum error of LSP is not ignored.

After receiving an LSP packet, the local IS-IS will calculate its checksum and compares the result with the checksum in the LSP packet. This process is the checksum authentication over the received LSP. By default, if the checksum in the packet is found not in consistent with the calculated result, the LSP will be discarded without being processed. Moreover, if ignoring checksum error is set with the ignore-lsp-checksum-error command, the packet will be processed as a normal one even if the checksum error is found.

Example Configure to ignore the checksum error of LSP.

[3Com-isis] ignore-lsp-checksum-error

import-route Syntaximport-route protocol [ cost value ] [ type { external | internal } ] [ level-1 ] [ level-1-2 ] [ level-2 ] [ route-policy route-policy-name ]

undo import-route protocol [ cost value ] [ type { external | internal } ] [ level-1 ] [ level-1-2 ] [ level-2 ] [ route-policy route-policy-name ]

ViewIS-IS view

Parameter■ protocol: Specifies source routing protocols which can be imported, including

direct, bgp, ospf, ospf-nssa , ospf-ase, rip and static at present.

■ cost value: Specifies the route cost of the imported route, ranging from 0 to 63.

■ level-1: Imports the route into Level-1 routing table.

■ level-2: Imports the route into Level-2 routing table.


■ level-1-2: Imports the route into Level-1-2 routing table.

■ If the level for importing the route is not specified in the command, it defaults to import the routes into Level-1 and Level-2, i.e. Level-1-2 routing table.

■ route-policy route-policy-name: Imports only the routes matching the specified route-policy.

DescriptionUsing the import-route command, you can configure IS-IS to filter the imported routes. Using the undo import-route command, you can configure IS-IS not to import the routing information of other protocols.

By default, IS-IS does not import routing information from any other protocols.

For IS-IS, the routes discovered by other routing protocols are processed as the routes outside the routing domain. When importing the routes of other protocols, you can specify the default cost for them. If OSPF routes are imported, you can also specify the cost type for them.

When IS-IS imports routes, you can specify to import the routes to Level-1, Level-2 or Level-1-2.

IS-IS regards all the routes imported into the routing domain as the external routes, which describe the way how to select the routes to the destination outside the routing domain.

Example Import a static route with cost 15.

[3Com-isis] import-route static cost 15

import-route isis Syntaximport-route isis level-2 into level-1 [acl acl-list ]

undo import-route isis level-2 into level-1 [ acl acl-list ]

ViewIS-IS view

Parameter■ acl-list: ACL number. When configuring routing leak from Level-2 to Level-1,

only the routes that are permitted by ACL can be imported to Level-1 area if an ACL has been specified.

DescriptionUsing the import-route isis level-2 into level-1 command, you can enable routing information in a Level-2 area to be imported to a Level-1 area. Using the undo import-route isis level-2 into level-1 command, you can remove the function.

By default, routing information in a Level-2 area is not imported to a Level-1 area.

Example Import routing information of a router from a Level-2 area to a Level-1 area.

[3Com] acl number 100 permit any [3Com] isis


[3Com-isis] import-route isis level2 into level1 acl 100

isis Syntaxisis [ tag ]

undo isis [ tag ]

ViewSystem view

Parameter■ tag: Name given to the IS-IS process. The name length should be no longer

than 128 characters. It can be 0, which means null.

DescriptionUsing the isis command, you can enable the corresponding IS-IS routing process and enter the IS-IS view. Using the undo isis command, you can cancel the specified IS-IS routing process.

By default, IS-IS routing process is not started

For the normal operation of the IS-IS protocol, the isis command must be used to enable the IS-IS process. Then the network-entity command is used to set a Network Entity Title (NET) for the router. And, at last, the isis enable command is used to enable each interface on which the IS-IS process runs. The IS-IS protocol is actually enabled upon the completion of these configurations.

Only one IS-IS routing process can be started on one router.

For the related commands, see isis enable and network-entity.

Example Start an IS-IS routing process, in which the system ID is 0000.0000.0002 and the area ID is 01.0001.

[3Com] isis[3Com-isis] network-entity 01.0001.0000.0000.0002.00

isis authentication-mode Syntaxisis authentication-mode { simple | md5 } password [ { level-1 | level-2 } [ ip | osi ] ]

undo isis authentication-mode { simple | md5 } password [ { level-1 | level-2 } [ ip | osi ] ]

ViewInterface view

Parameter■ simple: Transmit the authentication password in simple text.

■ md5: Transmit the authentication password in MD5 encryption.

■ password: Specifies the authentication password.

■ level-1: Configures authentication password for Level-1.


■ level-2: Configures authentication password for Level-2.



The configuration of ip or osi authentication password is independent of the real network environment.

DescriptionUsing the isis authentication-mode command, you can configure the IS-IS to authenticate the hello messages of the corresponding level, in the specified mode and with the specified password on the IS-IS interface. Using the undo isis authentication-mode command, you can cancel the authentication and delete the password at the same time.

By default, the password is not set and no authentication is executed.

If the password is set, but no parameter is specified, the default settings are Level-1, simple and osi.

For the related commands, see area-authentication-mode and domain-authentication-mode.

Example Set the authentication password "tangshi" in simple text for the Level-1 neighboring relationship onInterface serial1/0/0.

[3Com] interface serial1/0/0[3Com-Serial1/0/0] isis authentication-mode simple tangshi level-1

isis circuit-level Syntaxisis circuit-level [ level-1 | level-1-2 | level-2 ]

undo isis circuit-level

ViewInterface view

Parameter■ level-1: Configures only Level-1 adjacency instead of Level-2 one on the current

interface.

■ level-1-2: Configures both Level-1 and Level-2 adjacency on the current interface.

■ level-2: Configures only Level-2 adjacency on the current interface.

DescriptionUsing the isis circuit-level command, you can configure the link adjacency relationship. Using the undo isis circuit-level command, you can restore the default setting.

By default, you can configure both Level-1 and Level-2 adjacency on the interface.

If the local router is a Level-1-2 router and it is required to establish a correlation with the peer router on a certain level (Level-1 or Level-2), this command can specify the interface to send and receive hello messages of this level. Certainly,


only one type of hello message is sent and received on the point-to-point link. In this way, excessive processing is avoided, and the bandwidth is saved.

Only when system type of IS-IS is Level-1-2, can the circuit level take effect. Otherwise, take the level defined via is-level command as the standard.

For the related command, see is-level.

Example When interface serial1/0/0 is connected with a non-backbone router in the same area, you can set this interface as Level-1, prohibiting the sending and receiving of Level-2 hello messages.

[3Com] interface serial1/0/0[3Com-Serial1/0/0] isis enable[3Com-Serial1/0/0] isis circuit-level level-1

isis cost Syntaxisis cost value [ level-1 | level-2 ]

undo isis cost [ level-1 | level-2 ]

ViewInterface view

Parameter■ value: Specifies the link cost used in the SPF calculation of corresponding level.

By default, the value is 10. When the cost type is “narrow”, its range is 1 through 63; when the cost type is wide, its range is 1 to 16777215.

■ level-1: Indicates that the link cost corresponds to Level-1

■ level-2: Indicates that the link cost corresponds to Level-2

DescriptionUsing the isis cost command, you can configure the link cost of this interface when performing SPF calculation. Using the undo isis cost command, you can restore the default link cost.

If neither Level-1 nor Level-2 is specified in the configuration, Level-1 will be the default value.

The link cost for interfaces will effect the calculation of IS-IS routes.

For the related command, see cost-style.

Example Set the link cost of the Level-2 link on Interface serial1/0/0 to 5.

[3Com] interface serial1/0/0[3Com-Serial1/0/0] isis cost 5 level-2

isis dis-priority Syntaxisis dis-priority value [ level-1 | level-2 ]

undo isis dis-priority [ level-1 | level-2 ]


View Interface view

Parameter■ value: Specifies the priority when selecting DIS, ranging from 0 to 127.By

default, the value is 64.

■ level-1: Specifies the priority when selecting Level-1 DIS.

■ level-2: Specifies the priority when selecting Level-2 DIS.

DescriptionUsing the isis dis-priority command, you can configure the priority of an interface for the corresponding level DIS election. Using the undo isis dis-priority command, you can restore the default priority.

If the level is not specified, it defaults to set the Level-2 priority.

The IS-IS does not concern the concept of backup DIS. The router with the priority 0 can also run for the DIS, which is different from the DR election of OSPF.


Example Set the priority of Interface serial1/0/0 to 127.

[3Com] interface serial1/0/0[3Com-Serial1/0/0] isis dis-priority127 level-2

isis enable Syntaxisis enable [ tag ]

undo isis enable [ tag ]

ViewInterface view

Parameter■ tag: Name given to an IS-IS routing process, when executing isis command in

the system view. If not specified, it is null.

DescriptionUsing the isis enable command, you can configure this interface to activate the corresponding IS-IS routing process. Using the undo isis enable command, you can cancel this designation.

By default, the IS-IS routing process is not enabled on an interface.

For the normal operation of the IS-IS protocol, the isis command must be used to enable the IS-IS process. Then the network-entity command is used to set a Network Entity Title (NET) for the router. And, at last, the isis enable command is used to enable each interface on which the IS-IS process runs. The IS-IS protocol will be enabled upon the completion of these configurations.

For the related commands, see isis and network-entity.


So far, a router can enable the IS-IS process on 255 interfaces at most, including logic interfaces such as subinterfaces.

Example Create an IS-IS routing process named "3Com", and activate this routing process on interface serial1/0/0.

[3Com] isis 3Com[3Com-isis] network-entity 10.0001.1010.1020.1030.00[3Com-isis] quit[3Com] interface serial1/0/0[3Com-serial1/0/0] isis enable 3Com

isis mesh-group Syntaxisis mesh-group [ mesh-group-number | mesh-blocked ]

undo isis mesh-group

ViewInterface view

Parameter■ mesh-group-number: Specifies the mesh group number, ranging from 1 to

4294967295.

■ mesh-blocked: Blocks a specified interface, so that it will not flood the received LSP to other interfaces.

Description Using the isis mesh-group command, you can add an interface to a specified mesh group. Using the undo isis mesh-group command, you can cancel this interface from the mesh group.

By default, the interface does not belong to any mesh group and floods LSP normally.

The interface beyond the mesh group floods the received LSP to other interfaces, following the normal procedure. This processing method applied to an NBMA network with higher connectivity and several point-to-point links will cause repeated LSP flooding and waste bandwidth.

The interface joining a mesh group only floods the received LSP to the interfaces beyond the local mesh group.

Be sure to provide some redundancy when adding an interface to a mesh group or blocking it, for avoiding the effect on the normal flooding of the LSP due to link failure.

Example Add interface serial1/0/0 to mesh group 3.

[3Com-Serial1/0/0] isis mesh-group 3

isis timer csnp Syntaxisis timer csnp seconds [ level-1 | level-2 ]


undo isis timer csnp [ level-1 | level-2 ]

ViewInterface view

Parameter■ seconds: Specifies the CSNP packet interval on the broadcast network, ranging

from 1 to 65535 and measured in seconds. By default, the value is 10 seconds.

■ level-1: Specifies the Level-1 CSNP packet interval.

■ level-2: Specifies the Level-2 CSNP packet interval.

■ If neither Level-1 nor Level-2 is specified, it defaults to set Level-1-2 Hello message interval, that is, both Level-1 and Level-2 take effect.

DescriptionUsing the isis timer csnp command, you can configure the interval of sending CSNP packets on the broadcast network. Using the undo isis timer csnp command, you can restore the default value, that is, 10 seconds.

Only DIS can periodically send CSNP packets, therefore, this command is valid only for the router that is selected as the DIS. Furthermore, DIS is divided into Level-1 and Level-2, and their intervals of sending CSNP packets must be set respectively.

Example Set the Level-2 CSNP packet to be transmitted every 15 seconds on the interface Serial1/0/0.

[3Com] interface serial1/0/0[3Com-Serial1/0/0] isis timer csnp 15 level-2

isis timer dead Syntaxisis timer dead seconds [ level-1 | level-2 ]

undo isis timer dead [ level-1 | level-2 ]

ViewInterface view

Parameter■ seconds: Specifies the dead interval, ranging from 9 to 65535 and measured in

seconds. The default value is 30 seconds.

■ level-1: Specifies the Level-1 dead interval.

■ level-2: Specifies the Level-2 dead interval.

■ If neither Level-1 nor Level-2 is specified, it is defaulted to Level-2 dead interval.

DescriptionUsing the isis timer dead command, you can configure the interval of determining the neighbor router is dead (or invalid). Using the undo isis timer dead command, you can restore the default value, that is, 10 seconds.

If the router does not receive hello message from its neighbor in specified time, the router will determine that the neighbor is dead (or invalid). Usually, user set


this time 3 times of hello interval. That is to say, if the router does not receive hello message from its neighbor 3 times, it would determine that the neighbor is dead. User can adjust this parameter according to the network.

For the related command, see isis timer hello.

Example Set the dead interval of Level-2 to 60 seconds on Interface serial1/0/0.

[3Com] interface serial1/0/0[3Com-Serial1/0/0] isis timer dead 20 level-2

isis timer hello Syntaxisis timer hello seconds [ level-1 | level-2 ]

undo isis timer hello [ level-1 | level-2 ]

ViewInterface view

Parameter■ seconds: Specifies the Hello message interval, ranging from 3 to 255 and

measured in seconds. The default value is 10 seconds.

■ level-1: Specifies the Level-1 Hello interval.

■ level-2: Specifies the Level-2 Hello interval.

■ If neither Level-1 nor Level-2 is specified, it is defaulted to Level-1-2 Hello message interval, that is, both Level-1 and Level-2 take effect.

DescriptionUsing the isis timer hello command, you can configure the interval of sending hello message of corresponding level. Using the undo isis timer hello command, you can restore the default value, that is, 10 seconds.

On a broadcast link, Level-1 and Level-2 hello messages will be sent respectively and their intervals should also be set respectively. Such settings are unnecessary on point-to-point links. The shorter the sending interval is, the more system resources are occupied to send hello messages. Therefore, the interval should be set according to actual conditions.

For the related command, see isis timer dead.

Example Set the Hello message of Level-1 to be transmitted every 20 seconds on Interface serial1/0/0.

[3Com] interface serial1/0/0[3Com-Serial1/0/0] isis timer hello 20 level-1

isis timer lsp Syntaxisis timer lsp time

undo isis timer lsp


ViewInterface view

Parameter■ time: Specifies the LSP interval, ranging from 1 to 1000 and measured in

milliseconds. The default value is 33 milliseconds.

DescriptionUsing the isis timer lsp command, you can configure minimum IS-IS LSP interval on the interface. Using the undo isis timer lsp command, you can restore the default setting.

For the related command, see isis timer retransmit.

Example Set the LSP interval on Interface serial1/0/0 to 500 milliseconds.

[3Com] interface Interface serial1/0/0[3Com-Serial1/0/0] isis timer lsp 500

isis timer retransmit Syntaxisis timer retransmit seconds

undo isis timer retransmit

ViewInterface view

Parameter■ seconds: Specifies the retransmission interval of LSP packets, with the range

from 0 to 300 and the default value is 5 seconds.

DescriptionUsing the isis timer retransmit command, you can configure the LSP retransmission interval over the point-to-point link. Using the undo isis timer retransmit command, you can restore the default setting.

Use this parameter cautiously when setting this parameter to avoid unnecessary retransmission.

The response is required when sending LSP packets on the p2p link, not the broadcast link, and therefore this command is unnecessary for the broadcast link.

For the related command, see isis timer lsp.

Example Set the LSP retransmission interval to 10 seconds on Interface serial1/0/0.

[3Com] interface serial1/0/0[3Com-Serial1/0/0] isis timer retransmit 10

is-level Syntaxis-level { level-1 | level-1-2 | level-2 }

undo is-level


ViewIS-IS view

Parameter■ level-1: Configures the router to operate at Level-1, only calculate the

intra-area routes and maintain the LSDB of L1.

■ level-1-2: Configures the router to operate at Level-1-2, calculate both the L1 and L2 routes and maintain the LSDB of Level-1 and Level-2.

■ level-2: Configures the router to operate at Level-2, only switch Level-2 LSP and calculate the Level-2 routes and maintain the LSDB of Level-2.

DescriptionUsing the is-level command, you can configure the IS-IS level. Using the undo is-level command, you can restore the default setting.

By default, the value is level-1-2.

You are recommended to set the system level when configuring IS-IS.

If there is only one area, you are recommended to set the level of all the routers as Level-1 or Level-2, because it is not necessary for all the routers to maintain two identical databases. You are recommended to set all the routers to Level-2 for convenient future extension, when applying them to IP network.

For the related command, see isis circuit-level.

Example Set the current router to operate on Level-1.

[3Com] isis[3Com-isis] is-level level-1

log-peer-change Syntaxlog-peer-change

undo log-peer-change

ViewIS-IS view

ParameterNone

DescriptionUsing the log-peer-change command, you can configure to log the IS-IS adjacency changes. Using the undo log-peer-change command, you can configure not to log the IS-IS adjacency changes.

By default, IS-IS adjacency changes log is disabled.

After IS-IS adjacency changes log is enabled, the IS-IS adjacency changes will be output on the configuration terminal until the log is disabled.

Example Configure to log the IS-IS adjacency changes on the current router.


[3Com-isis] log-peer-change

network-entity Syntaxnetwork-entity net

undo network-entity net

ViewIS-IS view

Parameter■ net: Specifies the NET (Network Entity Title ) in the X…X.XXXX....XXXX.00

format, in which the first "X…X" is the area address, the twelve Xs in the middle is the System ID of the router, and the 00 in the end is SEL.

DescriptionUsing the network-entity command, you can configure the name of Network Entity Title (NET) of the IS-IS routing process. Using the undo network-entity command, you can cancel a NET.

By default, the value is No NET.

NET means the Network Service Access Point (NSAP). The NET field of IS-IS is 8 to 20 bytes.

It consists of three parts. Part one is area ID, which is variable (1 to 13 bytes), and the area IDs of the routers in the same area are identical. Part two is system ID (6 bytes) of this router, which must be unique in the whole area and backbone area. Part three, the last byte "SEL", whose value must be "00". Usually, one router can be configured with one NET. When the area is redesigned by combination or separation, after reconfiguration, the correctness and continuity of the routes must be ensured.

For the related commands, see isis and isis enable.

Example Specify NET as “10.0001.1010.1020.1030.00”, in which the system ID is “1010.1020.1030”, area ID is “10.0001”.

[3Com] isis[3Com-isis] network-entity 10.0001.1010.1020.1030.00

preference Syntaxpreference value

undo preference

ViewIS-IS view

Parameter■ value: Specifies the preference, ranging from1 to 255. By default, the value is

15.


DescriptionUsing the preference command, you can configure the preference of IS-IS protocol. Using the undo preference command, you can restore the default value.

Several dynamic routing protocols could run simultaneously on a router. In this case, there is an issue of sharing and selecting the routing information among all the routing protocols. The system sets a preference for each routing protocol. When various routing protocols find the route to the same destination, the protocol with the higher preference will take effect.

Example Configure the preference of IS-IS as 25.

[3Com-isis] preference 25

reset isis all Syntaxreset isis all

ViewUser view

ParameterNone

DescriptionUsing the reset isis all command, you can reset all the IS-IS data.

This command is used when LSPs need refreshing immediately. For example, after area-authentication-mode and domain-authentication-mode commands are executed, the old LSP still remain on the router.


Example Clear all the IS-IS data.

<3Com> reset isis all

reset isis peer Syntaxreset isis peer system-id

ViewUser view

Parameter■ system-id: Specifiesy the system ID of IS-IS neighbor.

DescriptionUsing the reset isis peer command, you can reset the IS-IS data of specified IS-IS neighbor.

This command is used when you want to reconfigure a certain neighbor.


Example Clear the IS-IS data of neighbor whose system ID is 0000.0c11.1111.

<3Com> reset isis peer 0000.0c11.1111

set-overload Syntaxset-overload

undo set-overload

ViewIS-IS view

Parameter

None

DescriptionUsing the set-overload command, you can configure overload flag bit for the current router. Using the undo set-overload command, you can reset the overload flag bit.

By default, no overload bit is set.

If a router is configured with the overload bit, it will be ignored by other routers in SPF calculation. (However the directly connected routes will not be ignored.)

When the overload threshold is set, other routers should not send this router the packets which should be forwarded by it.

Example Set overload flag bit on the current router.

[3Com-isis] set-overload

silent-interface Syntaxsilent-interface interface-type interface-number

undo silent-interface interface-type interface-number

ViewIS-IS view

Parameter■ interface-type: Specifies the interface type.

■ interface-number: Specifies the interface number.

DescriptionUsing the silent-interface command, you can disable a specified interface to transmit IS-IS packet. Using the undo silent-interface command, you can enable the interface to transmit IS-IS packet.

By default, all the interface are allowed to transmit/receive IS-IS packets.


The silent-interface command is only used to restrain the IS-IS packets not to be sent on the interface, but the interface routes still can be sent from other interfaces.

Example Prohibit the IS-IS packets to be transmitted via Interface Ethernet1/0/0.

[3Com-isis] silent-interface Ethernet1/0/0

spf-delay-interval Syntaxspf-delay-interval number

undo spf-delay-interval

ViewIS-IS view

Parameter■ number: Interval for actively releasing CPU in route calculation. It is in pieces,

ranging from 1000 to 50000. By default, the value is 5000.

DescriptionUsing the spf-delay-interval command, you can configure the interval for actively releasing CPU in the SPF calculation. Using the undo spf-delay-interval command, you can restore the default setting.

When there are a large number of routes in the routing table, this command can be used to set that CPU resources are released automatically after a certain number of routes are processed. The unprocessed routes will be processed in one second.

The value of the parameter number can be adjusted according to the capacity of the routing table. If the spf-slice-size command is also configured, the SPF calculation will be paused when any setting item is met.

By default, CPU is released once when every 5000 pieces of routes are processed.

For the related command, see spf-slice-size.

Example Set IS-IS to release CPU once after processing every 3000 pieces of routes.

[3Com-isis] spf-delay-interval 3000

spf-slice-size Syntaxspf-slice-size seconds

undo spf-slice-size

ViewIS-IS view

Parameter■ seconds: Duration time in seconds for SPF calculation each time in the range

from 0 to 120. When the calculation duration time reaches or exceeds the set


value, the calculation of this time ends. If seconds is set to 0, it indicates that SPF calculation is not divided into slices and it will operate until the end. By default, the value is 0.

DescriptionUsing the spf-slice-size command, you can configure whether to set slice and the duration time each time when IS-IS performs SPF route calculation. Using the undo spf-slice-size command, you can restore the default setting.

When there are a large number of routes in the routing table, this command can be used to enable the SPF calculation in slices to prevent it from occupying the system resources for a long time. Each time the router processes some route information, it will free CPU to process other things, and process route information after 1 second.

The user is recommended to use the command when the number of routes reaches 150,000 or 200,000 and the value of seconds is recommended as 1. In other cases, the default setting should be used, that is, SPF runs to the end with no slice.

If the spf-delay-interval command is also configured, when SPF calculation is run, the SPF calculation will be paused if any setting item is met.

For the related command, see spf-delay-interval.

Example Set the SPF duration time to 1 second.

[3Com-isis] spf-slice-size 1

summary Syntaxsummary ip-address mask [ level-1 | level-1-2 | level-2 ]

undo summary ip-address mask [ level-1 | level-1-2 | level-2 ]

ViewIS-IS view

Parameter■ ip-address: Address segment of the routes to be aggregated.

■ mask: Aggregated route mask.

■ level-1: Aggregates the routes imported into Level-1.

■ level-1-2: Aggregates the routes imported to both areas and backbone network.

■ level-2: Aggregates the routes imported to backbone network only.

DescriptionUsing the summary command, you can configure IS-IS route summary. Using the undo summary command, you can cancel the summary.

By default, no routes will be summarized.

Similarly, the routes with the same next hops can be aggregated into one route. In this way, the sizes of the routing table, LSP packets and LSDB are reduced. Among


them, the aggregated route can be either a route found by IS-IS protocol, or an imported route. Furthermore, the cost value of the aggregated route adopts the smallest cost of the routes aggregated.

Example Set a route summary of 202.0.0.0/8.

[3Com-isis] summary 202.0.0.0 255.0.0.0

timer lsp-max-age Syntaxtimer lsp-max-age seconds

undo timer lsp-max-age

ViewIS-IS view

Parameter■ seconds: Specifies the maximum lifetime of LSP, measured in seconds. The

range is 1 to 65535. The default value is 1200 seconds.

DescriptionUsing the timer lsp-max-age command, you can configure the maximum lifetime of an LSP generated by the current router. Using the undo timer lsp-max-age command, you can restore the default value.

When a router generates the LSP of the system, it will fill in the maximum lifetime of this LSP. When other routers receive this LSP, its lifetime will be reduced continuously as the time goes by. If updated LSP has not been received before the old one times out, this LSP will be deleted from the LSDB.

For the related command, see timer lsp-refresh.

Example Set the lifetime of an LSP generated by the current system to 25 minutes, i.e., 1500 seconds.

[3Com-isis] timer lsp-max-age 1500

timer lsp-refresh Syntaxtimer lsp-refresh seconds

undo timer lsp-refresh

ViewIS-IS view

Parameter■ seconds: Specifies the LSP refresh interval, measured in seconds. The range is 1

to 65535. The default value is 900 seconds.

DescriptionUsing the timer lsp-refresh command, you can configure the refresh interval of LSP. Using the undo timer lsp-refresh command, you can restore the default value.


By this mechanism, synchronization of the LSPs within the entire area can be maintained.

For the related command, see timer lsp-max-age.

Example Set the LSP refresh interval of the current system to 1500 seconds.

[3Com-isis] timer lsp-refresh 1500

timer spf Syntaxtimer spf seconds [ level-1 | level-2 ]

undo timer spf [ level-1 | level-2 ]

ViewIS-IS view

Parameter■ seconds: Specifies the SPF calculation interval, ranging from 1 to 120 and

measured in seconds. The default value is 5 seconds.

■ level-1: Sets Level-1 SPF calculation interval only.

■ level-2: Sets Level-2 SPF calculation interval only.

■ If the level is not specified, it defaults to SPF interval of Level-1.

DescriptionUsing the timer spf command, you can configure the interval for the SPF calculation.Using the undo timer spf command, you can restore the default setting.

In IS-IS protocol, when the LSDB of the corresponding level is changed, SPF calculation is required. However, if the SPF calculation is performed too frequently, the system efficiency will be lowered and a great number of resources on the network will be occupied. SPF calculation interval can improve its calculation efficiency to some degree. This setting can be made according to actual conditions.

Example Set the SPF calculation interval of the router to 3 seconds.

[3Com-isis] timer spf 3

BGP Configuration Commands

For the commands defining routing policies in BGP, refer to the "IP Routing Policy Configuration Commands" of the next chapter.

For the configuration examples and parameter explanation of VPNv4 and VPN instance in BGP, refer to the "Multicast" module and "MPLS" module of this manual.

BGP Configuration Commands 627

aggregate Syntaxaggregate address mask [ as-set ] [ detail-suppressed ] [ suppress-policy route-policy-name ] [ origin-policy route-policy-name ] [ attribute-policy route-policy-name ]

undo aggregate address mask [ as-set ] [ detail-suppressed ] [ suppress-policy route-policy-name ] [ origin-policy route-policy-name ] [ attribute-policy route-policy-name ]

ViewBGP view

Parameter■ address: Address of the aggregated route, in dotted decimal notation.

■ mask: Network mask of the aggregated route, in dotted decimal notation.

■ as-set: Creates a route with AS segment.

■ detail-suppressed: Only advertise the aggregated route.

■ suppress-policy route-policy-name: Suppresses the specific route selected, some of which are not advertised.

■ origin-policy route-policy-name: Selects the originating routes used for aggregation.

■ attribute-policy route-policy-name: Sets the attributes of the aggregated route.

DescriptionUsing the aggregate command, you can establish an aggregated record in the BGP routing table. Using the undo aggregate command, you can cancel the function.

By default, there is no route aggregation.

The keywords are explained as follows:

Table 4 Functions of the keywords

Example Establish an aggregated record in the BGP routing table.

[3Com-bgp] aggregate 192.213.0.0 255.255.0.0

Keywords Function

as-set

Used to create an aggregated route, whose AS path information includes detailed routes. Use this keyword carefully when many AS paths need to be aggregated, for the frequent change of routes may lead to route vibration.

detail-suppressed

This keyword does not establish any aggregated route, but it restrains the advertisement of all the specific routes. If only some specific routes are to be restrained, use the peer filter-policy command carefully.

suppress-policy

Create an aggregated route with this keyword, at the same time, the advertisement of the specified route is restrained. If you want to restrain some specific routes selectively and leaves other routes still being advertised, use the if-match clause of the route-policy command.

origin-policy Select only the specific routes that are in accordance with route-policy to create an aggregated route.

attribute-policySet aggregated route attributes. The same work can be done by using peer route-policy, etc.


balance Syntaxbalance num

undo balance

ViewBGP view

Parameter■ num: Number of BGP load sharing routes. Their ranges are defined according

to the router types. You can get prompt information by inputting “?” at its location to confirm the current product range.When num is 1, it indicates there is no route to perform load sharing.

DescriptionUsing the balance command, you can configure the number of routes performing BGP load sharing. Using the undo balance command, you can restore the default value.

By default, no load sharing is performed.

Different from IGP protocol, there is no specific indication for BGP to perform load sharing. The load sharing of BGP is implemented by changing its routing rules.

For the related command, see display ip routing-table.

Example Configure 2 routes to perform load sharing.

[3Com] bgp 100[3Com-bgp] balance 2

bgp Syntaxbgp as-number

undo bgp [ as-number ]

ViewSystem view

Parameteras-number: Specifies local AS number, ranging from 1 to 65535.

DescriptionUsing the bgp command, you can enable BGP and enter the BGP view. Using the undo bgp command, you can disable BGP.

By default, BGP is not enabled.

This command is used to enable and disable BGP as well as to specify the local AS number of BGP.

Example Enable BGP.

[3Com] bgp 100


[3Com-bgp]

compare-different-as-med

Syntaxcompare-different-as-med

undo compare-different-as-med

ViewBGP unicast view, BGP multicast view, VPNv4 view

ParameterNone

DescriptionUsing the compare-different-as-med command, you can enable comparison of MED values from different AS neighboring routes when determining the best route. Using the undo compare-different-as-med command, you can disable the comparison.

By default, it is disabled to compare the MED attribute values from the routing paths of different AS peers.

If there are several routes available to one destination address, the route with smaller MED parameter can be selected as the final route item.

You are not recommended to use this command unless you can make sure that the ASs adopt the same IGP and routing method.

Example Enable the comparison of the MED attribute values from different AS neighboring route paths.

[3Com-bgp] compare-different-as-med

confederation id Syntaxconfederation id as-number

undo confederation id

ViewBGP view

Parameter■ as-number: Number of the AS which contains multiple sub-ASs. The range is

from 1 to 65535.

DescriptionUsing the confederation id command, you can configure confederation identifier. Using the undo confederation id command, you can cancel the BGP confederation specified by parameter as-number.

By default, the confederation ID is not configured.

Confederation can be adopted to solve the problem of too many IBGP full connections in a large AS domain. The solution is, first dividing the AS domain into


several smaller sub-ASs, and each sub-ASs remains full-connected. These sub-ASs form a confederation. Key IGP attributes of the route, such as next hop, MED, local preference, are not discarded across each sub-ASs. The sub-ASs still look like a whole from the point of view of a confederation although these sub-ASs have EBGP relations. This can assure the integrality of the former AS domain, and ease the problem of too many connections in the domain

For the related commands, see confederation nonstandard and confederation peer-as.

Example Confederation 9 consists of four sub-ASs, namely, 38, 39, 40 and 41. Here, the peer 10.1.1.1 is an internal member of the AS confederation while the peer 200.1.1.1 is an external member of the AS confederation. For external members, Confederation 9 is a unified AS domain.

[3Com] bgp 41[3Com-bgp] confederation id 9[3Com-bgp] confederation peer-as 38 39 40 [3Com-bgp] peer 10.1.1.1 as-number 38[3Com-bgp] peer 200.1.1.1 as-number 98

confederationnonstandard

Syntaxconfederation nonstandard

undo confederation nonstandard

ViewBGP view

ParameterNone

DescriptionUsing the confederation nonstandard command, the router can be compatible with the AS confederation not adopting RFC1965. Using the undo confederation nonstandard command, you can cancel this function.

By default, the configured confederation is consistent with RFC1965.

All the 3Com routers in the confederation should be configured with this command for interworking with those nonstandard devices.

For the related commands, see confederation id and confederation peer-as.

Example AS100 contains routers following nonstandard, which is composed of two sub-ASs, 64000 and 65000.

[3Com] bgp 64000[3Com-bgp] confederation id 100[3Com-bgp] confederation peer-as 65000[3Com-bgp] confederation nonstandard


confederation peer-as Syntaxconfederation peer-as as-number-1 [ ......as-number-n ]

undo confederation peer-as [ as-number-1 ] [......as-number-n ]

ViewBGP view

Parameter■ as-number-1...as-number-n: Sub-AS number, ranging from 1 to 65535. This

command can configure a maximum of 32 sub-Ass belonging to the confederation.

DescriptionUsing the confederation peer-as command, you can configure a confederation consisting of which sub-ASs. Using the undo confederation peer-as command, you can cancel the specified sub-AS in the confederation.

By default, no autonomous system is configured as a member of the confederation.

The configured sub-ASs in this command is inside a confederation and each sub-AS uses fully meshed network. The confederation id command is used to specify the confederation to which each sub-AS belongs. This configuration is invalid before this command is performed.

For the related commands, see confederation nonstandard and confederation id.

Example Configure the confederation that contains AS 2000 and 2001.

[3Com-bgp] confederation peer-as 2000 2001

dampening Syntaxdampening [ half-life-reachable half-life-unreachable reuse suppress ceiling ] [ route-policy policy-name ]

undo dampening

ViewBGP view

Parameter■ half-life-reachable: Specifies the half-life when the route is reachable. The

range is 1 to 45 minutes. By default, the value is 15 minutes.

■ half-life-unreachable: Specifies the half-life when the route is unreachable. The range is 1 to 45 minutes. By default, the value is 15 minutes.

■ reuse: Penalty value of a route when it starts to be reused. The range is 1 to 20000. By default, its value is 750 .

■ suppress: Penalty threshold of a route when it starts to be suppressed. The range is 1 to 20000. By default, its value is 2000.

■ ceiling: Upper threshold of the penalty. The range is 1001 to 20000. By default, its value is 16000.


■ policy-name: Route policy name.

DescriptionUsing the dampening command, you can make BGP route attenuation valid or modify various BGP route attenuation parameters. Using the undo dampening command, you can make the characteristics invalid.

By default, no route attenuation is configured.

If the parameters are not set, the BGP route attenuation is valid and each parameter is taken as the default value. half-life-reachable, half-life-unreachable ,reuse, suppress and ceiling are mutually dependent. Once any parameter is configured, all other parameters should also be specified.

For the related command, see reset dampening, reset bgp flap-info, display bgp routing-table dampened, and display bgp routing-table flap-info.

Example Modify various BGP route attenuation parameters.

[3Com-bgp] dampening 15 15 1000 2000 10000

debugging bgp Syntaxdebugging bgp { all | event | keepalive | open | packet | route-refresh | update } [ receive | send ] [ verbose ]

ViewUser view

Parameter■ all: Enables all BGP information debugging.

■ event: Enables BGP event information debugging.

■ keepalive: Enables BGP Keepalive packet information debugging.

■ open: Enables BGP Open packet information debugging.

■ packet: Enables BGP packet information debugging.

■ route-refresh: Enables BGP route-refresh packet information debugging.

■ update: Enables BGP Update packet information debugging.

DescriptionUsing the debugging bgp all command, you can enable all the information debugging of BGP packets and events.

Using the debugging bgp event command, you can enable the information debugging of BGP events.

Using the debugging bgp keepalive command, you can enable the information debugging of BGP Keepalive packets.

Using the debugging bgp packet command, you can enable the information debugging of BGP packets.

System performance is influenced when information debugging is enabled. Therefore, this command should be used cautiously. You should disable it after debugging.


Example Enable the information debugging of BGP packets.

<3Com> debugging bgp packet

default local-preference Syntaxdefault local-preference value

undo default local-preference


Parameter■ value: Default local preference to be configured. The range is 0 to

4294967295, the larger the value is, the higher the preference is. By default, its value is 100.

DescriptionUsing the default local-preference command, you can configure the default local preference. Using the undo default local-preference command, you can restore the default value.

Configuring different local preferences will affect BGP routing selection.

Example The two routers RTA and RTB in the same autonomous area use X.25 and Frame Relay protocols separately to connect with external autonomous areas. The command can be used to configure the default local preference of RTB as 180 so that the route via RTB is selected first when the same route goes through RTA and RTB at the same time.

[3Com-bgp] default local-preference 180

default med Syntaxdefault med med-value

undo default med

ViewBGP unicast view, BGP multicast view, VPNv4 view, VPN instance view

Parameter■ med-value: MED value to be specified. The range is 0 to 4294967295. By

default, the med-value is 0.

DescriptionUsing the default med command, you can configure the system MED value. Using the undo default med command, you can restore the default value of metric.

Multi-Exit Distinguish (MED) is the external metric of a route. Different from local preference, MED is exchanged between ASs and will stay in the AS. MED indicates the attribute of a route. The smaller an MED is, the better a route is. So the route with a low MED is preferred.When a router running BGP obtains several routes


with identical destination address and different next-hops from various external peers, it will select the best route depending on the MED value. In the case that all other conditions are the same, the system first selects the route with the smaller MED value as the external route of the autonomous system.

Example Routers RTA and RTB belong to AS100 and router RTC belongs to AS200. RTC is the peer of RTA and RTB. The network between RTA and RTC is X.25 network and the network between RTB and RTC is Ethernet. So the MED of RTA can be configured as 25 to allow RTC to select the route transmitted by RTB first.

[3Com-bgp] default med 25

display bgp group Syntaxdisplay bgp [ multicast | [ vpnv4 { all | route-distinguisher route-distinguisher | vpn-instance vpn-instance-name } ] ] group [ group-name ]

ViewAny view

Parameter■ group-name: A specified peer group.

■ vpn-instance vpn-instance-name: Name of vpn instance.

DescriptionUsing the display bgp group command, you can view the information of peer groups.

Example View the information of the peer group "aaa".

<3Com> display bgp group aaagroup : aaa no as-number still members in this group : Description : aaa route-policy specified in export policy : aaa filter-policy specified in export policy : list no.30304410 acl specified in export policy : list no.30304410 ip-prefix specified in export policy : aaa route-policy specified in import policy : aaa filter-policy specified in import policy : list no.30304410 acl specified in import policy : list no.30304410 ip-prefix specified in import policy : aaa with Route-policy aaa

display bgp network Syntaxdisplay bgp [ multicast | [ vpnv4 { all | route-distinguisher route-distinguisher | vpn-instance vpn-instance-name } ] ] network

ViewAny view


Parametervpn-instance vpn-instance-name: Name of VPN instance.

route-distinguisher route-distinguisher: Name of route-distinguisher.

DescriptionUsing the display bgp network command, you can view the routing information that has been configured.

Example View the routing information that has been configured.

<3Com> display bgp networkNetworkMask Route-policy133.1.1.0255.255.255.0None112.1.0.0255.255.0.0None

display bgp paths Syntaxdisplay bgp paths as-regular-expression

ViewAny view

Parameter■ as-regular-expression: Matched AS path regular expression.

DescriptionUsing the display bgp paths command, you can view the information about AS paths

Example Display the information about the AS paths.

<3Com> display bgp paths ^600$ Flags: - valid, ^ - best,

D - damped, H - history, I - internal, S – aggregate suppressed

Id Hash-Index References Aggregator Origin As-Path--------------------------------------------------------------------6 90 15 <null> IGP 600

display bgp peer Syntaxdisplay bgp [ multicast ] peer peer-address verbose

display bgp [ multicast ] peer [ verbose ]

display bgp vpnv4 { all | route-distinguisher route-distinguisher | vpn-instance vpn-instance-name } peer

ViewAny view

Parameter■ peer-address: Specifies the peer to be displayed.


■ vpn-instance vpn-instance-name: Name of VPN instance.

■ route-distinguisher route-distinguisher: Name of route-distinguisher.

■ verbose: Displays the detailed information of the peer.

DescriptionUsing the display bgp peer command, you can view the information of peer.

Using the display bgp multicast peer command, you can view the information of MBGP peer.

Using the display bgp vpnv4 peer command, you can view the information of VPN peer.

Example Display the information of the peer 10.110.25.20.

<3Com> display bgp peer 10.110.25.20 Peer AS-number Version Queued-Tx Msg-Rx Msg-Tx Up/Down State--------------------------------------------------------------------10.110.25.20 100 4 0 0 0 00:33:43 Active View the details of peer 133.1.1.2.<3Com> display bgp peer 133.1.1.2 verbose Peer: 133.1.1.2 Local: Unspecified Type: External State: Idle Flags: <Idled> Last State: NoState Last Event: NoEvent Last Error: None Options: <>

Configuration within the peer : no export policy route-policy no export policy ip-prefix no export policy filter-policy no export policy acl no import policy route-policy no import policy ip-prefix no import policy filter-policy no import policy acl no default route produce

display bgprouting-table

Syntaxdisplay bgp [ multicast | vpnv4 { all | route-distinguisher route-distinguisher | vpn-instance vpn-instance-name } ] routing-table [ ip-address mask ]

ViewAny view

Parameter■ multicast: Displays the MBGP routing information in BGP routing table.

■ all: Displays all VPNv4 routing information.

■ route-distinguisher route-distinguisher: Displays Network Layer Reachable Information (NLRI) matching Routing Distinguisher (RD).


■ vpn-instance vpn-instance-name: Displays NLRI associated with the specified VPN instance.

■ ip-address: Displays the destination network address.


DescriptionUsing the display bgp multicast routing-table command, you can view the BGP routing information of the specified IP address in the BGP routing table.

Using the display bgp multicast routing-table command, you can view the MBGP routing information of the specified IP address in the BGP routing table.

Using the display bgp vpnv4 routing-table command, you can view the VPN routing information of the specified IP address in the BGP routing table.

Example View all the BGP routing information.

<3Com> display bgp routing-tableFlags: - valid, ^ - best,


Dest/Mask Pref Next-Hop Med Local-Pref Origin As-Path--------------------------------------------------------------------*> 1.1.1.0/24 10.10.10.1 IGP 200 *> 1.1.2.0/24 10.10.10.1 IGP 200 *> 1.1.3.0/24 10.10.10.1 IGP 200 *> 2.2.3.0/24 10.10.10.1 INC 200 *> 4.4.4.0/24 10.10.10.1 IGP 200 *> 9.9.9.0/24 10.10.10.1 INC 200 *> 10.10.10.0/24 0.0.0.0 IGP * 10.10.10.1 IGP 200

View one BGP routing information.

<3Com> display bgp routing-table 22.1.0.0BGP route 22.1.0.0/16Nexthop : 200.1.7.2Origin : Incompelte, As-path: 200Local-pref: 100, Status: valid, internal, bestFrom : 200.1.7.2(200.1.7.2)

display bgprouting-table as-path-acl

Syntaxdisplay bgp [ multicast | [ vpnv4 { all | route-distinguisher route-distinguisher | vpn-instance vpn-instance-name } ] ] routing-table as-path-acl acl-number

ViewAny view


Parameter■ acl-number: Number of the specified AS path to be matched, ranging 1 to 199.

DescriptionUsing the display bgp routing-table as-path-acl command, you can view routes that match an as-path acl

Example Display routes that match filtering list.

<3Com> display bgp routing-table as-path-acl 1Flags: - valid, ^ - best,


Dest/Mask Pref Next-Hop Med Local-pref Origin As-path--------------------------------------------------------------------^ 1.1.1.0/24 170 10.10.10.1 0 IGP 200 ^ 1.1.2.0/24 170 10.10.10.1 0 IGP 200 ^ 1.1.3.0/24 170 10.10.10.1 0 IGP 200^ 2.2.3.0/24 256 10.10.10.1 0 INC 200^ 4.4.4.0/24 256 10.10.10.1 0 INC 200^ 9.9.9.0/24 256 10.10.10.1 0 INC 200^ 10.10.10.0/24 256 10.10.10.1 0 IGP 200^ 22.1.0.0/16 256 200.1.7.2 100 INC 200 88.1.0.0/16 60 0.0.0.0 IGP

display bgprouting-table cidr

Syntaxdisplay bgp [ multicast | [ vpnv4 { all | route-distinguisher route-distinguisher | vpn-instance vpn-instance-name } ] ] routing-table cidr

ViewAny view

ParameterNone

DescriptionUsing the display bgp routing-table cidr command, you can view the routing information about the non-natural mask (namely the classless inter-domain routing, CIDR).

Example<3Com> display bgp routing-table cidrFlags: - valid, ^ - best,


Dest/Mask Pref Next-Hop Med Local-pref Origin As-path--------------------------------------------------------------------


^ 22.1.0.0/16 256 200.1.7.2 100 INC 200 88.1.0.0/16 60 0.0.0.0 IGP


community

Syntaxdisplay bgp [ multicast | [ vpnv4 { all | route-distinguisher route-distinguisher | vpn-instance vpn-instance-name } ] ] routing-table community [ aa:nn | no-export-subconfed | no-advertise | no-export ] [ whole-match ]

ViewAny view

Parameter■ aa:nn: Specifies a community number.

■ no-export-subconfed: Not sends the matched routes outside the AS.

■ no-advertise: Not sends the matched routes to any peer.

■ no-export: Not exports routes outside the AS but advertise to other sub Ass.

■ whole-match: Displays the exactly matched routes.

DescriptionUsing the display bgp routing-table community command, you can view the routing information related to the specified BGP community number in the routing table.

Example Display the routing information matching the specified BGP community number.

<3Com> display bgp routing-table community 11:22Flags: - valid, ^ - best,


Dest/Mask Pref Next-Hop Med Local-pref Origin As-path-------------------------------------------------------------------- ^ 1.0.0.0/8 170 172.10.0.2 100 IGP ^ 2.0.0.0/8 256 172.10.0.2 100 IGP


community-list

Syntaxdisplay bgp [ multicast | [ vpnv4 { all | route-distinguisher route-distinguisher | vpn-instance vpn-instance-name } ] ] routing-table community-list community-list-number [ whole-match ]

ViewAny view

Parameter■ community-list-number: Specifies a community-list number.

■ whole-match: Displays the exactly matched routes.


DescriptionUsing the display bgp routing-table community-list command, you can view the routing information matching the specified BGP community list.

Example View the routing information matching BGP community list 1.

[3Com] display bgp routing-table community-list 1Flags: - valid, ^ - best,


Destination/Mask Pref Next-hop Med Local-Pref Origin As-Path-------------------------------------------------------------------- 1.1.1.0/24 170 10.10.10.1 0 IGP 200 1.1.2.0/24 256 10.10.10.1 0 IGP 200 1.1.3.0/24 170 10.10.10.1 0 IGP 200 2.2.3.0/24 256 10.10.10.1 0 INC 200 4.4.4.0/24 170 10.10.10.1 0 INC 200 9.9.9.0/24 256 10.10.10.1 0 INC 200 10.10.10.0/24 0 10.10.10.2 0 IGP 10.10.10.0/24 256 10.10.10.1 0 IGP 200

display bgprouting-table dampened

Syntaxdisplay bgp routing-table dampened

ViewAny view

ParameterNone

DescriptionUsing the display bgp routing-table dampened command, you can view BGP dampened routes.

Example View BGP dampened routes.

<3Com> display bgp routing-table dampenedFlags: - valid, ^ - best, D - damped, H - history, I - internal, S – aggregate suppressedDest/Mask Source Damping-limit Origin As-path-----------------------------------------------------------------D 11.1.0.0 133.1.1.2 1:20:00 IGP 200


different-origin-as

Syntaxdisplay bgp [ multicast ] routing-table different-origin-as

ViewAny view


ParameterNone

DescriptionUsing the display bgp routing-table different-origin-as command, you can view routes that have different source autonomous systems

Example View the routes that have different source ASs.

<3Com> display bgp routing-table different-origin-asFlags: - valid, ^ - best,


Destination/Mask Pref Next-hop Med Local-Pref Origin As-Path------------------------------------------------------------------ 10.10.10.0/24 0 10.10.10.2 0 IGP 10.10.10.0/24 256 10.10.10.1 0 IGP 200

display bgprouting-table flap-info

Syntaxdisplay bgp routing-table flap-info [ { regular-expression as-regular-expression } | { as-path-acl acl-number } | { network-address [ mask [ longer-match ] ] } ]

ViewAny view

Parameter■ as-regular-expression: Displays the route flap-info matching AS path regular

expression.

■ acl-number: Number of the specified AS path to be matched, ranging from 1 to 199.

■ network-address: Network IP address related to the flag information to be displayed


■ longer-match: Displays the route flap information that is more specific than <network-address, mask>.

DescriptionUsing the display bgp routing-table flap-info command, you can view BGP flap information. When <network-address mask> is <0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0>, this command will view the flap information of all BGP routes.

Example Display BGP flap information.

<3Com> display bgp routing-table flap-infoFlags: - valid, ^ - best,



Dest/Mask Source Keepup-time Damping-limit Flap-times Origin As-path--------------------------------------------------------------------D 11.1.0.0/16 133.1.1.2 48 1:20:30 4 IGP 200

display bgprouting-table peer

Syntaxdisplay bgp routing-table peer peer-address { advertised | received }

ViewAny view

Parameter■ peer-address: Specifies the peer to be displayed.

■ advertised: Routing information advertised by the specified peer.

■ received: Routing information the specified peer received.

DescriptionUsing the display bgp routing-table peer command, you can view the routing information the specified BGP peer advertised or received.

For the related command, see display bgp peer.

Example View the routing information advertised by BGP peer 10.10.10.1.

<3Com> display bgp routing table peer 10.10.10.1 advertisedFlags: - valid, ^ - best,


Dest/mask Next -Hop Med Local-pref Origin As-path-----------------------------------------------------------------*> 10.10.10.0/24 0.0.0.0 INC


regular-expression

Syntaxdisplay bgp [ multicast | [ vpnv4 { all | route-distinguisher route-distinguisher | vpn-instance vpn-instance-name } ] ] routing-table regular-expression as-regular-expression

ViewAny view

Parameter■ as-regular-expression: Matched AS regular expression.

DescriptionUsing the display bgp routing-table regular-expression command, you can view the routing information matching the specified AS regular expression

Example Display the routing information matching with AS regular expression ^600$.


<3Com> display bgp routing-table regular-expression ^600$Flags: - valid, ^ - best,


Destination/Mask Pref Next-hop Med Local-Pref Origin As-Path-------------------------------------------------------------------- 1.1.1.0/24 256 10.10.10.1 0 IGP 200 1.1.2.0/24 256 10.10.10.1 0 IGP 200 1.1.3.0/24 256 10.10.10.1 0 IGP 200 2.2.3.0/24 256 10.10.10.1 0 INC 200 4.4.4.0/24 256 10.10.10.1 0 IGP 200 9.9.9.0/24 256 10.10.10.1 0 INC 200 10.10.10.0/24 256 10.10.10.1 0 IGP 200

filter-policy export Syntaxfilter-policy { acl-number | ip-prefix ip-prefix-name } export [ protocol ]

undo filter-policy { acl-number | ip-prefix ip-prefix-name } export [ protocol ]

ViewBGP unicast view, multicast view, VPNv4 view, VPN instance view

Parameter■ acl-number: Specifies the number of access control list matching the

destination address field of routing information, ranging from 1 to 199.

■ ip-prefix-name: Specifies the name of the address prefix list matching the destination address field of routing information, ranging from 1 to 19.

■ protocol: Routing information of which kind of route protocol to be filtered. It includes direct, ospf, ospf-ase, ospf-nssa, isis, rip, and static at present.

DescriptionUsing the filter-policy export command, you can filter the advertised routes and only the routes passing the filter can be advertised by BGP. Using the undo filter-policy export command, you can cancel the filtering to the advertised routes.

By default, the advertised routing information is not filtered.

If the parameter protocol is specified, only the imported route generated by the specified protocol is filtered and the imported routes generated by other protocols are not affected. If the parameter protocol is not specified, the imported route generated by any protocol will be filtered.

Example Use acl 3 to filter the routing information advertised by all BGPs.

[3Com-bgp] filter-policy 3 export

filter-policy import Syntaxfilter-policy gateway ip-prefix-name importundo filter-policy gateway ip-prefix-name importfilter-policy { acl-number | ip-prefix ip-prefix-name } importundo filter-policy { acl-number | ip-prefix ip-prefix-name } import



Parameter■ acl-number: Specifies the number of access control list matching the

destination address field of routing information, ranging from 1 to 199.

■ ip-prefix ip-prefix-name: Address prefix list name. The matched object is the destination address domain of the routing information, ranging from 1 to 19.

■ gateway ip-prefix-name: Address prefix list name of the neighboring router. The matched object is the routing information distributed by the specified neighboring router, ranging from 1 to 19.

DescriptionUsing the filter-policy gateway import command, you can filter the learned routing information advertised by the specified address. Using the undo filter-policy gateway import command, you can remove the filtering to the routing information advertised by the specified address.

Using the filter-policy import command, you can filter the received global routing information. Using the undo filter-policy import command, you can remove the filtering to the received global routing information.

By default, the received routing information is not filtered.

This command can be used to filter the routes received by BGP and determines whether to add the routes to the BGP routing table.

Example Display how to use acl 3 to filter the routing information received by BGP.

[3Com-bgp] filter-policy 3 import

group Syntaxgroup group-name { [ internal ] | external }

undo group group-name

ViewBGP view

Parameter■ group-name: Specifies the name of peer group. It can be described in character

and numeral with the length being 1 to 47.

■ internal: Creates an internal peer group.

■ external: Creates an external peer group, including other sub AS groups in the confederation.

DescriptionUsing the group command, you can establish a peer group. Using the undo group command, you can delete the configured peer group.

The use of BGP peer group is for the convenience of the user’s configuration. When the user starts several peers with the same configuration, a peer group can


be established first and be configured. Then add all the peers to the peer group so that they have the same configuration as this peer group.

The default IBGP peer will be added to the default peer group without any configuration. The configuration of the route update policy for any IBGP peer is valid for the other IBGP peers in its group. To be specific, if the router is not a route reflector, all the IBGP peers are in the same group. If the router is a route reflector, all the route reflection clients are in a group, while non-clients are in another group.

The external peer group members must be in the same network segment. Otherwise, some EBGP peers may discard the transmitted route update.

The peer group members cannot be configured with the route update policy which is different from that of the peer group, but can be configured with different ingress policies.

Example Establish a peer group "test".

[3Com-bgp] group test

import-route Syntaximport-route protocol [ med med-value ] [ route-policy route-policy-name ]


ViewBGP view

Parameter■ protocol: Specifies source routing protocols which can be imported, which

includes direct, ospf, ospf-nssa , ospf-ase, rip, bgp, and static at present.

■ med med-value: Specifies the MED value loaded by a redistributed route, ranging from 0 to 4294967295.

■ route-policy route-policy-name: Specifies a route-policy to filter the redistributed protocol route. It can be described in character and numeral with the length being 1 to 19.

DescriptionUsing the import-route command, you can import routes of other protocols. Using the undo import-route command, you can remove importing routes of other protocols.

By default, BGP does not import the routes of other protocols.

Example Import routes of RIP.

[3Com-bgp] import-route rip

ip as-path acl Syntaxip as-path acl acl-number { permit | deny } as-regular-expression

undo ip as-path acl acl-number


ViewSystem view

Parameter■ acl-number: Number of AS path list ranging from 1 to 199.

■ as-regular-expression: AS path regular expression.

DescriptionUsing the ip as-path acl command, you can configure an AS path regular expression. Using the undo ip as-path acl command, you can disable the defined regular expression.

The configured AS path list can be used in BGP policy.

For the related command, see peer as-path-acl, and display bgp routing-table as-path-acl.

Example Configure an AS path list.

[3Com] ip as-path acl 10 permit 200,300

ip community-list Syntaxip community-list stand-comm-list-number { permit | deny } { aa:nn | internet | no-export-subconfed | no-advertise | no-export }

ip community-list ext-comm-list-number { permit | deny } as-regular-expression

undo ip community-list { stand-comm-list-number | ext-comm-list-number }

ViewSystem view

Parameter■ stand-comm-list-number: Number of the standard community list ranging from

1 to 99.

■ ext-comm-list-number: Number of the extended community list ranging from 100 to 199.

■ permit: Permits those that match conditions to access.

■ deny: Denies those that match conditions to access.

■ aa:nn: Community number.

■ internet: Advertises all routes.

■ no-export-subconfed: Used not to advertise the matched route beyond the confederation.

■ no-advertise: Used not to send the matched route to any peer.

■ no-export: Used not to pass routes outside the AS but advertise to other sub ASs.

■ as-regular-expression: Community attribute of the regular expression.


DescriptionUsing the ip community-list command, you can configure a BGP community list. Using the undo ip community-list command, you can delete the configured BGP community list.

The configured community list can be used in BGP policy.

For the related command, see apply community, and display bgp routing-table community-list.

Example Define a community attribute list which does not advertise routes with the community attribute beyond the confederation.

[3Com] ip community-list 6 permit no-export-subconfed

network Syntaxnetwork ip-address [ address-mask ] [ route-policy route-policy-name ]

undo network ip-address [ address-mask ] [ route-policy route-policy-name ]

ViewBGP view

Parameter■ ip-address: Network address that BGP advertises.

■ address-mask: Mask of the network address.

■ route-policy-name: Route-policy applied to advertised routes.

DescriptionUsing the network command, you can configure the network routes advertised by the local BGP. Using the undo network command, you can delete the existing configuration.

By default, there is no network sent through BGP.

Example Advertise routes to network segment 10.0.0.0/16.

[3Com-bgp] network 10.0.0.1 255.255.0.0

peeradvertise-community

Syntaxpeer { group-name } advertise-community

undo peer { group-name } advertise-community

ViewBGP view, VPNv4 view, VPN instance view

Parameter■ group-name: Specifies the name of peer group.


DescriptionUsing the peer advertise-community command, you can enable the transmission of the community attribute to a peer/peer group. Using the undo peer advertise-community command, you can cancel the existing configuration.

By default, the community attribute is not transmitted to any peer/peer group.

For the related commands, see if-match community-list and apply community.

Example Enable the transmission of the community attribute to a peer group "test".

[3Com-bgp] peer test advertise-community

peer allow-as-loop Syntaxpeer { group-name | peer-address } allow-as-loop [ number ]

undo peer { group-name | peer-address } allow-as-loop



■ peer-address: Specifies the IP address of the peer.

■ number: Specifies the repeating times of local AS number. The range is 1 to 10.

DescriptionUsing the peer allow-as-loop command, you can configure the repeating time of local AS. Using the undo peer allow-as-loop command, you can remove the repeating time of local AS.

For the related command, see display current-configuration, display bgp routing-table peer, and display bgp routing-table group.

Example Specify to configure the repeating times of local AS to 2.

[3Com-bgp] peer 1.1.1.1 allow-as-loop 2

peer as-number Syntaxpeer { group-name } as-number as-number

undo peer { group-name } as-number as-number

ViewBGP view



■ as-number: Peer AS number of the peer/peer group. The range is 1 to 65535.


DescriptionUsing the peer as-number command, you can specify the peer AS number of peer group. Using the undo peer as-number command, you can delete the AS number of peer group.

By default, no AS number is configured.

Example Specify the peer AS number for the peer test as 100.

[3Com-bgp] peer test as-number 100

peer as-path-acl Syntaxpeer { group-name | peer-address } as-path-acl acl-number { import | export }

undo peer { group-name | peer-address } as-path-acl acl-number { import | export }




■ acl-number: Specifies the filter list number of an AS regular expression. The range is 1 to 199.

■ import: Import distribution list.

■ export: Export distribution list.

DescriptionUsing the peer as-path-acl command, you can specify BGP route filtering policy based on AS path list. Using the undo peer as-path-acl command, you can cancel the existing configuration.

By default, the peer group has no AS path list.

Example Set the AS path ACL of the peer group test.

[3Com-bgp] peer test as-number 100[3Com-bgp] peer test as-path-acl 3 export

peer connect-interface Syntaxpeer { group-name | peer-address } connect-interface interface-name

undo peer { group-name | peer-address } connect-interface interface-name

ViewBGP view

Parameter■ group-name: Specifies the name of the peer group.



■ interface-name: Specifies interface name.

DescriptionUsing the peer connect-interface command, you can specify the source interface of a route update packet. Using the undo peer connect-interface command, you can restore the best source interface.

By default, BGP uses the best source interface.

Usually, BGP uses the optimal route to update the source interface of the packets. However, you can set the mode of the interface to Loopback in order to send route updates even if the interface does not work normally.

Example

None

peerdefault-route-advertise

Syntaxpeer { group-name } default-route-advertise

undo peer { group-name } default-route-advertise

ViewBGP view


DescriptionUsing the peer default-route-advertise command, you can configure a peer/peer group to import a default route for a peer. Using the undo peer default-route-advertise command, you can cancel the existing configuration.

By default, a peer/peer group does not import the default route.

For this command, no default route is required in the routing table. A default route is sent unconditionally to a peer with the next hop as itself.

Example Specify a peer group "test" to import the default route.

[3Com-bgp] peer test as-number 100[3Com-bgp] peer test default-route-advertise

peer description Syntaxpeer { group-name | peer-address } description description-line

undo peer { group-name | peer-address } description

ViewBGP view




■ description-line: Description information configured, which can be described in characters or numerals with the length not exceeding 79.

Description

Using the peer description command, you can configure the description information of the peer/peer group. Using the undo peer description command, you can remove the description information of the peer/peer group.By default, description information of peers/peer group is not configured.For the related command, see display current-configuration, display bgp peer, and display bgp routing-table group.

Example Configure the description information of the peer named group1 as beijing1.

[3Com-bgp] peer group1 description beijing1

peer ebgp-max-hop Syntaxpeer group-name ebgp-max-hop [ ttl ]

undo peer group-name ebgp-max-hop

ViewBGP view


■ ttl: Specifies the maximum hop value. The range is 1 to 255. By default, the value is 64.

DescriptionUsing the peer ebgp-max-hop command, you can allow establishing EBGP connection with the peer on indirectly connected network. Using the undo peer ebgp-max-hop command, you can cancel the existing configuration.

By default, this feature is disabled.

Example Establish EBGP connection with the peer group "test" on the indirectly connected network.

[3Com-bgp] peer test ebgp-max-hop

peer enable Syntaxpeer { group-name | peer-address } enable

undo peer { group-name | peer-address } enable

ViewBGP unicast address family view, IPv4 multicast address family view, VPNv4 address family view, L2VPN address family view


Parameter■ group-name: Specifies the name of the peer group, which specifies the entire

peer group.

■ peer-address: IP address of the peer, which specifies a certain peer.

DescriptionUsing the peer enable command, you can enable the specified peer (group) and can exchange information with a peer. Using the undo peer enable command, you can disable the specified peer (group).

Here,

The peer peer-address enable command can be configured in unicast address family only. Using this command, you can disable the unicast function of the peer.

You can delete the peer from the group in the corresponding address to disable its multicast function or VPNv4 function.

By default, BGP peer (group) is enabled in unicast address family, but disabled in VPN and MBP address families.

If the specified peer/peer group is disabled, the router will not exchange routing information with the specified peer (group).

Example Deactivate the specified peer.

[3Com] bgp 180[3Com-bgp] peer 18.10.0.9 as-number 180[3Com-bgp] undo peer 18.10.0.9 enable

peer filter-policy Syntaxpeer { group-name | peer-address } filter-policy list-number { import | export }

undo peer { group-name | peer-address } filter-policy list-number { import | export }

ViewBGP view, IPv4 multicast sub-address family view


■ peer-address: IP address of the peer.

■ list-number: Specifies the IP acl number.

■ import: Peer filter-policy used for imported routes

■ export: Peer filter-policy used for exported routes

DescriptionUsing the peer filter-policy command, you can set the filter-policy list of a peer group. Using the undo peer filter-policy command, you can cancel the existing configuration.

By default, a peer group has no access control list (acl).

For the related commands, see ip as-path acl and peer as-path-acl.


Example Set the filter-policy list of a peer group test.

[3Com-bgp] peer test as-number 100[3Com-bgp] peer test filter-policy 3 import

peer group SyntaxFor multicast address family or VPNv4 address family:

■ peer peer-address group group-name

■ undo peer peer-address group

■ For unicast address family or VPN-INSTANCE address family:

■ peer peer-address group group-name [ as-number as-number ]

■ undo peer peer-address group

ViewBGP view

Parameter■ group-name: Specifies the name of peer group. It can be described in character

and numeral with the length being 1 to 47.


■ as-number: Specifies AS number for the peer.

DescriptionUsing the peer group command, you can add a peer to the peer group. Using the undo peer group command, you can delete the specified peer in the peer group.

In the unicast/VPN-INSTANCE address family view, when adding a peer to an external peer group without specified AS number, you should specify the peer AS number at the same time. While it is unnecessary when adding the peer to an internal peer group or an external peer group with specified AS number.

In the multicast/VPNv4 address family view, it is required that the peer to be added should exist and has been added to a peer group in the unicast address family view (The peer can be disabled).

In different address family views, a peer can be added to different peer groups and a peer group can have different members.

Example Add the peer with IP address being 10.1.1.1 to the peer group TEST.

[3Com-bgp] group TEST [3Com-bgp] peer 10.1.1.1 group TEST

peer ip-prefix Syntaxpeer { group-name | peer-address } ip-prefix prefixname { import | export }

undo peer { group-name | peer-address } ip-prefix prefixname { import | export }



Parameter■ group-name: Name of peer group.


■ prefixname: Name of the specified ip-prefix.

■ import: Applies the filtering policy on the route received by the specified peer/peer group.

■ export: Applies the filtering policy on the route transmitted to the specified peer/peer group.

DescriptionUsing the peer ip-prefix command, you can configure the route filtering policy of the peer/peer group based on the ip-prefix. Using the undo peer ip-prefix command, you can cancel the route filtering policy of the peer/peer group based on the ip-prefix.

By default, the route filtering policy of the peer/peer group is not specified.

For the related command, see ip ip-prefix.

Example Configure the route filtering policy of the peer group based on the ip-prefix 1.

[3Com-bgp] peer group1 ip-prefix list1 import

peer next-hop-local Syntaxpeer { group-name } next-hop-local

undo peer { group-name } next-hop-local

ViewBGP view


DescriptionUsing the peer next-hop-local command, you can perform the process of the next hop in the route to be advertised to the peer/peer group and take the address of itself as the next hop. Using the undo peer next-hop-local command, you can cancel the existing configuration.

Example When BGP distributes the route to the peer group "test", it will take its own address as the next hop.

[3Com-bgp] peer test next-hop-local


peer password Syntaxpeer { group-name | peer-address } password { cipher | simple } password

undo peer { group-name | peer-address } password

ViewBGP view, MBGP VPN-instance address family view

Parameter■ group-name: Name of the peer group.

■ peer-address: IP address of the peer, in dotted decimal format.

■ cipher: Displays the configured password in cipher text mode.

■ simple: Displays the configured password in simple text mode.

■ password: Password in character string form with 1 to 16 characters when parameter simple is configured in the command or in the event of inputting the password in simple text mode but parameter cipher is configured in the command; with 24 characters in the event of inputting the password in cipher text mode when parameter cipher is configured in the command.

DescriptionUsing the peer password command, you can configure MD5 authentication for BGP during TCP connection setup. Using the undo peer password command, you can cancel the configuration.

By default, BGP does not perform MD5 authentication when TCP connection is set up.

Once MD5 authentication is enabled, both parties involved in the authentication must be configured with identical authentication modes and passwords. Otherwise, TCP connection will not be set up because of the failed authentication.

This command is used to configure MD5 authentication for the specific peer only when the peer group to which the peer belongs is not configured with MD5 authentication. Otherwise, the peer should be consistent with the peer group.

Example Adopt MD5 authentication on the TCP connection set up between the local router at 10.1.100.1 and the peer router at 10.1.100.2.

[3Com-bgp] peer 10.1.100.2 password simple 3Com Perform the similar configuration on the peer.[3Com-bgp] peer 10.1.100.2 password simple 3Com

peer public-as-only Syntaxpeer { group-name } public-as-only

undo peer { group-name } public-as-only

ViewBGP view

Parameter■ group-name: Specifies the name of a peer group.


■ peer-address: Specifies IP address of a peer.

DescriptionUsing the peer public-as-only command, you can configure not to carry the AS number when transmitting BGP update packets. Using the undo peer public-as-only command, you can configure to carry the AS number when transmitting BGP update packets.

By default, private AS number is carried when transmitting BGP update packets.

Generally, BGP transmits BGP update packets with the AS number (either public AS number or private AS number). To enable some outbound routers to ignore the AS number when transmitting update packets, you can configure not to carry the AS number when transmitting BGP update packets.

Example Configure not to carry the private AS number when transmitting BGP update packets to the peer named test.

[3Com-bgp] peer test public-as-only

peer reflect-client Syntaxpeer { group-name } reflect-client

undo peer { group-name } reflect-client

ViewBGP view or VPNv4 view


DescriptionUsing the peer reflect-client command, you can configure a peer/peer group as the route reflector client. Using the undo peer reflect-client command, you can cancel the existing configuration.

By default, no route reflector is in AS.

Generally speaking, it is not necessary to configure this command for the peer group, because IBGP peers are in its default group. A single peer peer-address reflect-client command should be used to configure the route reflector clients.

For the related commands, see reflect between-clients and reflect cluster-id.

Example Configure the peer group "test" as the route reflector client.

[3Com-bgp] peer test reflect-client

peer route-policy Syntaxpeer { group-name | peer-address } route-policy route-policy-name { import | export }

undo peer { group-name | peer-address } route-policy route-policy-name { import | export }




■ peer-address: Specifies IP address of a peer.

■ route-policy-name: Specifies route-policy.

■ import: Applies the route-policy to the routes coming from the peer (group).

■ export: Applies the route-policy to the routes advertised to the peer (group).

DescriptionUsing the peer route-policy command, you can assign the route-policy to the route coming from the peer (group) or the route advertised to the peer (group). Using the undo peer route-policy command, you can delete the specified route-policy.

By default, the peer (group) has no route-policy association.

Example Apply the route-policy named test-policy to the route coming from the peer group "test".

[3Com-bgp] peer test route-policy test-policy import

peerroute-update-interval

Syntaxpeer { group-name } route-update-interval seconds

undo peer { group-name } route-update-interval



■ seconds: The minimum interval of sending UPDATE message. The range is 0 to 600. By default, the advertisement interval is: 5 seconds for internal peer (group), and 30 seconds for external peer (group).

DescriptionUsing the peer route-update-interval command, you can configure the interval for the transmission route of a peer (group). Using the undo peer route-update-interval command, you can restore the default value.

Example Configure the interval of the BGP peer 172.168.10.1 sending the route update packet as 10 seconds.

[3Com-bgp] peer 172.168.10.1 as-number 100[3Com-bgp] peer 172.168.10.1 route-update-interval 10


peer timer Syntaxpeer { group-name | peer-address } timer keep-alive keepalive-interval hold holdtime-interval

undo peer { group-name | peer-address } timer

ViewBGP view



■ keepalive-interval: Keepalive interval to be specified. The range is 1 to 4294967295 seconds. By default, its value is 60 seconds.

■ holdtime-interval: Holdtime interval to be specified. The range is 3 to 4294967295 seconds. By default, its value is 180 seconds.

DescriptionUsing the peer timer command, you can configure Keepalive and Keepalive interval for a peer (group). Using the undo peer timer command, you can restore the interval default value.

The timer configured by using this command has a higher priority than the one configured by using the timer command.

Example Configure Keepalive and Holdtime intervals of the peer group "test".

[3Com-bgp] peer test timer keep-alive 60 hold 180

policy vpn-target Syntaxpolicy vpn-target

undo policy vpn-target

ViewVPN instance view

ParameterNone

DescriptionUsing the policy vpn-target command, you can configure whether to perform the filtering on the vpn-target extended community of the received routing information. Using the undo policy vpn-target command, you can cancel the filter function.

By default, the system performs the filtering on the vpn-target extended community of the received routing information.


Example Perform the filtering on the vpn-target extended community of the received routing information.

[3Com-bgp] policy vpn-target

preference Syntaxpreference value

undo preference

ViewBGP protocol view, BGP multicast address family view

Parameter■ value: Specifies the preference, ranging from 1 to 256. By default, the value is

170.

DescriptionUsing the preference command, you can configure the preference of BGP protocol. Using the undo preference command, you can restore the default preference.

Each kind of routing protocol has its own preference, by which the routing policy will select the optimal one from the routes of different protocols. The greater the preference value is, the lower the preference is. BGP defines two kinds of routes: One is learned from external peer. The other is learned from internal peer. The preferences of the two routes can be different, which can be set manually.

The system supports to configure different preferences for different sub-address families, including unicast address family and multicast address family at present.

Example Configure the preference of BGP protocol to 150.

[3Com-bgp] preference 150

reflect between-clients Syntaxreflect between-clients

undo reflect between-clients


ParameterNone

DescriptionUsing the reflect between-clients command, you can set the between-client reflection of a route. Using the undo reflect between-clients command, you can disable this function.

By default, the reflection between clients is disabled.


After route reflector is configured, it reflects the routes of a client to other clients.

For the related commands, see reflector cluster-id and peer reflect-client.

Example Disable the reflection between clients.

[3Com-bgp] undo reflect between-clients

reflector cluster-id Syntaxreflector cluster-id { cluster-id | address }

undo reflector cluster-id


Parameter■ cluster-id: Specifies the cluster ID of the route reflector, in integer or IP address

format, with the range from 1 to 4294967295.

■ address: Interface address of the route reflector’s cluster ID.

DescriptionUsing the reflector cluster-id command, you can configure the cluster ID of the route reflector. Using the undo reflector cluster-id command, you can remove the cluster ID of the route reflector.

By default, each route reflector uses its Router ID as the cluster ID.

Usually, there is only one route reflector in a cluster. It is the router ID of the reflector to identify the cluster. You can configure multiple route reflectors to improve the stability of the network. If a cluster is configured multiple route reflectors, you can use this command to configure identical cluster ID for all the reflectors.

For the related commands, see reflect between-clients and peer reflect-client.

Example Set cluster ID for local router to identify the cluster.

[3Com-bgp] reflector cluster-id 80[3Com-bgp] peer 11.128.160.10 reflect-client

refresh bgp Syntaxrefresh bgp { all | peer-address | { group group-name } } [ multicast | vpnv4 | vpn-instance vpn-instance-name ] { import | export }

ViewUser view

Parameter■ all: Refreshes all the peers.

■ peer-address: Refreshes the peer specified address.


■ group-name: Refreshes all the members in the specified peer group.

■ vpnv4: Refreshes routes of VPNv4 address family for the peer.

■ multicast: Refreshes routes of multicast address family for the peer.

■ vpn-instance vpn-instance-name: Refreshes VPN routes for the peer in the specified VPN-INSTANCE.

■ import: Sends ROUTE-REFRESH packet to the peer to require retransmission of all the routes.

■ export: Retransmits all the routes to the peer.

DescriptionUsing the refresh bgp command, you can request the peer for route retransmission or retransmit routes to the peer.

After BGP connection is created, only incremental routes are transmitted. But in some cases, for example, when routing policy is changed, retransmission of routes is required on both ends. And the routes should be filtered again according to the new policy.

Example Request all the peers to retransmit multicast routes.

<3Com> refresh bgp all multicast import

Retransmit all the routes to the CE peer 10.1.1.1 in VPN-INSTANCE vpn1.

<3Com> refresh bgp 10.1.1.1 vpn-instance vpn1 export

reset bgp Syntaxreset bgp { all | peer-address } [ vpn-instance vpn-instance-name ]

ViewUser view

Parameter■ all: Resets all the connections with BGP.

■ peer-address: Resets connection with a specified BGP peer.

■ vpn-instance vpn-instance-name: Name of specified VPN-INSTANCE. The range is 1 to 19.

DescriptionUsing the reset bgp peer-address command, you can reset the connection of BGP with a specified BGP peer.

Using the reset bgp all command, you can reset all the connections with BGP.

After changing the BGP policy or protocol configuration, resetting BGP connection can make the newly configured policy in effect immediately.

Example Reset all the BGP connections to enable the new configuration (after configuring the new Keepalive interval and Holdtime interval using the timer command).

<3Com> reset bgp all


reset bgp flap-info Syntaxreset bgp flap-info [ regular-expression as-regular-expression | as-path-acl acl-number | network-address [ mask ] } ]

reset bgp network-address [ flap-info ]

ViewUser view

Parameter■ regular-expression as-regular-expression: Clears the flap information matching

the AS path regular expression.

■ as-path-acl acl-number: Clears the flap information in consistency with a specified filter list. The range of the parameter acl-number is 1 to 199.

■ network-address: Clears the flap information of a record at this IP address. If this parameter is put before flap-info, the router clears the flap information of all the routes from this address.


DescriptionUsing the reset bgp flap-info command, you can reset the flap information of a route.

For the related command, see dampening.

Example Clear the flap information of all the routes that go through filter list 10.

<3Com> reset bgp flap-info as-path-acl 10

reset bgp group Syntaxreset bgp group group-name [ vpn-instance vpn-instance-name ]

ViewUser view

Parameter■ group-name: Specifies the name of the peer group, in characters ranging from

1 to 47.

■ vpn-instance vpn-instance-name: Name of specified VPN-INSTANCE.The range is 1 to 19.

DescriptionUsing the reset bgp group command, you can reset the connections between the BGP and all the members of a group.

For the related command, see peer group.

Example Reset BGP connections of all members from group1.

<3Com> reset bgp group group1


reset dampening Syntaxreset dampening [ network-address [ mask ] ]

ViewUser view

Parameter■ network-address: Network IP address related to the clearing attenuation

information.


DescriptionUsing the reset dampening command, you can clear the attenuation information of a route and release the suppression of a suppressed route.

For the related commands, see dampening and display bgp routing-table dampened.

Example Clear the attenuation information of the route to the network 20.1.0.0, and release the suppression of a suppressed route.

<3Com> reset dampening 20.1.0.0 255.255.0.0

summary automatic Syntaxsummary automatic

undo summary automatic

ViewBGP unicast view, BGP multicast view, VPN instance view

ParameterNone

DescriptionUsing the summary automatic command, you can make automatic aggregation of sub-network routes and disable it by using undo summary automatic command.

By default, no automatic aggregation of sub-network routes is executed.

After the summary automatic is configured, BGP cannot receive the sub-network routes imported from the IGP, so the amount of the routing information can be reduced.

Example Make the automatic aggregation of the sub-network routes.

[3Com-bgp] summary automatic

timer keep-alive hold Syntaxtimer keep-alive keepalive-interval hold holdtime-interval

undo timer



Parameter■ keepalive-interval: Interval for sending Keepalive, ranging from 1 to

4294967295. By default, its value is 60 seconds.

■ holdtime-interval: Keepalive time of BGP, ranging from 3 to 4294967295. By default, its value is 180 seconds.

DescriptionUsing the timer keep-alive hold command, you can configure the Keepalive and Holdtime timer of BGP. Using the undo timer keep-alive hold command, you can restore the default value of the Keepalive and Holdtime timer.

Example Configure the Keep-alive and Hold-time timer as 30 seconds and 60 seconds.

[3Com-bgp] timer keep-alive 30 hold 60

undo synchronization Syntaxundo synchronization

ViewBGP view, VPN instance view

ParameterNone

DescriptionUsing the undo synchronization command, you can remove the synchronization between BGP and IBGP.

Example[3Com-bgp] undo synchronization

MBGP Configuration Commands

In the following command description, BGP unicast view indicates the common BGP view.

For the specific configuration of MBGP multicast extension, refer to the "Multicast" module of this manual.

For the specific configuration of VPN instance and VPNv4, refer to "MPLS" module in this manual.

ipv4-family Syntaxipv4-family { multicast | vpn-instance vpn-instance-name }

undo ipv4-family [ multicast | vpn-instance vpn-instance-name ]

MBGP Configuration Commands 665

ViewBGP view, VPN instance view

Parameter■ multicast: Enters the BGP multicast extended address family view with the

parameter.

■ vpn-instance vpn-instance-name: Associates the specified VPN instance with the IPv4 address family. Enter the MBGP address family view of BGP with this parameter.

DescriptionUsing the ipv4-family command, you can enter IPv4 extended address family view of BGP. Using the undo ipv4-family command, you can remove all configurations in extended address family view and return to IPv4 unicast address view of BGP.

This command is used to enter the IPv4 extended address family view. In this view, parameters related to the address family can be configured for BGP.

The undo ipv4-family multicast command can exit the multicast extended address family view, remove all configurations in the address family view and return to BGP unicast view.

The undo ipv4-family vpn-instance vpn-instance-name command is used to remove the association between the specified VPN instance and IPv4 address family and delete all configurations in the address family and return to BGP unicast view.

The ipv4-family multicast command is used for multicast. For relevant contents, refer to "MBGP Multicast Extended" chapter in module "Multicast" of this manual.

The ipv4-family vpn-instance command is used for BGP/MPLS VPN. For related description, refer to "MPLS VPN" chapter in module "MPLS" module of this manual.

For the related commands, see ipv4-family vpnv4 and peer enable.

ExampleNone

ipv4-family vpnv4 Syntaxipv4-family vpnv4 [ unicast ]

undo ipv4-family vpnv4 [ unicast ]

ViewBGP view

Parameter■ unicast: Enters VPN-IPv4 unicast address family view with this parameter.

DescriptionUsing the ipv4-family vpnv4 command, you can enter VPNv4 address family view of BGP. Using the undo ipv4-family vpnv4 command, you can delete all


configurations in VPNv4 address family view and return to IPv4 unicast address family view of BGP.

The ipv4-family vpnv4 command is used for BGP/MPLS VPN. For related description, refer to "MPLS VPN" chapter in module "MPLS" of this manual.

The present VRP software platform only supports IPv4 unicast address of VPN. Execution of the ipv4-family vpnv4 command will enter VPN-IPv4 unicast address family view even if the unicast parameter is not specified.

For the related commands, see ipv4-family and peer enable.

ExampleNone

peer enable Syntaxpeer { group-name | peer-address } enable



Parameter■ group-name: Specifies the name of the peer group, which specifies the entire

peer group.

■ peer-address: IP address of the peer, which specifies a certain peer.

DescriptionUsing the peer enable command, you can enable the specified peer/peer group and disable it by using undo peer enable command.

By default, the unicast peer/peer group of IPv4 address family is enabled and other peers/peer groups are disabled.

Using this command, you can enable/disable the routing exchange between the peers (peer groups).

By default, the peer (group) of IPv4 unicast is enabled. The undo command is used to disable them. When a connection is used in both unicast and multicast, you can configure to disable unicast peer to delete unicast connection only.

By default, the peer (group) in other address families is disabled. It cannot exchange routing information normally until it is enabled.

Example Configure and enable the specified peer of VPNv4 unicast address family.

[3Com] bgp 100[3Com-bgp] peer 10.15.0.15 as-number 100[3Com-bgp] ipv4-family vpnv4 unicast[3Com-bgp-af-vpn] peer 10.15.0.15 enable Configure and enable the specified peer of IPv4 multicast address family.[3Com] bgp 200[3Com-bgp] peer 20.10.0.1 as-number 200[3Com-bgp] ipv4-family multicast

IP Routing Policy Configuration Commands 667

[3Com-bgp-af-mul] peer 20.10.0.1 enable

IP Routing Policy Configuration Commands

apply as-path Syntaxapply as-path as-number-1 [ as-number-2 [ as-number-3 ... ] ]

undo apply as-path

ViewRouting policy view

Parameter■ as-number-1... as-number-n: AS number to be added.

DescriptionUsing the apply as-path command, you can specify AS number to be added in front of the original AS path in route-policy. Using the undo apply as-path command, you can cancel the AS sequence number added in front of the original AS path.

By default, no AS number is set.

If the match condition of route-policy is matched, the AS attribute of the transmitting route will be changed. At least 10 AS numbers can be added.

Example Add AS 200 in front of the original AS path in route-policy.

[3Com-route-policy] apply as-path 200

apply community Syntaxapply community { { {aa:nn | no-export-sunconfed | no-export | no-advertise} … [ additive ] } | additive | none }

undo apply community


Parameter■ aa:nn: Community number.

■ no-export-subconfed: Not sends the matched route outside AS.

■ no-advertise: Not sends the matched route to any peer.

■ no-export: Not passes route through AS but advertise to other sub Ass.

■ additive: Community attributes of additional routes.

■ none: Community attributes of deleted routes.


DescriptionUsing the apply community command, you can specify the set BGP community attribute of route-policy. Using the undo apply community command, you can cancel the set BGP community attribute.

By default, BGP community attribute is not set.

Configure BGP community attribute after matching the route-policy conditions.

For the related command, see ip community-list, if-match community-list, route-policy, and display bgp routing-table community.

Example Display how to configure one route-policy named setcommunity, whose node serial number is 16 and match mode is permit, and enter route policy view to set match conditions and attribute modification actions to be executed.

[3Com] route-policy setcommunity permit node 16[3Com-route-policy] if-match as-path 8[3Com-route-policy] apply community no-export

apply cost Syntaxapply cost value

undo apply cost


Parameter■ value: Specifies the route cost value of route information.

DescriptionUsing the apply cost command, you can set the route cost value of route information. Using the undo apply cost command, you can cancel the apply clause.

For the related commands, see if-match interface, if-match acl, if-match ip-prefix, if-match ip next-hop, if-match cost, if-match tag, route-policy, apply ip-address, apply local-preference, apply origin, and apply tag.

Example Display how to define one apply clause. When it is used for setting route information attribute, it sets the route cost value of route information as 120.

[3Com-route-policy] apply cost 120

apply cost-type Syntaxapply cost-type [ internal | external ]

undo apply cost-type



Parameter■ internal: Uses the cost type of IGP as MED value of BGP to advertise route to

EBGP peer.

■ external: External cost type value of IS-IS.

DescriptionUsing the apply cost-type command, you can set the route cost type of route information. Using the undo apply cost-type command, you can cancel the apply clause.

By default, route cost type is not set.

Example Set the cost type of IGP as MED value of BGP

[3Com-route-policy] apply cost-type internal

apply ip-address Syntaxapply ip-address { ip-address [ ip-address ] | acl acl-number }

undo apply ip-address [ ip-address [ ip-address ] | acl acl-number ]


Parameter■ ip-address: Next-hop address. Two next-hop addresses can be specified at

most.

■ acl-number: Specifies the number of the access control list used for filtering, ranging from 1 to 99

DescriptionUsing the apply ip-address command, you can set the next hop address of route information. Using the undo apply ip-address command, you can cancel the apply clause.


One of the apply clauses of the route-policy: When this command is used for setting routing information attribute, it sets the next hop address of the packets passed filtering.

If multiple next hop addresses are set through apply ip-address command, other next hop addresses will be tried by turn when the first next hop address is invalid.

For the related commands, see if-match interface, if-match acl, if-match ip-prefix, if-match ip next-hop, if-match cost, if-match tag, route-policy, apply local-preference, apply cost, apply origin, and apply tag.

Example Define an apply clause to set the next hop address of routing information as 193.1.1.8 when it is used for setting routing information attribute.

[3Com-route-policy] apply ip-address 193.1.1.8


apply isis apply isis [ level-1 | level-2 | level-1-2 ]

undo apply isis


Parameter■ level-1: Imports the matched route to Level-1 area.

■ level-2: Imports the matched route to Level-2 area.

■ level-1-2: Imports the matched route to both Level-1 and Level-2 area.

DescriptionUsing the apply isis command, you can apply the level of a matched route to be imported to Level-1, Level-2 or Level-1-2. Using the undo apply isis command, you can remove the setting clause.


For the related commands, see if-match interface, if-match acl, if-match ip-prefix, if-match ip next-hop, if-match cost, if-match tag, route-policy, apply ip-address, apply cost, apply origin, and apply tag.

Example Define an apply clause to set the imported route to Level-2.

[3Com-route-policy] apply isis level-2

apply local-preference Syntaxapply local-preference local-preference

undo apply local-preference


Parameter■ local-preference: Newly set local preference.

DescriptionUsing the apply local-preference command, you can apply the local preference of route information. Using the undo apply local-preference command, you can cancel the apply clause.

For the related commands, see if-match interface, if-match acl, if-match ip-prefix, if-match ip next-hop, if-match cost, if-match tag, route-policy, apply ip-address, apply local-preference, apply origin, and apply tag.

Example Apply the local preference level of route information as 130 when this apply clause is used for setting route information attribute.

[3Com-route-policy] apply local-preference 130


apply origin Syntaxapply origin { igp | egp as-number | incomplete }

undo apply origin


Parameter■ igp: Sets the BGP route information source as internal route

■ egp: Sets the BGP route information source as external route

■ as-number: Specifies AS number of external route.

■ incomplete: Sets the BGP route information source as unknown source.

DescriptionUsing the apply origin command, you can set the routing source of BGP routing information. Using the undo apply origin command, you can cancel the apply clause.

For the related commands, see if-match interface, if-match acl, if-match ip-prefix, if-match ip next-hop, if-match cost, if-match tag, route-policy, apply ip-address, apply local-preference, apply cost, and apply tag.

Example Display how to define one apply clause. When it is used for setting routing information attribute, it sets the routing source of the routing information as igp.

[3Com-route-policy] apply origin igp

apply tag Syntaxapply tag value

undo apply tag


Parameter■ value: Specifies the tag value of route information.

DescriptionUsing the apply tag command, you can set the tag area of OSPF route information. Using the undo apply tag command, you can cancel the apply clause.

For the related commands, see if-match interface, if-match acl, if-match ip-prefix, if-match ip next-hop, if-match cost, if-match tag, route-policy, apply ip-address, apply local-preference, apply cost, and apply origin.

Example Display how to define one apply clause. When it is used for setting route information attribute, it sets the tag area of route information as 100.

[3Com-route-policy] apply tag 100


display ip ip-prefix Syntaxdisplay ip ip-prefix [ ip-prefix-name ]

ViewAny view

Parameter■ ip-prefix-name: Specifies displayed address prefix list name.

DescriptionUsing the display ip ip-prefix command, you can view the address prefix list.

Display all the configured address prefix lists when no ip-prefix-name is specified.


Example Display the information of the address prefix list named p1.

<3Com> display ip ip-prefix p1ip-prefix p1 index 10: permit 192.168.10.10/16 greater-equal 17 less-equel 18

display route-policy Syntaxdisplay route-policy [ route-policy-name ]

ViewAny view

Parameter■ route-policy-name: Specifies displayed route-policy name.

DescriptionUsing the display route-policy command, you can view the configured route-policy

Display all the configured route-policy when no route-policy-name is specified.


Example Display the information of route-policy named policy1.

<3Com> display route-policy policy1Route-policy : policy1 Permit 10 : if-match (prefixlist) p1 apply cost 100 matched : 0 denied : 0

filter-policy export Syntaxfilter-policy { acl-number | ip-prefix ip-prefix-name } export [ protocol ]

undo filter-policy { acl-number | ip-prefix ip-prefix-name } export [ protocol ]


ViewRouting protocol view

Parameter■ acl-number: Number of the access control list used for matching the

destination address field of the routing information.

■ ip-prefix-name: Address prefix list used for matching the routing information destination address field.

■ protocol: Routing information of which kind of route protocol to be filtered.

DescriptionUsing the filter-policy export command, you can configure the filtering conditions of the routing information advertised by a certain type of routing protocols. Using the undo filter-policy export command, you can cancel the filtering conditions set.

By default, the advertised routing information is not filtered.

In some cases, it may be required that only the routing information meeting some conditions can be advertised. Then, the filter-policy command can be used to set the filtering conditions for the routing information to be advertised. Only the routing information passing the filtering can be advertised.

For the related command, see filter-policy import.

Example Define the filtering rules for advertising the routing information of RIP. Only the routing information passing the filtering of address prefix list p1 will be advertised by RIP.

[3Com-rip] filter-policy ip-prefix p1 export


filter-policy gateway ip-prefix-name import

undo filter-policy gateway ip-prefix-name import

filter-policy { acl-number | ip-prefix ip-prefix-name } import

undo filter-policy { acl-number | ip-prefix ip-prefix-name } import

ViewRouting protocol view

Parameter■ acl-number: Access control list number used for matching the destination

address field of the routing information.

■ ip-prefix ip-prefix-name: Prefix address list name. Its matching object is the destination address field of the routing information.

■ gateway ip-prefix-name: Prefix address list name of the neighbor router address. Its matching object is the routing information advertised by the specified neighbor router.


DescriptionUsing the filter-policy gateway import command, you can filter the routing information advertised by a specified router. Using the undo filter-policy gateway import command, you can cancel the setting of the filtering condition.

Using the filter-policy import command, you can configure the condition for filtering the routing information. Using the undo filter-policy import command, you can cancel the setting of filter condition.

By default, the received routing information is not filtered.

In some cases, it may be required that only the routing information meeting some conditions can be received. Then, the filter-policy command can be used to set the filtering conditions. acl-number is the access control list number used for filtering the destination addresses of the routing information and ip-prefix parameter is used to filter the routing information specified destination address.

For the related command, see filter-policy export.

Example Define the filtering rule for receiving routing information of RIP. Only the routing information filtered through the address prefix list p1 can be received by RIP.

[3Com-rip] filter-policy ip-prefix p1 import

if-match acl Syntaxif-match acl acl-number

undo if-match acl acl-number


Parameter■ acl-number: Specifies the number of the access control list used for filtering.

■ ip-prefix-name: Specifies the name of the prefix address list used for filtering.

Description Using the if-match acl command, you can configure the IP address range to match the route-policy. Using the undo if-match acl command, you can cancel the setting of the match rule.

Filtering is performed by quoting an ACL.

For the related command, see if-match ip-prefix, if-match interface, if-match ip next-hop, if-match cost, if-match tag, route-policy, apply ip-address, apply cost, apply local-preference, apply origin, and apply tag.

Example Display how to define one if-match clause. When the clause is used for filtering route information, the route information filtered by route destination address through address ACL 10 is enabled to pass the if-match clause.

[3Com-route-policy] if-match acl 10


if-match as-path Syntaxif-match as-path acl-number

undo if-match as-path


Parameter■ acl-number: AS path based access list number, ranging from 1 to 199.

Descriptionif-match as-path acl-number

undo if-match as-path


Parameter■ acl-number: AS path list number. The range is 1 to 199.

DescriptionUsing the if-match as-path command, you can configure the matched AS path list number of route-policy. Using the undo if-match as-path command, you can cancel the matched path list number.

By default, AS path list number is not matched.

This if-match clause of route-policy is used to filter BGP routing information. The match condition is specified according to the AS path attributes of the routing information.

Example Define an as-path numbered as 2 and allow the autonomous system number to contain the routing information of 200 and 300. Then, define a route-policy named test. The node No.10 of this route-policy defines a if-match clause, which quotes the definition of as-path.

[3Com] ip as-path acl 2 permit 200:300[3Com] route-policy test permit node 10[3Com-route-policy] if-match as-path 2

if-match community Syntaxif-match community { standard-community-list-number [ whole-match ] | extended-community-list-number }

undo if-match community



Parameter■ standard-community-list-number: Standard community list number, ranging

from 1 to 99.

■ extended-community-list-number: Extended community list number, ranging from 100 to 199.

■ whole-match: Fully matching, i.e., all the communities must appear.

DescriptionUsing the if-match community command, you can configure the community list number to be matched in route-policy. Using the undo if-match community command, you can cancel the configuration of the matched community list number.

By default, community list is not matched.

The if-match clause of route-policy is used to filter BGP routing information. The match condition is specified according to the community attributes of the routing information.

For the related commands, see route-policy and ip community-list.

Example Define a community-list numbered as 1, and allow the autonomous system number to contain the routing information of 100 and 200. Then, the route-policy named test is defined. The node No.10 of the route-policy defines a if-match clause, which quotes the definition of the community-list.

[3Com] ip community-list 1 permit 100:200[3Com] route-policy test permit node 10[3Com-route-policy] if-match community 1

if-match cost Syntaxif-match cost value

undo if-match cost


Parameter■ value: Specifies the required route cost value, ranging from 0 to 4294967295.

DescriptionUsing the if-match cost command, you can configure one of the matching rules of route-policy to match the cost of the routing information. Using the undo if-match cost command, you can cancel the configuration of the matching rule.


This if-match clause of route-policy is used to specify the route cost value of the matched routing information.

For the related command, see if-match interface, if-match acl, if-match ip-prefix, if-match ip next-hop, if-match tag, route-policy, apply ip-address, apply local-preference, apply cost, apply origin, and apply tag.


Example Define an if-match clause, which allows the routing information with routing cost 8 to pass this if-match clause.

[3Com-route-policy] if-match cost 8

if-match interface Syntaxif-match interface { interface-name | interface-type interface-number }

undo if-match interface


Parameter■ interface-type: Specifies interface type.

■ interface-number: Specifies interface number.

■ interface-name: Specifies interface name.

DescriptionUsing the if-match interface command, you can match the route whose next hop is designated interface. Using the undo if-match interface command, you can cancel the setting of match condition.


This if-match clause of the route-policy is used to match the corresponding interface of the route next hop when it filters the route.

For the related command, see if-match acl, if-match ip-prefix, if-match ip next-hop, if-match cost, if-match tag, route-policy, apply ip-address, apply cost, apply local-preference, apply origin, and apply tag.

Example Display how to define one if-match clause to match the route whose next hop interface is ethernet 1/0/2.

[3Com-route-policy] if-match interface Ethernet1/0/2

if-match ip next-hop Syntaxif-match ip next-hop { acl acl-number | ip-prefix ip-prefix-name }

undo if-match ip next-hop [ ip-prefix ]


Parameter■ acl-number: Specifies the number of the access control list used for filtering.

The range is 1 to 99.

■ ip-prefix-name: Specifies the name of the prefix address list used for filtering. The range is 1 to 19.


DescriptionUsing the if-match ip next-hop command, you can configure one of the match rules of route-policy on the next hop address of the routing information. Using the undo if-match ip next-hop command, you can cancel the setting of match condition.


This if-match clause of the route-policy is used to specify the next hop address field matching the routing information when it filters the routing information and implement its filtering function by referring to an ACL or address prefix list.

For the related command, see if-match interface, if-match acl, if-match ip-prefix, if-match cost, if-match tag, route-policy, apply ip-address, apply cost, apply local-preference, apply origin, and apply tag.

Example Define an if-match clause. It permits the routing information, whose route next hop address passes the filtering of the prefix address list p1, to pass this if-match clause.

[3Com-route-policy] if-match ip next-hop ip-prefix p1

if-match ip-prefix Syntaxif-match ip-prefix ip-prefix-name

undo if-match [ ip-prefix ip-prefix-name ]


Parameter■ ip-prefix-name: Specifies the name of the prefix address list used for filtering.

DescriptionUsing the if-match ip-prefix command, you can configure one of the match rules of route-policy on the IP address range of the routing information. Using the undo if-match ip next-hop command, you can cancel the setting of match condition.

The filtering is achieved through importing an IP address prefix name.

For the related command, see if-match acl, if-match interface, if-match ip next-hop, if-match cost, if-match tag, route-policy, apply ip-address, apply cost, apply local-preference, apply origin, and apply tag.

Example Define an if-match sub-statement in which the IP address prefix list p1 is used in routing information filtering.

[3Com-route-policy] if-match ip-prefix p1

if-match tag Syntaxif-match tag value

undo if-match tag



Parameter■ value: Specifies the required tag value.

DescriptionUsing the if-match tag command, you can match the tag field of OSPF route information. Using the undo if-match tag command, you can cancel the existing matching rules.

For the related command, see if-match interface, if-match acl, if-match ip-prefix, if-match ip next-hop, if-match cost, route-policy, apply ip-address, apply cost, apply local-preference, apply origin, and apply tag.

Example Display how to define one if-match clause and enable the OSPF route information whose tag field is 8 to pass the if-match clause.

[3Com-route-policy] if-match tag 8

ip ip-prefix Syntaxip ip-prefix ip-prefix-name [ index index-number ] { permit | deny } network len [ greater-equal greater-equal | less-equal less-equal ]

undo ip ip-prefix ip-prefix-name [ index index-number | permit | deny ]

ViewSystem view

Parameter■ ip-prefix-name: Specifies an address prefix list name. It identifies one address

prefix list uniquely.

■ index-number: Identifies an item in the prefix address list. The item with smaller index-number will be tested first.

■ permit: Specifies the match mode of the defined address prefix list items as permit mode. In the permit mode, if the IP address to be filtered is in the defined range, it will not be tested by the next node. Otherwise, it has to go on with the test.

■ deny: Specifies the match mode of the defined address prefix list items as deny mode. In the deny mode, the IP address in the defined range cannot pass the filtering and is refused to go on with the next test. Otherwise, it will have the next test.

■ network: IP address prefix range (IP address). If it is 0.0.0.0 0, all the IP addresses are matched.

■ len: IP address prefix range (mask length). If it is 0.0.0.0 0, all the IP addresses are matched.

■ greater-equal, less-equal: Specifies the address prefix range [greater-equal, less-equal] to be matched after the address prefix network len has been matched. The meaning of greater-equal is "greater than or equal to" , and the


meaning of less-equal is "less than or equal to". The range is len <= greater-equal <= less-equal <= 32. When only greater-equal is used, it indicates the prefix range [greater-equal, 32]. When only less-equal is used, it indicates the prefix range [len, less-equal].

DescriptionUsing the ip ip-prefix command, you can configure an address prefix list or one of its items. Using the undo ip ip-prefix command, you can delete an address prefix list or one of its items.

The address prefix list is used for IP address filtering. An address prefix list may contain several items, and each item specifies one address prefix range. The inter-item filtering relation is "OR", i.e. passing an item means passing the filtering of this address prefix list. Not passing the filtering of all items means not passing the filtering of this prefix address list.

The address prefix range may contain two parts, which are determined by len and [greater-equal, less-equal] respectively. If the prefix ranges of these two parts are both specified, the IP to be filtered must match the prefix ranges of these two parts.

If you specify network len as 0.0.0.0 0, it only matches the default route.

Specify network len as 0.0.0.0 0 less-equal 32 to match all the routes.

Example Configure an address prefix list named p1. It permits the routes with the mask of 17 or 18 bits long and in network segment 10.0.192.0.8 to pass.

[3Com] ip ip-prefix p1 permit 10.0.192.0 8 greater-equal 17 less-equal 18

route-policy Syntaxroute-policy route-policy-name { permit | deny } node { node-number }

undo route-policy route-policy-name [ permit | deny | node node-number ]

ViewSystem view

Parameter■ route-policy-name: Specifies the route-policy name to identify one route-policy

uniquely.

■ permit: Specifies the match mode of the defined route-policy node as permit mode. If a route matches all the if-match clauses, it is permitted to pass the filtering and execute the apply clauses of this node. If not, it will take the test of next node of this route-policy.

■ deny: Specifies the match mode of the defined route-policy node as deny mode. When a route matches all the if-match clauses of this node, it will be refused to pass the filtering and will not take the next test.

■ node: Node of the route policy.

■ node-number: Index of the node in the route-policy. When this route-policy is used for routing information filtering, the node with smaller node-number will be tested first.

Route Capacity Configuration Commands 681

DescriptionUsing the route-policy command, you can create and enter route-policy view. Using the undo route-policy command, you can cancel the established route-policy.

By default, no route-policy is defined.

Route-policy is used for route information filtering or route policy. One route-policy comprises of some nodes and each node comprises of some if-match and apply clauses. The if-match clause defines the match rules of this node and the apply clause defines the actions after passing the filtering of this node. The filtering relationship between the if-match clauses of the node is "and", i.e., all if-match clauses that meet the node. The filtering relation between route-policy nodes is "OR", i.e. passing the filtering of one node means passing the filtering of this route-policy. If the information does not pass the filtering of any nodes, it cannot pass the filtering of this route-policy.

For the related command, see if-match interface, if-match acl, if-match ip-prefix, if-match ip next-hop, if-match cost, if-match tag, apply ip-address, apply local-preference, apply cost, apply origin, and apply tag.

Example Display how to configure one route-policy policy1, whose node number is 10 and the match mode is permit, and enter route policy view.

[3Com] route-policy policy1 permit node 10[3Com-route-policy]

Route Capacity Configuration Commands

display memory limit Syntaxdispaly memory limit

ViewAny view

ParameterNone

DescriptionUsing the display memory limit command, you can view the memory setting and state information related to the router capacity.

It includes available memory and state information about connections such as times for disconnecting connections, times for reestablishing connections and whether the current system is in the emergent state or not.

Example Display the current memory setting and state information.

<3Com> display memory limit


Current memory limit configuration information:

memory safety: 30 memory limit: 20 memory auto-establish enabled

Free Memory: 73855332 (Byte)

The state information about connection: The times of disconnect: 0 The times of reconnect: 0 The current state: Normal

The information displayed by this command includes the router memory limit, the size of the idle memory, the times of connection disconnecting, the times of connection reestablishment and the current state.

The displayed information is described specifically in the following table:

Table 5 Description of the information displayed by the display memory limit command

memory auto-establishdisable

Syntaxmemory auto-establish disable

ViewSystem view

ParameterNone

DescriptionUsing the memory auto-establish disable command, you can disable the function of restoring the connections of all the routing protocols (even if the idle memory reduces to a safety value).

By default, when the idle memory of the router recovers to a safety value, connections of all the routing protocols will always recover (when the idle memory of the router reduces to a lower limit, the connection will be disconnected forcibly).

Using the memory auto-establish disable command, you can disable the above function. Thus, connections of all the routing protocols will not recover when the idle memory of the router recovers to a safety value. In this case, you need to restart the routing protocol to recover the connections.

Item Descriptionmemory safety: 30 The safety value of the router memory is 30Mbytes.memory limit: 20 The lower limit of the router memory is 20Mbytes.memory auto-establish enabled The system allows recovering the connection automatically.

(If the automatic recover is disabled, the "auto-establish disabled" will be displayed.)

Free Memory: 73855332 (Byte) The size of the current idle memory is 73855332 bytes, that is, 73.855M.

The times of disconnect: 0 The times of the connection disconnecting of the router is 0.The times of reconnect: 0 The times of the connection re-establishment of the router is

0.The current state: Normal The current state is normal. (If entering the emergent state,

the system will display "Exigency" .)


You shall use the command cautiously.

For the related commands, see memory auto-establish enable, memory { safety | limit }, and display memory limit.

Example Disable to recover the connections of all the protocols automatically when the current router memory resumes.

[3Com] memory auto-establish disable[3Com]%3/13/2003 15:47:2-RM-5-S1-RTLOG:You have changed the model of connection

memory auto-establishenable

Syntaxmemory auto-establish enable

ViewSystem view

ParameterNone

Description

Using the memory auto-establish enable command, you can resume connections of all the routing protocols when the idle memory of the router recovers to a safety value.By default, when the idle memory of the router recovers to a safety value, connections of all the routing protocols will always recover (when the idle memory of the router reduces to a lower limit, the connection will be disconnected forcibly).Using the memory auto-establish disable command, you can disable the above function. Using the memory auto-establish enable command, you can enable the above function again. By default, the function is always enabled.For the related command, see memory auto-establish disable, memory { safety | limit }, and display memory limit.

Example Enable memory resume of the current router and recover connections of all the protocols automatically.

[3Com] memory auto-establish enable[3Com]%3/13/2003 15:48:2-RM-5-S1-RTLOG:You have changed the model of connection

memory limit Syntaxmemory limit limit-value

undo memory limit

ViewSystem view


Parameter■ limit-value: Lower limit of the router idle memory, in the unit of Mbytes. Its

value range depends on the idle memory of the current router. The default value is 20Mbytes.

DescriptionUsing the memory limit command, you can configure the lower limit of the router idle memory. When the idle memory of the router is less than this limit, all the routing protocol connections will be disconnected forcibly. Using the undo memory limit command, you can configure the safety value and the lower limit of the router idle memory to the default configuration.

The limit-value in the command must be less than the current idle memory safety value, and otherwise the configuration will fail.

This command can be used with memory safety command to change the safety value and lower limit of the router idle memory. The safety-value must be more than the limit-value in the command, and otherwise the configuration will fail.

For the related commands, see memory auto-establish disable, memory auto-establish enable, memory safety, and display memory limit.

Example Set the lower limit of the router idle memory to 25Mbytes.

[3Com] memory limit 25[3Com]%8/19/2002 16:35:41-RM-5-RTLOG:You have changed the memory limit/safety value Set the lower limit of the router idle memory to 25Mbytes and the safety value to 30Mbytes.[3Com] memory safety 35 limit 25[3Com]%8/19/1995 15:45:58-RM-5-RTLOG:Changed the system memory limit(20->25)/ safety(30->35) successfully

memory safety Syntaxmemory safety safety-value

undo memory safety

ViewSystem view

Parameter■ safety-value: Safety value of the router idle memory, in the unit of Mbytes. Its

value range depends on the idle memory of the active router. The default value is 30Mbytes.

DescriptionUsing the memory safety command, you can configure the safety value of the router idle memory. Using the undo memory safety command, you can configure the safety value and the lower limit of the router idle memory to the default configuration.


The safety-value in the command must be more than the current idle memory lower limit, and otherwise the configuration will fail.

This command can be used with memory limit command to change the safety value and lower limit of the router idle memory. The safety-value must be more than the limit-value in the command, and otherwise the configuration will fail.

For the related commands, see memory auto-establish disable, memory auto-establish enable, memory limit, and display memory limit.

Example Set the safety value of the router to 35Mbytes.

[3Com] memory safety 35[3Com]%8/19/2002 16:35:41-RM-5-RTLOG:You have changed the memory limit/safety value Set the lower limit of the router idle memory to 25Mbytes and the safety value to 30Mbytes.[3Com] memory safety 35 limit 25[3Com3Com]%8/19/1995 15:45:58-RM-5-RTLOG:Changed the system memory limit(20->25)/ safety(30->35) successfully

7 Multicast Common Configuration Commands

This chapter covers the following commands:

■ Multicast Common Configuration Commands

■ IGMP Configuration Commands

■ PIM Configuration Commands

■ MSDP Configuration Commands

■ MBGP Multicast Extension Configuration Commands

■ Multicast Static Route Configuration Commands

Multicast Common Configuration Commands

debugging multicastforwarding

Syntax

debugging multicast forwarding

undo debugging multicast forwarding

View

User view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the debugging multicast forwarding command, you can enable multicast packet forwarding debugging functions. Using the undo debugging multicast forwarding command, you can disable the debugging functions.

By default, the debugging function is disabled.

Example

Enable multicast packet forwarding debugging functions.

<3Com> debugging multicast forwarding

debugging multicastkernel-routing

Syntax

debugging multicast kernel-routing

undo debugging multicast kernel-routing

688 CHAPTER 7: MULTICAST COMMON CONFIGURATION COMMANDS

View

User view

ParameterNone

Description

Using the debugging multicast kernel-routing command, you can enable multicast kernel routing debugging functions. Using the undo debugging multicast kernel-routing command, you can disable the debugging functions.

By default, the multicast kernel routing debugging function is disabled.

Example

Enable multicast kernel routing debugging functions.

<3Com> debugging multicast kernel-routing

debugging multicaststatus-forwarding

Syntax

debugging multicast status-forwarding

undo debugging multicast status-forwarding

View

User view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the debugging multicast status-forwarding command, you can enable multicast forwarding status debugging functions. Using the undo debugging multicast status-forwarding command, you can disable the debugging functions.

By default, the multicast status debugging function is disabled.

Example

Enable multicast forwarding status debugging functions.

<3Com> debugging multicast status-forwarding

display multicastforwarding-table

Syntax

display multicast forwarding-table [ group-address [ mask { mask | mask-length } ] | source-address [ mask { mask | mask-length } ] | incoming-interface { interface-type interface-number | register } ] *

View

Any view

Multicast Common Configuration Commands 689

Parameter

group-address: Multicast group address, used to specify a multicast group, ranging from 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255.

mask: Mask.

mask-length: Length of mask. Because “1”s in 32-bit mask are required to be continuous, the mask in dotted decimal notation format can be replaced by mask-length (mask-length is the number of continuous “1”s in the mask).

source-address: Unicast IP address of the multicast source.

incoming-interface: Incoming interface of the multicast forwarding entry.

register: Register interface of PIM-SM.

Description

Using the display multicast forwarding-table command, you can view the information of multicast forwarding table.

source-address and group-address of multicast forwarding table are displayed in hexadecimal notation format and its incoming and outgoing port numbers are displayed by virtual port number. This information can be viewed via display pim interface command.

For the related command, see display multicast routing-table.

Example

Display the multicast forwarding table information.

<3Com> display multicast forwarding-table

display multicastrouting-table

Syntax

display multicast routing-table [ group-address [ mask { mask | mask-length } ] | source-address [ mask { mask | mask-length } ] | incoming-interface { interface-type interface-number | register } ]*

View

Any view

Parameter

group-address: Multicast group address, used to specify a multicast group and display the corresponding routing table information of the group. The value ranges from 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255.

source-address: Unicast IP address of the multicast source.

mask: Mask.

mask-length: Length of mask. Because “1” in 32-bit mask is required to be continuous, the mask in dotted decimal notation format can be replaced by mask-length (mask-length is the number of continuous “1”s in the mask).

incoming-interface: Incoming interface of the multicast route entry.

register: Register interface of PIM-SM.


Description

Using the display multicast routing-table command, you can view the information of IP multicast routing table.

This command displays the multicast routing table information, while the display multicast forwarding-table command displays the multicast forwarding table information.

The entry (S, G) in the multicast routing table, i.e., (multicast source, multicast group) acts as the independent entry in the table. Each entry has an unique Upstream, indicating the interface through which RPF goes to the multicast source. Each entry has also a Downstream List, indicating which interfaces need multicast forwarding. The related information about (S, G) includes:

■ proto - The multicast protocol number which possesses the (S, G) (in hexadecimal notation format).

■ Flags - All kinds of flags, such as RPT 0x1, WC 0x2, SPT 0x4, NEG CACHE 0x8 and JOIN SUPP 0x10. All the flags are marked by binary “bit”. In which, RPT indicates the (S, G) is in the shared tree status. WC is the abbreviation of wildcard. SPT indicates the shortest path tree. NEG CACHE indicates the cache record that the downstream interface list is null. JOIN SUPP indicates the prune suppression status.

Example

Display the corresponding route entry information of multicast group in the multicast routing table.

<3Com> display multicast routing-tableMulticast Routing TableTotal 1 entry

(10.10.1.2, 225.1.1.1) UpTime: 00:01:28, Timeout in 278 sec Upstream interface: Ethernet0/0/0(10.10.1.20) Downstream interface list: LoopBack0(20.20.20.30), Protocol 0x1: IGMP

display multicastrouting-table static

Syntax

display multicast routing-table static [ config ] [ source-address [ mask | mask-length ] ]

View

Any view

Parameter

config: When this parameter is chosen, all the routing information configured will be displayed. If this parameter is not chosen, only effective routing information is displayed.

source-address: IP address of the multicast source.

mask: Mask.


mask-length: Length of mask. Because “1”s in 32-bit mask are required to be continuous, the mask in dotted decimal notation format can be replaced by mask-length (mask-length is the number of continuous “1”s in the mask).

DescriptionUsing the display multicast routing-table static command, you can view the configuration information of static multicast route.

Example

Display the configuration information of static multicast route.

<3Com>display multicast routing-table static100.10.0.0/16 RPF interface = 10.10.1.20(Ethernet0/0/0), RPF neighbor = 10.10.1.20 Matched routing protocol = <none>, route-policy = <none>, preference = 1 Running config = ip rpf-route-static 100.10.0.0 16 Ethernet0/0/0 preference 1

display multicastrpf-info

Syntax

display multicast rpf-info source-address

View

Any view

Parameter


Description

Using the display multicast rpf-info command, you can view the Reverse Path Forwarding (RPF) routing information for specified multicast source.

Example

Display all the RPF routing information.

<3Com> display multicast rpf-info 192.193.194.192Multicast source's RPF route information about 192.193.194.192 RPF interface: InLoopBack0, RPF neighbor: 127.0.0.1 Referenced route/mask: 192.193.194.192/32 Referenced route type: unicast (DIRECT) RPF-route selecting rule: preference-preferred

mtracert Syntax

mtracert { source-address } [ last-hop-address ] [ group-address ]

View

Any view

Parameter

source-address: Address of the multicast source.


last-hop-address: Unicast address, which is the starting address of path tracing. This address must be an interface address of a hop router. By default, it is a physical interface address of the local router.

group-address: Address of multicast group. By default, the value is 0.0.0.0.

Description

Using the mtracert command, you can trace the network path from the multicast source to the destination receiver along Multicast Distribution Tree, according to either the multicast kernel routing table or RPF rule to the source. This command can help to locate the faults, such as information loss and configuration error.

The trace mode to the group address of 0.0.0.0 is called weak trace mode.

ExampleTrace the path reversely from the local hop router 18.110.0.1 to the multicast source 10.10.1.2 in weak trace mode.<3Com> mtracert 10.10.1.2 Type Ctrl+C to abort Mtrace from 10.10.1.2 to 18.110.0.1 via RPF Querying full reverse path... -1 18.110.0.1 Incoming Interface Address: 18.110.0.1 Previous-Hop Router Address: 18.110.0.2 Input packet count on incoming interface: 0 Output packet count on outgoing interface: 0 Total number of packets for this source-group pair: 0 Protocol: PIM Forwarding TTL: 0 Forwarding Code: No error -2 18.110.0.2 Incoming Interface Address: 11.110.0.2 Previous-Hop Router Address: 11.110.0.4 Input packet count on incoming interface: 0 Output packet count on outgoing interface: 0 Total number of packets for this source-group pair: 0 Protocol: PIM Forwarding TTL: 0 Forwarding Code: No error -3 11.110.0.4 Incoming Interface Address: 10.10.1.3 Previous-Hop Router Address: 0.0.0.0 Input packet count on incoming interface: 0 Output packet count on outgoing interface: 0 Total number of packets for this source-group pair: 0 Protocol: PIM Forwarding TTL: 0 Forwarding Code: No error

Trace reversely the path information of multicast group 225.1.1.1 from the multicast source 10.10.1.3 to the destination address 12.110.0.2.

<3Com>mtracert 10.10.1.3 12.110.0.2 225.1.1.1 Type Ctrl+C to abort Mtrace from 10.10.1.3 to 12.110.0.2 via group 225.1.1.1 Querying full reverse path...


-1 12.110.0.2 Incoming Interface Address: 11.110.0.2 Previous-Hop Router Address: 11.110.0.4 Input packet count on incoming interface: 316 Output packet count on outgoing interface: 135 Total number of packets for this source-group pair: 4 Protocol: PIM Forwarding TTL: 0 Forwarding Code: No error -2 11.110.0.4 Incoming Interface Address: 127.0.0.5 Previous-Hop Router Address: 0.0.0.0 Input packet count on incoming interface: 0 Output packet count on outgoing interface: 0 Total number of packets for this source-group pair: 4 Protocol: Unknown Forwarding TTL: 0 Forwarding Code: No error

multicast minimum-ttl Syntax

multicast minimum-ttl ttl-value

undo multicast minimum-ttl

View

Interface view

Parameter

ttl-value: The minimum TTL value, ranging from 0 to 255.

Description

Using the multicast minimum-ttl command, you can configure the minimum TTL value for multicast forwarding. Using the undo multicast minimum-ttl command, you can remove the minimum TTL value configured.

By default, no minimum TTL value for multicast forwarding is configured.

Example

Configure the minimum TTL value for multicast forwarding to 8.

<3Com-Ethernet1/0/1] multicast minimum-ttl 8

multicastpacket-boundary

Syntax

multicast packet-boundary acl-number

undo multicast packet-boundary

View

Interface view

Parameter

acl-number: Number of basic or advanced ACL, ranging from 1 to 199.


Description

Using the multicast packet-boundary command, you can configure a multicast forwarding boundary. Using the undo multicast packet-boundary command, you can remove the multicast forwarding boundary configured.

By default, no multicast forwarding boundary is configured.

You can set boundary conditions for multicast packets on an interface via basic or advanced Access Control List (ACL). Packets denied by the ACL will be discarded. The source address of a multicast packet can be filtered through the basic ACL. Both the source address and the destination address (source group address) of a multicast packet can be filtered through the advanced ACL.

Example

Set boundary conditions for multicast packets through the basic ACL 1.<3Com-Ethernet1/0/1] multicast packet-boundary 1

multicast route-limit Syntax

multicast route-limit limit

View

System view

Parameter

limit: Limit of multicast routing table capacity, ranging from 0 to MAX_MROUTE_LIMIT. In which, MAX_MROUTE_LIMIT differs with the different router types.

Description

Using the multicast route-limit command, you can limit the multicast routing table capacity. If the capacity exceeds the limit, the router will discard protocols and data packets of the newly-added (S, G).

By default, the limit of multicast routing table capacity is MAX_MROUTE_LIMIT.

If the number of route entries in the routing table has exceeded the configured number when configuring the command, the previous route entry in the routing table will not be deleted. The system will prompt “The number of current route entries is more than that configured.”

If this command is executed repeatedly, the new configuration will overwrite the previous one.

Example

Limit the multicast routing table capacity to 1000.

<3Com] multicast route-limit 1000

multicast routing-enable Syntax

multicast routing-enable


undo multicast routing-enable

View

System view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the multicast routing-enable command, you can enable IP multicast routing. Using the undo multicast routing-enable command, you can disable IP multicast routing.

By default, IP multicast routing is disabled.

the system will not forward any multicast packet when IP multicast routing is disabled.

For the related commands, see pim dm and pim sm.

Example

Enable IP multicast routing.

<3Com> system-view<3Com] multicast routing-enable

reset multicastforwarding-table

Syntax

reset multicast forwarding-table [ statistics ] { all | { group-address [ mask { group-mask | group-mask-length } ] | source-address [ mask { source-mask | source-mask-length } ] | { incoming-interface interface-type interface-number } | { slot slot-number } } * }

View

User view

Parameter

statistics: If this parameter is used, the statistics of MFC forwarding entries will be cleared. Otherwise, the MFC forwarding entries will be cleared.

all: All the MFC forwarding entries.

group-address: Address of the specified group.

group-mask: Address mask of the specified group.

group-mask-length: Address mask length of the specified group.

source-address: Address of the specified source.

source-mask: Address mask of the specified source.

source-mask-length: Address mask length of the specified source.


incoming-interface: Incoming interface of the specified forwarding entry.

interface-type interface-number: Interface type and interface number.

slot-number: Number of the slot where the interface board resides. This parameter is only present in the distributed router.

Description

Using the reset multicast forwarding-table command, you can clear MFC forwarding entries or the statistics of MFC forwarding entries.

The sequence of group-address and source-address can be reversed, but the input group-address and source-address must be valid. Otherwise, the system will prompt input error.

For the related commands, see reset pim routing-table, reset multicast routing-table, and display multicast forwarding-table.

Example

Clear the forwarding entry whose group address is 225.5.4.3 from the MFC forwarding table.

<3Com> reset multicast forwarding-table 225.5.4.3

Clear the statistics of the forwarding entry whose group address is 225.5.4.3 from MFC forwarding table.

<3Com> reset multicast forwarding-table statistics 225.5.4.3

reset multicastrouting-table

Syntax

reset multicast routing-table { all | { group-address [ mask { group-mask | group-mask-length } ] | source-address [ mask { source-mask | source-mask-length } ] | { incoming-interface interface-type interface-number } } * }

View

User view

Parameter

all: All the route entries in multicast kernel routing table.

group-address: Address of the specified group.

group-mask: Address mask of the specified group.

group-mask-length: Address mask length of the specified group.

source-address: Address of the specified source.

source-mask: Address mask of the specified source.

source-mask-length: Address mask length of multicast source.

incoming-interface: Incoming interface of the specified route entry.

IGMP Configuration Commands 697


Description

Using the reset multicast routing-table command, you can clear the route entry in the multicast kernel routing table and remove the corresponding forwarding entry in MFC.


For the related commands, see reset pim routing-table, reset multicast forwarding-table. and display multicast forwarding-table.

Example

Clear the route entry whose group address is 225.5.4.3 from the multicast kernel routing table.

<3Com> reset multicast routing-table 225.5.4.3

IGMP Configuration Commands

debugging igmp Syntax

debugging igmp { all | event | host | packet | timer }

undo debugging igmp { all | event | host | packet | timer }

View

User view

Parameter

all: All the debugging information of IGMP.

event: Debugging information of IGMP event.

host: Debugging information of IGMP host.

packet: Debugging information of IGMP packets.

timer: Debugging information of IGMP timers.

Description

Using the debugging igmp command, you can enable IGMP debugging functions. Using the undo debugging igmp command, you can disable the debugging functions.

By default, IGMP debugging functions are disabled.


Example

Enable all IGMP debugging functions

<3Com> debugging igmp all

display igmp group Syntax

display igmp group [ group-address | interface interface-type interface-number | local ]

View

Any view

Parameter

group-address: Multicast group address.

interface-type interface-number: Interface type and interface number of the router, used to specify the interface.

local: Information of the local interface which receives and sends multicast data.

Description

Using the display igmp group command, you can view the member information of the IGMP multicast group.

You can specify to view the information of a group or the member information of the multicast group on an interface. The information displayed includes the multicast groups joined through IGMP and those joined statically through command lines by the downstream host.

For the related command, see igmp host-join.

Example

Display the member information of the directly connected sub-network.

<3Com> display igmp groupLoopBack0 (20.20.20.20): Total 3 IGMP Groups reported: Group Address Last Reporter Uptime Expires 225.1.1.1 20.20.20.20 00:02:04 00:01:15 225.1.1.3 20.20.20.20 00:02:04 00:01:15 225.1.1.2 20.20.20.20 00:02:04 00:01:17

Table 1 Description of Output Information of Display IP IGRMP Group Command

display igmp interface Syntax

display igmp interface [ interface-type interface-number ]

Item DescriptionGroup address Multicast group address

Last Reporter Report the last host which becomes the multicast group memberUptime The time since the multicast group is found (hour, minute, second)Expires The predicted time when the record will be removed from the IGMP

group table (hour, minute, second)


View

Any view

Parameter

interface-type interface-number: Interface type and interface number of the router, used to specify the interface. If the parameters are not specified, information about all the interfaces running IGMP will be displayed.

Description

Using the display igmp interface command, you can view the IGMP configuration and running information on an interface.

The information displayed through display igmp interface will be different according to the configuration of IGMP proxy on an interface.

■ If the interface is neither a proxy nor a client, the configuration of IGMP Proxy will not be displayed.

■ If the interface is a proxy, all the clients will be displayed.

■ If the interface is a client, the proxy will be displayed.

Example

Display the IGMP configuration and running information on an interface.

<3Com> display igmp interfaceEthernet0/0/0 (10.10.1.20): IGMP is enabled Current IGMP version is 2 Value of query interval for IGMP(in seconds): 60 Value of other querier time out for IGMP(in seconds): 120 Value of maximum query response time for IGMP(in seconds): 10 Policy to accept IGMP reports: none Querier for IGMP: 10.10.1.10 Total 2 IGMP groups reported

LoopBack0 (20.20.20.30): IGMP is enabled Current IGMP version is 2 Value of query interval for IGMP(in seconds): 60 Value of other querier time out for IGMP(in seconds): 120 Value of maximum query response time for IGMP(in seconds): 10 Policy to accept IGMP reports: none Querier for IGMP: 20.20.20.30 (this router) No IGMP group reported

display igmp local Syntax

display igmp local

View

Any view

Parameter

local: Information of the local interface which receives and sends multicast data.


Description

Using the display igmp local command, you can view the IGMP configuration and running information of the local interface which receives and sends multicast data.

Example

Display the IGMP configuration and running information of the local interface which receives and sends multicast data.

<3Com> display igmp localMcast_Out_IF (127.0.0.6): IGMP is enabled on interface Current IGMP version is 2 No IGMP group reported

Mcast_In_IF (127.0.0.5): IGMP is disabled on interface

igmp enable Syntax

igmp enable

undo igmp enable

View

Interface view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the igmp enable command, you can enable IGMP on an interface. Using the undo igmp enable command, you can disable IGMP on an interface.

By default, IGMP is disabled on an interface.

Only after multicast is enabled, can this command take effect. After this command is configured, the configuration of other attributes of IGMP can be performed.

For the related command, see multicast routing-enable.

Example

Enable IGMP on the interface Ethernet0/0/0.

<3Com-Ethernet0/0/0] igmp enable

igmp group-limit Syntax

igmp group-limit limit

undo igmp group-limit

View

Interface view


Parameter

limit: Number of IGMP groups, ranging from 0 to MAX_IF_IGMP_GROUP_LIMIT. The value of MAX_IF_IGMP_GROUP_LIMIT on routers is MAX_MROUTE_LIMIT, which differs with the different router types.

Description

Using the igmp group-limit command, you can limit the number of IGMP groups joined on the interface. If the number exceeds the limit, the router will not process the joined IGMP packet any more. Using the undo igmp group-limit command, you can restore the default configuration.

By default, the maximum number of IGMP groups joined on the interface is 1024.

If the number of IGMP groups joined on the interface has exceeded the configuration value during configuration, the previously joined IGMP groups will not be deleted.


Example

Limit the maximum number of IGMP groups joined on the interface Ethernet1/0/0 to 100.

<3Com-Ethernet1/0/0] igmp group-limit 100

igmp group-policy Syntax

igmp group-policy acl-number [ 1 | 2 ]

undo igmp group-policy

View

Interface view

Parameter

acl-number: Number of basic IP ACL, defining the range of a multicast group. The value ranges from 1 to 99.

1: IGMP Version 1.

2: IGMP Version 2. If IGMP version is not specified, IGMP Version 2 is used by default.

Description

Using the igmp group-policy command, you can set the filter of multicast groups on an interface to control the accessing to the IP multicast groups. Using the undo igmp group-policy command, you can remove the filter configured.

By default, no filter is configured, that is, a host can join any multicast group.

If you do not want the hosts on the network that the interface is on to join some multicast groups and receive the packets from the multicast groups, you can use this command to limit the range of the multicast groups served by the interface.


For the related command, see igmp host-join.

Example

Permit the hosts on the interface Ethernet1/0/0 to join multicast group 225.1.1.1 only.

<3Com] acl number 5<3Com-acl-basci-5] rule permit source 225.1.1.1 0<3Com-acl-basci-5] quit<3Com] interface ethernet 1/0/0<3Com-Ethernet1/0/0] igmp group-policy 5

igmp host-join Syntax

igmp host-join group-address

undo igmp host-join group-address

View

Interface view

Parameter

group-address: Multicast address of the multicast group that an interface will join.

Description

Using the igmp host-join command, you can enable an interface of a router to join a multicast group. Using the undo igmp host-join command, you can disable the configuration.

By default, an interface does not join any multicast group.

On one router, up to 1024 interfaces can be configured with igmp host-join command at best.

For the related command, see igmp group-policy.

Example

Configure Ethernet1/0/0 to join the multicast group 255.0.0.1.

<3Com-Ethernet1/0/0] igmp host-join 225.0.0.1

igmplastmember-queryinterv

al

Syntax

igmp lastmember-queryinterval seconds

undo igmp lastmember-queryinterval

View

Interface view

Parameter

seconds: Interval at which IGMP querier sends the IGMP specified group query packet when it receives IGMP Leave packet from the host, in second. The value ranges from 1 to 5 seconds. By default, the value is 1 second.


Description

Using the igmp lastmember-queryinterval command, you can set the interval at which IGMP querier sends the IGMP specified group query packet when it receives IGMP Leave packet from the host. Using the undo igmp lastmember-queryinterval command, you can restore the default value.

On a shared network, that is, when there are multiple hosts and multicast routers on a network segment, the query router (querier for short) takes charge of maintaining IGMP group membership on an interface. When the host in IGMP Version 2 leaves a group, the host should send IGMP Leave packet. If IGMP querier receives the packet, it must send the IGMP specified group query packet for robust-value times according to the interval seconds configured via igmp lastmember-queryinterval command (if the command is not configured, seconds is 1) and the robust coefficient robust-value configured via igmp robust-count (if the command is not configured, robust-value is 2). If another host receives the IGMP specified group query packet from IGMP querier and is interested in the group, it will send IGMP Membership Report packet within the maximum response time regulated by the packet. If IGMP querier receives IGMP Membership Report packet from another host within the time robust-value x seconds, it will go on maintaining the group membership. If not, it will regard the group is timeout and stop maintaining the group membership.

The command is only valid when IGMP query router is running in IGMP Version 2. If the host runs in IGMP Version 1, it may not send IGMP Leave packet when it leaves a group. At that time, the command is invalid to the host.

For the related commands, see igmp robust-count and display igmp interface.

Example

Configure the query interval of the querier for the last group member on the interface Ethernet1/0/0 to 3 seconds.

<3Com-Ethernet1/0/0] igmp lastmember-queryinterval 3

igmp max-response-time Syntax

igmp max-response-time seconds

undo igmp max-response-time

View

Interface view

Parameter

seconds: The maximum response time in the IGMP query packet in second, ranging from 1 to 25. By default, the value is 10 seconds.

Description

Using the igmp max-response-time command, you can configure the maximum response time contained in the IGMP query packet. Using the undo igmp max-response-time command, you can restore the default value.


The maximum query response time determines the period for a router to quickly detect that there are no more directly connected group members in a LAN.

For the related command, see display igmp group.

Example

Configure the maximum response time to 8 seconds.

<3Com-Ethernet1/0/0] igmp max-response-time 8

igmp proxy Syntax

igmp proxy interface-type interface-number

undo igmp proxy

View

Interface view

Parameter

interface-type: Proxy interface type.

interface-number: Proxy interface number.

Description

Using the igmp proxy command, you can specify an interface of a leaf network router as the IGMP proxy of another interface. Using the undo igmp proxy command, you can remove the configuration.

By default, IGMP proxy function is disabled.

An interface cannot act as the IGMP proxy of two or more other interfaces at the same time.

If an interface is configured with IGMP proxy for multiple times, the last one overrides all the previous configurations.

For the related command, see pim neighbor-policy.

Example

Configure the IGMP proxy of router Ethernet0/0/0 to Ethernet1/0/0.

<3Com-Ethernet0/0/0] igmp proxy ethernet 1/0/0

igmp robust-count Syntax

igmp robust-count robust-value

undo igmp robust-count

View

Interface view


Parameter

robust-value: IGMP robust coefficient, indicating the times IGMP querier sends the IGMP specified group query packet when it receives IGMP Leave packet from the host. The value ranges from 2 to 5. By default, the value is 2.

Description

Using the igmp robust-count command, you can set the times IGMP querier sends the IGMP specified group query packet when it receives IGMP Leave packet from the host. Using the undo igmp robust-count command, you can restore the default value.

On a shared network, with multiple hosts and multicast routers on a network segment, the query router (querier for short) takes charge of maintaining IGMP group membership on an interface. When the host in IGMP Version 2 leaves a group, the host should send IGMP Leave packet. If IGMP querier receives the packet, it must send the IGMP specified group query packet for robust-value times according to the interval seconds configured via igmp lastmember-queryinterval command (if the command is not configured, seconds is 1) and the robust coefficient robust-value configured via igmp robust-count (if the command is not configured, robust-value is 2).

If another host receives the IGMP specified group query packet from IGMP querier and is interested in the group, it will send IGMP Membership Report packet within the maximum response time regulated by the packet. If IGMP querier receives IGMP Membership Report packet from another host within the time robust-value x seconds, it will go on maintaining the group membership. If not, it will regard the group is overtime and stop maintaining the group membership.

The command is only valid when IGMP query router is running in IGMP Version 2. If the host runs in IGMP Version 1, it may not send IGMP Leave packet when it leaves a group. At that time, the command is invalid to the host.

For the related commands, see igmp lastmember-queryinterval and display igmp interface.

Example

Configure the robust-value of querier on the interface Ethernet1/0/0 to 3.

<3Com-Ethernet1/0/0] igmp robust-count 3

igmp timerother-querier-present

Syntax

igmp timer other-querier-present seconds

undo igmp timer other-querier-present

View

Interface view

Parameter

seconds: IGMP querier present time, in second. The value ranges from 60 to 300 seconds. By default, the value is twice of IGMP query messages interval. It is 120 seconds in general.


Description

Using the igmp timer other-querier-present command, you can configure the overtime value of presence of IGMP querier. Using the undo igmp timer other-querier-present command, you can restore the default value.

On a shared network, i.e., there are multiple multicast routers on the same network segment, the query router (querier for short) takes charge of sending query messages periodically on the interface. If other non-queriers receive no query messages within the valid period, the router will consider the previous query to be invalid and the router itself becomes a querier.

In IGMP Version 1, the selection of a querier is determined by the multicast routing protocol. In IGMP Version 2, the router with the lowest IP address on the shared network segment acts as the querier.

For the related commands, see igmp timer query and display igmp interface.

CAUTION: If the querier present time configured is less than the twice of query interval, it may lead to the repeated changes of queriers in the network.

Example

Configure the querier present time on the interface Ethernet1/0/0 to 200 seconds.

<3Com-Ethernet1/0/0] igmp timer other-querier-present 200

igmp timer query Syntax

igmp timer query seconds

undo igmp timer query

View

Interface view

Parameter

seconds: Interval at which the router sends the IGMP query messages, in second. It ranges from 1 to 18000. By default, the value is 60 seconds.

Description

Using the igmp timer query command, you can configure the interval at which a router interface sends IGMP query messages. Using the undo igmp timer query command, you can restore the default value.

A multicast router sends IGMP query messages at intervals to find out whether there are multicast group members on the network. The query interval can be modified according to the practical conditions of the network.

For the related command, see igmp timer other-querier-present.

Example

Configure the interval at which multicast router Ethernet1/0/0 sends IGMP query packet to 125 seconds.

<3Com-Ethernet1/0/0] igmp timer query 125


igmp version Syntax

igmp version { 1 | 2 }

undo igmp version

View

Interface view

Parameter

1: IGMP Version 1.

2: IGMP Version 2. By default, IGMP Version 2 is used.

Description

Using the igmp version command, you can specify the version of IGMP that a router uses. Using the undo igmp version command, you can restore the default value.

All systems running in the same sub-network must support the same version of IGMP. When a router finds the system of Version 1, it cannot switch to Version 1 by itself.

Example

Specify Ethernet1/0/0 to use IGMP Version 1.

<3Com-Ethernet1/0/0] igmp version 1

reset igmp group Syntax

reset igmp group { all | interface interface-type interface-number { all | group-address [ group-mask ] } }

View

User view

Parameter

all: All IGMP groups.

interface interface-type interface-number: Interface type and interface number.

group-address: IGMP group address.

group-mask: Network segment mask of group address.

Description

Using the reset igmp group command, you can delete the IGMP group joined on the interface. The deletion of the group does not affect its joining again.

Example

Delete all the IGMP groups on all interfaces.

<3Com> reset igmp group all

Delete all the IGMP groups on the interface Ethernet0/0/0.


<3Com> reset igmp group interface ethernet0/0/0 all

Delete the group 225.0.0.1 on the interface Ethernet0/0/0.

<3Com> reset igmp group interface ethernet0/0/0 225.0.0.1

Delete the IGMP groups ranging between the network segment 225.1.1.0 and 225.1.1.255 on the interface Ethernet0/0/0.

<3Com> reset igmp group interface ethernet0/0/0 225.1.1.0 255.255.255.0

PIM Configuration Commands

bsr-policy Syntax

bsr-policy acl-number

undo bsr-policy

View

PIM view

Parameter

acl-number: ACL number used by BSR filter policy , ranging from 1 to 99.

Description

Using the bsr-policy command, you can restrict the range for valid BSR so as to prevent BSR spoofing. Using the undo bsr-policy command, you can restore the normal state without any range restriction and regard all the messages received are valid.

In PIM SM network which uses BSR mechanism, any router can set itself as C-BSR and will take charge of the authority of advertising BP information in the network if it succeeds in competition. To prevent the valid BSR in the network from being maliciously replaced, the following two measures should be taken:

■ Change RP mapping relationship to prevent the host from spoofing the router by counterfeiting valid BSR packet. BSR packet is multicast packet with TTL of 1, so this kind of attack usually takes place on the edge router. BSR is in the internal network and the host is in the external network, therefore, performing neighbor check and RPF check to BSR packet can prevent this kind of attack.

■ If a router in the network is controlled by an attacker or an illegal router accesses the network, the attacker can set the router to C-BSR and make it succeed in competition and control the authority of advertising RP information in the network. The router, after being configured as C-BSR, will automatically advertise BSR information to the whole network. BSR packet is the multicast packet which is forwarded hop by hop with TTL of 1. The whole network will not be affected if the neighbor router does not receive the BSR information. The solution is to configure bsr-policy on each router in the whole network to restrict the range for legal BSR. For example, if only 1.1.1.1/32 and 1.1.1.2/32

PIM Configuration Commands 709

are permitted as BSR, the router will not receive and forward other BSR information and legal BSR will not compete with it.

The above two points can partially protect the security of BSR in the network. However, if a legal BSR router is controlled by an attacker, it will also lead to the above problem.

The source parameter in the related rule command is translated as BSR address in bsr-policy command.

For the related commands, see acl and rule.

Example

Configure BSR filter policy on a router. Only permit 1.1.1.1/32 to act as BSR and regard others are invalid.

<3Com-pim] bsr-policy 1<3Com-pim] quit<3Com] acl number 1<3Com-acl-basic-1] rule 0 permit source 1.1.1.1 0

c-bsr Syntax

c-bsr interface-type interface-number hash-mask-len [ priority ]

undo c-bsr

View

PIM view

Parameter

interface-type interface-number: Interface type and interface number of a router. A candidate BSR is configured on this interface. PIM-SM must be enabled on this interface, the configuration can take effect.

hash-mask-len: Mask length. The mask performs “And” operation with multicast address at first and then performs the operation of searching for RP. The value ranges from 0 to 32.

priority: Priority of the candidate BSR. The larger the value is, the higher the priority of candidate BSR is. The value ranges from 0 to 255. By default, the priority is 0.

Description

Using the c-bsr command, you can configure a candidate BSR. Using the undo c-bsr command, you can remove the candidate BSR configuration.

By default, no candidate BSR is set.

Since BSR and other devices in PIM domain need to exchange a great deal of information during candidate BSR configuration, a relatively large bandwidth must be guaranteed.


For the related command, see pim sm.

Example

Configure the IP address of the router on Ethernet1/0/0 as a candidate BSR with the priority 2.

<3Com> system-view<3Com] multicast routing-enable<3Com] pim<3Com-pim] c-bsr ethernet1/0/0 30 2

c-rp Syntax

c-rp interface-type interface-number [ group-policy acl-number ] [ priority priority-value ]

undo c-rp interface-type interface-number

View

PIM view

Parameter

interface-type interface-number: Specified interface with the IP address advertised as a candidate RP address.

acl-number: Number of basic ACL that defines a group range, which is the service range of the advertised RP. The value ranges from 1 to 99.

priority-value: Priority of a candidate RP. The larger the value is, the lower the priority is. The value ranges from 0 to 255. By default, the value is 0.

Description

Using the c-rp command, you can configure the router to advertise itself as a candidate RP to BSR. Using the undo c-rp command, you can remove the configuration.

By default, no candidate RP is configured.

When configuring a candidate RP, a relatively large bandwidth should be reserved for the router and other devices in PIM domain.

For the related command, see c-bsr.

Example

Configure the interface Ethernet1/0/0 as the candidate RP for all groups.

<3Com> system-view<3Com] multicast routing-enable<3Com] pim<3Com-pim] c-rp ethernet 1/0/0

crp-policy Syntax

crp-policy acl-number


undo crp-policy

View

PIM view

Parameter

acl-number: ACL number used by C-RP filter policy, ranging from 100 to 199.

Description

Using the crp-policy command, you can restrict the range for valid C-RP and the group range served by each C-RP so as to prevent C-RP cheating. Using the undo crp-policy command, you can restore the normal state without any range restriction and regard all the messages received are valid.

In PIM SM network which uses BSR mechanism, any router can set itself as a C-RP serving the specific group range. If it is elected in RP election, it will become an RP serving in the group range.

In BSR mechanism C-RP router unicasts C-RP information to BSR router which is responsible for advertising all C-RP information to the whole network by using BRP information.

To prevent C-RP cheating, crp-policy is needed to be configured on BSR router to restrict the range for valid C-RP and the group address range it serves. Each C-BSR may become a BSR possibly, so the same filter policy should be configured on each C-BSR.

This command uses the ACL numbered from 100 to 199. The parameter source in the related rule command indicates C-RP address and destination indicates the group range the C-RP serves. Upon matching the received C-RP message, only when the C-RP address in the packet matches source address and the group address range in the packet is the subset of that in ACL, can this configuration be regarded successful.

For the related commands, see acl and rule.

Example

Configure C-RP policy on C-BSR router. Only permit 1.1.1.1/32 to act as C-RP which only serves the group range 225.1.0.0/16.

<3Com-pim] crp-policy 100<3Com-pim] quit<3Com] acl number 100<3Com-acl-adv-100] rule 0 permit ip source 1.1.1.1 0 destination 225.1.0.0 0.0.255.255

debugging pim common Syntax

debugging pim common { all | event | packet | timer }

undo debugging pim common { all | event | packet | timer }

View

User view


Parameter

all: All the common debugging information of PIM.

event: Debugging information of common PIM event.

packet: Debugging information of PIM Hello message.

timer: Debugging information of common PIM timer.

Description

Using the debugging pim common command, you can enable common PIM debugging functions. Using the undo debugging pim common command, you can disable the debugging functions.

By default, common PIM debugging functions are disabled.

Example

Enable all common PIM debugging functions.

<3Com> debugging pim common all

debugging pim dm Syntax

debugging pim dm { alert | all | mrt | timer | warning | { recv | send } { all | assert | graft | graft-ack | join | prune } }

undo debugging pim dm { alert | all | mrt | timer | warning | { recv | send } { all | assert | graft | graft-ack | join | prune } }

View

User view

Parameter

all: All the debugging information of PIM-DM.

alert: Debugging information of PIM-DM interoperation event.

mrt: Debugging information of PIM-DM multicast routing table.

timer: Debugging information of PIM-DM timer.

warning: Debugging information of PIM-DM warning message.

recv: Debugging information of PIM-DM receiving packets.

send: Debugging information of PIM-DM sending packets.

all: All packet types.

assert: Packet type, assert packet.

graft: Packet type, graft packet.

graft-ack: Packet type, graft acknowledgment packet.


join: Packet type, join packet.

prune: Packet type, prune packet.

Description

Using the debugging pim dm command, you can enable PIM-DM debugging functions. Using the undo debugging pim dm command, you can disable the debugging functions.

By default, PIM-DM debugging functions are disabled.

Example

Enable all PIM-DM debugging functions

<3Com> debugging pim dm all

debugging pim sm Syntax

debugging pim sm { all | mbr | mrt | timer | msdp | verbose | warning | { recv | send } { assert | bootstrap | crpadv | jp | reg | regstop } }

undo debugging pim sm { all | mbr | mrt | msdp | timer | verbose | warning | { recv | send } { assert | bootstrap | crpadv | jp | reg | regstop } }

View

User view

Parameter

mbr: Debugging information of PIM-SM multicast boundary router event.

mrt: Debugging information of PIM-SM multicast routing table.

msdp: Functions between PIM-SM and MSDP.

timer: Debugging information of PIM-SM timer.

warning: Debugging information of PIM-SM warning message.

recv: Debugging information of PIM-SM receiving packets.

send: Debugging information of PIM-SM sending packets.

assert | bootstrap | crpadv | jp | reg | regstop: Packet type.

Description

Using the debugging pim sm command, you can enable PIM-SM debugging functions. Using the undo debugging pim sm command, you can disable the debugging functions.

By default, PIM-SM debugging functions are disabled.

The command debugging pim sm register-proxy is only suitable for the distributed router. This command can enable the debugging when an interface board acts as a proxy of main control board to send register packets.


Example

Enable all PIM-SM debugging functions

<3Com> debugging pim sm all

display pim bsr-info Syntax

display pim bsr-info

View

Any view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the display pim bsr-info command, you can view Bootstrap Router (BSR) information.

For the related commands, see c-bsr and c-rp.

Example

Execute this command on a router running PIM-SM and display the current BSR information.

<3Com> display pim bsr-info Current BSR Address: 20.20.20.30 Priority: 0 Mask Length: 30 Expires: 00:01:55 Local host is BSR

display pim interface Syntax

display pim interface [ interface-type interface-number ]

View

Any view

Parameter


Description

Using the display pim interface command, you can view the PIM interface information.

Example

Display the PIM information about the interface Ethernet1/0/0.

<3Com> display pim interface ethernet 1/0/0PIM information of interface Ethernet1/0/0: IP address of the interface is 10.10.1.20 PIM is enabled on interface PIM version is 2


PIM mode is Sparse PIM query interval is 30 seconds Total 1 PIM neighbor on interface PIM DR(designated router) is 10.10.1.20

Table 2 Description of output information of display pim interface command

display pim neighbor Syntax

display pim neighbor [ interface interface-type interface-number ]

View

Any view

Parameter


Description

Using the display pim neighbor command, you can view the PIM neighbor information.

Example

Display the PIM neighbor information of the interface Ethernet1/0/0 on the router.

<3Com> display pim neighbor ethernet 1/0/0Neighbor's Address Interface Name Uptime Expires10.10.1.10 Ethernet1/0/0 00:41:59 00:01:16

display pimrouting-table

Syntax

display pim routing-table [ *g [ group-address [ mask { mask-length | mask } ] ] [ incoming-interface { interface-name | null } ] [ dense-mode | sparse-mode ]

display pim routing-table [ **rp [ rp-address [ mask { mask-length | mask } ] ] [ incoming-interface { interface-name | null } ] [ dense-mode | sparse-mode]

display pim routing-table [ source-address [ mask { mask-length | mask } ] [ group-address [ mask { mask-length | mask } ] ] [ incoming-interface { interface-name | null } ] [ dense-mode | sparse-mode ]

View

Any view

Parameter

**rp: (*, *, RP) route entry.

*g: (*, G) route entry.

group-address: Address of the multicast group.

Item DescriptionPIM is enabled on interface PIM SM is enabled on the interface Ethernet1/0/0.PIM query interval is 30 seconds The sending interval of Hello message is 30

seconds.PIM DR (designated router) is 10.10.1.20 IP address of DR is 10.10.1.20.



incoming-address: Route entry of the specified incoming interface.

Description

Using the display pim routing-table command, you can view the contents of the PIM multicast routing table.

For the related command, see display multicast routing-table.

Example

Display the contents of the PIM multicast routing table on the router.

<3Com> display pim routing-tablePIM-SM Routing TableTotal 0 (S,G) entry, 2 (*,G) entries, 0 (*,*,RP) entry

(*, 224.0.1.40), RP 20.20.20.30 Protocol 0x20: PIMSM, Flag 0x2003: RPT WC NULL_IIF UpTime: 00:17:25, never timeout Upstream interface: Null, RPF neighbor: 0.0.0.0 Downstream interface list: Ethernet0/0/0, Protocol 0x1: IGMP, never timeout

(*, 225.1.1.1), RP 20.20.20.30 Protocol 0x20: PIMSM, Flag 0x2003: RPT WC NULL_IIF UpTime: 00:08:45, never timeout Upstream interface: Null, RPF neighbor: 0.0.0.0 Downstream interface list: Ethernet0/0/0, Protocol 0x1: IGMP, never timeout

Matched 0 (S,G) entry, 2 (*,G) entries, 0 (*,*,RP) entry

display pim rp-info Syntax

display pim rp-info [ group-address ]

View

Any view

Parameter

group-address: Group address.

Description

Using the display pim rp-info command, you can view the corresponding RP information of multicast group, BSR and static RP information.

If no group address is specified in this command, the corresponding RP information of all groups will be displayed.

Example

Display the currently corresponding RP of 224.0.0.0.

<3Com> display pim rp-info 224.0.0.0PIM-SM RP-SET information:


BSR is: 20.20.20.20

Group/MaskLen: 224.0.0.0/4 RP 20.20.20.20 Version: 2 Priority: 0 Uptime: 00:00:05 Expires: 00:02:25

pim Syntax

pim

undo pim

View

System view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the pim command, you can enter PIM view. Using the undo pim command, you can clear the configuration in PIM view.

The global parameter which is related with the PIM must be configured in PIM view.

Example<3Com> system-view<3Com] multicast routing-enable<3Com] pim<3Com-pim]

pim bsr-boundary Syntax

pim bsr-boundary

undo pim bsr-boundary

View

Interface view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the pim bsr-boundary command, you can configure an interface to become the PIM domain boundary. Using the undo pim bsr-boundary command, you can remove the boundary.

By default, no domain boundary is set.


After this command is configured on an interface, Bootstrap messages cannot pass the boundary, whereas other PIM packets can. This command can effectively divide the network to domains which use different BSRs.

For the related command, see c-bsr.

Example

Configure a domain boundary on the interface Pos1/0/0.

<3Com-Pos1/0/0] pim bsr-boundary

pim dm Syntaxpim dm

undo pim dm

View

Interface view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the pim dm command, you can enable PIM-DM. Using the undo pim dm command, you can disable PIM-DM.

By default, PIM-DM is disabled.

Once PIM-DM is enabled on an interface, PIM-SM cannot be enabled on the same interface and vice versa.

Example

Enable PIM-DM on the interface Ethernet1/0/0.

<3Com] multicast routing-enable<3Com] interface ethernet1/0/0<3Com-Ethernet1/0/0] pim dm

pim neighbor-limit Syntax

pim neighbor-limit limit

undo pim neighbor-limit

View

Interface view

Parameter

limit: Upper limit of PIM neighbor number on an interface, ranging from 0 to 128.

Description

Using the pim neighbor-limit command, you can limit PIM neighbor number on an router interface. If the number exceeds the limit configured, no new neighbor can


be added to the router. Using the undo pim neighbor-limit command, you can restore the default configuration.

By default, the upper limit of PIM neighbor number on an interface is 128.

If the PIM neighbor number on an interface has exceeded the value configured during configuration, the previous PIM neighbor will not be deleted.

Example

Limit the upper limit of PIM neighbor number on the interface Ethernet1/0/0/ to 50.

<3Com-Ethernet1/0/0] pim neighbor-limit 50

pim neighbor-policy Syntax

pim neighbor-policy acl-number

undo pim neighbor-policy

View

Interface view

Parameter

acl-number: Number of basic ACL. The value ranges from 1 to 99.

Description

Using the pim neighbor-policy command, you can configure a router to filter the PIM neighbor of the current interface. Using the undo pim neighbor-policy command, you can cancel the filtering.

Only the router which is permitted by ACL can act as PIM neighbor of the current interface, while other routers cannot.

If this command is configured repeatedly, the new configuration will overwrite the previous one.

Example

Configure 10.10.1.2 rather than 10.10.1.1 as the PIM neighbor of Ethernet1/0/0.

<3Com-Ethernet1/0/0] pim neighbor-policy 1<3Com-Ethernet1/0/0] quit<3Com] acl number 1<3Com-acl-basic-1] rule permit source 10.10.1.2 0<3Com-acl-basic-1] rule deny source 10.10.1.1 0

pim sm Syntax

pim sm

undo pim sm

View

Interface view


Parameter

None

Description

Using the pim sm command, you can enable PIM-SM protocol on an interface. Using the undo pim sm command, you can disable PIM-SM protocol.

By default, PIM-SM is disabled.

Once PIM-SM is enabled on an interface, PIM-DM cannot be enabled on the same interface and vice versa.

Example

Enable PIM-SM on the interface Ethernet1/0/0.

<3Com> system-view<3Com] multicast routing-enable<3Com] interface ethernet 1/0/0<3Com-Ethernet1/0/0] pim sm

pim timer hello Syntax

pim timer hello seconds

undo pim timer hello

View

Interface view

Parameter

seconds: Interval of sending Hello message in second, ranging from 1 to 18000. By default, the value is 30 seconds.

Description

Using the pim timer hello command, you can configure the interval of sending PIM router Hello message. Using the undo pim timer hello command, you can restore the default value.

Example

Configure the interval of sending Hello message on the interface Ethernet1/0/0 on the PIM router to 40 seconds.

<3Com-Ethernet1/0/0] pim sm<3Com-Ethernet1/0/0] pim timer hello 40

register-policy Syntax

register-policy acl-number

undo register-policy

View

PIM view


Parameter

acl-number: Number of advanced IP ACL, defining the rule of filtering the source and group addresses. The value ranges from 100 to 199.

Description

Using the register-policy command, you can configure a RP to filter the register packet sent by the DR in the PIM-SM network and to accept the specific packet only. Using the undo register-policy command, you can remove the configured packet filtering.

Example

If the local device is the RP in the network, using the following command can only accept the multicast data register packets sent by the source on the network segment 10.10.0.0/16 to the multicast address in the range of 225.1.0.0/16.

<3Com> system-view<3Com] acl number 110<3Com-acl-adv-110] rule permit ip source 10.10.0.0 255.255.0.0 destination 225.1.0.0 255.255.0.0<3Com-acl-adv-110] quit<3Com] multicast routing-enable<3Com] pim<3Com-pim] register-policy 110

reset pim neighbor Syntax

reset pim neighbor { all | { neighbor-address | interface interface-type interface-number } * }

View

User view

Parameter

all: All PIM neighbors.

neighbor-address: Specifies neighbor address.

interface: Specifies the interface.


Description

Using the reset pim neighbor command, you can clear PIM neighbor.

For the related command, see display pim neighbor.

Example

Clear the PIM neighbor of the interface addressed with 25.5.4.3.

<3Com> reset pim neighbor 25.5.4.3

reset pim routing-table Syntax

reset pim routing-table all


reset pim routing-table { group-address [ mask group-mask | group-mask-length ] [ source-address [ mask source-mask | source-mask-length ] [ incoming-interface { interface-type interface-number | null } ] } *

View

User view

Parameter

all: All PIM route entries.


mask group-mask: Address mask of multicast group.

group-mask-length: Address mask length of multicast group.

source-address: Multicast source address.

mask source-mask: Address mask of multicast source.

source-mask-length: Address mask length of multicast source.

null: Route entry with null incoming interface.

incoming-interface: Incoming interface of the route entry in PIM routing table.


Description

Using the reset pim routing-table command, you can clear PIM route entry.


If group-address is configured to 244.0.0.0/24 and source-address to RP address (in which, group address may have mask but the calculation result of the two must be 224.0.0.0, while source address has no mask), it indicates only (*, *, RP) entry is deleted.

If group-address is configured to a group address and source-address to 0 (in which, group address may have mask while source address has no mask), it indicates only (*, G) entry is deleted.

After this command is executed, not only the multicast route entry is deleted from PIM, but also the corresponding route entry or forwarding entry in the multicast kernel routing table and MFC is deleted.

For the related commands, see reset multicast routing-table, reset multicast forwarding-table, and display pim routing-table.

Example

Clear the route entry with group address of 225.5.4.3 in PIM routing table.


<3Com> reset pim routing-table 225.5.4.3

source-policy Syntax

source-policy acl-number

undo source-policy

View

PIM view

Parameter

acl-number: Number of basic or advanced ACL. The value ranges from 1 to 199.

Description

Using the source-policy command, you can configure a router to filter the multicast data packet received according to source (group) address. Using the undo source-policy command, you can remove the configuration.

If source address filtering and basic ACL are configured, all the multicast data packets received will be matched with source addresses. The packet which does not pass the matching will be discarded.

If source address filtering and advanced ACL are configured, all the multicast data packets received will be matched with source and group addresses. The packet which does not pass the matching will be discarded.

This command filters not only multicast data, but also the multicast data encapsulated in register packet.


Example

Configure to accept the multicast data packets with source address of 10.10.1.2 and discard the multicast data packets with source address of 10.10.1.1.

<3Com] multicast routing-enable<3Com] pim<3Com-pim] source-policy 1<3Com-pim] quit<3Com] acl number 1<3Com-acl-basic-1] rule permit source 10.10.1.2 0<3Com-acl-basic-1] rule deny source 10.10.1.1 0

spt-switch-threshold Syntax

spt-switch-threshold { traffic-rate | infinity } [ group-policy acl-number ]

undo spt-switch-threshold { traffic-rate | infinity } [ group-policy acl-number ]

View

PIM view


Parameter

traffic-rate: Switch rate threshold from the RPT to the SPT in Kbps, ranging from 0 to 65535. By default, the switch threshold value is 0, i.e., switching starts when the RPT receives the first data packet.

infinity: Indicates never to switch to SPT.

acl-number: Number of basic IP ACL, defining the range of a multicast group. The value ranges from 1 to 99.

Description

Using the spt-switch-threshold command, you can set the packet rate threshold when the PIM leaf router switches from the RPT to the SPT. Using the undo spt-switch-threshold command, you can restore the default setting.

Example

Set the threshold value to 4Kbps. If the transmission rate from the source to the multicast group is higher than it, the router will switch to the SPT toward the source.

<3Com> system-view<3Com] multicast routing-enable<3Com] pim<3Com-pim] spt-switch-threshold 4

static-rp Syntax

static-rp rp-address [ acl-number ]

undo static-rp

View

PIM view

Parameter

rp-address: Static RP address. This address must be valid unicast IP address and cannot be configured as the address in 127 network segment.

acl-number: Number of basic ACL, used in controlling the multicast group range that static RP serves. The value ranges from 1 to 99.

Description

Using the static-rp command, you can configure static RP. Using the undo static-rp command, you can remove the configuration.

RP is the kernel router in multicast routing. If the dynamic RP elected through BSR mechanism is invalid for some reason, static RP can be configured as backup of the dynamic RP to improve robusticity of the network and operation management capability of the multicast network.

All routers in the PIM domain should be configured with this command and be specified with the same RP address. If the configured static RP address is the

MSDP Configuration Commands 725

address of an UP interface on the local device, the local device will act as static RP. PIM is not necessarily enabled on the interface which acts as static RP.

If this command is configured but ACL is not specified, the static RP configured will serve all the multicast groups. If ACL is specified, the static RP configured will only serve the multicast group permitted by the ACL.

In the case that the RP elected through BSR mechanism is valid, static RP does not take effect.


For the related command, see display pim rp-info.

Example

Configure 10.110.0.6 as a static RP.

<3Com] multicast routing-enable<3Com] pim<3Com-pim] static-rp 10.110.0.6

MSDP Configuration Commands

cache-sa-enable Syntax

cache-sa-enable

undo cache-sa-enable

View

MSDP view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the cache-sa-enable command, you can enable the router to cache SA state. Using the undo cache-sa-enable command, you can remove the cache from the router.

By default, the router caches the SA state, i.e., (S, G) entry after it receives SA messages.

If the router is in cache state, it will not send SA request message to the specified MSDP peer when it receives a new group join message.

Example

Configure the router to cache all the SA states.

<3Com> system-view<3Com] msdp<3Com-msdp] cache-sa-enable


debugging msdp Syntax

debugging msdp { all | connect | event | packet | source-active }

undo debugging msdp { all | connect | event | packet | source-active }

View

User view

Parameter

all: All the debugging information of MSDP.

connect: Debugging information of MSDP peer connection reset.

event: Debugging information of MSDP event.

packet: Debugging information of MSDP packet.

source-active: Debugging information of active MSDP source.

Description

Using the debugging msdp command, you can enable MSDP debugging functions. Using the undo debugging msdp command, you can disable MSDP debugging functions.

By default, MSDP debugging functions are disabled.

Example

Enable all common MSDP debugging functions.

<3Com> debugging msdp all

display msdp brief Syntax

display msdp brief

View

Any view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the display msdp brief command, you can view the state of MSDP peer.

Example

Display the state of MSDP peer.

<3Com> display msdp briefMSDP Peer Brief Information Peer's Address State Up/Down time AS SA Count Reset Count 20.20.20.20 Up 00:00:13 100 0 0


display msdp peer-status Syntax

display msdp peer-status [ peer-address ]

View

Any view

Parameter

peer-address: Address of MSDP peer.

Description

Using the display msdp peer-status command, you can view the detailed information of MSDP peer.

For the related command, see peer.

Example

Display the detailed information of the MSDP peer 10.110.11.11.

<3Com> display msdp peer-status 10.110.11.11MSDP Peer 20.20.20.20, AS 100 Description: Information about connection status: State: Up Up/down time: 14:41:08 Resets: 0 Connection interface: LoopBack0 (20.20.20.30) Number of sent/received messages: 867/947 Number of discarded output messages: 0 Elapsed time since last connection or counters clear: 14:42:40 Information about (Source, Group)-based SA filtering policy: Import policy: none Export policy: none Information about SA-Requests: Policy to accept SA-Request messages: none Sending SA-Requests status: disable Minimum TTL to forward SA with encapsulated data: 0 SAs learned from this peer: 0, SA-cache maximum for the peer: none Input queue size: 0, Output queue size: 0 Counters for MSDP message: Count of RPF check failure: 0 Incoming/outgoing SA messages: 0/0 Incoming/outgoing SA requests: 0/0 Incoming/outgoing SA responses: 0/0 Incoming/outgoing data packets: 0/0

display msdp sa-cache Syntax

display msdp sa-cache [ group-address ] [ source-address ] [ autonomous-system-number ]

View

Any view

Parameter

group-address: Group address of (S, G) entry.


source-address: Source address of (S, G) entry. With no source address specified, all the source information of the specified group will be displayed.

If neither group address nor source address is determined, all SA caches will be displayed.

autonomous-system-number: Displays (S, G) entries from specified autonomous system.

Description

Using the display msdp sa-cache command, you can view (S, G) state learnt from MSDP peer.

Only cache-sa-enable command is configured, can cache state be displayed.

Example<3Com> display msdp sa-cacheMSDP Total Source-Active Cache - 5 entries

(Source, Group) Origin RP Pro AS Uptime Expires(10.10.1.2, 225.1.1.1) 10.10.10.10 BGP 100 00:00:10 00:05:50(10.10.1.3, 225.1.1.1) 10.10.10.10 BGP 100 00:00:11 00:05:49(10.10.1.2, 225.1.1.2) 10.10.10.10 BGP 100 00:00:11 00:05:49(10.10.2.1, 225.1.1.2) 10.10.10.10 BGP 100 00:00:11 00:05:49(10.10.1.2, 225.1.2.2) 10.10.10.10 BGP 100 00:00:11 00:05:49

MSDP matched 5 entries

display msdp sa-count Syntax

display msdp sa-count [ autonomous-system-number ]

View

Any view

Parameter

autonomous-system-number: Number of sources and groups from the specified autonomous system.

Description

Using the display msdp sa-count command, you can view the number of sources and groups in MSDP cache.

The cache-sa-enable command must be configured before the configuration of this command.

Example<3Com> display msdp sa-countNumber of cached Source-Active entries, counted by Peer Peer's Address Number of SA 10.10.10.10 5

Number of source and group, counted by AS AS Number of source Number of group


? 3 3

Total Source-Active entries: 5

import-source Syntax

import-source [ acl acl-number ]

undo import-source

View

MSDP view

Parameteracl-number: Number of basic or advanced IP ACL, ranging from 1 to 199, controlling which sources SA messages will advertise and to which groups it will be sent in the domain. Basic ACL performs filtering to source and advanced ACL performs filtering to source/group. If no ACL is specified, no multicast source will be advertised.

Description

Using the import-source command, you can configure which (S, G) entries in the domain need to be advertised when a MSDP originates an SA message. Using the undo import-source command, you can remove the configuration.

By default, all the (S, G) entries in the domain are advertised by the SA message.

Besides controlling SA messages creation, you can filter the forwarded SA messages by the commands peer sa-policy import and peer sa-policy export.

Example

Configure which (S, G) entries from the multicast routing table will be advertised in SA messages originated by the MSDP peer.

<3Com> system-view<3Com] acl number 101<3Com-acl-adv-101] rule permit ip source 10.10.0.0 0.0.255.255 destination 225.1.0.0 0.0.255.255<3Com-acl-adv-101] quit<3Com] msdp<3Com-msdp] import-source acl 101

msdp Syntax

msdp

undo msdp

View

System view

Parameter

None


DescriptionUsing the msdp command, you can enable MSDP and enter the MSDP view. Using the undo msdp command, you can clear all configurations of MSDP, release all resources that MSDP occupies, and restore the initial state.


Example

Clear all configurations of MSDP.

<3Com> system-view<3Com] undo msdp

msdp-tracert Syntax

msdp-tracert source-address group-address rp-address [ max-hops max-hops ] [ next-hop-info ] [ sa-info ] [ peer-info ] [ skip-hops skip-hops ]

View

Any view

Parameter

source-address: Multicast address address.


rp-address: IP address of RP.

max-hops: The maximum number of hops that are traced, ranging from 1 to 255. By default, the value is 16.

next-hop-info: Flag bit for collecting the next hop information.

sa-info: Flag bit for collecting SA entity information.

peer-info: Flag bit for collecting MSDP peer information.

skip-hops: Number of hops that are skipped before collecting detailed information, ranging from 0 to 255. By default, the value is 0.

Description

Using the msdp-tracert command, you can trace the transmission path of SA messages in the network, which helps to locate the faults such as information loss and configuration error. After the transmission path of SA messages is determined, correct configuration can avoid the overflow of SA messages.

Example

Trace (10.10.1.1, 225.2.2.2, 20.20.20.20) path information.

<3Com> msdp-tracert 10.10.1.1 225.2.2.2 20.20.20.20

Specify the maximum number of hops that are traced and collect detailed information of SA and MSDP peer.


<3Com> msdp-tracert 10.10.1.1 225.2.2.2 20.20.20.20 max-hops 10 sa-info peer-infoMSDP tracert: press CTRL_C to break D-bit: set if have this (S,G) in cache but with a different RP RP-bit: set if this router is an RP NC-bit: set if this router is not caching SA's C-bit: set if this (S,G,RP) tuple is in the cache MSDP Traceroute path information: Router Address: 20.20.1.1 Fixed-length response info: Peer Uptime: 10 minutes, Cache Entry Uptime: 30 minutes D-bit: 0, RP-bit: 1, NC-bit: 0, C-bit: 1 Return Code: Reached-max-hops Next Hop info: Next-Hop Router Address: 0.0.0.0 SA info: Count of SA messages received for this (S,G,RP): 0 Count of encapsulated data packets received for this (S,G,RP):0 SA cache entry uptime: 00:30:00 , SA cache entry expiry time: 00:03:32 Peering info: Peering Uptime: 10 minutes, Count of Peering Resets: 3

Table 3 Description of msdp-tracert Command Domain

originating-rp Syntax

originating-rp interface-type interface-number

undo originating-rp

Item DescriptionRouter Address Address where the local router creates Peering session with Peer-RPF

neighbor.Peer Uptime Time for which the local router performs Peering session with

Peer-RPF neighbor in minute, with the maximum value of 255.Cache Entry Uptime Present time of (S, G, RP) entry in SA cache of the local router, in

minute, with the maximum value of 255.D-bit: 1 (S, G, RP) entry existing in SA cache of the local router.

But the RP is different from the RP specified in the request message.RP-bit: 1 The local router is an RP, but it is not necessarily the source RP in (S,

G, RP) entry.NC-bit: 0 The local router enables SA cache.C-bit: 1 (S, G, RP) entry exists in SA cache of the local router.Return Code: Reached-max-hops

Return reason is the reached maximum hops and other possible value includes:

Hit-src-RP: The local hop router is the source RP in (S, G, RP) entry.Next-Hop Router Address: 0.0.0.0

If the parameter next-hop-info is used, Peer-RPF neighbor address will be displayed.

Count of SA messages received for this (S,G,RP)

Number of SA messages received for tracing this (S, G, RP) entry.

Count of encapsulated data packets received for this (S,G,RP)

Number of encapsulated data packets received for tracing this (S, G, RP) entry.

SA cache entry uptime Present time of SA cache entry.SA cache entry expiry time

Expiry time of SA cache entry.

Peering Uptime: 10 minutes

Time for which the local router performs Peering session with Peer-RPF neighbor.

Count of Peering Resets Number of Peering session resets.


View

MSDP view

Parameter



Description

Using the originating-rp command, you can allow a MSDP to use the IP address of specified interface as the RP address in the SA message originated. Using the undo originating-rp command, you can remove the configuration.

By default, the RP address in the SA message is the RP address configured by PIM.

Configure logical RP by using this command.

Example

Configure IP address of the interface Ethernet1/0/0 as the RP address in the SA message originated.

<3Com> system-view<3Com] msdp<3Com-msdp] originating-rp ethernet 1/0/0

peer Syntax

peer peer-address connect-interface interface-type interface-number

undo peer peer-address

View

MSDP view

Parameter


connect-interface interface-type interface-number: Interface type and number whose primary address is used by the local router as the source IP address to establish TCP connection with remote MSDP peers.

Description

Using the peer command, you can configure an MSDP peer. Using the undo peer command, you can remove the MSDP peer configured.

If the local router is also in BGP peer relation with a MSDP peer, the MSDP peer and the BGP peer should use the same IP address.

For the related command, see static-rpf-peer.

Example

Configure the router using IP address 125.10.7.6 as an MSDP peer of the local router.


<3Com> system-view<3Com] msdp<3Com-msdp] peer 125.10.7.6 connect-interface ethernet 0/1/0

peer description Syntax

peer peer-address description text

undo peer peer-address description

View

MSDP view

Parameter


text: Descriptive text, being case sensitive. The maximum length is 80 characters.

Description

Using the peer description command, you can configure descriptive text to MSDP peer. Using the undo peer description command, you can remove the descriptive text configured.

By default, an MSDP peer has no descriptive text.

Administrator can conveniently differentiate MSDP peers by configuring descriptive text.

For the related command, see display msdp peer-status.

Example

Add descriptive text CstmrA to router 125.10.7.6 to specify that the router is Client A.

<3Com> system-view<3Com] msdp<3Com-msdp] peer 125.10.7.6 description router CstmrA

peer mesh-group Syntax

peer peer-address mesh-group name

undo peer peer-address mesh-group name

View

MSDP view

Parameter

name: Name of an Mesh Group, being case sensitive. The maximum length is 32 characters.

peer-address: Address of an MSDP peer to be a member of the Mesh Group.


Description

Using the peer mesh-group command, you can configure an MSDP peer to join an Mesh Group. Using the undo peer mesh-group command, you can remove the configuration.

By default, an MSDP peer is not a member of any Mesh Group.

Example

Configure the MSDP peer with address 125.10.7.6 to be a member of the Mesh Group Grp1.

<3Com> system-view<3Com] msdp<3Com-msdp] peer 125.10.7.6 mesh-group Grp1

peer minimum-ttl Syntax

peer peer-address minimum-ttl ttl

undo peer peer-address minimum-ttl

View

MSDP view

Parameter

peer-address: Address of the MSDP peer to which the TTL limitation applies.

ttl: TTL threshold, ranging from 0 to 255.

Description

Using the peer minimum-ttl command, you can configure the minimum TTL (Time-to-Live) value of the multicast data packets encapsulated in SA messages to be sent to specified MSDP peer. Using the undo peer minimum-ttl command, you can restore the default TTL threshold.

By default, the value of TTL threshold is 0.


Example

Configure the TTL threshold value to 10, i.e., only those multicast data packets with a TTL value greater than or equal to 10 can be forwarded to the MSDP peer 110.10.10.1.

<3Com> system-view<3Com] msdp<3Com-msdp] peer 110.10.10.1 minimum-ttl 10

peer request-sa-enable Syntax

peer peer-address request-sa-enable

undo peer peer-address request-sa-enable


View

MSDP view

Parameter


Description

Using the peer request-sa-enable command, you can enable the router to send SA request message to the specified MSDP peer when receiving a new group join message. Using the undo peer request-sa-enable command, you can remove the configuration.

By default, when receiving a new group join message, the router sends no SA request messages to MSDP peers but waits to receive the next SA message.

For the related command, see cache-sa-enable.

Example

Configure to send SA request message to the MSDP peer 125.10.7.6.

<3Com> system-view<3Com] msdp<3Com-msdp] peer 125.10.7.6 request-sa-enable

peer sa-cache-maximum Syntax

peer peer-address sa-cache-maximum sa-limit

undo peer peer-address sa-cache-maximum

View

MSDP view

Parameter


sa-limit: Maximum value that the SA cache allows, ranging from 1 to 2048.

Description

Using the peer sa-cache-maximum command, you can limit the number of caches originated when the router receives SA messages from an MSDP peer. Using the undo peer sa-cache-maximum command, you can restore the default configuration.

By default, the maximum number of SA caches is 2048.

This configuration is recommended for all MSDP peers in the networks possibly attacked by DoS.

For the related commands, see display msdp, sa-count, display msdp peer-status and display msdp brief.


Example

Limit the number of caches originated to 100 when the router receives SA messages from the MSDP peer 125.10.7.6.

<3Com> system-view<3Com] msdp<3Com-msdp] peer 125.10.7.6 sa-cache-maximum 100

peer sa-policy Syntax

peer peer-address sa-policy { import | export } [ acl acl-number ]

undo peer peer-address sa-policy { import | export }

View

MSDP view

Parameter

import: Receives SA messages from the specified MSDP peer.

export: Forwards SA messages from the specified MSDP peer.

peer-address: Address of the MSDP peer whose SA messages need to be filtered.

acl acl-number: Number of advanced IP ACL, ranging from 100 to 199. If no ACL is specified, all (S, G) entries are filtered.

Description

Using the peer sa-policy command, you can configure a filter list for SA messages received or forwarded from the specified MSDP peer. Using the undo peer sa-policy command, you can remove the configuration.

By default, messages received or forwarded will not be filtered. All SA messages are received or forwarded from an MSDP peer.


Example

Forward only those SA messages that passed the advanced IP ACL.

<3Com> system-view<3Com] acl number 100<3Com-acl-adv-100] rule permit ip source 170.15.0.0 0.0.255.255 destination 225.1.0.0 0.0.255.255<3Com-acl-adv-100] quit<3Com] msdp<3Com-msdp] peer 125.10.7.6 connect-interface ethernet 0/0/0<3Com-msdp] peer 125.10.7.6 sa-policy export acl 100

peer sa-request-policy Syntax

peer peer-address sa-request-policy [ acl acl-number ]

undo peer peer-address sa-request-policy


View

MSDP view

Parameter

peer-address: Address from which the local router receives SA request messages sent by the specified MSDP peer.

acl acl-number: Number of basic IP ACL, describing multicast group address, ranging from 1 to 99. If no ACL is specified, all SA request messages will be ignored.

Description

Using the peer sa-request-policy command, you can limit SA request messages that the router receives from MSDP peers. Using the undo peer sa-request-policy command, you can remove the limitation.

By default, the router receives all SA request messages from the MSDP peer.

If no ACL is specified, all SA requests will be ignored. If ACL is specified, only those SA request messages from the groups permitted by the ACL will be processed and all the others will be ignored.


Example

Configure the ACL for filtering SA request messages from the MSDP peer 175.58.6.5. The SA request messages from group address range 225.1.1.0/8 will be received and all the others will be ignored.

<3Com> system-view<3Com] acl number 1<3Com-acl-basic-1] rule permit source 225.1.1.0 0.0.0.255<3Com-acl-basic-1] quit<3Com] msdp<3Com-msdp] peer 175.58.6.5 sa-request-policy acl 1

reset msdp peer Syntax

reset msdp peer peer-address

ViewUser view

Parameter


Description

Using the reset msdp peer command, you can reset TCP connection with the specified MSDP peer, and clear all the statistics of the specified MSDP peer.



Example

Clear TCP connection and statistics of the MSDP peer 125.10.7.6.

<3Com> reset msdp peer 125.10.7.6

reset msdp sa-cache Syntax

reset msdp sa-cache [ group-address ]

View

User view

Parameter

group-address: Address of the group, (S, G) entries matching which are cleared from the SA cache. If no multicast group address is specified, all SA cache entries will be cleared.

Description

Using the reset msdp sa-cache command, you can clear SMDP SA cache entries.

For the related commands, see cache-sa-enable and display msdp sa-cache.

Example

Clear the cache entries with group address 225.5.4.3 from the SA cache.

<3Com> reset msdp sa-cache 225.5.4.3

reset msdp statistics Syntax

reset msdp statistics [ peer-address ]

View

User view

Parameter

peer-address: Address of the MSDP peer whose statistics, resetting information and input/output information will be cleared. If no MSDP peer address is specified, all MSDP peers statistics will be cleared.

Description

Using the reset msdp statistics command, you can clear statistics of one or more MSDP peers without resetting the MSDP peer.

Example

Clear the statistics of the MSDP peer 25.10.7.6.

<3Com> reset msdp statistics 125.10.7.6

shutdown Syntax

shutdown peer-address

undo shutdown peer-address


ViewMSDP view

Parameter

peer-address: IP address of MSDP peer.

Description

Using the shutdown command, you can disable the MSDP peer specified. Using the undo shutdown command, you can remove the configuration.

By default, no MSDP peer is disabled.


Example

Disable the MSDP peer 125.10.7.6.

<3Com> system-view<3Com] msdp<3Com-msdp] shutdown 125.10.7.6

static-rpf-peer Syntax

static-rpf-peer peer-address [ rp-policy list ]

undo static-rpf-peer peer-address

View

MSDP view

Parameter

peer-address: Address of the static RPF peer to receive SA messages.

rp-policy list: Filter policy based on RP address, which filters the RP in SA messages. If the parameter is not specified, all SA messages from static RPF peer will be accepted. If the parameter rp-policy list is specified and filter policy is configured, the router will only accept SA messages from the RP which passes filtering. If no filter policy is configured, the router will still accept all SA messages from the static RPF peer.

Description

Using the static-rpf-peer command, you can configure static RPF peer.. Using the undo static-rpf-peer command, you can remove the static RPF peer.

By default, no static RPF peer is configured.

You must configure the peer command before using the static-rpf-peer command.

If you do not want to perform RPF check to SA messages from a same MSDP peer. If only an MSDP peer is configured on a router, this MSDP peer will be regarded as static RPF peer.

For the related commands, see peer and ip prefix-list.


Example

Configure two static RPF peers.

<3Com> system-view<3Com] ip ip-prefix list1 permit 130.10.0.0 16<3Com] ip ip-prefix list2 permit 130.10.0.0 16<3Com] msdp<3Com-msdp] peer 130.10.7.6 connect-interface ethernet 1/0/0<3Com-msdp] peer 130.10.7.5 connect-interface ethernet 1/0/0<3Com-msdp] static-rpf-peer 130.10.7.6 rp-policy list1<3Com-msdp] static-rpf-peer 130.10.7.5 rp-policy list2

timer retry Syntax

timer retry seconds

undo timer retry

View

MSDP view

Parameterseconds: Value of connection request re-try period in second, ranging from 1 to 60.

Description

Using the timer retry command, you can configure the value of connection request re-try period. Using the undo timer retry command, you can restore the default value.

By default, the value of connection request re-try period is 30 seconds.


Example

Configure the connection request re-try period to 60 seconds.

<3Com> system-view<3Com] msdp<3Com-msdp] timer retry 60

MBGP Multicast Extension Configuration Commands

aggregate Syntax

aggregate address mask [ as-set ] [ attribute-policy route-policy-name ] [ detail-suppressed ] [ origin-policy route-policy-name ] [ suppress-policy route-policy-name ]

MBGP Multicast Extension Configuration Commands 741

undo aggregate address mask [ as-set ] [ attribute-policy route-policy-name ] [ detail-suppressed ] [ origin-policy route-policy-name ] [ suppress-policy route-policy-name ]

View

IPv4 multicast sub-address family view

Parameter

address: Address of the aggregated route.

mask: Network mask of the aggregated route.

as-set: Generates a route with AS_SET segment. This parameter is not recommended to use when many AS paths are aggregated.

attribute-policy: Attributes of the aggregated route.

detail-suppressed: No detailed route but the aggregated route is advertised.

origin-policy: Filters the detailed route involved in aggregation.

suppress-policy: Detailed route determined is not advertised.

Description

Using the aggregate command, you can create a multicast aggregated record in the BGP routing table. Using the undo aggregate command, you can remove the aggregation.

By default, no route is aggregated.

Using the aggregate command without parameters, you can create one local aggregated route and set atomic aggregation attributes.

Example

Create a multicast aggregated record in the BGP routing table and set the address of aggregated route is 192.213.0.0.

<3Com-bgp-af-mul] aggregate 192.213.0.0 255.255.0.0

debugging bgpmp-update

Syntax

debugging bgp mp-update

undo debugging bgp mp-update

View

User view

Parameter

updates: Debug information of MBGP update packets.


Description

Using the debugging bgp mp-update command, you can enable the MBGP packet debugging functions. Using the undo debugging bgp mp-update command, you can disable the functions.

Example

Enable MBGP packet information debugging function.

<3Com> debugging bgp mp-update

display bgp multicastgroup

Syntaxdisplay bgp multicast group [ group-name ]

View

Any view

Parameter

group-name: Name of peer group. If no peer group is specified, the information about all peer groups will be displayed.

Description

Using the display bgp multicast group command, you can view the information about peer groups.

Example

Display the information about the peer group named my_peer.

<3Com> display bgp multicast group my_peer

display bgp multicastnetwork

Syntax

display bgp multicast network

View

Any view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the display bgp multicast network command, you can view the routing information that MBGP advertises.

Example

Display the network segment routing information that MBGP advertises.

<3Com> display bgp multicast network

display bgp multicastrouting-table

Syntax

display bgp multicast routing-table ip-address [ mask ]


View

Any view

Parameter

ip-address: MBGP routing information whose IP address is specified in the BGP routing table.

Description

Using the display bgp multicast routing-table command, you can view the MBGP routing information whose IP address is specified in the BGP routing table.

Example

Display the MBGP routing information with destination network segment 14.1.0.0.

<3Com> display bgp multicast routing-table 14.1.0.0

display bgp multicastrouting-table cidr

Syntax

display bgp multicast routing-table cidr

View

Any view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the display bgp multicast routing-table cidr command, you can view the routing information with non-natural network mask (i.e., classless inter-domain routing, CIDR).

Example

Display CIDR routing information.

<3Com> display bgp multicast routing-table cidr


community

Syntax

display bgp multicast routing-table community [ community-number | no-export-subconfed | no-advertise | no-export | whole-match ]

View

Any view

Parameter

community-number: Specifies community number.

no-export-subconfed: Not advertises matched routes outside the local autonomous system.

no-advertise: Not advertises matched routes to any peer.


no-export: Not advertises routes outside the local autonomous system but advertise routes to other sub-autonomous systems.

whole-match: Exact match.

Description

Using the display bgp multicast routing-table community command, you can view the routing information that belongs to the specified MBGP community.

Example

Display the routing information that belongs to the specified MBGP community.

<3Com> display bgp multicast routing-table community 600:1<3Com> display bgp multicast routing-table community no-export


community-list

Syntax

display bgp multicast routing-table community-list list-number [ whole-match ]

View

Any view

Parameter

list-number: Number of community list.

whole-match: Exact match.

Description

Using the display bgp multicast routing-table community-list command, you can view the routing information that is permitted by the MBGP community list.

ExampleDisplay the routing information that is permitted by the MBGP community list.

<3Com> display bgp multicast routing-table community-list


different-origin-as

Syntax

display bgp multicast routing-table different-origin-as

View

Any view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the display bgp multicast routing-table different-origin-as command, you can view AS routes with different origins.

Example

Display AS routes with different origins.

<3Com> display bgp multicast routing-table different-origin-as


display bgp multicastrouting-table peer

Syntax

display bgp multicast routing-table peer peer-address { received | advertised }

View

Any view

Parameter

peer-address: Address of multicast neighbor, in dotted decimal notation format.

received: Routing information received from the specified neighbor.

advertised: Routing information sent to the specified neighbor.

Description

Using the display multicast routing-table peer command, you can view the route received from or sent to the specified multicast neighbor.

Example

Display the routing information sent to the multicast neighbor 10.10.1.11.

<3Com> display multicast routing-table peer 10.10.1.11 advertised


regular-expression

Syntax

display bgp multicast routing-table [ regular-expression as-regular-expression ]

View

Any view

Parameter

as-regular-expression: AS regular expression matched.

Description

Using the display bgp multicast routing-table regular-expression command, you can view the routing information matching the specified AS regular expression.

Example

Display the MBGP routing information matching the regular expression ^600$.

<3Com> display bgp multicast routing-table regular-expression ^600$

display bgp multicastrouting-table statistic

Syntax

display bgp multicast routing-table statistic

View

Any view

Parameter

None


Description

Using the display bgp multicast routing-table statistic command, you can view statistics of MBGP route information.

Example

Display statistics of MBGP route information.

<3Com> display bgp multicast routing-table statistic

import-route Syntax

import-route protocol [ route-policy policy-name ] [ med metric ]


View


Parameter

protocol: Source routing protocols that can be imported, which can be direct, ospf, ospf-ase, ospf-nssa, rip, isis and static at present.

metric: Metric value loaded by an imported route.

policy-name: Route policy used by an imported route.

Description

Using the import-route command, you can import routing information from other protocols to BGP. Using the undo import-route command, you can cancel the importing of routing information from other protocols.

By default, BGP will not import routing information from other protocols.

Example

Configure to import a static route.

<3Com-bgp-af-mul] import-route static

ipv4-family multicast Syntax

ipv4-family multicast

undo ipv4-family multicast

View

BGP view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the ipv4-family multicast command, you can enter the IPv4 multicast sub-address family view. Using the undo ipv4-family multicast command, you can remove all the configurations in the IPv4 multicast sub-address family view.


Example

Enter the IPv4 multicast sub-address family view.

<3Com> system-view<3Com] bgp 100<3Com-bgp] ipv4-family multicast<3Com-bgp-af-mul]

network Syntax

network ip-address [ address-mask ] [ route-policy policy-name ]

undo network ip-address [ address-mask ] [ route-policy policy-name ]

View


Parameter

ip-address: Network address that BGP advertises.

address-mask: Mask of the network address.

route-policy policy-name: Route policy applied to the routes advertised.

Description

Using the network command, you can configure the network addresses to be sent by the local BGP. Using the undo network command, you can remove the existing configuration.

By default, the local BGP does not advertise any route.

Example

Advertise routes to the network segment 10.0.0.0/16.

<3Com-bgp-af-mul] network 10.0.0.1 255.255.0.0

peeradvertise-community

Syntax

peer { group-name | peer-address } advertise-community

undo peer { group-name | peer-address } advertise-community

View


Parameter

group-name: Name of the peer group.

peer-address: IP address of the peer.

Description

Using the peer advertise-community command, you can configure to advertise community attributes to a peer (group). Using the undo peer advertise-community command, you can remove the existing configuration.


By default, no community attribute is advertised to any peer (group).

Example

Advertise community attributes to the peer group named test.

<3Com-bgp-af-mul] peer test advertise-community

peer allow-as-loop Syntax

peer { group-name | peer-address } allow-as-loop asn_limit

undo peer ip-address allow-as-loop asn_limit

View


Parameter

group-name: Peer group name

peer-address: Peer IP address

asn_limit: Acceptable maximum of local AS number in the route update messages received.

Description

Using the peer allow-as-loop command, you can specify to Using the undo peer allow-as-loop command, you can specify not to contain the local AS number in the AS-PATH attributes received, for routing loop should be removed in the route update messages received in Hub&Spoke networking mode.

By default, the local AS number is unacceptable in the route update messages received.

For the standard BGP, routing loop test is based on AS numbers. But in Hub&Spoke networking mode, if EBGP runs between a PE and a CE, the local AS number is contained in the PE's advertising routing information to the CE. Then the PE will not be able to receive the update messages for this route.

The peer allow-as-loop command can solve this problem, for it enables to contain the local AS number in the route update messages received from the CE. The acceptable maximum of the local AS number is defined via the asn_limit parameter.

Example

Specify to contain the local AS number in the AS_PATH attributes received.

<3Com-bgp] ipv4-family multicast<3Com-bgp-af-vpn] peer 1.1.1.1 allow-as-loop 1

peer as-path-acl Syntax

peer { group-name | peer-address } as-path-acl number { import | export }

undo peer { group-name | peer-address } as-path-acl number { import | export }


ViewIPv4 multicast sub-address family view

Parameter



as-path-acl number: Number of AS path list matched, ranging from 1 to 199.

import: Filter list applied to incoming routes.

export: Filter list applied to outgoing routes.

Description

Using the peer as-path-acl command, you can configure BGP filter policy based on AS path list for the peer (group). Using the undo peer as-path-acl command, you can remove the configuration.

By default, the peer (group) has no filter policy based on AS path list.

Example

Set BGP filter policy based on AS path list for the peer (group).

<3Com-bgp] peer test as-number 100<3Com-bgp] ipv4-family multicast<3Com-bgp-af-mul] peer test enable<3Com-bgp-af-mul] peer test as-path-acl 3 export

peer enable Syntax

peer { group-name | peer-address} enable

undo peer { group-name | peer-address} enable

View


Parameter

peer-address: IP address of the multicast peer.

group-name: Name of the multicast peer group.

Description

Using the peer enable command, you can enable the multicast peer or peer group. Using the undo peer enable command, you can disable the multicast peer or peer group.

By default, the multicast peer (or peer group) is disabled.

Only after the peer (peer group) is enabled, can it establish connection with the multicast peer.


Example

Enable the multicast peer 1.1.11.1.

<3Com-bgp-af-mul] peer 1.1.11.1 enable

<3Com-bgp] peer test enable

peer filter-policy Syntax

peer { group-name | peer-address } filter-policy acl-number { import | export }

undo peer { group-name | peer-address } filter-policy acl-number { import | export }

View


Parameter



acl-number: IP ACL number, ranging from 1 to 199.

import: Specifies an import policy.

export: Specifies an export policy.

Description

Using the peer filter-policy command, you can set the filter policy list for a peer (group). Using the undo peer filter-policy command, you can remove the existing setting.

By default, the peer (group) has no ACL.

For the related command, see peer as-path-acl.

Example

Set the filter policy list for a peer.

<3Com-bgp] peer test as-number 100<3Com-bgp] ipv4-family multicast<3Com-bgp-af-mul] peer test enable<3Com-bgp-af-mul] peer test filter-policy 3 import

peer ip-prefix Syntax

peer { group-name | peer-address } ip-prefix prefixname { import | export }

undo peer { group-name | peer-address } ip-prefix prefixname { import | export }



Parametergroup-name: Name of the peer group.


ip-prefix prefixname: Specifies ip-prefix name, ranging from 1 to 19 characters.

import: Applies the filter policy to routes accepted by the specified peer (group).

export: Applies the filter policy to routes sent by the specified peer (group).

Description

Using the peer ip-prefix command, you can configure the route filter policy based on the address prefix-list for the peer (group). Using the undo peer ip-prefix command, you can remove the configuration.

By default, no route filter policy is configured for the peer (group).

Example

Configure the route filter policy based on the address prefix-list for the peer.

<3Com-bgp-af-mul] peer group1 ip-prefix list1 import

peer next-hop-local Syntax

peer { group-name | peer-address } next-hop-local

undo peer { group-name | peer-address } next-hop-local

View


Parameter



Description

Using the peer next-hop-local command, you can remove the processing of the next hop in routes which BGP will advertise to the peer (group) and set the local address as the next hop. Using the undo peer next-hop-local command, you can remove the existing setting.

Example

Set the local address as the next hop when advertising routes to peer group named test.

<3Com-bgp-af-mul] peer test next-hop-local

peer public-as-only Syntax

peer { group-name | peer-address } public-as-only

undo peer { group-name | peer-address } public-as-only



Parameter



Description

Using the peer public-as-only command, you can configure only to carry public AS number rather than private AS number when BGP sends update packets. Using the undo peer public-as-only command, you can configure to carry private AS number when BGP sends update packets.

By default, the private AS number is carried when BGP sends update packets.

Generally, BGP sends update packets with the AS number (which can be either the public AS number or private AS number). To enable some external routers to ignore the private AS number when sending update packets, you can configure not to carry the private AS number when BGP sends update packets.

Example

Configure not to carry private AS number when BGP sends update packets to peer group named test.

<3Com-bgp-af-mul] peer test public-as-only

peer reflect-client Syntaxpeer { group-name | peer-address } reflect-client

undo peer { group-name | peer-address } reflect-client

View


Parameter



Description

Using the peer reflect-client command, you can configure a peer (group) as a client of the route reflector. Using the undo peer reflect-client command, you can remove the existing configuration.

By default, there is no route reflector in the autonomous system.

Example

Configure peer group named test to be client of the route reflector.

<3Com-bgp-af-mul] peer test reflect-client

Multicast Static Route Configuration Commands 753

peer route-policy Syntax

peer { group-name | peer-address } route-policy policy-name { import | export }

undo peer { group-name | peer-address } route-policy policy-name { import | export }

View


Parameter



route-policy policy-name: Route policy specified.

import: Applies route policy to the routes received from the peer (group).

export: Applies route policy to the routes advertised to the peer (group).

Description

Using the peer route-policy command, you can configure route policy for the specified peer (group). Using the undo peer route-policy command, you can remove the route policy of the peer (group).

By default, no route policy is specified for the peer (group).

Example

Apply route policy policy 1 to the routes received from the peer group named test.

<3Com-bgp-af-mul] peer test route-policy policy1 import

Multicast Static Route Configuration Commands

delete rpf-route-static all Syntax

delete rpf-route-static all

View

System view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the delete rpf-route-static all command, you can delete all the static multicast routes.


When using this command, the system will prompt you to acknowledge. All static multicast routes will be deleted after your acknowledgement.

For the related command, see ip rpf-route-static and display multicast routing-table static.

Example

Delete all the static multicast routes.

<3Com] delete rpf-route-static all


Syntax

display multicast routing-table static [ source mask ]

View

Any view

Parameter

source: IP address of multicast source (unicast address).

mask: IP address mask of multicast source.

Description

Using the display multicast routing-table static command, you can view the active multicast static routes.

If no multicast source address is specified, all active multicast static routes will be displayed.

For the related command, see display multicast routing-table static config.

Example

Display all active multicast static routes.

<3Com> display multicast routing-table static 22.22.0.0/16 [inactive] RPF interface = serial0/0/0, RPF neighbor = 66.55.99.88 Matched routing protocol = = <none>, route-policy = <none>, preference = 1 Running config = ip mroute 22.22.0.0 16 66.55.99.88 preference 1

Display the multicast static routes that exactly match the address 10.10.0.0/16.

<3Com> display multicast routing-table static 10.10.0.0 255.255.0.0


config

Syntax

display multicast routing-table static config [ source mask ]

View

Any view

Parameter




Description

Using the display multicast routing-table static config command, you can view multicast static routes configured.

If no multicast source address is specified, all configured multicast static routes will be displayed.

For the related command, see display multicast routing-table static.

Example

Display all the configured multicast static routes.

<3Com> display multicast routing-table static config

Display the multicast static routes that exactly match the address 1.0.0.0/8.

<3Com> display multicast routing-table static config 1.0.0.0 255.0.0.0

ip rpf-longest-match Syntax

ip rpf-longest-match

undo ip rpf-longest-match

View

System view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the ip rpf-longest-match command, you can configure the longest-match rule to be the multicast RPF route selecting policy. Using the undo ip rpf-longest-match command, you can restore the default configuration.

By default, routes are selected according to the preference-preferred rule.

ExampleSet the longest-match rule to be the multicast RPF route selecting policy.

<3Com] ip rpf-longest-match

ip rpf-route-static Syntax

ip rpf-route-static source { mask | mask-length } [ protocol ] [ route-policy policyname ] { rpf-nbr | interface-name } [ order order-num | preference preference ]

undo ip rpf-route-static source { mask | mask-length } [ protocol ] [ route-policy policyname ]


View

System view

Parameter



mask-length: IP address mask length of multicast source.

protocol: Indicates that matched routes must appear in the specified unicast routing protocol. Protocol can be such unicast routing protocols as bgp, isis, ospf, rip and static.

route-policy: Match rule for static multicast routes.

rpf-nbr: IP address of RPF neighbor router.

interface-name Interface name which is connect to the RPF neighbor router, including interface type and interface number.

order-num: Changes the configuration location of routes on the same network segment. The value ranges from 1 to 100.

preference: Route preference, ranging from 1 to 255. By default, the value is 1.

Description

Using the ip rpf-route-static command, you can configure multicast static routes. Using the undo ip rpf-route-static command, you can remove the multicast static routes from the multicast static routing table.

For the related commands, see display multicast routing-table static config and display multicast routing-table static.

Example

Configure a multicast static route.

<3Com> system-view<3Com] ip rpf-route-static 1.0.0.0 255.0.0.0 rip route-policy map1 11.0.0.1

Display the multicast static route configured.

<3Com] display multicast routing-table static config

Continue to configure the multicast static route.

<3Com] ip rpf-route-static 1.0.0.0 255.0.0.0 rip route-policy map1 13.1.1.2



Continue to configure the multicast static route.

<3Com] ip rpf-route-static 1.0.0.0 255.0.0.0 null0

8 MPLS Basic Configuration Commands

This chapter describes the following types of commands:

■ Basic Configuration Commands

■ LDP Configuration Commands

■ BGP/MPLS VPN Configuration Commands

■ MPLS L2VPN CCC Configuration Commands

■ SVC MPLS L2VPN Configuration Commands

■ Martini MPLS L2VPN Configuration Commands

■ Kompella MPLS L2VPN Configuration Commands

■ MPLS TE Configuration Commands


debugging mpls lspm Syntaxdebugging mpls lspm { all | packet | event | ftn | process | agent | interface | policy | vpn }

undo debugging mpls lspm { all | packet | event | ftn | process | agent | interface | policy | vpn }

View

User view

Parameteragent: Enables all MPLS Agent information debugging.

all: Enables all MPLS-related information debugging.

event: Enables information debugging of various MPLS events.

ftn: Enables MPLS ftn debugging.

interface: Enables the MPLS information debugging on the message sending/receiving interface.

packet: Enables MPLS packet debugging.

policy: Enables MPLS information debugging.

760 CHAPTER 8: MPLS BASIC CONFIGURATION COMMANDS

process: Enables internal processing of MPLS information debugging.

vpn: Enables all MPLS VPN information debugging.

Description

Using the debugging mpls lspm command, you can enable various LSP information debugging. Using the undo debugging mpls lspm command, you can disable corresponding debugging.

By default, all debugging is disabled.

This command is used for the debugging of the problem occurred while using MPLS LSPM. Enabling the debugging will affect the performance of the router, so it is recommended that the command be used with caution.

Example

Enable all relevant debugging of MPLS VPN.<3Com> debugging mpls lspm vpn

display mpls interface Syntax

display mpls interface

View

Any view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the display mpls interface command, you can view all MPLS-enabled interfaces.

For the related commands, see display mpls lsp, display mpls statistics, display static-lsp.

Example

Display all MPLS-enabled interfaces.

[3Com] display mpls interface

display mpls lsp Syntax

display mpls lsp { verbose | include text }

View

Any view

Parameter

include text: Displays the information with the specified string included.

verbose: Displays detailed information.


Description

Using the display mpls lsp command, you can view LSP information.

By default, the display mpls lsp command displays all LSP information.

For the related commands, see display mpls interface, display mpls statistics, and display static-lsp.

Example

Display all LSPs whose incoming interfaces are Serial 3/0/0.

[3Com] display mpls lsp include incoming-interface serial3/0/0

display mpls static-lsp

Syntax

display mpls static-lsp { verbose | include text }

View

Any view

Parameter

include text: Displays the information with the specified string included.


Description

Using the display mpls static-lsp command, you can display the information of all or single static LSP(s).

For the related commands, see display mpls interface, display mpls lsp, and display mpls statistics.

Example

Display information of the static LSP named “marlborough”.

[3Com] display mpls static-lsp include marlborough

display mpls statistics Syntax

display mpls statistics { interface { all | interface-type interface-num } } | { lsp [ lsp-Index | all | name ] } }

View

Any view

Parameter

interface-type: Type of network interface.

Interface-num: Number of network interface.

lsp-Index: LSP index

all: All LSPs


name lsp-name: LSP name

Description

Using the display mpls statistics command, you can display statistics of all or single LSP(s) and LSP statistics on all or single interface(s).

Specifically, the displayed information includes the bytes, packets, errors and discarded packets processed on each LSP ingress and each LSP egress, and those received and transmitted on each MPLS-enabled interface.

For the related commands, see display mpls interface and display mpls lsp.

Example

Display MPLS statistics.

[3Com] display mpls statistics lsp all Building the information... LSP Index/LSP Name : 1/lsp1 InSegment Octets of LSP is: 0 Bytes processed on each LSP ingress InSegment Packets of LSP is: 0 Packets processed on each LSP ingress InSegment Errors of LSP is: 0 Errors processed on each LSP ingress InSegment Discard Packets of LSP is: 0 Discarded packets processed on each LSP ingress LSP Index/LSP Name : 1/lsp1 OutSegment Octets of LSP is: 0 Bytes processed on each LSP egress OutSegment Packets of LSP is: 0 Packets processed on each LSP egress OutSegment Errors of LSP is: 0 Errors processed on each LSP egress OutSegment Discard Packets of LSP is: 0 Discarded packets processed on each LSP egress LSP Index/LSP Name : 17416/dynamic-lsp InSegment Octets of LSP is: 0 InSegment Packets of LSP is: 0 InSegment Errors of LSP is: 0 InSegment Discard Packets of LSP is: 0 LSP Index/LSP Name : 17416/dynamic-lsp OutSegment Octets of LSP is: 0 OutSegment Packets of LSP is: 0 OutSegment Errors of LSP is: 0 OutSegment Discard Packets of LSP is: 0

Display MPLS statistics on all interfaces.

[3Com] display mpls statistics interface all Showing statistics about all MPLS interface: The statistics of interface : Serial6/0/0 The statistics of interface in : In Octets of Mpls interface is: 0 In Packets of Mpls interface is: 0 In Errors of Mpls interface is: 0 In Discard Packets of Mpls interface is: 0 The statistics of interface out :


Out Octets of Mpls interface is: 0 Out Packets of Mpls interface is: 0 Out Errors of Mpls interface is: 0 Out Discard Packets of Mpls interface is: 0 The statistics of interface : Serial6/0/1 The statistics of interface in : In Octets of Mpls interface is: 0 In Packets of Mpls interface is: 0 In Errors of Mpls interface is: 0 In Discard Packets of Mpls interface is: 0 The statistics of interface out : Out Octets of Mpls interface is: 0 Out Packets of Mpls interface is: 0 Out Errors of Mpls interface is: 0 Out Discard Packets of Mpls interface is: 0

Table 1 Description of the Output Information of the Display mpls statistics interface all Command

lsp-trigger Syntax

lsp-trigger { all | ip-prefix ip-prefix }

undo lsp-trigger { all | ip-prefix ip-prefix }

View

MPLS view

Parameter

all: Sets up LSPs at any routes.

ip-prefix: Sets up LSPs only at those routes with the specified IP prefix.

ip-prefix: IP address prefix list, in the range of 1~19.

Description

Using the lsp-trigger command, you can configure topology-triggered LSP creation policy. Using the undo lsp-trigger command, you can remove the filtering conditions specified by parameters and enable no route to trigger LSP creation.

By default, all kinds of routing protocols are filtered out.

If no topology-triggered policy is configured, LSPs can be established at all host routes with 32-bit masks.

Field DescriptionIn Octets of Mpls interface is: 0 Bytes coming from the interfaceIn Packets of Mpls interface is: 0 Packets coming from the interfaceIn Errors of Mpls interface is: 0 Packet processing errors coming from the

interfaceIn Discard Packets of Mpls interface is: 0 Discarded packets coming from the interfaceOut Octets of Mpls interface is: 0 Bytes sent from the interfaceOut Packets of Mpls interface is: 0 Packets sent from the interfaceOut Errors of Mpls interface is: 0 Packet processing errors sent from the

interfaceOut Discard Packets of Mpls interface is: 0 Discarded packets sent from the interface


If you import an IP-prefix rule without contents, LSPs can be established at all host routes according to the IP-prefix usage convention in VRP.


Example

Allow to set up LSPs at all routes.

[3Com-mpls] lsp-trigger all

mpls Syntax

mpls

View

System view, routing protocol view, interface view, virtual interface view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the mpls command in system view, you can enter MPLS view.

Using the mpls command in interface view, you can enable MPLS on the interface.

By default, MPLS view is not to be entered.

After executing the command, the user can enter MPLS view. Only after entering MPLS view, can the user configure other MPLS commands.

To enter MPLS view, the user should configure the mpls lsr-id command first.

For the related command, see mpls enable | disable.

Example

Enter MPLS view in system view.

[3Com] mpls[3Com-mpls]

Execute MPLS in interface view.

[3Com-Ethernet6/0/0] mplsMpls starting, please wait... OK!

mpls lsr-id Syntax

mpls lsr-id ip-address

undo mpls lsr-id

View

System view


Parameter

ip-address: LSR ID, with a form like IP address, used to identify an LSR.

Description

Using the mpls lsr-id command, you can configure an LSR ID. Using the undo mpls lsr-id command, you can delete an LSR ID.

By default, an LSR has no ID.

As a premise for configuring other MPLS commands, this command you can configure an LSR ID.

The form of an LSR ID resembles that of an IP address. It is recommended to use a loopback address of LSR.

For the related command, see display mpls interface.

Example

Configure the ID of the LSR as 202.17.41.246.

[3Com] mpls lsr-id 202.17.41.246

% Mpls lsr-id changed.

reset mpls statistics Syntax

reset mpls statistics { { interface { all | interface-type interface-num } } | { lsp lsp-index | all | name lsp-name } }

View

MPLS view

Parameter

all: All interfaces or all LSPs

interface-type: Type of a network interface.

Interface-num: Number of a network interface.

lsp-Index: LSP index

name lsp-name: Name of LSP.

Description

Using the reset mpls statistics command, you can clear MPLS statistics.

This command clears statistics on all or single interface(s) or on all or single LSP(s).

For the related command, see display mpls statistics.

Example

Clear statistics on the LSP named “Marlborough”.

[3Com] reset mpls statistics lsp name marlborough


snmp-agent trap enableldp

Syntax

snmp-agent trap enable ldp

undo snmp-agent trap enable ldp

View

System view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the snmp-agent trap enable ldp command, you can enable Trap function in MPLS LDP creation. Using the snmp-agent trap enable ldp command, you can disable Trap function in MPLS LDP creation.

By default, TRAP function is not enabled during MPLS LDP creation.

Example

Enable TRAP function during MPLS LDP creation.

[3Com] snmp-agent trap enable lDp

snmp-agent trap enablelsp

Syntax

snmp-agent trap enable lsp

undo snmp-agent trap enable lsp

View

System view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the snmp-agent trap enable lsp command, you can enable Trap function in MPLS LSP creation. Using the snmp-agent trap enable lsp command, you can disable Trap function in MPLS LSP creation.

By default, TRAP function is not enabled during MPLS LSP creation.

Example

Enable TRAP function during MPLS LSP creation.

[3Com] snmp-agent trap enable lsp

static-lsp egress Syntax

static-lsp egress lsp-name incoming-interface { interface-type interface-num in-label in-label-value

undo static-lsp egress lsp-name


View

MPLS view

Parameter

lsp-name: Name of LSP.



in-label-value: Value of inbound label, ranging from 16 to 1024.

Description

Using the static-lsp egress command, you can configure a static LSP for an egress LSR. Using the undo static-lsp egress command, you can delete an LSP for an egress LSR.

By default, this command can be used to configure a static LSP for an egress LSR.

For the related commands, see static-lsp ingress and debugging mpls.

Example

Configure a static LSP named “bj-sh” on the egress LSR.

[3Com-mpls] static-lsp egress bj-sh incoming-interface serial8/0/0 in-label 233

static-lsp ingress Syntax

static-lsp ingress lsp-name destination dest-addr { addr-mask | mask-length } { { nexthop next-hop-addr } | { outgoing-interface interface-type interface-num } } } out-label out-label-value

undo static-lsp ingress lsp-name

View

MPLS view

Parameter


dest-addr: Destination IP address.

addr-mask: Destination IP address mask.

mask-length: Mask length of destination IP address

next-hop-addr: Next-hop address.



out-label-value: Value of outbound label, ranging from 16 to 1024.


Description

Using the static-lsp ingress command, you can configure a static LSP for an ingress LSR. Using the undo static-lsp ingress command, you can delete an LSP for an ingress LSR.

This command can be used to configure a static LSP for ingress LSR and simultaneously set precedence value and metric value for the LSP.

For the related commands, see static-lsp egress, static-lsp transit, and debugging mpls.

Example

Configure a static LSP for the ingress LSR heading for the destination address 202.25.38.1.

[3Com-mpls] static-lsp ingress bj-sh destination 202.25.38.1 24 nexthop 202.55.25.33 out-label 237

static-lsp transit Syntax

static-lsp transit lsp-name incoming-interface interface-type interface-num in-label in-label-value { nexthop next-hop-addr | outgoing-interface interface-type interface-num } out-label out-label-value

undo static-lsp transit lsp-name

View

MPLS view

Parameter


interface-type: Type of an incoming or outgoing interface.

Interface-num: Number of an incoming or outgoing interface.

next-hop-addr: Next-hop address.

in-label-value: Value of inbound label, ranging from 16 to 1024.

out-label-value: Value of outbound label, ranging from 16 to 1024.

Description

Using the static-lsp transit command, you can configure a static LSP for transit LSR. Using the undo static-lsp transit command, you can delete an LSP for transit LSR.

This command can be used to configure a static LSP for transmit LSR.

For the related commands, see static-lsp egress and static-lsp ingress.

Example

Configure a static LSP for the serial interface Serial3/0/0 on transit LSR, with an inbound label of 123 and an outbound label of 253.

LDP Configuration Commands 769

[3Com-mpls] static-lsp transit bj-sh incoming-interface serial3/0/0 in-label 123 nexthop 202.34.114.7 out-label 253

statistic interval Syntax

statistics interval interval-time

undo statistics interval

View

MPLS view

Parameter

interval-time: Time interval in seconds. It ranges from 30 to 65535.

Description

Using the statistic interval command, you can configure the time interval for reporting statistics. Using the undo statistic interval command, you can restore the default value.

By default, the interval is 0 seconds, that is, not to report statistics.

Example

Configure the time interval as 30 seconds, that is, to report statistics every 30 seconds.

[3Com-mpls] statistics interval 30

LDP Configuration Commands

debugging mpls ldp Syntax

debugging mpls ldp { all | main | advertisement | session | pdu | notification | remote } [ interface interface-type interface-num ]

undo debugging mpls ldp { all | main | advertisement | session | pdu | notification | remote } [ interface interface-type interface-num ]

View

User view

Parameter

all: displays all debugging information related to LDP.

main: displays the debugging information of main LDP task.

advertisement: Displays the debugging information during processing LDP advertisement.

session: Displays debugging information during processing LDP session.

pdu: Displays the debugging information during processing PDU data packets.


notification: displays the debugging information while handling notification messages.

remote: Displays debugging information of all remote peers.

interface interface-type interface-num: Displays all the debugging information of a specified interface.

Description

Using the debugging ldp command, you can enable the debugging of various LDP messages. Using the undo debugging ldp command, you can disable the debugging of various LDP messages.

This command displays various LDP debugging information. You are recommended to use the command cautiously.

Example

Enable LDP debugging.

<3Com> debugging mpls ldp all

display mpls ldp Syntax

display mpls ldp

View

Any view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the display mpls ldp command, you can view LDP and LSR information.

By default, the command displays LDP and LSR information.

For the related command, see mpls ldp.

Example

Display LDP and LSR information.

[3Com] display mpls ldp

display mpls ldpbuffer-info

Syntax

display mpls ldp buffer-info

View

Any view

Parameter

None


Description

Using the display mpls ldp buffer-info command, you can view the buffer information of LDP.

Example

Display LDP buffer information.

[3Com] display mpls ldp buffer-info-----------------------------------------------------------------Buffer-Name Buffer-ID Buffer-Size Total-Count Free-Count-----------------------------------------------------------------ENTITY 0 292 199 195LOCAL-IF 1 36 200 196PEER-IF 2 40 201 195PDU 3 204 249 249ADJACENCY 4 56 201 198PEER-INF 5 116 201 198SESSION 6 176 201 198US-BLK 7 264 1052 1028DS-BLK 8 240 1052 1042FEC 9 40 1042 1032US-LIST 10 16 1052 1028TRIG-BLK 11 56 2076 2071LABEL-RANGE 12 20 198 198CR-TUNNEL 13 124 128 128ER-HOP 14 40 4096 4096IF-MSG 15 24 9999 9999----------------------------------------------------------------- Buffer no error.

display mpls ldpinterface

Syntax

display mpls ldp interface

View

Any view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the display mpls ldp interface command, you can view the information of an LDP-enabled interface.

For the related commands, see mpls ldp enable and display mpls ldp session.

Example

Display the information of an LDP-enabled interface.

[3Com-Ethernet3/0/0] display mpls ldp interface

display mpls ldp lsp Syntax

display mpls ldp lsp


View

Any view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the display mpls ldp lsp command, you can view relevant LSP information created via LDP.

For the related command, see display mpls lsp.

Example

Display LSP.

[3Com-Ethernet3/0/0] display mpls ldp lsp

display mpls ldp peer Syntax

display mpls ldp peer

View

Any view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the display mpls ldp peer command, you can display peer information.

By default, all peer information is displayed.

Example

Display peer information.

[3Com] display mpls ldp peer

display mpls ldp remote Syntax

display mpls ldp remote

View

Any view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the display mpls ldp remote command, you can display the configured remote peer information.

By default, all configured remote-peer information is displayed.


For the related commands, see mpls ldp remote and remote-peer.

Example

Display the configured remote-peer information.

[3Com] display mpls ldp remote

display mpls ldp session Syntax

display mpls ldp session

ViewAny view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the display mpls ldp session command, you can display the session between peers.

By default, the session between peers is displayed.

For the related command, see mpls ldp enable.

Example

Display the session between peers.

[3Com] display mpls ldp session

mpls ldp Syntax

mpls ldp

undo mpls ldp

View

System view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the mpls ldp command, you can enable LDP. Using the undo mpls ldp command, you can disable LDP.

By default, LDP is disabled.

Before enabling LDP, you must enable MPLS and configure LSR ID first.

For the related command, see mpls lsr-id.

Example

Enable LDP.


[3Com] mpls ldp

mpls ldp advertise Syntax

mpls ldp advertise { implicit-null | explicit-null | non-null }

undo mpls ldp advertise { implicit-null | explicit-null | non-null }

View

System view

Parameter

explicit-null: Specifies to assign explicit null label to the penultimate hop at egress.

implicit-null: Specifies to assign implicit null label to the penultimate hop at egress.

non-nul: Specifies to assign normal label to the penultimate hop at egress.

■ Label value 0 stands for IPv4 Explicit NULL Label, which is valid only at the bottom of label stack. That is, the label stack must be popped and forwarded as IPv4 header.

■ Label value 1 stands for Router Alert Label, which is valid except at the bottom of label stack. When receiving messages with label value 1 at the top of the label stack, the system forwards them into local software module for further processing. If a lower-layer label is to be forwarded, it must be put with Router Alert Label.

■ Label value 2 stands for IPv6 Explicit NULL Label, which is valid only at the bottom of label stack. That is, the label stack must be popped and forwarded as IPv4 header.

■ Label value 3 stands for Implicit NULL Label, which can be distributed and forwarded, but cannot be placed in encapsulation. When LSR switches top-layer labels, it only need to pop the labels, but cannot replace them when using label 3 to replace the original label.

■ Labels 4~15 are reserved.

Description

Using the mpls label advertise command, you can specify what label is to be assigned to the penultimate hop at egress node. Using the undo mpls label advertise command, you can restore the default value.

When the keyword explicit-null is selected, the m-layer label of a packet with m-layer label parameter will be popped at the penultimate LSR of the LSP, but not the egress LSR. This can lower operation restriction at egress node and mitigate the traffic at the egress node to a degree.

By default, implicit label is assigned to the penultimate hop at egress node.

If explicit null label is assigned to the penultimate hop, it can only reside at the bottom of the label stack.

Example

Specify at the egress to allocate general labels to the penultimate hop.


[3Com-mpls] mpls label advertise non-null

mpls ldp enable Syntax

mpls ldp enable

mpls ldp disable

View

Interface view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the mpls ldp enable command, you can enable LDP on an interface. Using the undo mpls ldp enable command, you can disable LDP on an interface.

By default, LDP is not enabled on an interface.

To enable an interface, you must enable LDP first. After LDP is enabled on an interface, peer discovery and session creation proceed.

Example

Enable LDP on the interface.

[3Com-Ethernet3/0/0] mpls ldp disable

mpls ldp hops-count Syntax

mpls ldp hops-count hop-number

undo mpls ldp hops-count

View

System view

Parameter

hop-number: The maximum hops of loop detection, ranging from 1 to 32.

Description

Using the mpls ldp hops-count command, you can set the maximum hops of loop detection. Using the undo mpls ldp hops-count command, you can restore the default value.

By default, the maximum hops of loop detection is 32.

This command should be configured before enabling LDP on all interfaces. Its value, which depends on actual networking situation, decides the loop detection speed during LSP creation

For the related commands, see mpls ldp loop-detection and mpls ldp path-vector.


Example

Set the maximum hops of loop detection to be 22.

[3Com] mpls ldp hops-count 22

Set the maximum hops of loop detection as 32, the default value.

[3Com] undo mpls ldp hops-count

mpls ldp loop-detect Syntax

mpls ldp loop-detect

undo mpls ldp loop-detect

View

System view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the mpls ldp loop-detect command, you can enable loop detection. Using the undo mpls ldp loop-detect command, you can disable loop detection.

By default, loop detection is disabled in the system.

This command should be configured before enabling LDP on all interfaces.

For the related commands, see mpls ldp hops-count, mpls ldp path-vectors.

Example

Enable loop detection.

[3Com] mpls ldp loop-detect

Disable loop detection.

[3Com] undo mpls ldp loop-detect

mpls ldp password Syntax

mpls ldp password [cipher | simple ] password

undo mpls ldp password

View

Interface view, remote-peer view

Parameter

simple: Transmitted in plain text.

cipher:Transmitted in encrypted text.

password: User password.


Description

Using the mpls ldp password command, you can configure LDP authentication mode. Using the undo mpls ldp password command, you can remove the configuration.

Example

Configure the LDP authentication mode to be in plain text, with a password of 123.

[3Com-Ethernet0/0/0.1] mpls ldp password simple 123

mpls ldp path-vectors Syntax

mpls ldp path-vectors pv-number

undo mpls ldp path-vectors

View

System view

Parameter

pv-number: The configured maximum value of path vector, ranging from 1 to 32.

Description

Using the mpls ldp path-vectors command, you can set the maximum value of path vector. Using the undo mpls ldp path-vectors command, you can restore the maximum value of path vector.

By default, pv-number is 32.

This command should be configured before enabling LDP on all interface. Its value, which depends on actual networking situation, decides the loop detection speed in LSP creation.

For the related commands, see mpls ldp loop-detection and mps ldp hops-count.

Example

Set the maximum value of path vector to be 23

[3Com] mpls ldp path-vectors 23

Restore the maximum value of path vector.

[3Com] undo mpls ldp path-vectors

mpls ldp remote-peer Syntax

mpls ldp remote-peer Index

undo mpls ldp remote-peer Index

View

System view or remote-peer view


Parameter

Index: Index of remote peer, used to identify an entity. It ranges from 0 to 99.

Description

Using the mpls ldp remote-peer command, you can create a remote-peer entity and enter remote-peer view. Using the undo mpls ldp remote-peer command, you can delete a remote-peer entity.

This command can create/delete a remote-peer so as to create remote session.

For the related command, see remote-peer.

Example

Create a remote-peer.

[3Com] mpls ldp remote-peer 22[3Com-mpls-remote22]

Delete a remote-peer.

[3Com-mpls-remote22] undo mpls ldp remote-peer 12[3Com]

mpls ldp reset-session Syntax

mpls ldp reset-session peer-address

View

Interface view

Parameter

peer-address: Corresponding LDP Peer address (in IP address format).

Description

Using the mpls ldp reset-session command, you can reset a specified session on an interface.

After LDP is configured on an interface and LDP session is created, this command can be used to reset a specified session on the interface only by specifying the address of the peer corresponding to the session to be reset.

For the related commands, see mpls ldp and mpls ldp enable.

Example

Reset the sessions at the interface Ethernet0/0/0.

[3Com-Ethernet0/0/0] mpls ldp reset-session 10.1.1.1

mpls ldp timer Syntax

mpls ldp timer { session-hold session-holdtime | hello hello-holdtime }

undo mpls ldp timer { session-hold | hello }


View

Interface view, remote-peer view

Parameter

hello hello-holdtime: Specifies hold time of hello timer, in seconds and the range of 6 seconds to 65535 seconds.

session-hold session-holdtime: Specifies hold time of session timer, in the range of 1 second to 65535 seconds.

By default,hello secs is 15 seconds, session-hold secs is 5 seconds.

Description

Using the mpls ldp timer command, you can set the duration of a Hello timer. Using the undo mpls ldp timer command, you can restore the default value.

Timeout of Hello timer means that the adjacency relation with the peer is down, while timeout of hold timer means that the session relation with the peer is down.

Generally speaking, the default value can be directly adopted. In special cases, it needs to be modified according to requirements. It should be noted that the modification of hello parameter may cause the original session to be recreated and the LSP created on the basis of this session will also be deleted and needs to be recreated.

In general, the transmission interval of hello/keepalive packets is one-third of the hold time of hello/session timer.

For the related commands, see mpls ldp and mpls ldp enable.

Example

Modify the duration of a Hello timer.

[3Com-Ethernet3/0/0] mpls ldp timer hello 30

mpls ldp transport-ip Syntax

mpls ldp transport-ip { interface | ip-address }

undo mpls ldp transport-ip

View

Interface view

Parameter

interface: Takes the IP address of the interface as the transport address.

ip-address: Takes the IP address as the transport address.

Description

Using the mpls ldp transport-ip command, you can configure an LDP transport address. Using the undo mpls ldp transport-ip command, you can restore the default LDP transport address.


By default, the transport address is the LSR ID of an LSR.

For a remote-peer, the configuration of transport address is not supported and its transport address is fixed as an LSR ID.

By default, LSR ID is required to be an address of a certain loopback interface and its peer should have route to the address of the loopback interface. Only in this way, can the session be successfully created. In the case of local peer, the address of the local interface or the Router ID of LSR can be adopted as its transport address.

Example

Take the address of the local interface as a transport address.

[Quidwa-Ethernet3/0/0] mpls ldp transport-ip interface

Take the address of another interface as the transport address.

[3Com-Ethernet3/0/0] mpls ldp transport-ip 10.1.11.2

remote-ip Syntax

remote-ip remoteip

View

Remote-peer view

Parameter

remote-ip: IP address of a remote peer.

Description

Using the remote-ip command, you can configure a remote IP address. The address should be the LSR ID of the remote LSR. For remote peers, as they adopt LSR ID as their transport address, two remote peers take their LSR ID as their transport addresses for creating TCP connection.

For the related command, see mpls ldp remote-peer.

Example

Configure the address of remote-peer.

[3Com] mpls ldp remote-peer 12[3Com-remote-peer12] remote-ip 192.168.1.

BGP/MPLS VPN Configuration Commands

apply access-vpnvpn-instance

Syntax

apply access-vpn vpn-instance { vpn-name1 vpn-name2 … }

undo apply access-vpn vpn-instance { vpn-name1 vpn-name2 … }

BGP/MPLS VPN Configuration Commands 781

View

Route-policy view

Parameter

vpn-name: Name of the configured VPN instance. At most, 6 VPN names can be configured.

Description

Using the apply access-vpn vpn-instance command, you can specify packet to search private network forwarding route in vpn-name1, vpn-name2, vpn-name3, vpn-name4, vpn-name5, vpn-name6(if they all exist) and perform the corresponding forwarding after policy route is enabled. Using the undo apply access-vpn vpn-instance command, you can remove this function.

Example

Specify the configured VPN instance.

[3Com-route-policy] apply access-vpn vpn-instance vpn1

debugging bgp Syntax

debugging bgp [ { { keepalive | open | packet | update | route-refresh } [ receive | send | verbose ] } { all | event | normal }

undo debugging bgp [ { { keepalive | open | packet | update | route-refresh } [ receive | send | verbose ] } { all | event | normal }

View

User view

Parameter

keepalive: Displays BGP keepalives.

open: Displays BGP OPEN packet information.

packet: Displays BGP packets.

update: Displays BGP updates.

route-refresh: Displays BGP route refreshing packets.

receive: Displays received information.

send: Displays sent information.

verbose: Displays detailed information

all: Displays debugging of all levels.

event: Displays BGP event.

normal: Displays BGP normal debugging function.


Description

The debugging bgp command you can display the information concerning BGP processing. The undo debugging bgp command you can disable debugging function.

Example<3Com> debugging bgp vpnv4

description Syntax

description vpn-instance-description

undo description

View

Vpn-instance view

Parameter

vpn-instance-description: Specify the description information of VPN instance.

Description

Using the description command, you can configure description information for specified VPN instance. Using the undo description command, you can remove the description of VPN instance.

Example

Display description information of VPN.

[3Com-vpn-vpna] description 3com

display bgp vpnv4 Syntax

display bgp vpnv4 { all | route-distinguisher rd-value | vpn-instance vpn-instance-name } { group | network | peer | routing-table }

View

Any view

Parameter

all: Displays all VPNv4 database.

route-distinguisher: rd-value: Displays matching route distinguisher(RD) and network layer reachable information(NLRI).

vpn-instance: vpn-instance-name: Displays network layer reachable information(NLRI) associated with the specified vpn-instance.

group: Displays the information related to peer groups.

network: Displays the networks advertised through BGP.

peer: Displays the information of the connections.


routing-table: Displays BGP routes.

Description

Using the display bgp vpnv4 command, you can display VPNv4 information in BGP database.

Example

Display the information about all BGP VPNV4 peers.

[3Com] display bgp vpnv4 allBGP local router ID is 1.1.248.23Status codes: s suppressed, d damped, h history, * valid, > best, i internalOrigin codes: i – IGP, e – EGP, ? - incomplete Network Next Hop Label Metric LocPrf PathRoute Distinguisher:100:9 (default for vpn-instance vpn-instance_1)*> 192.5.1.0 0.0.0.0 16/0

display ip routing-tablevpn-instance

Syntax

display ip routing-table vpn-instance vpn-instance-name [ ip-address ] [ verbose ]

View

Any view

Parameter

vpn-instance-name: Name assigned to vpn-instance.

ip-address: Displays information of the specified address.

verbose: Displays the detailed information.

Description

Using the display ip routing-table vpn-instance command, you can view the specified information in the IP routing table of vpn-instance.

Example

Display the IP routing table associated with the vpn-instance.

[3Com] display ip routing-table vpn-instance vpn-instance1Routing Table: vpn-instance1 RD: 1233:11Destination/Mask ProtoPreMetric Nexthop Interface192.1.1.0/24 Direct0 0192.1.1.1 GigabitEthernet1/0/0192.1.1.1/32 Direct0 0127.0.0.1 InLoopBack0192.1.1.255/32 Direct0 0127.0.0.1 InLoopBack0

display ip vpn-instance Syntax

display ip vpn-instance [ vpn-instance-name | verbose ]

View

Any view


Parameter



Description

Using the display ip vpn-instance command, you can view such information associated with vpn-instance as the VPN instance RD, description and associated interface.

Example

Display the information about vpn-instance 3Com.

[3Com] display ip vpn-instance 3comVPN-Instance : vpn1 No description Route-Distinguisher : 100:6 Interfaces : Ethernet0/0/0.101

display ospf sham-link Syntax

display ospf sham-link

View

Any view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the display ospf sham-link command, you can view the information of sham links.

For the related command, see sham-link.

Example

Display the information of sham links.

<3Com>display ospf sham-linkOSPF Process 1 with Router ID 1.1.1.1 Sham Links Sham-link 3.3.3.3 -> 5.5.5.5, State: Down Area: 0.0.0.1Cost: 1 State: Down Type: ShamTimers: Hello 10, Dead 40, Poll 0, Retransmit 5, Transmit Delay 1

display mpls l3vpn-lsp Syntax

display mpls l3vpn-lsp [ verbose] [ include text ]

View

Any view


Parameter

include text: Displays the MPLS L3VPN LSPs with the specified FEC string.


Description

Using the display mpls l3vpn-lsp include command, you can view the information of MPLS L3VPN LSPs.

Example

Display the label swith path vpn-instance relative information of mpls l3vpn.

<3Com> display mpls l3vpn-lsp transit--------------------------------------------------------------------LSP Information: L3vpn Transit Lsp--------------------------------------------------------------------

TOTAL: 0 Record(s) Found.

Display the label swith path relative information of mpls l3vpn.

[3Com] display mpls l3vpn-lsp include 3com

display mpls l3vpn-lspvpn-instance

Syntax

display mpls l3vpn-lsp [ vpn-instance vpn-instance-name ] [ transit | egress | ingress ] [include ip-address length-prefix | verbose ]

View

Any view

Parameter

transit: LSP of ASBR VPN

egress: LSP of egress VPN

ingress: LSP of ingress VPN

vpn-instance: VPN Routing/Forwarding instance name.

include text: Displays the MPLS L3VPN LSPs with the specified FEC string.


Description

Using the display ip routing-table vpn-instance command, you can view the vpn-instance information of MPLS L3VPN LSPs.

Example

Display the vpn-instance information of MPLS L3VPN LSPs.

<3Com> display mpls l3vpn-lsp transit--------------------------------------------------------------------LSP Information: L3vpn Transit Lsp--------------------------------------------------------------------


TOTAL: 0 Record(s) Found.

domain-id Syntax

domain-id { id-number | id-addr }

undo domain-id

View

OSPF protocol view

Parameter

id-number: Domain ID for a VPN instance, in range of 0~4294967295. By default, it is 0.

id-addr: IP address format of the domain ID in VPN instance. By default, it is 0.0.0.0.

Description

Using the domain-id command, you can specify domain ID for a VPN instance. Using the undo domain-id command, you can restore the default domain ID.

For standard BGP/OSPF interoperability, when importing routes to OSPF are configured at the PE, their original OSPF attributes cannot be restored. If these BGP VPN IP routes are issued to CE as ASE LSA (type-5 LAS), they cannot be distinguished from other routes imported from other route domains. In order to distinguish external routes imported form OSPF internal routes, it is required to restore their OSPF attributes in importing BGP routes to OSPF, so an OSPF domain can be configured with a domain ID. The domain-id is attached to the corresponding BGP/VPN route in importing OSPF route into BGP/VPN for transmission over BGP/VPN route. Then in importing BGP route into the peer PE, LAS values are filled in according to the extended community attributes. If the domain IDs are the same for the BGP VPN IP routes received, they are from the same VPN instance.

By default, the domain ID is 0.

The specified domain ID will not take effect until the reset ospf command is executed.

Example

Configure domain ID 100 for OSPF procedure 100.

[3Com-ospf-100]domain-id 100[3Com-ospf-100]domain-id 0.0.0.100

import-route Syntax

import-route { ospf | ospf-ase | ospf-nssa } [ process-id ] [ med value | route-policy route-policyname ]

undo import-route { ospf | ospf-ase | ospf-nssa } [ process-id ]


View

BGP unicast/multicast VPN-instance address family view, MBGP Interface VPN-instance address family view

Parameter

process-id: OSPF procedure ID. By default, it is 1.

ospf: When only OSPF procedure ID is imported, ASE internal route is taken as external route information.

ospf-ase: When only OSPF procedure ID is imported, OSPF-ASE route is taken as external route information.

ospf-nssa: When only OSPF procedure ID is imported, OSPF-NSSA route is taken as external route information.

med value: Route cost value

route-policyname: Route policy name

Description

Using the ip binding vpn-instance command, you can enable to import OSPF route. Using the undo ip binding vpn-instance command, you can disable to import OSPF route.

CAUTION: By default, the procedure ID IS 1.

Example

Enable to import an OSPF route with procedure ID 100.

[3Com] ip vpn-instance sphinx[3Com-vpn-sphinx] route-distinuisher 168.168.55.1:85[3Com-vpn-sphinx] quit[3Com] bgp 352[3Com-bgp] ip vpn-instance sphinx[3Com-bgp-af-vpn-instance] import-route ospf 100

ip binding vpn-instance Syntax

ip binding vpn-instance vpn-instance-name

undo ip binding vpn-instance vpn-instance-name

View

Interface view

Parameter


Description

Using the ip binding vpn-instance command, you can connect an interface or sububterface with a vpn-instance. Using the undo ip binding vpn-instance command, you can remove the connection.


By default, global routing table is configured.

The IP address of the interface will be removed if executing this command on it, so the IP address of the interface needs to be reconfigured.

Example

Bind VPN instance vpn1 to the interface atm0/0/0.

[3Com] interface atm1/0/0[3Com-Atm1/0/0] ip binding vpn-instance vpn1

ip route-staticvpn-instance

Syntax

ip route-static vpn-instance { vpn--name1 vpn-name2 …| ip-address1 } { mask | mask-length } { interface-name | [ vpn-instance vpn-name-nexthop ip-address2 ] } [ public ] [ preference preference-value ] [ reject | blackhole ]

undo ip route-static vpn-instance { vpn-name1 vpn-name2 …| ip-address1 } { mask | mask-length } { interface-name | [ vpn-instance vpn-name-nexthop ip-address2 ] } [ preference preference-value ] [ reject | blackhole ]

View

System view

Parameter

vpn-name: Name of VPN instance can be configured 6 names at most.

ip-address: Destination address of the static route.

mask: Address mask.

mask-length: Length of the mask. As "1" in the 32 bit-mask is required to be consecutive, the mask in dotted decimal format can be substituted by mask-length. (mask-length is represented by the number of consecutive "1"s in the mask.)

interface-name: Out-interface name of static route. It can specify the interface of public network or other vpn-instances as the out-interface of the static route.

vpn-nexthop-name: Next hop vpn-instance of the static route.

ip-address2: Next hop IP address of the static route.

reject: Configures a route as unreachable.

blackhole: Configures a route as blackhole.

Description

Using the ip route-static vpn-instance command, you can configure static route, specifying an private network interface as the out-interface of this static route. In the application background of multi-role host, you can configure a static route in a private network with an interface of another private network or public network as its out-interface. Using the undo ip route-static vpn-instance command, you can remove the configuration of this static route.


Example

Configure static route with destination address 100.1.1.1, next hop address 1.1.1.2.

[3Com] ip route-static vpn-instance vpn1 100.1.1.1 16 vpn-instance vpn1 1.1.1.2

ip vpn-instance Syntax

ip vpn-instance vpn-name

undo ip vpn-instance vpn-name

View

System view, routing protocol view

Parameter

vpn-name: Name assigned to vpn-instance.

Description

Using the ip vpn-instance command, you can create and configure a vpn-instance. Using the undo ip vpn-instance command, you can delete the specified vpn-instance.

By default, vpn-instance is not defined. Neither input nor output list is associated with vpn-instance. no route-map is associated with vpn-instance.

Use the ip vpn-instance command to create a vpn-instance named vpn-name.

Example

Create VPN instance vpn1.

[3Com] ip vpn-instance vpn1[3Com-vpn-vpn1]

ipv4-family Syntax

ipv4-family [ vpnv4 [ unicast ] | multicast | vpn-instance vpn-instance-name ]

undo ipv4-family [ vpnv4 [ unicast ] | multicast | vpn-instance vpn-instance-name ]

View

BGP view

Parameter

multicast: IPv4 multicast address used by the address family. This parameter is used to enter MBGP multicast address family view.

vpn-instance vpn-instance-name: Associates the specified vpn-instance example with the IPv4 address family. This parameter is used to enter MBGP vpn-instance address family view.

unicast: IPv4 unicast address used by the address family.


Description

Using the ipv4-family command, you can enter BGP IPv4 address family view or MBGP VPNv4 address family view. Using the undo ipv4-family command, you can delete the configuration of specified address family view or MBGP VPNv4 address family view.

By default, unicast address is used when configuring VPNv4 address family.

By default, unicast address is used when configuring IPv4 address family.

Use this command to enter address family view and configure parameters associated with address family for BGP in this view.

The ipv4-family vpn-instance command you can enter MBGP vpn-instance address family view.

The undo ipv4-family vpn-instance vpn-instance-name command you can remove the association of the specified vpn-instance example with IPv4 address family to exit to BGP unicast view.

For the related command, see peer enable.

Example

Associate the specified vpn-instance example with IPv4 address family to enter MBGP vpn-instance address family view, which can be configured only after vpn-instance has been configured.

[3Com] bgp 100[3Com–bgp] ipv4 family vpn-instance abc[3Com-bgp-af-vpn-instance]

Enter VPNv4 address family view.

[3Com] bgp 100[3Com-bgp] ipv4 family vpnv4 unicast[3Com-bgp-af-vpn]

ospf Syntax

ospf process-id [ router-id router-id-number ] [ vpn-instance vpn-instance-name ]

undo ospf process-id

View

System view

Parameter

process-id: OSPF procedure ID. By default, it is 1.

router-id-number: Router ID for OSPF procedure, optional

vpn-instance-name: VPN instance bound to the OSPF procedure


Description

Using the ospf command, you can an enable OSPF procedure. Using the undo ospf command, you can disable an OSPF procedure.

After enabling OSPF procedure, you can perform OSPF configurations in the OSPF protocol view.

By default, no OSPF protocol is enabled.

VRP supports multiple OSPF procedures, so you can specify different procedure IDs to enable multiple OSPF procedures on a router.

It is recommended to specify procedure route-id with the router-id parameter in enabling OSPF procedure. If you want to enable multiple processes on a router, you are recommended to specify different router IDs for different procedures.

To enable an OSPF procedure belonging to public network without specifying router ID, the following conditions should be satisfied:

■ RM is configured with router ID.

■ There is an interface which configured with IP address.

If router ID is not specified in enabling OSPF procedure and binding the procedure with a VPN instance is required, an interface must exist which has been configured with IP address.

If you want to bind a procedure to a VPN instance, you must specify VPN instance name.

One VPN instance may include several procedures. For example, for the VPN instance 1, you can configure it into OSPF procedures 1, 2 and 3 with the commands ospf 1 vpn-instance vpn1, ospf 2 vpn-instance vpn1, and ospf 3 vpn-instance vpn1.

But one procedure can belong to only one instance. If you have executed ospf 1 vpn-instance vpn1, you cannot configure ospf 1 vpn-instance vpn2. Otherwise, the system prompts the information “Wrong configuration. Process 1 has been bound to vpn-instance VRF1”. If you configure ospf 1 first and then execute ospf 1 vpn-instance vpn1, the system prompts the information “Wrong configuration. Process 1 has been running in public domain”.

If you execute ospf 1 vpn-instance vpn1 first and then configure ospf 1, the system enters ospf 1 vpn-instance vpn1 view, in which the commands ospf 1 and ospf 1 vpn-instance vpn1 are equivalent.

When an OSPF procedure is bound to a VPN instance, the default OSPF router is PE router. After executing the display ospf process-id brief command, you will get the information “PE router, connected to VPN backbone”.

CAUTION: ■ A router can run a maximum of 1024 OSPF procedures, with up to 10

procedures in each VPN instance.


■ If you bind an OSPF procedure to a nonexistent VPN instance, the command fails in executing and the system prompts the information “Specified vpn instance not configured”.

■ When a VPN instance is deleted, all OSPF procedures associated to it will be deleted. For example, suppose VPN instance vpn1 includes OSPF procedures 1, 2 and 3. If VPN instance vpn1 is deleted, the OSPF procedures 1, 2 and 3 will all be deleted.

For the related command, see network.

Example

Enable the default OSPF procedure 1.

[3Com] router id 10.110.1.8[3Com] ospf

Enable OSPF procedure 120 and run OSPF protocol.

[3Com] router id 10.110.1.8[3Com] ospf 120[3Com-ospf-120]

Enable OSPF procedure 100, specify its route ID as 2.2.2.2 and bind it to the VPN instance vpn1.

[3Com] ospf 100 router-id 2.2.2.2 vpn-instance vpn1[3Com-ospf-100]

peer allow-as-loop Syntax

peer { group-name | peer-address } allow-as-loop asn-limit

undo peer { group-name | peer-address } allow-as-loop asn-limit

View

BGP view, MBGP IPv4-family view

Parameter

group-name: Name of the peer group

ip-address: specified IP address of peer.

asn-limit: The maximum number allowed in received route updates of the local autonomous system number AS.

Description

Using the peer allow-as-loop command, you can enable route loop detection in the received route updates in hub&spoke networking mode. Using the undo peer allow-as-loop command, you can prohibit loop to occur in the received route updates.

By default, loop information is prohibited in the received route update information.


In the case of standard BGP, BGP tests routing loop via AS number. In the case of Hub&Spoke networking, however, PE carries the AS number of the local autonomous system when advertising the routing information to CE, if EBGP is run between PE and CE. Accordingly, the updated routing information will carry the AS number of the local autonomous system when route update is received from CE. In this case, PE cannot receive the route update information.

This phenomenon can be avoided by using the peer allow-as-loop command, which makes PE router allow the route update information received from CE to contain AS number of itself. The allowed maximum number is controlled by using the parameter asn-imit.

Example

Enable route loop detection in the received route updates.

[3Com-bgp] ipv4-family vpn-instance one[3Com-bgp-af-vpn-instance] peer 1.1.1.1 allow-as-loop 1

peer as-number Syntax

peer { group-name | [ peer-address group group-name ] } as-number as-number

undo peer { group-name | [ peer-address group group-name] } as-number as-number

View

BGP view, MBGP vpn-instance view

Parameter

group-name: Peer group name.

peer-address: IP address of a peer.

as-number: Peer end AS number of a peer (group).

DescriptionUsing the peer as-number command, you can configure the remote AS number of the specified peer (group). Using the undo peer as-number command, you can remove the remote AS number of the specified peer (group).

By default, a peer of the peer (group) has no AS number.

Example

Set the remote AS number of the specified peer (group) to 100.

[3Com-bgp] peer test as-number 100

peer enable Syntax

peer group-name enable

undo peer group-name enable

View

BGP view, MBGP VPNv4 view


Parameter

group-name: Peer group name

Description

Using the peer enable command, you can enable the specified peer (group). Using the undo peer enable command, you can disable the specified peer (group).

For IPv4 address family, address switching is enabled by default.

Example

Enable the peer (group) 168.

[3Com-bgp-af-vpn] peer 168 enable

peer connect-interface Syntax

peer { group-name | ip-address } connect-interface interface-type interface-number

undo peer { group-name | ip-address } connect-interface interface-type interface-number

View

BGP view, MBGP vpn-instance view

Parameter




interface-number: Name of the interface.

Description

Using the peer connect-interface command, you can configure to allow the internal BGP session to use any operable interface that connects with TCP. Using the undo peer connect-interface command, you can restore to use the best local address to implement TCP connection.

By default, BGP uses the best local address to implement TCP connection.

Generally, BGP uses the best local address to implement TCP connection. In order to make the TCP connection valid even when the interface fails, the internal BGP session can be configures to be allowed to use any operable TCP-connected interface (For example, Loopback interface).

Example

Allow the internal BGP session to use any operable interface that connects with TCP.

[3Com-bgp-af-vpn-instance] peer 1.1.1.1 connect-interface loopback 0


peerdefault-route-advertise

Syntax

peer { group-name | peer-address } default-route-advertise

undo peer { group-name | peer-address } default-route-advertise

View


Parameter



Description

Using the peer default-route-advertise command, you can enable a peer (group) to import a default route. Using the undo peer default-route-advertise command, you can remove the existing setting.

By default, no default route is redistributed to a peer (group).

This command does not require any default route in the routing table but transmits a default route whose next hop address is itself to the peer unconditionally.

Example

Enable the peer (group) test to import a default route.

[3Com–bgp] peer test as-number[3Com–bgp] peer test default-route-advertise

peer next-hop-local Syntax

peer { group-name | peer-address } next-hop-local

undo peer { group-name | peer-address } next-hop-local

View


Parameter



Description

Using the peer next-hop-local command, you can remove the processing of the next hop in the routes that BGP advertises to a peer (group) and configure to use its self-address as the next-hop. Using the undo peer next-hop-local command, you can remove the existing setting.

Example

Specify the local IP address as the next hop in BGP's route advertising to the peer (group).


[3Com-bgp-af-vpn] peer test next-hop-local

peer public-as-only Syntax

peer { group-name | peer-address } public-as-only

undo peer { group-name | peer-address } public-as-only

View


Parameter



Description

Using the peer public-as-only command, you can configure not to carry private AS number when transmitting BGP update packets. Using the undo peer public-as-only command, you can configure to carry private AS number when transmitting BGP update packets.

By default, private AS number is carried when transmitting BGP update packets.

Generally, BGP carries the AS number (either public or private AS number) when transmitting BGP update packets. BGP can be configured not to carry the private AS number so that some output routers may ignore the private AS number when transmitting BGP update packets.

Example

Send MBGP update packets without bearing private AS number.

[3Com-bgp-af-vpn] peer 168 public-as-only

peer upe Syntax

peer peer-address upe

undo peer peer-address} upe

View

BGP view

Parameter


Description

Using the peer upe command, you can configure BGP peer as the UPE of hierarchical BGP/MPLS VPN. Using the undo peer upe command, you can remove this configuration.

Example

Configure BGP peer as the UPE of hierarchical BGP/MPLS VPN.


[3Com-bgp] ipv4-family vpnv4[3Com-bgp-af-vpn] peer 1.1.1.1 upe

route-distinguisher Syntax

route-distinguisher route-distinguisher

View

vpn-instance view

Parameter

route-distinguisher: Configures a VPN IPv4 prefix by adding an 8-byte value to a IPv4 prefix.

Description

Using the route-distinguisher command, you can configure RD for an MPLS VPN instance. A vpn-instance cannot run until it is configured with an RD.

A route distinguisher (RD) creates route and forwarding list for a VPN and specify default route identifier. Add RD to a specific IPv4 prefix start to make it the only VPN IPv4 prefix.

If ID is associated with autonomous system number(ASN), it is a combination of an autonomous system number and an arbitrary number; if RD is associated with IP address, it is a combination of an IP address and an arbitrary number.

RD has the following formats:

16-bit ASN: 32-bit number defined by user, for example, 101:3.

32-bit IP address: 16-bit number defined by user, for example, 192.168.122.15:1.

Example

Configure RD for the MPLS VPN instance.

[3Com] ip vpn-instance vpn_blue[3Com-vpn-vpn_blue] route-distinguisher 100:3[3Com] ip vpn-instance vpn_red[3Com-vpn-vpn_red] route-distinguisher 173.13.0.12:200

route-tag Syntax

route-tag tag-number

undo route-tag

View

OSPF protocol view

Parameter

tag-number: Tag value to identify VPN import route, in range of 0~4294967295. By default, its first two fields are fixed to 0xD000, while the last two fields are the ASN of local BGP. For example, if local BGP ASN is 100, then the default tag value in decimal is 3489661028.


Description

Using the route-tag command, you can specify a tag value to identify VPN import route. Using the undo route-tag command, you can restore the default value.

If a VPN site is linked to multiple PEs, when the route learned from MPLS/BGP is advertised by a PE router via its type-5 or type-7 LSA to the VPN site, the route may be received by another PE router. This will result in route loop. To avoid route loop, you should configure route-tag and it is recommended to configure the same route-tag for the PEs in the same VPN domain. The route-tag is included in the type-5/-7 LSA. The route-tag is not transmitted in the extended community attributes of BGP, but can only be configured and function on the PE router which receives BGP route and generates OSPF LSA.

Configure route-tag in OSPF protocol view. Different processes can be configured with a same route-tag. You can configure the same route-tag with different commands, but with different priority levels.

■ Those configured with the import-route command are of highest priority level.

■ Those configured with the route-tag command are in the second place in terms of priority level.

■ Those configure with the default tag command are of the lowest priority level.

If the route-tag included in the type-5/-7 LSA is identical with its existing tag, the LSA received will be neglected in route calculation.

CAUTION: The route-tag configured will not take effect until the reset ospf command is executed.

For the related commands, see import-route and default.

Example

Configure route-tag 100 to OSPF procedure 100.

[3Com-ospf-100] route-tag 100OSPF: Process 100's route tag has been changedOSPF: Reload or use 'reset ospf' command for this to take effect

vpn-target Syntax

vpn-target vpn-target-ext-community [ import-extcommunity | export-extcommunity | both ]

undo vpn-target vpn-target-ext-community [ import-extcommunity | export-extcommunity | both ]

View

Vpn-instance view

Parameter

import-extcommunity: Ingress route information from the extended community of target VPN.

export-extcommunity: Egress route information to the extended community of target VPN.


both: Imports ingress and egress route information to the extended community of target VPN.

vpn-target-ext-community: Adds vpn-target extended community attribute to the ingress and egress of vpn-instance or the vpn-target extended community list of ingress and egress.

Description

Using the vpn-target command, you can create vpn-target extended community for vpn-instance. Using the undo vpn-target command, you can remove the vpn-target extended community attribute.

By default, the default value is both.

The vpn-target command you can create ingress and egress route target extended community list for specified vpn-instance. Execute this command once for each target community. Import the received route bearing the specific route target extended community to all vpn-instances, which are configured extended community as ingress route target. Vpn-target specifies a target VPN extended community. Same as RD, an extended community is either composed with an autonomous system number and an arbitrary number or composed with an IP address and an arbitrary number.

Extended community has the following formats:

16-bit ASN: 32-bit number defined by user, for example, 100:1.

32-bit IP address: 16-bit number defined by user, for example, 172.1.1.1:1.

Example

Create vpn-target extended community for the vpn-instance.

[3Com] ip vpn-instance vpn_red[3Com-vpn-vpn_red] vpn-target 1000:1 both [3Com-vpn-vpn_red] vpn-target 1000:2 export-extcommunity [3Com-vpn-vpn_red] vpn-target 173.27.0.130:2 import-extcommunity

routing-table limit Syntax

routing-table limit { warn threshold | simply-alert }

undo routing-table limit

View

MBGP vpn-instance view

Parameter

limit: Specifies the route maximum allowed in a vpn-instance.

warn threshold: Rejects routes when the threshold value is reached. This threshold value is the percentage of the specified route maximum from 1 to 100.

simply-alert: When the route maximum specified for a vpn-instance exceeds the threshold, routes can be added and only a SYSLOG error message is sent out.


Description

Using the routing-table limit command, you can limit the route maximum in a vpn-instance, to avoid too many routes in the ingress interface of the PE router. Using the undo routing-table limit command, you can remove the limitation.

It is necessary to enter the vpn-instance sub-view before using the routing-table command. Create a vpn-instance routing table in this view and allocate a route distinguisher (RD) in one of the following formats:

16-bit AS number (ASN): 32-bit user-defined number, e.g., 100:1.

32-bit IP address: 16-bit user-defined number, e.g., 172.1.1.1:1.

Create a vpn-target extended community for a vpn-instance and specify ingress or egress interface or both of them for the vpn-target command. These parameters can be used to configure input and ingress/egress routing information of the destination VPN extended community for a router.

Example[3Com] ip vpn-instance vpn1[3Com-vpn- vpn1] route-distinguisher 100:1[3Com-vpn- vpn1] vpn-target 100:1 import-extcommunity [3Com-vpn- vpn1] routing-table limit 1000 simply-alert

sham-link Syntax

sham-link source-addr destination-addr [ cost cost-value ] [ dead seconds ] [ hello seconds ] [ md5 keyid key seconds ] [ retransimit seconds ] [ simple password ] [ trans-delay seconds ]

undo sham-link source-addr destination-addr

View

OSPF area view

Parameter

source-addr: Source address of sham-link, a loopback interface address with 32-bit mask

destination-addr: Destination address of sham-link, a loopback interface address with 32-bit mask

cost-value: Cost at sham link, in the range of 1~65535. By default, it is 1.

password: Specify authentication string in plain text at the interface, 8 characters at most. It must be consistent with the authentication string of sham link peer.

keyid: Specifies MD5 authentication string at the interface, in range of 1~255 characters. It must be consistent with the authentication string of sham link peer.

key: Specifies authentication string at the interface, 16 characters at most. It must be consistent with the authentication string of sham link peer. When the display current-configuration command is executed, the system displays the 24-character


MD5 authentication string in cipher text. You can also input 24-character authentication string in cipher text.

dead seconds: Specifies interval for the dead timer, in range of 1~8192 seconds. By default, it is 40 seconds. It must be consistent with the dead seconds value for sham link peer.

hello seconds: Specifies interval between Hello message transmission at the interface, in range of 1~8192 seconds. By default, it is 10 seconds. It must be consistent with the hello seconds value for sham link peer.

retransmit seconds: Specifies internal for LSA message retransmission at the interface, in range of 1~8192 seconds. By default, it is 5 seconds.

trans-delay seconds: Specifies delay period for LSA message transmission at the interface, in range of 1~8192 seconds. By default, it is 1 second.

Description

Using the sham-link command, you can configure a sham link. Using the undo sham-link command, you can delete a sham link.

In the OSPF PE-CE connection, suppose that in an OSPF area there are two sites which belong to the same VPN, with each connected to different PE router and an intra-domain link (backdoor) established between them. Though there may be other routes connecting the two sites via the PE router, these routes are just intra-domain routes, so OSPF will select those routes through the backdoor first. Sometimes, the routes through VPN backbone are desired to be selected first, then it is required to establish sham link between PE routers. In this case, the routes through VPN backbone are of the highest priority within the OSPF area.

The sham link between VPN PE routers is taken as a link within the OSPF area. Its source and destination addresses are both loopback interface addresses with 32-bit mask. This loopback interface must be bound with a VPN instance and imported into BGP through a direct-connect route. The optional parameters can be appended in the sham link command and only those appended in the sham link command can be selected in the undo command.

CAUTION:

■ The source and destination addresses of a sham link are both loopback interface addresses with 32-bit mask. This loopback interface must be bound with a VPN instance and imported into BGP through a direct-connect route.

■ The source and destination addresses of a sham link cannot be the same.

■ The same sham link cannot be configured in the different OSPF procedures.

■ A maximum of 50 sham link can be configured in an OSPF procedure.

Example

Configure a sham link, with source address 1.1.1.1 and destination address 2.2.2.2.

[3Com-ospf-100-area-0.0.0.1] sham-link 1.1.1.1 2.2.2.2 cost 100


vpn-instance-capabilitysimple

Syntax

vpn-instance-capability simple

undo vpn-instance-capability

View

OSPF protocol view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the routing-table limit command, you can configure a router as Multi-VPN-Instance CE. Using the undo routing-table limit command, you can remove the configuration.

OSPF multi-VPN-instance application is often run at the PE router, so the CE router on which OSPF multi-VPN-instance application runs is called Multi-VPN-Instance CE. Though they both support multi-VPN-instance application, Multi-VPN-Instance CE does not necessarily support BGP/OSPF interoperability.

When OSPF procedures are bound with VPN instances, the default OSPF router serves as PE router. This command will remove the default configuration and change a router into Multi-VPN-Instance CE. Then OSPF procedure will set up all peers again. DN bits and route-tag will not be check in routing calculation. To prevent route loss, loop test function is disabled on PE routes. MGP/OSPF interoperability is also disabled to save system resources.

After the display ospf brief command is executed successfully, the system prompts the information “Multi-VPN-Instance enable on CE router”.

CAUTION: OSPF process will set up all peers again after this command is run.

Example

Configure OSPF procedure 100 as Multi-VPN-Instance CE.

[3Com-ospf-100] vpn-instance-capability simple

Restore the OSPF procedure 100 as PE.

[3Com-ospf-100] undo vpn-instance-capability

MPLS L2VPN CCC Configuration Commands

ccc interfacetransmit-lsp receive-lsp

Syntax

ccc ccc-connection-name interface interface-type interface-number transmit-lsp transmit-lsp-name receive-lsp receive-lsp-name

undo ccc ccc-connection-name

MPLS L2VPN CCC Configuration Commands 803

View

System view

Parameter

interface-type interface-number: Interface for the remote connection.

ccc-connection-name: CCC connection name of 1 to 20 characters in length, which uniquely identifies a CCC inside a PE.

transmit-lsp-name: Name of the transmit-LSP.

receive-lsp-name: Name of the receive-LSP.

Description

Using the ccc interface transmit-lsp receive-lsp command, you can create a remote CCC connection. Using the undo ccc command, you can delete a remote CCC connection.

You can delete a CCC connection in the interface or system view.

For the related command, see ccc interface out-interface.

Example

Create a remote CCC connection clink, with the transmit-LSP being tlsp and the receive-LSP being rlsp.

[3Com-Ethernet3/0/0] ccc clink interface serial0/0/0 transmit-lsp tlsp receive-lsp rlsp

ccc interfaceout-interface

Syntax

ccc ccc-connection-name interface interface-type interface-number out-interface outinterface-type outinterface-num

undo ccc ccc-connection-name

View

System view

Parameter

ccc-connection-name: CCC connection name of 1 to 20 characters, which is used for uniquely identifying the CCC inside the PE.

interface-type interface-number: Interface connected to the first CE

outinterface-type outinterface-num: Interface connected to the second CE.

Description

Using the ccc interface out-interface command, you can create a local CCC connection. Using the undo ccc command, you can delete the local CCC connection.

The supported interfaces include serial, asynchronous serial, ATM, Ethernet, VE, and GE interfaces, as well as ATM, Ethernet, and GE sub-interfaces.


For a serial, asynchronous serial, Ethernet, GE, or VE interface, CCC encapsulation defaults to link layer encapsulation and the command does not have any parameter in this case. This is also applies to the CCC encapsulation on an Ethernet sub-interface or GE sub-interface. For an ATM sub-interface, CCC encapsulation defaults to ATM AAL5. In this case, the command can bring with it a parameter indicating whether the encapsulation is ATM AAL5 or ATM CELL.

Example

Create a local CCC connection clink, with two CEs connected respectively to Ethernet0/0/0 and Ethernet2/0/0.

[3Com] ccc clink interface serial0/0/0 out-interface Ethernet 2/0/0

debugging mpls l2vpn Syntax

debugging mpls l2vpn { all | advertisement | error | event | connections [ interface interface-name | interface-type interface-num ] }

undo debugging mpls l2vpn { all | advertisement | error | event | connections [ interface interface-name | interface-type interface-num ] }

View

User view

Parameter

all: Enables/Disables all L2VPN debugging.

advertisement: Enables/Disables BGP/LDP notify information debugging of L2VPN.

error: Enables/Disables L2VPN error information debugging.

event: Enables/Disables L2VPN event information debugging.

connections: Enables/Disables connection information debugging.

interface-type interface-num: Specifies CE interface for information connection debugging.

Description

Using the debugging mpls l2vpn command, you can view L2VPN link information. Using the undo debugging mpls l2vpn command, you can disable the debug function.

Example<3Com> debugging mpls l2vpn all

display ccc Syntax

display ccc [ ccc-name | type [ local | remote ] ]

View

Any view

MPLS L2VPN CCC Configuration Commands 805

Parameter

ccc-name: Name of the connection to be displayed.

local: Displays local CCC connection only.

remote: Displays remote CCC connection only.

Description

Using the display ccc command, you can view CCC connection information.

Example

Display CCC connection information.

[3Com] display ccc c-link

static-lsp egress l2vpn Syntax

static-lsp egress lsp-name l2vpn incoming-interface interface-type interface-num in-label in-label

undo static-lsp egress lsp-name l2vpn

View

MPLS view

Parameter

lsp-name: LSP name

interface-type Interface-num: Interface type and interface number

in-label-value: Inbound label value, in range of 16~1024

Description

Using the static-lsp egress l2vpn command, you can configure a static LSP used in L2VPN for egress LSR. Using the undo static-lsp egress l2vpn command, you can delete an LSP used in L2VPN of egress LSR.

Two LSPs (one in each direction) should be created in advance before creating remote CCC connection.

For related commands, see static-lsp ingress l2vpn and debugging mpls.

Example

Add the static LSP bj-sh at egress LSR.

[3Com-mpls] static-lsp egress bj-sh l2vpn incoming-interface serial8/0/0 in-label 233

static-lsp ingress l2vpn Syntax

static-lsp ingress lsp-name { l2vpn | destination ip_addr } { nexthop next-hop-addr | outgoing-interface interface-type interface-num } out-label out-label

undo static-lsp ingress lsp-name l2vpn


View

MPLS view

Parameter

lsp-name: LSP name

next-hop-addr: Next hop address


out-label-value: Outbound label value, in range of 16~1024

Description

Using the static-lsp egress l2vpn command, you can configure a static LSP used in L2VPN for ingress LSR. Using the undo static-lsp egress l2vpn command, you can delete an LSP used in L2VPN of ingress LSR.

With this command, you can configure a static LSP for ingress LSR, as well as setting preference and measurement value for it.

Two LSPs (one in each direction) should be created in advance before creating remote CCC connection.

For related commands, see static-lsp egress lvpn, static-lsp transit, and debugging mpls.

Example

Add the static LSP with destination address 202.25.38.1 at ingress LSR.

[3Com-mpls] static-lsp ingress bj-sh destination 202.25.38.1 24 nexthop 202.55.25.33 out-label 237

static-lsp transit l2vpn Syntax

static-lsp transit lsp-name l2vpn incoming-interface interface-type interface-num in-label in-label { nexthop next-hop-addr | outgoing-interface interface-type interface-num } out-label out-label

undo static-lsp transit lsp-name l2vpn

View

MPLS view

Parameter

lsp-name: LSP name


next-hop-addr: Next hop address

in-label-value: Inbound label value, in range of 16~1024

out-label-value: Outbound label value, in range of 16~1024

SVC MPLS L2VPN Configuration Commands 807

Description

Using the static-lsp transit command, you can configure a static LSP used in L2VPN for transit LSR. Using the undo static-lsp transit command, you can delete an LSP used in L2VPN of transit LSR.

Two LSPs (one in each direction) should be created in advance and configured to the transit LSR before creating remote CCC connection.

For related commands, see static-lsp egress l2vpn and static-lsp ingress l2vpn.

Example

Add a static LSP used in 12vpn for the Serial0/0/0 of transit LSR, with inbound label being 123 and outbound label being 253.

[3Com-mpls] static-lsp transit bj-sh l2vpn incoming-interface serial0/0/0 in-label 123 nexthop 202.34.114.7 out-label 253

SVC MPLS L2VPN Configuration Commands

display mpls static-l2vc Syntax

display mpls static-l2vc [ interface interface-type interface -num ]

View

Any view

Parameter

interface-type interface -num: Interface type and interface number

Description

Using the display mpls static-l2vc command, you can view the connection information of static MPLS L2VPN.

Example

Display basic information of static connection.

[3Com-Ethernet1/0/1] display mpls static-l2vctotal connections: 1, 0 up, 1 downce-intf state destination tr-label rcv-label tnl-type tnl-indexEthernet1/0/1 down 192.1.1.1 222 111 -- 0

[3Com] display mpls static-l2vc interface ethernet1/0/1CE-interface: Ethernet1/0/1 is up, VC State: down, Destination: 192.1.1.1,transmit-vpn-label: 222, receive-vpn-label: 111,tunnel type: --, tunnel index: 0


mpls static-l2vc Syntax

mpls static-l2vc destination destination-ip-address transmit-vpn-label transmit-label-value receive-vpn-label receive-label-value

View

Interface view

Parameter

destination-ip-address: ROUTER ID of destination router.

transmit-label-value: Transmit-label value of VPN.

receive-label-value: Receive-label value of VPN.

Description

Using the mpls static-l2vc command, you can create an SVC MPLS L2VPN connection. Using the undo mpls static-l2vc command, you can delete the connection.

Example

Create SVC MPLS L2VPN connection.

[3Com-s1/1/0] mpls static-l2vc destination 192.1.1.1 transmit-vpn-label 333 receive-vpn-label 111

Martini MPLS L2VPN Configuration Commands

display mpls l2vc Syntax

display mpls l2vc [ interface interface-type interface-num | verbose ]

View

Any view

Parameter


interface-type interface-num: Name of the interface connected with CE.

Description

Using the display mpls l2vc command, you can view the VC information in LDP mode.

Example

None

mpls l2vc Syntax

mpls l2vc ip-address vc-id

Kompella MPLS L2VPN Configuration Commands 809

undo mpls l2vc

View

Interface view

Parameter

ip-address: lsr-id address of peer PE.

vc-id: Connected VC ID.

Description

Using the mpls l2vc command, you can create an LDP connection. Using the undo mpls l2vc command, you can delete the connection.

Supporting interface types: Serial, Asy Serial, POS, ATM, ATM subinterface, Ethernet, Ethernet subinterface, VE, GE, GE subinterface.

Enable MPLS L2VPN and encapsulate CCC on the interface before using this command.

For the related command, see mpls l2vpn and ccc.

Example

Create LDP connection.

[3Com-Ethernet3/0/0] mpls l2vc 10.0.0.11

Kompella MPLS L2VPN Configuration Commands

ce Syntax

ce name [ id id range range ] [ default-offset offset ] ]

undo ce name

View

MPLS L2VPN view

Parameter

name: CE name, unique in the current PE VPN.

id: CE ID, unique in VPN, represents a CE, ranging from 1 to 65535.

offset:Specifies default offset value of the original CE.

range: CE range, in other words, the maximum CE number local CE can connect with, ranging from 1 to 100. Default value is 10.


Description

Using the ce command, you can create CE or modify CE range. Using the undo ce command, you can delete CE.

After CE is created, system will create a CE mode and all the configurations of CE will be performed in this mode.

To facilitate VPN expansion, CE range can be configured larger than the real capacity. But it’s a waste of identifier because system will distribute an identifier block as large as the CE range.

If the CE range is smaller than need in VPN expansion, for example, the CE range is 10 while the needed CE number is 20, you can modify the CE range to 20.

For the related command, see mpls l2vpn encapsulation, connection.

Example

Create a CE for vpna, named “Marlborough,” with CEID being 1, range default value being 10.

[3Com]mpls l2vpn[3Com] mpls l2vpn vpna encapsulation ppp[3Com-mpls-l2vpn-vpna] ce marlborough id 1[3Com-mpls-l2vpn-ce-vpna-marlborough]

connection Syntax

connection [ ce-offset offset ] { interface interface-type interface-num }

undo connection [ ce-offset offset ] { interface interface-type interface-num }

View

MPLS L2VPN CE view

Parameter

offset: Specifies remote CE ID for L2VPN connection in establishing local connection

interface-type interface-num: Specifies CE interface in establishing remote connection.

Description

Using the connection command, you can create a CE connection. Using the undo connection command, you can delete a CE connection.

Configure RD for MPLS L2VPN first before establishing a CE connection.

For related commands, see mpls l2vpn encapsulation and ccc.

Example

Establish a CE connection.

[3Com] mpls l2vpn vpna[3Com-l2vpn-vpna] ce ce-a id 1 range 4[3Com-l2vpn-vpna-ce-ce-a] connection s0/0/0 ce-offset 2


display bgp l2vpn Syntax

display bgp l2vpn { all | peer | route-distinguisher }

View

Any view

Parameter

all: All L2VPN information in local address family.

peer: Information of the specified BGP peer.

route-distinguisher: Information of the specified VPN RD.

Description

Using the display bgp l2vpn all command, you can view system operating information and all L2VPN information.

Example

Display all L2VPN information.

[3Com] display bgp l2vpn all

BGP local router ID is 172.16.1.5 , Origin codes: i - IGP, e - EGP, ? - incompletebgp.l2vpn: 3 destinations CE ID Label Offset Label Base nexthop pref as-path

Route Distinguisher: 100:1 2 1 800000 1.1.1.1 100 I 200 600 3 1 500000 1.1.1.1 100 I 200 600

Route Distinguisher: 100:2 1 1 700000 1.1.1.1 100 I 200 600

display mpls l2vpnforwarding-info

Syntax

display mpls l2vpn forwarding-info [ vc-label ] interface interface-type interface-num

View

Any view

Parameter

vclabel: VC label

interface-type interface-num: Interface type and interface number


Description

Using the display mpls l2vpn forwarding-info command, you can view the L2VPN information under a specific interface.

Example

Display the L2VPN information under a specific interface.

[3Com] display mpls l2vpn forwarding-info interface serial1/0/0VCLABEL TUNNELTYPE ENTRYTYPE OUTINTERFACE OUTSLOT TOKEN CTRLWORD102402 LSP SEND Serial1 0 0 FALSERecord(s) Found.

l2vpn-family Syntax

l2vpn-family

undo l2vpn-family

View

BGP view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the l2vpn-family command, you can create an L2VPN address family view. Using the undo l2vpn-family command, you can delete the L2VPN address family view.

By default, it is BGP unicast view.

Using this command, you can enter L2VPN address family view.

Execute the undo l2vpn-family command to exit multicast extended address family view. Delete all the configurations in this address family and back to BGP unicast view.

Example

Create L2VPN address family view.

[3Com] bgp 100[3Com-bgp] l2vpn-family[3Com-bgp-af-l2vpn]

mpls l2vpn Syntax

mpls l2vpn

undo mpls l2vpn

View

System view


Parameter

None

Description

Using the mpls l2vpn command, you can enable L2VPN. Using the undo mpls l2vpn command, you can disable L2VPN.

Enable MPLS before using this command.

For the related commands, see mpls and mpls lsr-id.

Example

Enter MPLS view, then configure LSR ID and enable MPLS.

[3Com] undo mpls[3Com-mpls] mpls lsr-id 10.0.0.1[3Com] mpls

Enable L2VPN.

[3Com] mpls l2vpn

mpls l2vpnencapsulation

Syntax

mpls l2vpn vpn-name encapsulation { atm-aal5 | ethernet | fr | vlan | hdlc | ppp }

undo mpls l2vpn vpn-name

View

System view

Parameter

vpn-name: Unique VPN name in PE with 1 to 20 bytes.

atm-aal5 | ethernet | fr | vlan | hdlc | ppp: VPN encapsulation types. The CCC encapsulation type on CE interface must keep accordance with that of VPN when creating BGP L2VPN connection. Otherwise, the connection can not be performed normally.

Description

Using the mpls l2vpn encapsulation command, you can create Kompella MPLS L2VPN and specify encapsulation mode. Using the undo mpls l2vpn encapsulation command, you can remove the encapsulation.

Create Kompella MPLS L2VPN after global enable MPLS L2VPN.

After creating Kompella MPLS L2VPN, system will create a L2VPN mode, all the parameters of which are configured in L2VPN mode.

For related commands, see ce and mtu.

Example

Create a Kompella MPLS L2VPN, named “3Com”, with encapsulation type being vlan:


[3Com] mpls l2vpn 3Com encapsulation vlan

mtu Syntax

mtu mtu

View

L2VPN view

Parameter

mtu: Layer2 MTU value of VPN. MTU is defaulted as 1500.

Description

Using the mtu command, you can configure MTU of Kompella MPLS L2VPN.

When configuring VPN layer2 mtu, the mtu value of the same VPN on different PEs must be the consistent in the whole SP network. Otherwise, VPN will not work normally.

For the related command, see mpls l2vpn encapsulation.

Example

Configure the mtu of VPN “3Com” as 1000.

[3Com-l2vpn-3Com] mtu 1000

peer enable Syntax

peer { group-name | peer-address } enable


View

L2VPN address family view

Parameter

group-name: Peer group name, specifying the whole peer group.

peer-address: IP address of peer, specifying some specified peer.

Description

Using the peer enable command, you can activate specified peer (group) in L2VPN address family view. Using the undo peer enable command, you can deactivate specified peer (group) in L2VPN address family view.

By default, unicast peer (group) of IPv4 address family is activated, while other peer (groups) are deactivated.

Example

Activate the peer (group) 192 in the L2VPN address family view.

[3Com-bgp] peer 1.1.1.1 as-number 100[3Com-bgp] l2vpn-family[3Com-bgp-af-l2vpn] peer 1.1.1.1 enable

MPLS TE Configuration Commands 815

MPLS TE Configuration Commands

add hop Syntax

add hop ip-address1 [ strict | loose ] [ after ip-address2 ]

View

Explicit path view

Parameter

ip-address1: IP address for the node to be added, which can be the interface address or the router ID.

ip-address2: IP address before ip-address1.

strict: Next hop and local node must be in direct-connect mode.

loose: Next hop and local node can be in the mode other than direct-connect.

Description

Using the add hop command, you can add a node in the explicit path view.

Example

Add a node into the explicit path.

[3Com] mpls te explicit-path 3Com enable[3Com-mpls-te-expl-path-3Com] add hop 10.0.0.1 after 10.0.0.2 loose

debugging mpls rsvp-te Syntax

debugging mpls rsvp-te { all | error | path | ptear | resv | rtear | rconf | hello | perr | rerr | encdec | socket | traffic-control | main | tool }

undo debugging mpls rsvp-te { all | error | path | ptear | resv | rtear | rconf | hello | perr | rerr | encdec | socket | traffic-control | main | tool }

View

User view

Parameter

all: Enables alarming of all levels.

error: Enables error-level alarming.

path: Enables path-level alarming.

ptear: Enables path tear-level alarming.

resv: Enables resv-level alarming.

rtear: Enables resv tear-level alarming.


rconf: Enables resv conf-level alarming.

hello: Enables hello-level alarming.

perr: Enables path error-level alarming.

rerr: Enables Resv error-level alarming.

encdec: Enables CODEC-level alarming.

socket: Enables socket-level alarming.

traffic-control: Enables traffic control-level alarming.

main: Enables main-level alarming.

tool: Enables alarming for auxiliary modules (for example timers).

Description

Using the debugging mpls rsvp-te command, you can enable alarming for all RSVP-TE modules. Using the undo debugging mpls rsvp-te command, you can disable alarming for all RSVP-TE modules.

By default, debugging is disabled.

Example

Enable alarming for all RSVP-TE modules.

<3Com> debugging mpls rsvp-te all

delete hop Syntax

delete hop ip-address

View

Explicit path view

Parameter

ip-address: IP address for the node to be deleted

Description

Using the delete hop command, you can delete a node in the explicit path view.

Example

Delete a node.

[3Com] mpls te explicit-path 3Com enable[3Com-mpls-te-expl-path-3Com] delete hop 10.0.0.1

display mpls rsvp-te Syntax

display mpls rsvp-te { interface interface-type interface-number }

View

Any view


Parameter

interface-type: Specifies interface type.

interface-number: Specified interface number.

Description

Using the display mpls rsvp-te command, you can view RSVP interface information.

By default, information of all RSVP interfaces will be displayed.

Example

Display information of all RSVP interfaces.

[3Com-Ethernet0] display mpls rsvp-teDisplay MPLS RSVP-TE config information LSR ID: 1.1.1.1 RSVP-TE is enable RSVP HELLO is disable RSVP RCONF is disable Default RSVP style is SE HELLO interval is 3 second HELLO lost times is 3 PATH and RESV message refresh interval is 30 second PATH and RESV message resent times is 3Blockade keep times is 4# Display information of the interface Ethernet0/0/0. [3Com] display mpls rsvp-te interface e0/0/0IF Name Status Total-BW Used-BW Hello NbrEthernet0/0/0 DOWN 75000k 0k NO 0

display mpls rsvp-teestablished

Syntax

display mpls rsvp-te established [ interface interface-type interface-number ]

View

Any view

Parameter


interface-number: Specifies interface number.

Description

Using the display mpls rsvp-te established command, you can view LSP and bandwidth information for RSVP.

By default, the filtering rule and bandwidth of all RSVP interfaces will be displayed.

Example

Display LSP and bandwidth of all RSVP interfaces.

[3Com] display mpls rsvp-te established


display mpls rsvp-tepeer

Syntax

display mpls rsvp-te peer [ interface interface-type interface-number ]

View

Any view

Parameter


interface-number: Specifies interface number.

Description

Using the display mpls rsvp-te peer command, you can view peer information for RSVP.

By default, the peer information of all RSVP interfaces will be displayed.

Example

Display the peer information of all RSVP interfaces.

[3Com] display mpls rsvp-te peer

display mpls rsvp-tepath

Syntax

display mpls rsvp-te path [ destination ip-address | lsp-id ip-address | source ip-address | tunnel-id ip-address | verbose]

View

Any view

Parameter

ip-address: Specifies an ip address.

verbose: Detail information to display.

Description

Using the display mpls rsvp-te path command, you can view path information for RSVP.

Example

Display path information of all RSVP interfaces.

[3Com] display mpls rsvp-te path

display mpls rsvp-te resv Syntax

display mpls rsvp-te resv [ destination ip-address | lsp-id ip-address | source ip-address | tunnel-id ip-address | verbose]

View

Any view


Parameter

ip-address: Specifies IP address.


Description

Using the display mpls rsvp-te resv command, you can view reserved resources of RSVP.

By default, the reserved resources of all RSVP interfaces will be displayed.

Example

Display the reserved resources of all RSVP interfaces.

[3Com] display mpls rsvp-te resv

display mpls teexplicit-path

Syntax

display mpls te explicit-path [ path-name ]

View

Any view

Parameter

path-name: Specifies explicit path name.

Description

Using the display mpls te explicit-path command, you can view explicit path information.

Example

Display explicit path information of the router.

[3Com] display mpls te explicit-pathip explicit-path ID : 200, name : test-path-1, status : enable

1: next-address 3.3.28.3 strict2: next-address 3.3.27.3 strict

Table 2 Display information of display mpls te explicit-path

display mpls telink-administration

admission-control

Syntax

display mpls te link-administration admission-control [ interface interface-type interface-num ]

View

Any view

Parameter


Display information Descriptionnext-address 3.3.28.3 The first IP address on the explicit pathnext-address 3.3.27.3 The second IP address on the explicit path


interface-num: Specifies interface number.

Description

Using the display mpls te link-administration admission-control command, you can view local tunnels and their parameters (for example, priority, bandwidth, ingress, egress and status).

By default, the admission control information of all RSVP interfaces will be displayed.

For the related command, see display mpls te link-administration bandwidth-distribution.

Example

Display the admission control information of all RSVP interfaces.

[3Com] display mpls te link-administration admission-controlSystem Information::CrLsp Count: 4CrLsp Selected: 4CrLsp ID UP IF DOWN IF PRIORITY BW (kbps)10.106.0.6:1 AT1/0/0.2 - 0/0 010.106.0.6:2 Et4/0/1 - 1/1 010.106.0.6:3 Et4/0/1 Et4/0/2 1/13000 10.106.0.6:4 AT1/0/0.2 AT0/0/0.2 1/1 3000

Table 3 Display Information of Display mpls te link-administration admission-control

display mpls telink-administration

bandwidth-distribution

Syntax

display mpls te link-administration bandwidth-distribution [ interface interface-type interface-num ]

View

Any view

Parameter


interface-num: Specifies interface number.

Description

Using the display mpls te link-administration bandwidth-distribution command, you can view the information about the current link.

The displayed information may vary, in comparison with the actual configuration. It depends on the flooding mode.

Display information DescriptionCrLsp Count Total number of tunnels acceptedCrLsp Selected Count of qualified tunnelsCrLsp ID Tunnel IDUP IF Upstream interface for the tunnelDOWN IF Downstream interface for the tunnelPRIORITY Priority for establishing and keeping tunnelSTATE Administrative stateBW (kbps) Bandwidth, in kbps


By default, the link information of all RSVP interfaces will be displayed.

Example

Display MPLS TE link-administration bandwidth distribution.

[3Com] display mpls te link-administration bandwidth-distribution Ethernet4/0/1System Information::Links Count: 2Link ID: Et4/0/1 (10.1.0.6)Physical Bandwidth: 10000 kbits/secMax Reservable BW: 5000 kbits/sec (reserved:0% in, 60% out)Up Thresholds: 15 30 45 60 75 80 85 90 95 96 97 98 99 100 (default)Down Thresholds: 100 99 98 97 96 95 90 85 80 75 60 45 30 15 (default)Downstream Bandwidth Information (kbits/sec):KEEP PRIORITY LOCKED BW TOTAL LOCKED

0 0 01 3000 30002 0 30003 0 30004 0 30005 0 30006 0 30007 0 3000

display mpls te tunnel Syntax

display mpls te tunnel [ destination address ] [ up ][ down ] [ lsr-role { all | ingress | egress | remote | transit } ] [ name tun-name ] [ incoming-interface interface-type interface-number] [ outgoing-inteface interface-type interface-number ] [ interface interface-type interface-number ] [ tunnel-identifier tun-id | ip-address ] [verbose]

View

Any view

Parameter

destination address: Displays the tunnels with this specified destination address.

up: Displays the tunnels in UP state.

down: Displays the tunnels in DOWN state.

lsp-role { all | ingress | egress | remote | transit }: Displays the tunnels with specified role (all, ingress, egress, remote and transmit).

name tun-name: Displays the tunnel information with a specified name. If this parameter is selected, the tunnel name will be got from the interface description. Otherwise, tunnel name is contained in signaling messages and will be got by all hops along the explicit path.

incoming-interface: Displays the tunnels using the specified ingress.

outgoing-interface: Displays the tunnels using the specified egress.

interface: Displays the tunnels using the specified ingress or egress.


tunnel-identifier: Displays the tunnel information with a specified ID.


Description

Using the display mpls te tunnel command, you can view tunnel information.

ExampleDisplay MPLS TE Tunnel.

[3Com] display mpls te tunnelTotal Tunnel Number: 1TunnelID 10.10.10.10-1,TunnelName test-tunnel-1 on Ingress 10.10.10.10,Primary 1.1.1.1:1 10.10.10.10 - eth1/1/0down downReoptimized 1.1.1.1:10 10.10.10.10 - eth1/2/0up upbackup 1.1.1.1:2 10.10.10.10 - eth1/3/0down downordinary 1.1.1.1:3 10.10.10.10 - eth1/2/0down up

Table 4 Display Information of display mpls te tunnel

display mpls te tunnelcommit-last

Syntax

display mpls te tunnel commit-last tun-num

View

Any view

Parameter

tun-num: Specifies tunnel number.

Description

Using the display mpls te tunnel commit-last command, you can view the latest tunnel configuration information.

Example

Display the latest tunnel configuration information.

[3Com] display mpls te tunnel commit-last 0/0/0 Tunnel0 Status: Down Loop detection: Enable Record label: Disable Resv Style: SE Explicit path: xhy Tunnel bandwidth: 200(kbps) Destination: 100.1.1.1

Display information DescriptionTotal Tunnel Number Count of tunnels selected Tunnel ID Tunnel ID in the tunnel headerTunnel Name Tunnel name in the tunnel headerDESTINATION Destination router ID UP IF Upstream interface for the tunnelDOWN IF Downstream interface for the tunnelADMIN STATE Administrative stateOperStatus Operating state


display mpls te tunnelrunning

Syntax

display mpls te tunnel running tun-num

View

Any view

Parameter

tun-num: Specifies tunnel number.

Description

Using the display mpls te tunnel running command, you can view the information of active tunnels. Only configuration information of those tunnels where LSP has been created will be displayed, excluding those for which configuration result has been submitted, but no LSP has been created.

Example

Display the configuration information of the CR-LSPs created successfully.

[3Com] display mpls te tunnel running 0 Tunnel0 Status: Down Loop detection: Enable Record label: Disable Resv Style: SE Explicit path: xhy Tunnel bandwidth: 200(kbps) Destination: 100.1.1.1

display mpls te tunnelstatistics

Syntax

display mpls te tunnel statistics

View

Any view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the display mpls te tunnel statistics command, you can view tunnel statistics.

Example

Display MPLS TE tunnel statistics.

[3Com] display mpls te tunnel statisticsIngress: 1 ( 0 ready, 0 modifying, 1 setuping, 0 failed ) Transit: 0 Egress: 0

modify hop Syntax

modify hop ip-address1 ip-address2 [ strict | loose ]


View

Explicit path view

Parameter

ip-address1: Current IP address.

ip-address2: IP address after modification.

strict: Next hop and local node must be in direct-connect mode.

loose: Next hop and local node can be in the mode other than direct-connect.

Description

Using the modify hop command, you can specify or modify the addresses of the nodes along explicit path in the explicit path view by index.

Example

Modify node information.

[3Com-mpls-te-expl-path-3Com] modify hop 10.0.0.1 10.0.0.2 loose

mpls rsvp-te Syntax

mpls rsvp-te

undo mpls rsvp-te

View

System view, interface view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the mpls rsvp-te command, you can enable RSVP-TE feature. Using the undo mpls rsvp-te command, you can disable RSVP-TE feature.

MPLS feature must be enabled before using the command.

Disabling RSVP-TE feature in the system view will disable the feature at all interfaces.

By default, RSVP-TE feature is disabled.

Example

Enable globally RSVP-TE feature.

[3Com] mpls rsvp-te

Enable RSVP-TE feature at the interface.

[3Com] interface serial 6/0/0[3Com-Serial6/0/0] mpls rsvp-te


mpls rsvp-teblockade-multiplier

Syntax

mpls rsvp-te blockade-multiplier times

undo mpls rsvp-te blockade-multiplier

View

System view

Parameter

times: RSVP refreshing period multiplier for blockaded state timeout, in the range of 1~255. By default, it is 3.

Description

Using the mpls rsvp-te blockade-multiplier command, you can set the multiplier for blockaded state timeout. Blockade_Expired_Time = Kb ¥ refresh-time. Using the undo mpls rsvp-te blockade-multiplier command, you can restore the default value.

For the related commands, see mpls rsvp-te timer refresh.

Example

Set the multiplier as 5.

[3Com] mpls rsvp-te blockade-multiplier 5

Restore the default multiplier.

[3Com] undo mpls rsvp-te blockade-multiplier

mpls rsvp-te hello Syntax

mpls rsvp-te hello

undo mpls rsvp-te hello

View

System view, interface view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the mpls rsvp-te hello command, you can enable Hello mechanism to detect RSVP peer. Using the undo mpls rsvp-te hello command, you can disable Hello mechanism.

By default, Hello mechanism is disabled.

Example

Enable Hello mechanism.

[3Com] mpls rsvp-te hello


mpls rsvp-te hello-lost Syntax

mpls rsvp-te hello-lost times

undo mpls rsvp-te hello-lost

View

System view

Parameter

times: Times value when no Hello response messages are received consecutively, in the range of 3~10. By default, it is 3.

Description

Using the mpls rsvp-te hello-lost command, you can the times value when no Hello response messages are received consecutively. When the times value is exceeded, the corresponding link is judged as faulty. Using the undo mpls rsvp-te hello-lost command, you can restore the default value.

For the related command, see mpls rsvp-te timer hello.

Example

Set the times value to 5 when no Hello response messages are received consecutively.

[3Com] mpls rsvp-te hello-lost 5

mpls rsvp-tekeep-multiplier

Syntax

mpls rsvp-te keep-multiplier times

undo mpls rsvp-te keep-multiplier

View

System view

Parameter

times: RSVP refreshing period multiplier for PSB and RSB timeout, in the range of 1~255. By default, it is 3.

Description

Using the mpls rsvp-te keep-multiplier command, you can set the multiplier for PSB and RSB timeout. In calculating timed refreshing of PSB and RSB, Expired_Time = (keep-multiplier + 0.5) ¥ 1.5 ¥ refresh-time. Using the undo mpls rsvp-te keep-multiplier command, you can restore the default value.

For the related command, see mpls rsvp-te timer refresh.

Example

Set the multiplier as 5.

[3Com] mpls rsvp-te keep-multiplier 5


Restore the default multiplier.

[3Com] undo mpls rsvp-te keep-multiplier

mpls rsvp-te resvconfirm Syntax

mpls rsvp-te resvconfirm

undo mpls rsvp-te resvconfirm

View

Any view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the mpls rsvp-te resvconfirm command, you can start the confirmation mechanism for resource reservation on a node. Using the undo mpls rsvp-te resvconfirm command, you can close reservation confirmation mechanism.

By default, reservation confirmation mechanism is disabled.

Example

Enable and disable reservation confirmation mechanism.

[3Com] mpls rsvp-te resvconfirm[3Com] undo mpls rsvp-te resvconfirm

mpls rsvp-te timer hello Syntax

mpls rsvp-te timer hello seconds

undo mpls rsvp-te timer hello

View

System view

Parameter

seconds: Time interval for refreshing Hello messages, in the range of 1 to 60 seconds. By default, it is 3 seconds.

Description

Using the mpls rsvp-te timer hello command, you can define time interval for refreshing Hello messages. Using the undo mpls rsvp-te timer hello command, you can restore the default value.

For the related commands, see mpls rsvp-te hello and mpls rsvp-te hello-lost.

Example

Set Hello message refreshing period as 5 seconds.

[3Com] mpls rsvp-te timer hello 5


Restore the default value.

[3Com] undo mpls rsvp-te timer hello

mpls rsvp-te timerrefresh

Syntax

mpls rsvp-te timer refresh seconds

undo mpls rsvp-te timer refresh

View

System view

Parameter

seconds: Time interval for refreshing Path/Resv messages, in the range of 1~65535 seconds. By default, it is 30 seconds.

Description

Using the mpls rsvp-te timer refresh command, you can define refreshing period for Path and Resv messages of the node. Using the undo mpls rsvp-te timer refresh command, you can restore the default values.

For the related command, see mpls rsvp-te keep-multiplier.

Example

Set refreshing period for Path and Resv messages as 60 seconds.

[3Com] mpls rsvp-te timer refresh 60

Restore the default refreshing period.

[3Com] undo mpls rsvp-te timer refresh

mpls-te enable Syntax

mpls-te enable

undo mpls-te

View

Area view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the mpls-te enable command, you can enable TE function in OSPF area. Using the undo mpls-te command, you can cancel TE function in OSPF area.

CAUTION: ■ By default, TE function is disabled in OSPF area.

■ TE function cannot be enabled until Opaque function is enabled for OSPF procedure.


For related command, see opaque-capability enable.

Example

Enable TE function in OSPF area. [3Com-ospf-100] area 1[3Com-ospf-100-area-0.0.0.1] mpls-te enable

mpls te Syntax

mpls te

undo mpls te

View

MPLS view, interface view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the mpls te command, you can enable MPLS TE feature. Using the undo mpls te command, you can disable MPLS TE feature.

You need to enable this feature both globally and on the interface, and then the interface will flood this resource information to the right IGP link state database and accept TE tunnel signaling request.

By default, MPLS TE feature is disabled.

Example

Globally enable MPLS TE feature.

[3Com-mpls] mpls te

Enable MPLS TE feature at the interface Ethernet1/0/0.

[3Com] interface Ethernet1/0/0[3Com-Ethernet1/0/0] mpls te

mpls te bandwidth Syntax

mpls te bandwidth bandwidth

undo mpls te bandwidth

View

Tunnel view

Parameter

bandwidth: Bandwidth for the tunnel, in kbps. By default, it is 0.


Description

Using the mpls te bandwidth command, you can specify bandwidth for MPLS TE tunnel. Using the undo mpls te bandwidth command, you can restore the default value.

The maximum reservable bandwidth must be greater than sum of the bandwidth of all tunnels.

For related commands, see mpls te max-reservable-bandwidth.

Example

Set the tunnel bandwidth as 8kbps.

[3Com-tunnel1/0/0] mpls te bandwidth 8

mpls te commit Syntax

mpls te commit

View

Tunnel view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the mpls te commit command, you can submit current configuration result for the tunnel interface to MPLS.

The configuration will not take effect and no LSP will be set up until the configured tunnel feature is submitted. If you modify a feature option and submit the result for several times in one option, only the last modification will take effect.

You can use the display mpls te commit-last command to view the latest configuration result.

For the related commands, see display mpls te commit-last.

Example

Submit current configuration result for the tunnel interface to MPLS.

[3Com-tunnel1/0/0] mpls te commit

mpls te explicit-path Syntax

mpls te explicit-path path-name [ enable | disable ]

undo mpls te explicit-path path-name

View

System view


Parameter

path-name: Path name

enable: Current path is available.

disable: Current path is unavailable. This setting prevents the path from being used during configuration.

Description

Using the mpls te explicit-path command, you can enter the explicit path view and create an explicit path or modify a specific path. The explicit is a list of IP addresses, with each entry representing a node or a link. Using the undo mpls te explicit-path command, you can delete a specified path.

By default, no explicit is specified.

For related commands, see mpls te path explicit-path.

Example

Enter the explicit path “3Com” view.

[3Com] mpls te explicit-path 3Com

mpls teflooding-thresholds

Syntax

mpls te flooding-thresholds { down | up } percent [ percent ] ...

undo mpls te flooding-thresholds [ down | up ]

View

Interface view

Parameter

down: Reservable bandwidth values available in descending order

up: Reservable bandwidth values available in ascending order

percent: Threshold level for flooding, in percentage, in the range of 1~100. For the up keyword: the values available include 15, 30, 45, 60, 75, 80, 85, 90, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99 and 100. For the down keyword, the values include 100, 99, 98, 97, 96, 95, 90, 85, 80, 75, 60, 45, 30 and 15.

Description

Using the mpls te flooding-thresholds command, you can define flooding threshold. Using the undo mpls te flooding-thresholds te loop-detection command, you can restore the default value.

If the reservable bandwidth available at the interface exceeds the preset threshold, it will trigger link state update messages being distributed among the network. Otherwise, the link state update messages are sent by flooding period.

For related commands, see mpls te timer periodic-flooding.


Example

None

mpls telink-administrative-

group

Syntax

mpls te link-administrative-group attribute

undo mpls te link-administrative-group

View

Interface view

Parameter

attribute: Link management group attribute, also called color, which is an integer in hexadecimal. It can be a constraint in matching physical path.

Description

Using the mpls te link-administrative-group command, you can configure link management group at the interface. Using the undo mpls te loop-detection command, you can remove the configuration.

By configuring link management group attribute, you can set up the explicit paths which match the requirements. For example, you can set the attribute of all interfaces along the LSP as 20.

By default, link management group is not configured.

Example

Configure link management group at the interface ethernet1/0/0 to 20.

[3Com-ethernet1/0/0] mpls te link-administrative-group 20

mpls te metric Syntax

mpls te metric metric

undo mpls te metric

View

Interface view

Parameter

metric: IGP cost for TE links. By default, it is 1.

Description

Using the mpls te metric command, you can configure IGP cost for TE links. Using the undo mpls te metric command, you can restore the default cost value.

Example

Configure the IGP cost at the interface tunnel1 as 20.

[3Com-tunnel1] mpls te metric 20


mpls te loop-detection Syntax

mpls te loop-detection

undo mpls te loop-detection

View

Tunnel view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the mpls te loop-detection command, you can indicate to run loop test in creating tunnels. Using the undo mpls te loop-detection command, you can remove loop test.

For signaling protocol, loop testing is optional.

By default, loop detection is disabled.

Example

Indicate to run loop test in creating tunnels.

[3Com-tunnel1] mpls te loop-detection

mpls temax-link-bandwidth

Syntax

mpls te max-link-bandwidth bandwidth

undo mpls te max-link-bandwidth

View

Interface view

Parameter

bandwidth: Maximum link bandwidth at the interface, in the range of 0~32000000bps. By default, it is the actual bandwidth of the physical interface.

Description

Using the mpls te max-link-bandwidth command, you can configure maximum link bandwidth at the interface. Using the undo mpls te max-link-bandwidth command, you can restore the default value.

Example

Set the maximum bandwidth at the interface as 64kbps.

[3Com-Ethernet1/0/0] mpls te max-link-bandwidth 64

mpls temax-reservable-bandwi

dth

Syntax

mpls te max-reservable-bandwidth bandwidth

undo mpls te max-reservable-bandwidth


View

Interface view

Parameter

bandwidth: The maximum link bandwidth at the interface, in the range of 0~32000000bps. By default, it is 75 percentage of the actual bandwidth at the interface.

Description

Using the mpls te max-reservable-bandwidth command, you can configure the reservable bandwidth at the interface. Using the undo mpls te max-reservable-bandwidth command, you can restore the default value.

The maximum reservable bandwidth at an interface should be greater than the sum of all tunnel bandwidth.

For related commands, see mpls te bandwidth.

Example

Set the maximum reservable bandwidth at an interface as 64kbps.

[3Com-Ethernet1/0/0] mpls te max-reservable-bandwidth 64

mpls te pathexplicit-path

Syntax

mpls te path explicit-path pathname

undo mpls te path explicit-path

View

Tunnel view

Parameter

path-name: Explicit path name.

Description

Using the mpls te path explicit-path command, you can configure explicit for a tunnel. Using the undo mpls te path explicit-path command, you can delete the route.

For related commands, see mpls te explicit-path.

Example[3Com-tunnel1] mpls te path explicit-path 3Com

mpls te record-label Syntax

mpls te record-label

undo mpls te record-label

View

Tunnel view


Parameter

None

Description

Using the mpls te record-label command, you can indicate to record actual route and label in creating tunnels. Using the undo mpls te record-label command, you can remove the setting.

For signaling protocol, recording actual route is optional. RSVP-TE can also record route labels.

By default, actual route is not recorded.

Example

Indicate to record actual route and label in creating tunnels.

[3Com-tunnel1] mpls te record-label

mpls te resv-style Syntax

mpls te resv-style [ ff | se ]

undo mpls te resv-style

View

Tunnel view

Parameter

ff: Selects FF (fixed filter) for resource reservation

se: Selects FF (shared explicit) for resource reservation

Description

Using the mpls te resv-style command, you can define resource reservation style in creating tunnels. Using the undo mpls te resv-style command, you can restore the default style.

By default, se is selected.

Only RSVP-TE protocol supports both FF and SE modes, so you must first indicate to run RSVP-TE protocol in creating tunnels before defining resource reservation style. Each LSP must be configured with a definite reservation style.

The FE type defines a distinct sender list (with IP address and LSP ID defined) and particular reservation style which is not shared with other senders for each sender. The FE type is applicable to concurrent but independent services which are from different senders.

In the SE type, only a single reservation style is defined for an explicit path, which can be shared by those definitely-listed senders Since the senders are contained in RESV messages and different labels are allocated with different receiver-sender pairs, so in this mode separate LSP can be established.


Example

Select SE type in creating CRLSP tunnels.

[3Com-tunnel1] mpls te signal-protocol rsvp-te[3Com-tunnel1] mpls te resv-style se

mpls te signal-protocolrsvp-te

Syntax

mpls te signal-protocol rsvp-te

View

Tunnel view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the mpls te signal-protocol rsvp-te command, you can set signaling protocol in creating tunnels as RSVP.

Example

Select RSVP in creating RSVP tunnels.

[3Com-tunnel] mpls te signal protocol cpldp

mpls te timerperiodic-flooding

Syntax

mpls te timer periodic-flooding seconds

undo mpls te timer periodic-flooding

View

MPLS view

Parameter

seconds: Flood period, in the range of 0~3600 seconds. By default, it is 180 seconds.

Description

Using the mpls te timer periodic-flooding command, you can define flooding period. Using the undo mpls te timer periodic-flooding command, you can restore the default value.

All interfaces send link state update messages by flooding period.

Example

Set flood period to 2000 seconds.

[3Com-mpls] mpls te timer periodic-flooding 2000

next hop Syntax

next hop ip-address [ strict | loose ]


View

Explicit path view

Parameter

ip-address: Next IP address along the explicit path

strict: The next hop and local node must be in direct-connect mode.

loose: The next hop and local node can be in the mode other than direct-connect.

Description

Using the next hop command, you can specify next IP address on the explicit path. Using the undo next hop command, you can delete the IP address specified.

By default, strict is selected.

Example

Specify the next IP address as 10.0.0.1.

[3Com-mpls-te-expl-path-3Com]] next hop 10.0.0.1 loose

tunnel-protocol mpls te Syntax

tunnel-protocol mpls te

View

Tunnel view

Parameter

None

Description

Using the tunnel-protocol mpls te command, you can set the Tunnel interface in CR-LSP tunnel mode.

When TE is disabled, all tunnel interfaces turns into GRE tunnel mode, in which, only GRE-related commands are visible and executable. While in CR-LSP tunnel mode, you can only see and execute CR-LSP-related commands.

The tunnel interface can be in multiple encapsulation types. By default, it is in GRE point-to-point mode.

For the related commands, see interface tunnel.

Example

Set up a tunnel between Routers Quidway1 and Quidway2, with encapsulation protocol being mpls te.

[3Com1-Tunnel3] tunnel-protocol mpls te[3Com2-Tunnel2] tunnel-protocol mpls te

view hop Syntax

view hop [ ip-address ]


View

Explicit path view

Parameter

ip-address: IP address of the node

Description

Using the view hop command, you can view node information.

Example

Display node information.

[3Com-mpls-te-expl-path-tandoon] view hopexplicit-path id : 0, name : xhy, status : enable

3 com com ref

Documents